THE MATHEMATICAL THEORY
OF
ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
C. F. CLAY, MANAGER.
ILontron : FETTER LANE, E.G.
ffilasgotn: 50, WELLINGTON STREET.
i i
ietpjtg: F. A. BROCKHAUS.
#eto gork: G. P. PUTNAM'S SONS.
antJ Calcutta: MAC MILL AN AND CO., LTD.
[All
rt'*<'n<'(L]
THE MATHEMATICAL THEORY
OF
ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
BY
J. H. JEANS, M.A., F.R.S.,
PROFESSOR OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS IN PRINCETON UNIVERSITY
Cambridge :
at the University Press
1908
PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A.
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
PREFACE.
rpHERE is a certain welldefined range in Electromagnetic Theory, which
every student of physics may be expected to have covered, with more
or less of thoroughness, before proceeding to the study of special branches
or developments of the subject. The present book is intended to give the
mathematical theory of this range of elect romagnetism, together with the
mathematical analysis required in its treatment.
The range is very approximately that of Maxwell's original Treatise, but
the present book is in many respects more elementary than that of Maxwell.
Maxwell's Treatise was written for the fullyequipped mathematician : the
present book is written more especially for the student, and for the physicist
of limited mathematical attainments.
The questions of mathematical analysis which are treated in the text
have been inserted in the places where they are first needed for the
development of the physical theory, in the belief that, in many cases,
the mathematical and physical theories illuminate one another by being
studied simultaneously. For example, brief sketches of the theories of
spherical, zonal and ellipsoidal harmonics are given in the chapter on
Special Problems in Electrostatics, interwoven with the study of harmonic
potentials and electrical applications: Stokes' Theorem is similarly given
in connexion with the magnetic vectorpotential, and so on. One result
of this arrangement is to destroy, at least in appearance, the balance of
the amounts of space allotted to the different parts of the subject. For
instance, more than half the book appears to be devoted to Electrostatics,
but this space will, perhaps, not seem excessive when it is noticed how
many of the pages in the Electrostatic part of the book are devoted to
nonelectrical subjects in applied mathematics (potential theory, theory of
stress, etc.), or in pure mathematics (Green's Theorem, harmonic analysis,
966
vi Preface
complex variable, Fourier's series, conjugate functions, curvilinear coordi
nates, etc.).
A number of examples, taken mainly from the usual Cambridge
examination papers, are inserted. These may provide problems for the
mathematical student, but it is hoped that they may also form a sort of
compendium of results for the physicist, shewing what types of problem
admit of exact mathematical solution. I have borrowed from Mr Whetham's
Experimental Electricity the plan of giving a few " References " at the end
of each chapter.
Any attempt to bring a book of this kind up to the boundaries of
existing knowledge would obviously be out of place, and I have felt
throughout that the nature of the book did not permit of much newness
or originality of treatment. Consequently the work of writing the book
has not been one of much interest : it was undertaken in the hope that it
would be of some service, however slight, to those engaged in the teaching
or study of mathematical physics.
It is again a pleasure to record my thanks to the officials of the
University Press for their unfailing vigilance and help during the printing
of the book.
J. H. JEANS.
PRINCETON.
December, 1907.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION.
PAGE
The three divisions of Electromagnetism 1
ELECTROSTATICS AND CURRENT ELECTRICITY.
CHAP.
I. Physical Principles 5
II. The Electrostatic Field of Force 24
III. Conductors and Condensers ....... 66
IV. Systems of Conductors 88
V. Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity . . . . . . 115
VI. The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field . . 138
VII. General Analytical Theorems 154
VIII. Methods for the Solution of Special Problems ... 182
IX. Steady Currents in Linear Conductors 295
X. Steady Currents in Continuous Media 330
MAGNETISM.
XI. Permanent Magnetism ........ 353
XII. Induced Magnetism 396
ELECTROMAGNETISM.
XIII. The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents . . 414
XIV. Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits .... 441
XV. Induction of Currents in Continuous Media .... 462
XVI. Dynamical Theory of Currents 474
XVII. Displacement Currents 495
XVIII. The Electromagnetic Theory of Light 513
Index . 532
ERRATA.
p. 31, third line below fig. 6.
For =  eR cos 6 . 00'=  eR (OP l  O'Pi) read =eR cos . 00' = eR (OPi  O'Pi).
p. 49, fourteenth line from top. For 45 read 30.
41 41
p. 52, second line from bottom. For nl = ^; read =  == .
jrA JrJi t: A. xL>
p. 65, last symbol on page. For )&. read )i.
p. 220, last two formulae, and first formula on p. 221. For 4?r read
INTRODUCTION.
THE THREE DIVISIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETISM.
1. THE fact that a piece of amber, on being rubbed, attracted to itself
other small bodies, was known to the Greeks, the discovery of this fact being
attributed to Thales of Miletus (640548 B.C.). A second fact, namely, that
a certain mineral ore (lodestone) possessed the property of attracting iron,
is mentioned by Lucretius. These two facts have formed the basis from
which the modern science of Electromagnetism has grown. It has been
found that the two phenomena are not isolated, but are insignificant units in
a vast and intricate series of phenomena. To study, and as far as possible
interpret, these phenomena is the province of Electromagnetism. And the
mathematical development of the subject must aim at bringing as large
a number of the phenomena as possible within the power of exact mathe
matical treatment.
2. The first great branch of the science of Electromagaetism is known
as Electrostatics. The second branch is commonly spoken of as Magnetism,
but is more accurately described as Magnetostatics. We may say that
Electrostatics has been developed from the single property of amber already
mentioned, and that Magnetostatics has been developed from the single
property of the lodestone. These two branches of Electromagnetism deal
solely with states of rest, not with motion or changes of state, and are
therefore concerned only with phenomena which can be described as statical.
The developments of the two statical branches of Electromagnetism, namely
Electrostatics and Magnetostatics, are entirely independent of one another.
The science of Electrostatics could have been developed if the properties of
the lodestone had never been discovered, and similarly the science of
Magnetostatics could have been developed without any knowledge of the
properties of amber.
The third branch of Electromagnetism, namely, Electrodynamics, deals
with the motion of electricity and magnetism, and it is in the development
of this branch that we first find that the two groups of phenomena of
electricity and magnetism are related to one another. The relation is
j. 1
2 Introduction
a reciprocal relation : it is found that magnets in motion produce the same
effects as electricity at rest, while electricity in motion produces the same
effects as magnets at rest. The third division of Electromagnetism, then,
connects the two former divisions of Electrostatics and Magnetostatics, and
is in a sense symmetrically placed with regard to them. Perhaps we may
compare the whole structure of Electromagnetism to an arch made of three
stones. The two side stones can be placed in position independently, neither
in any way resting on the other, but the third cannot be placed in position
until the two side stones are securely fixed. The third stone rests equally
on the two other stones and forms a connection between them.
3. In the present book, these three divisions will be developed in the
order in which they have been mentioned. The mathematical theory will be
identical, as regards the underlying physical ideas, with that given by
Maxwell in his Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, and in his various
published papers. The principal peculiarity which distinguished Maxwell's
mathematical treatment from that of all writers who had preceded him, was
his insistence on Faraday's conception of the energy as residing in the
medium. On this view, the forces acting on electrified or magnetised bodies
do not form the whole system of forces in action, but serve only to reveal
to us the presence of a vastly more intricate system of forces, which act
at every point of the ether by which the material bodies are surrounded.
It is only through the presence of matter that such a system of forces can
become perceptible to human observation, so that we have to try to
construct the whole system of forces from no data except those given by the
resultant effect of the forces on matter, where matter is present. As might
be expected, these data are not sufficient to give us full and definite knowledge
of the system of ethereal forces; a great number of systems of ethereal
forces could be constructed, each of which would produce the same effects on
matter as are observed. Of these systems, however, a single one seems so
very much more probable than any of the others, that it was unhesitatingly
adopted both by Maxwell and by Faraday, and has been followed by all
subsequent workers at the subject.
4. As soon as the step is once made of attributing the mechanical
forces acting on matter to a system of forces acting throughout the whole
ether, a further physical development is made not only possible but also
necessary. A stress in the ether may be supposed to represent either an
electric or a magnetic force, but cannot be both. Faraday supposed a stress
in the ether to be identical with electrostatic force, and the accuracy of this
view has been confirmed by all subsequent investigations. There is now
no possibility, in this scheme of the universe, of regarding magnetostatic
forces as evidence of simple stresses in the ether.
The three divisions of Electromagnetism 3
It has, however, been said that magnetostatic forces are found to be
produced by the motion of electric charges. Now if electric charges at rest
produce simple stresses in the ether, the motion of electric charges must be
accompanied by changes in the stresses in the ether. It is now possible to
identify magnetostatic force with change in the system of stresses in the
ether. This interpretation of magnetic force forms an essential part of
Maxwell's theory. If we compare the ether to an elastic material medium,
we may say that the electric forces must be interpreted as the statical
pressures and strains in the medium, which accompany the compression,
dilatation or displacement of the medium, while magnetic forces must be
interpreted as the pressures and strains in the medium caused by the motion
and momentum of the medium. Thus electrostatic energy must be regarded
as the potential energy of the medium, while magnetic energy is regarded as
kinetic energy. Maxwell has shewn that the whole series of electric and
magnetic phenomena may without inconsistency be interpreted as phenomena
produced by the motion of a medium, this motion being in conformity with
the laws of dynamics. More recently, Larmor has shewn how an imaginary
medium can actually be constructed, which shall produce all these phenomena
by its motion.
The question now arises : If magnetostatic forces are interpreted as
motion of the medium, what properties are we to assign to the magnetic
bodies from which these magnetostatic forces originate ? An answer sug
gested by Ampere and Weber needs but little modification to represent the
answer to which modern investigations have led. Recent experimental
researches shew that all matter must be supposed to consist, either partially
or entirely, of electric charges. This being so, the kinetic theory of matter
tells us that these charges will possess a certain amount of motion. Every
thing leads us to suppose that all magnetic phenomena can be explained by
the motion of these charges. If the motion of the charges is governed by a
regularity of a certain kind, the body as a whole will shew magnetic pro
perties. If this regularity does not obtain, the magnetic forces produced by
the motions of the individual charges will on the whole neutralise one
another, and the body will appear to be nonmagnetic. Thus on this view
the electricity and magnetism which at first sight appeared to exist inde
pendently in the universe, are resolved into electricity alone electricity
and magnetism become electricity at rest and electricity in motion.
This discovery of the ultimate identity of electricity and magnetism is
by no means the last word of the science of Electromagnetism. As far back
as the time of Maxwell and Faraday, it was recognised that the forces at
work in chemical phenomena must be regarded largely if not entirely, as
electrical forces. Later, Maxwell shewed light to be an electromagnetic
12
4 Introduction
phenomenon, so that the whole science of Optics became a branch of
Electromagnetism.
A still more modern view attributes all material phenomena to the action
of forces which are in their nature identical with those of electricity and mag
netism. Indeed, modern physics tends to regard the universe as a continuous
ocean of ether, in which material bodies are represented merely as peculiarities
in the etherformation. The study of the forces in this ether must therefore
embrace the dynamics of the whole universe. The study of these forces is
best approached through the study of the forces of electrostatics and magneto
statics, but does not end until all material phenomena have been discussed
from the point of view of ether forces. In one sense, then, it may be
said that the science of Electromagnetism deals with the whole material
universe.
CHAPTER I.
PHYSICAL PRINCIPLES.
THE FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTIONS OF ELECTROSTATICS.
I. State of Electrification of a Body.
5. WE proceed to a discussion of the fundamental conceptions which
form the basis of Electrostatics. The first of these is that of a state of
electrification of a body. When a piece of amber has been rubbed so that it
attracts small bodies to itself, we say that it is in a state of electrification
or, more shortly, that it is electrified.
Other bodies besides amber possess the power of attracting small bodies
after being rubbed, and are therefore susceptible of electrification. Indeed
it is found that all bodies possess this property, although it is less easily
recognised in the case of most bodies, than in the case of amber. For
instance a brass rod with a glass handle, if rubbed on a piece of silk or cloth,
will show the power to a marked degree. The electrification here resides in
the brass ; as will be explained immediately, the interposition of glass or
some similar substance between the brass and the hand is necessary in order
that the brass may retain its power for a sufficient time to enable us to
observe it. If we hold the instrument by the brass rod and rub the glass
handle we find that the same power is acquired by the glass.
II. Conductors and Insulators.
6. Let us now suppose that we hold the electrified brass rod in one hand
by its glass handle, and that we touch it with the other hand. We find that
after touching it its power of attracting small bodies will have completely
disappeared. If we immerse it in a stream of water or pass it through a
flame we find the same result. If on the other hand we touch it with
a piece of silk or a rod of glass, or stand it in a current of air, we find
that its power of attracting small bodies remains unimpaired, at any rate
for a time. It appears therefore that the human body, a flame or water
6 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
have the power of destroying the electrification of the brass rod when placed
in contact with it, while silk and glass and air do not possess this property.
It is for this reason that in handling the electrified brass rod, the substance
in direct contact with the brass has been supposed to be glass and not the
hand.
In this way we arrive at the idea of dividing all substances into two
classes according as they do or do not remove the electrification when touch
ing the electrified body. The class which remove the electrification are
called conductors, for as we shall see later, they conduct the electrification
away from the electrified body rather than destroy it altogether ; the class
which allow the electrified body to retain its electrification are called non
conductors or insulators. The classification of bodies into conductors and
insulators appears to have been first discovered by Stephen Gray (1696
1736).
At the same time it must be explained that the difference between
insulators and conductors is one of degree only. If our electrified brass rod
were left standing for a week in contact only with the air surrounding it and
the glass of its handle, we should find it hard to detect traces of electrifica
tion after this time the electrification would have been conducted away by
the air and the glass. So also if we had been able to immerse the rod in a
flame for a billionth of a second only, we might have found that it retained
considerable traces of electrification. It is therefore more logical to speak of
good conductors and bad conductors than to speak of conductors and insula
tors. Nevertheless the difference between a good and a bad conductor is so
enormous, that for our present purpose we need hardly take into account the
feeble conducting power of a bad conductor, and may without serious incon
sistency, speak of a bad conductor as an insulator. There is, of course, nothing
to prevent us imagining an ideal substance which has no conducting power
at all. It will often simplify the argument to imagine such a substance,
although we cannot realise it in nature.
It may be mentioned here that of all substances the metals are by very
much the best conductors. Next come solutions of salts and acids, and lastly
as very bad conductors (and therefore as good insulators) come oils, waxes,
silk, glass and such substances as sealing wax, shellac, indiarubber. Gases
under ordinary conditions are good insulators. Indeed it is worth noticing
that if this had not been so, we should probably never have become acquainted
with electric phenomena at all, for all electricity would be carried away by
conduction through the air as soon as it was generated. Flames, however,
conduct well, and, for reasons which will be explained later, all gases become
good conductors when in the presence of radium or of socalled radioactive
substances. Distilled water is an almost perfect insulator, but any other
sample of water will contain impurities which generally cause it to conduct
6, 7] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 7
tolerably well, and hence a wet body is generally a bad insulator. So also an
electrified body suspended in air loses its electrification much more rapidly in
damp weather than in dry, owing to conduction by waterparticles in the air.
When the body is in contact with insulators only, it is said to be
" insulated." The insulation is said to be good when the electrified body
retains its electrification for a long interval of time, and is said to be poor
when the electrification disappears rapidly. Good insulation will enable a
body to retain most of its electrification for some days, while with poor insula
tion the electrification will last only for a few minutes or seconds.
III. Quantity of Electricity.
7. We pass next to the conception of a definite quantity of electricity,
this quantity measuring the degree of electrification of the body with which
it is associated. It is found that the quantity of electricity associated with
any body remains constant except in so far as it is conducted away by con
ductors. To illustrate, and to some extent to prove this law, we may use
an instrument known as the goldleaf electroscope. This consists of a glass
vessel, through the top of which a metal rod is passed, supporting at its lower
end two goldleaves which under normal conditions hang flat side by side,
touching one another throughout their length. When an electrified body
touches or is brought near to the brass rod, the two goldleaves are seen to
separate, for reasons which will become clear later (21), so that the instru
ment can be used to examine whether or not a body is electrified.
Let us fix a metal vessel on the top of the brass rod, the vessel being
closed but having a lid through which bodies can be in
serted. The lid must be supplied with an insulating
handle for its manipulation. Suppose that we have
electrified some piece of matter to make the picture
definite, suppose that we have electrified a small brass
rod by rubbing it on silk and let us suspend this body
inside the vessel by an insulating thread in such a
manner that it does not touch the sides of the vessel.
Let us close the lid of the vessel, so that the vessel
entirely surrounds the electrified body, and note the
amount of separation of the goldleaves of the electro
scope. Let us try the experiment any number of times,
placing the electrified body in different positions inside
the closed vessel, taking care only that it does not come
into contact with the sides of the vessel or with any FlG  *
other conductors. We shall find that in every case the separation of the
gold leaves is exactly the same.
8 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
In this way then, we get the idea of a definite quantity of electrification
associated with the brass rod, this quantity being independent of the position
of the rod inside the closed vessel of the electroscope. We find, further, that
the divergence of the goldleaves is not only independent of the position of
the rod inside the vessel, but is independent of any changes of state which
the rod may have experienced between successive insertions in the vessel,
provided only that it has not been touched by conducting bodies. We
might, for instance, heat the rod, or, if it was sufficiently thin, we might
bend it into a different shape, and on replacing it inside the vessel we
should find that it produced exactly the same deviation of the goldleaves
as before. We may, then, regard the electrical properties of the rod as being
due to a quantity of electricity associated with the rod, this quantity remaining
permanently the same, except in so far as the original charge is lessened by
contact with conductors, or increased by a fresh supply.
8. We can regard the electroscope as giving an indication of the magni
tude of a quantity of electricity, two charges being equal when they produce
the same divergence of the leaves of the electroscope.
In the same way we can regard a springbalance as giving an indication
of the magnitude of a weight, two weights being equal when they produce
the same extension of the spring.
The question of the actual quantitative measurement of a quantity of
electricity as a multiple of a specified unit has not yet been touched. We
can, however, easily devise means for the exact quantitative measurement
of electricity in terms of a unit. We can charge a brass rod to any degree
we please, and agree that the charge on this rod is to be taken to be the
standard unit charge. By rubbing a number of rods until each produces
exactly the same divergence of the electroscope as the standard charge, we
can prepare a number of unit charges, and we can now say that a charge is
equal to n units, if it produces the same deviation of the electroscope as
would be produced by n units all inserted in the vessel of the electroscope
at once. This method of measuring an electric charge is of course not one
that any rational being would apply in practice, but the object of the
present explanation is to elucidate the fundamental principles, and not to
give an account of practical methods.
9. Positive and Negative Electricity. Let us suppose that we insert in
the vessel of the electroscope the piece of silk on which one of the brass
rods has been supposed to have been rubbed in order to produce its unit
charge. We shall find that the silk produces a divergence of the leaves of
the electroscope, and further that this divergence is exactly equal to that
which is produced by inserting the brass rod alone into the vessel of the
electroscope. If, however, we insert the brass rod and the silk together into
the electroscope, no deviation of the leaves can be detected.
711] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 9
Again, let us suppose that we charge a brass rod A with a charge which
the divergence of the leaves shews to be n units. Let us rub a second brass
rod B with a piece of silk C until it has a charge, as indicated by the electro
scope, of m units, in being smaller than n. If we insert the two brass rods
together, the electroscope will, as already explained, give a divergence corre
sponding to n + m units. If, however, we insert the rod A and the silk C
together, the deviation will be found to correspond to n m units.
In this way it is found that a charge of electricity must be supposed to
have sign as well as magnitude. As a matter of convention, we agree to
speak of the m units of charge on the silk as m positive units, or more briefly
as a charge + m, while we speak of the charge on the brass as m negative
units, or a charge m.
10. Generation of Electricity. It is found to be a general law that, on
rubbing two bodies which are initially uncharged, equal quantities of positive
and negative electricity are produced on the two bodies, so that the total
charge generated, measured algebraically, is nil.
We have seen that the electroscope does not determine the sign of the
charge placed inside the closed vessel, but only its magnitude. We can,
however, determine both the sign and magnitude by two observations. Let
us first insert the charged body alone into the vessel. Then if the divergence
of the leaves corresponds to m units, we know that the charge is either + m
or m, and if we now insert the body in company with another charged body,
of which the charge is known to be 4 n t then the charge we are attempting
to measure will be f m or m according as the divergence of the leaves
indicates n + m or n^m units. With more elaborate instruments to be
described later (electrometers) it is possible to determine both the magnitude
and sign of a charge by one observation.
11. If we had rubbed a rod of glass, instead of one of brass, on the silk,
we should have found that the silk had a negative charge, and the glass of
course an equal positive charge. It therefore appears that the sign of the
charge produced on a body by friction depends not only on the nature of the
body itself, but also on the nature of the body with which it has been
rubbed.
The following is found to be a general law : If rubbing a substance A on
a second substance B charges A positively and B negatively, and if rubbing
the substance .B on a third substance C charges B positively and C negatively,
then rubbing the substance A on the substance C will charge A positively
and C negatively.
It is therefore possible to arrange any number of substances in a list such
that a substance is charged with positive or negative electricity when rubbed
10 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
with a second substance, according as the first substance stands above or
below the second substance on the list. The following is a list of this kind,
which includes some of the most important substances :
Cat's skin, Glass, Ivory, Silk, Rock crystal, The Hand, Wood, Sulphur,
Flannel, Cotton, Shellac, Caoutchouc, Resins, Guttapercha, Metals, Guncotton.
A substance is said to be electropositive or electronegative to a second
substance according as it stands above or below it on a list of this kind.
Thus of any pair of substances one is always electropositive to the other, the
other being electronegative to the first. Two substances, although chemically
the same, must be regarded as distinct for the purposes of a list such as the
above, if their physical conditions are different ; for instance, it is found that
a hot body must be placed lower on the list than a cold body of the same
chemical composition.
IV. Attraction and Repulsion of Electric Charges.
12. A small ball of pith, or some similarly light substance, coated with
goldleaf and suspended by an insulating thread, forms a convenient instru
ment for investigating the forces, if any, which are brought into play by the
presence of electric charges. Let us electrify a pith ball of this kind positively
and suspend it from a fixed point. We shall find that when we bring a
second small body charged with positive electricity near to this first body
the two bodies tend to repel one another, whereas if we bring a negatively
charged body near to it, the two bodies tend to attract one another. From
this and similar experiments it is found that two small bodies charged with
electricity of the same sign repel one another, and that two small bodies
charged with electricity of different signs attract one another.
This law can be well illustrated by tying together a few light silk threads
by their ends, so that they form a tassel, and allowing the threads to hang
vertically. If we now stroke the threads with the hand, or brush them with
a brush of any kind, the threads all become positively electrified, and there
fore repel one another. They consequently no longer hang vertically but
spread themselves out into a cone. A similar phenomenon can often be
noticed on brushing the hair in dry weather. The hairs become positively
electrified and so tend to stand out from the head.
13. On shaking up a mixture of powdered red lead and yellow sulphur,
the particles of red lead will become positively electrified, and those of the
sulphur will become negatively electrified, as the result of the friction which
has occurred between the two sets of particles in the shaking. If some of
this powder is now dusted on to a positively electrified body, the particles of
sulphur will be attracted and those of red lead repelled. The red lead will
therefore fall off, or be easily removed by a breath of air, while the sulphur
1115] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 1 1
particles will be retained. The positively electrified body will therefore
assume a yellow colour on being dusted with the powder, and similarly a
negatively electrified body would become red. It is often convenient to use
this method of determining whether the electrification of a body is positive
or negative.
14. The attraction and repulsion of two charged bodies is in many
respects different from the force between one charged and one uncharged
body. The latter force, as we have explained, was known to the Greeks : it
must be attributed, as we shall see, to what is known as " electric induction,"
and is invaribly attractive. The forces between two bodies both of which are
charged, forces which may be either attractive or repulsive, seem hardly to
have been noticed until the eighteenth century.
The observations of Robert Symmer (1759) on the attractions and
repulsions of charged bodies are at least amusing. He was in the habit
of wearing two pairs of stockings simultaneously, a worsted pair for comfort
and a silk pair for appearance. In pulling off his stockings he noticed that
they gave a crackling noise, and sometimes that they even emitted sparks
when taken off in the dark. On taking the two stockings off together from
the foot and then drawing the one from inside the other, he found that both
became inflated so as to reproduce the shape of the foot, and exhibited
attractions and repulsions at a distance of as much as a foot and a half.
" When this experiment is performed with two black stockings in one
hand, and two white in the other, it exhibits a very curious spectacle ; the
repulsion of those of the same colour, and the attraction of those of different
colours, throws them into an agitation that is not unentertaining, and
makes them catch each at that of its opposite colour, and at a greater
distance than one would expect. When allowed to come together they all
unite in one mass. When separated, they resume their former appearance,
and admit of the repetition of the experiment as often as you please, till
their electricity, gradually wasting, stands in need of being recruited."
The Law of Force between charged Particles.
15. The Torsion Balance. Coulomb (1785) devised an instrument known
as the Torsion Balance, which enabled him not only to verify the laws of
attraction and repulsion qualitatively, but also to form an estimate of the
actual magnitude of these forces.
The apparatus consists essentially of two light balls A t C, fixed at the two
ends of a rod which is suspended at its middle point B by a very fine thread
of silver quartz or other material. The upper end of the thread is fastened
to a movable head D, so that the thread and the rod can be made to
rotate by screwing the head. If the rod is acted on only by its weight, the
12
Electrostatics Physical Principles
[OH. i
condition for equilibrium is obviously that there shall be no torsion in
the thread. If, however, we fix a third small ball E in the same plane as
the other two, and if the three balls are elec
trified, the forces between the fixed ball and
the movable ones will exert a couple on the
moving rod, and the condition for equilibrium
is that this couple shall exactly balance that
due to the torsion. Coulomb found that the
couple exerted by the torsion of the thread
was exactly proportional to the angle through
which one end of the thread had been turned
relatively to the other, and in this way was
enabled to measure his electric forces. In
Coulomb's experiments one only of the two
movable balls was electrified, the second serv
ing merely as a counterpoise, and the fixed
ball was at the same distance from the torsion
thread as the two movable balls.
Suppose that the head of the thread is
turned to such a position that the balls when uncharged rest in equilibrium,
just touching one another without pressure. Let the balls receive charges
e, e, and let the repulsion between them result in the bar turning through
an angle 0. The couple exerted on the bar by the torsion of the thread
is proportional to 0, and may therefore be taken to be icO. If a is the
radius of the circle described by the movable ball, we may regard the couple
acting on the rod from the electric forces as constituted of a force F, equal
to the force of repulsion between the two balls, multiplied by a cos ^6,
the arm of the moment. The condition for equilibrium is accordingly
Let us now suppose that the torsion head is turned through an angle <j>
in such a direction as to make the two charged balls approach each other ;
after the turning has ceased, let us suppose that the balls are allowed to
corne to rest. In the new position of equilibrium, let us suppose that the
two charged balls subtend an angle & at the centre, instead of the former
angle 0. The couple exerted by the torsion thread is now K (0' + </>), so that
if F' is the new force of repulsion we must have
CL* 7 ' cos 0' =
By observing the value of </> required to give definite values to & we can
calculate values of F' corresponding to any series of values of 6'. From a
series of experiments of this kind it is found that so long as the charges on
the two balls remain the same, F' is proportional to cosec 2 ^#', from which
it is easily seen to follow that the force of repulsion varies inversely as the
15, 16] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 13
square of the distance. And when the charges on the two balls are varied
it is found that the force varies as the product of the two charges, so long as
their distance apart remains the same. As the result of a series of experi
ments conducted in this way Coulomb was able to enunciate the law :
The force between two small charged bodies is proportional to the product
of their charges, and is inversely proportional to the square of their distance
apart, the force being one of repulsion or attraction according as the two
charges are of the same or of opposite kinds.
16. In mathematical language we may say that there is a force of repul
sion of amount
a)
where e, e are the charges, r their distance apart, and c is a positive
constant.
If e, e are of opposite signs the product ee' is negative, and a negative
repulsion must be interpreted as an attraction.
Although this law was first published by Coulomb, it subsequently
appeared that it had been discovered at an earlier date by Cavendish.
whose experiments were much more refined than those of Coulomb. Caven
dish was able to satisfy himself that the law was certainly intermediate
between the inverse 2 + ^ and 2 J^th power of the distance. Unfor
tunately his researches remained unknown until his manuscripts were
published in 1879 by Clerk Maxwell.
The experiments of Coulomb and Cavendish, it need hardly be said,
were very rough compared with those which are rendered possible by modern
refinements of theory and practice, so that these experiments are no longer
the justification for using the law expressed by formula (1) as the basis of
the Mathematical Theory of Electricity. More delicate experiments with the
apparatus used by Cavendish, which will be explained later, have, however,
been found to give a complete confirmation of Coulomb's Law, so long as
the charged bodies may both be regarded as infinitely small compared with
their distance apart. Any deviation from the law of Coulomb must accord
ingly be attributed to the finite sizes of the bodies which carry the charges.
As it is only in the case of infinitely small bodies that the symbol r of
formula (1) has had any meaning assigned to it, we may regard the law (1)
as absolutely true, at any rate so long as r is large enough to be a measurable
quantity.
14 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
The Unit of Electricity.
17. The law of Coulomb supplies us with a convenient unit in which
to measure electric charges.
The unit of mass, the pound or gramme, is a purely arbitrary unit, and
all quantities of mass are measured simply by comparison with this unit,
The same is true of the unit of space. If it were possible to keep a charge
of electricity unimpaired through all time we might take an arbitrary charge
of electricity as standard, and measure all charges by comparison with this
one standard charge, in the way suggested in 8. As it is not possible to do
this, we find it convenient to measure electricity with reference to the units
of mass, length and time of which we are already in possession, and Coulomb's
Law enables us to do this. We define as the unit charge a charge such that
when two unit charges are placed one on each of two small particles at
a distance of a centimetre apart, the force of repulsion between the particles
is one dyne. With this definition it is clear that the quantity c in the
formula (1) becomes equal to unity, so long as the C.G.S. system of units
is used.
In a similar way, if the mass of a body did not remain constant, we might
have to define the unit of mass with reference to those of time and length
by saying that a mass is a unit mass provided that two such masses, placed at
a unit distance apart, produce in each other an acceleration of a centimetre
per second per second. In this case we should have the gravitational
acceleration f given by an equation of the form
and this equation would determine the unit of mass.
18. Physical dimensions. If the unit of mass were determined by
equation (2), m would appear to have the dimensions of an acceleration
multiplied by the square of a distance, and therefore dimensions
As a matter of fact, however, we know that mass is something entirely apart
from length and time, except in so far as it is connected with them through
the law of gravitation. The complete gravitational acceleration is given by
m
*>
where 7 is the socalled " gravitation constant."
By our proposed definition of unit mass we should have made the value
of 7 numerically equal to unity ; but its physical dimensions are not those of
17, 18] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 15
a mere number, so that we cannot neglect the factor 7 when equating
physical dimensions on the two sides of the equation.
f*0>
So also in the formula F= (3)
we can and do choose our unit of charge in such a way that the numerical
value of c is unity, so that the numerical equation becomes
but we must remember that the factor c still retains its physical dimensions.
Electricity is something entirely apart from mass, length and time, and it
follows that we ought to treat the dimensions of equation (3), by introducing
a new unit of electricity E and saying that c is of the dimensions of a force
divided by E 2 /r* and therefore of dimensions
If, however, we compare dimensions in equation (4), neglecting to take
account of the physical dimensions of the suppressed factor c, it appears as
though a charge of electricity can be expressed in terms of the units of
mass, length and time, just as it might appear from equation (2) as though
a mass could be expressed in terms of the units of length and time. The
apparent dimensions of a charge of electricity are now
M*L*T~* .................................... (5).
It will be readily understood that these dimensions are merely apparent
and not in any way real, when it is stated that other systems of units are
also in use, and that the apparent physical dimensions of a charge of
electricity are found to be different in the different systems of units. The
systems which we have just described, in which the unit is defined as
the charge which makes c numerically equal to unity in equation (3), is
known as the Electrostatic system of units.
There will be different electrostatic systems of units corresponding to
different units of length, mass and time. In the C.G.S. system these units
are taken to be the centimetre, gramme and second. In passing from one
system of units to another the unit of electricity will change as if it were
a physical quantity having dimensions M^L%T~ l , so long as we hold to the
agreement that equation (4) is to be numerically true. i.e. so long as the
units remain electrostatic. This gives a certain importance to the apparent
dimensions of the unit of electricity, as expressed in formula (5).
16 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
V. Electrification by Induction.
19. Let us suspend a metal rod by insulating supports. Suppose that
the rod is originally uncharged, and that we bring a small body charged
with electricity near to one end of the rod, without allowing the two bodies
to touch. We shall find on sprinkling the rod with electrified powder of the
kind previously described ( 13), that the rod is now electrified, the signs of
the charges at the two ends being different. This electrification is known as
electrification by induction. We speak of the electricity on the rod as an
induced charge, and that on the originally electrified body as the inducing or
exciting charge. We find that the induced charge at the end of the rod
nearest to the inducing charge is of sign opposite to that of the inducing
charge, that at the further end of the rod being of the same sign as the
inducing charge. If the inducing charge is removed to a great distance
from the rod, we find that the induced charges disappear completely, the rod
resuming its original unelectrified state.
If the rod is arranged so that it can be divided into two parts, we can
separate the two parts before removing the inducing charge, and in this way
can retain the two parts of the induced charge for further examination.
If we insert the two induced charges into the vessel of the electroscope,
we find that the total electrification is nil : in generating electricity by
induction, as in generating it by friction, we can only generate equal
quantities of positive and negative electricity ; we cannot alter the algebraic
total charge. Thus the generation of electricity by induction is in no way
a violation of the law that the total charge on a body remains unaltered,
except in so far as it is removed by conduction.
20. If the inducing charge is placed on a sufficiently light conductor, we
notice a violent attraction between it and the rod which carries the induced
charge. This, however, is only in accordance with Coulomb's Law. Let us,
for the sake of argument, suppose that the inducing charge is a positive
charge e. Let us divide up that part of the rod which is negatively charged
ABC C' B'A'
f )
FIG. 3.
into small parts AB, BC,..., beginning from the end A which is nearest
to the inducing charge /, in such a way that each part contains the same
small charge e, of negative electricity. Let us similarly divide up the part
of the rod which is positively charged into sections A'B', B'C', ..., beginning
1922] The Fundamental Conceptions of Electrostatics 17
from the further end, and such that each of these parts contains a charge f e
of positive electricity. Since the total induced charge is zero, the number of
positively charged sections A'B', B'G', ... must be exactly equal to the
number of negatively charged sections AB, BC,.... The whole series of
sections can therefore be divided into a series of pairs
AB and A'B' ; BC and B'C' ; etc.
such that the two sections of any pair contain equal and opposite charges.
The charge on A'B' being of the same sign as the inducing charge e, repels
the body 7 which carries this charge, while the charge on AB, being of the
same sign as the charge on /, attracts /. Since AB is nearer to / than A'B',
it follows from Coulomb's Law that the attractive force ee/r 2 between AB
and J is numerically greater than the repulsive force ee/r 3 between A'B' and
/, so that the resultant action of the pair of sections AB, A'B' upon / is an
attraction. Obviously a similar result is true for every other pair of sections,
so that we arrive at the result that the whole force between the two bodies
is attractive.
This result fully accounts for the fundamental property of a charged body
to attract small bodies to which no charge has been given. The proximity of
the charged body induces charges of different signs on those parts of the
body which are nearer to, and further away from, the inducing charge, and
although the total induced charge is zero, yet the attractions will always out
weigh the repulsions, so that the resultant force is always one of attraction.
21. The same conceptions explain the divergence of the gold leaves of
the electroscope which occurs when a charged body is brought near to the
plate of the electroscope or introduced into a closed vessel standing on this
plate. All the conducting parts of the electroscope goldleaves, rod, plate
and vessel if any may be regarded as a single conductor, and of this the
goldleaves form the part furthest removed from the charged body. The
leaves accordingly become charged by induction with electricity of the same
sign as that of the charged body, and as the charges on the two goldleaves
are of similar sign, they repel one another.
22. On separating the two parts of a conductor while an induced charge
is on it, and then removing both from the influence of the induced charge,
we gain two charges of electricity without any diminution of the inducing
charge. We can store or utilise these charges in any way and on replacing
the two parts of the conductor in position, we shall again obtain an induced
charge. This again may be utilised or stored, and so on indefinitely. There
is therefore no limit to the magnitude of the charges which can be obtaiued
from a small initial charge by repeating the process of induction.
This principle underlies the action of the Elect rophorus. A cake of resin
is electrified by friction, and for convenience is placed with its electrified
j. 2
18 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
surface uppermost on a horizontal table. A metal disc is held by an in
sulating handle parallel to the cake of resin and at a slight distance above it.
The operator then touches the upper surface of the disc with his finger.
When the process has reached this stage, the metal disc, the body of the
operator and the earth itself form one conductor. The negative electricity on
the resin induces a positive charge on the nearer parts of this conductor
primarily on the metal disc and a negative charge on the more remote parts
of the conductor the further region of the earth. When the operator
removes his finger, the disc is left insulated and in possession of a positive
charge. As already explained, this charge may be used and the process
repeated indefinitely.
In all its essentials, the principle utilised in the generation of electricity
by the " influence machines " of Voss, Holtz, Wimshurst and others is
identical with that of the electrophorus. The machines are arranged so that
by the turning of a handle, the various stages of the process are repeated
cyclically time after time.
23. Electric Equilibrium. Returning to the apparatus illustrated in
fig. 3, p. 16, it is found that if we remove the inducing charge without
allowing the conducting rod to come into contact with other conductors,
the charge on the rod disappears gradually as the inducing charge recedes,
positive and negative electricity combining in equal quantities and neutral
ising one another. This shews that the inducing charge must be supposed
to act upon the electricity of the induced charge, rather than upon the
matter of the conductor. Upon the same principle, the various parts of
the induced charge must be supposed to act directly upon one another.
Moreover, in a conductor charged with electricity at rest, there is no reac
tion between matter and electricity tending to prevent the passage of
electricity through the conductor. For if there were, it would be possible
for parts of the induced charge to be retained, after the inducing charge
had been removed, the parts of the induced charge being retained in position
by their reaction with the matter of the conductor. Nothing of this kind is
observed to occur. We conclude then that the elements of electrical charge
on a conductor are each in equilibrium under the influence solely of the forces
exerted by the remaining elements of charge.
24. An exception occurs when the electricity is actually at the surface
of the conductor. Here there is an obvious reaction between matter and
electricity the reaction which prevents the electricity from leaving the
surface of the conductor. Clearly this reaction will be normal to the
surface, so that the forces acting upon the electricity in directions which
lie in the tangent plane to the surface must be entirely forces from other
charges of electricity, and these must be in equilibrium. To balance the
2226] Theories of Electrical Phenomena 19
action of the matter on the electricity there must be an equal and opposite
reaction of electricity on matter. This, then, will act normally outwards at
the surface of the conductor. Experimentally it is best put in evidence
by the electrification of soapbubbles. A soapbubble when electrified is
observed to expand, the normal reaction between electricity and matter at
its surface driving the surface outwards until equilibrium is reestablished.
25. Also when two conductors of different material are placed in con
tact, electric phenomena are found to occur which have been explained by
Helmholtz as the result of the operation of reactions between electricity
and matter at the surfaces of the conductors. Thus, although electricity
can pass quite freely over the different parts of the same conductor, it is not
strictly true to say that electricity can pass freely from one conductor to
another of different material with which it is in contact. Compared, however,
with the forces with which we shall in general be dealing in electrostatics, it
will be legitimate to disregard entirely any forces of the kind just described.
We shall therefore neglect the difference between the materials of different
conductors, so that any number of conductors placed in contact may be
regarded as a single conductor.
THEORIES TO EXPLAIN ELECTRICAL PHENOMENA.
26. Onefluid Theory. Franklin, as far back as 1751, tried to include
all the electrical phenomena with which he was acquainted in one simple
explanation. He suggested that all these phenomena could be explained by
supposing the existence of an indestructible " electric fluid," which could be
associated with matter in different degrees. Corresponding to the normal
state of matter, in which no electrical properties are exhibited, there is
a definite normal amount of " electric fluid." When a body was charged
with positive electricity, Franklin explained that there was an excess of
" electric fluid " above the normal amount, and similarly a charge of nega
tive electricity represented a deficiency of electric fluid. The generation of
equal quantities of positive and negative electricity was now explained : for
instance, in rubbing two bodies together we simply transfer " electric fluid "
from one to the other. To explain the attractions and repulsions of electri
fied bodies, Franklin supposed that the particles of ordinary matter repelled
one another, while attracting the "electric fluid." In the normal state of
matter the quantities of "electric fluid" and ordinary matter were just
balanced, so that there was neither attraction nor repulsion between bodies
in the normal state. According to a later modification of the theory the
attractions just outbalanced the repulsions in the normal state, the residual
force accounting for gravitation.
22
20 Electrostatics Physical Principles [CH. i
27. Twofluid Theory. A further attempt to explain electric phenomena
was made by the twofluid theory. In this there were three things concerned,,
ordinary matter and two electric fluids positive and negative. The degree
of electrification was supposed to be the measure of the excess of positive
electricity over negative, or of negative over positive, according to the sign
of the electrification. The two kinds of electricity attracted and repelled,
electricities of the same kind repelling, and of opposite kinds attracting, and
in this way the observed attractions and repulsions of electrified bodies were
explained without having recourse to systems of forces between electricity
and ordinary matter. It is, however, obvious that the twofluid theory wa&
too elaborate for the facts. On this theory ordinary matter devoid of both
kinds of electricity would be physically different from matter possessing
equal quantities of the two kinds of electricity, although both bodies would
equally shew an absence of electrification. There is no evidence that it is
possible to establish any physical difference of this kind between totally
unelectrified bodies, so that the twofluid theory must be dismissed a&
explaining more than there is to be explained.
28. Modern view of Electricity. The two theories which have just been
mentioned rested on no experimental evidence except such as is required
to establish the phenomena with which they are directly concerned. The
modern view of electricity, on the other hand, is based on an enormous mass
of experimental evidence, to which contributions are made, not only by the
phenomena of electrostatics, but also by the phenomena of almost every
branch of physics and chemistry. The modern explanation of electricity is
found to bear a very close resemblance to the older explanation of the one
fluid theory so much so that it will be convenient to explain the modern
view of electricity simply by making the appropriate modifications of the
onefluid theory.
Let us suppose the " electricfluid " of the onefluid theory replaced by a
crowd of small particles " electrons," it will be convenient to call them all
exactly similar, and each having exactly the same charge of negative electricity
permanently attached to it. The electrons are almost unthinkably small,
about 10 27 of them being required to make a gramme about as many in fact
as would be required of cubic centimetres to make a sphere of the size of our
earth. The charge of an electron is enormously large compared with its
mass the charge of each being about 3 x 10~ 10 in electrostatic units, so that a
gramme of electrons would carry a charge equal to about 3 x 10 17 electrostatic
units. To form some conception of the intense degree of electrification
represented by these data, it may be noticed that two grammes of electrons,
if placed at a distance of a metre apart, would repel one another with a
force equal to the weight of about 10 21 tons. Thus the electric force out
weighs the gravitational force in the ratio of about 10 42 to 1.
27, 28] Modern View of Electricity 21
A piece of ordinary matter in its unelectrified state contains a certain
number of electrons of this kind, and this number is just such that two
pieces of matter each in this state exert no electrical forces on one another
this condition in fact defines the unelectrified state. A piece of matter
appears to be charged with negative or positive electricity according as the
number of negativelycharged electrons it possesses is in excess or defect of the
number it would possess in its unelectrified state.
Two important consequences follow from these facts. In the first place it
is clear that we cannot go on dividing a charge of electricity indefinitely a
natural limit is imposed as soon as we come to the charge of one electron,
just as in chemistry we suppose a natural limit to be imposed on the divisi
bility of matter as soon as we come to the mass of an atom. And, secondly,
in charging a body with electricity we either add to or subtract from its mass
according as we charge it with negative electricity (i.e., add to it a number of
electrons), or charge it with positive electricity (i.e., remove from it a number
of electrons). Since the mass of an electron is so minute in comparison with
the charge it carries, it will readily be seen that the change in its mass is
very much too small to be perceptible by any methods of measurement which
are at our disposal. Maxwell mentions, as an example of a body possessing
an electric charge large compared with its mass, the case of a gramme of gold,
which may be beaten into a goldleaf one square metre in area, and can, in
this state, hold a charge of 60,000 electrostatic units of negative electricity.
The mass of the number of negatively electrified electrons necessary to carry
this charge will be found, as the result of a brief calculation from the data
already given, to be 2xlO~ 13 grammes. The change of weight by electrification
is therefore one which it is far beyond the power of the most sensitive balance
to detect.
On this view of electricity, the electrons must repel one another, and
must be attracted by matter which is devoid of electrons, or which has a
deficiency of electrons. The electrons move about freely through conductors,
but not through insulators. The reaction which, as we have seen, must be
supposed to occur at the surface of charged conductors between " matter" and
4t electricity," can now be interpreted simply as the systems of forces between
the electrons and the remainder of the matter. Up to a certain extent these
forces will restrain the electrons from leaving the conductor, but if the electric
forces acting on the electrons exceed a certain limit, they will overcome the
forces acting between the electrons and the remainder of the conductor, and
an electric discharge takes place from the surface of the conductor.
Thus an essential feature of the modern view of electricity is that it
regards the flow of electricity as a material flow of charged electrons. Good
conductors and good insulators are now seen to mean simply substances in
which the electrons move with extreme ease and extreme difficulty re
spectively.
22 Electrostatics Physical Principles [OH. i
The modern view enables us also to give a simple physical interpretation
to the phenomenon of induction. A positive charge placed near a conductor
will attract the electrons in the conductor, and these will flow through the
conductor towards the charge until electrical equilibrium is established.
There will be then an excess of negative electrons in the regions near the
positive charge, and this excess will appear as an induced negative charge.
The deficiency of electrons in the more remote parts of the conductor will
appear as an induced positive charge. If the inducing charge is negative,
the flow of electrons will be in the opposite direction, so that the signs of the
induced charges will be reversed. In an insulator, no flow of electrons can
take place, so that the phenomenon of electrification by induction does not
occur.
On this view of electricity, negative electricity is essentially different in
its nature from positive electricity : the difference is something more funda
mental than a mere difference of sign. Experimental proof of this difference
is not wanting, e.g., a sharply pointed conductor can hold a greater charge of
positive than of negative electricity before reaching the limit at which a
discharge begins to take place from its surface. But until we come to those
parts of electric theory in which the flow of electricity has to be definitely
regarded as a flow of electrons, this essential difference between positive and
negative electricity will not appear, and the difference between the two will
be adequately represented by a difference of sign.
SUMMARY.
29. It will be useful to conclude the chapter by a summary of the
results which are arrived at by experiment, independently of all hypotheses
as to the nature of electricity.
These have been stated by Maxwell in the form of laws, as follows :
Law I. The total electrification of a body, or system of bodies,
remains always the same, except in so far as it receives electrification
from or gives electrification to other bodies.
Law II. When one body electrifies another by conduction, the
total electrification of the two bodies remains the same; that is, the
one loses as much positive or gains as much negative electrification as
the other gains of positive or loses of negative electrification.
Law III. When electrification is produced by friction, or by any
other known method, equal quantities of positive and negative electrifi
cation are produced.
Definition. The electrostatic unit of electricity is that quantity of
positive electricity which, when placed at unit distance from an equal
quantity, repels it with unit of force.
28, 29] Maxwell's Laws 23
Law IV. The repulsion between two small bodies charged respect
ively with e and e f units of electricity is numerically equal to the
product of the charges divided by the square of the distance.
These are the forms in which the laws are given by Maxwell. Law I, it
will be seen, includes II and III. As regards the Definition and Law IV,
it is necessary to specify the medium in which the small bodies are placed,
since, as we shall see later, the force is different when the bodies are in air,
or in a vacuum, or surrounded by other nonconducting media. It is usual
to assume, for purposes of the Definition and Law IV, that the bodies are in
air. For strict scientific exactness, we ought further to specify the density,
the temperature, and the exact chemical composition of the air. Also we
have seen that when the electricity is not insulated on small bodies, but is
free to move on conductors, the forces of Law IV must be regarded as acting
on the charges of electricity themselves. When the electricity is not free to
move, there is an action and reaction between the electricity and matter, so
that the forces which really act on the electricity appear to act on the bodies
themselves which carry the charges.
REFERENCES.
On the History of Electricity :
Encyc. Brit. Qth Ed. Art. Electricity. Vol. 8, pp. 324.
On the Experimental Foundations of Electricity :
FARADAY. Experimental Researches in Electricity, by Michael Faraday. London
(Quaritch), 1839. ( 11691249).
COULOMB. "Construction et Usage d'une Balance Electrique..." and six other
memoirs. Memoires de 1'Acad. Royale des Sciences, 1785,6,7,8,9, or Col
lection de Memoires relatifs a la Physique, publies par la Societe frangaise
de Physique. Tome I. Paris (GauthierVillars), 1884.
FRANKLIN. Experiments and Observations on Electricity made at Philadelphia in
America, by Dr Benjamin Franklin. Collected works of Benjamin Franklin
by Jared Sparks. Vol. 5, pp. 171483. Boston (Hilliard, Gray and Co.),
1837, or Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., London, 1756, 1760, eta
CAVENDISH. The Electrical Researches of the Hon. Henry Cavendish, F.R.S.
(Edited by Prof. Clerk Maxwell). Cambridge (Univ. Press), 1879. Intro
duction by Maxwell, and " Thoughts concerning Electricity " ( 195216).
On the Modern View of Electricity :
J. J. THOMSON. Electricity and Matter. Westminster (Constable and Co.), 1904.
Chapter iv.
CHAPTER II.
THE ELECTROSTATIC FIELD OF FORCE.
CONCEPTIONS USED IN THE SURVEY OF A FIELD OF FORCE.
I. The Intensity at a point.
30. THE space in the neighbourhood of charges of electricity, considered
with reference to the electric phenomena occurring in this space, is spoken
of as the electric field.
A new charge of electricity, placed at any point in an electric field,
will experience attractions or repulsions from all the charges in the
field. The introduction of a new charge will in general disturb the arrange
ment of the charges on all the conductors in the field by a process of
induction. If, however, the new charge is supposed to be infinitesimal, the
effects of induction will be negligible, so that the forces acting on the new
charge may be supposed to arise from the charges of the original field.
Let us suppose that we introduce an infinitesimal charge e on an infin
itely small conductor. Any charge ^ in the field at a distance r x from the
point will repel the charge with a force e^/Ty 5 . The charge e will experience
a similar repulsion from every charge in the field, so that each repulsion will
be proportional to e.
The resultant of these forces, obtained by the usual rules for the com
position of forces, will be a force proportional to e say a force Re in some
direction OP. We define the electric intensity at to be a force of which
the magnitude is R, and the direction is OP. Thus
The electric intensity at any point is given, in magnitude and direction, by
the force per unit charge which would act on a charged particle placed at this
point, the charge on the particle being supposed so small that the distribution
of electricity on the conductors in the field is not affected by its presence.
The electric intensity at 0, defined in this way, depends only on the
permanent field of force, and has nothing to do with the charge, or the size,
or even the existence of the small conductor which has been used to explain
30, 31] Lines of Force 25
the meaning of the electric intensity. There will be a definite intensity at
every point of the electric field, quite independently of the presence of small
charged bodies.
A small charged body might, however, conveniently be used for exploring
the electric field and determining experimentally the direction of the electric
intensity at any point in the field. For if we suppose the body carrying a
charge e to be held by an insulating thread, both the body and thread being
so light that their weights may be neglected, then clearly all the forces
acting on the charged body may be reduced to two:
(i) A force jRe in the direction of the electric intensity at the. point
occupied by e,
(ii) the tension of the thread acting along the thread.
For equilibrium these two forces must be equal and opposite. Hence the
direction of the intensity at the point occupied by the small charged body is
obtained at once by producing the direction of the string through the charged
body. And if we tie the other end of the thread to a delicate spring balance,
we can measure the tension of the string, and since this is numerically equal
to .Re, we should be able to determine R if e were known. We might in
this way determine the magnitude and direction of the electric intensity at
any point in the field.
In a similar way, a float at the end of a fishingline might be used to determine the
strength and direction of the current at any point on a lake. And, just as with the
electric intensity, we should only get the true direction of the current by supposing the
float to be of infinitesimal size. We could not imagine the direction of the current
obtained by anchoring a battleship in the lake, because the presence of the ship would
disturb the whole system of currents.
II. Lines of Force.
31. Let us start at any point in the electric field, and move a short
distance OP in the direction of the electric intensity at 0. Starting from P
let us move a short distance PQ in the direction of the intensity at P,
Q
FIG. 4.
and so on. In this way we obtain a broken 'path OPQR..., formed of
a number of small rectilinear elements. Let us now pass to the limit
ing case in which each of the elements OP, PQ, QR, ... is infinitely small.
The broken path becomes a continuous curve, and it has the property that
at every point on it the electric intensity is in the direction of the tangent
26 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
to the curve at that point. Such a curve is called a Line of Force. We
may therefore define a line of force as follows :
A line of force is a curve in the electric field, such that the tangent at every
point is in the direction of the electric intensity at that point.
If we suppose the motion of a charged particle to be so much retarded by frictional
resistance that it cannot acquire any appreciable momentum, then a charged particle set
free in the electric field would trace out a line of force. In the same way, we should have
lines of current on the surface of a lake, such that the tangent to a line of current at any
point coincided with the direction of the current, and a small float set free on the lake
would describe a currentline.
32. The resultant of a number of known forces has a definite direction,
so that there is a single direction for the electric intensity at every point of
the field. It follows that two lines of force can never intersect ; for if they
did there would be two directions for the electric intensity at the point of
intersection (namely, the two tangents to the lines of force at this point) so
that the resultant of a number of known forces would be acting in two
directions at once. An exception occurs, as we shall see, when the resultant
intensity vanishes at any point.
The intensity R may be regarded as compounded of three components
X, Y, Z, parallel to three rectangular axes Ox, Oy, Oz.
The magnitude of the electric intensity is then given by
E 2 = X 2 +F 2 4^ 2 ,
and the direction cosines of its direction are
X Y Z_
R' R' R'
These, therefore, are also the direction cosines of the tangent at a?, y, z
to the line of force through the point. The differential equation of the
system of lines of force is accordingly
dx _ dy _ dz J
~~~~
III. The Potential.
:
33. In moving the small testcharge e about in the field, we may either
have to do work against electric forces, or we may find that these forces
will do work for us. A small charged particle which has been placed at a
point in the electric field may be regarded as a store of energy, this
energy being equal to the work (positive or negative) which has been done
in taking the charge to in opposition to the repulsions and attractions of
the field. The energy can be reclaimed by allowing the particle to retrace
its path. Assume the charge on the moving particle to be so small that
3133] The Potential 27
the distribution of electricity on the conductors in the field is not affected
by it. Then the work done in bringing the charge e to a point is pro
portional to e, and may be taken to be Fe. The amount of work done will
of course depend on the position from which the charged particle started.
It is convenient, in measuring Fe, to suppose that the particle started at a
point outside the field altogether, i.e. from a point so far removed from all
the charges of the field that their effect at this point is inappreciable for
brevity, we may say the point at infinity. We now define F to be the
potential at the point 0. Thus
The potential at any point in the field is the work per unit charge which
has to be done on a charged particle to bring it to that point, the charge on the
particle being supposed so small that the distribution of electricity on the
conductors in the field is not affected by its presence.
In moving the small charge e from x, y, z to x + dx, y + dy, z + dz, we
shall have to perform an amount of work
(Xdx + Ydy + Zdz)e,
so that in bringing the charge e into position at x, y, z from outside the field
altogether, we do an amount of work
7dy+Zde) t
where the integral is taken along the path followed by e.
Denoting the work done on the charge e in bringing it to any point
x, y y z in the electric field by Fe, we clearly have
/
(Xdx + Ydy + Zdz) (6),
giving a mathematical expression for the potential at the point x, y, z.
The same result can be put in a different form. If ds is any element of
the path, and if the intensity R at the extremity of this element makes an
angle 6 with ds, then the component of the force acting on e when moving
along ds, resolved in the direction of motion of e, is Re cos 6. The work
done in moving e along the element ds is accordingly
Re cos 6ds,
so that the whole work in bringing e from infinity to x, y, z is
eT '''RcosQds,
J oo
and since this is equal, by definition, to Fe, we must have
;
Bcosffds (7).
28 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
We see at once that the two expressions (6) and (7) just obtained for V
are identical, on noticing that 6 is the angle between two lines of which the
direction cosines are respectively
X Y Z . dx dy dz
R' R' R '' ds' fa' di'
We therefore have C os0 = >
R ds R ds R ds
so that R cos 6 ds = Xdx + Ydy + Zdz,
and the identity of the two expressions becomes obvious.
If the Theorem of the Conservation of Energy is true in the Electro
static Field, the work done in bringing a small charge 6 from infinity to any
point P must be the same whatever path to P we choose. For if the
amounts of work were different on two different paths, let these amounts
be V P 6 and Fp'e, and let the former be the greater. Then by taking the
charge from P to infinity by the former path and bringing it back by the
latter, we should gain an amount of work ( V P V P ') e, which would be
contrary to the Conservation of Energy. Thus V P and V P ' must be equal,
and the potential at P is the same, no matter by what path we reach P.
The potential at P will accordingly depend only on the coordinates #, y, z
of P.
As soon as we introduce the special law of the inverse square, we shall
find that the potential must be a singlevalued function of x, y, z, as a
consequence of this law (39), and hence shall be able to prove that the
Theorem of Conservation of Energy is true in an Electrostatic field. For
the moment, however, we assume this.
34. Let us denote by W the work done in moving a charge e from P
to Q. In bringing the charge from infinity to P, we do an amount of work
FIG. 5.
which by definition is equal to Vpe where V P denotes the value of V at the
point P. Hence in taking it from infinity to Q, we do a total amount of
work Vpe 4 W. This, however, is also equal by definition to F Q e. Hence
we have
or TT=(F Q  F P )e .............................. (8).
3336] The Potential 29
35. DEFINITION. A surface in the electric field such that at every point
on it the potential has the same value, is called an Equipotential Surface.
In discussing the phenomena of the electrostatic field, it is convenient to think of the
whole field as mapped out by systems of equipotential surfaces and lines of force, just as
in geography we think of the earth's surface as divided up by parallels of latitude and of
longitude. A more exact parallel is obtained if we think of the earth's surface as mapped
out by "contourlines" of equal height above sealevel, and by lines of greatest slope.
These reproduce all the properties of equipotentials and lines of force, for in point of fact
they are actual equipotentials and lines of force for the gravitational field of force.
THEOREM. Equipotential surfaces cut lines of force at right angles.
Let P be any point in the electric field, and let Q be an adjacent point
on the same equipotential as P. Then, by definition, V P = VQ, so that by
equation (8) TF=0, W being the amount of work done in moving a charge e
from P to Q. If R is the intensity at Q, and the angle which its direction
makes with QP, the amount of this work must be Re cos x PQ, so that
Re cos 6 = 0.
Hence cos = 0, so that the line of force cuts the equipotential at right
angles. As in a former theorem, an exception has to be made in favour of
the case in which R = 0.
36. Instead of P, Q being on the same equipotential, let them now be
on a line parallel to the axis of x, their coordinates being x, y, z and x 4 dx y
y, z respectively. In moving the charge e from P to Q the work done is
Xedx, and by equation (8) it is also (Vq V P )e. Hence
 Xdx = F Q  V P .
Since Q and P are adjacent, we have, from the definition of a differential
coefficient,
ox
hence we have the relations
, 3F 8F W
> ' Z= ~
results which are of course obvious on differentiating equation (6) with
respect to x, y and z respectively.
Similarly, if we imagine P, Q to be two points on the same line of force
we obtain
w
H = ^,
ds
where ^ denotes differentiation along a line of force. Since R is necessarily
positive, it follows that ~ is negative, i.e. V decreases as s increases, or the
30 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
intensity is in the direction of V decreasing. Thus the lines of force run
from higher to lower values of F, and, as we have already seen, cut all
equipotentials at right angles.
37. At a point which is occupied by conducting material, the electric
charges, as has already been said, must be in equilibrium under the action of
the forces from all the other charges in the field. The resultant force from
all these charges on any element of charge e is however .Re, so that we must
have R = 0. Hence X=Y=Z=0, so that
9F_8F_aF_
dx dy dz
In other words, V must be constant throughout a conductor, for electro
static equilibrium to be possible. And in particular the surface of a
conductor must be an equipotential surface, or part of one. The equi
potential which consists of the surface of a conductor has the peculiarity
of being threedimensional instead of twodimensional, for it occupies the
whole interior as well as the surface of the conductor.
In the same way, in considering the analogous arrangement of contourlines and lines
of greatest slope on a map of the earth's surface, we find that the edge of a lake or sea
must be a contourline, but that in strictness this particular contour must be regarded as
twodimensional rather than onedimensional, since it coincides with the whole surface of
the lake or sea.
If V is not constant in any conductor, the intensity is in the direction of
V decreasing. Hence positive electricity tends to flow in the direction of V
decreasing, and negative electricity in the direction of V increasing. If two
conductors in which the potential has different values are joined by a third
conductor, the intensity in the third conductor will be in direction from
the conductor at higher potential to that at lower potential. Electricity will
flow through this conductor, and will continue to flow until the redistribution
of potential caused by the transfer of this electricity is such that the potential
is the same at all points of the conductors, which may now be regarded as
forming one single conductor.
Thus although the potential has been defined only with reference to
single points, it is possible to speak of the potential of a whole conductor.
In fact, the mathematical expression of the condition that equilibrium shall
be possible for a given system of charges is simply that the potential shall
be constant throughout each conductor. And when electric contact is
established between two conductors, either by joining them by a wire or by
other means, the new condition for equilibrium which is made necessary by
the new physical condition introduced, is simply that the potentials of the
two conductors shall be equal.
3638] The Potential 31
The earth is a conductor, and is therefore at the same potential through
out. In all practical applications of electrostatics, it will be legitimate to
regard the potential of the earth as zero, a distant point on the earth's
surface replacing the imaginary point at infinity, with reference to which
potentials have so far been measured. Thus any conductor can be reduced
to potential zero by joining it by a metallic wire to the earth.
MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS OF THE LAW OF THE INVERSE SQUARE.
I. Values of Potential and Intensity.
38. We now discuss the values of the potential and components of
electric intensity when the space between the conductors is air, so that
the electric forces are determined by Coulomb's Law.
If we have a single point charge e 1 at a point P lt the value of R, the
resultant intensity at any point 0, is
and its direction is that of PjO. Hence if 6 is the angle between OP t and
FIG. 6.
00', the line joining to an adjacent point 0', the work done in moving a
charge e from to 0'
= eRcos0. 00'
= eR(OP l 0'P 1 )
= eRdr,
where OP l = r, 0'P 1 = r + dr. Hence the work done against the repulsion
of the charge ^ in bringing from infinity to 0' by any path is
rr=O'P l rr^O'P, ^
e Rdr = e \dr =  1 ,
J r =*> Jr=c r 2 r 1 i
where r = O'Pj.
If there are other charges e 2 , e s , ... the work^ done against all the
repulsions in bringing a charge e to 0' will be the sum of terms such as the
above, say
32 Electrostatics Field of Force [CH. n
where r a , r 3 , ... are the distances from (X to e 2 , e 8 , ..., so that by definition
F=^ + ^ +  3 + (10).
n r 2 r 3
39. It is now clear that the potential at any point depends only on the
coordinates of the point, so that the work done in bringing a small charge
from infinity to a point P is the same, no matter what path we choose, the
result assumed in 33.
It follows that we cannot alter the amount of energy in the field by
moving charges about in such a way that the final state of the field is the
same as the original state. In other words, the Conservation of Energy is
true of the Electrostatic Field.
40. Analytically, let us suppose that the charge ^ is at x^, y l} z l \ e z at
#2? 2/2) #2 5 an( i so on  The repulsion on a small charge e at x, y, z resulting
from the presence of e l at x l1 y ly 2 l is
0,6
ll l
and the directioncosines of the direction in which this force acts on the
charge e, are
[(x  atf + (y  yi
Hence the component parallel to the axis of x is
_ 616 (x  ap
etc
'
By adding all such components, we obtain as the component of the
electric intensity at x, y, z,
TT GI \ x ~ \) /i i \
JL = 2^ \**)>
and there are similar equations for Y and Z.
We have as the value of V at x, y, z,
V=  [ Xt >Z (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz)
= _[ x ' y ' z 2 <?i {(a?  afi) dx + (y y,) dy + (z z,) dz]
giving the same result as equation (10).
3842] Gauss' 1 Theorem 33
41. If the electric distribution is not confined to points, we can imagine
it divided into small elements which may be treated as point charges. For
instance if the electricity is spread throughout a volume, let the charge on
any element of volume dx'dy'dz' be pdx'dy'dz so that p may be spoken of as
the " density " of electricity at x, y', z . Then in formula (11) we can replace
e l by pdx'dy'dz', and x lt y 1} z lt by x', y', z'. Instead of summing the charges
61, ... we of course integrate pdx'dy'dz' through all those parts of the space
which contain electrical charges. In this way we obtain
'
fff PMWM
111  X +  + * t
and
X J + (y yj
These equations are one form of mathematical expression of the law of
the inverse square of the distance. An attempt to perform the integration,
in even a few simple cases, will speedily convince the student that the form
is not one which lends itself to rapid progress. A second form of mathe
matical expression of the law of the inverse square is supplied by a Theorem
of Gauss which we shall now prove, and it is this expression of the law which
will form the basis of our development of electrostatical theory.
II. Gauss Theorem.
42. THEOREM. If any closed surface is taken in the electric field, and
if N denotes the component of the electric intensity at any point of this surface
in the direction of the outward normal, then
where the integration extends over the whole of the surface, and E is the total
charge enclosed by the surface.
Let us suppose the charges in the field, both inside and outside the closed
surface, to be e l at P lf e 2 at P 2 > and so on. The intensity at any point is
the resultant of the intensities due to the charges separately, so that at any
point of the surface, we may write
N = N, + N,+ (12),
where N lt J\ r 2 , ... are the normal components of intensity due to e lf e 2 , ...
separately.
Instead of calculating i\NdS we shall calculate separately the values of
jJN.dS, (JN 2 dS, . . .. The value of [JNdS will, by equation (12), be the
of these integrals.
J. i
sum
34 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. u
Let us take any small element dS of the closed surface in the neighbour
hood of a point Q on the surface and join each point of its boundary to the
point Pi. Let the small cone so formed cut off an element of area do from
Fm. 7.
a sphere drawn through Q with P l as centre, and an element of area dco from
a sphere of unit radius drawn about P l as centre. Let the normal to the
closed surface at Q in the direction away from P T make an angle 6 with P X Q.
The intensity at Q due to the charge e l at P x is e^P^Q 2 in the direction
P X Q so that the component of the intensity along the normal to the surface
in the direction away from P l is
. COS ft
The contribution to I IN^S from the element of surface is accordingly
^ cos 6 dS,
the f or sign being taken according as the normal at Q in the direction
away from P 1 is the outward or inward normal to the surface.
Now cos 6 dS is' equal to da, the projection of dS on the sphere through Q
having P l as centre, for the two normals to dS and da are inclined at an
angle 0. Also da = PiQ 2 da). For do, dco are the areas cut off by the same
cone on spheres of radii PjQ and unity respectively. Hence
^ cos# dS = ^^ = e, dco.
If Pj is inside the closed surface, a line from P l to any point on the unit
sphere surrounding Pj may either cut the closed surface only once as at Q
in which case the normal to the surface at Q in the direction away from Pj
is the outward normal to the surface or it may cut three times, as at
Q', Q", Q'" i n which case two of the normals away from P l (those at Q', Q"' in
fig. 8) are outward normals to the surface, while the third normal away
from P! (that at Q" in the figure) is an inward normal or it may cut five,
42]
Gauss' Theorem
35
seven, or any odd number of times. Thus a cone through a small element of
area dco on a unit sphere about P^ may cut the closed surface any odd number
of times. However many times it cuts, the first small area cut off will con
tribute Bide* to / 1 NidS, the second and third small areas if they occur will
FIG. 8.
contribute e^dw and +0^0) respectively, the fourth and fifth if they occur
will contribute e^co and + e$w respectively, and so on. The total contri
bution from the cone surrounding dco is, in every case, + e^dw. Summing
FIG. 9.
over all cones which can be drawn in this way through P l we obtain the
whole value of I IN^S, which is thus seen to be simply ^ multiplied by the
total surface area of the unit sphere round P lt and therefore Aire^
32
36 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
On the other hand if P l is outside the closed surface, as in fig. 9, the
cone through any element of area da) on the unit sphere may either not cut
the closed surface at all, or may cut twice, or four, six or any even number
of times. If the cone through dco intersects the surface at all, the first pair
of elements of surface which are cut off by the cone contribute e^dco and
+ eidco respectively to I l^dS. The second pair, if they occur, make a similar
contribution and so on. In every case the total contribution from any small
cone through P 1 is nil. By summing over all such cones we shall include
the contributions from all parts of the closed surface, so that if P 1 is outside
the surface llN^S is equal to zero.
We have now seen that 1 1 N^S is equal to 4>7re l when the charge e l is
inside the closed surface, and is equal to zero when the charge e l is outside
the closed surface. Hence
4<7r x (the sum of all the charges inside the surface)
which proves the theorem.
Obviously the theorem is true also when there is a continuous distribution
of electricity in addition to a number of point charges. For clearly we can
divide up the continuous distribution into a number of small elements and
treat each as a point charge.
Since N, the normal component of intensity, is equal by 36 to = ,
where ^ denotes differentiation along the outward normal, it appears that
we can also express Gauss' Theorem in the form
"dV,
fo dS "
Gauss' theorem forms the most convenient method at our disposal, of
expressing the law of the inverse square.
We can best obtain an idea of the physical meaning underlying the
theorem by noticing that if the surface contains no charge at all, the theorem
3xpresses that the average normal intensity is nil. If there is a negative
charge inside the surface, the theorem shews that the average normal
intensity is negative, so that a positively charged particle placed at a point
on the imaginary surface will be likely to experience an attraction to the
interior of the surface rather than a repulsion away from it, and vice versa if
the surface contains a positive charge.
4246] Gauss 1 Theorem 37
Corollaries to Gauss Theorem.
43. THEOREM. If a closed surface be drawn, such that every point on it
is occupied by conducting material, the total charge inside it is nil.
We have seen that at any point occupied by conducting material, the
electric intensity must vanish. Hence at every point of the closed surface,
N = 0, so that 1 1 NdS = Q, and therefore, by Gauss' Theorem, the total charge
inside the closed surface must vanish.
The two following special cases of this theorem are of the greatest
importance.
44. THEOREM. There is no charge at any point which is occupied by con
ducting material, unless this point is on the surface of a conductor.
For if the point is not on the surface, it will be possible to surround the
point by a small sphere, such that every point of this sphere is inside the
conductor. By the preceding theorem the charge inside this sphere is nil,
hence there is no charge at the point in question.
This theorem is often stated by saying :
The charge of a conductor resides on its surface.
45. THEOREM. If we have a hollow closed conductor, and place any
number of charged bodies inside it, the charge on its inner surface will be
equal in magnitude but opposite in sign, to the total charge on the bodies inside.
For we can draw a closed surface entirely inside the material of the
conductor, and by the theorem of 43, the whole charge inside this surface
must be nil. This whole charge is, however, the sum of (i) the charge on the
inner surface of the conductor, and (ii) the charges on the bodies inside the
conductor. Hence these two must be equal and opposite.
This result explains the property of the electroscope which led us to the
conception of a definite quantity of electricity. The vessel placed on the
plate of the electroscope formed a hollow closed conductor. The charge on
the inner surface of this conductor, we now see, must be equal and opposite
to the total charge inside, and since the total charge on this conductor is nil,
the charge on its outer surface must be equal and opposite to that on the
inner surface, and therefore exactly equal to the sum of the charges placed
inside, independently of the position of these charges.
The Cavendish Proof of the Law of the Inverse Square.
46. We have deduced from the law of the inverse square, that the
charge inside a closed conductor is zero. The converse theorem, as we shall
now shew, is also true, so that from the observed fact that the charge inside
38
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. II
a closed conductor is zero, we have experimental proof of the law of the
inverse square which admits of much greater accuracy than the experimental
proof of Coulomb.
The theorem that if there is no charge inside a spherical conductor the
law of force must be that of the inverse square is due to Laplace. We need
consider this converse theorem only in its application to a spherical conductor,
this being the actual form of conductor used by Cavendish. The apparatus
illustrated in fig. 10 is not that used by Cavendish, but .is an improved
form designed by Maxwell, who repeated Cavendish's experiment in a more
delicate form.
Two spherical shells are fixed by a ring of ebonite so as to be concentric
with one another, and insulated from one another.
Electrical contact can be established between the two
by letting down the small trapdoor B through which
a wire passes, the wire being of such a length as just
to establish contact when the trapdoor is closed. The
experiment is conducted by electrifying the outer
shell, opening the trapdoor by an insulating thread
without discharging the conductor, afterwards dis
charging the outer conductor and testing whether any
charge is to be found on the inner shell by placing it
in electrical contact with a delicate electroscope by
means of a conducting wire inserted through the trap
door. It is found that there are no traces of a charge
on the inner sphere.
F IO> 10. 47. Suppose we start to find the law of electric
force such that there shall be no charge on the inner
sphere. Let us assume a law of force such that the repulsion between two
charges e, e f at distance r apart is ee'$ (r). The potential, calculated as
explained in 33, is
(13),
where the summation extends over all the charges in the field.
Let us calculate the potential at a point inside the sphere due to a charge
E spread entirely over the surface of the sphere. If the sphere is of radius a,
the area of its surface is 4?ra 2 , so that the amount of charge per unit area is
E/4<7ra?, and the expression for the potential becomes
(14),
the summation of expression (13) being now replaced by an integration which
extends over the whole sphere. In this expression r is the distance from the
46, 47] Cavendish's Proof of Law of Force 39
point at which the potential is evaluated, to the element a 2 sin 0ddd(f) of
spherical surface.
If we agree to evaluate the potential at a point situated on the axis 6 =
at a distance c from the centre, we may write
r 2 = a? + c 2  2ac cos 6.
Since c is a constant, we obtain as the relation between dr and dd, by
differentiation of this last equation,
rdr acsin 6dQ (15)
If we integrate expression (14) with respect to <, the limits being of
course < = and <f> = 2?r, we obtain
V=\E I*'" (\ $ (r) dr} sin Odd,
J 0=0 \J r '
or, on changing the variable from 6 to r, by the help of relation (15)
rr=a c / / \ r ,~,
F**{ ( f<r).*)*S:
J r=a c V r / dC
If we introduce a new function / (r), defined by
we obtain as the value of V,
If the inner and outer spheres are in electrical contact, their potentials
are the same ; and if, as experiment shews to be the case, there is no charge
on the inner sphere, then the whole potential must be that just found. This
expression must, accordingly, have the same value whether c represents the
radius of the outer sphere or that of the inner. Since this is true whatever
the radius of the inner sphere may be, the expression must be the same for
all values of c. We must accordingly have
20^1^
g =f(a + c)f(ac),
where V is the same for all values of c. Differentiating this equation twice
with respect to c, we obtain
Since by definition, f(r) depends only on the law of force, and not on a or c.
it follows from the relation
/" (a + o) /"(ac),
that f " (r) must be a constant, say C.
40 Electrostatics Field of Force [en. n
Hence /(r) = A + Br + Cr\
and by definition / (r) = J ( < ( r ) rfr ) rdr >
so that on equating the two values of/' (r),
B+Cr = rf<j>(r)dr.
Therefore
or <M r J= 2 >
so that the law of force is that of the inverse square.
48. Maxwell has examined what charge would be produced on the inner
sphere if, instead of the law of force being accurately B/r*, it were of the
form B/r^+Q, where q is some small quantity. In this way he found that if q
were even so great as ^y^, the charge on the inner sphere would have been
too great to escape observation. As we have seen, the limit which Cavendish
was able to assign to q was $.
It may be urged that the form B/r 2+ 9 is not a sufficiently general
law of force to assume. To this Maxwell has replied that it is the most
general law under which conductors which are of different sizes but geometri
cally similar can be electrified similarly, while experiment shews that in point
of fact geometrically similar conductors are electrified similarly. We may
say then with confidence that the error in the law of the inverse square, if
any, is extremely small. It should, however, be clearly understood that
experiment has only proved the law B/r* for values of r which are great
enough to admit of observation. The law of force between two electric
charges which are at very small distances from one another still remains
entirely unknown to us.
III. The Equations of Poisson and Laplace.
49. There is still a third way of expressing the law of the inverse
square, and this can be deduced most readily from
Gauss' Theorem.
Let us examine the small rectangular paralleli
piped, of volume dxdydz, which is bounded by the
six plane faces
FIG. 11.
We shall suppose that this element does not con
tain any point charges of electricity, or part of
any charged surface, but for the sake of generality
we shall suppose that the whole space is charged
4749] Equations of Laplace and Poisson 41
with a continuous distribution of electricity, the volumedensity of electrifi
cation in the neighbourhood of the small element under consideration being
p. The whole charge contained by the element of volume is accordingly
pdxdydz, so that Gauss' Theorem assumes the form
(16).
The surface integral is the sum of six contributions, one from each face of
the parallelipiped. The contribution from that face which lies in the plane
x % ^dx is equal to dydz, the area of the face, multiplied by the mean
value of N over this face. To a sufficient approximation, this may be
supposed to be the value of N at the centre of the face, i.e. at the point
\dx, 7j< f, and this again may be written
/8F\
fcW.;
so that the contribution to llNdS from this face is
dydz
Similarly the contribution from the opposite face is
'8F\
the sign being different because the outward normal is now the positive axis
of x, whereas formerly it was the negative axis. The sum of the contributions
from the two faces perpendicular to the axis of x is therefore
(17)
8F
The expression inside curled brackets is the increment in the function =
8 /8F>
when x undergoes a small increment dx. This we know is dx (^ ),so
das \ or /
that expression (17) can be put in the form
8 2 F ,
 JT dxdydz.
The whole value of llNdS is accordingly
9 2 F
, ,
w+^r y '
and equation (16) now assumes the form
42 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
This is known as Poisson's Equation; clearly if we know the value of the
potential at every point, it enables us to find the charges by which this
potential is produced.
50. In free space, where there are no electric charges, the equation
assumes the form
and this is known as Laplace's Equation. We shall denote the operator
.* .
8^ dy* a* 2
by V 2 , so that Laplace's equation may be written in the abbreviated form
V 2 F=0 .................................... (20).
Equations (18) and (20) express the same fact as Gauss' Theorem, but
express it in the form of a differential equation. Equation (20) shews that
in a region in which no charges exist, the potential satisfies a differential
equation which is independent of the charges outside this region by which
the potential is produced. It will easily be verified by direct differentiation
that the value of V given in equation (10) is a solution of equation (20).
We can obtain an idea of the physical meaning of this differential
equation as follows.
Let us take any point and construct a sphere of radius r about this
point. The mean value of F averaged over the surface of the sphere is
terr*))
VdS
~
where r, 9, < are polar coordinates, having as origin. If we change the
radius of this sphere from r to r + dr, the rate of change of F is
8F 1 /Y8F .
 smOdOdd)
dr 47T./J dr
*8F ,
= 0, by Gauss' Theorem,
shewing that JF is independent of the radius r of the sphere. Taking r 0,
the value of F is seen to be equal to the potential at the origin 0.
This gives the following interpretation of the differential equation :
F varies from point to point in such a way that the average value of F
taken over any sphere surrounding any point is equal to the value of V at 0.
4954] Maxima and Minima of Potential 43
DEDUCTIONS FROM LAW OF INVERSE SQUARE.
51. THEOREM. The potential cannot have a maximum or a minimum
value at any point in space which is not occupied by an electric charge.
For if the potential is to be a maximum at any point 0, the potential at
every point on a sphere of small radius r surrounding must be less than
that at 0. Hence the average value of the potential on a small sphere
surrounding must be less than the value at 0, a result in opposition to
that of the last section.
A similar proof shews that the value of V cannot be a minimum.
52. A second proof of this theorem is obtained at once from Laplace's
equation. Regarding V simply as a function of x, y, z, a necessary condition
92 y ffY ffY
for V to have a maximum value at any point is that  , ^ and ^ shall
B& 2 8 ( y 2 3^ 2
each be negative at the point in question, a condition which is inconsistent
with Laplace's equation
a 2 F a 2 F a 2 F
lW + df + dz 2 ~
So also for V to be a minimum, the three differential coefficients would
have to be all positive, and this again would be inconsistent with Laplace's
equation.
53. If V is a maximum at any point 0, which as we have just seen
8F
must be occupied by an electric charge, then the value of ~~ must be
negative as we cross a sphere of small radius r. Thus 1 1 ^ dS is negative
where the integration is taken over a small sphere surrounding 0, and by
Gauss' Theorem the value of the surface integral is 4?re, where e is the
total charge inside the sphere. Thus e must be positive, and similarly if F
is a minimum, e must be negative. Thus :
If V is a maximum at any point, the point must be occupied by a positive
charge, and if V is a minimum at any point, the point must be occupied by a
negative charge.
54. We have seen ( 36) that in moving along a line of force we are
moving, at every point, from higher to lower potential, so that the potential
continually decreases as we move along a line of force. Hence a line of
force can end only at a point at which the potential is a minimum, and
similarly by tracing a line of force backwards, we see that it can begin only
at a point of which the potential is a maximum. Combining this result
with that of the previous theorem, it follows that :
44 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
Lines of force can begin only on positive charges, and can end only on
negative charges.
It is of course possible for a line of force to begin on a positive charge,
and go to infinity, the potential decreasing all the way, in which case the
line of force has, strictly speaking, no end at all. So also, a line of force may
come from infinity, and end on a negative charge.
Obviously a line of force cannot begin and end on the same conductor,
for if it did so, the potential at its two ends would be the same. Hence there
can be no lines of force in the interior of a hollow conductor which contains
no charges ; consequently there can be no charges on its inner surface.
Tubes of Force.
55. Let us select any small area dS in the field, and let us draw the
lines of force through every point of the boundary of this small area. If
dS is taken sufficiently small, we can suppose the electric intensity to be the
same in magnitude and direction at every point of dS, so that the directions
of the lines of force at all the points on the boundary will be approximately
all parallel. By drawing the lines of force, then, we shall obtain a " tubular "
surface i.e., a surface such that in the neighbourhood of any point the
surface may be regarded as cylindrical. The surface obtained in this way
is called a " tube of force." A normal crosssection of a " tube of force " is a
section which cuts all the lines of force through its boundary at right angles.
It therefore forms part of an equipotential surface.
56. THEOREM. If a>i, co 2 be the areas of two normal crosssections of the
same tube of force, and R ly R 2 the intensities at these sections, then
Consider the closed surface formed by the two crosssections of areas
&>!, ft> 2 , and of the part of the tube of force join
ing them. There is no charge inside this surface,
so that by Gauss' theorem, 1/^^ = 0.
If the direction of the lines of force is from
G>! to &> 2 , then the outward normal intensity
FIG. 12. over W 2 is R z , so that the contribution from this
area to the surface integral is R. 2 a) 2 . So also
over (Wi the outward normal intensity is R 1} so that G^ gives a contribution
R^. Over the rest of the surface, the outward normal is perpendicular
to the electric intensity, so that N=Q, and this part of the surface con
tributes nothing to uNd8. The whole value of this integral, then, is
R z a) 2 R l w l ,
and since this, as we have seen, must vanish, the theorem is proved.
5458]
Tubes of Force
45
57. COULOMB'S LAW. If R is the outward intensity at a point just
outside a conductor, then R = 47rcr, where a is the surface density of electri
fication on the conductor.
We have already seen that the whole electrification of a conductor must
reside on the surface. Therefore we no longer deal with a volume density
of electrification p, such that the charge in the element of volume dxdydz is
pdxdydz, but with a surfacedensity of electrification <r such that the charge
on an element dS of the surface of the conductor is &dS.
The surface of the conductor, as we have seen, is an equipotential, so that
by the theorem of p. 29, the intensity is in a direction normal to the
surface. Let us draw perpendiculars to the surface at every
point on the boundary of a small element of area dS, these per
pendiculars each extending a small distance into the conductor
in one direction and a small distance away from the conductor
in the other direction. We can close the cylindrical surface so
formed, by two small plane areas, each equal and parallel to the
original element of area dS. Let us now apply Gauss' Theorem
to this closed surface. The normal intensity is zero over every
part of this surface except over the cap of area dS which is
outside the conductor. Over this cap the outward normal in
tensity is R, so that the value of the surface integral of normal
intensity taken over the closed surface, consists of the single term RdS.
The total charge inside the surface is <rdS, so that by Gauss' Theorem,
FIG. 13.
.(21),
and Coulomb's Law follows on dividing by dS.
58. Let us draw the complete tube of force which is formed by the
lines of force starting from points on the boundary of the element dS of the
surface of the conductor. Let us suppose that the surface density on this
element is positive, so that the area dS forms the normal crosssection at
FIG. 14.
the positive end, or beginning, of the tube of force. Let us suppose that at
the negative end of the tube of force, the normal cross section is dS', that
46 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
the surface density of electrification is cr', v being of course negative, and
that the intensity in the direction of the lines of force is R. Then, as in
equation (21),
R'dS' =  *Tr<r'dS f ,
since the outward intensity is now R'.
Since R, R are the intensities at two points in the same tube of force
at which the normal crosssections are dS, dS', it follows from the theorem
of 56, that
RdS = RdS'
and hence, on comparing the values just found for RdS and R'dS', that
adS = cr dS' ' .
Since crdS and cr'dS' are respectively the charges of electricity from which
the tube begins and on which it terminates, we see that :
The negative charge of electricity on which a tube of force terminates is
numerically equal to the positive charge from which it starts.
If we close the ends of the tube of force by two small caps inside the
conductors, as in fig. 14, we have a closed surface such that the normal
intensity vanishes at every point. Thus, by Gauss' Theorem, the total
charge inside must vanish, giving the result at once.
59. The numerical value of either of the charges at the ends of a
tube of force may conveniently be spoken of as the strength of the tube. A
tube of unit strength is spoken of by many writers as a unit tube of force.
The strength of a tube of force is adS in the notation already used, and
this, by Coulomb's Law, is equal to j RdS where R is the intensity at the
end dS of the tube. By the theorem of 56, RdS is equal to J^o^ where
R lt &>! are the intensity and crosssection at any point of the tube. Hence
R l a) l = 47T times the strength of the tube. It follows that :
The intensity at any point is equal to 4?r times the aggregate strength per
unit area of the tubes which cross a plane drawn at right angles to the
direction of the intensity.
In terms of unit tubes of force, we may say that the intensity is 4?r
times the number of unit tubes per unit area which cross a plane drawn at
right angles to the intensity.
The conception of tubes of force is due to Faraday : indeed it formed
almost his only instrument for picturing to himself the phenomena of the
Electric Field. It will be found that a number of theorems connected with
the electric field become almost obvious when interpreted with the help of
the conception of tubes of force. For instance we proved on p. 37 that
5862] Tubes of Force 47
when a number of charged bodies are placed inside a hollow conductor, they
induce on its inner surface a charge equal and opposite to the sum of all
their charges. This may now be regarded as a special case of the obvious
theorem that the total charge associated with the beginnings and termi
nations of any number of tubes of force, none of which pass to infinity, must
be nil.
EXAMPLES OF FIELDS OF FORCE.
60. It will be of advantage to study a few particular fields of electric
force by means of drawing their lines of force and equipotential surfaces.
I. Two Equal Point Charges.
61. Let A, B be two equal point charges, say at the points x = a, + a.
The equations of the lines of force which are in the plane of x, y are
easily found to be
a
where P is the point x, y.
This equation admits of integration in the form
x t a x a
(23).
From this equation the lines of force can be drawn, and will be found to lie
as in fig. 15.
62. There are, however, only a few cases in which the differential
equations of the lines of force can be integrated, and it is frequently simplest
to obtain the properties of the lines of force directly from the differential
equation. The following treatment illustrates the method of treating lines
of force without integrating the differential equation.
From equation (22) we see that obvious lines of force are
(i) y = 0, g = 0, giving the axis AB ;
(ii) x = 0, PA = PB, ^ = co , giving the line which bisects AB at
right angles.
These lines intersect at C, the middle point of AB. At this point, then.
P has two values, and since ^ = ^ , it follows that we must have X =
dx dx X
Y= 0. In other words, the point C is a point of equilibrium, as is otherwise
obvious.
7
ft
48
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. n
The same result can be seen in another way. If we start from A and
draw a small tube surrounding the line AB, it is clear that the crosssection
of the tube, no matter how small it was initially, will have become infinite
by the time it reaches the plane which bisects AB at right angles in fact
the crosssection is identical with the infinite plane. Since the product of
the crosssection and the normal intensity is constant throughout a tube, it
follows that at the point C, the intensity must vanish.
FIG. 15.
At a great distance R from the points A and B, the fraction
P& + PA*
vanishes to the order of R~ l , so that
_
dx'X'
except for terms of the order of 1/R*. Thus at infinity the lines of force
become asymptotic to straight lines passing through the origin.
Let us suppose that a line of force starts from A making an angle with
BA produced, and is asymptotic at infinity to a line through C which makes
an angle < with BA produced. By rotating this line of force about the
axis AB we obtain a surface which may be regarded as the boundary of
a bundle of tubes of force. This surface cuts off an area
27r(l cos0)r 2
62]
Charges + e, +e
49
from a small sphere of radius r drawn about A, and at every point of
this sphere the intensity is e/r 2 normal to the sphere. The surface again
cuts off an area
27T 1  COS
from a sphere of very great radius R drawn about C, and at every point
of this sphere the intensity is 2e/R 2 . Hence, applying Gauss' Theorem
to the part of the field enclosed by the two spheres of radii r and R,
and the surface formed by the revolution of the line of force about AB y
we obtain
27T (1  cos 6) r 2 x^ 2  27r(l cos 0) R 2 x = 0,
from which follows the relation
sin \6 = \/2 sin J<.
In particular, the line of force which leaves A in a direction perpendicular
to AB is bent through an angle of 45 before it reaches its asymptote at
infinity.
The sections of the equipotentials made by the plane of xy for this case
are shewn in fig. 16 which is drawn on the same scale as fig. 15. The equa
tions of these curves are of course
curves of the sixth degree. The equipotential which passes through C is
of interest, as it intersects itself at the point C. This is a necessary conse
FIG. 16.
quence of the fact that C is a point of equilibrium. Indeed the conditions
for a point of equilibrium, namely
may be interpreted as the condition that the equipotential (V constant)
through the point should have a double tangent plane or a tangent cone at
the point.
J.
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. ii
II. Point charges + e, e.
63. Let charges + e be at the points x a (A, B) respectively. The
differential equations of the lines of force are found to be
dx~X
and the integral of this is
x + a a; a
= cons.
The lines of force are shewn in fig. 17.
FIG. 17.
III. Electric Doublet.
64. An important case occurs when we have two large charges f e, e,
equal and opposite in sign, at a small distance apart. Taking Cartesian
coordinates, let us suppose we have the charge I e at a, 0, and the charge
e at  a, 0, 0, so that the distance of the charges is 2a.
The potential is
\ f (x of + y* + z* V(a? + a) 2 + y 2 f z* '
and when a is very small, so that squares and higher powers of a may be
neglected, this becomes
If a is made to vanish, while e becomes infinite, in such a way that
2ea retains the finite value /j,, the system is described as an electric
63, 64] Charges +e, e 51
doublet of strength yu, having for its direction the positive axis of x. Its
potential is
or, if we turn to polar coordinates and write x = r cos 0, is
^ .................................... (24).
The lines of force are shewn in fig. 18. Obviously the lines at the
FIG. 18.
centre of this figure become identical with those shewn in fig. 17, if the
latter are shrunk indefinitely in size.
42
52
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. II
IV. Point charges +4e, e.
65. Fig. 19 represents the distribution of the lines of force when the
electric field is produced by two point charges, 4 4e at A and e at B.
At infinity the resultant force will be 3e/r 2 , where r is the distance from
a point near to A and B. The direction of this force is outwards. Thus no
lines of force can arrive at B from infinity, so that all the lines of force
which enter B must come from A. The remaining lines of force from A go
to infinity. The tubes of force from A to B form a bundle of aggregate
FIG. 19.
strength e, while those from A to infinity have aggregate strength 30. The
two bundles of tubes of force are separated by the lines of force through C.
At G the direction of the resultant force is clearly indeterminate, so that G
is a point of equilibrium. As the condition that G is a point of equilibrium
we have
4ie e
BC'<
= 0.
So that AB = BC. At C the two lines of force from A coalesce and then
separate out into two distinct lines of force, one from G to B, and the other
from G to infinity in the direction opposite to CB.
The equipotentials in this field, the system of curves
4 1
pZ = p5 = cons "
are represented in fig. 20, which is drawn on the same scale as fig. 19.
65]
Charges
e
53
Since C is a point of equilibrium the equipotential through the point C
must of course cut itself at C. At C the potential
4<e e e
CA~CB = AB'
since CA = 2CB. From the loop of this equipotential which surrounds B,
the potential must fall continuously to x as we approach .B, since, by the
theorem of 51, there can be no maxima or minima of potential between
this loop and the point B. Also no equipotential can intersect itself since
there are obviously no points of equilibrium except C. One of the inter
FIG. 20.
mediate equipotentials is of special interest, namely that over which the
potential is zero. This is the locus of the point P given by
JL.,_L_O
PA PB~
and is therefore a sphere. This is represented by the outer of the two
closed curves which surround B in the figure.
In the same way we see that the other loop of the equipotential through
C must be occupied by equipotentials for which the potential rises steadily
to the value + oo at A. So also outside the equipotential through C, the
potential falls steadily to the value zero at infinity. Thus the zero equi
potential consists of two spheres the sphere at infinity and the sphere
surrounding B which has already been mentioned.
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. ii
V. Three equal charges at the corners of an equilateral triangle.
66. As a further example we may examine the disposition of equi
potentials when the field is produced by three point charges at the comers
of an equilateral triangle. The intersection of these by the plane in which
the charges lie is represented in fig. 21, in which A, B, C are the points at
which the charges are placed, and D is the centre of the triangle ABC.
It will be found that there are three points of equilibrium, one on each
of the lines AD, BD, CD. Taking AD = a, the distance of each point of
equilibrium from D is just less than Ja. The same equipotential passes
through all three points of equilibrium. If the charge at each of the points
A, B, C is taken to be unity, this equipotential has a potential  .
a
The
FIG. 21.
equipotential has three loops surrounding the points A, B, C. In each of
these loops the equipotentials are closed curves, which finally reduce to
small circles surrounding the points A, B, C. Those drawn correspond to
3'25 3'5 375
a
304
., . . . T O A3 O O O i O
the potentials  , , 
and .
a
Outside the equipotential
the equipotentials are closed curves
66] Charges +e, +e, +e 55
surrounding the former equipotential, and finally reducing to circles at in
2 2*25 2'5 2'75
finity. The curves drawn correspond to potentials  , , and .
a a a a
3*04
There remains the region between the point D and the equipotential  .
a
At Z) the potential is  , so that the potential falls as we recede from the
a
equipotential *  and reaches its minimum value at D. The potential at
D is of course not a minimum for all directions in space : for the potential
increases as we move away from D in directions which are in the plane
ABC, but obviously decreases as we move away from D in a direction per
pendicular to this plane. Taking D as origin, and the plane ABC as plane
of xy, it will be found that near D the potential is
FIG. 22.
Thus the equipotential through D is shaped like a right circular cone in
the immediate neighbourhood of the point D. From the equation just
found, it is obvious that near D the sections of the equipotentials by the
plane ABC will be circles surrounding D.
56 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
From a study of the section of the equipotentials as shewn in fig. 21, it is
easy to construct the complete surfaces. We see that each equipotential for
which V has a very high value consists of three small spheres surrounding the
points A, B, C. For smaller values of V, which must, however, be greater
3'04
than , each equipotential still consists of three closed surfaces surround
ing A, B, C, but these surfaces are no longer spherical, each one bulging out
towards the point D. As V decreases, the surfaces continue to swell out,
3'04
until, when V = , the surfaces touch one another simultaneously, in a
Cb
way which will readily be understood on examining the section of this equi
potential as shewn in fig. 21. It will be seen that this equipotential is
shaped like a flower of three petals from which the centre has been cut away.
g
As V decreases further the surfaces continue to swell, and when V=, the
a
space at the centre becomes filled up. For still smaller values of V the
equipotentials are closed singlyconnected surfaces, which finally become
spheres at infinity corresponding to the potential V = 0.
The sections of the equipotentials by a plane through DA perpendicular
to the plane ABC are shewn in fig. 22.
SPECIAL PROPERTIES OF EQUIPOTENTIALS AND LINES OF FORCE.
The Equipotentials and Lines of Force at infinity.
67. In  40, we obtained the general equation
If r denotes the distance of x, y, z from the origin, and TI the distance of
#i> 2/i > #1, from the origin, we may write this in the form
T7" S? 6 1
[r 2  2 tej + y^ + zzd + n 2 ]^
At a great distance from the origin this may be expanded in descending
powers of the distance, in the form
f yy, + zz, , 3 (xx, + yy, + zz^ 1 r? j
 ,
L ~r^~ 2 " r* 2
1 2c
The term of order  is 1 .
r r
The term of order is %e 1 (xx l + yy l + zz^.
6668] Equipotentials and Lines of Force 57
If the origin is taken at the centroid of e at # 1} y lt z ly e^ at # 2 , y 2 , z 2 , etc.,
we have
i#i = 0, 2X2/1 = 0, Se^! = 0.
Thus by taking the origin at this centroid, the term of order  will
disappear.
The term of order is
3 1
<p 2$ O#! + yyi + zz^f 
Let A, B, C, be the moments of inertia about the axes, of e l at # 1} y lf z lt
etc., and let / be the moment of inertia about the line joining the origin to
x t y,z\ then
and the terms of order become
(as*?! + yyi + zz^f = r 2 Qerf  1),
me
A+B + C3I
Thus taking the centroid of the charges as origin, the potential at a great
distance from the origin can be expanded in the form
v= Ze A + B + CZI
r r 3
Thus except when the total charge 2<e vanishes, the field at infinity is
the same as if the total charge 2e were collected at the centroid of the
charges. Thus the equipotentials approximate to spheres having this point
as centre, and the asymptotes to the lines of force are radii drawn through
the centroid. These results are illustrated in the special fields of force
considered in 61 66.
The Lines of Force from collinear charges.
68. When the field is produced solely by charges all in the same straight
line, the equipotentials are obviously surfaces of revolution about this line,
while the lines of force lie entirely in planes through this line. In this
important case, the equation of the lines of force admits of direct integration.
Let Pj, P 2 , P 3) ... be the positions of the charges e ly e%, e 3 , .... Let Q, Q r be
any two adjacent points on a line of force. Let N be the foot of the
perpendicular from Q to the axis PjPa, ..., and let a circle be drawn perpen
dicular to this axis with centre N and radius QN. This circle subtends
at P l a solid angle
2?r a  cos #!>,
58
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. n
where 6 l is the angle QP^. Thus the surface integral of normal force
arising from e 1} taken over the circle QN, is
27T6! (1  COS 00
and the total surface integral of normal force taken over this surface is
1 cos 
If we draw the similar circle through Q\ we obtain a closed surface
bounded by these two circles and by the surface formed by the revolution
Q'
FIG. 23.
of QQ'. This contains no electric charge, so that the surface integral of
normal force taken over it must be nil. Hence the integral of force over
the circle QN must be the same as that over the similar circle drawn
through Q'. This gives the equations of the lines of force in the form
(integral of normal force through circle such as QN) = constant,
which as we have seen, becomes
S0! cos O l constant.
Analytically, let the point Pj have coordinates a 1} 0, 0, let P 2 have
coordinates a 2 , 0, 0, etc. and let Q be the point x, y, z. Then
cos 6 l =
X X,
and the equation of the surfaces formed by the revolution of the lines of
force is
v e l (x tfj)
2 = = constant.
It will easily be verified by differentiation that this is an integral of the
differential equation
Sy_Y
cix~ X'
68, 69] Equipotentials and Lines of Force 59
JEquipotentials which intersect themselves.
69. We have seen that, in general, the equipotential through any point
of equilibrium must intersect itself at the point of equilibrium.
Let x, y, z be a point of equilibrium, and let the potential at this point be
denoted by F . Let the potential at an adjacent point # + , y + y, z\ f, be
denoted by F$, ,,, f . By Taylor's Theorem, if f(x t y t z) is any function of
x, y, z, we have
)
where the differential coefficients of f are evaluated at x, y, z. Taking
f(x, y, z) to be the potential at x, y, z, this of course being a function of the
variables a?, y, z, the foregoing equation becomes
If x, y, z is a point of equilibrium,
ar = 8F = a
da dy dz
so that Ffc%f _F. +
Referred to a, y, z as origin, the coordinates of the point
z + become f, 77, f, and the equation of the equipotential F= (7 becomes
In the neighbourhood of the point of equilibrium, the values of f, 77, f are
small, so that in general the terms containing powers of f, 77, f higher than
squares may be neglected, and the equation of the equipotential V=C
becomes
f a ^+ 2^^ + ... = 2 (0 F ).
' 9# 2 8^y
In particular the equipotential F= F becomes identical, in the neighbour
hood of the point of equilibrium, with the cone
Let this cone, referred to its principal axes, become
af /2 + &7/ 2 + < 2 = ........................... (26),
then, since the sum of the coefficients of the squares of the variables is an
invariant,
A
= 1 + ^ + ^ =0.
dx dy d2
60 Electrostatics Field of Force [CH. n
Now a f 6 + c = is the condition that the cone shall have three per
pendicular generators. Hence we see that at the point at which an
equipotential cuts itself, we can always find three perpendicular tangents to
the equipotential. Moreover we can find these perpendicular tangents in an
infinite number of ways.
In the particular case in which the cone is one of revolution (e.g., if the
whole field is symmetrical about an axis, as in figures 16 and 20), the
equation of the cone must become
where the axis of f is the axis of symmetry. The section of the equipoten
tial made by any plane through the axis, say that of f "C, ', must now become
fs_2' a =
in the neighbourhood of the point of equilibrium, and this shews that the
tangents to the equipotentials each make a constant angle tan" 1 \/2 (= 54 44')
with the axis of symmetry.
In the more general cases in which there is not symmetry about an axis,
the two branches of the surface will in general intersect in a line, and the
cone reduces to two planes, the equation being
ap + &7/ 2 = 0,
where the axis of f is the line of intersection. We now have a + b = 0, so
that the tangent planes to the equipotential intersect at right angles.
An analogous theorem can be proved when n sheets of an equipotential
intersect at a puint. The theorem states that the n sheets make equal
angles TT/H with one another. (Rankin's Theorem, see Maxwell's Electricity
and Magnetism, 115, or Thomson and Tait's Natural Philosophy, 780.)
70. A conductor is always an equipotential, and can be constructed so as
to cut itself at any angle we please. It will be seen that the foregoing
theorems can fail either through the a, b and c of equation (24) all vanishing,
or through their all becoming infinite. In the former case the potential near
a point at which the conductor cuts itself, is of the form (cf. equation (25)),
F
,=
dx
so that the components of intensity are of the forms
8F
*(&+**)
The intensity near the point of equilibrium is therefore a small quantity of
the second order, and since by Coulomb's Law R = 47rcr, it follows that
6971]
Equipotentials and Lines of Force
61
the surface density is zero along the line of intersection, and is proportional
to the square of the distance from the line of intersection at adjacent points.
If, however, a, b and c are all infinite, we have the electric intensity also
infinite, and therefore the surface density is infinite along the line of inter
section.
It is clear that the surface density will vanish when the conducting
surface cuts itself in such a way that the angle less than two right angles
is external to the conductor; and that the surface density will become
infinite when the angle greater than two right angles is external to the
conductor. This becomes obvious on examining the arrangement of the
lines of force in the neighbourhood of the angle.
FIG. 24. Angle greater than two right angles external to conductor.
71.
FIG. 25. Angle less than two right angles external to conductor.
The arrangement shewn in fig. 25 is such as will be found at the
point of a lightning conductor. The object of the lightning conductor is
to ensure that the intensity shall be greater at its point than on any part
of the buildings it is designed to protect. The discharge will therefore take
62
Electrostatics Field of Force
[CH. ii
place from the point of the lightning conductor sooner than from any part of
the building, and by putting the conductor in good electrical communication
with the earth, it is possible to ensure that no harm shall be done to the
main buildings by the electrical discharge.
An application of the same principle will explain the danger to a human
being or animal of standing in the open air in the presence of a thunder
cloud, or of standing under an isolated tree. The upward point, whether the
head of man or animal, or the summit of the tree, tends to collect the lines of
force which pass from the cloud to the ground, so that a discharge of elec
tricity will take place from the head or tree rather than from the ground.
FIG. 26.
72. The property of lines of force of clustering together in this way is
utilised also in the manufacture of electrical instruments. A cage of wire is
Fm. 27.
placed round the instrument and almost all the lines of b force from any
charges which there may be outside the instrument will cluster together on
the convex surfaces of the wire. Very few lines of force escape through this
cage, so that the instrument inside the cage is hardly affected at all by any
electric phenomena which may take place outside it. Fig. 27 shews the
way in which lines of force are absorbed by a wire grating. It is drawn to
represent the lines of force of a uniform field meeting a plane grating placed
at right angles to the field of force.
71, 72] Examples 63
REFERENCES.
On the general theory of Electrostatic Forces and Potential :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Oxford (Clarendon Press). Chap. n.
THOMSON AND TAIT. Natural Philosophy. Cambridge (Univ. Press). Chap. vi.
On Cavendish's experiment on the Law of Force :
CAVENDISH. Electrical Researches. Experimental determination of the Law of
Electric Force ( 217235), and Note 19.
On Examples of Fields of Force :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Chaps, vi, vn.
>
T ^
EXAMPLES.
1. Two particles each of mass m and charged with e units of electricity of the same
sign are suspended by strings each of length a from the same point; prove that the
inclination B of each string to the vertical is given by the equation
sin 3 0=e 2 cos#.
2. Charges + 4e, e are placed at the points A, B, and C is the point of equilibrium.
Prove that the line of force which passes through C meets AB at an angle of 60 at A and
at right angles at C.
3. Find the angle at A (question 2) between AB and the line of force which leaves B
at right angles to AB.
4. Two positive charges e\ and e 2 are placed at the points A and B respectively.
Shew that the tangent at infinity to the line of force which starts from ei making an angle
a with BA produced, makes an angle
with BA, and passes through the point C in AB such that
AC : CB=e 2 : e^.
5. Point charges +e, e are placed at the points A, B. The line of force which leaves
A making an angle a with AB meets the plane which bisects AB at right angles, in P.
Shew that
.a , . PAB
6. If any closed surface be drawn not enclosing a charged body or any part of one,
shew that at every point of a certain closed line on the surface it intersects the equi
potential surface through the point at right angles.
7. The potential is given at four points near each other and not all in one plane.
Obtain an approximate construction for the direction of the field in their neighbourhood.
64 Electrostatics Field of Force [OH. n
8. The potentials at the four corners of a small tetrahedron J, B, C, D are F 1? F 2>
F 3 , F 4 respectively. G is the centre of gravity of masses J/ x at A, J/ 2 at B, M 3 at C,
J/4 at /). Shew that the potential at G is
9. Charges 3e, e, e are placed at A, B, C respectively, where B is the middle
point of AC. Draw a rough diagram of the lines of force ; shew that a line of force which
starts from A making an angle a with A B > cos" 1 (  ) will not reach B or (7, and shew
that the asymptote of the line of force for which a=cos~ 1 ( ) is at right angles to AC.
10. If there are three electrified points A, B, C in a straight line, such that AC=f,
BC = j , and the charges are e, ^' and Va respectively, shew that there is always a
spherical equipotential surface, and discuss the position of the points of equilibrium on
the line ABC when V=e ~ . and when V=e ~  ^
(/a) 2 (/+) 2
11. A and C are spherical conductors with charges e + e' and e respectively. Shew
that there is either a point or a line of equilibrium, depending on the relative size and
positions of the spheres, and on e'/e. Draw a diagram for each case giving the lines of
force and the sections of the equipotentials by a plane through the centres.
12. An electrified body is placed in the vicinity of a conductor in the form of a
surface of anticlastic curvature. Shew that at that point of any line of force passing from
the body to the conductor, at which the force is a minimum, the principal curvatures of
the equipotential surface are equal and opposite.
13. Shew that it is not possible for every family of nonintersecting surfaces in free
space to be a family of equipotentials, and that the condition that the family of surfaces
/(A, *,y, z) =
shall be capable of being equipotentials is that
8X\ 2 /8X\ 2 /8X
shall be a function of X only.
14. In the last question, if the condition is satisfied find the potential.
15. Shew that the confocal ellipsoids
can form a system of equipotentials, and express the potential as a function of X.
16. If two charged concentric shells be connected by a wire, the inner one is wholly
discharged. If the law of force were  , prove that there would be a charge B on the
inner shell such that if A were the charge on the outer shell, and /, g the sum and diS'er
ence of the radii,
2gB=Ap {(
approximately.
Examples 65
17. Three infinite parallel wires cut a plane perpendicular to them in the angular
points A, B, C of an equilateral triangle, and have charges e, e, e' per unit length
respectively. Prove that the extreme lines of force which pass from A to C make at
starting angles ^ n and IT with A C, provided that e' ^> 2e.
18. A negative point charge e% lies between two positive point charges e and e 3 on
the line joining them and at distances a, $ from them respectively. Shew that, if the
magnitudes of the charges are given by
e\ _ 3 _ e%\ 3 , . , 2
there is a circle at every point of which the force vanishes. Determine the general form
of the equipotential surface on which this circle lies.
19. Charges of electricity <? l5 e 2 , e 3 , (e 3 > e^} are placed in a straight line, the
negative charge being midway between the other two. Shew that, if 4e 2 lie between
(e 3 *efy 3 and (e 3 ^ + efy 3 , the number of unit tubes of force that pass from e 1 to e z is
 s) + = (  e (e  e + e
J.
CHAPTER III.
CONDUCTORS AND CONDENSERS.
73. BY a conductor, as previously explained, is meant any body or
system of bodies, such that electricity can flow freely over the whole. When
electricity is at rest on such a conductor, we have seen ( 44) that the charge
will reside entirely on the outer surface, and ( 37) that the potential will
be constant over this surface.
A conductor may be used for the storage of electricity, but it is found
that a much more efficient arrangement is obtained by taking two or more
conductors generally thin plates of metal and arranging them in a certain
way. This arrangement for storing electricity is spoken of as a " con
denser." In the present Chapter we shall discuss the theory of single
conductors and of condensers, working out in full the theory of some of the
simpler cases.
CONDUCTORS.
A Spherical Conductor.
74. The simplest example of a conductor is supplied by a sphere, it
being supposed that the sphere is so far removed from all other bodies that
their influence may be neglected. In this case it is obvious from symmetry
that the charge will spread itself uniformly over the surface. Thus if e is
the charge, and a the radius, the surface density <r is given by
total charge e
~ total area of surface 4<7ra 2 '
The electric intensity at the surface being, as we have seen, equal to
47rcr, is e/a 2 .
From symmetry the direction of the intensity at any point outside the
sphere must be in a direction passing through the centre. To find the
amount of this intensity at a distance r from the centre, let us draw a sphere
of radius r, concentric with the conductor. At every point of this sphere
the amount of the outward electric intensity is by symmetry the same, say R,
7375] Spheres and Cylinders 67
and its direction as we have seen is normal to the surface. Applying Gauss'
Theorem to this sphere, we find that the surface integral of normal intensity
NdS becomes simply R multiplied by the area of the surface 4?rr 2 , so that
or R = ~ .
7 .2
This becomes e/a? at the surface, agreeing with the value previously
obtained.
Thus the electric force at any point is the same as if the charged sphere
were replaced by a point charge e, at the centre of the sphere. And, just
as in the case of a single point charge e, the potential at a point outside the
sphere, distant r from its centre, is
77 f r e j e
V =  dr =  ,
Joo r 9 r'
p
so that at the surface of the sphere the potential is  .
Inside the sphere, as has been proved in 37, the potential is constant,
and therefore equal to e/a, its value at the surface, while the electric intensity
vanishes.
As we gradually charge up the conductor, it appears that the potential
at the surface is always proportional to the charge of the conductor.
It is customary to speak of the potential at the surface of a conductor as
" the potential of the conductor," and the ratio of the charge to this potential
is defined to be the " capacity " of the conductor. From a general theorem,
which we shall soon arrive at, it will be seen that the ratio of charge to
potential remains the same throughout the process of charging any conductor
or condenser, so that in every case the capacity depends only on the shape
and size of the conductor or condenser in question. For a sphere, as we
have seen,
charge e
capacitv =  ^r7 =  = a,
potential e
a
so that the capacity of a sphere is equal to its radius.
A Cylindrical Conductor.
75. Let us next consider the distribution of electricity on a circular
cylinder, the cylinder either extending to infinity, or else having its ends so
far away from the parts under consideration that their influence may be
neglected.
As in the case of the sphere, the charge distributes itself symmetrically,
52
68 Conductors and Condensers [OH. in
so that if a is the radius of the cylinder, and if it has a charge e per unit
length, we have
cr =
To find the intensity at any point outside the conductor, construct a Gauss'
surface by first drawing a cylinder of radius r, coaxal with the original
cylinder, and then cutting off a unit length by two parallel planes at
unit distance apart, perpendicular to the axis. From sym
metry the force at every point is perpendicular to the axis
of the cylinder, so that the normal intensity vanishes at
every point of the plane ends of this Gauss' surface. The
surface integral of normal intensity will therefore consist
entirely of the contributions from the curved part of the
surface, and this curved part consists of a circular band, of
unit width and radius r hence of area 2?r?\ If R is the
outward intensity at every point of this curved surface,
Gauss' Theorem supplies the relation
2TrrR = 4Tre,
so that R = . FIG. 28.
r
This, we notice, is independent of a, so that the intensity is the same as
it would be if a were very small, i.e., as if we had a fine wire electrified with
a charge e per unit length.
In the foregoing, we must suppose r to be so small, that at a distance r
from the cylinder the influence of the ends is still negligible in comparison
with that of the nearer parts of the cylinder, so that the investigation does
not hold for large values of r. It follows that we cannot find the potential
by integrating the intensity from infinity, as has been done in the cases of
the point charge and of the sphere. We have, however, the general
differential equation
so that in the present case, so long as r remains sufficiently small
dV = _2e
dr r '
giving upon integration
V=C2e\ogr.
The constant of integration C cannot be determined without a knowledge
of the conditions at the ends of the cylinder. Thus for a long cylinder, the
intensity at points near the cylinder is independent of the conditions at the
ends, but the potential and capacity depend on these conditions, and are
therefore not investigated here.
7577] Infinite Plane 69
An Infinite Plane.
76. Suppose we have a plane extending to infinity in all directions, and
electrified with a charge a per unit area. From symmetry it is obvious that
the lines of force will be perpendicular to the plane at every point, so that
the tubes of force will be of uniform crosssection. Let us take as Gauss'
surface the tube of force which has as crosssection any element &> of area
of the charged plane, this tube being closed by two crosssections each of
area w at distance r from the plane. If R is the intensity over either of
these crosssections the contribution of each crosssection to Gauss' integral
is Ro), so that Gauss' Theorem gives at once
whence R = ZTTCT.
The intensity is therefore the same at all distances from the plane.
The result that at the surface of the plane the intensity is 2Trcr, may at
first seem to be in opposition to Coulomb's theorem ( 57) which states that
the intensity at the surface of a conductor is 4?ro. It will, however, be seen
from the proof of this theorem, that it deals only with conductors in
which the conducting matter is of finite thickness ; if we wish to regard
the electrified plane as a conductor of this kind we must regard the
total electrification as being divided between the two faces, the surface
density being Jo on each, and Coulomb's theorem then gives the correct
result.
If the plane is not actually infinite, the result obtained for an infinite
plane will hold within a region which is sufficiently near to the plane for the
edges to have no influence. As in the former case of the cylinder, we can
obtain the potential within this region by integration. If r measures the
perpendicular distance from the plane
so that F=(727r0T,
and, as before, the constant of integration cannot be determined without
a knowledge of the conditions at the edges.
77. It is instructive to compare the three expressions which have been
obtained for the electric intensity at points outside a charged sphere, cylinder
and plane respectively. Taking r to be the distance from the centre of the
70
Conductors and Condensers
[CH. Ill
sphere, from the axis of the cylinder, and from the plane, respectively, we
have found that
outside the sphere, R is proportional to ,
outside the cylinder, R is proportional to  ,
outside the plane, R is constant.
From the point of view of tubes of force, these results are obvious enough
deductions from the theorem that the intensity varies inversely as the cross
section of a tube of force. The lines of force from a sphere meet in a point,
the centre of the sphere, so that the tubes of force are cones, with cross
section proportional to the square of the distance from the vertex. The
lines of force from a cylinder all meet a line, the axis of the cylinder, at right
angles, so that the tubes of force are wedges, with crosssection proportional
to the distance from the edge. And the lines of force from a plane all meet
the plane at right angles, so that the tubes of force are prisms, of which the
crosssection is constant.
78. We may also examine the results from the point of view which
regards the electric intensity as the resultant of the attractions or repulsions
from different elements of the charged surface.
Let us first consider the charged plane. Let P, P f be two points at
distances r, r' from the plane, and let Q be the
foot of the perpendicular from either on to the
plane. If P is near to Q, it will be seen that
almost the whole of the intensity at P is due
to the charges in the immediate neighbourhood
of Q. The more distant parts contribute forces
which make angles with QP nearly equal to a
right angle, and after being resolved along QP
these forces hardly contribute anything to the
resultant intensity at P.
Owing to the greater distance of the point P',
the forces from given elements of the plane are
smaller at P' than at P, but have to be resolved
through a smaller angle. The forces from the
regions near Q are greatly diminished from the
former cause and are hardly affected by the latter.
The forces from remote regions are hardly affected
by the former circumstance, but their effect is
greatly increased by the latter. Thus on moving FIG. 29.
7779] Spherical Condenser 71
from P to P' the forces exerted by regions near Q decrease in efficiency,
while those exerted by more remote regions gain. The result that the
total resultant intensity is the same at P' as at P, shews that the
decrease of the one just balances the gain of the other.
If we replace the infinite plane by a sphere, we find that the force at
a near point P is as before contributed
almost entirely by the charges in the
neighbourhood of Q. On moving from P
to P', these forces are diminished just as
before, but the number of distant elements
of area which now add contributions to
the intensity at P' is much less than
before. Thus the gain in the contribu FIG. 30.
tions from these elements does not suffice
to balance the diminution in the contributions from the regions near Q, so
that the resultant intensity falls off on withdrawing from P to P'.
The case of a cylinder is of course intermediate between that of a plane
and that of a sphere.
CONDENSERS.
Spherical Condenser.
79. Suppose that we enclose the spherical conductor of radius a dis
cussed in 74, inside a second spherical conductor of internal radius 6, the
two conductors being placed so as to be concentric and insulated from one
another.
It again appears from symmetry that the intensity at every point must
be in a direction passing through the common centre of the two spheres, and
must be the same in amount at every point of any sphere concentric with
the two conducting spheres. Let us imagine a concentric sphere of radius r
drawn between the two conductors, and when the charge on the inner sphere
is e, let the intensity at every point of the imaginary sphere of radius r be
R. Then, as before, Gauss' Theorem, applied to the sphere of radius r,
gives the relation
so that R  .
This only holds for values of r intermediate between a and 6, so that to
obtain the potential we cannot integrate from infinity, but must use the
differential equation. This is
SVe
72 Conductors and Condensers [CH. in
which upon integration gives
V=C + e  (27).
We can determine the constant of integration as soon as we know the
potential of either of the spheres. Suppose for instance that the outer
sphere is put to earth so that F= over the sphere r = b, then we obtain at
once from equation (27)
= C 4
so that G= e/b, and equation (27) becomes
On taking r a, we find that the potential of the inner sphere is e ( r),
\CL 1
and its charge is e, so that the capacity of the condenser is
1 ab
: r or
ba'
80. In the more general case in which the outer sphere is not put to
earth, let us suppose that V a , V b are the potentials of the two spheres
of radii a and b, so that, from equation (27)
Then we have on subtraction
so that the capacity is
The lines of force which starb from the inner sphere must all end on the
inner surface of the outer sphere, and each line of force has equal and
opposite charges at its two ends. Thus if the charge on the inner sphere is
e, that on the inner surface of the outer sphere must be e. We can there
fore regard the capacity of the condenser as being the charge on either of
the two spheres divided by the difference of potential, the fraction being
taken always positive. On this view, however, we leave out of account any
charge which there may be on the outer surface of the outer sphere : this
is not regarded as part of the charge of the condenser.
7982] Cylindrical Condenser 73
An examination of the expression for the capacity.
ab
b a '
will shew that it can be made as large as we please by making b a
sufficiently small. This explains why a condenser is so much more
efficient for the storage of electricity than a single conductor.
81. By taking more than two spheres we can form more complicated
condensers. Suppose, for instance, we take concentric spheres of radii
a, b, c in ascending order of magnitude, and connect both the spheres of
radii a and c to earth, that of radius b remaining insulated. Let F be the
potential of the middle sphere, and let e and 2 be the total charges on its
inner and outer surfaces. Regarding the inner surface of the middle sphere
and the surface of the innermost sphere as forming a single spherical
condenser, we have
Vab
and again regarding the outer surface of the middle sphere and the outer
most sphere as forming a second spherical condenser we have
Vbc
e * G b'
Hence the total charge E of the middle sheet is given by
E = e l + e 2
 V
"
b a c b) '
so that regarded as a single condenser, the system of three spheres has a
capacity
ab be
b a c 6*
which is equal to the sum of the capacities of the two constituent condensers
into which we have resolved the system. This is a special case of a general
theorem to be given later ( 85).
Coaxal Cylinders.
82. A conducting circular cylinder of radius a surrounded by a second
coaxal cylinder of internal radius b will form a condenser. If e is the charge
on the inner cylinder per unit length, and if F is the potential at any point
between the two cylinders at a distance r from their common axis, we have,
as in 75,
V=C2e\ogr,
74 Conductors and Condensers [CH. in
and it is now possible to determine the constant C as soon as the potential
of either cylinder is known.
Let V a , V b be the potentials of the inner and outer cylinders, so that
V a = C2e\oga,
V b = C2e\ogb.
By subtraction V a  V b  2e log ( J ,
so that the capacity is
"'
per unit length.
Parallel Plate Condenser.
83. This condenser consists of two parallel plates facing one another,
say at distance d apart. Lines of force will pass from the inner face of one
to the inner face of the other, and in regions sufficiently far removed from
the edges of the plate these lines of force will be perpendicular to the plate
throughout their length. If cr is the surface density of electrification of one
plate, that of the other will be a. Since the crosssection of a tube
remains the same throughout its length, and since the electric intensity
varies as the crosssection, it follows that the intensity must be the same
throughout the whole length of a tube, and this, by Coulomb's Theorem,
will be 47T0, its value at the surface of either plate. Hence the difference
of potential between the two plates, obtained by integrating the intensity
along a line of force, will be
The capacity per unit area is equal to the charge per unit area cr
divided by this difference of potential, and is therefore
The capacity of a condenser formed of two parallel plates, each of area A y
is therefore
A
except for a correction required by the irregularities in the lines of force
near the edges of the plates.
Inductive Capacity.
84. It was found by Cavendish, and afterwards independently by
Faraday, that the capacity of a condenser depends not only on the shape
and size of the conducting plates but also on the nature of the insulating
material, or dielectric to use Faraday's word, by which they are separated.
8285]
Series of Condensers
It is further found that on replacing air by some other dielectric, the
capacity of a condenser is altered in a ratio which is independent of the
shape and size of the condenser, and which depends only on the dielectric
itself. This constant ratio is called the specific inductive capacity of the
dielectric, the inductive capacity of air being taken to be unity.
We shall discuss the theory of dielectrics in a later Chapter. At present
it will be enough to know that if C is the capacity of a condenser when its
plates are separated by air, then its capacity, when the plates are separated
by any dielectric, will be KC, where K is the inductive capacity of the
particular dielectric used. The capacities calculated in this Chapter have all
been calculated on the supposition that there is air between the plates, so
that when the dielectric is different from air each capacity must be multi
plied by K.
The following table will give some idea of the values of K actually
observed for different dielectrics :
Sulphur 3'84
Resin 2'55
Paraffin 2'32
Ebonite 3'15
Glass about 7.
COMPOUND CONDENSERS.
Condensers in Parallel.
85. Let us suppose that we take any number of condensers of capacities
C lt C z , ... and connect all their high potential plates together by a conducting
FIG. 31.
This is
wire, and all their low potential plates together in the same way.
known as connecting the condensers in parallel.
The high potential plates have now all the same potential, say V lt while
the low potential plates have all the same potential, say F . If lt e. 2 , ... are
the charges on the separate high potential plates, we have
76 Conductors and Condensers
and the total charge E is given by
E = e l + e^ + . . .
[OH. m
Thus the system of condensers behaves like a single condenser of capacity
It will be noticed that the compound condenser discussed in 81 con
sisted virtually of two simple spherical condensers connected in parallel.
Condensers in Cascade.
86. We might, however, connect the low potential plate of the first to
the high potential plate of the second, the low potential plate of the second
to the high potential plate of the third, and so on. This is known as
arranging the condensers in cascade.
FIG. 32.
Suppose that the high potential plate of the first has a charge e. This
induces a charge e on the low potential plate, and since this plate together
with the high potential plate of the second condenser now form a single
insulated conductor, there must be a charge + e on the high potential plate
of the second condenser. This induces a charge e on the low potential
plate of this condenser, and so on indefinitely; each high potential plate will
have a charge + e, each low potential plate a charge e.
Thus the difference of potential of the two plates of the first condenser
will be e/C lt that of the second condenser will be e/C 2 and so on, so that the
total fall of potential from the high potential plate of the first to the low
potential plate of the last will be
1 1
We see that the arrangement acts like a single condenser of capacity
1
1 1
8589]
The Leyden Jar
77
PRACTICAL CONDENSERS.
Practical Units.
87. As will be explained more fully later, the practical units of
electricians are entirely different from the theoretical units in which we
have so far supposed measurements to be made. The practical unit of
capacity is called the farad, and is equal, very approximately, to 9 x 10 11 times
the theoretical c.G.S. electrostatic unit, i.e., is equal to the actual capacity
of a sphere of radius 9 x 10 n cms. This unit is too large for most purposes,
so that it is convenient to introduce a subsidiary unit the microfarad
equal to a millionth of the farad, and therefore to 9 x 10 3 c.G.S. electrostatic
units. Standard condensers can be obtained of which the capacity is equal
to a given fraction, frequently onethird or onefifth, of the microfarad.
The Leyden Jar.
88. For experimental purposes the commonest form of condenser is the
Leyden Jar. This consists essentially of a glass vessel, bottleshaped, of
which the greater part of the surface is coated
inside and outside with tinfoil. The two coatings
form the two plates of the condenser, contact with
the inner coating being established by a brass
rod which comes through the neck of the bottle,
the lower end having attached to it a chain
which rests on the inner coating of tinfoil.
To form a rough numerical estimate of the
capacity of a Leyden Jar, let us suppose that the
thickness of the glass is ^ cm., that its specific
inductive capacity is 7, and that the area covered
with tinfoil is 400 sq. cms. Neglecting corrections required by the irregu
larities in the lines of force at the edges and at the sharp angles at the
bottom of the jar, and regarding the whole system as a single parallel plate
condenser, we obtain as an approximate value for the capacity
K.A.
j electrostatic units,
O
FlG 33
in which we must put K=l, A = 400 and d = ^. On substituting these
values the capacity is found to be approximately 450 electrostatic units,
or about  microfarad.
Parallel Plates.
89. A more convenient condenser for some purposes is a modification of
the parallel plate condenser. Let us suppose that we arrange n plates, each
78
Conductors and Condensers
[CH. m
of area A, parallel to one another, the distance between any two adjacent
plates being d. If alternate plates are joined together so as to be in electrical
contact the space between each adjacent pair of plates may be regarded as
\
FIG. 34.
KA
forming a single parallel plate condenser of capacity j , , so that the capacity
of the compound condenser is (nl)KA/4>Trd. By making n large and d
small, we can make this capacity large without causing the apparatus to
occupy an unduly large amount of space. For this reason standard con
densers are usually made of this pattern.
90. Guard Ring. In both the condensers described the capacity can
only be calculated approximately. Lord Kelvin has devised a modification
of the parallel plate condenser in which the error caused by the irregularities
of the lines of force near the edges is dispensed with, so that it is possible
accurately to calculate the capacity from measurements of the plates.
The principle consists in making one plate B of the condenser larger than
the second plate A, the remainder of the space opposite B being occupied by
a "guard ring" C which fits A so closely as almost to touch, and is in the
same plane with it. The guard ring C and the plate A, if at the same
potential, may without serious error be regarded as forming a single plate of
a parallel plate condenser of which the other plate is B. The irregularities
in the tubes of force now occur at the outer edge of the guard ring (7, while
the lines of force from A to B are perfectly straight and uniform. Thus if A
is the area of the plate A its capacity may be supposed, with great accuracy,
to be
where d is the distance between the plates A and B.
8992] Mechanical Force 79
Submarine Cables.
91. Unfortunately for practical electricians, a submarine cable forms
a condenser, of which the capacity is frequently very considerable. The
effect of this upon the transmission of signals will be discussed later. A cable
consists generally of a core of strands of copper wire surrounded by a layer of
insulating material, the whole being enclosed in a sheathing of iron wire.
This arrangement acts as a condenser of the type of the coaxal cylinders
investigated in 82, the core forming the inner cylinder whilst the iron
sheathing and the sea outside form the outer cylinder.
In the capacity formula obtained in 82, namely
K
let us suppose that a = ^ cm., 6=1 cm. and that ^T = 3'2, this being about
the value for the insulating material generally used. Using the value
logg 2 = '6931 5, we find a capacity of 2'31 electrostatic units per unit length.
Thus a cable 2000 miles in length has a capacity equal to that of a sphere of
radius 2000 x 2'31 miles, i.e., of a sphere greater than the earth. In practical
units, the capacity of such a cable would be about 827 microfarads.
MECHANICAL FORCE ON A CONDUCTING SURFACE.
92. Let Q be any point on the surface of a conductor, and let the
surfacedensity at the point Q be cr. Let us draw any small area dS
FIG. 36.
enclosing Q. By taking dS sufficiently small, we may regard the area as
perfectly plane, and the charge on the area will be odS. The electricity on
the remainder of the conductor will exert forces of attraction or repulsion on
the charge vdS, and these forces will shew themselves as a mechanical force
acting on the element of area dS of the conductor. We require to find the
amount of this mechanical force.
80 Conductors and Condensers [CH. in
The electric intensity at a point near Q and just outside the conductor is
47T0, by Coulomb's Law, and its direction is normally away from the surface.
Of this intensity, part arises from the charge on dS itself, and part from the
charges on the remainder of the conductor. As regards the first part, which
arises from the charge on dS itself, we may notice that when we are con
sidering a point sufficiently close to the surface, the element dS may be
treated as an infinite electrified plane, the electrification being of uniform
density cr. The intensity arising from the electrification of dS at such a
point is accordingly an intensity 2?rcr normally away from the surface. Since
the total intensity is 47rcr normally away from the surface, it follows that the
intensity arising from the electrification of the parts of the conductor other
than dS must also be ZTTCT normally away from the surface. It is the forces
composing this intensity which produce the mechanical action on dS.
The charge on dS being adS, the total force will be 27ra 2 dS normally away
from the surface. Thus per unit area there is a force 2?ro 2 tending to repel
the charge normally away from the surface. The charge is prevented from
leaving the surface of the conductor by the action between electricity and
matter which has already been explained. Action and reaction being equal
and opposite, it follows that there is a mechanical force 27ro 2 per unit area
acting normally outwards on the material surface of the conductor.
Remembering that R = 47r<7, we find that the mechanical force can also
be expressed as   per unit area.
07T
93. Let us try to form some estimate of the magnitude of this mechanical
force as compared with other mechanical forces with which we are more
familiar. We have already mentioned Maxwell's estimate that a gramme of
gold, beaten into a goldleaf one square metre in area, can hold a charge of
60,000 electrostatic units. This gives 3 units per square centimetre as the
charge on each face, giving for the intensity at the surface,
R = 4770 = 38 c.G.s. units,
and for the mechanical force
R 2
27r<7 2 = = 55 dynes per sq. cm.
OTT
Lord Kelvin, however, found that air was capable of sustaining a
tension of 9600 grains wt. per sq. foot, or about 700 dynes per sq. cm.
This gives # = 130, a = 10.
R 2
Taking ^=100 as a large value of R, we find = 400 dynes per
sq. cm. The pressure of a normal atmosphere is
1,013,570 dynes per sq. cm.,
9294] Electrified SoapBubble 81
so that the force on the conducting surface would be only about ^^ of an
atmosphere : say '3 mm. of mercury.
If a goldleaf is beaten so thin that 1 gm. occupies 1 sq. metre of area,
the weight of this is '0981 dyne per sq. cm. In order that 27ro 2 may be
equal to '0981, we must have a = '1249. Thus a small piece of goldleaf
would be lifted up from a charged surface on which it rested as soon as the
surface acquired a charge of about J of a unit per sq. cm.
Electrified SoapBubble.
94. As has already been said, this mechanical force shews itself well on
electrifying a soapbubble.
Let us first suppose a closed soapbubble blown, of radius ft. If the
atmospheric pressure is II, the pressure inside will be somewhat greater than
II, the resulting outward force being just balanced by the tension of the
surface of the bubble. If, however, the bubble is electrified there will be an
additional force acting normally outwards on the surface of the bubble, namely
the force of amount 27r<r 2 per unit area just investigated, and the bubble will
expand until equilibrium is reached between this and the other forces acting
on the surface.
As the electrification and consequently the radius change, the pressure
inside will vary inversely as the volume, and therefore inversely as ft 3 . Let
\
FIG. 37.
us, then, suppose the pressure to be KJO?. Consider the equilibrium of the
small element of surface cut off by a circular cone through the centre, of small
semivertical angle 6. This element is a circle of radius ft#, and therefore
of area 7rft 2 2 . The forces acting are :
(i) The atmospheric pressure n?rft 2 ^ 2 normally inwards.
(ii) The internal pressure 7rft 2 2 normally outwards.
ft
j. 6
82 Conductors and Condensers [CH. in
(iii) The mechanical force due to electrification, 2?r<7 2 x 7ra 2 # 2 normally
outwards.
(iv) The system of tensions acting in the surface of the bubble across
the boundary of the element.
If T is the tension per unit length, the tension across any element of
length ds of the small circle will be Tds acting at an angle 6 with the tangent
plane at P, the centre of the circle. This may be resolved into Tds cos 6 in
the tangent plane, and Tds sin along PO. Combining the forces all round
the small circle of circumference 27ra0, we find that the components in the
tangent plane destroy one another, while those along PO combine into a
resultant 27ra# x T sin 6. To a sufficient approximation this may be written
as 27ra0 2 T.
The equation of equilibrium of the element of area is accordingly
or, simplifying, II   27r<r 2 + = (28).
Let a De the radius when the bubble is uncharged, and let the radius be
! when the bubble has a charge e, so that
4Tra! 2 '
Then n ~^ + ^ =0)
if ^ 2 T
We can without serious error assume T to be the same in the two cases.
If we eliminate T from these two equations, we obtain
giving the charge in terms of the radii in the charged and uncharged states.
95. We have seen ( 93) that the maximum pressure on the surface
which electrification can produce is only about ^W atmosphere : thus it is
not possible for electrification to change the pressure inside by more than
about jJ^o atmosphere, so that the increase in the size of the bubble is
necessarily very slight.
If, however, the bubble is blown on a tube which is open to the air,
equation (28) becomes
T
7T<7 = 
a
9497] Energy 83
As a rough approximation, we may still regard the bubble as a uniformly
charged sphere, so that if V is its potential,
a =
and the relation is F 2 =
giving V in terms of the radius of the bubble, if the tension T is known. In
this case the electrification can be made to produce a large change in the
radius, by using films for which T is very small.
Energy of Discharge.
96. On discharging a conductor or condenser, a certain amount of
energy is set free. This may shew itself in various ways, e.g. as a spark or
sound (as in lightning and thunder), the heating of a wire, or the piercing of
a hole through a solid dielectric. The energy thus liberated has been
previously stored up in charging the conductor or condenser.
To calculate the amount of this energy, let us suppose that one plate of
a condenser is to earth, and that the other plate has a charge e and is at
potential F, so that if C is the capacity of the condenser,
e = CV .................................... (29).
If we bring up an additional charge de from infinity, the work to be
done is, in accordance with the definition of potential, Vde. This is equal
to dW, where W denotes the total work done in charging the condenser up
to this stage, so that
dW=Vde
p rf p
= ~ by equation (29).
On interation we obtain
(30),
no constant of integration being added since W must vanish when e = 0.
This expression gives the work done in charging a condenser, and therefore
gives also the energy of discharge, which may be used in creating a spark,
in heating a wire, etc.
Clearly an exactly similar investigation will apply to a single conductor,
so that expression (30) gives the energy either of a condenser or of a single
conductor. Using the relation e = CV y the energy may be expressed in any
one of the forms
........................ (31).
97. As an example of the use of this formula, let us suppose that we
have a parallel plate condenser, the area of each plate being A, and the
62
84 Conductors and Condensers [OH. in
distance of the plates being d, so that C = A/4>Trd, by 83. Let a be the
surface density of the high potential plate, so that e = <rA. Let the low
potential plate be at zero potential, then the potential of the high potential
plate is
and the electrical energy is
W
Now let us pull the plates apart, so that d is increased to d f . The
electrical energy is now 27rd'(T 2 A, so that there has been an increase of
electrical energy of amount
27TC7 2 J. (d'  d).
It is easy to see that this exactly represents the work done in separating
the two plates. The mechanical force on either plate is 27rcr 2 per unit area,
so that the total mechanical force on a plate is 2?rcr 2 J.. Obviously, then,
the above is the work done in separating the plates through a distance
d'd.
It appears from this that a parallel plate condenser affords a ready means
of obtaining electrical energy at the expense of mechanical. A more valuable
property of such a condenser is that it enables us to increase an initial
difference of potential. The initial difference of potential
4>7rdcr
is increased, by the separation, to
By taking d small and d' large, an initial small difference of potential
may be multiplied almost indefinitely, and a potential difference which is
too small to observe may be increased until it is sufficiently great to affect
an instrument. By making use of this principle, Volta first succeeded in
detecting the difference of electrostatic potential between the two terminals
of an electric battery.
REFERENCES.
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chapter vm.
CAVENDISH. Electrical Researches. Experiments on the charges of bodies. 236
294.
EXAMPLES.
1. The two plates of a parallel plate condenser are each of area A, and the distance
between them is. d, this distance being small compared with the size of the plates. Find
the attraction between them when charged to potential difference V, neglecting the
irregularities caused by the edges of the plates. Find also the energy set free when the
plates are connected by a wire.
97] Examples 85
2. A sheet of metal of thickness t is introduced between the two plates of a parallel
plate condenser which are at a distance d apart, and is placed so as to be parallel to the
plates. Shew that the capacity of the condenser is increased by an amount
t
4rrd(dt}
per unit area. Examine the case in which t is very nearly equal to d.
3. A highpressure main consists first of a central conductor, which is a copper tube
of inner and outer diameters of T 9 F and }f inches. The outer conductor is a second copper
tube coaxal with the first, from which it is separated by insulating material, and of
diameters Iff and l^f inches. Outside this is more insulating material, and enclosing
the whole is an iron tube of internal diameter 2 T ^ inches. The capacity of the conductor
is found to be 367 microfarad per mile : calculate the inductive capacity of the insulating
material.
4. An infinite plane is charged to surface density or, and P is a point distant half an
inch from the plane. Shew that of the total intensity STTO at P, half is due to the charges
at points which are within one inch of P, and half to the charges beyond.
5. A disc of vulcanite (nonconducting) of radius 5 inches, is charged to a uniform
surface density a by friction. Find the electric intensities at points on the axis of the
disc distant respectively 1, 3, 5, 7 inches from the surface.
6. A condenser consists of a sphere of radius a surrounded by a concentric spherical
shell of radius b. The inner sphere is put to earth, and the outer shell is insulated.
Shew that the capacity of the condenser so formed is ^ 
7. Four equal large conducting plates A, B, C, D are fixed parallel to one another.
A and D are connected to earth, B has a charge E per unit area, and C a charge E' per
unit area. The distance between A and B is a, between B and C is 6, and between C and
D is c. Find the potentials of B and C.
8. A circular goldleaf of radius b is laid on the surface of a charged conducting
sphere of radius a, a being large compared to b. Prove that the loss of electrical energy
in removing the leaf from the conductor assuming that it carries away its whole charge
is approximately 1 b 2 E 2 /a?, where E is the charge of the conductor, and the capacity of the
leaf is comparable to 6.
9. Two condensers of capacities Ci and C 2 , and possessing initially charges & and Q 2
are connected in parallel. Shew that there is a loss of energy of amount
10. Two Leyden Jars A, B have capacities Ci, C 2 respectively. A is charged and a
spark taken: it is then charged as before and a spark passed between the knobs of
A and B. A and B are then separated and are each discharged by a spark. Shew that
the energies of the four sparks are in the ratio
C 2 .
11. Assuming an adequate number of condensers of equal capacity , shew how a
compound condenser can be formed of equivalent capacity 0C, where 6 is any rational
number.
86 Conductors and Condensers [OH. in
12. Three insulated concentric spherical conductors, whose radii in ascending order
of magnitude are a, b, c, have charges e l5 e 2 , e 3 respectively, find their potentials and shew
that if the innermost sphere be connected to earth the potential of the outermost is
diminished by
13. A conducting sphere of radius a is surrounded by two thin concentric spherical
conducting shells of radii b and c, the intervening spaces being filled with dielectrics of
inductive capacities K and L respectively. If the shell b receives a charge E, the other
two being uncharged, determine the loss of energy and the potential at any point when
the spheres A and C are connected by a wire.
14. Three thin conducting sheets are in the form of concentric spheres of radii
a + o?, a, a c respectively. The dielectric between the outer and middle sheet is of
inductive capacity K, that between the middle and inner sheet is air. At first the outer
sheet is uninsulated, the inner sheet is uncharged and insulated, the middle sheet is
charged to potential V and insulated. The inner sheet is now uninsulated without
connection with the middle sheet. Prove that the potential of the middle sheet falls to
KVc (a + d]
15. Two insulated conductors A and B are geometrically similar, the ratio of their
linear dimensions being as L to L'. The conductors are placed so as to be out of each
other's field of induction. The potential of A is V and its charge is E, the potential
of B is V and its charge is E'. The conductors are then connected by a thin wire.
Prove that, after electrostatic equilibrium has been restored, the loss of electrostatic
energy is
(EL'E'L}(VV'}
L+L'
16. If two surfaces be taken in any family of equipotentials in free space, and two
metal conductors formed so as to occupy their positions, then the capacity of the
C 1 C 1
condenser thus formed is * * , where C\j C 2 are the capacities of the external and
CxOg
internal conductors when existing alone in an infinite field.
17. A conductor (B) with one internal cavity of radius b is kept at potential U. A
conducting sphere (A\ of radius a, at great height above B contains in a cavity water
which leaks down a very thin wire passing without contact into the cavity of B through
a hole in the top of B. At the end of the wire spherical drops are formed, concentric
with the cavity ; and, when of radius d, they fall passing without contact through a small
hole in the bottom of B, and are received in a cavity of a third conductor (C) of capacity c
at a great distance below B. Initially, before leaking commences, the conductors A and C
are uncharged. Prove that after the rih drop has fallen the potential of C is
f ar(bdy .I^IT.
ady }c
where the disturbing effect of the wire and hole on the capacities is neglected.
18. An insulated spherical conductor, formed of two hemispherical shells in contact,
whose inner and outer radii are b and b', has within it a concentric spherical conductor of
radius a, and without it another spherical conductor of which the internal radius is c.
These two conductors are earthconnected and the middle one receives a charge. Shew
that the two shells will not separate if
Examples 87
19. Outside a spherical charged conductor there is a concentric insulated but un
charged conducting spherical shell, which consists of two segments. Prove that the two
segments will not separate if the distance of the separating plane from the centre is less
than
ab
where a, b are the internal and external radii of the shell.
20. A soapbubble of radius a is formed by a film of tension T, the external
atmospheric pressure being II. The bubble is touched by a wire from a large conductor
at potential F, and the film is an electrical conductor. Prove that its radius increases to
r, given by
FV
n(r3a3) + 27> 2 a2)=^.
O7T
21. If the radius and tension of a spherical soapbubble be a and T respectively,
shew that the charge of electricity required to expand the bubble to twice its linear
dimensions, would be
4 Vntt^er+Tna),
n being the atmospheric pressure.
22. A thin spherical conducting envelope, of tension T for all magnitudes of its
radius, and with no air inside or outside, is insulated and charged with a quantity Q of
electricity. Prove that the total gain in mechanical energy involved in bringing a charge
q from an infinite distance and placing it on the envelope, which both initially and finally
is in mechanical equilibrium, is
f (2^)* {($ + ?)*#}.
23. A spherical soapbubble is blown inside another concentric with it, and the
former has a charge E of electricity, the latter being originally uncharged. The latter
now has a small charge given to it. Shew that if a and 2a were the original radii, the
new radii will be approximately a + x, 2a+y, where
where n is the atmospheric pressure, and T is the surfacetension of each bubble.
24. Shew that the electric capacity of a conductor is less than that of any other
conductor which can completely surround it.
25. If the inner sphere of a concentric spherical condenser is moved slightly out of
position, so that the two spheres are no longer concentric, shew that the capacity is
increased.
CHAPTER IV.
SYSTEMS OF CONDUCTORS.
98. IN the present Chapter we discuss the general theory of an electro
static field in which there are any number of conductors. The charge on
each conductor will of course influence the distribution of charges on the
other conductors by induction, and the problem is to investigate the distri
butions of electricity which are to be expected after allowing for this mutual
induction.
We have seen that in an electrostatic field the potential cannot be a
maximum or a minimum except at points where electric charges occur. It
follows that the highest potential in the field must occur on a conductor, or
else at infinity, the latter case occurring only when the potential of every
conductor is negative. Excluding this case for the moment, there must be
one conductor of which the potential is higher than that anywhere else in
the field. Since lines of force run only from higher to lower potential ( 36),
it follows that no lines of force can enter this conductor, there being no
higher potential from which they can come, so that lines of force must leave
it at every point of its surface. In other words, its electrification must be
positive at every point.
So also, except when the potential of every conductor is positive, there
must be one conductor of which the potential is lower than that anywhere
else in the field, and the electrification at every point of this conductor must
be negative.
If the total charge on a conductor is nil, the total strength of the tubes
of force which enter it must be exactly equal to the total strength of the
tubes which leave it. There must therefore be both tubes which enter and
tubes which leave its surface, so that its potential must be intermediate
between the highest and lowest potentials in the field. For if its potential
were the highest in the field, no tubes could enter it, and vice versa. On
any such conductor the regions of positive electrification are separated from
regions of negative electrification by " lines of no electrification," these lines
being loci along which a = 0. In general the resultant intensity at any
98, 99] Systems of Conductors 89
point of a conductor is 4Tra. At any point of a line of no electrification,
this intensity vanishes, so that every point of a " line of no electrification "
is also a point of equilibrium.
At a point of equilibrium we have already seen that the equipotential
through the point cuts itself. A line of no electrification, however, lies
entirely on a single equipotential, so that this equipotential must cut itself
along the line of no electrification. Moreover, by 69, it must cut itself at
right angles, except when it consists of more than two sheets.
99. We can prove the two following propositions :
I. If the potential of every conductor in the field is given, there is only
one distribution of electric charges which will produce this distribution of
potential.
II. If the total charge of every conductor in the field is given, there is
only one way in which these charges can distribute themselves so as to be in
equilibrium.
If proposition I. is not true, let us suppose that there are two different
distributions of electricity which will produce the required potentials. Let
<r denote the surface density at any point in the first distribution, and cr' in
the second. Consider an imaginary distribution of electricity such that the
surface density at any point is cr cr'. The potential of this distribution
at any point P is
where the integration extends over the surfaces of all the conductors, and
r is the distance from P to the element dS. If P is a point on the surface
of any conductor,
f
dS and
are by hypothesis equal, each being equal to the given potential of the
conductor on which P lies. Thus
so that the supposed distribution of density a & is such that the potential
vanishes over all the surfaces of the conductors. There can therefore be no
lines of force, so that there can be no charges, i.e., cr cr'= everywhere, so
that the two distributions are the same.
And again, if proposition II. is not true, let us suppose that there are
two different distributions cr and a such that the total charge on each
conductor has the assigned value. A distribution a a' now gives zero
as the total charge on each conductor. It follows, as in 98, that the
90 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
potential of every conductor must be intermediate between the highest and
lowest potentials in the field, a conclusion which is obviously absurd, as
it prevents every conductor from having either the highest or the lowest
potential. It follows that the potentials of all the conductors must be equal,
so that again there can be no lines of force and no charges at any point, i.e.,
o = a' everywhere.
It is clear from this that the distribution of electricity in the field is fully
specified when we know either
(i) the total charge on each conductor,
or (ii) the potential of each conductor.
SUPERPOSITION OF EFFECTS.
100. Suppose we have two equilibrium distributions :
(i) A distribution of which the surface density is o at any point,
giving total charges E lt E 2 , ... on the different conductors, and potentials
V V
r i, v o, . ...
(ii) A distribution of surface density cr', giving total charges E^, E^ ...
and potentials F/, F 2 ',
Consider a distribution of surface density a + a'. Clearly the total
charges on the conductors will be E^E^, E 2 + E 2 ', ..., and if V P is the
potential at any point P,
where the notation is the same as before. If P is o% the first conductor,
however, we know that
/ /
<7
T
^dS=V l ',
r
so that Fp=F I +F 1 '; and similarly when P is on any other conductor.
Thus the imaginary distribution of surface density is an equilibrium dis
tribution, since it makes the surface of each conductor an equipotential,
and the potentials are
F.+ F/, F 2 +F 2 ', ....
The total charges, as we have seen, are E l + E^, E 2 + E 2 , . . . , and from
the proposition previously proved, it follows that the distribution of surface
density a + a' is the only distribution corresponding to these charges.
We have accordingly arrived at the following proposition :
// charges E l} E 2 , ... give rise to potentials Fj, F 2 , ..., and if charges
99101] Superposition of Effects 91
EI, E^ ... give rise to potentials F/, F 2 ', ..., then charges E 1 + E 1 ', E 2 + # 2 ', ...
will give rise to potentials Fi+ F/, F 2 + F 2 ', ....
In words: if we superpose two systems of charges, the potentials produced
can be obtained by adding together the potentials corresponding to the two
component systems.
Clearly the proposition can be extended so as to apply to the superposi
tion of any number of systems.
We can obviously deduce the following :
// charges E lt E 2 , ... give rise to potentials F 1? F 2 , ..., then charges
^ KE Zy ... give rise to potentials KV l} KV^ ....
101. Suppose now that we have n conductors fixed in position and
uncharged. Let us refer to these conductors as conductor (1), conductor (2),
etc. Suppose that the result of placing unit charge on conductor (1) and
leaving the others uncharged is to produce potentials
on the n conductors respectively, then the result of placing E 1 on (1) and
leaving the others uncharged is to produce potentials
PuE,, pizE lt ...p ln Ei.
Similarly, if placing unit charge on (2) and leaving the others uncharged
gives potentials
>2i> Pv,Pm,
then placing E 2 on (2) and leaving the others uncharged gives potentials
p 21 E 2 , pw E 2 , . . . p m E 2 .
In the same way we can calculate the result of placing E 3 on (3), E 4 on
(4), and so on.
If we now superpose the solutions we have obtained, we find that the
effect of simultaneous charges E l) E 2 , ... E n is to give potentials V lt F 2 , ... F w ,
where
etc
These equations give the potentials in terms of the charges. The coeffi
cients p n , p 2l , ... do not depend on either the potentials or charges, being
purely geometrical quantities, which depend on the size, shape and position
of the different conductors.
92 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
Green's Reciprocation Theorem.
102. Let us suppose that charges e p , e Q , ... on elements of conducting
surfaces at P, Q, ... produce potentials V P , V Q , ... at P, Q, ..., and that
similarly charges e p ', e Q ', ... produce potentials V P ', V Q ', Then Green's
Theorem states that
2e p Fp' = 2e P 'Vp,
the summation extending in each case over all the charges in the field.
To prove the theorem, we need only notice that
the summation extending over all charges except e p , so that in *2<e P V P the
coefficient of
e Q 'V Q . Thus
coefficient of p~ is e P 6Q from the term e P V P , and e P e<J from the term
~ PQ
= SepFp', from symmetry.
103. The following theorem follows at once :
If total charges E lt E 2 on the separate conductors of a system produce
potentials Fi, V 2 , ..., and if charges E^, E%, ... produce potentials V,
F 2 ', ...,then
2EV'=2E'V .............................. (33),
the summation extending in each case over all the conductors.
To see the truth of this, we need only divide up the charges E lt E 2 , ...
into small charges e p , e Q , ... on the ditferent small elements of the surfaces
of the conductors, and the proposition becomes identical with that just
proved.
104. Let us now consider the special case in which
^ = 1, E, = E 9 = Et=...=0,
so that F 1 = p 11 , F 2 =p 1 . 2 , etc,;
and #/ = (), AV=1, # 3 / = #4 / =...=0,
so that VI^PK, ^z=P22, e ^c.
Then 2EV =p 2l and 2 t E'V=p l2 , so that the theorem just proved becomes
Pi* = P*i
In words: The potential to which (1) is raised by putting unit charge on
(2), all the other conductors being uncharged, is equal to the potential to
which (2) is raised by putting unit charge on (1), all the other conductors
being uncharged.
102105]
Coefficients of Potential
93
As a special case, let us reduce conductor (2) to a point P, and suppose
that the system contains in addition only one other conductor (1). Then
The potential to which the conductor is raised by placing a unit charge
at P, the conductor itself being uncharged, is equal to the potential at P when
unit charge is placed on the conductor.
For instance, let the conductor be a sphere, and let the point P be at a
distance r from its centre. Unit charge on the sphere produces potential
 at P, so that unit charge at P raises the sphere to potential .
Coefficients of Potential, Capacity and Induction.
105. The relations jo 12 = > 21 , etc. reduce the number of the coefficients
PU, Pi*> Pnny which occur in equations (32), to %n(n + l). These coeffi
cients are called the coefficients of potential of the n conductors. Knowing
the values of these coefficients, equations (31) give the potentials in terms
of the charges.
If we know the potentials V lt F 2 , ..., we can obtain the values of the
charges by solving equations (32). We obtain a system of equations of
the form
etc.
(34).
The values of the qs obtained by actual solution of the equations (32), are
P^Pzz ...p m
Pr
where
A = pnPn'Pm 
.(35),
PinPzn Pnn
Thus q rs is the cofactor of p rg in A, divided by A.
The relation q r8 q gr
follows as an algebraical consequence of the relation p rs =p sr , or is at once
obvious from the relation
and equations (34), on taking the same sets of values as in 104.
94 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
There are n coefficients of the type q^, q 22 , ... q nn . These are known as
coefficients of capacity. There are ^n (n 1) coefficients of the type q rs , and
these are known as coefficients of induction.
From equations (34), it is clear that q u is the value of E when
F,=l, F 2 =F 3 =...=0. This leads to an extended definition of the
capacity of a conductor, in which account is taken of the influence of the
other conductors in the field. We define the capacity of the conductor 1,
when in the presence of conductors 2, 3, 4, ..., to be q n , namely, the charge
required to raise conductor 1 to unit potential, all the other conductors being
put to earth.
ENERGY OF A SYSTEM OF CHARGED CONDUCTORS.
106. Suppose we require to find the energy of a system of conductors,
their charges being E lt E^ ... E n , so that their potentials are F 1? F 2 , ... V n
given by equations (32).
Let W denote the energy when the charges are kE l} kE 2 , ... kE n .
Corresponding to these charges, the potentials will be kV^ kV 2) ... kV n . If
we bring up an additional small charge dk . E from infinity to conductor 1,
the work to be done will be dkE 1 .kV 1 ; if we bring up dkE 2 to conductor 2
the work will be dkE 2 kV 2 and so on. Let us now bring charges dkE l to 1,
dkE z to 2, dkE 3 to 3, ... dkE n to n. The total work done is
n ) ..................... (36),
and the final charges are
(k + dk) E lt (k + dk) E 2 ,...(k + dk) E n .
The energy in this state is the same function of k + dk as W is of k, and may
therefore be expressed as
Expression (36), the increase in energy, is therefore equal to ^= dk, whence
so that on integration
W = kk*(E l V, + E 2 V 2 + ... + E n V n ).
No constant of integration is added, since W must vanish when k=0.
Taking k = l, we obtain the energy corresponding to the final charges
E lf EZ, ... E nt in the form
(37).
105109] Energy 95
If we substitute for the Fs their values in terms of the charges as given by
equations (31), we obtain
W = \ (p n E^ + 2p l2 EiEz + p^ E + . . . ) (38)
and similarly from equations (34),
W = K<?nF 1 2 + 2<7 12 F 1 F 2 + g 22 F 2 2 + ...) (39).
107. If W is expressed as a function of the E's, we obtain by differ
entiation of (38),
3Tf F. Pa ff
Qj=j = p n ^ l \ p l2 J^ 2 + ... +p ln & n
= F! by equation (32).
This result is clear from other considerations. If we increase the charge
dW
on conductor 1 by dE lt the increase of energy is ^~ dE 1} and is also V 1 dE 1
since this is the work done on bringing up a new charge dE 1 to potential V l .
Thus on dividing by dE lt we get
3TF
So also ^W = E I
o YI
as is at once obvious on differentiation of (39).
108. In changing the charges from E l , E 2) ... to E^, E 2 , ... let us suppose
that the potentials change from F a , F 2 , ... to F/, F 2 ', .... The work done,
W W, is given by
Since, however, by 103, ^EV = 2"F, this expression for the work done
can either be written in the form
i S [E'V  EV(EV  E'V}},
which leads at once to
TT W = &(E'E)(V'+V) .................. (42);
or in the form J I {E'V 1  EV + (EV  E'V)},
which leads to W  W = ^(V V)(E' + E) .................. (43).
109. If the changes in the charges are only small, we may replace E' by
E + dE, and find that equation (42) reduces to
from which equation (40) is obvious, while equation (43) reduces to
leading at once to (41).
96 Systems of Conductors [CH. iv
110. It is worth noticing that the coefficients of potential, capacity and
induction can be expressed as differential coefficients of the energy ; thus
and so on.
The last two equations give independent proofs of the relations
Prs=Psr, q r s = q sr .
PROPERTIES OF THE COEFFICIENTS.
111. A certain number of properties can be deduced at once from the
fact that the energy must always be positive. For instance since the value
of W given by equation (38) is positive for all values of E lt E z , ... E n , it
follows at once that
Pn,pz<L,pM, are positive,
that Pup^ Pi*? is positive, that
is positive
and so on. Similarly from equation (39), it follows that
qn, q&> #33, ... are positive,
and there are other relations similar to those above.
112. More valuable properties can, however, be obtained from a con
sideration of the distribution of the lines of force in the field.
Let us first consider the field when
The potentials are Vi^pn* V> 2 =p l2 ,etc.
Since conductors 2, 3, ... are uncharged, their potentials must be inter
mediate between the highest and lowest potentials in the field. Thus the
potential of 1 must be either the highest or the lowest in the field, the other
extreme potential being at infinity. It is impossible for the potential of 1
to be the lowest in the field ; for if it were, lines of force would enter in at
every point, and its charge would be negative. Thus the highest potential
in the field must be that of conductor 1, and the other potentials must all
110114]
Properties of the Coefficients
be intermediate between this potential and the potential at infinity, and
must therefore all be positive. Thus p n , p l2 , p 13 , ... p ln are all positive and
the first is the greatest.
Next let us put F 1 = l, F a = F 8 = ... = 0,
so that the charges are q n , g 12 , q l3 , ... q ln .
The highest potential in the field is that of conductor 1. Thus lines of
force leave but do not enter conductor 1. The lines may either go to the
other conductors or to infinity. No lines can leave the other conductors.
Thus the charge on 1 must be positive, and the charges on 2, 3, ... all negative,
i.e., qu is positive and q l2) q l3) ... are all negative. Moreover the total strength
of the tubes arriving at infinity is <?n + #i 2 + #13 + ... +qm, so that this must
be positive.
113. To sum up, we have seen that
(i) All the coefficients of potential ( p n , p l2 , . . . ) are positive,
(ii) All the coefficients of capacity (q n , q^ y ... ) are positive,
(iii) All the coefficients of induction (q l2 , qi S) ... ) are negative,
and we have obtained the relations
(Pn  Pw) is positive,
(qu + 12 + + qm) is positive.
In limiting cases it is of course possible for any of the quantities which
have been described as always positive or always negative, to vanish.
VALUES OF THE COEFFICIENTS IN SPECIAL CASES.
Electric Screening.
114. The first case in which we shall consider the values of the
coefficients is that in which one conductor, say 1, is completely surrounded
by a second conductor 2.
FIG. 38.
If E l = 0, the conductor 2 becomes a closed conductor with no charge
inside, so that the potential in its interior is constant, and therefore V l = F 2 .
Putting E l = 0, the relation F x = F 2 gives the equation
j.
98 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
This being true for all values of E z , E 3 , ... we must have
Pl2=P&> Pl3=P23, etC.
Next let us put unit charge on 1, leaving the other conductors uncharged.
The energy is ^pu. If we join 1 and 2 by a wire, the conductors 1 and 2
form a single conductor, so that the electricity will all flow to the outer
surface. The wire may now be removed, and the energy in the system is \p^.
Energy must, however, have been lost in the flow of electricity, so that p 22
must be less than p u .
Since we have already seen that p l2 = p 22 and p n pu cannot be negative,
it is clear that p^ cannot be greater than p u . The foregoing argument,
however, goes further and enables us to prove that pup& is actually
positive.
Let us next suppose that conductor 2 is put to earth, so that F 2 = 0.
Then if E 1 = 0, it follows that F x = 0. Hence from the equations
E 1 = q ll V l + q l2 V 2 + ...+?i W 7 n (44)
we obtain in this special case that
quV* + quV*+..+qinV n = 0.
This is true, whatever the values of F 3 , F 4 , ..., so that
#13 = #14 = = qm = 0.
Suppose that conductor 1 is raised to unit potential while all the other
conductors are put to earth. The aggregate strength of the tubes of force
which go to infinity, namely q u + q iz + ... +q ln ( 112), is in this case zero, so
that q l2 =qu.
The system of equations (44) now reduces, when F 2 = 0, to
E, = q u V, (45),
^ 2 = ^i 2 F 1 + g 23 F 3 + g 24 F 4 + (46),
Equations (47) shew that the relations between charges and potential
outside 2 are quite independent of the electrical conditions which obtain
inside 2. So also the conditions inside 2 are not affected by those outside 2,
as is obvious from equation (45). These results become obvious when we
consider that no lines of force can cross conductor 2, and that there is no way
except by crossing conductor 2 for a line of force to pass from the conductors
outside 2 to those inside 2.
An electric system which is completely surrounded by a conductor at
potential zero is said to be "electrically screened" from all electric systems
114, 115] Coefficients for Spherical Condenser 99
outside this conductor ; for charges outside this " screen " cannot affect the
screened system. The principle of electric screening is utilised in electro
static instruments, in order that the instrument may not be affected by
external electric actions other than those which it is required to observe. As
a complete conductor would prevent observation of the working of the
instrument, a cage of wire is frequently used as a screen, this being very
nearly as efficient as a completely closed conductor (see 72). In more
delicate instruments the screening may be complete except for a small
window to admit of observation of the interior.
Spherical Condenser.
115. Let us apply the methods of this Chapter to the spherical con
denser described in 79. Let the inner sphere of radius a be taken to be
conductor 1, and the outer sphere of radius b be taken to be conductor 2.
The equations connecting potentials and charges are
A unit charge placed on 2 raises both 1 and 2 to potential 1/6, so that on
putting E l = 0, E 2 = 1, we must have V l = F 2 = l/b. Hence it follows that
1
If we leave 2 uncharged and place unit charge on 1, the field of force is that
investigated in 79, so that F x = I/a, F 2 = l/b. Hence
= 1 = 1
These results exemplify
(i) the general relation > 12 => 2 i>
(ii) the relation peculiar to electric screening, p 12 = p&.
The equations now become
1 ~~ a b '
Solving for E l and E z in terms of F x and F 2 , we obtain
ab v ab v
y 1 ~ 7, '2>
J  J \ ' 1 7
b a b a
T? _ ab y b 2 y
2 ~~ ba l b a 2 '
ab ab 6 2
so that ?n = j^> V = V* =: b^i i q * 2 = b^~a'
72
100 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
We notice that q^ = q^i, that the value of each is negative, and that
#11 = guy in accordance with 113. The value of q u is the capacity of
sphere 1 when 2 is to earth, and is in agreement with the result of 79.
The capacity of 2 when 1 is to earth, q w , is seen to be j . This can
~~ a
also be seen by regarding the system as composed of two condensers, the
inner sphere and the inner surface of the outer sphere form a single spherical
condenser of capacity j , while the outer surface of the outer sphere has
o a
capacity b. The total capacity accordingly
ab 6 2
b a b a'
Two spheres at a great distance apart.
116. Suppose we have two spheres, radii a, b, placed with their centres
at a great distance c apart. Let us first place unit charge on the former, the
FIG. 39.
charge being placed so that the surface density is constant. This will not
produce uniform potential over 2 ; at a point distant r from the centre of 1
it will produce potential 1/r. We can, however, adjust this potential to the
uniform value 1/c by placing on the surface of 2 a distribution of electricity
such that it produces a potential over this surface.
Take B, the centre of the second sphere, as origin, and AB as axis of x.
Then we may write
I I r ex f 1
=   = , as far as  .
c r cr c 2 c
Let a be the surface density required to produce this potential, then
clearly o is an odd function of a?, and therefore the total charge, the value of
a integrated over the sphere, vanishes. Thus the potential of 2 can be
adjusted to the uniform value 1/c without altering the total charge on 2
from zero, neglecting 1/c 3 . The new surface density being of the order of
1/c 2 , the additional potential produced on 1 by it will be at most of order 1/c 3 ,
so that if we neglect 1/c 3 we have found an equilibrium arrangement which
makes
^ = 1, E 2 =0, , = , F 2 = i.
a c
115117] Coefficients for two distant Spheres 101
Substituting these values in the equations
we find at once that p n =  neglecting ,
GL
Pl2 ~r c 3 '
and similarly we can see that
P.& = j neglecting .
o c
Solving the equations
Z7* ~E*
Y = +
2 ~ r b '
we find that, neglecting ,
c
a
ab
_L *~" ~
ab ab f 1
 7 asfaras,
" c 2
We notice that the capacity of either sphere is greater than it would be if
the other were removed. This, as we shall see later, is a particular case of a
general theorem.
Two conductors in contact.
117. If two conductors are placed in contact, their potentials must be
equal. Let the two conductors be conductors 1 and 2, then the equation
F! = F 2 becomes
*+ = 0,
or, say, a^ + ftE 2 + yE 3 + ... = 0.
If we know the total charge E on 1 and 2, we have
E\ + E 2 = E,
and on solving these two equations we can obtain E l and E 2 . We find that
102 Systems of Conductors [OH. TV
giving the ratio in which the charge E will distribute itself between the
two conductors 1 and 2. If the conductors 3, 4, ... are either absent or
uncharged,
which is independent of E and always positive. It is to be noticed that E l
vanishes only if ^22 = ^12, i.e., if 2 entirely surrounds 1.
MECHANICAL FORCES ON CONDUCTORS.
118. We have already seen that the mechanical force on a conductor is
the resultant of a system of tensions over its surface of amount 27rcr 2 per unit
area. The results of the present Chapter enable us to find the resultant
force on any conductor in terms of the electrical coefficients of the system.
Suppose that the positions of the conductors are specified by any co
ordinates fj, f 2 , ..., so that p u , p wt ..., q u , q lz , ..., and consequently also W,
are functions of the f's. If f l is increased to fi + dfi, without the charges on
dW
the conductors being altered, the increase in electrical energy is ^ rffj, and
tffi
this increase must represent mechanical work done in moving the conductors.
The force tending to increase fj is accordingly
_d_w
%
Since the charges on the conductors are to be kept constant, it will of
course be most convenient to use the form of W given by equation (38), and
the force is obtained in the form
It is however possible, by joining the conductors to the terminals of
electric batteries, to keep their potentials constant. In this case, however,
we must not use the expression (39) for W, and so obtain for the force
(49),
for the batteries are now capable of supplying energy, and an increase of
electrical energy does not necessarily mean an equal expenditure of mechanical
energy, for we must not neglect the work done by the batteries. Since the
resultant mechanical force on any conductor may be regarded as the resultant
of tensions 2Tra 2 per unit area acting over its surface, it is clear that this
resultant force in any position depends solely on the charges in this position.
It is therefore the same whether the charges or potentials are kept constant,
and expression (48) will give this force whether the conductors are connected
to batteries or not.
1 1 71 20] Mechanical forces 1 03
119. As an illustration, we may consider the force between the two
charged spheres discussed in 116.
dW
The force tending to increase c, namely ^ , is
" p 2 4. 2 F F + a F
c l '~8^ jM ' 2+ ~gc 2 '
and substituting the values
Pii =  + terms in  ,
1
#B = g
it is found that this force is
,. 2
 h terms in .
c c
Thus, except for terms in c~ 4 , the force is the same as though the charges
were collected at the centres of the spheres. Indeed, it is easy to go a stage
further and prove that the result is true as far as c~ 4 . We shall, however,
reserve a full discussion of the question for a later Chapter.
120. Let us write
i ( Pn E^ + 2p l2 E,E 2 + ...)= W e ,
Hfri^i a +2? u F 1 F, + ..0= W>.
Then W e and W v are each equal to the electrical energy ^EV, so that
W e + W v 2EV=0 ........................... (50).
In whatever way we change the values of
EU E 2 , ..., Fj, F 2 , ..., fj, 2 > ...,
equation (50) remains true. We may accordingly differentiate it, treating
the expression on the left as a function of all the E's, F's and 's. Denoting
the function on the lefthand of equation (50) by <f>, the result of differentia
tion will be
Now 8i_yFe
LI \J W ^\ Tf ^ irt
~ ^ ' " " >'
so that we are left with X 8^ = 0,
104 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
and since this equation is true for all displacements and therefore for all
values of Sft, Sft, . .., it follows that each coefficient must vanish separately.
Thus  = 0, or
aft aft
3TF
As we have seen,  1  is the mechanical force tending to increase ft,
0fi
and this has now been shewn to be equal to ^ , which is expression (49)
ui
with the sign reversed. Thus the mechanical force, whether the charges or
the potentials are kept constant, is
P Vf + 2 f F.F. + ...) ..................... (52),
i Ogi /
a form which is convenient when we know the potentials, but not the
charges, of the system.
In making a small displacement of the system such that ft is changed
rl T/F
into ft + dft, the mechanical work done is ^ dft. If the potentials are kept
0i
constant the increase in electrical energy is ^r^ft. The difference of these
expressions, namely
V aft aft
represents energy supplied by the batteries. From equation (51), it appears
that this expression is equal to 2 ^ & F <^ft> so that the batteries supply energy
tffi
equal to twice the increase in the electrical energy of the system, and of this
energy half goes to an increase of the final electrical energy, while half is
expended as mechanical work in the motion of the conductors.
Introduction of a new conductor into the field.
121. When a new conductor is introduced into the field, the coefficients
>n> ji2, , #11, #12 > are naturally altered.
Let us suppose the new conductor introduced in infinitesimal pieces,
which are brought into the field uncharged and placed in position so that
they are in every way in their final places except that electric communication
is not established between the different pieces. So far no work has been
done and the electrical energy of the field remains unaltered.
Now let electric communication be established between the different
pieces, so that the whole structure becomes a single conductor. The separate
120122] The Attracted Disc Electrometer 105
pieces, originally at different potentials, are now brought to the same
potential by the flow of electricity over the surface of the conductor.
Electricity can only flow from places of higher to places of lower potential,
so that electrical energy is lost in this flow. Thus the introduction of the
new conductor has diminished the electric energy of the field.
If we now put the new conductor to earth there is in general a further
flow of electricity, so that the energy is still further diminished.
Thus the electric energy of any field is diminished by the introduction of
a new conductor, whether insulated or not.
Consider the case in which the new conductor remains insulated. Let
the energy of the field before the introduction of the new conductor be
(p u E l * + 2p l2 E 1 E, + ...+p nn E n *) .................. (53).
After introduction, the energy may be taken to be
where p u ', etc., are the new coefficients of potential. Further coefficients of
the type pi >n +i, P^n+z, > Pn+i,n+i are of course brought into existence, but
do not enter into the expression for the energy, since by hypothesis E n+1 = 0.
Since expression (54) is less than expression (53), it follows that
is positive for all values of E 1} E 2 , .... Hence pu pu i g positive, and other
relations may be obtained, as in 111.
ELECTROMETERS.
I. The Attracted Disc Electrometer.
FIG. 40.
122. This instrument is, as regards its essential principle, a balance in
which the beam has a weight fixed at one end and a disc suspended from
the other. Under normal conditions the fixed weight is sufficiently heavy
106 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
to outweigh the disc. In using the instrument the disc is made to become
one plate of a parallel plate condenser, of which the second plate is adjusted
until the electric attraction between the two plates of the condenser is just
sufficient to restore the balance.
The inequalities in the distribution of the lines of force which would
otherwise occur at the edges of the disc are avoided by the use of a guard
ring ( 90), so arranged that when the beam of the balance is horizontal
the guardring and disc are exactly in one plane, and fit as closely as is
practicable.
Let us suppose that the disc is of area A and that the disc and guard
ring are raised to potential V. Let the second plate of the condenser be
placed parallel to the disc at a distance h from it, and put to earth. Then
the intensity between the disc and lower plate is uniform and equal to V/h,
so that the surface density on the lower face of the disc is a = Vj4nrh. The
mechanical force acting on the disc is therefore a force 27rcr 2 A or V 2 A/87rh 2
acting vertically downwards through the centre of the disc. If this just
suffices to keep the beam horizontal, it must be exactly equal to the weight,
say W, which would have to be placed on this disc to maintain equilibrium
if it were uncharged. This weight is a constant of the instrument, so that
the equation
8irh*
enables us to determine V in terms of known quantities by observing h.
The instrument is arranged so that the lower plate can be moved parallel
to itself by a micrometer screw, the reading of which gives h with great
accuracy. We can accordingly determine V in absolute units, from the
equation
If we wish to determine a difference of potential we can raise the upper
plate to one potential V ly and the lower plate to the second potential F a ,
and we then have
A more accurate method of determining a difference of potential is to
keep the disc at a constant potential v, and raise the lower plate succes
sively to potentials Fj and F a . If h^ and h 2 are the values of h which bring
the disc to its standard position when the potentials of the lower plate are
F! and F 2 , we have
877^
STI
122, 123]
The Quadrant Electrometer
ior
so that
It is now only necessary to measure 7^ /i, 2 , the distance through which
the lower plate is moved forward, and this can be determined with great
accuracy, as it depends solely on the motion of the micrometer screw.
II. The Quadrant Electrometer.
123. Measurement of Potential Difference. This instrument is more
delicate than the disc electrometer just described, but enables us only to
compare two potentials, or potential differ
ences; we cannot measure a single potential
in terms of known units.
The principal part of the instrument
consists of a metal cylinder of height small
compared with its radius, divided into four
quadrants A, S, C, D by two diameters at
right angles. These quadrants are insulated
separately, and then opposite quadrants
are connected in pairs, two by wires joined
to a point E and two by wires joined to
some other point F.
The inside of the cylinder is hollow and
inside this a metal disc or "needle" is free
to move, being suspended by a delicate
fibre, so that it can rotate without touching
the quadrants. Before using the instrument
the needle is charged to a high potential,
say v, either by means of the fibre, if this
is a conductor, or by a small conducting
wire hanging from the needle which passes through the bottom of the
cylinder. The fibre is adjusted so that when the quadrants are at the same
potential the needle rests, as shewn in the figure, in a symmetrical position
with respect to the quadrants. In this state either surface of the needle
and the opposite faces of the quadrants may be regarded as forming a parallel
plate condenser.
If, however, the potential of the two quadrants joined to E is different
from that of the two quadrants joined to F, there is an electrical force
tending to drag the needle under that pair of quadrants of which the potential
is more nearly equal to v. The needle accordingly moves in this direction
until the electric forces are in equilibrium with the torsion of the fibre, and
an observation of the angle through which the needle turns will give an
FIG. 41.
108 Systems of Conductors [CH. iv
indication of the difference of potential between the two pairs of quadrants.
This angle is most easily observed by attaching a small mirror to the fibre
just above the point at which it emerges from the quadrants.
Let us suppose that when the needle has turned through an angle 6,
the total area A of the needle is placed so that an area 8 is inside the pair
of quadrants at potential Fj, and an area A S inside the pair at potential
F 2 . Let h be the perpendicular distance from either face of the needle to
the faces of the quadrants. Then the system may be regarded as two
parallel plate condensers of area 8, distance h, and difference of potential
y F^ and two parallel plate condensers for which these quantities have the
values A 8, h, vV 2 . There are two condensers of each kind because
there are two faces, upper and lower, to the needle. The electrical energy
of this system is accordingly

The energy here appears as a quadratic function of the three potentials
concerned: it is expressed in the same form as the W v of 120. The
mechanical force tending to increase 0, i.e., the moment of the couple tending
to turn the needle in the direction of increasing, is therefore ^ . Now
dv
in Wy the only term in the coefficients of the potentials which varies with 6
is 8, so that on differentiation we obtain
W ' 4fjrh W
If r is the radius of the needle measured from its centre, which is under
dS
9(9
r)Sf
the line of division of the quadrants we clearly have ^ = r 2 , so that we can
write the equation just obtained in the form
80
In equilibrium this couple is balanced by the torsion couple of the fibre,
which tends to decrease 0. This couple may be taken to be k6, where k is a
constant, so that the equation of equilibrium is
r l )r'
For small displacements of the needle, r 2 may be replaced by a 2 , the
radius of the needle at its centre line. Also v is generally large compared
with F! and F 2 . The last equation accordingly assumes the simpler form
123, 124] The Quadrant Electrometer 109
shewing that 6 is, for small displacements of the needle, approximately
proportional to the difference of potential of the two pairs of quadrants.
The instrument can be made extraordinarily sensitive owing to the possibility
of obtaining quartzfibres for which the value of k is very small.
If the difference of potential to be measured is large, we may charge the
needle simply by joining it to one of the pairs of quadrants, say the pair at
potential F 2 . We then have v = F 2 , and equation (55) becomes
so that 6 is now proportional to the square of the potential difference to be
measured.
Writing , , = C, so that C is a constant of the instrument, we have,
when v is large
........................... (56),
when v = F 2 ,
(57).
124. Measurement of charge. Let us speak of the pairs of quadrants
at potentials F l5 F 2 , as conductors 1, 2 respectively, and let the needle be
conductor 3. When the quadrants are to earth and the needle is at
potential F 3 , the charge E induced on the first pair of quadrants by the
charge on the needle will be given by
where q ls is the coefficient of induction. This coefficient is a function of the
angle which defined the position of the needle. If the instrument is
adj usted so that = when both pairs of quadrants are to earth, we must
use the value of q l3 corresponding to = 0, say (#13)0, so that
E = (q\V. .............................. (58).
Now suppose that the first pair of quadrants is insulated and receives
an additional charge Q, the second pair being still to earth. Let the needle
be deflected through an angle in consequence. Since the charge on the
first pair of quadrants is now E + Q, we have
On subtracting equation (58) from this we obtain
Q = fei) F 1 + [(g 13 ),(
If is small this may be written
110 Systems of Conductors [CH. iv
where q llt ^ are supposed calculated for = 0. Since F 2 = 0, we have from
equation (56),
so that Q
shewing that for small values of 0, Q is directly proportional to 6.
Let us suppose that we join the first pair of quadrants (conductor 1)
to a condenser of known capacity T which is entirely outside the electro
meter. Since the needle (3) is entirely screened by the quadrants the value
of q l3 remains unaltered, while q n will become q n + T. If & is now the
deflection of the needle, we have
so that, by combination with the last equation, we have
i\_ r
& e '
If 6" is the deflection obtained by joining the pairs of quadrants to the
terminals of a battery of known potential difference jD, we have from
equation (56),
CV 
V *~ ])'
and on substituting this value for CV 3j our equation becomes
__
& e
giving Q in terms of the known quantities F, D and the three readings
0, 0' and 0".
REFERENCES.
On the Theory of Systems of Conductors :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chapter in.
On the Theory and Use of Electrostatic Instruments :
J. J. THOMSON. Elements of the Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Magnet
ism. Chapter in.
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chapter xin.
124] Examples 111
EXAMPLES.
1. If the algebraic sum of the charges on a system of conductors be positive, then on
one at least the surface density is everywhere positive.
2. There are a number of insulated conductors in given fixed positions. The
capacities of any two of them in their given positions are Cj and C 2 , and their mutual
coefficient of induction is B. Prove that if these conductors be joined by a thin wire, the
capacity of the combined conductor is
3. A system of insulated conductors having been charged in any manner, charges are
transferred from one conductor to another till they are all brought to the same potential F.
Shew that
where s 1} s 2 are the algebraic sums of the coefficients of capacity and induction respectively,
and E is the sum of the charges.
4. Prove that the effect of the operation described in the last question is a decrease
of the electrostatic energy equal to what would be the energy of the system if each of the
original potentials were diminished by F.
5. Two equal similar condensers, each consisting of two spherical shells, radii a, 6,
are insulated and placed at a great distance r apart. Charges e, e' are given to the inner
shells. If the outer surfaces are now joined by a wire, shew that the loss of energy is
approximately
6. A condenser is formed of two thin concentric spherical shells, radii a, b. A small
hole exists in the outer sheet through which an insulated wire passes connecting the
inner sheet with a third conductor of capacity c, at a great distance r from the condenser.
The outer sheet of the condenser is put to earth, and the charge on the two connected
conductors is E. Prove that approximately the force on the third conductor is
7. Two closed equipotentials F 1? F are such that Fj contains F , and F P is the
potential at any point P between them. If now a charge E be put at P t and both
equipotentials be replaced by conducting shells and earth connected, then the charges
EIJ EQ induced on the two surfaces are given by
E E E
8. A conductor is charged from an electrophorus by repeated contacts with a plate,
which after each contact is recharged with a quantity E of electricity from the electro
phorus. Prove that if e is the charge of the conductor after the first operation, the
ultimate charge is
Ee
Ee'
112 Systems of Conductors [OH. iv
9. Four equal uncharged insulated conductors are placed symmetrically at the corners
of a regular tetrahedron, and are touched in turn by a moving spherical conductor at the
points nearest to the centre of the tetrahedron, receiving charges e 1} e 2 , e 3 , e. Shew that
the charges are in geometrical progression.
10. In question 9 replace " tetrahedron " by " square," and prove that
(e 1 e 2 )(e 1 e 3  e 2 2 ) = e (e 2 e 3  e l e 4 ).
11. Shew that if the distance x between two conductors is so great as compared with
the linear dimensions of either, that the square of the ratio of these linear dimensions to
x may be neglected, then the coefficient of induction between them is CC'/%, where (7, C'
are the capacities of the conductors when isolated.
12. Two insulated fixed condensers are at given potentials when alone in the electric
field and charged with quantities EI , E% of electricity. Their coefficients of potential are
Piii Ji2j PM But if they are surrounded by a spherical conductor of very large radius R
at potential zero with its centre near them, the two conductors require charges EI, E 2 to
produce the given potentials. Prove, neglecting ^ , that
13. Shew that the locus of the positions, in which a unit charge will induce a given
charge on a given uninsulated conductor, is an equipotential surface of that conductor
supposed freely electrified.
14. Prove (i) that if a conductor, insulated in free space and raised to unit potential,
produce at any external point P a potential denoted by (P), then a unit charge placed at
P in the presence of this conductor uninsulated will induce on it a charge  (P) ;
(ii) that if the potential at a point Q due to the induced charge be denoted by (PQ\
then (PQ) is a symmetrical function of the positions of P and Q.
15. Two small uninsulated spheres are placed near together between two large
parallel planes, one of which is charged, and the other connected to earth. Shew by
figures the nature of the disturbance so produced in the uniform field, when the line of
centres is (i) perpendicular, (ii) parallel to the planes.
16. A hollow conductor A is at zero potential, and contains in its cavity two other
insulated conductors, B and C, which are mutually external : B has a positive charge, and
C is uncharged. Analyse the different types of lines of force within the cavity which are
possible, classifying with respect to the conductor from which the line starts, and the
conductor at which it ends, and proving the impossibility of the geometrically possible
types which are rejected.
Hence prove that B and C are at positive potentials, the potential of C being less than
that of B.
17. A portion P of a, conductor, the capacity of which is (7, can be separated from the
conductor. The capacity of this portion, when at a long distance from other bodies, is c.
The conductor is insulated, and the part P when at a considerable distance from the
remainder is charged with a quantity e and allowed to move under the mutual attraction
up to it ; describe and explain the changes which take place in the electrical energy of the
system.
Examples 113
18. A conductor having a charge $1 is surrounded by a second conductor with charge
Q 2 . The inner is connected by a wire to a very distant uncharged conductor. It is then
disconnected, and the outer conductor connected. Shew that the charges $/, $ 2 ', are now
Qi'>
 
m+n + mn' m+n
where C, C(\+m) are the coefficients of capacity of the near conductors, arid Cn is the
capacity of the distant one.
19. If one conductor contains all the others, and there are n+l in all, shew that
there are n+l relations between either the coefficients of potential or the coefficients of
induction, and if the potential of the largest be F , and that of the others V 1 , F 2> ... F n ,
then the most general expression for the energy is <7F 2 increased by a quadratic function
of FI F , F 2  F , ... V H  F ; where C is a definite constant for all positions of the
inner conductors.
20. The inner sphere of a spherical condenser (radii a, b) has a constant charge E,
and the outer conductor is at potential zero. Under the internal forces the outer
conductor contracts from radius b to radius bi. Prove that the work done by the
electric forces is
i F2 b ~ b i
"~
21. If, in the last question, the inner conductor has a constant potential F, its charge
being variable, shew that the work done is
1
27
and investigate the quantity of energy supplied by the battery.
22. With the usual notation, prove that
Pll+P23>Pl2+Pl3
23. Shew that if p rr , p rs , p 88 be three coefficients before the introduction of a new
conductor, and p rr ', p r8 , p s8 ' the same coefficients afterwards, then
( Prr PSB prrPss'} 4 ( Prs Prs}*>
24. A system consists of p + q + 2 conductors, A^A^...A^ lt B^...B^ C, D. Prove
that when the charges on the A's and on (7, and the potentials of the 's and of C are
known, there cannot be more than one possible distribution in equilibrium, unless C is
electrically screened from D.
25. A, B, C, D are four conductors, of which B surrounds A and D surrounds C.
Given the coefficients of capacity and induction
(i) of A and B when C and D are removed,
(ii) of C and D when A and B are removed,
(iii) of B and Z> when A and C are removed,
determine those for the complete system of four conductors.
26. Two equal and similar conductors A and B are charged and placed symmetrically
with regard to each other ; a third moveable conductor C is carried so as to occupy
J. 8
114 Systems of Conductors [CH. iv
successively two positions, one practically wholly within A, the other within B, the
positions being similar and such that the coefficients of potential of C in either position
are p, q, r in ascending order of magnitude. In each position C is in turn connected with
the conductor surrounding it, put to earth, and then insulated. Determine the charges
on the conductors after any number of cycles of such operations, and shew that they
ultimately lead to the ratios
l:/3:/3 2 l,
where /3 is the positive root of
rx z qx+pr=0.
27. Two conductors are of capacities C l and <7 2 , when each is alone in the field.
They are both in the field at potentials V\ and F 2 respectively, at a great distance r
apart. Prove that the repulsion between the conductors is
As far as what power of  is this result accurate ?
28. Two equal and similar insulated conductors are placed symmetrically with regard
to each other, one of them being uncharged. Another insulated conductor is made to
touch them alternately in a symmetrical manner, beginning with the one which has a
charge. If e it e% be their charges when it has touched each once, shew that their charges,
when it has touched each r times, are respectively
. ^ . . . and
2<?i i
29. Three conductors AI, A 2 and A 3 are such that A 3 is practically inside A 2 . A l is
alternately connected with A 2 and A 3 by means of a fine wire, the first contact being with
A 3 . AI has a charge E initially, A 2 and A 3 being uncharged. Prove that the charge on
AI after it has been connected n times with A 2 is
Eft f
a+/3 1 *
where a, /3, y stand for pnpu, Pwpu and p 33 pi 2 respectively.
30. Two spheres, radii a, b, have their centres at a distance c apart. Shew that
neglecting (a/c) 6 and (&/c) 6 ,
1 6 3 1 la 3
CHAPTER Y.
DIELECTKICS AND INDUCTIVE CAPACITY.
125. MENTION has already been made ( 84) of the fact, discovered
originally by Cavendish, and afterwards rediscovered by Faraday, that the
capacity of a conductor depends on the nature of the dielectric substance
between its plates.
Let us imagine that we have two parallel plate condensers, similar in all
respects except that one has nothing but air between its plates while in the
other this space is filled with a dielectric of inductive capacity K. Let us
suppose that the two high potential plates are connected by a wire, and also
the two lowpotential plates. Let the condensers be charged, the potential
of the highpotential plates being V lt and that of the lowpotential plates
being F .
Then it is found that the charges possessed by the two condensers are not
equal. The capacity per unit area of the aircondenser is l/47rd; that of the
other condenser is found to be K/4t7rd. Hence
the charges per unit area of the two condensers
are respectively
The work done in taking unit charge from the
lowpotential plate to the highpotential plate is
the same in either condenser, namely Fj F , so
that the intensity between the plates in either
condenser is the same, namely
_ ,
V
FK,42.
d
In the aircondenser this intensity may be regarded as the resultant of the
attraction of the negatively charged plate and the repulsion of the positively
charged plate, the law of attraction or repulsion being Coulomb's law  .
82
116 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
It is, however, obvious that if we were to calculate the intensity in the
second condenser from this law, then the value obtained would be K times
V V
that in the first condenser, and would therefore be K  { 1 . In point of
d
V V
fact, the actual value of the intensity is known to be  ^  .
CL
Thus Faraday's discovery shews that Coulomb's law of force is not of
universal validity : the law has only been proved experimentally for air, and
it is now found not to be true for dielectrics of which the inductive capacity
is different from unity.
This discovery has farreaching effects on the development of the mathe
matical theory of electricity. In the present book, Coulomb's law was
introduced in 38, and formed the basis of all subsequent investigations.
Thus every theorem which has been proved in the present book from 38
onwards requires reconsideration.
126. We shall follow Faraday in treating the whole subject from the
point of view of lines of force. The conceptions of potential, of intensity, and
of lines of force are entirely independent of Coulomb's law, and in the present
book have been discussed ( 30 37) before the law was introduced. The
conception of a tube of force follows at once from that of a line of force,
on imagining lines of force drawn through the different points on a small
closed curve. Let us extend to dielectrics one form of the definition of the
strength of a tube of force which has already been used for a tube in air, and
agree that the strength of a tube is to be measured by the charge enclosed
by its positive end, whether in air or dielectric.
In the dielectric condenser, the surface density on the positive plate is
V V
K \ j an d this, by definition, is also the aggregate strength of the
tubes per unit area of crosssection. The intensity in the dielectric is
V V
l j , so that in the dielectric the intensity is no longer, as in air, equal
to 4?r times the aggregate strength of tubes per unit area, but is equal to
4<7r/K times this amount.
Thus if P is the aggregate strength of the tubes per unit area of cross
section, the intensity R is related to P by the equation
= f P ................................. (59)
in the dielectric, instead of by the equation
................................. (60)
which was found to hold in air.
125128] Experimental Basis 117
127. Equation (59) has been proved to be the appropriate generalisation
of equation (60) only in a very special case. Faraday, however, believed the
relation expressed by equation (59) to be universally true, and the results
obtained on this supposition are found to be in complete agreement with
experiment. Hence equation (59), or some equation of the same significance,
is universally taken as the basis of the mathematical theory of dielectrics.
We accordingly proceed by assuming the universal truth of equation (59),
an assumption for which a justification will be found when we come to study
the molecular constitution of dielectrics.
It is convenient to have a single word to express the aggregate strength
of tubes per unit area of crosssection, the quantity which has been denoted
by P. We shall speak of this quantity as the " polarisation," a term due to
Faraday. Maxwell's explanation of the meaning of the term " polarisation "
is that " an elementary portion of a body may be said to be polarised when
it acquires equal and opposite properties on two opposite sides." Faraday
explained the properties of dielectrics by means of his conception that the
molecules of the dielectric were in a polarised state, and the quantity P
is found to measure the amount of the polarisation at any point in the
dielectric. We shall come to this physical interpretation of the quantity P
at a later stage : for the present we simply use the term " polarisation " as
a name for the mathematical quantity P.
This same quantity is called the " displacement " by Maxwell, and under
lying the use of this term also, there is a physical interpretation which we
shall come upon later.
128. We now have as the basis of our mathematical theory the
following :
DEFINITION. The strength of a tube of force is defined to be the charge
enclosed by the positive end of the tube.
DEFINITION. The polarisation at any point is defined to be the aggregate
strength of tubes of force per unit area of crosssection.
EXPERIMENTAL LAW. The intensity at any point is ^ir\K times the
polarisation, where K is the inductive capacity of the dielectric at the point.
In this last relation, we measure the intensity along a line of force, while
the polarisation is measured by considering the flux of tubes of force across
a small area perpendicular to the lines of force. Suppose, however, that we
take some direction 00' making an angle 6 with that of the lines of force.
The aggregate strength of the tubes of force which cross an area dS
perpendicular to 00' will be PcosOdS, for these tubes are exactly those
which cross an area dScosO perpendicular to the lines of force. Thus,
consistently with the definition of polarisation, we may say that the polari
sation in the direction 00' is equal to P cos 0. Since the polarisation in
118 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
any direction is equal to P multiplied by the cosine of the angle between
this direction and that of the lines of force, it is clear that the polarisation
may be regarded as a vector, of which the direction is that of the lines of
force, and of which the magnitude is P.
The polarisation having been seen to be a vector, we may speak of its
components /, g, h. Clearly / is the number of tubes per unit area which
cross a plane perpendicular to the axis of x t and so on.
The result just obtained may be expressed analytically by the equations
129. The polarisation P being measured by the aggregate strength of
tubes per unit area of crosssection, it follows that if &> is the crosssection
at any point of a tube of strength 6, we have e = o>P. Now we have defined
the strength of a tube of force as being equal to the charge at its positive
end, so that by definition the strength e of a tube does not vary from point
to point of the tube. Thus the product &>P is constant along a tube, or
wKR is constant along a tube, replacing the result that wR is constant
in air ( 56).
The value of the product wP at any point of a tube, being equal to
 , depends only on the physical conditions prevailing at the point 0.
It is, however, known to be equal to the charge at the positive end of the
tube. Hence it must also, from symmetry, be equal to minus the charge at
the negative end of the tube. Thus the charges at the two ends of a tube,
whether in the same or in different dielectrics, will be equal and opposite,
and the numerical value of either is the strength of the tube.
GAUSS' THEOREM.
130. Let S be any closed surface, and let e be the angle between the
direction of the outward normal to any element of surface dS and the direction
of the lines of force at the element. The aggregate strength of the tubes of
force which cross the element of area dS is P cos e dS, and the integral
PcosedS,
which may be called the surface integral of normal polarisation, will measure
the aggregate strength of all the tubes which cross the surface S, the strength
of a tube being estimated as positive when it crosses the surface from inside
to outside, and as negative when it crosses in the reverse direction.
A tube which enters the surface from outside, and which, after crossing
128131] Gauss' Theorem 119
the space enclosed by the surface, leaves it again, will add no contribution to
II PcosedS, its strength being counted negatively where it enters the
surface, and positively where it emerges. A tube which starts from or ends
on a charge e inside the surface S will, however, supply a contribution to
II P cosedS on crossing the surface. If e is positive, the strength of the
tube is e ; and, as it crosses from inside to outside, it is counted positively,
and the contribution to the integral is e. Again, if e is negative, the strength
of the tube is e, and this is counted negatively, so that the contribution is
again e.
Thus on summing for all tubes,
where E is the total charge inside the surface. The lefthand member is
simply the algebraical sum of the strengths of the tubes which begin or end
inside the surface ; the righthand member is the algebraical sum of the
charges on which these tubes begin or end. Putting
PR
47T
the equation becomes 1 1 KR cos edS = 4<7rE.
The quantity R cos e is, however, the component of intensity along the
outward normal, the quantity which has been previously denoted by N, so
that we arrive at the equation
(61).
When the dielectric was air, Gauss' theorem was obtained in the form
NdS = 4>7rE.
is
Equation (61) is therefore the generalised form of Gauss' Theorem which
must be used when the inductive capacity is different from unity. Since
dV
N= ^ , the equation may be written in the form
~dn
131. The form of this equation shews at once that a great many results
which have been shewn to be true for air are true also for dielectrics other
than air.
It is obvious, for instance, that V cannot be a maximum or a minimum
at a point in a dielectric which is not occupied by an electric charge : as
120 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
a consequence all lines of force must begin and end on charged bodies,
a result which was tacitly assumed in denning the strength of a tube of
force.
A number of theorems were obtained in the discussion of the electrostatic
field in air, by taking a Gauss' Surface, partly in air and partly in a con
ductor. Gauss' Theorem was used in the form
but we now see that if the inductive capacity of the conductor were not
equal to unity, this equation ought to be replaced by equation (61). It is,
however, clear that the difference cannot affect the final result ; N is zero
inside a conductor, so that it does not matter whether N is multiplied by K
or not.
Thus results obtained for systems of conductors in air upon the assumption
that Coulomb's law of force holds throughout the field are seen to be true
whether the inductive capacity inside the conductors is equal to unity or not.
The Equations of Poisson and Laplace.
132. In 49, we applied Gauss' theorem to a surface which was formed
by a small rectangular parallelepiped, of edges dx, dy, dz, parallel to the
axes of coordinates. If we apply the theorem expressed by equation (61) to
the same element of volume, we obtain
......... (62),
where p is the volume density of electrification. This, then, is the genera
lised form of Poisson's equation : the generalised form of Laplace's equation
is obtained at once on putting p = 0.
In terms of the components of polarisation, equation (62) may be written
while if the dielectric is uncharged,
+ = 0... ...(64).
dx d dz
Electric Charges in an infinite homogeneous Dielectric.
133. Consider a charge e placed by itself in an infinite dielectric. If
the dielectric is homogeneous, it follows from considerations of symmetry
that the lines of force must be radial, as they would be in air. By application
131135] Gauss' Theorem 121
of equation (61) to a sphere of radius r, having the point charge as centre, it
is found that the intensity at a distance r from the charge is
e
The force between two point charges e, e f , at distance r apart in a homo
geneous unbounded dielectric is therefore
ee
and the potential of any number of charges, obtained by integration of this
expression, is
Coulomb's Equation.
134. The strength of a tube being measured by the charge at its end, it
follows that at a point just outside a conductor, P, the aggregate strength
of the tubes per unit of crosssection, becomes numerically equal to cr, the
surface density. We have also the general relation
and on replacing P by a, we arrive at the generalised form of Coulomb's
equation,
R = ^ (67),
in which K is the inductive capacity at the point under consideration.
CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED AT THE BOUNDARY OF A DIELECTRIC.
135. Let us examine the conditions which will obtain at a boundary at
which the inductive capacity changes abruptly from K l to K 2 .
The potential must be continuous in crossing the boundary, for if P, Q,
are two infinitely near points on opposite sides of the boundary, the work done
in bringing a small charge to P must be the same as that done in bringing
it to Q. As a consequence of the potential being continuous, it follows that
the tangential components of the intensity must also be continuous. For if
P, Q are two very near points on different sides of the boundary, and P', Q'
a similar pair of points at a small distance away, we have V P V Q , and
Vp = VQ, so that
PP' QQ'
The expressions on the two sides of this equation are, however, the two
intensities in the direction PP', on the two sides of the boundary, which
establishes the result.
122 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
Also, if there is no charge on the boundary, the aggregate strength of
the tubes which meet the boundary in any small area on this boundary is
the same whether estimated in the one dielectric or the other, for the tubes
do not alter their strength in crossing the boundary, and none can begin or
end in the boundary. Thus the normal component of the polarisation is
continuous.
136. If J^! is the intensity in the first medium of inductive capacity K^>
measured at a point close to the boundary, and if e : is the angle which the
lines of force make with the normal to the boundary at this point, then the
normal polarisation in the first medium is
 JR l cos 6j .
Similarly, that in the second medium is
x! 2 7 ,
R 2 COS 2 ,
so that KiRi cos e : = K 2 R 2 cos e 2 ........................ (68).
Since, in the notation already used,
jRi cos e x = NL = ^ ,
the equation just obtained may be put in either of the forms
K.N^K.N, .............................. (69),
K = K .............................. (70).
In these equations, it is a matter of indifference whether the normal is
drawn from the first medium to the second or in the reverse direction ; it is
only necessary that the same normal should be taken on both sides of the
equation. Relation (70) is obtained at once on applying the generalised
form of Gauss' theorem to a small cylinder having parallel ends at infinitesimal
distance apart, one in each medium.
137. To sum up, we have found that in passing from one dielectric to
another, the surface of separation being uncharged:
(i) the tangential components of intensity have the same values on the
two sides of the boundary,
(ii) the normal components of polarisation have the same values.
Or, in terms of the potential,
(i) V is continuous,
(ii) K x is continuous.
on
135138]
Boundary Conditions
123
138.
follows :
Refraction of the lines of force.
From the continuity of the tangential components of intensity, it
(i) that the directions of R l and R 2 , the intensities on the two sides of
the boundary, must lie in a plane containing the normal, and
(ii) that
sn e =
sn e
Combining the last relation with equation (68), we obtain
KI COt 6 t = K z COt 6 2
(71).
From this relation, it appears that if K l is greater than K 2 , then e x is greater
than e 2 , and vice versa. Thus in passing from a smaller value of K to a
greater value of K, the lines are bent away from the normal. In illustration
of this, fig. 43 shews the arrangement of lines of force when a point charge
is placed in front of an infinite slab of dielectric (K 7).
FIG. 43.
124
Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity
[CH. v
A small charged particle placed at any point of this field will experience
a force of which the direction is along the tangent to the line of force through
the point. The force is produced by the point charge, but its direction will
not in general pass through the point charge. Thus we conclude that in
a field in which the inductive capacity is not uniform the force between two
point charges does not in general act aloog the line joining them.
139. As an example of the action of a dielectric let us imagine a parallel
plate condenser in which a slab of dielectric of thickness t is placed between
the plates, its two faces being parallel to the plates and
at distances a, b from them, so that a + b + 1 = d, where
d is the distance between the plates.
It is obvious from symmetry that the lines of force
are straight throughout their path, equation (71) being
satisfied by ej = e 2 = 0.
Let a be the charge per unit area, so that the polari
sation is equal to a everywhere. The intensity, by
equation (67), is
in air,
and
R = o in dielectric.
FIG. 44.
Hence the difference of potential between the plates, or the work done in
taking unit charge from one plate to the other in opposition to the electric
intensity,
47T
= 47TO . a + = a . t + 47TO . b
and the capacity per unit area is
Thus the introduction of the slab of dielectric has the same effect as
moving the plates a distance (1 ^) t nearer together.
Suppose now that the slab is partly outside the condenser and partly
between the plates. Of the total area A of the condenser, let an area B be
occupied by the slab of dielectric, an area A B having only air between
the plates.
138141] Boundary Conditions 125
The lines of force will be straight, except for those which pass near to the
edge of the dielectric slab. Neglecting a small correction required by the
curvature of these lines, the capacity C of the condenser is given by
c _ B AB
'
A
4>7rd ' , f , /, 1
ktrdld 1 r
( V
a quantity which increases as B increases. If V is the potential difference
and E the charge, the electrical energy
If we keep the charge constant, the electrical energy increases as the
slab is withdrawn. There must therefore be a mechanical force tending to
resist withdrawal : the slab of dielectric will be sucked in between the plates
of the condenser. This, as will be seen later, is a particular case of a general
theorem that any piece of dielectric is acted on by forces which tend to
drag it from the weaker to the stronger parts of an electric field of force.
Charge on the Surface of a Dielectric.
140. Let dS be any small area of a surface which separates two media
of inductive capacities K 1} K 2 , and let this bounding surface have a charge of
electricity, the surface density over dS being a. If we apply
Gauss' Theorem to a small cylinder circumscribing dS we obtain
o
where in either medium denotes differentiation with respect
dv
to the normal drawn away from dS into the dielectric.
141. As we have seen, the surface of a dielectric may be
charged by friction. A more interesting way is by utilising FIG. 45.
the conducting powers of a flame.
Let us place a charge e in front of a slab of dielectric as in fig. 43.
A flame issuing from a metal lamp held in the hand may be regarded as
a conductor at potential zero. On allowing the flame to play over the
surface of the dielectric, this surface is reduced to potential zero, and the
distribution of the lines of force is now exactly the same as if the face of
the dielectric were replaced by a conducting plane at potential zero. The
126 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
lines of force from the point charge terminate on this plane, so that there
must be a total charge e spread over it. If the plane were actually a
conductor this would be simply an induced charge. If, however, the plane
is the boundary of a dielectric, the charge differs from an induced charge on
a conductor in that it cannot disappear if the original charge e is removed.
For this reason, Faraday described it as a " bound " charge. The charge has
of course come to the dielectric through the conducting flame.
MOLECULAR ACTION IN A DIELECTRIC.
142. From the observed influence of the structure of a dielectric upon
the electric phenomena occurring in a field in which it was placed, Faraday
was led to suppose that the particles of the dielectric themselves took part
in this electric action. After describing his researches on the electric
action "induction" to use his own term in a space occupied by dielectric
he says* :
" Thus induction appears to be essentially an action of contiguous parti
cles, through the intermediation of which the electric force, originating or
appearing at a certain place, is propagated to or sustained at a distance...."
" Induction appears to consist in a certain polarised state of the particles,
into which they are thrown by the electrified body sustaining the action, the
particles assuming positive and negative points or parts...."
"With respect to the term polarity..., I mean at present... a disposition
of force by which the same molecule acquires opposite powers on different
parts."
And again, laterf,
" I do not consider the powers when developed by the polarisation as
limited to two distinct points or spots on the surface of each particle to be
considered as the poles of an axis, but as resident on large portions of that
surface, as they are upon the surface of a conductor of sensible size when it
is thrown into a polar state."
" In such solid bodies as glass, lac, sulphur, etc., the particles appear to
be able to become polarised in all directions, for a mass when experimented
upon so as to ascertain its inductive capacity in three or more directions,
gives no indication of a difference. Now, as the particles are fixed in the
mass, and as the direction of the induction through them must change with
its charge relative to the mass, the constant effect indicates that they can
be polarised electrically in any direction."
* Experimental Researches, 1295, 1298, 1304. (Nov. 1837.)
f Experimental Researches, 1686, 1688, 1679. (June, 1838.)
141143]
Molecular Theory
127
" The particles of an insulating dielectric whilst under induction may be
compared... to a series of small insulated conductors. If the space round
a charged globe were filled with a mixture of an insulating dielectric and
small globular conductors, the latter being at a little distance from each
other, so as to be insulated, then these would in their condition and action
exactly resemble what I consider to be the condition and action of the
particles of the insulating dielectric itself. If the globe were charged, these
little conductors would all be polar ; if the globe were discharged, they would
all return to their normal state, to be polarised again upon the recharging
of the globe...."
As regards the question of what actually the particles are which undergo
this polarisation, Faraday says* :
" An important inquiry regarding the electric polarity of the particles of
an insulating dielectric, is, whether it be the molecules of the particular
substance acted on, or the component or ultimate particles, which thus act
the part of insulated conducting polarising portions."
" The conclusion I have arrived at is, that it is the molecules of the
substance which polarise as wholes; and that however complicated the
composition of a body may be, all those particles or atoms which are held
together by chemical affinity to form one molecule of the resulting body act
as one conducting mass or particle when inductive phenomena and polari
sation are produced in the substance of which it is a part."
143. A mathematical discussion of the action of a dielectric constructed
as imagined by Faraday, has been given by Mossotti, who utilised a mathe
matical method which had been developed by Poisson for the examination of
a similar question in magnetism. For this discussion the molecules are
represented provisionally as conductors of electricity.
To obtain a first idea of the effect of an electric field on a dielectric of
the kind pictured by Faraday, let us consider a parallel plate condenser,
I +
FIG. 46.
* Experimental Researches, 1699, 1700.
128 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [OH. v
having a number of insulated uncharged conducting molecules in the space
between the plates. Imagine a tube of strength e meeting a molecule. At
the point where this occurs, the tube terminates by meeting a conductor, so
that there must be a charge 6 on the surface of the molecule. Since the
total charge on the molecule is nil there must be a corresponding charge on
the opposite surface, and this charge may be regarded as a point of restart
ing of the tube. The tube then may be supposed to be continually stopped
and restarted by molecules as it crosses from one plate of the condenser to
the other. At each encounter with a molecule there are induced charges
e, 4 e on the surface of the molecule. Any such pair of charges, being
at only a small distance apart, may be regarded as forming a small doublet,
of the kind of which the field of force was investigated in 64.
144. We have now replaced the dielectric by a series of conductors, the
medium between which may be supposed to be air or ether. In the space
between these conductors the law of force will be that of the inverse square.
In calculating the intensity at any point from this law we have to reckon
the forces from the doublets as well as the forces from the original charges
on the condenserplates. A glance at fig. 46 will shew that the forces from
the doublets act in opposition to the original forces. Thus for given charges
on the condenserplates the intensity at any point between the plates is
lessened by the presence of conducting molecules.
This general result can be seen at once from the theorem of 121. The
introduction of new conductors (the molecules) lessens the energy cor
responding to given charges on the plates, i.e. increases the capacity of the
condenser, and so lessens the intensity between the plates.
145. In calculating that part of the intensity which arises from the
doublets, it will be convenient to divide the dielectric into concentric spherical
shells having as centre the point at which the intensity is required. The
volume of the shell of radii r and r + dr is 4<7rr 2 dr, so that the number of
doublets contained by it will contain r*dr as a factor. The potential produced
by any doublet at a point distant r from it is , so that the intensity
will contain a factor . Thus the intensity arising from all the doublets in
the shell of radii r, r + dr will depend on r through the factor . r~dr
dr
or .
r
The importance of the different shells is accordingly the same, as regards
comparative orders of magnitude, as that of the corresponding contributions
fdr
to the integral I . The value of this integral is log?* fa constant, and this
143147] Molecular Theory 129
is infinite when r = and when r = oo . Thus the important contributions
come from very small and very large values of r.
Hence, as regards the contributions from shells for which r is small, we
see that the field produced at any point by all the doublets in these
shells may be regarded as arising entirely from the doublets in the immediate
neighbourhood of the point. The force will obviously vary as we move in
and out amongst the molecules, depending largely on the nearness and
position of the nearest molecules. If, however, we average this force through
out a small volume, we shall obtain an average intensity of the field produced
by the doublets, and this will depend only on the strength and number of
the doublets in and near to this element of volume. Obviously this average
intensity near any point will be exactly proportional to the average strength
of the doublets near the point, and this again will be exactly proportional to
the strength of the inducing field by which the doublets are produced, so
that at any point we may say that the average field of the doublets stands
to the total field in a ratio which depends only on the structure of the
medium at the point.
146. Now suppose that our measurements are not sufficiently refined to
enable us to take account of the rapid changes of intensity of the electric
field which must occur within small distances of molecular order of magnitude.
Let us suppose, as we legitimately may, that the forces which we measure
are forces averaged through a distance which contains a great number of
molecules. Then the force which we measure will consist of the sum of the
average force produced by the doublets, and of the force produced by the
external field. The field which we observe may accordingly be regarded as
the superposition of two fields, or what amounts to the same thing, the
observed intensity R may be regarded as the resultant of two intensities
R lt R 2 , where
R! is the average intensity arising from the neighbouring doublets,
jR 2 is the intensity due to the charges outside the dielectric, and to
the distant doublets in the dielectric.
These forces, as we have seen, must be proportional to one another, so
that each must be proportional to the polarisation P. It follows that P is
proportional to R, the ratio depending only on the structure of the medium
at the point. If we take the relation to be
then K is the inductive capacity at the point, and the relation between R
and P is exactly the relation upon which our whole theory has been based.
147. The theory could accordingly be based on Mossotti's theory, instead
of on Faraday's assumption, and from the hypothesis of molecular polarisa
j. 9
130 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [OH. v
tion we should be able to deduce all the results of the theory, by first
deducing equation (73) from Mossotti's hypothesis, and then the required
results from equation (73) in the way in which they have been deduced in
the present chapter.
Thus the influence of the conducting molecules produces physically the
same result as if the properties of the medium were altered in the way
suggested by Faraday, and mathematically the properties of the medium are
in either case represented by the presence of the factor K in equation (73).
Relation between Inductive Capacity and Structure of Medium.
148. The electrostatic unit of force was defined in such a way that the
inductive capacity of air was taken as unity. It is now obvious that it would
have been more scientific to have taken ether as standard medium, so that
the inductive capacity of every medium would have been greater than unity.
Unfortunately, the practice of referring all inductive capacities to air as
standard, has become too firmly established for this to be possible. The
difference between the two standards is very slight, the inductive capacity
of normal air in terms of ether being 1 '00059. Thus the inductive capacity
of a vacuum may be taken to be '99941 referred to air.
So long as the molecules are at distances apart which are great compared
with their linear dimensions, we may neglect the interaction of the charges
induced on the different molecules, and treat their effects as additive. It
follows that in a gas K K , where K is the inductive capacity of free ether,
ought to be proportional to the density of the gas. This law is found to be
in exact agreement with experiment*.
149. It is, however, possible to go further and calculate the actual value
of the ratio of K K to the density. We have seen that this will be
a constant for a given substance, so that we shall determine its value in the
simplest case: we shall consider a thin slab of the dielectric placed in a
parallel plate condenser, as described in 139. Let this slab be of thickness e,
and let it coincide with the plane of yz. Let the dielectric contain n mole
cules per unit volume.
The element dydz will contain nedydz molecules. If each of these is
a doublet of strength p, the element dydz will have a field which will be
equivalent at all distant points to that of a single doublet of strength
npedydz. This is exactly the field which would be produced if the two
faces of the slab were charged with electricity of surface density n/j,.
We can accordingly at once find the field produced by these doublets it
is the same as that of a parallel plate condenser, in which the plates are at
* Boltzmann, Wiener Sitzungsber. 69, p. 812.
147149] Molecular Theory 131
distance e apart and are charged to surface density up. There is no
intensity except between the plates, and here the intensity of the field is
//..
Thus if R is the total intensity outside the slab, that inside will be
4}Trnp. If K is the inductive capacity of the material of the slab, and
that of the free ether outside the slab, we have
so that ^ = p ........................... (74).
It remains to determine the ratio p/R. The potential of a doublet is
~ while that of the field R may be taken to be Rx + C. Thus the total
potential of a single doublet and the external field is
and this makes the surface r = a an equipotential if 3 = R. Thus the
surfaces of the molecules will be equipotentials if we imagine the molecules
to be spheres of radius a, and the centres of the doublets to coincide with
the centres of the spheres, the strength of each doublet being Ra 3 .
Putting IJL = Ra 3 , equation (74) becomes
K =47ryia 3 (75)*.
Now in unit volume of dielectric, the space occupied by the n molecules
j na 3 . Calling this quantity 6, we have ~ ^^
o .ti
lations only hold on the hypothesis that 6 is small,
is j na 3 . Calling this quantity 6, we have ~ ^^ = 30, or, since our calcu
* Clausius (Mech. Warmetheorie, 2, p. 94) has obtained the relation
KK 47r
by considering the field inside a sphere of dielectric. The value of K must of course be inde
pendent of the shape of the piece of the dielectric considered. The apparent discrepancy in the
two values of K obtained, is removed as soon as we reflect that both proceed on the assumption
that KK is small, for the results agree as far as first powers of KK Q . Pagliani (Accad. dei
Lincei, 2, p. 48) finds that in point of fact the equation
K K
agrees better with experiment than the formula of Clausius.
92
132
Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity
[CH. v
This gives at once a method of determining 6 for substances for which
6 is small e.g. gases. It should, however, be noticed that, owing to the
unwarranted assumption that the molecules are spherical, the results will be
true as regards order of magnitude only. If the dielectric is a gas at
atmospheric pressure, the value of n is known, being roughly 4 x 10 19 , and
this enables us to calculate the value of a.
K
150. The following table gives series of values of j= for gases at atmo
"0
spheric pressure :
Gas
K .
observed
K o
Autho
rity*
K
Mean
K o
a calculated
(Mossotti's
Theory)
a calculated
(Theory of
Gases)f
Helium
He
T0000724
3
1 0000724
525x108
90x108
Hydrogen
H 2
T000264
1 000264
1
2
1 000264
808xlO 8
1OlxlO 8
Oxygen
2
1000543
3
1000543
103x108
135x108
Argon
Ar
1000566
3
1000566
l04xlO 8
139x108
Air
1000590
1000586
1
2
1 000588
l05xlO 8
141 xlO 8
Nitrogen
N 2
1000594
3
1000594
l06xlO 8
146x108
Carbon Monoxide
CO
1000690
1000694
1
2
1 000692
111x108
143x108
Carbon Dioxide
C0 2
' 1 000946
1000984
1
2
1000965
124x108
166x108
Nitrous Oxide ...
N 2
1 000994
1001158
1
2
1001082
129x108
l75xlO 8
Ethylene
C 2 H 4
1001312
1 001458
1
2
1001385
141 x 10~ 8
191x108
The last two columns give respectively the values of a calculated from
equation (75), and the value of a given by the Theory of Gases. The two
sets of values do not agree exactly this could not be expected when we
remember the magnitude of the errors introduced in treating the molecules
as spherical. But what agreement there is supplies very significant evidence
as to the truth of the theory of molecular polarisation.
151. It still remains to explain what physical property of the molecule
justifies us in treating its surface as a perfect conductor. It has already
been explained that all matter has associated with it or perhaps entirely
* Authorities : 1. Boltzmann, Wiener Sitzungsber. 69, p. 795.
2. J. KlemenciS, Wiener Sitzungsber. 91, p. 712.
3. These values are calculated from the refractive indices for Sodium Light,
t Jeans, Dynamical Theory of Gases, p. 340.
149152] Anisotropic Media 133
composing it a number of charged electric particles, or electrons. It is to
the motion of these that the conduction of electricity is due. In a dielectric
there is no conduction, so that each electron must remain permanently
associated with the same molecule. There is, however, plenty of evidence
that the electrons are not rigidly fixed to the molecules but are free to move
within certain limits. The molecule must be regarded as consisting partially
or wholly of a cluster of electrons, normally at rest in positions of equilibrium
under the various attractions and repulsions present, but capable of vibrating
about these positions. Under the influence of an external field of force,
the electrons will move slightly from their equilibrium positions we may
imagine that a kind of tidal motion of electrons takes place in the molecule.
Obviously, by the time that equilibrium is attained, the outer surface of the
molecule must be an equipotential. This, however, is exactly what is required
for Mossotti's hypothesis. The conception of conducting spheres supplies
a convenient picture for the mind, but is only required by the hypothesis in
order to make the surface of the molecule an equipotential. We may now
replace the conception of conducting spheres by that of clustered electrons
by this step the power of Mossotti's hypothesis to explain dielectric phenomena
remains unimpaired; while the modified hypothesis is in agreement with
modern views as to the structure of matter.
On this view, the quantity a tabulated in the sixth column of the table
on p. 132, will measure the radius of the outermost shell of electrons. Even
outside this outermost shell, however, there will be an appreciable field of
force, so that when two molecules of a gas collide there will in general be a
considerable distance between their outermost layers of electrons. Thus if
the collisions of molecules in a gas are to be regarded as the collisions of
elastic spheres, the radius of these spheres must be supposed to be con
siderably greater than a. Now it is the radius of these imaginary elastic
spheres which we calculate in the Kinetic Theory of Gases : there is therefore
no difficulty in understanding the differences between the two sets of values
for a given in the table of p. 132.
It is known that molecules are not in general spherical in shape, but, as
we shall now see, there is no difficulty in extending Mossotti's theory to cover
the case of nonspherical molecules.
ANISOTROPIC MEDIA.
152. There are some dielectrics, generally of crystalline structure, in
which Faraday's relation between polarisation and intensity is found not
to be true. The polarisation in such dielectrics is not, in general, in the
same direction as the intensity, and the angle between the polarisation and
intensity and also the ratio of these quantities are found to depend on the
134 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
direction of the field relatively to the axes of the crystal. We shall find that
the conception of molecular action accounts for these peculiarities of crystalline
dielectrics.
As in 146, we may regard the field near any point as the superposition
of two fields :
(i) the field which arises from the doublets on the neighbouring
molecules, say a field of components of intensity X l , F 1} Z^\
(ii) the field caused by the doublets arising from the distant molecules
and from the charges outside the dielectric, say a field of components of
intensity Z 2 , F 2 , Z z .
The intensity of the whole field is given by
X = X l +X 2 , etc.
To discuss the first part of the field, let us regard the whole field as
the superposition of three fields, having respectively components (X, 0, 0),
(0, F, 0) and (0, 0, Z). If the molecules are spherical, or if, not being
spherical, their orientations in space are distributed at random, then clearly
the field of components (X, 0, 0) will induce doublets which will produce
simply a field of components (K'X, 0, 0) where K' is a constant. But if the
molecules are neither spherical in shape nor arranged at random as regards
their orientations in space, it will be necessary to assume that the induced
doublets give rise to a field of components
K n X, K 12 A, K. 13 A.
On superposing the doublets induced by the three fields (X, 0, 0),
(0, F, 0) and (0, 0, Z), we obtain
(76).
Thus we have relations of the form
r ~\r __ TT" 7 x
L 21 * ~r * 31 ^ \
...(77),
.F+^33
expressing the relations between polarisation and intensity.
These are the general equations for crystalline media. If the medium
is noncrystalline, so that the phenomena exhibited by it are the same for all
directions in space, then the two vectors, the intensity and the polarisation,
152] Examples 135
must have the same direction and stand in a constant ratio to one another.
In this case we must have
K 12 = K 2 i = = 0,
In the more general equations (77), there are not nine, but only six,
independent constants, for, as we shall afterwards prove ( 176), we must
have
K^ K ZI) K 23 = I S2 , K sl = K n
REFERENCES.
On Inductive Capacity :
FARADAY. Experimental Researches. 1252 1306.
On Molecular Polarisation :
FARADAY. I.e. 16671748.
On Experimental Determinations of K :
WINKELMANN. Bandbuch der Physik (2te Auflage), 4, (1), pp. 92150.
EXAMPLES.
1. A spherical condenser, radii a, b, has air in the space between the spheres. The
inner sphere receives a coat of paint of uniform thickness t and of a material of which
the inductive capacity is K. Find the change produced in the capacity of the condenser.
2. A conductor has a charge e, and F l5 F 2 are the potentials of two equipotential
surfaces completely surrounding it ( Vi > F 2 ). The space between these two surfaces is
now filled with a dielectric of inductive capacity K. Shew that the change in the
energy of the system is
3. The surfaces of an aircondenser are concentric spheres. If half the space between
the spheres be filled with solid dielectric of specific inductive capacity K, the dividing
surface between the solid and the air being a plane through the centre of the spheres,
shew that the capacity will be the same as though the whole dielectric were of uniform
specific inductive capacity
4. The radii of the inner and outer shells of two equal spherical condensers, remote
from each other and immersed in an infinite dielectric of inductive capacity K, are
respectively a and 6, and the inductive capacities of the dielectric inside the condensers
are K l9 K 2 . Both surfaces of the first condenser are insulated and charged, the second
being uncharged. The inner surface of the second condenser is now connected to earth,
and the outer surface is connected to the outer surface of the first condenser by a wire
of negligible capacity. Shew that the loss of energy is
where Q is the quantity of electricity which flows along the wire
136 Dielectrics and Inductive Capacity [CH. v
5. The outer coating of a long cylindrical condenser is a thin shell of radius a, and
the dielectric between the cylinders has inductive capacity K on one side of a plane,
through the axis, and K' on the other side. Shew that when the inner cylinder is
connected to earth, and the outer has a charge q per unit length, the resultant force on
the outer cylinder is
ira(K+K')
per unit length.
6. A heterogeneous dielectric is formed of n concentric spherical layers of specific
inductive capacities K\, K^ ... K n , starting from the innermost dielectric, which forms a
solid sphere ; also the outermost dielectric extends to infinity. The radii of the spherical
boundary surfaces are 1} a 2 ,...a n _ l respectively. Prove that the potential due to a
quantity Q of electricity at the centre of the spheres at a point distant r from the centre
in the dielectric K s is
5Yi_l
K\r a,
7. A condenser is formed by two rectangular parallel conducting plates of breadth
b and area A at distance d from each other. Also a parallel slab of a dielectric of thickness
t and of the same area is between the plates. This slab is pulled along its length from
between the plates, so that only a length x is between the plates. Prove that the electric
force sucking the slab back to its original position is
where t' = t(K l)/K, K is the specific inductive capacity of the slab, E is the charge, and
the disturbances produced by the edges are neglected.
8. Three closed surfaces 1, 2, 3 are equipotentials in an electric field. If the space
between 1 and 2 is filled with a dielectric K, and that between 2 and 3 is filled with a
dielectric K'> shew that the capacity of a condenser having 1 and 3 for faces is (7, given by
where A, B are the capacities of aircondensers having as faces the surfaces 1, 2 and 2, 3
respectively.
9. The surface separating two dielectrics (K^ K 2 ) has an actual charge a per unit
area. The electric forces on the two sides of the boundary are FI, F 2 at angles c 1? c 2 with
the common normal. Shew how to determine F%, and prove that
10. The space between two concentric spheres radii a, b which are kept at potentials
A, B, is filled with a heterogeneous dielectric of which the inductive capacity varies as
the nth power of the distance from their common centre. Shew that the potential at any
point between the surfaces is
AB
Examples 137
11. A condenser is formed of two parallel plates, distant h apart, one of which is
at zero potential. The space between the plates is filled with a dielectric whose inductive
capacity increases uniformly from one plate to the other. Shew that the capacity per unit
area is
where K^ and K 2 are the values of the inductive capacity at the surfaces of the plate. The
inequalities of distribution at the edges of the plates are neglected.
12. A spherical conductor of radius a is surrounded by a concentric spherical
conducting shell whose internal radius is 6, and the intervening space is occupied by a
dielectric whose specific inductive capacity at a distance r from the centre is ~^ . If the
inner sphere is insulated and has a charge J, the shell being connected with the earth,
prove that the potential in the dielectric at a distance r from the centre is log  ^ .
13. A spherical conductor of radius a is surrounded by a concentric spherical shell of
radius b, and the space between them is filled with a dielectric of which the inductive
capacity at distance r from the centre is ne~ I)2 p~ s where p=r/a. Prove that the capacity
of the condenser so formed is
52
_
14. If the specific inductive capacity varies as e~, where r is the distance from
a fixed point in the medium, verify that a solution of the differential equation satisfied by
the potential is
/a\ 2 f  r
(r) I 6  l a
and hence determine the potential at any point of a sphere, whose inductive capacity is
the above function of the distance from the centre, when placed in a uniform field of
force.
15. Shew that the capacity of a condenser consisting of the conducting spheres r=a,
r=b, and a heterogeneous dielectric of inductive capacity K=f (6, $), is
16. In an imaginary crystalline medium the molecules are discs placed so as to be
all parallel to the plane of xy. Shew that the components of intensity and polarisation
are connected by equations of the form
CHAPTER VI.
THE STATE OF THE MEDIUM IN THE ELECTROSTATIC FIELD.
153. THE whole electrostatic theory has so far been based simply upon
Coulomb's Law of the inverse square of the distance. We have supposed
that one charge of electricity exerts certain forces upon a second distant
charge, but nothing has been said as to the mechanism by which this action
takes place. In handling this question there are two possibilities open. We
may either assume " action at a distance " as an ultimate explanation i.e.
simply assert that two bodies act on one another across the intervening
space, without attempting to go any further towards an explanation of how
such action is brought about or we may tentatively assume that some
medium connects the one body with the other, and examine whether it is
possible to ascribe properties to this medium, such that the observed action
will be transmitted by the medium. Faraday, in company with almost all
other great natural philosophers, definitely refused to admit "action at
a distance " as an ultimate explanation of electric phenomena, finding such
action unthinkable unless transmitted by an intervening medium.
154. It is worth enquiring whether there is any valid a priori argument which
compels us to resort to action through a medium. Some writers have attempted to use
the phenomenon of Inductive Capacity to prove that the Energy must reside in the space
between the charged plates of a condenser, rather than on the plates themselves for,
they say, change the medium between the plates, keeping the plates in the same condition,
and the energy is changed. A study of Faraday's molecular explanation of the action in
a dielectric will shew that this argument proves nothing as to the real question at issue.
It goes so far as to prove that when there are molecules placed between electric charges,
these molecules themselves acquire charges, and so may be said to be new stores of energy,
but it leaves untouched the question of whether the energy resides in the charges on the
molecules or in the ether between them.
Again, the phenomenon of induction is sometimes quoted against action at a distance
a small conductor placed at a point P in an electrostatic field shews phenomena which
depend on the electric intensity at P. This is taken to shew that the state of the ether
at the point P before the introduction of the conductor was in some way different from
what it would have been if there had not been electric charges in the neighbourhood. But
all that is proved is that the state of the point P after the introduction of the conductor
will be different from what it would have been if there had not been electric charges in
the neighbourhood, and this can be explained equally well either by action at a distance or
153,154] The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field 139
action through a medium. The new conductor is a collection of positive and negative
charges : the phenomena under question are produced by these charges being acted upon
by the other charges in the field, but whether this action is action at a distance or action
through a medium cannot be told.
Indeed, it will be seen that, viewed in the light of the electrontheory and of Faraday's
theory of dielectric polarisation, electrical action stands on just the same level as
gravitational action. In each case the system of forces to be explained may be regarded
as a system of forces between indestructible centres, whether of electricity or of matter,
and the law of force is the law of the inverse square, independently of the state of the
space between the centres. And although scientists may be said to be agreed that
gravitational action, as well as electrical action, is in point of fact propagated through
a medium, yet a consideration of the case of gravitational forces will shew that there is
no obvious a priori argument which can be used to disprove action at a distance.
Failing an a priori argument, an attempt may be made to disprove action at a distance,
or rather to make it improbable, by an appeal to experience. It may be argued that as
all the forces of which we have experience in everyday life are forces between substances
in contact, therefore it follows by analogy that forces of gravitation, electricity and
magnetism, must ultimately reduce to forces between substances in contact i.e. must be
transmitted through a medium. Upon analysis, however, it will be seen that this argument
divides all forces into two classes :
(a) Forces of gravitation, electricity and magnetism, which appear to act at a
distance.
(/3) Forces of pressure and impact between solid bodies, hydrostatic pressure, etc.
which appear to act through a medium.
The argument is now seen to be that because class (/3) appear to act through a medium,
therefore class (a) must in reality act through a medium. The argument could, with equal
logical force, be used in the exactly opposite direction : indeed it has been so used by the
followers of Boscovitch. The Newtonian discovery of gravitation, and of apparent action
at a distance, so occupied the attention of scientists at the time of Boscovitch that it
seemed natural to regard action at a distance as the ultimate basis of force, and to
try to interpret action through a medium in terms of action at a distance. The reversion
from this view came, as has been said, with Faraday.
Hertz's subsequent discovery of the finite velocity of propagation of electric action,
which had previously been predicted by Maxwell's theory, came to the support of Faraday's
view. To see exactly what is meant by this finite velocity of propagation, let us imagine
that we place two uncharged conductors A, B at a distance r from one another. By
charging J, and so performing work at A, we can induce charges on conductor B, and
when this has been done, there will be an attraction between conductors A and B. We
can suppose that conductor A is held fast, and that conductor B is allowed to move
towards A, work being performed by the attraction from conductor A. We are now
recovering from B work which was originally performed at A. The experiments of Hertz
shew that a finite time is required before any of the work spent at A becomes available
at B. A natural explanation is to suppose that work spent on A assumes the form of
energy which spreads itself out through the whole of space, and that the finite time
observed before energy becomes available at B is the time required for the first part of
the advancing energy to travel from A to B. This explanation involves regarding energy
as a definite physical entity, capable of being localised in space. It ought to be noticed
that our senses give us no knowledge of energy as a physical entity : we experience force,
not energy. And the fact that energy appears to be propagated through space with finite
140 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [OH. vi
velocity does not justify us in concluding that it has a real physical existence, for, as we
shall see, the potential appears to be propagated in the same way, and the potential can
only be regarded as a convenient mathematical fiction.
155. We accordingly make the tentative hypothesis that all electric
action can be referred to the action of an intervening medium, and we have
to examine what properties must be ascribed to the medium. If it is found
that contradictory properties would have to be ascribed to the medium, then
the hypothesis of action through an intervening medium will have to be
abandoned. If the properties are found to be consistent, then the hypotheses
of action at a distance and action through a medium are still both in the
field, but the latter becomes more or less probable just in proportion as the
properties of the hypothetical medium seem probable or improbable.
Later, we shall have to conduct a similar enquiry with respect to the system of forces
which two currents of electricity are found to exert on one another. It will then be found
that the law of force required for action at a distance is an extremely improbable law,
while the properties of a medium required to explain the action appear to be very natural,
and therefore, in our sense, probable.
156. Since electric action takes place even across the most complete
vacuum obtainable, we conclude that if this action is transmitted by a
medium, this medium must be the ether. Assuming that the action is
transmitted by the ether, we must suppose that at any point in the electro
static field there will be an action and reaction between the two parts of the
ether at opposite sides of the point. The ether, in other words, is in a state
of stress at every point in the electrostatic field. Before discussing the
particular system of stresses appropriate to an electrostatic field, we shall
investigate the general theory of stresses in a medium at rest.
General Theory of Stresses in a medium at rest.
157. Let us take a small area dS in the medium perpendicular to the
axis of x. Let us speak of that part of the medium near to dS for which x
is greater than its value over dS as x+, and that for which x is less than this
value as #_, so that the area dS separates the two regions x + and a?_.
Those parts of the medium by which these two regions are occupied exert
forces upon one another across dS, and this system of forces is spoken of as
the stress across dS. Obviously this stress will consist of an action and
reaction, the two being equal and opposite. Also it is clear that the amount
of this stress will be proportional to dS.
Let us assume that the force exerted by x+ on x_ has components
P^dS, P xy dS, P xz dS,
then the force exerted by x_ on x + will have components
P^dS, P xy dS, P xz dS.
154157] General Theory of Stress 141
The quantities P xx , P xy , P xz are spoken of as the components of stress
perpendicular to Ox. Similarly there will be components of stress P yx , P yy ,
P yz perpendicular to Oy, and components of stress P zx , P zy , P zz perpendicular
to Oz.
Let us next take a small parallelepiped in the
medium, bounded by planes
x g , x % + dx ;
The stress acting upon the parallelepiped g
across the face of area dydz in the plane x =
will have components
(Pxx)x =$dy dz, (P xy ) x =$dy dz, (P xz ) x =$dy dz,
while the stress acting upon the parallelepiped across the opposite face will
have components
(Ixy)x=tdx dydz, (J^z).
Compounding these two stresses, we find that the resultant of the stresses
acting upon the parallelepiped across the pair of faces parallel to the plane
of yz, has components
dfxx 777 ^Pxy 7 7 J ^PtZ 7 7 7
^ dxdydz, ^ ^ dxdydz, = dxdydz.
ox ox ox
Similarly from the other pairs of faces, we get resultant forces of com
ponents
Op O p < r\P
^ dxdydz, ^~ dxdydz, ^ dxdydz,
J U J
op op ap
and dxdydz, ^ dxdydz, ^ dxdydz.
For generality, let us suppose that in addition to the action of these
stresses the medium is acted upon by forces acting from a distance, of
amount H, H, Z per unit volume. The components of the forces acting on
the parallelepiped of volume dxdydz will be
H dx dy dz, H dx dy dz, Z dx dy dz.
Compounding all the forces which have been obtained, we obtain as equations
of equilibrium
'yx
dx r dy
and two similar equations.
.(79)
142 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [CH. vi
158. These three equations ensure that the medium shall have no
motion of translation, but for equilibrium it is also necessary that there
should be no rotation. To a first approximation, the stress across any face
may be supposed to act at the centre of the face, and the force H, H, Z at
the centre of the parallelepiped. Taking moments about a line through the
centre parallel to the axis of Ox, we obtain as the equation of equilibrium
P v ,Zv = .............................. (80).
This and the two similar equations obtained by taking moments about
lines parallel to Oy, Oz ensure that there shall be no rotation of the medium.
Thus the necessary and sufficient condition for the equilibrium of the medium
is expressed by three equations of the form of (79), and three equations of the
form of (80).
159. Suppose next that we take a small area dS anywhere in the
medium. Let the direction cosines of the normal
to dS be I, m, + n. Let the parts of the
medium close to dS and on the two sides of it be
spoken of as S + and $_, these being named so
that a line drawn from dS with direction cosines
+ 1, +m, +n will be drawn into S + , and one
with direction cosines I, m, n will be drawn
into S. Let the force exerted by 8 + on $_
across the area dS have components
FdS, GdS, HdS, Flo
then the force exerted by SL on S+ will have
components
FdS, GdS, HdS.
The quantities F, G, H are spoken of as the components of stress across
a plane of direction cosines I, m, n.
To find the values of F, G, H, let us draw a small tetrahedron having
three faces parallel to the coordinate planes and a fourth having direction
cosines I, m, n. If dS is the area of the last face, the areas of the other
faces are IdS, mdS, ndS and the volume of the parallelepiped is
%. Resolving parallel to Ox, we have, since the medium inside
this tetrahedron is in equilibrium,
H  ldSP xx  mdSP yx ndSP zx
giving, since dS is supposed vanishingly small,
F=lP xx + mP yx + nP 2X ........................ (81)
and there are two similar equations to determine G and H.
158160] General Theory of Stress 143
160. Assuming that equation (80) and the two similar equations are
satisfied, the normal component of stress across the plane of which the
direction cosines are I, m, n is
IF + mG + nH = PP XX + m?P yy + ri*P zz + 2mn P yz +ZnlP zx
The quadric
^l ...... (82)
is called the stressquadric. If r is the length of its radius vector drawn in
the direction I, m, n, we have
r 2 (l*P xx + m*P yy + n*P zz + 2mnP yz + 2nlP zx + 2lmP xy ) = 1.
It is now clear that the normal stress across any plane I, m, n is measured
by the reciprocal of the square of the radius vector of which the direction
cosines are I, m, n. Moreover the direction of the stress across any plane
/, m, n is that of the normal to the stressquadric at the extremity of this
radius vector. For r being the length of this radius vector, the coordinates
of its extremity will be rl, rm, rn. The direction cosines of the normal at
this point are in the ratio
rlP xx + rmP xy + rnP zx : rlP xy + rml^ y + rnP yz : rlP zx + rm P yz + rn P zz
or F : G : H, which proves the result.
The stressquadric has three principal axes, and the directions of these
are spoken of as the axes of the stress. Thus the stress at any point has
three axes, and these are always at right angles to one another. If a small
area be taken perpendicular to a stress axis at any point, the stress across
this area will be normal to the area. If the amounts of these stresses are
7?, J, J, then the equation of the stressquadric referred to its principal
axes will be
Clearly a positive principal stress is a simple tension, and a negative
principal stress is a simple pressure.
As simple illustrations of this theory, it may be noticed that
(i) For a simple hydrostatic pressure P, the stressquadric becomes an imaginary
sphere
The pressure is the same in all directions, and the pressure across any plane is at right
angles to the plane (for the tangent plane to a sphere is at right angles to the radius
vector).
(ii) For a simple pull, as in a rope, the stressquadric degenerates into two parallel
planes
144 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [OH. vi
THE STRESSES IN AN ELECTROSTATIC FIELD.
161. If an infinitesimal charged particle is introduced into the electric
field at any point, the phenomena exhibited by it must, on the present view
of electric action, depend solely on the state of stress at the point. The
phenomena must therefore be deducible from a knowledge of the stress
quadric at the point. The only phenomenon observed is a mechanical force
tending to drag the particle in a certain direction namely, in the direction
of the line of force through the point. Thus from inspection of the stress
quadric, it must be possible to single out this one direction. We conclude
that the stressquadric must be a surface of revolution, having this direction
for its axis. The equation of the stressquadric at any point, referred to
its principal axes, must accordingly be
^p+^<y4r 2 ) = i ........................... (83),
where the axis of f coincides with the line of force through the point. Thus
the system of stresses must consist of a tension 7? along the lines of force,
and a tension P z perpendicular to the lines of force and if either of the
quantities J? or % is found to be negative, the tension must be interpreted
as a pressure.
Since the electrical phenomena at any point depend only on the stress
quadric, it follows that R must be deducible from a knowledge of 7? and 7?.
Moreover, the only phenomena known are those which depend on the
magnitude of R, so that it is reasonable to suppose that the only quantity
which can be deduced from a knowledge of 7? and 7? is the quantity R
in other words, that 7? and ^ are functions of R only. We shall for the
present assume this as a provisional hypothesis, to be rejected if it is found
to be incapable of explaining the facts.
162. The expression of /? as a function of R can be obtained at once
by considering the forces acting on a charged conductor. Any element dS
R 2
of surface experiences a force g dS urging it normally away from the con
ductor. On the present view of the origin of the forces in the electric field,
we must interpret this force as the resultant of the etherstresses on its two
sides. Thus, resolving normally to the conductor, we must have
where (7?) E , (/J) denote the values of 7? when the intensity is R and
respectively. Inside the conductor there is no intensity, so that the
stressquadrics become spheres, for there is nothing to differentiate one
direction from another. Any value which (7?) may have accordingly arises
161164] Stresses in Electrostatic Field 145
simply from a hydrostatic pressure or tension throughout the medium, and
this cannot influence the forces on conductors. Leaving any such hydrostatic
pressure out of account, we may take (/J) = 0, and so obtain (7?)^ in the
form
163. We can most easily arrive at the function of R which must be
taken to express the value of P 2 , by considering a special case.
Consider a spherical condenser formed of spheres of radii a, b. If this
condenser is cut into two equal halves by a plane through its centre, the
two halves will repel one another. This action must now be ascribed to the
stresses in the medium across the plane of section. Since the lines of force
are radial these stresses are perpendicular to the lines of force, and we see
at once that the stress perpendicular to the lines of force is a pressure. To
calculate the function of R which expresses this pressure, we may suppose
b a equal to some very small quantity c, so that R may be regarded as
constant along the length of a line of force. The area over which this
pressure acts is 7r(b 2 a 2 ), and since the pressure per unit area in the
medium perpendicular to a line of force is J^, the total repulsion
between the two halves of the condenser will be I^TT (b 2 a 2 ).
The whole force on either half of the condenser is however a force 27r<r 2
per unit area over each hemisphere, normal to its surface. The resultant of
all the forces acting on the inner hemisphere is ?ra 2 x 27r<r 2 , or putting
27ra 2 cr = E, so that E is the charge on either hemisphere, this force is E*/2a?.
Similarly, the force on the hemisphere of radius b is E*/2b*. Thus the re
sultant repulsion on the complete half of the condenser is \E* ( j ) . Since
\ /
this has been seen to be also equal to I^TT (6 2 a 2 ), we have
on taking a = b in the limit.
Thus in order that the observed actions may be accounted for, it is
necessary that we have
Moreover, if these stresses exist, they will account for all the observed
mechanical action on conductors, for the stresses result in a mechanical force
27r<7 2 per unit area on the surface of every conductor.
164. It remains to examine whether these stresses are such as can be
transmitted by an ether at rest.
j. 10
146 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [OH. vi
As a preliminary we must find the values of the stresscomponents f^,
Py~y, ... referred to fixed axes Ox, Oy, Oz.
The stress quadric at any point in the ether, referred to its principal axes,
is seen on comparison with equation (83) to be
Here the axis of f is in the direction of the line of force at the point.
Let the directioncosines of this direction be l lt m l} n l . Then on transform
ing to axes Ox, Oy, Oz we may replace f by lx + m^y \n^z.
Equation (85) may be replaced by
and on transforming axes f 2 + if + f 2 transforms into x 2 + i/ 2 + z 2 . Thus the
transformed equation of the stressquadric is
^ {2 (^ + rn.y + M) !  (of + f + ^)) = 1.
Comparing with equation (82), we obtain
P = ^W1) ........................... (86),
P xy =^(1l 1 m l ) ........................... (87),
and similar values for the remaining components of stress.
Or again, since X = ^R, F = m 1 .R, Z nJi,
these equations may be expressed in the form
_XY
Xy ~ 47T '
In this system of stresscomponents, the relations P xy = P yx are satisfied,
as of course they must be since the system of stresses has been derived by
assuming the existence of a stressquadric. Thus the stresses do not set up
rotations in the ether (cf. equation (80)).
In order that there may be also no tendency to translation, the stress
components must satisfy equations of the type
3 ^ + ^ + ^ = ........................... (88),
dx dy dz
expressing that no forces beyond these stresses are required to keep the
ether at rest (cf. equation (79)).
164166] Stresses in Electrostatic Field 147
On substituting the values of the stresscomponents, we have
. .
dx dy
On putting
3F 3F 3F
~' '' "
we find at once that
=
a; a?^
9.Z 9F
_
+ ~
shewing that equation (88) is satisfied.
165. Thus, to recapitulate, we have found that a system of stresses con
sisting of
pz
(i) a tension 5 per unit area in the direction of the lines of force,
O7T
D2
(ii) a pressure per unit area perpendicular to the lines of force,
is one which can be transmitted by the medium, in that it does not tend to
set up motions in the ether, and is one which will explain the observed
forces in the electrostatic field. Moreover it is the only system of stresses
capable of doing this, in which the stress at a point depends only on the
electric intensity at that point.
Examples of Stress.
166. Assuming this system of stresses to exist, it is of value to try to
picture the actual stresses in the field in a few simple cases.
Consider first the field surrounding a point charge. The tubes of force
are cones. Let us consider the equilibrium of the ether enclosed by a
frustum of one of these cones which is bounded by two ends p, q. If
o) p , cog are the areas of these ends, we find that there are tensions of
102
148 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [CH. vi
am unts fcr ' 8*
so that the forces on the two ends have as
resultant a force tending to move the ether
inwards towards the charge. This tendency
is of course balanced by the pressures acting
on the curved surface, each of which has a
component tending to press the ether inside
the frustum away from the charge.
Since R p a) p = R q w q , the former is the greater,
FlG 
167. A more complex example is afforded
by two equal point charges, of which the lines of force are shewn in
fig. 50.
FIG. 50.
The lines of force on either charge fall thickest on the side furthest
removed from the other charge, so that their resultant action on the charges
amounts to a traction on the surface of each tending to drag it away from
the other, and this traction appears to us as a repulsion between the bodies.
We can examine the matter in a different way by considering the action
and reaction across the two sides of the plane which bisects the line joining
the two charges. No lines of force cross this plane, which is accordingly
made up entirely of the side walls of tubes of force. Thus there is a pressure
R*
' per unit area acting across this plane at every point. The resultant of
O7T
all these pressures, after transmission by the ether from the plane to the
charges immersed in the ether, appears as a force of repulsion exerted by
the charges on one another.
166169] Energy in the Medium 149
ENERGY IN THE MEDIUM.
168. In setting up the system of stresses in a medium originally un
stressed, work must be done, analogous to the work done in compressing
a gas. This work must represent the energy of the stressed medium, and
this in turn must represent the energy of the electrostatic field. Clearly,
from the form of the stresses, the energy per unit volume of the medium
at any point must be a function of R only. To determine the form of this
function, we may examine the simple case of a parallel plate condenser,
R*
arid we find at once that the function must be ^ .
07T
We have now to examine whether the energy of any electrostatic field
7? 2
can be regarded as made up of a contribution of amount ^ per unit volume
from every part of the field.
In fig. 51, let PQ be a tube of force of strength e, passing from P at
potential Vp to Q at potential VQ. The ether inside this tube of force
7? 2
being supposed to possess energy ^ per unit volume, 
the total energy enclosed by the tube will be
^Q
where &> is the cross section at any point, and the
integration is along the tube. Since Rco = 4>7re,
this expression
rQ
= \e Rds
J
*/
p
v ^ ds
p US
= e(V P V Q ).
This, however, is exactly the contribution made by the charges e at
P, Q to the expression 2eF. Thus on summing over all tubes of force, we
find that the total energy of the field \^eV may be obtained exactly, by
D2
assigning energy to the ether at the rate of per unit volume.
Energy in a Dielectric.
169. By imagining the parallel plate condenser of 168 filled with
dielectric of inductive capacity K, and calculating the energy when charged,
KR*
we find that the energy, if spread through the dielectric, must be ^
per unit volume.
150 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [CH. vi
Let us now examine whether the total energy of any field can be regarded
as arising from a contribution of this amount per unit volume. The energy
contained in a single tube of force, with the notation already used, will be
S P to r mds <
KR
or, since   = P, where P is the polarisation, this energy
/;
Q
Rds
p
so that the total energy is ^eV, as before. Thus a distribution of energy of
TC A? 2
amount  per unit volume will account for the energy of any field.
O7T
Crystalline dielectrics.
170. We have seen ( 152) that in a crystalline dielectric, the com
ponents of polarisation and of electric intensity will be connected by equations
of the form
*irf=K n X + KY + K*Z\
..................... (89).
The energy of any distribution of electricity, no matter what the dielectric
may be, will be ^EV. If Tf, V, are the potentials at the two ends of
a unit tube, the part of this sum which is contributed by the charges at the
ends of this tube will be J(K JQ. If d/ds denote differentiation along the
[dV fdV
tube, this may be written / 5 ds, or again J I Pa) ds, where P is the
./ vS J OS
polarisation, and o> the cross section of the tube. Thus the energy may be
supposed to be distributed at the rate of ^ = P per unit volume. If e is the
C/S
angle between the direction of the polarisation and that of the electric
intensity, we have ~ = R cos e, so that the energy per unit volume
= iRPcos6 = (fX + gY+hZ) .................. (90).
In a slight increase to the electric charges, the change in the energy of
the system is, by 109, equal to 2V&E, so that the change in the energy per
unit volume of the medium is
169171] Maxwell's Displacement Theory 151
From formulae (89) and (90), we must have
= n
from which
 [K n X + i (K K + K) Y + i (K 13 + K 3l ) Z\.
We must also have
(W_(yWd dW dg dWdf^
dx ~ df dx + dg Sx + dh dx
n 2l
Comparing these expressions, we see that we must have
J\12 = K 2l , K j 3 = K 3l , Kos = KSZ .
The energy per unit volume is now
...) .................. (92).
MAXWELL'S DISPLACEMENT THEORY.
171. Maxwell attempted to construct a picture of the phenomena
occurring in the electric field by means of his conception of "electric dis
placement." Electric intensity, according to Maxwell, acting in any medium
whether this medium be a conductor, an insulator, or free ether produces
a motion of electricity through the medium. It is clear that Maxwell's
conception of electricity, as here used, must be wider than that which we
have up to the present been using, for electricity, as we have so far under
stood it, is incapable of moving through insulators or free ether. Maxwell's
motion of electricity in conductors is that with which we are already familiar.
As we have seen, the motion will continue so long as the electric intensity
continues to exist. According to Maxwell, there is also a motion in an
insulator or in free ether, but with the difference that the electricity cannot
travel indefinitely through these media, but is simply displaced a small
distance within the medium in the direction of the electric intensity, the
extent of the displacement in isotropic media being exactly proportional
to the intensity, and in the same direction.
The conception will perhaps be understood more clearly on comparing a conductor to
a liquid and an insulator to an elastic solid. A small particle immersed in a liquid will
continue to move through the liquid so long as there is a force acting on it, but a particle
immersed in an elastic solid, will be merely " displaced " by a force acting on it. The
amount of this displacement will be proportional to the force acting, and when the force
is removed, the particle will return to its original position.
152 The State of the Medium in the Electrostatic Field [OH. vi
Thus at any point in any medium the displacement has magnitude and
direction. The displacement, then, is a vector, and its component in any
direction may be measured by the total quantity of electricity per unit area
which has crossed a small area perpendicular to this direction, the quantity
being measured from a time at which no electric intensity was acting.
172. Suppose, now, that an electric field is gradually brought into
existence, the field at any instant being exactly similar to the final field
except that the intensity at each point is less than the final intensity in
some definite ratio K. Let the displacement be c times the intensity, so
that when the intensity at any point is /cR, the displacement is c/cR. The
direction of this displacement is along the lines of force, so that the
electricity may be regarded as moving through the tubes of force : the lines
of force become identical now with the currentlines of a stream, to which
they have already been compared.
Let us consider a small element of volume cut off by two adjacent
equipotentials and a tube of force. Let the cross section of the tube of
force be co, and the normal distance between the equipotentials where they
meet the tube of force be ds, so that the element under
consideration is of volume cods. On increasing the intensity
from /cR to (K + d/c) R, there is an increase of displacement
from c/cR to c (K + die) R, and therefore an additional dis
placement of electricity of amount cRdic per unit area.
Thus of the electricity originally inside the small element
of volume, a quantity cRcodrc flows out across one of the
bounding equipotentials, whilst an equal quantity flows in
across the other. Let T, T be the potentials of these
surfaces, then the whole work done in displacing the electricity originally
inside the element of volume cods, is exactly the work of transferring a
quantity cRdfc of electricity from potential K to potential V z . It is
therefore cRco (V 2  V[) d/c and, since V 2 V 1 = /cRds, this may be written as
cR*codstcd/c. Thus as the intensity is increased from to R } the total work
spent in displacing the electricity in the element of volume cods
= I cR* (cods) /cd/c ^cR 2 . cods.
Jo
This work, on Maxwell's theory, is simply the energy stored up in the
D2
element of volume cods of the medium, and is therefore equal to cods.
Thus c must be taken equal to  , and the displacement at any point is
measured by
47T*
ds
171174] Maxwell's Displacement Theory 153
If the element of volume is taken in a dielectric of inductive capacity K,
Kit? K
the energy is  , so that c = , and the displacement is
KR
47T '
173. It is now evident that Maxwell's "displacement" is identical in
magnitude and direction with Faraday's "polarisation" introduced in
Chap. V.
Denoting either quantity by P, we had the relation
(93),
expressing that the normal component of P integrated over any closed
surface is equal to the total charge inside. On Maxwell's interpretation of
the quantity P, the surface integral 1 1 PcosedS simply measures the total
quantity of electricity which has crossed the surface from inside to outside.
Thus equation (93) expresses that the total outward displacement across any
closed surface is equal to the total charge inside.
It follows that if a new conductor with a charge e is introduced at any
point in space, then a quantity of electricity equal to e flows outwards across
every surface surrounding the point. In other words, the total quantity of
electricity inside the surface remains unaltered. This total quantity consists
of two kinds of electricity (i) the kind of electricity which appears as a
charge on an electrified body, and (ii) the kind which Maxwell imagines to
occupy the whole of space, and to undergo displacement under the action of
electric forces. On introducing a new positively charged conductor into any
space, the total amount of electricity of the first kind inside the space is
increased, but that of the second kind experiences an exactly equal decrease,
so that the total of the two kinds is left unaltered.
174. This result at once suggests the analogy between electricity and
an incompressible fluid. We can picture the motion of electric charges
through free ether as causing a displacement of the electricity in the ether,
in just the same way as the motion of solid bodies through an incompressible
liquid would cause a displacement of the liquid.
REFERENCES.
On the stresses in the medium :
FARADAY. Experimental Researches, 1215 1231.
On Maxwell's displacement theory :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, 5962.
CHAPTER VII.
GENERAL ANALYTICAL THEOREMS.
GREEN'S THEOREM.
175. A THEOREM, first given by Green, and commonly called after him,
enables us to express an integral taken over the surfaces of a number of
bodies as an integral taken through the space between them. This theorem
naturally has many applications to Electrostatic Theory. It supplies a means
of handling analytically the problems which Faraday treated geometrically
with the help of his conception of tubes of force.
176. THEOREM. If u, v, w are continuous functions of the Cartesian
coordinates a, y, z, then
2 jj(lu + mv + nw) dS =  fff(j~ + ~ + 1?) dxdydz (94).
Here 2 denotes that the surface integrals are summed over any number of
closed surfaces, which may include as special cases either
(i) one of finite size which encloses all the others, or
(ii) an imaginary sphere of infinite radius,
and I, m, n are the directioncosines of the normal drawn in every case from
the element dS into the space between the surfaces. The volume integral is
taken throughout the space between the surfaces.
Consider first the value of 1 1 / dxdydz. Take any small prism with its
axis parallel to that of x, and of crosssection dydz. Let it meet the surfaces
at P, Q, R,S,T,U,... t (fig. 53), cutting off areas dS P , dS Q> dS*, ....
The contribution of this prism to I M^ dxdydz is dydz\^ doc, where the
integral is taken over those parts of the prism which are between the surfaces.
fdw, [ Q faj [ s du
Thus \ dx=\ dx+\ 5
] OX } pOX ] R OX
R "bx
UP+UQ U R
175177] Greeris Theorem 155
where u p , U Q , U R , ... are the values of u at P, Q, R, .... Also, since the pro
jection of each of the areas dS P , dS Q , ... on the plane of yz is dydz, we have
dydz = lpdS P = l Q dS Q = l R dS R = . . . ,
where lp,l Q ,l R , ... are the values of I at P, Q, R, .... The signs in front of
IP, Q> IR> are alternately positive and negative, because, as we proceed
along PQR..., the normal drawn into the space between the surfaces makes
angles which are alternately acute and obtuse with the positive axis of x.
FIG. 53.
Thus
dydz \ ^ dx = dydz ( u p + U Q U R
J ooc
l Q u Q dS Q l R u R dS R ............ (95),
and on adding the similar equations obtained for all the prisms we obtain
..................... (96),
the terms on the righthand sides of equations of the type (95) combining so
as exactly to give the term on the righthand side of (96).
We can treat the functions v and w similarly, and so obtain altogether
dv
~ i ;  ) dxdydz = 2 I \(lu + mv + nw) dS,
oy dzj JJ^
proving the theorem.
177. If u, v, w are the three components of any vector F, then the
expression
du dv dw
dx dy dz
is denoted, for reasons which will become clear later, by div F. If N is the
component of the vector in the direction of the normal (I, m, n) to dS, then
N =lu + mv + nw.
156 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
Thus Green's Theorem assumes the form
lljdivVdxdydz = 2 jJNdS (97).
A vector F which is such that div F = at every point within a certain
region is said to be " solenoidal " within that region. If F is solenoidal
within any region, Green's Theorem shews that
where the integral is taken over any closed surface inside the region within
which F is solenoidal. Two instances of a solenoidal vector have so far
occurred in this book the electric intensity in free space, and the polarisa
tion in an uncharged dielectric.
178. Integration through space external to closed surfaces. Let the
outer surface be a sphere at infinity, say a sphere of radius r, where r is
to be made infinite in the limit. The value of
1 1
(lu + mv + nw) dS
taken over this sphere will vanish if u, v, and w vanish more rapidly at
infinity than . Thus, if this condition is satisfied, we have that
where the volume integration is taken through all space external to certain
closed surfaces, and the surfaceintegration is taken over these surfaces,
I, m, n being the directioncosines of the outward normal.
179. Integration through the interior of a closed surface. Let the inner
surfaces in fig. 53 all disappear, then we have
where the volume integration is throughout the space inside a closed surface,
and the surface integration is over this area, I, m, n being the direction
cosines of the inward normal to the surface.
180. Integration through a region in which u, v, w are discontinuous.
The only case of discontinuity of u, v, w which possesses any physical impor
tance is that in which u, v, w change discontinuously in value in crossing
certain surfaces, these being finite in number. To treat this case, we enclose
each surface of discontinuity inside a surface drawn so as to fit it closely on
177180] Green's Theorem 157
both sides. In the space left, after the interiors of such closed surfaces have
been excluded, the functions u, v, w are continuous. We may accordingly
apply Green's Theorem, and obtain
 2' f j(lu + mv + nw) dS ...... (98),
where 2 denotes summation over the closed surfaces by which the original
space was limited, and ' denotes summation over the new closed surfaces
which surround surfaces of discontinuity of u, v, w. Now
corresponding to any element of area dS on a surface of dis
continuity there will be two elements of area of the enclosing
surface. Let the directioncosines of the two normals to dS be
l lt m lt H! and 1 2 , m 2 , n 2 , so that Ii = l 2 , m l = m 2) and
= n
Let these directioncosines be those of normals
n a
drawn from dS to the two sides of the surface, which we shall
denote by 1 and 2, and let the values of u, v, w on the two
sides of the surface of discontinuity at the element dS be
MI, flu w i an d u 2> v 2 , w 2 . Then clearly the two elements of
the enclosing surface, which fit against the element dS of FIG. 54.
the original surface of discontinuity, will contribute to
S' [ \(lu + mv + nw) dS
an amount dS [(^ + m a v t + nw^ + (I 2 u 2 + m 2 v 2 + n 2 w 2 )]
or {1 (MJ  u 2 ) + m l (X v 2 ) + Wi (w l  w 2 )} dS.
Thus the whole value of 2)' II (lu +mv + nw) dS may be expressed in
the form
2" H$ (*!  u a ) + m l (v,  v 2 ) + Wj (w l  w. 2 )} dS,
where the integration is now over the actual surfaces of discontinuity. Thus
Green's Theorem becomes
Mdu dv dw\ 777
te+ny+w^y 1 *
lu + mv + nw)dS
i (MI  O + m, (v,  v 2 ) + n, (w l  w 2 )} dS ...... (99).
158 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
Special Form of Greens Theorem.
181. An important case of the theorem occurs when u, v, w have the
special values
,
v = <^ ,
dy
w = 3>^ ,
dz
where <I> and M* are any functions of x, y and z. The value of (lu + mv + nw)
is now
= + m
or <f>
a^\
n 3
as/
where  denotes differentiation along the normal, of which the direction
on
cosines are I, m, n.
We also have
du dv dw a f . dv\ a ( , a^) a ,
__ I ___ I __ = _ Jcb _ I J  J<J) _ L i  Jcb _
a# a a* d ^
_
" a# aa; + 9y 8y dz dz H V8^ + 8y 2 "aF/ '
Thus the theorem becomes
9 ^^
This theorem is true for all values of <l> and "SP, so that we may inter
change 4> and "SP", and the equation remains true. Subtracting the equation
so obtained from equation (100), we get
 ^ ^ ...... (101).
APPLICATIONS OF GREEN'S THEOREM.
182. In equation (101), put <J> = 1 and = 7, where F denotes the
electrostatic potential. We obtain
dS .................. (102).
181183] Green's Theorem 159
Let us divide the sum on the right into I lt the integral over a single
closed surface enclosing any number of conductors, and / 2 the integrals over
the surfaces of the conductors. Thus
~\
where ~ denotes differentiation along the normal drawn into the surface.
Thus ^ is equal to the component of intensity along this normal, and
therefore to N t where N is the component along the outward normal.
Hence
/
At the surface of a conductor ^ = 4Tro, so that
on
7 2 = 4?rS 1 1 adS over conductors
= 47T x total charge on conductors.
If there is any volume electrification, V 2 F= 4>7rp, so that
rrr rrr
I V 2 F dxdydz = 4?r III pdxdydz,
JJJ JJJ
and the integral on the right represents the total volume electrification.
Thus equation (102) becomes
1 1 NdS = 47T x (total charge on conductors + total volume electrification),
so that the theorem reduces to Gauss' Theorem.
183. Next put <E> and SP each equal to V. Then equation (100) becomes
Take the surfaces now to be the surfaces of conductors, and a sphere of
radius r at infinity. At infinity V is of order  , so that ^ is of order
1 dV
, and hence ^o~ > integrated over the sphere at infinity, vanishes ( 178).
The equation becomes
 47T If [p V dxdydz + fff^ 2 dxdydz  4?r IjVa dS = 0.
160 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
The first and last terms together give 4?r x %eV, where e is any element
of charge, either of volumeelectrification or surfaceelectrification. Thus the
whole equation becomes
shewing that the energy may be regarded as distributed through the space
R 2
outside the conductors, to the amount   per unit volume the result
07T
already obtained in 168.
184. In Green's Theorem, take
w =
Here K is ultimately to be taken to be the inductive capacity, which
may vary discontinuously on crossing the boundary between two dielectrics.
We accordingly suppose u, v, w to be discontinuous, and use Green's Theorem
in the form given in 180. We have then
, , , ,
K \^ ^ + ^r ~ + ^ &} dccdydz
1 dx dx dy dy dz l
[ f^ 8
r^1^
JJJ [da
das \ dxj dy \ dy J dz
W dW d
 + m= + nT
x dy
where ^ , r have the meanings assigned to them in 140.
If we put <I> = 1, "SP = F, in this equation, it reduces, as in 130, to
1 1 K ^ dS = 47T x total charge inside surface,
JJ on
so that the result is that of the extension of Gauss' Theorem. Again, if we
put <I> = ^ = F, the equation becomes
f f CKR 2
1 1 1 dxdydz =^ \ 2<eV,
and the result is that of 169.
183187] Uniqueness of Solution 161
Greens Reciprocation Theorem.
185. In equation (101), put <!>= F, = F', where F is the potential
of one distribution of electricity, and V is that of a second and independent,
distribution. The equation becomes
which is simply the theorem of 102, namely
2eF'=2e'F .............................. (104).
If we assign the same values to <E>, M* in equation (103), we again obtain
equation (104), which is now seen to be applicable when dielectrics are
present.
UNIQUENESS OF SOLUTION.
186. We can use Green's Theorem to obtain analytical proofs of the
theorems already given in 99.
THEOREM. If the value of the potential V is known at every point on
a number of closed surfaces by which a space is bounded internally and
externally, there is only one value for V at every point of this intervening
space, which satisfies the condition that V 2 F either vanishes or has an assigned
value, at every point of this space.
For, if possible, let F, V denote two values of the potential, both of which
satisfy the requisite conditions. Then F' F=0 at every point of the
surfaces, and V 2 (F' F) = at every point of the space. Putting <I> and M^
each equal to V Fin equation (100), we obtain
and this integral, being a sum of squares, can only vanish through the
vanishing of each term. We must therefore have
( ry) = <r'F)=(F'F) = ............ (105 X
or V V equal to a constant. And since V V vanishes at the surfaces^
this constant must be zero, so that V=V everywhere, i.e. the two solutions
F and V are identical : there is only one solution.
187. THEOREM. Given the value of ^ at every point of a number of
on
closed surfaces, there is only one possible value for V (except for additive
constants), at each point of the intervening space, subject to the condition that
V 2 F = throughout this space, or has an assigned value at each point.
.1. 11
162 General Analytical Theorems [OH. vn
The proof is almost identical with that of the last theorem, the only
difference being that at every point of the surfaces, we have
instead of the former condition V F=0. We still have
so that equation (105) is true, and the result follows as before, except that
V and V may now differ by a constant.
188. Theorems exactly similar to these last two theorems are easily
seen to be true when the dielectric is different from air.
For, let V, V be two solutions, such that
I \ K I (V F')j + ~ \K I (V F')l + j \K I (V V')\ =
c>x ( &e v '] dy ( dy '} dz { dz^ '}
at all points of the space, and at the surface either F V = 0, or
A<7FOa
By Green's Theorem,
= by hypothesis.
Equation (105) now follows as before, so that the result is proved.
COMPARISONS OF DIFFERENT FIELDS.
189. THEOREM. If any number of surfaces are fixed in position, and a
given charge is placed on each surface, then the energy is a minimum when
the charges are placed so that every surface is an equipotential.
Let V be the actual potential at any point of the field, and V
the potential when the electricity is arranged so that each surface is
187190] Comparison of different fields 163
an equipotential. Calling the corresponding energies W and W, we
have
f ,
= Q~ H/i(5  o }+... \dxdyd
STT JJJ V 9# 8a?
If we put 4>= F, ^= F' 7, in equation (100), we find that the last
integral becomes
or, since V is by hypothesis constant over each conductor,
and this vanishes since each. total charge llo'dS is the same as the corre
sponding total charge lladS. Thus
This integral is essentially positive, so that W is greater than W, which
proves the theorem.
If any distribution is suddenly set free and allowed to flow so that the
surface of each conductor becomes an equipotential, the loss of energy
W W is seen to be equal to the energy of a field of potential V V at
any point.
190. THEOREM. The introduction of a new conductor lessens the energy
of the field.
Let accented symbols refer to the field after a new conductor 8 has been
introduced, insulated and uncharged. Then
WW'= ~ fff&dxdydg through the field before S is introduced
  \\\R*dxdydz through the field after 8 is introduced
==  I \\R z dxdydz through the space ultimately occupied by S
+ ^ IJI(R 2 R'") through the field after 8 is introduced.
112
164 General Analytical Theorems [OH. vu
The last integral
and this, as in the last theorem, is equal to
_
dn dn J
where S denotes summation over all conductors, including S.
This last sum of surface integrals vanishes, so that
W  W = ^ (JJR* dxdydz through 8
^^) 2 +}^^^ through the field after
S has been introduced.
Thus W W is essentially positive, which proves the theorem.
On putting the new conductor to the earth, it follows from the preceding
theorem that the energy is still further lessened.
191. THEOREM. Any increase in the inductive capacity of the dielectric
between conductors lessens the energy of the field.
Let the conductors of the field be supposed fixed in position and in
sulated, so that their total charge remains unaltered. Let the inductive
capacity at any point change from K to K + SK, and as a consequence let
the potential change from V to V + SV, and the total energy of the field
from W to W +8TT.
If E lt E%, ... denote the total charges of the conductors, V lt F 2 , ... their
potentials, and p the volume density at any point,
xdydz,
so that, since the E's and p remain unaltered by changes in K, we have
SW = $2ESV+jjjpSVda;dyd2 ............... (106).
We also have
so that
= !IM(^) + C) + (^}\*Kdxdydz
+ f 1 1 1 K iV ^F + ^ ^~ + ^ ^ I ^^^..(107).
A^ / 1 ^/^ g/p ^ O y fig fa (
190192] Earnshaw's Theorem 165
By Green's Theorem, the last line
j j 1
dxdydz
the summation of surface integrals being over the surfaces of all the
conductors,
dxdydz
S W =   If I &SK dxdydz.
by equation (106). Thus equation (107) becomes
81^= 1 1 \I&&K dxdydz 28 TF",
so that
SW =
STT.
Thus 8W is necessarily negative if $K is positive, proving the theorem. '
It is worth noticing that, on the molecular theory of dielectrics, the increase in the
inductive capacity of the dielectric at any point will be most readily accomplished by
introducing new molecules. If, as in Chap, v, these molecules are regarded as uncharged
conductors, the theorem just proved becomes identical with that of 190.
EARNSHAW'S THEOREM.
192. THEOREM. A charged body placed in an electric field of force
cannot rest in stable equilibrium under the influence of the electric forces
alone.
Let us suppose the charged body A to be in any position, in the field
of force produced by other bodies B, B', .... First suppose all the elec
tricity on A, B, B', ... to be fixed in position on these conductors. Let
V denote the potential, at any point of the field, of the electricity on
B, B, .... Let x, y, z be the coordinates of any definite point in A, say its
centre of gravity, and let x + a, y+ b, z + c be the coordinates of any other
point. The potential energy of any element of charge e at x + a, y + b, z + c
is eV, where V is evaluated at x + a, y + b, z+c. Denoting eV by w, we
clearly have
d~w d 2 w d' 2 w
1'  H 0,
since F is a solution of Laplace's equation.
166 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
Let W be the total energy of the body A in the field of force from
B, B f , .... Then W= Sw, and therefore
i.e. the sum TF=2w, satisfies Laplace's equation, because this equation is
satisfied by the terms of the sum separately. It follows from this equation,
as in 52, that W cannot be a true maximum or a true minimum for any
values of x, y, z. Thus, whatever the position of the body A, it will always
be possible to find a displacement i.e. a change in the values of x, y, z for
which W decreases. If, after this displacement, the electricity on the con
ductors A,B, B', ... is set free, so that each surface becomes an equipotential,
it follows from 189 that the energy of the field is still further lessened.
Thus a displacement of the body A has been found which lessens the energy
of the field, and therefore the body A cannot rest in stable equilibrium.
STRESSES IN THE MEDIUM.
193. Let us take any surface S in the medium, enclosing any number
of charges at points and on surfaces S lt S 2 ,
Let I, m, n be the directioncosines of the normal at any point of
S lt $ 2 , ... or S, the normal being supposed drawn, as in Green's Theorem,
into the space between the surfaces.
The total mechanical force acting on all the matter inside this surface
is compounded of a force eR in the direction of the intensity acting on every
point charge or element of volumecharge 0, and a force 27rcr 2 or ^oR per
unit area on each element of conducting surface. If X, Y, Z are the com
ponents parallel to the axes of the total mechanical force,
where the surface integral is taken over all conductors S lt S 2 , ... inside the
surface S, and the volume integral throughout the space between S and these
surfaces. Substituting for p and a,
1 ffff&V 9 2 F 8 2 F\ 9F ,
x =  hrv + 05 + ^r 5~ dxdydz
4>7rJJJ\dx 2 dy z dz* J dx
1 v ff
fT"2 I
4?r JJ
^ +n^\ ^ dS ......... (108).
dy dz
192, 193] Stresses in the Medium 167
By Green's Theorem,
. rrrd fiv
= * JJJ te &
[[[VVdV, , . C[[dV d f dV\
JJJ w & d ydz = ~ in * vte J
Now
rr/*8F 8 /dv\ , , , rrr, a /ary .
1 11 aT a~ bf~ dxdydz = U dxdyd
JJJ dy dy \fa/ JJJ * dx \dy J

so that the last equation becomes
and there is a similar value for
Substituting these values, equation (108) becomes
8F8F
X= 
4?r j v2// Vw/ ^
8F8F
o
[_V 8a; / \ 9y / V
Since we have at every point of the surface of a conductor
8F 8F 8F
a* !__. ........................ (109)
/ m n
it follows that the integral over each conductor vanishes, leaving only the
integral with respect to cZS, which gives
X =  (lP xx + mP xy + nP m ) dS,
where ^ =  (Z 2  F 2  2 ),
168 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
If we write also
~
47T 1
the resultant force parallel to the axis of Y will be
Y =  (^ + mPyy + nP yz ) dS,
and there is a similar value for Z. The action is therefore the same (cf.
159) as if there was a system of stresses of components
p p p p p p
J xx > * yy > J zzi J yz> * zx j * xy j
given by the above equations : i.e. these may be regarded as the stresses of
the medium.
194. It remains to investigate the couples on the system inside S. If
L, M, N are the moments of the resultant couple about the axes of x, y, z,
we have
L = jjfp (yZ zY) dxdydz + JS (jo (yZ  zY) dS
8 2 F\ / 8F 8F
, ,
+  6 + m ^ + n 5 ) (y =  z =
STT ]] \ dx dy dz / \ 3^ ty
F 9F
Now
f[[dV d ( 3F 8F\ ,
* 1 1 1 "5~~ ^r V ^r  ^ ^~~ ^^ y
./ JJ 3a; 8a? V^ 82: dy J
3F/ 8F 8F\ . ff;8F/ 8F 8F\ ,
^ (y ^z^} dS III ^ [y=  irsjoS,
8^ V^ 8^ 9/ JJ a V 82: S/y
so that
,,. 8 / 8F 8F\ 8F 8 / 8F 8F\
L = 1 1 H ( ?/ ^r  z ) + I v 5 25
8^ 8y/
, . , 8F 8F
+ dzdz [y ^
1 v [[fjdV 8F 8F \/ 3V 8F
 ^ S 1 1 U  + m ^ + n r ) { y 5 * 5
8?r JJV 9 9y 8^/V 82 8y
8F^ dV t 8F\ / 8F 8F\
^ +m^ +n^ }(y~ z^)
dx dy dz J V dz dy J
193196] Mechanical Forces on Dielectrics 169
The first term in this expression
a d * v
47T ( fo 9a;9* dy dydz ~fc W
/9F 9 2 F , 9F9 2 F 9F9 2 F\) .
~* * I a~~ 3~2~ + 3T~ s~T + ^~ ^~o~ r dxdydz
\ox dxoy dy dy 2 dz dydzj)
zmR*} ^ +  (ynR*  zmR*} dS . . .(111).
The second term in expression (110) for L may, in virtue of the relations
(109), be expressed in the form
 ^ 2(j(ynR 2  zmR*) dS,
which is exactly cancelled by the first term in expression (111). We are
accordingly left with
1 [[(, o/7 8F 8F ZV\ ( 9F 8F
L = n(ynR 2 zmR 2 )2 (l^ +m^ + n^\ (y ^  *~
8TrJJ ( w V 9^' dy dz J V dz dyj
=  {y (IP XZ + mP yz + nP zz )  z (lP xy + mP yy + nP yz )} dS,
verifying that the couples are also accounted for by the supposed system of
etherstresses.
195. Thus the stresses in the ether are identical with those already
found in Chapter vi, and these, as we have seen, may be supposed to
D2
consist of a tension  per unit area across the lines of force, and a
07T
R z
pressure per unit area in directions perpendicular to the lines of force.
MECHANICAL FORCES ON DIELECTRICS IN THE FIELD.
196. Let us begin by considering a field in which there are no surface
charges, and no discontinuities in the structure of the dielectrics. We shall
afterwards be able to treat surfacecharges and discontinuities as limiting
cases.
Let us suppose that the mechanical forces on material bodies are 5, H, Z
per unit volume at any typical point a, y, z of this field.
Let us displace the material bodies in the field in such a way that the
point x, y, z comes to the point x f S#, y + By, z 4 &z. The work done in
the whole field will be
ZSz)dxdydz (112),
170 General Analytical Theorems [OH. vn
and this must shew itself in an equal increase in the electric energy. The
electric energy W can be put in either of the forms
W = W, = 4 fjjpVdxdydz,
1 /T/V {ft v V fiV\* fiVV] j j j
TF= TF 2 =  K \(^} + U + hr \dxdydz.
STrJJJ (\dxj \dy J \OZ J }
When the displacement takes place, there will be a slight variation in
the distribution of electricity and a slight alteration of the potential.
There is also a slight change in the value of K at any point owing to
the motion of the dielectrics in the field. Thus we can put
where (STPi) P denotes the change produced in the function W l by the varia
tion of electrical density alone, (TFi) F that produced by the variation of
potential alone, and so on.
We have
^
(o Tr a ) F = A U ^ + ^ ^  h ^  ^ dxdydz.
47rJjJ \dx dx dy dy dz dz J
By Green's Theorem, the last expression transforms into
= 1 1 \p$V dxdydz,
so that
We accordingly have
the variation produced by alterations in F no longer appearing.
Now (3 W Op = i ! jjfy V dxdydz,
so that STF= VSp~SK\dxdydz .................. (113).
07T J
196] Mechanical Forces on Dielectrics 171
The change in p is due to two causes. In the first place, the electrifica
tion at x, y, z was originally at x Bx, y By, z Sz, so that Bp has as part
of its value
Again, the element of volume dxdydz becomes changed by displacement
into an element
d } ( d )f9
5 (Bx)dx\ \dy\ = (By) dy\ \dz + = (Bz)(
dx^ } ( c dy *),( dz ^ '
j j j /i d&c dBy dBz\
or dtfefydsr 1 +  + ^ + 
V dx dy dz J
so that, even if there were no motion of translation, an original charge
pdxdydz would after displacement occupy the volume given by expression
(115), and this would give an increase in p of amount
/3 Bx dBy d Bz\
\dx dy dz / '
Combining the two parts of Bp given by expressions (114) and (115),
we find
The change in K is also due to two causes. In the first place the point
which in the displaced position is at x, y, z was originally at x Bx, y &y,
z $z. Hence as part of the value in $K we have
dK, ZK * 3K *
 ^ Sx ^ 8y  ^ Sz.
dx dy dz
Also, with the displacement, the density of the medium is changed, so
that its molecular structure is changed, and there is a corresponding change
in K. If we denote the density of the medium by T, and the increase in r
produced by the displacement by Sr, the increase in K due to this cause
will be
and we know, as in equation (116), that
., I'dSx
ST T( ^
V dx
We now have, as the total value of
T ^ ~
V dx dy dz J
dK , dK , dK .,
^cx^oy^cz
dx dy dz
dK/dBx dBy dBz\
dr \dx dy dz J '
172 General Analytical Theorems [OH. vn
and hence, on substituting in equation (113) for Sp and &K,
R
Integrating by parts, this becomes
sw=
fff 2 ftK , dK , dK ,\ , ,, j
+ JJJ 8^ [* ^ + % + ^ *) y
[f[(d (R z dK\. d fR* dK\s
 Ma" a"* 1 "* ^ + ^~ ( T ir 8 2/ +
JJJ (dx\87r dr J dy\87r dr J
or, rearranging the terms,
rrrfr dv R*tdK\ d /R* dK\]^ r~
SW= \\p o +  5 1 5 Q T T~ ^ +...
JJJ ([; fa 87r\dx J dx\87r 8r/J L J
Comparing with expression (112), we obtain
8F
etc., giving the body forces acting on the matter of the dielectric.
197. This may be written in the form
w_ r^^ l^ 2 d A]
~ p STT 8^ + 8^V87r T 9r 7 '
Thus in addition to the force of components (pX, pY, pZ) acting on the
charges of the dielectric, there is an additional force of components
_^8^ _^!<^ _^^
8?r das ' 87T dy ' 8rr dz
arising from variations in K y and also a force of components
l/^ 2 W\ Lf^l d A\ ^(^ ?K\
dx \87r T dr)' dy V87T T 8r ) ' 8* UTT T 8r J '
which occurs when either the intensity of the field or the structure of the
dielectric varies from point to point.
196198] Stresses in Dielectric Media 173
Stresses in Dielectric Media.
198. Replacing p by its value, as given by Laplace's equation, we obtain
equation (117) in the form
o )
STT dx
+ 2  (K } + K  f V
dx dx \ dx J dx\dx)
+ 2 (jr^) + *:i(^) i
+2 ^ 8 ^ 8F ) + ^i( 8 /y
ox oz \ oz J dx \ dz /
9
If we put
(119),
^TT ox oy
this becomes
Let us suppose that a medium is subjected to a system of internal
stresses P xx , P xy) etc. ; and let it be found that a system of body forces
of components E', H', Z' is just sufficient to keep the medium at rest
when under the action of these stresses. Then from equation (79) we
must have
x H ~af + ~d/j '
174 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
Thus if P XX) Pay, etc. have the values given by equations (118) and (119),
we have
E' = K, etc.
This shews that the mechanical force 5, H, Z reversed would just be
in equilibrium with the system of stresses P xx , P xy , etc. given by equations
(118) and (119). In other words, the mechanical forces which have been
found to act on a dielectric can exactly be accounted for by a system of
stresses in the medium, these stresses being given by equations (118) and
(119).
199. The system of stresses given by equations (118) and (119) can be
regarded as the superposition of two systems :
I. A system in which
II. A system in which
r>2 377
P p p L T ^
xx * yy * zz o ' ^ >
07T OT
The first system is exactly K times the system which has been found to
occur in free ether, while the second system represents a hydrostatic pressure
of amount
_^! *K
STT T dr '
(In general ^ will be positive, so that this pressure will be negative, and
must be interpreted as a tension.)
Hence, as in 165, the system of stresses may be supposed to consist of:
TT D2
(i) a tension   per unit area in the direction of the lines of force ;
O7T
(ii) a pressure   per unit area perpendicular to the lines of force ;
O7T
D2 ^ 7"
(iii) a hydrostatic pressure of amount ^ T ^ in all directions.
The system of stresses we have obtained is that given by Helmholtz. The system
7?2 7\ JT
differs from that given by Maxwell by including the pressure r ^ . The neglect of
O7T 07"
this pressure by Maxwell, and by other writers who have followed him, does not appear to
be defensible.
198202] Stresses in Dielectric Media 175
200. This system of stresses has not been proved to be the only system
of stresses by which the mechanical forces can be replaced, and, as we have
seen, it is not certain that the mechanical forces must be regarded as arising
from a system of stresses at all, rather than from action at a distance.
It may be noticed, however, that whether or not these stresses actually
exist, the resultant force on any piece of dielectric must be exactly the
same as it would be if the stresses actually existed. For the resultant
force on any piece of dielectric has a component X parallel to the axis
of x, given by
=  (I (IP XX + mP xy + nP xz ) dS
by Green's Theorem, and this shews that the actual force is identical with
what it would be if these stresses existed (cf, 193).
Force on a charged conductor.
201. The mechanical force on the surface of a charged conductor
immersed in a dielectric can be obtained at once by regarding it as
produced by the stresses in the ether. There will be no stresses in the
interior of the conductor, so that the force on its surface may be regarded
as due to the tensions of the tubes of force in the dielectric. The tension
is accordingly of amount
STT STT dr
per unit area, an expression which can be written in the simpler form
Force at boundary of a dielectric.
202. Let us consider the equilibrium of a dielectric at a surface of
discontinuity, at which the lines of force undergo refraction on passing
from one medium of inductive capacity K l to a second of inductive
capacity K 2 .
176
General Analytical Theorems
[CH. VII
Let axes be taken so that the boundary is the plane of xy, while the
lines of force at the point under consideration lie
in the plane of xz. Let the components of
intensity in the first medium be (X lf 0, Z^), while
the corresponding quantities in the second medium
are (X 2) 0, Z 2 ). The boundary conditions ob
tained in 137 require that
X
FIG. 55.
where h is the normal component of polarisation.
In view of a later physical interpretation of
the forces, it will be convenient to regard these forces as divided up into
the two systems mentioned in 199, and to consider the contributions from
these systems separately.
As regards the contribution from the first system, the force per unit area
acting on the dielectric from the first medium has components
while that from the second medium has components
Since KJL^ K 2 X Z Z 2 , it follows that the resultant force on the
boundary is parallel to Oz i.e. is normal to the surface. Its amount,
measured as a tension dragging the surface in the direction from medium 1
to medium 2
77 77
which after simplification can be shewn to be equal to
( l ~ *
This is always positive if KI > K 2 . Thus this force invariably tends to
drag the surface from the medium in which K is greater, to that in which
K is less i.e. to increase the region in which K is large at the expense of
the region in which K is small. This normal force is exactly similar to the
normal force on the surface of a conductor, which tends to increase the
volume of the region enclosed by the conducting surface.
On Maxwell's Theory, the forces which have now been considered are the only ones in
existence, so that according to this theory the total mechanical force is that just found,
and the boundary forces ought always to tend to increase the region in which K is large.
This theory, as we have said, is incomplete, so that it is not surprising that the result just
stated is not confirmed by experiment.
202] Stresses in Dielectric Media 177
We now proceed to consider the action of the second system of forces
the system of negative hydrostatic pressures. There are pressures per unit
area of amounts
acting respectively on the two sides of the boundary. There is accordingly a
resultant tension of amount
per unit area, tending to drag the boundary surface from region 1 to region 2.
Thus the total tension per unit area, dragging the surface into region 1, is
In 139, in considering a parallel plate condenser with a movable
dielectric slab, we discovered the existence of a mechanical force tending to>
drag the dielectric in between the plates. This force is identical with the
mechanical force just discussed. But we have now arrived at a mechanical
interpretation of this force, for we can regard the pull on the dielectric as the
resultant of the pulls of the tubes of force at the different parts of the surface
of the dielectric.
Let us attempt to assign physical interpretations to the terms of ex
pression (120) by considering their significance in this particular instance.
Consider first a region in the condenser so far removed from the edges of the
condenser and of the slab of dielectric, that the field may be treated as
absolutely uniform (cf. fig. 44, p. 124). We put K a =l, X, = 0, E^
in expression (120) and obtain
as the force per unit area on either face of the dielectric, acting normally
outwards.
The forces will of course act in such a direction that they tend to
decrease the electrostatic energy of the field. Now this energy is made up
of contributions 2?rA 2 per unit volume from air, and j^ per unit volume
&i
from the dielectric. From the conditions of the problem h must remain
unaltered. Thus the total energy can be decreased in either of two ways
by increasing the volume occupied by dielectric and decreasing that occupied
by air, or by increasing the value of K in the dielectric. There will therefore
be a tendency for the boundary of the dielectric to move in such a direction
j. 12
178 General Analytical Theorems [OH. vn
as to increase the volume occupied by dielectric, and also a tendency for this
boundary to move so that K will be increased by the consequent change of
density. These two tendencies are represented by the two terms of ex
pression (121).
fiK
If = is negative, an expansion of the dielectric will both increase the
volume occupied by the dielectric, and will also increase the value of K
inside the dielectric. In this case, then, both tendencies act towards an
expansion of the dielectric, and we accordingly find that both terms in
expression (121) are positive.
r)Jf
If TT is positive, the tendency to expansion, represented by the first
(positive) term of expression (121) is checked by a tendency to contraction
(to increase r, and therefore K) represented by the second (now negative)
dK
term of expression (121). If ~ is not only positive, but is numerically
large, expression (121) may be negative and the dielectric will contract. In
this case the decrease in energy resulting on the increase of K produced by
contraction will more than outweigh the gain resulting from the diminution
of the volume occupied by dielectric.
These considerations enable us to see the physical significance of all the
X 2
terms in expression (120), except the first term ^(^ 1). To interpret
this term we must examine the conditions near the edge of the dielectric slab,
for it is only here that X t has a value different from zero. We see at once
that this term represents a pull at and near the edge of the dielectric,
tending to suck the dielectric further in between the plates in fact this
force alone gives rise to the tendency to motion of the slab as a whole, which
was discovered in 139.
Returning to the general systems of forces of 199, we may say that the
first system (which as we have seen always tends to drag the surface of the
dielectric into the region in which K has the greater value) represents the
tendency for the system to decrease its energy by increasing the volume
occupied by dielectrics of large inductive capacity, whilst the second system
(which tends to compress or expand the dielectric in such a way as to
increase its inductive capacity), represents the tendency of the system to
decrease its energy by increasing the inductive capacity of its dielectrics.
That any increase in the inductive capacity is invariably accompanied by a
decrease of energy has already been proved in 191.
202204] Green's Equivalent Stratum 179
Electrostriction.
203. It will now be clear that the action of the various tractions on the
surface of a dielectric must always be accompanied not only by a tendency
for the dielectric to move as a whole, but also by a slight change in shape
and dimensions of the dielectric as this yields to the forces acting on it.
This latter phenomenon is known as electrostriction. It has been observed
experimentally by Quincke and others. A convenient way of shewing its
existence is to fill the bulb of a thermometertube with liquid, and place
the whole in an electric field. The pulls on the surface of the glass result
in an increase in the volume of the bulb, and the liquid is observed to fall
in the tube. From what has already been said it will be clear that a
dielectric may either expand or contract under the influence of electric
forces.
The stresses in the interior of a dielectric, as given in 199, may also
be accompanied by mechanical deformation. Thus it has been observed by
Kerr and others, that a piece of noncrystalline glass acquires crystalline
properties when placed in an electric field. Such a piece of glass reflects
light like a uniaxal crystal of which the optic axis is in the direction of the
lines of force.
GREEN'S EQUIVALENT STRATUM
204. Let 8 be any closed surface enclosing a number of electric charges,
and let P be any point outside it. The potential at P due to the charges
inside 8 is
FIG. 56.
where r is the distance from P to the element dxdydz, and the integration
extends throughout 8. By Green's Theorem (equation (101))
122
 F dS,
where the normal is now drawn outwards from the surface 8.
180 General Analytical Theorems [CH. vn
In this equation, put 7=, then, since V 2 F= 4777?, we nave as the
value of the first term,
And since V 2 7 = 0, the second term vanishes. The equation accordingly
becomes
3n \r y
205. Suppose, first, that the surface S is an equipotential. Then
= 0,
so that equation (122) becomes
Thus the potential of any system of charges is the same at every point
outside any selected equipotential which surrounds all the charges, as that
of a charge of electricity spread over this equipotential, and having surface
density r . Obviously, in fact, if the equipotential is replaced by a
conductor, this will be the density on its outer surface.
206. If the surface S is not an equipotential, the term li^V () dS
will not vanish. Since, however, u, z (  ) is the potential of a doublet of
r dn \rj
strength /u, and direction that of the outward normal, it follows that
fj dS is the potential of a system of doublets arranged over the
surface S, the direction at every point being that of the outward normal, and
the total strength of doublets per unit area at any point being F
Thus the potential V P may be regarded as due to the presence on the
surface S of
(i) a surface density of electricity j ~ ;
(ii) a distribution of electric doublets, of strength per unit area,
and direction that of the outward normal.
204207] Greerts Equivalent Stratum 181
207. Equation (122) expresses the potential at any point in the space
outside S in terms of the values of V and ^ over the boundary of this space.
We have seen, however, that the value of the potential is uniquely determined
3F
by the values either of V or of ~ over the boundary of the space. In actual
electrostatic problems, the boundaries are generally conductors, and therefore
equipotentials. In this case equation (123) expresses the values of the
dV
potential in terms of = only, amounting in fact simply to
\jtvt
What is generally required is a knowledge of the value of V P in terms of the
values of V over the boundaries, and this the present method is unable to
give. For special shapes of boundary, solutions have been obtained by
various special methods, and these it is proposed to discuss in the next
chapter.
REFERENCES.
On Green's Theorem and its applications :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Chapters iv and v.
GREEN. Mathematical Papers of George Green. (Edited by N. M. Ferrers.)
London (Macmillan and Co., 1870).
On Forces on dielectrics and stresses in a dielectric medium :
HELMHOLTZ. Wiedemanri's Annalen der Physik, Vol. 13 (1881), p. 385.
EXAMPLES.
1. If the electricity in the field is confined to a given system of conductors at given
potentials, and the inductive capacity of the dielectric is slightly altered according to any
law such that at no point is it diminished, and such that the differential coefficients of the
increment are also small at all points, prove that the energy of the field is increased.
2. A slab of dielectric of inductive capacity K and of thickness x is placed inside a
parallel plate condenser so as to be parallel to the plates. Shew that the surface of the
slab experiences a tension
3. For a gas K=l+6p, where p is the density and 6 is small. A conductor is
immersed in the gas : shew that if 2 is neglected the mechanical force on the conductor
is 27T0 2 per unit area. Give a physical interpretation of this result.
CHAPTER VIII.
METHODS FOR THE SOLUTION OF SPECIAL PROBLEMS.
THE METHOD OF IMAGES.
Charge induced on an infinite uninsulated plane.
208. THE potential at P of charges e at a point A and e at another
point A is
F =^p^p < m >
and this vanishes if P is on the plane which bisects AA at right angles.
Call this plane the plane 8. Then the above value of V gives F= over
the plane $, F=0 at infinity, and satisfies Laplace's equation in the region
to the right of $, except at the point A, at which it gives a point charge e.
FIG. 57.
These conditions, however, are exactly those which would have to be satisfied
by the potential on the right of if were a conducting plane at zero
potential under the influence of a charge e at A. These conditions amount
to a knowledge of the value of the potential at every point on the boundary
of a certain region namely, that to the right of the plane 8 and of the
charges inside this region. There is, as we know, only one value of the
208, 209] Images 183
potential inside this region which satisfies these conditions (cf. 186), so that
this value must be that given by equation (124).
To the right of 8 the potential is the same, whether we have the
charge e at A' or the charge on the conducting plane 8. To the left of $
in the latter case there is no electric field. Hence the lines of force, when
the plane 8 is a conductor, are entirely to the right of 8, and are the same
as in the original field in which the two pointcharges were present. The
lines end on the plane 8, terminating of course on the charge induced on 8.
We can find the amount of this induced charge at any part of the plane
by Coulomb's Law. Taking the plane to be the plane of yz, and the point A
to be the point (a, 0, 0) on the axis of x, we have
j, 9F
47TCT = R =
a
3 IV(# of + if + z* *J(x + a) 2
where the last line has to be calculated at the point on the plane 8 at which
we require the density. We must therefore put x after differentiation,
and so obtain for the density at the point 0, y, z on the plane 8,
4}7T(T =
or, if a 2 4 y 2 + z* = r 2 , so that r is the distance of the point on the plane 8
from the point A,
ae
~2wT 8 '
Thus the surface density falls off inversely as the cube of the distance
from the point A. The distribution of electricity on the
plane is represented graphically in fig. 58, in which the
thickness of the shaded part is proportional to the surface
density of electricity. The negative electricity is, so to
speak, heaped up near the point A under the influence
of the attraction of the charge at A. The field produced
by this distribution of electricity on the plane S at any
point to the right of 8 is, as we know, exactly the same as
would be produced by the point charge e at A'.
209. This problem affords the simplest illustration of a .021
general method for the solution of electrostatic problems,
which is known as the " method of images." The principle
underlying this method is that of finding a system of electric FlG 58
charges such that a certain surface, ultimately to be made
into a conductor, is caused to coincide with the equipotential F = 0. We
then replace the charges inside this equipotential by the Green's equivalent
stratum on its surface (cf. 204). As this surface is an equipotential, we
184 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
can imagine it to be replaced by a conductor and the charges on it will be
in equilibrium. These charges now become charges induced on a conductor
.at potential zero by charges outside this conductor.
From the analogy with optical images in a mirror, the system of point
charges which have to be combined with the original charges to produce zero
potential over a conductor are spoken of as the " electrical images " of the
original charges. For instance, in the example already discussed, the field is
produced partly by the charge at A, partly by the charge induced on the
infinite plane : the method of images enables us to replace the whole charge
induced on the plane by a single point charge at A'. So also, if A were a
candle placed in front of an infinite plane mirror, the illumination in front of
the mirror would be produced partly by the candle at A, partly by the light
reflected from the infinite mirror ; the method of optical images enables us to
replace the whole of this reflected light by the light from a single source at A'.
210. In an electrostatic field produced by any number of point charges,
we can, as we have seen, select any equipotential and replace it by a con
ductor. The charges on either side of this equipotential are then the
" images " of those on the other side.
Thus if we can write the equation of any surface in the form
.(125),
e e e A
 4 . + T> + . . . = ,
r r r
where r is the distance from a point outside the surface, and r, r", . . . are the
distances from points inside the surface, then we may say that charges
e' ', e", ... at these latter points are the images of a charge e at the former
point.
Charges induced on Intersecting planes.
211. It will be found that charges
e at a, 1 , y, 0,
e at a;, y, 0,
e at #, y, 0,
e at x, y,
give zero potential over the planes #=0, y = 0.
The potential of these charges is therefore the
same, in the quadrant in which x, y are both
positive, as if the boundary of this quadrant
were a conductor put to earth under the in
fluence of a charge e at the point x, y, 0.
It will be found that a conductor consisting
of three planes intersecting at right angles can
be treated in the same way.
FIG. 59.
209213] Images 185
212. The method of images also supplies a solution when the conductor
7T
consists of two planes intersecting at any angle of the form  , where n is
any positive integer. If we take polar coordinates, so that the two planes
are 6 = 0, = , and suppose the charge to be a charge e at the point r, 6,
we shall find that charges
(r, 0), (r, 6 + %), (r, + %), ....
e at
e at
give zero potential over the planes
7T
Charge induced on a sphere.
213. The most obvious case, other than the infinite plane, of a surface
whose equation can be expressed in the form (125), is a sphere.
FIG. 61.
186 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
If R, Q are any two inverse points in the sphere, and P any point on the
surface, we have
RP:PQ = OC :OQ,
so that
00
Thus the image of a charge e at Q is a charge ^TTTT at R, or the
image of any point at a distance / from the centre of a sphere of radius a
is a charge . at the inverse point, i.e. at a point on the same radius
a 2
distant ? from the centre.
Let us take polar coordinates, having the centre of the sphere for origin
and the line OQ as = 0. Our result is that at any point 8 outside the
sphere, the potential due to a charge e at Q and the charge induced on the
surface of the sphere, supposed put to earth, is
ea
QS RS
ea
Vr 2 +/ 2 2/rcos0 , / 9 a* . a 2 ,
r ~ r cos
2
where r, are the coordinates of
214. We can now find the surfacedensity of the induced charge. For
at any point on the sphere
_R__ J^8F
~47r~ 47T dr '
in which we have to put r = a after differentiation. Clearly
_ T7  x /. m \r 2? cos
dV e(rfcos0) y /
a
/. O
/ ( r 2 +  2 , r cos
a 4
 ,
Putting r = a we obtain
afcosO a 2 / 2 a 3 / cos
y 2 _ 2 /a cos ^)* (a 2 / 2 + a 4  2a 3 /cos
a / 2 /a
e (/ 2 a 2 )
47T
213215] Images 187
Thus the surface density varies inversely as SQ\ so that it is greatest at
C and falls off continually as we recede from the radius 0(7. The total
PCI
charge on the sphere is = , as can be seen at once by considering that the
total strength of the lines of force which end on it is just the same as would
be the total strength of the lines ending on the image at R if the conductor
were not present.
FIG. 62.
Figure 62 shews the lines of force when the strength of the image is a
quarter of that of the original charge, so that /= 4a. It is obtained from
fig. 19 by replacing the spherical equipotential by a conductor, and annihi
lating the field inside.
Superposition of Fields.
215. We have seen that by adding the potentials of two separate fields
at every point, we obtain the potential produced by charges equal to the total
charges in the two fields. In this way we can arrive at the field produced
by any number of point charges and uninsulated conductors of the kind we
have described. The potential of each conductor is zero in the final solution
because it is zero for each separate field.
There is also another type of field which may be added to that
obtained by the method of images, namely the field produced by raising the
conductor or conductors to given potentials, without other charges being
present. By superposing a field of this kind we can find the effect of point
charges when the conductors are at any potential.
188 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
216. For instance if in fig. 62 we have a point charge e and the con
ductor raised to potential V, we superpose on to the field of force already
found, the field which is obtained by raising the conductor to potential V
when the point charge is absent. The charge on the sphere in the second
field is aV, so that the total charge is
ea
o
If the sphere is to be uncharged, we must have V= ,, so that a point
charge placed at a distance f from the centre of an uncharged sphere raises
p
it to potential  , a result which is also obvious from the theorem of 104.
Sphere in a uniform field of force.
217. A uniform field of force of which the lines are parallel to the axis
of x may be regarded as due to an infinite charge E at x = R, and a charge
E at x = R, when in the limit E and R both become infinite. The
intensity at any point is
parallel to the axis of x, so that to produce a uniform field in which the
intensity is F parallel to the axis of x, we must suppose E and R to
become infinite in such a way that
Since, in this case, F= ^, the potential of such a field will clearly
ox
be Fac + C.
Suppose that a sphere is placed in a uniform field of force of this kind,
its centre being at the origin. We can suppose the charge E at x = R to
have an image of strength
Ea a?
'If at * = R>
while the other charge has an image
Ea a*
R at X " R'
These two images may be regarded as a doublet (cf. 64) of strength
p x p , and of direction parallel to the negative axis of x. The strength
216, 217]
Images
189
Thus we may say that the image of a uniform field of force of strength F
is a doublet of strength Fa 3 and of direction parallel to that of the intensity
of the uniform field.
The potential of this doublet is
Fa? cos d
r 2 ~'
and that of the field of original field of force is Fx + C,
FIG. 63.
or, in polar coordinates,
 FT cos + C,
so that the potential of the whole field
 + C
.(126).
FIG. 64.
190 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
As it ought, this gives a constant potential G over the surface of the
sphere.
The lines of force of the uniform field F disturbed by the presence of a
doublet of strength Fa 3 are shewn in fig. 63. On obliterating all the lines
of force inside a sphere of radius a, we obtain fig. 64, which accordingly
shews the lines of force when a sphere of radius a is placed in a field of
intensity F. These figures are taken from Thomson's Reprint of Papers on
Electrostatics and Magnetism (pp. 488, 489)*.
218. Line of no electrification. The theory of lines of no electrification
has already been briefly given in 98. We have seen that on any conductor
on which the total charge is zero, and which is not entirely screened from
an electric field, there must be some points at which the surfacedensity a
is positive, and some points at which it is negative. The regions in which a
is positive and those in which a is negative must be separated by a line or
system of lines on the conductor, at every point of which cr = 0. These lines
are known as lines of no electrification.
If R is the resultant intensity, we have at any point on a line of no
electrification,
R = 47TO  0,
so that every point of a line of no electrification is a point of equilibrium.
At such a point the equipotential intersects itself, and there are two or more
lines of force.
If the conductor possesses a single tangent plane at a point on a line of
no electrification, then one sheet of the equipotential through this point will
be the conductor itself: by the theorem of 69, the second sheet must
intersect the conductor at right angles.
These results are illustrated in the field of fig. 64. Clearly the line of no
electrification on the sphere is the great circle in a plane perpendicular to
the direction of the field. The equipotential which intersects itself along
the line of no electrification (V=C) consists of the sphere itself and the
plane containing the line of no electrification. Indeed, from formula (126),
TT
it is obvious that the potential is equal to C, either when 6 = , or
when r d.
The intersection of the lines of force along the line of no electrification
is shewn clearly in fig. 64.
* I am indebted to Lord Kelvin for permission to use these figures.
217220] Images 191
Plane face with hemispherical boss.
219. If we regard the whole equipotential V = C as a conductor, we
obtain the distribution of electricity on a plane conductor on which there
is a hemispherical boss of radius a. If we take the plane to be x = 0, we
have, by formula (126),
At a point on the plane,
 = _J^
47T
and on the hemisphere
1 fdV\ F
a = r ^ = . 3 cos 9.
4?r \orj r=a 47T
The whole charge on the hemisphere is found on integration to be
( 2 (r 3 cos 0] ZTTO? sin 6d6 = l Fa 2 ,
Je=o \47r )
while, if the hemisphere were not present, the charge on the part of the
plane now covered by the base of the hemisphere would be
Thus the presence of the boss results in there being three times as much
electricity on this part of the plane as there would otherwise be : this is
compensated by the diminution of surfacedensity on those parts of the plane
which immediately surround the boss.
Capacity of a telegraphwire.
220. An important practical application of the method of images is the
determination of the capacity of a long straight wire placed parallel to an
infinite plane at potential zero, at a distance h from the plane. This may be
supposed to represent a telegraphwire at height h above the surface of the
earth.
Let us suppose that the wire has a charge e per unit length. To find
the field of force we imagine an image charged with a charge e per unit
length at a distance h below the earth's surface. The potential at a point at
distances r, r from the wire and image respectively is, by 75 and 100,
<72elogr + 2elogr',
and for this to vanish at the earth's surface we must take (7=0. Thus the
potential is
2<? log  .
192 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vni
At a small distance a from the line charge which represents the telegraph
wire, we may put r 2h, so that the potential is
2h
2, log,
from which it appears that a cylinder of small radius a surrounding the
wire is an equipotential. We may now suppose the wire to have a finite
radius a, and to coincide with this equipotential. Thus the capacity of the
wire per unit length is
1
Infinite series of Images.
221. Suppose we have two spheres, centres A, B and radii a, b, of which
the centres are at distance c apart, and that we require to find the field when
FIG. 65.
both are charged. We can obtain this field by superposing an infinite series
of separate fields (cf. 116).
Suppose first that A is at potential V while B is at potential zero. As a
first field we can take that of a charge Va at A. This gives a uniform
potential V over A, but does not give zero potential over B. We can reduce
the potential over B to zero by superposing a second field arising from
the image of the original charge in sphere B, namely a charge  at B f
c
where BB' '= . This new field has, however, disturbed the potential over
c
A. To reduce this to its original value we superpose a new field arising
from the image of the charge at B' in A, namely a charge   .  p at A' y
c 
c
a~
where A A' =  r^. This field in turn disturbs the potential over B, and so
c 
c
we superpose another field, and so on indefinitely. The strengths of the
220222] Images 193
various fields, however, continually diminish, so that although we get an
infinite series to express the potential, this series is convergent. As we shall
see, this series can be summed as a definite integral, or it may be that a good
approximation will be obtained by taking only a finite number of terms.
The total charge on A is clearly the sum of the original charge Fa plus
the strengths of the images A', A", ... etc., for this sum measures the
aggregate strength of the tubes of force which end on A. Similarly the
charge on B is the sum of the strengths of the images at B f , B", ....
To obtain the field corresponding to given potentials of both A and B we
superpose on to the field already found, the similar field obtained by raising
B to the required potential while that of A remains zero.
If #11, #22, #12 are the coefficients of capacity and induction, the total charge
on A when B is to earth and F= 1 is # n ; similarly that on B is # 12 . In this
way we can find the coefficients # n , # 12 from the series of images already
obtained. The result is found to be
a 2 6 a 3 6 2
db a 2 6 2
and from symmetry
As far as , these results clearly agree with those of 116.
c
222. The series for q n , 5' 12 , ^22 have been put in a more manageable form by Poisson
and Kirchhoff.
Let A a denote the position of the sth of the series of points A', A", ..., and B g the sth
of the series ', ", ... ; then A 8 is the image of B 8 in the sphere of radius a, and similarly
B s is the image of A 8 _i in the sphere of radius 6. Let a g =AA 8 , b 8 = BB 8 , and let the
charges at J a , B 8 be e s , e' 8 respectively.
Then a g (c b 8 ) = a 2 since A 8 is the image of JB 8 ,
&a(ca 8 _i) = & 2 B* Ai
Further, by comparing the strengths of a charge and its image,
80 that 
and similarly e' 8 =    =   e' 8 _ l .
(ca g _ 1 )(cb 8 _ 1 )
,, T , ,i /.
We have therefore
     
ei (cbJ^ag.J a b ab
and e * ~ ~
ab ab a'
13
194 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
By addition we eliminate a,, and obtain
e,  e a =
or, if we put  = u 8
.(128),
and from symmetry it is obvious that the same difference equation must be satisfied by a
quantity u' 8 = .
e a
The solution of the difference equation (128) may be taken to be
U 8 = A
where a, /3 are the roots of
ab
The product of these roots is unity, so that if a is the root which is less than unity, we
can suppose
so that
and similarly
We now have
To determine A, , we have
so that
f a + ba
where =
Thus
(1
rqp + F^3 + r=
To determine .4', ^', we have
a ab
I "A
222, 223] Images 195
from which, in the same way,
The value of q<& can of course be written down by symmetry from that of q n .
The coefficients each depend on a sum of the type
This series cannot be summed algebraically, but has been expressed as a definite integral
by Poisson. From the known formula
we obtain at once
r_sjn* fe*Mn 1
J e i * V1J ~2p'
1 _i 1 2 f sin^
r^~ '~7 Jo e=i att
so that on putting p = log 2 a 28 we have
8 _ ! . a 9
l 2 a 2 ~ log ?a*~ Jo e 2 ^!
From this follows
8 r S a 8 sin (2 log g+2s log a) t .
Both the series on the right can be summed. We have
a =
so that 2 _ = _L_
_
Jo (e  1) (1  2a cos (2# log a) + a 2 )
and on replacing by unity, we obtain
^ 8 1 r asin(2nogq) '
1a 28 2(la)" 1 " J (e 27r< l)(l2aCOS(2Hoga)+a 2 )
These are the series which occur in q n and q^.
223. Having calculated the coefficients, either by this or some other
method, we can at once obtain the relations between the charges and poten
tials, and can find also the mechanical force between the spheres. If this
force is a force of repulsion F, we have
oragan .
132
196 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
The following table, applicable to two spheres of equal radius, taken to be unity, is
compiled from materials given by Lord Kelvin*.
a /a
a
a
Eatio of
c
Pn( P^
ft*
ffn (?)
g
~dc~
*~dc~ =
dc
charges for
equilibrium
20
722
722
00
00
CO
00
00
00
1
21
915
509
1584
882
154
453
1 '138
2349
391
22
939
475
1431
724
083
305
529
1127
294
25
969
406
1253
 '525
0300
181
174
412
169
30
986
335
1146
389
0122
115
066
186
089
35
993
286
1099
317
00437
0825
0344
114
053
40
996
250
1072
269
00216
0628
0207
079
034
50
998
200
1044
209
00065
0401
0096
048
016
6'0
999
167
1030
172
00026
0278
0053
031
009
oo
10
10
Images in dielectrics.
224. The method of images can also be applied to find the field produced
by point charges when half of the field is occupied by dielectric, the boundary
of the dielectric being an infinite plane.
FIG. 66.
We begin by considering the field produced by a single charge e at P, it
being possible to obtain the most general field by the superposition of simple
fields of this kind.
* Papers on Electrostatics and Magnetism, p. 96, 142.
223, 224] Images 197
We shall shew that the field in air is the same as that due to a charge
e at P and a certain charge e at P', the image of P, while the field in the
dielectric is the same as that due to a certain charge e" at P, if the whole
field were occupied by air.
Let PP' be taken for axis of x, the origin being in the boundary
of the dielectric, and let OP = a. Then we have to shew that the potential
V A in air is
V A ~ * = + J=
*J(x 4 of + y 2 + z 2 V (  a) 2 4 1
while that in the dielectric is
e"
V(# 4 a) 2 + y 2 + z 2
These potentials, we notice, satisfy Laplace's equation in each medium,
everywhere except at the point P, and they arise from a distribution of
charges which consists of a single point charge e at P. The potential in air
at the point 0, y, z on the boundary is
F = e + e
<Ja? + y 2 +z z>
while that in the dielectric at the same point is
Thus the condition that the potential shall be continuous at each point
of the boundary can be satisfied by taking
e" = e + e' (129).
The remaining condition to be satisfied is that at every point of the
3F 3F
boundary, ^ in air shall be equal to K ^ in the dielectric ; i.e. that
K^^WI
Now, when x = 0,
* dVn Ke"a
ea
(a 2 + f + * 2 ) (a 2 f i/ 2 + * 2 )
so that this last condition is satisfied by taking
Ke" = ee' (130).
198 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
Thus the conditions of the problem are completely satisfied by giving
e', e" values such as will satisfy relations (129) and (130) ; i.e. by taking
, K,

225. The pull on the dielectric is that due to the tensions of the lines of
force which cross its boundary. In air these lines of force are the same as
if we had charges e, e' at P, P' entirely in air, so that the whole tension
in the direction P'P of the lines of force in air is
ee
e 2 (jfiT1)
or j= ^.
This system of tensions shews itself as an attraction between the dielectric
and the point charge. If the dielectric is free to move and the point charge
fixed, the dielectric will be drawn towards the point charge by this force, and
conversely if the dielectric is fixed the point charge will be attracted towards
the dielectric by this force.
INVERSION.
226. The geometrical method of inversion may sometimes be used to
deduce the solution of one problem from that of another problem of which
the solution is already known.
Geometrical Theory.
227. Let be any point which we shall call the centre of inversion, and
Q'
FIG. 67.
let AB be a sphere drawn about with a radius K which we shall call the
radius of inversion.
224227J
Inversion
199
Corresponding to any point P we can find a second point P', the inverse
to P in the sphere. These two points are on the same radius at distances
from such that OP. OP' = K\
As P describes any surface PQ..., P' will describe some other surface
P'Q 7 . . . , each point Q' on the second surface being the inverse of some point
Q on the original surface. This second surface is said to be the inverse
of the original surface, and the process of deducing the second surface from
the first is described as inverting the first surface.
It is clear that if P'Q ... is the inverse of PQ..., then the inverse of
P'Q'... will be PQ....
If the polar equation of a surface referred to the centre of inversion
as origin be f(r, 6, <) = 0, then the equation of its inverse will be
f( , 6, <f>] = 0. For the polar equation of the inverse surface is by
definition / (/, 0, <f>) = 0, where rr' = X 2 for all values of 6 and 0.
Inverse of a sphere. Let chords PP', QQ', ... of a sphere meet in
(fig. 68). Then
OP.OP'=OQ.OQ'=... = * 2 ,
where t is the length of the tangent from to the sphere. Thus, if t is the
radius of inversion, the surface PQ... is the inverse of P'Q'..., i.e. the sphere
P'
FIG. 68.
is its own inverse. With some other radius of inversion K, let P"Q" ... be
the inverse of PQ . . . , then
sothat
OP" OQ" K 2
__ = __ = ... = ._
and the locus of P", Q", ... is seen to be a sphere. Thus the inverse of a
sphere is always another sphere.
200 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
A special investigation is needed
when the sphere passes through 0. Let
08 be the diameter through 0, and let
S' be the point inverse to S. Then, if
P f is the inverse of any point P on the
circle,
OP. OP =08. 08',
gp__qs f
08 ~ OP '
or
so that POS, S'OP* are similar triangles.
Since OPS is a right angle, it follows
that OS'P' is a right angle, so that the
locus of P' is a plane through 8' perpen
dicular to 08'. Thus the inverse of a FIG. 69.
sphere which passes through the centre
of inversion is a plane, and, conversely, the inverse of any plane is a sphere
which passes through the centre of inversion.
228. If P, Q are adjacent points on a surface, and P', Q' are the corre
sponding points on its inverse, then OPQ,
OQ'P' are similar triangles, so that PQ,
P'Q' make equal angles with OPP'. By
making PQ coincide, we find that the
tangent plane at P to the surface PQ
and the tangent plane at P' to the sur
face P'Q' make equal angles with OPP'.
Hence, if we invert two surfaces which
intersect in P, we find that the angle
between the two inverse surfaces at P' is equal to the angle between the
original surfaces at P, i.e. an angle of intersection is not altered by inversion.
Also, if a small cone through cuts off areas dS, dS' from the surface
PQ . . . and its inverse P'Q' . . . , it follows that
dS _ OP 2
dS'~ OP' 2 '
Electrical Applications.
229. Let PP', QQ' be two pairs of inverse points (fig. 70). Let a charge
e at Q produce potential V P at P, and let a charge e at Q' produce potential
Vp at P', so that
FIG. 70.
_i_ v
PQ' Vp
P'Q"
then
V P ~e'P'Q e'OQ"
227229] Inversion 201
Take '
e
V' OP K
Now let Q be a point of a conducting surface, and replace e by crdS,
the charge on the element of surface dS at Q. Let V P denote the potential
of the whole surface at P, and let V P ' denote the potential at P' due to a
charge e on each element dS' of the inverse surface, such that
_^_ _ OQ f
crdS K '
TT
Then, since V P ' = V P ~, for each element of charge, we have by addition
v
IT ' IT
OP'
v ' V
'P ' y^S^FT/
Thus charges e' on dS', etc. produce a potential
V P K p ,
OF *
Now suppose that P is a point on the conducting surface Q, so that
V P becomes simply the potential of this surface, say V. The charges e on
dS', etc. now produce a potential

so that if with these charges we combine a charge VK at 0, the potential
produced at P' is zero. Thus the given system of charges spread over the
surface P'Q' ..., together with a charge  VK at the origin, make the
surface P'Q ... an equipotential of potential zero. In other words, from a
knowledge of the distribution which raises PQ... to potential V, we can
find the distribution on the inverse surface P'Q' . . . when it is put to earth
under the influence of a charge VK at the centre of inversion.
If e, e are the charges on corresponding elements dS, dS' at Q, Q', we
have seen that
__K__OQ' _ /
~O~ K ~V
giving the ratio of the surface densities on the two conductors.
202 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
Conversely, if we know the distribution induced on a conductor PQ... at
potential zero by a unit charge at a point 0, then by inversion about we
obtain the distribution on the inverse conductor P'Q'... when raised to
potential ^ . As before, the ratio of the densities is given by equation (132).
Examples of Inversion.
230. Sphere. The simplest electrical problem of which we know the
solution is that of a sphere raised to a given potential. Let us examine
what this solution becomes on inversion.
If we invert with respect to a point P outside the sphere, we obtain the
distribution on another sphere when put to earth under the influence of a
point charge P. This distribution has already been obtained in 214 by
the method of images. The result there obtained, that the surfacedensity
varies inversely as the cube of the distance from P, can now be seen at once
from equation (132).
So also, if P is inside the sphere, we obtain the distribution on an
uninsulated sphere produced by a point charge inside it, a result which can
again be obtained by the method of images.
When P is on the sphere, we obtain the distribution on an uninsulated
plane, already obtained in 208.
231. Intersecting Planes. As a more complicated example of inversion,
let us invert the results obtained in 212. We there shewed how to find
FIG. 71.
the distribution on two planes cutting at an angle , when put to earth
under the influence of a point charge anywhere in the acute angle between
them. If we invert the solution we obtain the distribution on two spheres,
cutting at an angle ir/n, raised to a given potential. By a suitable choice
229233] Spherical Harmonics 203
of the radius and origin of inversion, we can give any radii we like to the
two spheres.
If we take the radius of one to be infinite, we get the distribution on a
plane with an excrescence in the form of a piece of a sphere : in the particu
lar case of n = 2, this excrescence is hemispherical, and we obtain the
distribution of electricity on a plane face with a hemispherical boss. This
can, however, be obtained more directly by the method of 219.
SPHERICAL HARMONICS.
232. The problem of finding the solution of any electrostatic problem is
equivalent to that of finding a solution of Laplace's equation
V 2 F=0
throughout the space not occupied by conductors, such as shall satisfy certain
conditions at the boundaries of this space i.e. at infinity and on the surfaces
of conductors. The theory of spherical harmonics attempts to provide a
general solution of the equation V 2 F = 0.
This is no convenient general solution in finite terms : we therefore
examine solutions expressed as an infinite series. If each term of such
a series is a solution of the equation, the sum of the series is necessarily
a solution.
233. Let us take spherical polar coordinates r, 0, 0, and search for
solutions of the form
V=RS,
where R is a function of r only, and 8 is a function of 6 and </> only.
Laplace's equation, expressed in spherical polars, can be obtained analyti
cally from the equation
1 ^ + =
by changing variables from x, y, z to r, 6, (f>, but is most easily obtained by
applying Gauss' theorem to the small element of volume bounded by the
spheres r and r f dr, the cones 6 and 9 H dO, and the diametral planes <f> and
<j) + dcf>. The equation is found to be
*
r 2 sin<9 W
Substituting the value =218, we obtain
r* dr
or, simplifying,
d 3\ R 9 / . dS\ R d^S _
) * "
1 9 / dR\ 1 8 / . ,. dS\ 1 d 2 S
I r  1 \ [ sin (/ i H = 0.
R dr \ dr 1 $sin# W \ W) 8 sin 2 6 dd>' 2
204 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
The first term is a function of r only, while the last two terms are inde
pendent of r. Thus the equation can only be satisfied by taking
R dr
.(133),
a / . Q ds\ i 8 2 >sf
^ sm<9 ^ + oo/i ^r = ^ ............ (134),
2 2
where JT is a constant. Equation (133). regarded as a differential equation
for R can be solved, the solution being
(1.35),
where J., 5 are arbitrary constants, and n(n + l) = K. After simplification
equation (134) becomes
, (siue d ~} + Ja d ~+n(n + I)S = ...... (136).
sin 080 \ 80 / sm 2 # 8</> 2
Any solution of this equation will be denoted by S n , the solution being a
function of n as well as of 6 and <. The solution of Laplace's equation we
have obtained is now
and by the addition of such solutions, the most general solution of Laplace's
equation may be reached.
234. DEFINITION. Any solution of Laplace s equation is said to be a
spherical harmonic.
A solution which is homogeneous in x, y, z of dimensions n is said to be a
spherical harmonic of degree n.
A spherical harmonic of degree n must be of the form r n multiplied by
a function of 9 and <f>, it must therefore be of the form Ar n S n , where S n
is a solution of equation (136).
Any solution S n of equation (136) is said to be a surfaceharmonic of
degree n.
235. THEOREM. If V is any spherical harmonic of degree n, then
Y/r 2n+l is a spherical harmonic of degree (n + 1).
For V must be of the form Ar n S n , so that
V AS n
which is known to be a solution of Laplace's equation, and is of dimensions
(n + 1) in r. Conversely if V is a spherical harmonic of degree (n + 1),
then r* n+1 V is a spherical harmonic of degree n.
233238] Spherical Harmonics 205
236. THEOREM. // V is any spherical harmonic of degree n, then
fix+t+u y
where s, t, and u are any integers, is a spherical harmonic of degree n st u.
9 2 F 9 2 F 9 2 F
For W + W + a^ =0 '
so that on differentiation s times with respect to #, t times with respect to y,
and u times with respect to z t
or V 2
which proves the theorem.
237. THEOREM. If S m ,S n are two surf ace harmonics of different degrees
ra, n, then
II S n S m dw = 0,
where the integration is over the surface of a unit sphere.
In Green's Theorem ( 181),
^_\p"_ d^
put 4> = r n S n , ^f = r m S m , and take the surface to be the unit sphere.
Then V 2 <3> = 0, V 2 "^ = 0, ? = ^ = nr n ~ l 8 n , and = mr m ~ l S m .
on or on
Thus the volume integral vanishes, and the equation becomes
1 1 (nr m+n  l S n S m  mr m+n  l S n S m ) da) = 0,
or, since n is, by hypothesis, not equal to m,
jjs n s m do>=o.
Harmonics of Integral Degree.
238. The following table of examples of harmonics of integral degrees n = 0,  1, 2,
+ 1, is taken from Thomson and Tait's Natural Philosophy.
n = 0. 1, tan^, log^f, tani2log r + *
Also if F is any one of these harmonics,  , ^ , ^ are harmonics of degree  1, so
that r ^ , r ^ , r ~ are harmonics of degree zero. As examples of harmonics derived
8# ' dy ' dz
in this way may be given
rx ry zx
206 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
By differentiating any harmonic F any number s of times, multiplying by r 2a ~ l and
differentiating again sl times, we obtain more harmonics of degree zero.
n= 1. Any harmonic of degree zero divided by r or differentiated with respect to
x, y or z, e.g.
n=  2. By differentiating harmonics of degree  1 with respect to x, y or z we obtain
harmonics of degree  2, e.g.
x y z z , ,y z . r + z z
^> ^ ^, stan" 1 ^, rjlog  , ;.
r 3 ' r 3 ' r 3 ' r 3 x* r 3 s rz' r 2
n = l. Multiplying harmonics of degree  2 by r 3 , we obtain harmonics of degree 1, e.g.
X) y, 0, z tan" 1 ?, z log  2r.
00 T Z
Rational Integral Harmonics.
239. An important class of harmonic consists of rational integral algebraic
functions of x, y, z. In the most general homogeneous function of x, y, z of
degree n there are J (n + 1) (n f 2) coefficients. If we operate with V 2 we
are left with a homogeneous function of x, y, z of degree n 2, and therefore
possessing ^n(n 1) coefficients. For the original function to be a spherical
harmonic, these ^n (n 1) coefficients must all vanish, so that we must
have ^n(n l) relations between the original J(nfl)(n + 2) coefficients.
Thus the number of coefficients which may be regarded as independent in
the original function, subject to the condition of its being a harmonic, is
or 271+1. This, then, is the number of independent rational harmonics of
degree n.
For instance, when n = 1 the most general harmonic is
Ax + By + Cz,
possessing three independent arbitrary constants, and so representing three
independent harmonics which may conveniently be taken to be x, y and z.
When n = 2, the most general harmonic is
aa? + % 2 + cz 2 + dyz + ezx +fay,
where a, b, c are subject to a + bi c = 0. The five independent harmonics
may conveniently be taken to be
yz, zx, xy, x 2  y 2 , a? z*.
When n = 0, 2n f 1 = 1. Thus there is only one harmonic of degree zero,
and this may be taken to be F= 1.
Corresponding to a rational integral harmonic V n of positive degree n,
y
there is the harmonic ^^ of degree (n + 1). These harmonics of degree
238240] Spherical Harmonics 207
(?i + 1) are accordingly 2?i + l in number. Thus the only harmonic of
this kind and of degree 1 is  .
Consider now the various expressions of the type
where s + 1 + u n.
These, as we know, are harmonics of degree (n + 1), and from 235
y
it is obvious that they must be of the form ~^, where V n is a rational
integral harmonic of degree n. Since  is harmonic, V 2 ( ) = 0, so that
The most general harmonic obtained by combining the harmonics of
type (137) is
but by equation (138) this can be reduced at once to the form
fa* dy* \r ** dx* 8^' r
where p + q = n 1 and p' + q' = n. This again may be replaced by
m *5 R , d n (i\
\r) 7 , p dxP dy n ~*> \r) '
so that there are 2n + 1 arbitrary constants in all, and it is obvious
on examination that the harmonics, multiplied by all the coefficients
B p , ... Bp,... are independent. Thus, by differentiating  n times, we have
arrived at 2^ + 1 independent rational integral harmonics, and it is known
that this is as many as there are.
Expansion in Rational Integral Harmonics.
240. THEOREM*. The value of any finite singlevalued function of
position on a spherical surface can be expressed, at every point of the
surface at which the function is continuous, as a series of rational integral
harmonics, provided the function has only a finite number of lines and points
of discontinuity and of maxima and minima on the surface.
Let F be the arbitrary function of position on the sphere, and let the
sphere be supposed of radius a. Let P be any point outside the sphere at a
* The proof of this theorem makes no pretence at absolute mathematical rigour : see 303
below.
208 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
distance / from its centre 0, and let Q be any point on the surface of
the sphere.
Let PQ be equal to R, so that
R* = f*+a 2  2af cos POQ.
We have the identity
*
where the integration is taken over the surface of the sphere, a result
which it is easy to prove by integration.
e
A point charge e placed at P induces surface density 
on the surface of
ea
the sphere ( 214), and the total induced charge is   ? . The identity is therefore
obvious from electrostatic principles.
FIG. 72.
Now introduce a quantity u defined by
.(141),
so that u is a function of the position of P. If P is very close to the
sphere, f z a 2 is small, and the important contributions to the integral arise
from those terms for which R is very small : i.e. from elements near to P.
If the value of F does not change abruptly near to the point P } or
oscillate with infinite frequency, we can suppose that as P approaches the
sphere, all elements on the sphere from which the contribution to the
integral (141) are of importance, have the same F. This value of F will of
course be the value at the point at which P ultimately touches the sphere,
say F P . Thus in the limit we have
'*"*// (142) ,
u
= FP ~ , by equation (140)
when in the limit / becomes equal to a.
240] Spherical Harmonics 209
If the value of F oscillates with infinite frequency near to the point P, we obviously
may not take F outside the sign of integration in passing from equation (141) to
equation (142).
If the value of F is discontinuous at the point P of the sphere with which P
ultimately coincides, we again cannot take F outside the sign of integration. Suppose,
however, that we take coordinates p, $ to express the position of a point P' on the surface
of the sphere very near to P', the coordinate p being the distance PP' t and S being the
angle which PP' makes with any line through P in the tangent plane at P. Then F
may be regarded as a function of p, $, and the fact that F is discontinuous at P is expressed
by saying that as we approach the limit p=0, the limiting value of F (assuming such a
limit to exist) is a function of 3 i.e. depends on the path by which P is approached.
Let F (5) denote this limit. Then
= / 2 _z^ 2
= J (F($) ()) flW, by equation (140).
Z7r J \JJ
On passing to the limit and putting =/, we find that
u JLjX*)** .................................... (143),
i.e. u is the average value of F taken on a small circle of infinitesimal radius surrounding
P. In particular, if F changes abruptly on crossing a certain line through P', having a
value FI on one side, and a value F 2 on the other, then the limiting value of u is
If we take 6 to denote the angle POQ,
i = (/>2a/c
1 / a 2
~7V
If a 2  2a/cos d /a 2  2a/cos 0\ 2 1
~7L *"" "7^ Mrx^ 7 ~) ' "T
or, arranging in descending powers of f t
a 2 n a s
 2 +P 33 +... ............ (144),
in which P 1? P 2 , P 3 ... are functions of ^, being obviously rational integral
functions of cos 0. When 6 0,
W "/'
J.
210 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
and when = 7r,
so that when = 0,
P P 1
LI L 2 ... 1,
and when TT,
p > p,=p,....=i.
It is clear, therefore, that the series (144) is convergent for = and
# = 7r, and a consideration of the geometrical interpretation of this series
will shew that it must be convergent for all intermediate values*.
Differentiating equation (144) with respect to /, we get
If we multiply this equation by 2/, and add corresponding sides to
equation (144), we obtain
ET
Multiplying this equation by , and integrating over the surface of the
'
sphere, we obtain
or, by equation (141),
i * r,*
ds 
If the function F is continuous and nonoscillatory at the point P, then
on passing to the limit and putting /= a, we obtain
If F is discontinuous and nonoscillatory, then the value of the series on the right is
not f, but is the function denned in equation (143).
Now it is known that 1/r is a spherical harmonic, so that we have
where the differentiation is with respect to the coordinates of Q. Hence l/R
must be of the form (cf. 233)
1 = 2(^ + ^)3, ........................ (147),
* Being a power series in cos 6 it can only have a single radius of convergence, and this
cannot be between cos = 1 and cos0= 1.
240242] Spherical Harmonics 211
where S n is a surface harmonic of order n. Comparing with equation (144),
and remembering that a in this equation is the same as the r of equation
(147), we see that P n , regarded as a function of the position of Q, is a surface
harmonic of order n, and we have already seen that it is a series of powers of
cos#, or of , the highest power being the nth, so that r n P n is a rational
integral harmonic of order n. It follows that
Fr n P n dS,
being the sum of a number of terms each of the form r n l%, is also a rational
integral harmonic of order n, say V n . On the surface of the sphere
so that equation (146) becomes
which establishes the result in question.
241. THEOREM. The expansion of an arbitrary function of position on the
surface of a sphere as a series of rational integral harmonics is unique.
For if possible let the same function F be expanded in two ways, say
(149),
(150),
where W n , W n ' are rational integral harmonics of order n. Then the function
is a spherical harmonic, which vanishes at every point of the sphere. Since
V 2 w = at every point inside the sphere it is impossible for u to have either
a maximum or a minimum value inside the sphere (cf. 52), so that u =
at every point inside the sphere. Since W n Wn is a harmonic of order n,
it must be of the form r n S n where S n is a surface harmonic, so that
Thus u is a power series in r which vanishes for all values of r from r = to
r a. Thus S n = for all values of n. Hence T^ = T^', and the two expan
sions (149) and (150) are seen to be identical.
242. It is clear that in electrostatics we shall in general only be con
cerned with functions which are finite and singlevalued at every point, and
of which the discontinuities are finite in number. Thus the only classes of
harmonics which are of importance are rational integral harmonics, and in
future we confine our attention to these. We have found that
142
212 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
(i) The rational integral harmonics of degree n are (2n + 1) in number,
and may all be derived from the harmonic  by differentiation.
(ii) Any function of position on a spherical surface, which satisfies the
conditions which obtain in a physical problem, can be
expanded as a series of rational integral harmonics,
and this can be done only in one way.
243. Before considering these harmonics in detail,
we may try to form some idea of the physical concep
tions which lead to them most directly.
The function  is the potential of a unit charge at
the origin. If, as in 64, we consider two charges
e at points 0', 0" at equal small distances a, a
from the origin along the axis of x, we obtain as the
potential at P,
e e
O'P 0"P OP" OP'
V
If we take e . PP" = 1, we have a doublet of strength 1 parallel to the
axis of x, and the potential at P is = (). In fact this potential is exactly
OX \T J
the same as  already found in 64.
Thus the three harmonics of order 1 obtained by dividing the rational
a /IN a /i\ a /i\
integral harmonics of order 1 by r 3 , namely 5 I  1 o~~  ] 5 ( ~ 1* are simply
J dx \rj dy \rj dz \rj
the potentials of three doublets each of unit strength, parallel to the negative
axes of x, y, z respectively.
If in fig. 73 we replace the charge e at 0' by a doublet of strength e
parallel to the negative axis of x, and the charge e at 0" by a doublet
of strength e parallel to the negative axis of x t we obtain a potential
a 2
If instead of the doublets being parallel to the axis of x y we take them
parallel to the axis of y, we obtain a potential
a 2 /r
'dx'dy
So we can go on indefinitely, for on differentiating the potential of
a system with respect to x we get the potential of a system obtained
242246] Spherical Harmonics 213
by replacing each unit charge of the original system by a doublet of unit
strength parallel to the axis of x. Thus all harmonics of type
d s+t+u
(cf. 236) can be regarded as potentials of systems of doublets at the origin,
and, as we have seen ( 239), it is these potentials which give rise to the
rational integral harmonics.
244. For instance in finding a system to give potential * 2 (  j , we may replace the
charge in fig. 73 by a charge at distance 2a from and  at 0. The charge at <7
may be similarly treated, so that the whole system is seen to consist of charges
E, 2E, E,
at the points x= b, 0, b where 6 = 2a, and Z? 2 =p.
A system of this kind placed along each axis gives a charge  6E at the origin and
a charge E at each corner of a regular octahedron having the origin as centre. The
potential
*/i\. a/i\ a*A\
a*, 2 \r) "" fy 2 \r) * dz* \r)
= 0,
so that such a system sends out no lines of force.
245. The most important class of rational integral harmonics is formed
by harmonics which are symmetrical about an axis, say that of x. There is
one harmonic of each degree n, namely that derived from the function
These harmonics we proceed to investigate.
LEGENDRE'S COEFFICIENTS.
246. The function
_L = ........................... (151)
Va 2  2ar cos 6 + r 2
can, as we have already seen (cf. equation (144)), be expanded in a convergent
series in the form
...... (152)
if a is greater than r. Here the coefficients 7?, J%, ... are functions of cos 0,
and are known as Legendre's coefficients. When we wish to specify the
particular value of cos 6, we write P n as P n (cos 0).
214 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
Interchanging r and a in equation (152) we find that, if r > a
~*+P^+ (153).
Va 2 2arcos<9 + r 2 r
We have already seen that the functions J?, 7J, ... are surface harmonics,
each term of the equations (152) and (153) separately satisfying Laplace's
equation. The equation satisfied by the general surface harmonic 8 n of
degree n, namely equation (136), is
Sn
In the present case P n is independent of <, so that the differential equation
satisfied by P n is
or, if we write p for cos 8,
This equation is known as Legendre's equation.
247. By actual expansion of expression (151)
a \ a a/ .>\ a
so that on picking out the coefficient of r n , we obtain
Thus F^ is an even or odd function of p, according as n is even or odd. It
will readily be verified that expression (155) is a solution in series of
equation (154).
Let us take axes Ox, Oy, Oz, the axis Ox to coincide with the line 6 = 0,
then ^r r cos 6 = x. Then it appears that P n r n is a rational integral function
of x, y, and z of degree n, and, being a solution of Laplace's equation, it must
be a rational integral harmonic of degree n. We have seen that there can
only be one harmonic of this type which is also symmetrical about an axis ;
this, then, must be P n r n .
248. If we write
(a 2
we have, by Maclaurin's Theorem,
246249]
Spherical Harmonics
215
If P is the point whose polar coordinates are a, and
Q is the point r, 0, then /(a)=p7\ The Cartesian co
ordinates of P may be taken to be a, 0, ; let those of Q be p
x, y, z. Then f(a)  , so that as regards
differentiation of /(a),
_
da
FIG. 74.
Thus
_
~^
so that equation (156) becomes
,, , i
and on comparison with expansion (153), we see that
giving the form for P n which we have already found to exist in 245.
249. A more convenient form for P n can be obtained as follows.
Let 1 hy = (1 2A/U 4 h z )^ (15*0
so that y = /ji + h ^ (158).
From this relation we can expand y by Lagrange's Theorem (cf. Edwards,
Differential Calculus, 517) in the form
Differentiating with respect to /z,
From equation (157), however, we find
Equating the coefficients of h n in the two expansions, we find
.(159).
216 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
250. This last formula supplies the easiest way of calculating actual
values of 1^. The values of 7J, P 2 , ... 7? are found to be
P 9 (n) = T V (23V  315/i 4 + 105/. 2  5),
P 7 fa) = ^ (429//  693/a' + 315//, 3  35/4
251. The equation (/J? l) n = has 2?i real roots, of which n may be
regarded as coinciding at p. = 1, and n at //, = 1. By a wellknown theorem,
the first derived equation,
will have 2n 1 real roots separating those of the original equation.
Passing to the nih derived equation, we find that the equation
has n real roots, and that these must all lie between /Lt = l and /Lt = + l.
The roots are all separate, for two roots could only be coincident if the
original equation (^1)^ = had n + 1 coincident roots.
Thus the n roots of the equation P n (AI) = O are all real and separate and
lie between /A = 1 and //, = f 1.
252. Putting //, = !, we obtain
A/1  2h + h
so that PI = > = . . . = 1. Similarly, when p =  1, we find (cf. 240) that
= + 7>=^=... = l.
We can now shew that throughout the range from //, = 1 to p =
the numerical value of P n is never greater than unity. We have
x l + fo + ^
250253] Spherical Harmonics 217
so that on picking out coefficients of h n ,
D 1.3...2nl  ,  1.3...2n3
Pn= 2.4...2n 2cQS ^ + ^ 2 . 4 ... 2n _ 2 2cos("2)0+....
Every coefficient is positive, so that 7^ is numerically greatest when each
cosine is equal to unity, i.e. when = 0. Thus P n is never greater than
unity.
Fig. 75 shews the graphs of 7?, 1$, 7J, 7J, from //.= 1 to /*= + !, the
value of being taken as abscissa.
Relations between coefficients of different orders.
253. We have
Differentiating with regard to h,
(160).
(161),
so that
h)(l + 2h n P n ) = (1  2V + /i
Equating coefficients of A 71 , we obtain
........... (162).
This is the difference equation satisfied by three successive coefficients.
218 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
Again, if we differentiate equation (160) with respect to /z,
h (1  2V + A 2 )~ 2 = %h n ~ ,
so that, by combining with (161),
i
Equating coefficients of h n ,
Differentiating (162), we obtain
o r>
Eliminating fju ^ from this and (163),
(2rc + l)7>=?f^ 1 ^p ..................... (164).
dyLt OfJU
By integration of this we obtain
whilst by the addition of successive equations of the type of (164), we
obtain
_, _ ............... (166).
254. We have had the general theorem ( 237)
from which the theorem
follows as a special case. Or since
da) = sin 6d6d<f) = dfjLd<t>,
r l p n ()P m (ridp = ..................... (167).
J i
f+i
To find I I^dj^d/ji, let us square the equation
o
multiply by d/ju, and integrate from /z = 1 to ^
253255] Spherical Harmonics 219
The result is
all products of the form P n P^. vanishing on integration, by equation (167).
r+i
Thus ]}*df* is the coefficient of h in
J i
J _! 12V + & 2 '
i.e. in *wl^.
and this coefficient is easily seen to be
We accordingly have
255. We can obtain this theorem in another way, and in a more general form, by
using the expansion of 240, namely
( JFP 8 (cos6)dS,
where 6 is the angle between the point P and the element dS on the sphere. This
expansion is true for any function F subject to certain restrictions. Taking F to be a
surface harmonic S n of order n, we obtain
' ] n P 8 (cos 0) dS
all other integrals vanishing by the theorem of 237. Thus
or s n PMda> = (S^ =l .............................. (169).
This is the general theorem, of which equation (168) expresses a particular case. To
pass to this particular case, we replace S n by P n (fi) and obtain, instead of equation (169),
(P n (,*)} sin 6d6dj> = P n (1),
or, after integrating with respect to <,
agreeing with equation (168).
220 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
Expansions in Legendres Coefficients.
256. THEOREM. The value of any function of 6, which is finite and
singlevalued from 6 = to 6 = TT, and which has only a finite number of
discontinuities and of maxima and minima within this range, can be
expressed, for every value of 6 within this range for which the function is
continuous, as a series of Legendres Coefficients.
This is simply a particular case of the theorem of 240. It is therefore
unnecessary to give a separate proof of the theorem.
The expansion is easily found. Assume it to be
/(/A) = a + a 1 ^+a a 5+... + a,5+ (170),
then on multiplying by P^ (/A) dp, and integrating from /* = 1 to /u = + l,
we obtain
I +1 P n (p)f(ti dp = Y a s ( +1 P,
J 1 4 = J 1
every integral vanishing, except that for which s = n. Thus
a n = = I P n (p)f(p)dfj, (171),
* j i
giving the coefficients in the expansion.
If /(/A) has a discontinuity when /x = yt/, , the value assumed by the
series (168) on putting /* = /u, is, as in 240, equal to
M/i(/A>)+/ 2 G"o)} (172),
where yi (yu, ), f^(^) are the values of /(AI) on the two sides of the discon
tinuity.
HARMONIC POTENTIALS.
257. We are now in a position to apply the results obtained to problems
of electrostatics.
Consider first a sphere having a surface density of electricity S n . The
potential at any internal point P is
~
S n dS
PQ J J Va 2 2ar cos 6 + r 2
= 1 1 (l +  7? (cos 0)+,% (cos 6) + ..'. J dS
JJ a \ a a~ /
= 4?ra 2  ( ri (S n ) cos0=l) by the theorems of 237 and 255,
CL
a"~
this expression being evaluated at P.
(173),
256259] Spherical Harmonics
Similarly the potential at any external point P is
221
These potentials are obviously solutions of Laplace's equation, and it is
easy to verify that they correspond to the given surface density, for
outside
inside
This gives us the fundamental property of harmonics, on which their
application to potentialproblems depends : A distribution of surface density
S n on a sphere gives rise to a potential which at every point is proportional
toS n .
258. The density of the most general surface distribution can, by the
theorem of 240, be expressed as a sum of surface harmonics, say
in which $ is of course simply a constant. The potential, by the results of
the last section, is
F= 47ra U + (} + fV + ... at an internal point ...(174),
( o \aj o \aj J
an external point ...(175).
= 4
~Y
o \r J
EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF HARMONICS.
I. Potential of spherical cap and circular ring.
259. As a first example, let us find the potential of a spherical cap
of angle a i.e. the surface cut from a sphere by
a right circular cone of semivertical angle a
electrified to a uniform surface density cr Q .
We can regard this as a complete sphere
electrified to surface density cr, where
cr = o from 6 = to 6 = a,
o = from 6 = 0. to 6 TT.
The value of a being symmetrical about the
axis = 0, let us assume for the value of cr ex
panded in harmonics
cos 6) + a 2 ^(cos 9)
Fm. 76.
222 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
then, by equation (171),
2n 4 1 f fl =
a n = 5 I aP n (cos 0) d (cos 0)
^ ./ = TT
1 /"0=0
= oo ^ (cos (9) d (cos 0)
J e=a
(cos a)  P n+l (cos a)}
by equation (165), except when n = 0. For this case we have
Thus
= J<7 (1 cosa)+ 2 jlJU^cosa) ft +1 (cosa)jft(cos^) .
It is of interest to notice that when 6 = a, the value of a given by
this series is O = ^CT Q , as it ought to be (cf. expression (172)).
The potential at an external point may now be written down in the
form
......... (176),
and that at an internal point is
......... (177).
On differentiating with respect to a, we obtain the potential of a ring
of line density o acfa. At a point at which r > a, we differentiate ex
pression (176), and obtain
Fm'n a. n=<*> //^\ n +i ~~\
V = 27raer da  + 2 ^ (cos a) sin a (  ) P n (cos (9) ,
L ^ n=l v /
or, putting ao c?a = r and simplifying,
P n (cos0) ............ (178).
Obviously the potential at a point at which r < a, can be obtained on
i f a \ n+l v, ! r \ n
replacing by .
260. These last results can be obtained more directly by considering
that at any point on the axis = the potential is
v _ 27rar sin a
Vr 2 + a 2 2ar cos a '
or, if r < a,
T 27rcw sin a = /r\ %
F=    2 ^(cosa)  ,
259261]
Spherical Harmonics
223
and expression (178) is the only expansion in Lagrange's coefficients which
satisfies Laplace's equation and agrees with this expression when = 0.
II. Uninsulated sphere in field of force.
261. The method of harmonics enables us to find the field of force
produced when a conducting sphere is introduced into any permanent field
of force. Let us suppose first that the sphere is uninsulated.
FIG. 77.
Let the sphere be of radius a. Round the centre of the sphere describe
a slightly larger sphere of radius a', so small as not to enclose any of the
fixed charges by which the permanent field of force is produced. Between
these two spheres the potential of the field will be capable of expression in a
series of rational integral harmonics, say
(179).
The problem is to superpose on this a potential, produced by the
induced electrification on the sphere, which shall give a total potential
equal to zero over the sphere r = a. Clearly the only form possible for
this new potential is
Thus the total potential between the spheres r = a and r = a' is
224 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
Putting V n = r n S n , the surface density of electrification on the sphere
is, by Coulomb's Law,

"rTT
This result is indeed obvious from 258. on considering that the
surface electrification must give rise to the potential (180).
If n is different from zero,
[[
where the integration is over any sphere, so that
ff
IIS n dS = (^=^0),
and \\V n dS =0 (n^O) (181).
Thus the total charge on the sphere
and TJ was the potential of the original field at the centre of the sphere.
262. Incidentally we may notice, as a consequence of (181), that the
mean value of a potential averaged over the surface of any sphere which
does not include any electric charge is equal to the potential at the
centre (cf. 50).
If the sphere is introduced insulated, we superpose on to the field
already given, the field of a charge E spread uniformly over the surface
Tjl
of the sphere, and the potential of this field is . We obtain the par
ticular case of an uncharged sphere by taking E V Q a, and the potential
of this field, namely K(~)> j us * annihilates the first term in expression
(180), to which it has to be added.
It will easily be verified that, on taking the potential of the original
field to be V l = Fx, we arrive at the results already obtained in 217.
261263]
Spherical Harmonics
225
III. Dielectric sphere in a field of force.
263. An analogous treatment will give the solution when a homo
geneous dielectric sphere is placed in a permanent field of force. The
treatment will, perhaps, be sufficiently exemplified by considering the case
of the simple field of potential
JSmfrnmrO*
Let us assume for the potential TJ outside the sphere
and for the potential TJ inside the sphere
no term of the form ^ being included in T, as it would give infinite
potential at the origin. The constants a, /3 are to be determined from
the conditions
These give
FIG. 78.
whence
so that
j.
Kl
Fx.
15
226 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
Thus the lines of force inside the dielectric are all parallel to those of
the original field, but the intensity is diminished in the ratio ^  . The
./L \ '
field is shewn in fig. 78.
IV. Nearly spherical surfaces.
264. If r = a, the surface r = a + %, where % is a function of 6 and </>, will
represent a surface which is nearly spherical if % is small. In this case %
may be regarded as a function of position on the surface of the sphere r a,
and expanded in a series of rational integral harmonics in the form
in which $ 1} $ 2 , ... are all small.
The volume enclosed by this surface is
_
o
If $ = 0, the volume is that of the original sphere r = a.
The following special cases are of importance :
r = a + ePj. To obtain the form of this surface, we pass a distance e cos 6
along the radius at each point of the sphere r = a. It is easily seen that
when e is small the locus of the points so obtained is a sphere of radius
a, of which the centre is at a distance e from the origin.
r = a + a 1 S 1 . The most general form for a^ is Ix + my + nz, and this
may be expressed as aecos#, where 6 is now measured from the line of
which the direction cosines are in the ratio I : m : n. Thus the surface is the
same as before.
r = a + S 2 . Since r is nearly equal to a, this may be written
or # 2 + y 2  + z 1 a 2 + an expression of the second degree.
263267] Spherical Harmonics 227
Thus the surface is an ellipsoid of which the centre is at the origin. It will
easily be found that r a + eTJ represents a spheroid of axis afe, a ^,
Zi
and therefore of ellipticity ^.
265. We can treat these nearly spherical surfaces in the same way
in which spherical surfaces have been treated, neglecting the squares of the
small harmonics as they occur.
266. As an example, suppose the surface r = a + S n to be a conductor,
raised to unit potential. We assume an external potential
n + l
where A and B have to be found from the condition that V= 1 when
r = a + S n . Neglecting squares of S n , this gives
so that A = a, B = ,
C!b
a a n
By applying Gauss' Theorem to a sphere of radius greater than a we
readily find that the total charge is a the coefficient of . Thus the
capacity of the conductor is different from that of the sphere only by terms
in S n 2 , but the surface distribution is different, for
47TO = y = , if we neglect $ n 2 ,
the surface density becoming uniform, as it ought, when n = l, i.e. when the
conductor is still spherical.
267. As a second example, let us examine the field inside a spherical
condenser when the two spheres are not quite concentric. Taking the centre
of the inner as origin, let the equations of the two spheres be
r = b + eTJ.
152
228 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
We have to find a potential which shall have, say, unit value over r = a,
and shall vanish over r = b + e^. Assume
V=~
when B and D are small, then we must have
These equations must be true all over the spheres, so that the coefficients
of P and the terms which do not involve 7J must vanish separately. Thus
+ al0, ^ + Da = 0;
T+Oo. ++^*
From the first two equations
b a
A= ^'
and this being the coefficient of  in the potential, is the capacity of the
condenser. Thus to a first approximation, the capacity of the condenser
remains unaltered, but since B and D do not vanish, the surface distribution
is altered.
FURTHER ANALYTICAL THEORY OF HARMONICS.
General Theory of Zonal Harmonics.
268. The general equation satisfied by a surface harmonic of order n y
which is symmetrical about an axis, has already been seen to be
() ............... (182).
One solution is known to be P^, so that we can find the other by
a known method. Assume S n P n u as a solution, where u is a function
of p. The equation becomes
and, since P n is itself a solution,
Multiplying this by u and subtracting from (183), we are left with
267270] Spherical Harmonics 229
or, multiplying by 7J and rearranging,
or
On integration this becomes
(1 yit 2 ) PT? = constant.
We may therefore take
in which the limits may be any we please. If we write
the complete solution of equation (182) is
269. The two solutions ^ and Q n can be obtained directly by solving
the original equation (182) in a series of powers of /x.
Assume a solution
S n = b p r + b^ 1 + 6 2 /Lt r+2 + . . . ,
substitute in equation (182), and equate to zero the coefficients of the
different powers of JJL. The first coefficient is found to be b r(r 1), so
that if this is to vanish we must have r = or r 1. The value r = leads
to the solution
n(n + l) (n2)n(n + l)( + 8)
1.2 ^ 1.2.3.4 <
while the value r = 1 leads to the solution
(nl)(n + 2) . (n3)(nl)(n + 2)(n + 4)
^~ / "" 1.2.3 ^ 1.2.3.4.5 "^
The complete solution of the equation is therefore
If n is integral one of the two series terminates, while the other does
not. If n is even the series u terminates, while if n is odd, the terminating
series is u lf But we have already found one terminating series which is
a solution of the original equation, namely R. Hence in either case the
terminating series must be proportional to P n , and therefore the infinite
series must be proportional to Q n .
270. We can obtain a more useful form for Q n from expression (184).
The roots of ^(/*) = are, as we have seen, n in number, all real and
230 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
separate, and lying between 1 and + 1. Let us take these roots to be
i> 2, ...n. Then
1 1
 i) {P n (^Y (r  1) (fi + 1) (A*  ,)* 0*  2 ) 2 . . . (/i  a n ) 2
+_O ............ (185),
Z
on resolving into partial fractions.
Putting fjb = + 1 and 1, we find at once that a = ^, b = J.
In the general fraction
D ~~ (x a^(x o a ) . . . '
let us suppose all the factors in the denominator to be distinct, so that we
may write
On putting 0? = ^, we obtain at once
1
^&l (Z 2 ) (ttj d' A ) \di $4) ...
1
x
(a 2  aj) (a 2  a 3 ) (a 2  a 4 ) . . . '
Now let &J and a 2 become very nearly equal, say a 2 = a a + c^a^ then
1
i
while c 2 =
The fractions ^ + 2
x
,. . ,
now combine into
and on putting this equal to
Ci C 2
x aL (x ttj) 2 '
it is clear that the value of c/ must be taken to be Cj + c 2 . Now
1 f 1 1
p I n . _ J _ __ _  
ddi (a 2  a s ) (02  a 4 ) . . . K  a s ) (a a  a 4 ) . . .
_ _
j (das \(xa z )(xat)..J x = ai
^) 2 ]
D } x=ai >
270] Spherical Harmonics 231
and this remains true however many of the roots a sy a 4 ... coincide among
themselves, so long as they do not coincide with the root a l8 Thus, in
expression (185), the value of c s is
9 ( (aarf
Putting
we find that
= a [ i 1 a f i ]
8/i ((1  /* 2 ) { 0*)} 2 J M=ag 9 s 1(1  etf) { (a.)}'}
Since (//,  a g )R(fj,) is a solution of equation (182), we find that
On putting p = a S) this reduces to
 f(l  tf) Ji (.)} + (1  .) ^ } = 0,
giving, on multiplication by R (a,),
Hence c s = 0.
Equation (185) now becomes
i . s
so that, on integration,
f dp . , IJL + 1 ^ d s
J^(^ 1) {P n (/z)} 2 = * g ^1 + y^cT/
On multiplying by P n (fi\ we obtain from equation (184),
where T^! is a rational integral function of JJL of degree n 1.
It is now clear that Q n (/&) is finite and continuous from /A = 1 to /* = + 1,
but becomes infinite at the actual values /*= + !.
To find the value of "R^ we substitute expression (186) in Legendre's
equation, of which it is known to be a solution, and obtain
W log
232 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vin
Since T^_! is a rational integral algebraic function of //, of degree n 1, it
can be expanded in the form
T^_i
so that
= S s {n (n + 1)  (n  s) (n  s + 1)} ^_ s .
Comparing with (187), we find that a s = when s is odd, and is equal to
2(2n2s+l)
5(2715+1)
when s is even.
Thus
  i 3(n _ 1 3 5 (n _ 2)
and
271. When we are dealing with complete spheres it is impossible for
the solution Q n to occur. If the space is limited in such a way that the
infinities of the Q n harmonic are excluded, it may be necessary to take
into account both the P n and Q n harmonics. An instance of such a case
occurs in considering the potential at points outside a conductor of which
the shape is that of a complete cone.
Tesseral Harmonics.
272. The equation satisfied by the general surface harmonic S n is.
As a solution, let us examine
where is a function of only, and <1> is a function of <j> only. On
substituting this value in the equation, and dividing by 3>/sin 2 0, we obtain
sin0 i
e 8
We must therefore have
sin0 8
,(sin0~) + Mrc + l)sin 2 0=K.
OU \. 00 J
270273] Spherical Harmonics 233
The solution of the former equation is single valued only when K is of the
form m 2 , where m is an integer. In this case
<E> = C m cos m<f> + D m sin m^>,
and <*) is given by
or, in terms of /JL,
an equation which reduces to Legendre's equation when m = 0.
273. To obtain the general solution of equation (188), consider the
differential equation
........................ (189),
of which the solution is readily seen to be
f#) n .............................. (190).
If we differentiate equation (189) s times we obtain
If in this we put s = n, and again differentiate with respect to /x, we
obtain
d n z
which is Legendre's equation with ^ as variable. Thus a solution of this
equation is seen to be
&  (!f <>*>
giving at once the form for P n already obtained in 249. The general
solution of equation (192) we know to be
If we now differentiate (192) m times, the result is the same as that of
differentiating (189) m + n + l times, and is therefore obtained by putting
1 in (191). This gives
234 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
m
or, multiplying by (1 yu, 2 ) 2 ,
(193).
^ 3m+n
(i,,)
U
Then 
3/4 8^ +n+2 a//,
mu
(m + n + 1) (n m) I m ^ ^ , by equation (193),
Thus v satisfies
and this is the same as equation (188), which is satisfied by .
274. The solution of equation (188) has now been seen to be
where  il = AP n + BQ n .
Hence & = A (1 
The functions
are known as the associated Legendrian functions of the first and second
kinds, and are generally denoted by P^(^)> Qn(^)' A S regards the former
we may replace P n , from equation (159), by
1 d n
273, 274] Spherical Harmonics 235
and obtain the function in the form
I
(1 ^'G* 1 !)" ............ (194).
2
It is clear from this form that the function vanishes if ra + n > 2n, i.e. if
m>n. It is also clear that it is a rational integral function of sin 6 and
cos 0. From the form of Q n (p), which is not a rational integral function of /z,,
it is clear that Q?(/A) cannot be a rational integral function of sin 6 and
cos 6.
Thus of the solution we have obtained for S n , only the part
P (/A) (G m cos mc/> + D m sin ra0)
gives rise to rational integral harmonics. The terms P(/z)cosra0 and
P (//,) sin ra0 are known as tesseral harmonics.
Clearly there are (2n + 1) tesseral harmonics of degree n, namely
P n (p\ cos PI 04 sine/) Pi O)... cos n0P(/A sin n0 P (,z).
These may be regarded as the (2w + l) independent harmonics of degrees
of which the existence has already been proved in 239.
Using the formula
and substituting the value obtained in 247 for ^(/^) (cf. equation (155)),
we obtain P% (/JL) in the form
_ 
2 n n \(nm)\
(n  w)(n  m  l)(n  m  2)(n m  3) n _ m _ 4 ^ _
The values of the tesseral harmonics of the first four orders are given in
the following table.
Order 1. cos 6, sin 6 cos <, sin 6 sin 0.
Order 2. ^(3 cos 2 01), 3 sin cos cos 0, 3 sin 6 cos sin $,
3 sin 2 cos 20, 3 sin 2 sin 20.
Order 3. 1(5 cos 3 6  3 cos 0), f sin (5 cos 2  1 ) cos (/>,
f sin (5 cos 2  1) sin 0, 15 sin 2 9 cos cos 20,
15 sin 2 6 cos sin 20, 15 sin 3 cos 30, 15 sin 3 6 sin 30.
Order 4. J (35 cos 4 (930 cos 2 + 3), f sin (7 cos 3  3 cos 0) cos 0,
 sin (7 cos 3  3 cos 0) sin 0, ^ sin 2 (7 cos 2 01) cos 20,
J^ sin 2 (7 cos 2  1 ) sin 20, 1 05 sin 3 cos cos 30,
105 sin 3 cos sin 30, 105 sin 4 cos 40, 105 sin 4 sin 40.
236 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
275. We have now found that the most general rational integral surface
harmonic is of the form
n
S n = 2 Pn (/*) (A m cos m<f> + B m sin ra</>),
o
in which P(p) is interpreted to mean P n (/z), when m = 0.
Let us denote any tesseral harmonics of the type
P(//,)(^cosra< + 5smm<) by S%.
Then by 237, Jj Sf S$ da> =
if n = n'. If n = w', then
JJ SJ 5?' = PJ (/*) P?' (/*) (J TO cos ro + B m sin m</>)
(jd TO ' cos m'<f> + 5 m ' sin m'<f)) dco,
and this vanishes except when m = m.
When n n' and m = m' the value of 1 1 S% S$ dco clearly depends on
r+i
that of I {P% (/x)} 2 dfji, and this we now proceed to obtain.
We have
a lt .
 ( M '
ip ^ f
.r"^ ..(195).
z
Since ^ n = 7J is a solution of equation (191), we obtain, on taking s = m + n
in this equation, and multiplying throughout by (1 ft 2 )' 11 " 1 ,
+ (n + m)(n
which, again, may be written
In equation (195) the first term on the righthand vanishes, so that
(n + m) (n  m + 1) j (P (/n)) 2 d/t,
275, 276] Spherical Harmonics 237
a reduction formula from which we readily obtain
These results enable us to find any integral of the type 1 1 S n S' n da>.
Biaxal Harmonics.
276. It is often convenient to be able to express zonal harmonics
referred to one axis in terms of harmonics referred to other axes i.e. to be
able to change the axes of reference of zonal harmonics.
Let P n be a harmonic having OP as axis. At Q the value of this
is P n (cos 7), where 7 is the angle PQ, and our problem is to express
this harmonic of order n as a sum of zonal and tesseral harmonics referred to
other axes. With reference to these axes, let the coordinates of Q be 6, <, let
those of P be 0, 3>, and let us assume a series of the type
P n (cos 7) = V P s n (cos 0) (A s cos s(j> + B s sin 8$).
5 =
Let us multiply by P s n (cos 6) cos scf) and integrate over the surface of a unit
sphere. We obtain
jl P n (cos 7) {P s n (cos 0) cos S(j>} da) = A s jj [P s n (cos 0)} 2 cos 2 s< da.
By equation (169),
P n (cos 7) {P s n (cos 6) cos sc/>} da> = ^^ {P s n (cos 6) cos s(} v=0
and ft {P s n (cos 0)} 2 cos 2 s< dto = I + * }P^ (p)} 2 dp f
Thus
and similarly
This analysis needs modification when 5 = 0, but it is readily found that
A = P n (cos), = 0,
so that
P n (cos 7) = P n (cos 6) P n (cos 0) + S 2 ^^ P^ (cos 0) P^ (cos 6) cos ((/,  <E
s=l (^ T S)
....(196).
238 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vin
GENERAL THEORY OF CURVILINEAR COORDINATES.
277. Let us write
c/> (#, y, z) = X,
"^ (x, y, z} = p,
X (x, y, z} = v,
where </>, ty, % denote any functions of x, y, z. Then we may suppose a point
in space specified by the values of X, p, v at the point, i.e. by a knowledge of
those members of the three families of surfaces
(x, y, z) = cons. ; fy (x, y, z) = cons. ; ^ (#, y, z) = cons.
which pass through it.
The values of X, p, v are called "curvilinear coordinates" of the point.
A great simplification is introduced into the analysis connected with
curvilinear coordinates, if the three families of surfaces are chosen in such
a way that they cut orthogonally at every point. In what follows we shall
suppose this to be the case the coordinates will be " orthogonal curvilinear
coordinates."
The points X, p, v and X + d\, /z, v will be adjacent points, and the
distance between them will be equal to d\ multiplied by a function of
X, p, and v let us assume it equal to j . Similarly, let the distance
hi
from X, p, v to X, p f dp, v be j , and let the distance from X, p, v to
*J
7 i_ dv
X, p, v + civ be j .
ri 3
Then the distance ds from X, p, v to X + d\ /JL + dp, v + dv will be
given by
this being the diagonal of a rectangular parallelepiped of edges
d\ dp , dv
T , j and j .
r^ h 2 fi 3
Laplace's equation in curvilinear coordinates is obtained most readily by
applying Gauss' Theorem to the small rectangular parallelepiped of which
the edges are the eight points
X + ^d\ p ^dp, v \dv.
In this way we obtain the relation
dS = (197)
in the form
277279] Confocal Coordinates 239
and as we have already seen that equation (197) is exactly equivalent to
Laplace's equation V 2 F = 0, it appears that equation (198) must represent
Laplace's equation transformed into curvilinear coordinates.
In any particular system of curvilinear coordinates the method of pro
cedure is to express h l} h.%, h s in terms of X, p and v, and then try to obtain
solutions of equation (198), giving V as a function of X, p and v.
SPHERICAL POLAR COORDINATES.
278. The system of surfaces r = cons., = cons., <j> = cons, in spherical
polar coordinates gives a system of orthogonal curvilinear coordinates. In
these coordinates equation (198) assumes the form
9 / dv\ , i 8 / . a dv\ , i a 2 F
fr(*w) + ^M(* me W + **0w '
already obtained in 233, which has been found to lead to the theory
of spherical harmonics.
CONFOCAL COORDINATES.
279. After spherical polar coordinates, the system of curvilinear coor
dinates which comes next in order of simplicity and importance is that in
which the surfaces are confocal ellipsoids and hyperboloids of one and two
sheets. This system will now be examined.
Taking the ellipsoid
as a standard, the conicoid
2 i/ 2 z 2
+ = ..................... (200)
will be confocal with the standard ellipsoid whatever value 6 may have, and
all confocal conicoids are represented in turn by this equation as 6 passes
from oo to + x .
If the values of x, y, z are given, equation (200) is a cubic equation in 6.
It can be shewn that the three roots in are all real, so that three confocals
pass through any point in space, and it can further be shewn that at every
point these three confocals are orthogonal. It can also be shewn that of
these confocals one is an ellipsoid, one a hyperboloid of one sheet, and one
a hyperboloid of two sheets.
Let X, //,, v be the three values of 6 which satisfy equation (200) at any
point, and let X, //,, v refer respectively to the ellipsoid, hyperboloid of one
sheet, and hyperboloid of two sheets. Then X, p, v may be taken to be
240 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
orthogonal curvilinear coordinates, the families of surfaces X = cons., //, = cons.,
v = cons., being respectively the system of ellipsoids, hyperboloids of one
sheet, and hyperboloids of two sheets, which are confocal with the standard
ellipsoid (199).
280. The first problem, as already explained, is to find the quantities
which have been denoted in 2*77 by h ly h 2 , h 3 . As a step towards this, we
begin by expressing x, y, z as functions of the curvilinear coordinates X, p, v.
The expression
is clearly a rational integral function of of degree 3, the coefficient of 6 s
being 1. It vanishes when is equal to X, p or z/, these being the curvi
linear coordinates of the point x, y, z. Hence the expression must be equal,
identically, to
Putting 6 a? in the identity obtained in this way, we get the relation
2 (6 2  a 2 ) (c 2  a 2 ) = (a 2 + X) (a 2 + /*) (a 2 + v\
so that x, y, z are given as functions of X, //,, v by the relations
(a 2 + X)(a 2 + / .)(a 2 +.)
2 _ 22  2
281. To examine changes as we move along the normal to the surface
X = cons., we must keep /JL and v constant. Thus we have, on logarithmic
differentiation of equation (201),
dx _ d\
' ~x ~ a 2 + X '
and there are of course similar equations giving dy and dz. Thus for the
length ds of an element of the normal to X = constant, we have
,7 >c (a 2 +X)(6 2 a 2 )(c 2 a 2 )
The quantity ds is, however, identical with the quantity called =  in
"i
277, so that we have
2 2 2
279283] Confocal Coordinates 241
and clearly h 2 and h s can be obtained by cyclic interchange of the letters
X, /ji and v.
282. If for brevity we write
A A = V(a 2 + X) (6 2 + X) (c 2 + X),
we find that
so that by substitution in equation (198), Laplace's equation in the present
coordinates is seen to be
8 \t ^ A * 8F 1 _!_ 8 \( ^ A * 8F lo_ a k N A  aF l
9^r^AA^} + 97r x) A^^t + a^{( x ^A^ M ^} =o
............... (203).
On multiplying throughout by A^A^A,,, this equation becomes
O*')^*^)^^:.^^!^^
............... (204).
Let us now introduce new variables or, /3, 7, given by
A '
**
r) f\
then we have = A x 5 ;
dot. dX
and equation (204) becomes
Distribution of Electricity on a freelycharged Ellipsoid.
283. Before discussing the general solution of Laplace's equation, it will
be advantageous to examine a few special problems.
In the first place, it is clear that a particular solution of equation (205) is
V=A + BOL (206),
where A, B are arbitrary constants. The equipotentials are the surfaces
a = constant, and are therefore confocal ellipsoids. Thus we can, from this
solution, obtain the field when an ellipsoidal conductor is freely electrified,
j. 16
242 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
For instance, if the ellipsoid
tf + & + tf = l
is raised to unit potential, the potential at any external point will be given
by equation (206) provided we choose A and B so as to have F= 1 when
X = 0, and V = when X = oo . In this way we obtain
F Jt
rcto,
Jo A,
The surface density at any point on the ellipsoid is given by
,
47TCT = ^^ =  = /*!
dn 8X dn d\
f x d\
Jo A A
(208).
Jo A A
Thus the surface density at different points of the ellipsoid is proportional
to h lf
284. The quantity h^ admits of a simple geometrical interpretation.
Let I, m, n be the directioncosines of the tangent plane to the ellipsoid at
FIG. 79.
any point X, ^t, v, and let p be the perpendicular from the origin on to this
tangent plane. Then from the geometry of the ellipsoid we have
x)?72, 2 + (c 2 + X)n 2 ............ (209).
Moving along the normal, we shall come to the point X + d\, p, v. The
tangent plane at this point has the same directioncosines I, m, n as before,
but the perpendicular from the origin will be p + dp, where dp = j . To
"i
283286] Confocal Coordinates 243
obtain dp we differentiate equation (209), allowing \ alone to vary, and so
have
2pdp = d\ (I 2 + ra 2 + ?z 2 ) = d\.
Comparing this with dp = j , we see that h = 2p.
*h
Thus the surface density at any point is proportional to the perpendicular
from the centre on to the tangent plane at the point.
In fig. 79, the thickness of the shading at any point is proportional to
the perpendicular from the centre on to the tangent plane, so that the
shading represents the distribution of electricity on a freely electrified
ellipsoid.
It will be easily verified that the outer boundary of this shading must be
an ellipsoid, similar to and concentric with the original ellipsoid.
285. Replacing /^ by 2p in equation (208), we find for the total charge E
on the ellipsoid,
Jo
Since l\pdS is three times the volume of the ellipsoid, and therefore
equal to 4>7rabc, this reduces to
r=
Jo A A
Since the ellipsoid is supposed to be raised to unit potential, this quantity
E gives the capacity of an ellipsoidal conductor electrified in free space.
286. The capacity can however be obtained more readily by examining
the form of the potential at infinity. At points which are at a distance r
from the centre of the ellipsoid so great that a, b, c may be neglected in
comparison with r, X becomes equal to r 2 , so that A* = r%, and
I
r
Thus at infinity the limiting form assumed by equation (207) is
2
and since the value of V at infinity must be , the value of E follows at
once.
162
244 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
Elliptic Disc.
287. In the preceding analysis, let a become vanishingly small, then
the conductor becomes an elliptic disc of semiaxes b and c.
The perpendicular from the origin on to the tangentplane is given, as in
the ellipsoid, by
1
a 4 6 4 c 4
and when a is made very small in the limit, this becomes
1 a 2
D = =
" 1,2 v '
a 4 2 c 2
so that the surface density at any point #, y in the disc is proportional to
Circular Disc.
288. On further simplifying by putting b = c, we arrive at the case of a
circular disc. The density of electrification is seen at once from expression
(210) to be proportional to
and therefore varies inversely as the shortest chord which can be drawn
through the point.
Moreover, when a = and b = c, we have A A = (c 2 + X) Vx, so that
r d\ 2 ^ / c \ , rd\ TT
 =  tan 1 = arid =  .
J A A A c WX/ Jo A A c
2c
Thus the capacity of a circular disc is , and when the disc is raised to
potential unity, the potential at any external point is
2 tan ffV
7T V\/X/
where X is the positive root of
a* f+z*
X c 2 + X
287291]
Confocal Coordinates
245
289. Lord Kelvin* quotes some interesting experiments by Coulomb on the density
at different points on a circular plate of radius 5 inches. The results are given in the
following table :
Distances from the
plate's edge
Observed Densities
Calculated Densities
5 ins.
1
1
4
1001
1020
3
1005
1090
2
117
1250
1
152
1667
0'5
207
2294
290
00
Much more remarkable is Cavendish's experimental determination of the capacity of a
circular disc. Cavendish found this to be times that of a sphere of equal radius,
1 "57
while theory shews the true value of the denominator to be or 1*5708 !
290. By inverting the distribution of electricity on a circular disc, taking
the origin of inversion to be a point in the plane, of the disc, Kelvin f has
obtained the distribution of electricity on a disc influenced by a point charge
in its plane, a problem previously solved by another method by Green. The
general Green's function for a circular disc has been obtained by HobsonJ.
Spherical Bowl.
291. Lord Kelvin has also, by inversion, obtained the solution for a
spherical bowl of any angle freely electrified. Let the bowl be a piece of a
sphere of diameter /. Let the distance from the
middle point of the bowl to any point of the bowl
be r, and let the greatest value of r, i.e. the dis
tance from a point on the edge to the middle point
of the bowl, be a. Then Kelvin finds for the elec
tric densities inside and outside the bowl :
F
27T 2 /
FIG. 80.
Some numerical results calculated from these formulae are of interest. The six values
in the following tables refer to the middle point and the five points dividing the arc from
the middle point to the edge into six equal parts.
* Papers on Elect, and Mag. p. 179.
t Papers on Elect, and Mag. p. 183.
Trans. Caml. Phil. Soc. xvm. p. 277.
246
Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
Plane disc
Curved disc arc 10
Curved disc arc 20
Pi
Po
Mean
Pi
Po
Mean
Pi
Po
Mean
100
100
10000
91
106
10000
86
114
10000
101
101
10142
95
108
10141
88
115
10010
106
106
10607
99
113
10605
92
120
10369
115
115
11547
109
122
11542
102
129
11106
134
134
13416
127
141
13407
129
156
12606
181
181
18091
174
188
18071
167
194
16474
Bowl arc 270 C
Bowl arc 340
Pi
Po
Mean
Pi
Po
Mean
013
1986
ioooo
0001
19999
10000
014
1987 *
10009
0002
19999
10000
018
1991
10041
0002
20000
10001
025
1998
10118
0004
20001
10002
045
2018
10316
0009
20006
10007
120
2093
11060
0042
20040
10041
Discussing these results, Lord Kelvin says : " It is remarkable how slight an amount
of curvature produces a very sensible excess of density on the convex side in the first two
cases (10 and 20), yet how nearly the mean of the densities on the convex and concave
sides at any point agrees with that at the corresponding point on a plane disc shewn in
the first column. The results for bowls of 270 and 340 illustrate the tendency of the
whole charge to the convex surface, as the case of a thin spherical conducting surface with
an infinitely small aperture is approached."
ELLIPSOIDAL HARMONICS.
292. We now return to the general equations (205), namely
(211),
and examine the nature of the general solutions of this equation.
Let us assume a tentative solution
V=LMN,
in which L is a function of X only, M a function of //, only, and N a function
of v only. Substituting this solution the equation reduces to
, 1 d 2 L , 1 d*M ^ 1
291293] Ellipsoidal Harmonics 247
We cannot solve this equation by methods of the kind used in developing
the theory of spherical harmonics, but it is easy to obtain solutions of limited
generality in which
8 *
7" ^ o > a/r ^ /) ***vi ^ri
Z 9a 2 M 9/3 2 JV^
are rational integral functions of X, p and v respectively. These will be
found to correspond to the solution, in spherical polar coordinates, in a
series of rational integral harmonics.
293. Assume general power series of the form
r ^rT = A + B\ + C\ 2 + . .
Li COL"
L&M = A> B' C' 2
N dy 2
then on substitution in equation (211), it will be found that we must have
A" = A' =A,
... .
So that we must have
^ = (A+B\)L (212),
c/cr
and similar equations, with the same constants A and B, must be satisfied
by M and N.
Equation (212), on substituting for a in terms of X, becomes
a differential equation of the second order in X, while M and ^V" satisfy
equations which are identical except that //, and v are the variables.
The solution of equation (213) is known as a Lame"s function, or ellip
soidal harmonic. The function is commonly written as E%(\), where p, n
are new arbitrary constants, connected with the constants A and B by the
relations
n(n+l) = B, and(6 2 +
Thus E%(\) is a solution of
and a solution of equation (211) is
p n
248 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
294. Equation (213) being of the second order, must have two inde
pendent solutions. Denoting one by L, let the other be supposed to be Lu.
Then we must have
= (A
8a 2
so that on multiplying the former equation by u, and subtracting from the
latter,
,. d z u ~dLdu
L h 2 ^ = 0.
9a 2 da da.
Thus iwvfc ' dXj
and the complete solution is seen to be
where C and D are arbitrary constants.
Accordingly, the complete solution of equation (211) can be written as
This corresponds exactly to the general solution in rational integral
spherical harmonics, namely
p n
(C np "Pl (cos ff) + D np "Pl(cos 0)).
Ellipsoid in uniform field of force.
295. As an illustration of the use of confocal coordinates, let us examine
the field produced by placing an uninsulated ellipsoid in a uniform field of
force.
The potential of the undisturbed field of force may be taken to be F = Fx,
or in confocal coordinates (cf. equation (201))
/(a* + \)(a* + ri(a*+v)
V" (6 2 a 2 )(c 2 a 2 )
294, 295] Ellipsoidal Harmonics 249
This is of the form
V= CLMN
where C is the constant F(b*a 2 ) ~^(c 2 a 2 )~^, and L, M, N are functions of
X only, /JL only and v only, respectively, namely L = Va 2 + X, etc.
Since F= ZIW is a solution of Laplace's equation, there must, as in 294,
be a second solution V Lu . MN, where
The upper limit of integration is arbitrary : if we take it to be infinite,
both u and Lu will vanish at infinity, while M and N are in any case finite
at infinity. Thus Lu . MN is a potential which vanishes at infinity and is
proportional (since u is a function of X only) at every point of any one of the
surfaces X = cons., to the potential of the original field. Thus the solution
V CLMN + DLu . MN (215)
can be made to give zero potential over any one of the surfaces X = cons., by
a suitable choice of the constant D.
For instance if the conductor is X = 0, we have, on the conductor,
f 00 d\
* Jo <y
Thus on the conductor we have
o \u>
The condition for this to vanish gives the value of D, and on substituting
this value of D, equation (215) becomes
u
(216).
This gives the field when the original field is parallel to the major axis
of the ellipsoid. If the original field is in any other direction we can resolve
it into three fields parallel to the three axes of the ellipsoid, and the final
field is then found by the superposition of three fields of the type of that
given by equation (216).
250 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
SPHEROIDAL HARMONICS.
296. When any two semiaxes of the standard ellipsoid become equal
the method of confocal coordinates breaks down. For the equation
reduces to a quadratic, and has therefore only two roots, say X, jj,. The
surfaces X = cons, and /u, = cons, are now confocal ellipsoids and hyperboloids
of revolution, but obviously a third family of surfaces is required before the
position of a point can be fixed. Such a family of surfaces, orthogonal to
the two present families, is supplied by the system of diametral planes
through the axis of revolution of the standard ellipsoid.
The two cases in which the standard ellipsoid is a prolate spheroid and
an oblate spheroid require separate examination.
Prolate Spheroids.
297. Let the standard surface be the prolate spheroid
* +> "
a 2 + 6 2
in which a>b. If we write
y = OT COS (j), 2 = 1& Sin (j),
then the curvilinear coordinates may be taken to be X, /*, <, where X, //, are
the roots of
In this equation, put a 2 6 2 = c 2 and a 2 J 6 c 2 0' 2 , then the equation
becomes
~
If 2 , rf are the roots of this equation in 6"*, we readily find that # 2
so that we may take
a? = cfiy ........................... . .............. (219),
p)(^l) ........................ (220)
in which 77 is taken to be the greater of the two roots.
The surfaces f = cons., 77 = cons., are identical with the surfaces 6 = cons.,
and are accordingly confocal ellipsoids and hyperboloids. The coordinates
f , 77, <f> may now be taken to be orthogonal curvilinear coordinates.
296298] Spheroidal Harmonics 251
It is easily found that
1 ! , 1 /l
from which Laplace's equation is obtained in the form
298. Let us search for solutions of the form
F=EHc>,
where 5, H, <I> are solutions solely of f, ?; and < respectively. On substituting
this tentative solution and simplifying, we obtain
snn i3 ! *_
+ > a, }J + * 8<j>* ~
As in the theory of spherical harmonics, the only possible solution results
from taking
where m 2 is a constant, and m must be an integer if the solution is to be
single valued. The solution is
<> = C cos ra</> + D sin m^ (221).
We must now have
m 2 m 2
~ 1 _ 2 + ^1
and this can only be satisfied by taking
i
together with
Equations (222) and (223) are identical with the equation already dis
cussed in 273, 274. The solutions are known to be
H=
where s = n(n + l) and P% t Q% are the associated Legendrian functions
252 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
already investigated. Combining the values just obtained for H, H with the
value for < given by equation' (221), we obtain the general solution
= 22 (A P% (f) + UQ ()} [A'P% (,) + BQK (,)J [Ccos m * + sin ></>).
m n
At infinity it is easily found that
d*
77 = oo , f = : = = cos 6,
v # 2 + ro 2
while at the origin ?? = 1, f = 0.
Thus in the space outside any spheroid of the series, the solution
is finite everywhere, while, in the space inside, the finite solution is
P
Oblate Spheroids.
299. For an oblate spheroid, a 2 6 2 is negative, so that in equation (218)
we replace 6 2 a 2 by 2 , so that /c = ic, and obtain, in place of equations (219)
and (220),
x = Kir
Replacing irj by f, we may take f, f and <^> as real orthogonal curvilinear
coordinates, connected with Cartesian coordinates by the relations
x =
We proceed to search for solutions of the type
and find that H, ^ must satisfy the same equations as before, while Z must
satisfy
The solution of this is
ZA'.P<t
and the most general solution may now be written down as before.
298302] Twodimensional Problems 253
PKOBLEMS IN TWO DIMENSIONS.
300. Often when a solution of a threedimensional problem cannot be
obtained, it is found possible to solve a similar but simpler twodimensional
problem, and to infer the main physical features of the threedimensional
problem from those of the twodimensional problem. We are accordingly
led to examine methods for the solution of electrostatic problems in two
dimensions.
At the outset we notice that the unit is no longer the pointcharge, but
the uniform linecharge, a linecharge of linedensity a having a potential
(cf.75)
C Zv log r.
Method of Images.
301. The method of images is available in two dimensions, but presents
no special features. An example of its use has already been given in 220.
Method of Inversion.
302. In two dimensions the inversion is of course about a line. Let this
be represented by the point in fig. 81.
Let PP f , QQ' be two pairs of inverse points. Let a linecharge e at Q
produce potential V P at P, and let a p
linecharge e at Q produce potential Vp>
at P', so that
V P =C2elogPQ
If we take e e', we obtain FIG. 81.
(224).
Let P be a point on an equipotential when there are charges e l at Q lt
e z at Q 2 > etc., and let V denote the potential of this equipotential. Let V
denote the potential at P' under the influence of charges e l} e 2 , ... at the
inverse points of Q lf Q 2 , Then, by summation of equations such as (224),
V V =  2 (2e log OP') + 2 (2e log OQ) + constants,
or F=constants 2(2e)logOP' .................. (225).
254 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
The potential at P f of charges e lt e 2 , ... at the inverse points of Q 1} Q. 2 , ...
plus a charge 2e at is
Ff <7+
and this by equation (225) is a constant. This result gives the method of
inversion in two dimensions :
If a surface S is an equipotential under the influence of linecharges
e 1} e 2 , ... at Qi, Q 2 ,..., then the surface which is the inverse of S about
a line will be an equipotential under the influence of linecharges e 1} e 2 , ...
on the lines inverse to Q l} Q 2 , ... together with a charge %e at the line 0.
Twodimensional Harmonics.
303. A solution of Laplace's equation can be obtained which is the
analogue in two dimensions of the threedimensional solution in spherical
harmonics.
In two dimensions we have two coordinates, r, 6, these becoming
identical with ordinary twodimensional polar coordinates. Laplace's equa
tion becomes
ld_f dV\ 8 2 F _
+ ~ '
and on assuming the form
V
in which R is a function of r only, and a function of only, we obtain the
solution in the form
F= "2 (Ar n + =1) (G cos n<f> + D sin n<t>).
n =0 \ r /
Thus the " harmonicfunctions " in two dimensions are the familiar sine
and cosine functions. The functions which correspond to rational integral
harmonics are the functions
r n sin nO, r n cos nO.
In x, y coordinates these are obviously rational integral functions of x
and y of degree n.
Corresponding to the theorem of 240, that any function of position
on the surface of a sphere can (subject to certain restrictions) be expanded
in a series of rational integral harmonics, we have the famous theorem of
Fourier, that any function of position on the circumference of a circle can
(subject to certain restrictions) be expanded in a series of sines and cosines.
In the proof which follows (as also in the proof of 240), no attempt is made
at absolute mathematical rigour: the forms of proof given are those which
seem best suited to the needs of the student of electrical theory.
302304]
Twodimensional Problems
255
Fourier s Theorem.
304. The value of any function F of position on the circumference of a
circle can be expressed, at every point of the circumference at which the
function is continuous, as a series of sines and cosines, provided the function is
singlevalued, and has only a finite number of discontinuities and of maxima
and minima on the circumference of the circle.
Let P(f, a) be any point outside the circle, then if R is the distance
from P to the element ds of the circle p ,,
(a, 0) we have
j = l.
This result can easily be obtained by inte
gration, or can be seen at once from physical
considerations, for the integrand is the charge
induced on a conducting cylinder by unit line
charge at P.
Let us now introduce a function u defined by
^ds
FIG. 82.
.(226).
Then, subject to the conditions stated for F we find, as in 240, that on
the circumference of the circle, the function u becomes identical with F. Also
we have
f 2 + a 2  2a/cos (6  a)
1
f* _ & \f
f
a 
Hence
1 r6 = 2ir 1 QO f n \n /
= Fdd + ^(^)
2?r J e=o TT ! \t ] J
256 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
and on passing to the limit and putting a =/, this becomes
I /027T 1 oo r8=2n
F=^ Fd9 + ^ Fcosn(6a)d0 ......... (227),
Z7Tj0 = o 7T ! J e =
expressing F as a series of sines and cosines of multiples of a.
We can put this result in the form
00
F = F 4 2 (a n cos nx + b n sin no),
i
1 f 27r
where a = I F cos
1 f 27
a n = I
7T Jo
and
O
so that ^ is the mean value of F.
If F has a discontinuity at any point = fi of the circle, and if F lf F 2 are
the values of F at the discontinuity, then obviously at the point 6 {3 on the
circle, equation (226) becomes
so that the value of the series (227) at a discontinuity is the arithmetic mean
of the two values of F at the discontinuity (cf. 256).
305. We could go on to develop the theory of ellipsoidal harmonics etc.
in two dimensions, but all such theories are simply particular cases of a very
general theory which will now be explained.
CONJUGATE FUNCTIONS.
General Theory.
306. In twodimensional problems, the equation to be satisfied by the
potential is
(228);
and this has a general solution in finite terms, namely
iy) ..................... (229),
where / and F are arbitrary functions, in which the coefficients may of course
involve the imaginary i.
For V to be wholly real, F must be the function obtained from / on
changing i into i. Let/*(# + iy) be equal to u + iv where u and v are real,
304308] Conjugate Functions 25 1 ?
then F(x f iy) must be equal to u iv, so that we must have F = 2w. If we
introduce a second function U equal to 2v, we have
= <t>(x + iy) ........................ (230),
where <f> (x + ^y) is a completely general function of the single variable x + iy.
Thus the most general form of the potential which is wholly real, can be
derived from the most general arbitrary function of the single variable x + iy,
on taking the potential to be the imaginary part of this function.
307. If < (# + iy) is a function of x + iy, then i(f> (x + iy) will also be a
function, and the imaginary part of this function will also give a possible
potential. We have, however, from equation (230),
shewing that U is a possible potential.
Thus when we have a relation of the type expressed by equation (230),
either U or F will be a possible potential.
308. Taking F to be the potential, we have by differentiation of equa
tion (230),
8Z7 . dV .,.
M^^ + ty),
dU .9F
_+t =t*(*+ty),
.ftu .aF\ dU .dv
and hence *r^~ + *3~ =: ^~+ l ^~
\dx ox J oy dy
Equating real and imaginary parts in the above equation, we obtain
d_U_dV
dx " dy '
sothat
This however is the condition that the families of curves 7= cons.,
F=cons., should cut orthogonally at every point. Thus the curves
t/" = cons., are the orthogonal trajectories of the equipotentials i.e. are the
lines of force.
j. 17
258 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
Representation of complex quantities.
309. If we write
z = x + iy
so that z is a complex quantity, we can suppose the
position of the point P indicated by the value of
the single complex variable z. If z is expressed in
Demoivre's form
z = re io = r (cos 6 + i sin 6),
ft/* and = tan" 1  . The
then we find that r =
x
FIG. 83.
quantity r is known as the modulus of z and is denoted by \z\, while is
known as the argument of z and is denoted by arg z. The representation of
a complex quantity in a plane in this way is known as an Argand diagram.
310. Addition of complex quantities. Let P be z=x + iy, and let P' be
z' x 4 iy'. The value of z + z is (# 4 x r ) + i (y + ?/'), so that if Q represents
the value z + z' it is clear that OPQP' will be a parallelogram. Thus to
add together the complex quantities z and z 1 we complete the parallelogram
OPP' , and the fourth point of this parallelogram will represent z + z' .
The matter may be put more simply by supposing the complex quantity
z x\iy represented by the direction and length of a line, such that its
projections on two rectangular axes are x, y. For instance in fig. 83, the
value of z will be represented equally by either OP or P'Q. We now have
the following rule for the addition of complex quantities.
To find z + /, describe a path from the origin representing z in magnitude
and direction, and from the extremity of this describe a path representing z'.
The line joining the origin to the extremity of this second path will repre
sent z + z .
311. Multiplication of complex quantities. If
z = x 4 iy = r (cos 6 + i sin 6 ),
and z' x' + iy' = r' (cos & + i sin 6'),
then, by multiplication
zz = rr' {cos (6 + 0') + i sin (6 + 6%
so that zz'  rr z\ z' ,
arg (zz) = + 6' = arg z + arg z 1 ,
and clearly we can extend this result to any number of factors. Thus we
have the important rules :
The modulus of a product is the product of the moduli of the factors.
The argument of a product is the sum of the arguments of the factors.
309312]
Conjugate Functions
259
There is a geometrical interpretation of multiplication.
In fig. 84, let OA = 1, OP = z, OP' = 2:' and OQ = zz'.
Then the angles QOA, P'OA being equal to + 6' and 0' respectively,
the angle QOP' must be equal to 0, and therefore to POA.
Moreover Q
OQ _OP
OP 7 ~ OA '
each ratio being equal to r, so that the triangles
QOP' and POA are similar. Thus to multiply
the vector OP' by the vector OP, we simply
construct on OP' a triangle similar to AOP.
The same result can be more shortly ex
pressed by saying that to multiply z' (= OP') by
z( = OP), we multiply the length OP' by  z and
turn it through an angle arg z.
So also to divide by z, we divide the length of
the line representing the dividend by z and
turn through an angle arg z. In either case an angle is positive when the
turning is in the direction which brings us from the axis of x to that of y
after an angle Tr/2.
FIG. 84.
Conformal Representation.
312. We can now consider more fully the meaning of the relation
U + iV = $ (as + iy).
Let us write z x + iy, and W = U + iV, z and W being complex imagin
aries, which we must now suppose in accordance with equation (230) to be
connected by the relation
W = $(z) (232).
We can represent values of z in one Argand diagram, and values of W in
another. The plane in which values of z are represented will be called the
plane, the other will be called the TFplane. Any point P in the ^plane
corresponds to a definite value of z and this, by equation (232), may give one
or more values of W, according as </> is or is not a singlevalued function.
If Q is a point in the TFplane which represents one of these values of W,
the points P and Q are said to correspond.
As P describes any curve S in the 3plane, the point Q in the TFplane
which corresponds to P will describe some curve T in the TTplane, and the
curve T is said to correspond to the curve 8. In particular, corresponding
to any infinitesimal linear path PP' in the ^plane, there will correspond
172
260 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
a small linear element QQ' in the W plane. If OP, OP' represent the values
z, z f dz respectively, then the element PP' will represent dz. Similarly the
dW
element QQ' will represent d W or y dz.
dz
Hence we can get the element QQ' from the element PP' on multiplying
it by y , i.e. by  < (z), or by fi (x 4 iy). This multiplier depends solely
dz oz
on the position of the point P in the 2plane, and not on the length or
dW
direction of the element dz. If we express y or $' (x + iy) in the form
= <f)'(x + iy) = p (cos x + i sin %),
we find that the element d W can be obtained from the corresponding element
dW
dz by multiplying its length by p or
dz
, and turning it through an angle
%, or arg ( r ) . It follows that any element of area in the ^plane is repre
\ dz J
sented in the "FFplane by an element of area of which the shape is exactly
similar to that of the original element, the linear dimensions are p times as
great, and the orientation is obtained by turning the original element through
an angle ^.
From the circumstance that the shapes of two corresponding elements in
the two planes are the same, the process of passing from one plane to the
other is known as conformal representation.
313. Let us examine the value of the quantity p which, as we have
seen, measures the linear magnification produced in a small area on passing
from the ^plane to the TFplane.
dW
We have p (cos % + i sin %) = y = (/>' (x 4 iy)
~ dx dx
'by dx '
7\V %V
so that p =
The quantity p, or
dW
dz
<9F^
= A / I
dx
, is called the "modulus of transformation."
We now see that if V is the potential, this modulus measures the electric
intensity R, or A/frrj f(^r) . Since R = 4t7rcr ) this circumstance pro
V \ox J \ oy I
vides a simple means of finding cr, the surfacedensity of electricity at any
point of a conducting surface.
312317] Conjugate Functions 261
314. If ~ denote differentiation along the surface of a conductor, on
which the potential F is constant, we have
dW
dz
dU
so that cr =  R .
47T 47T OS
The total charge on a strip of unit width between any two points P, Q of
the conductor is accordingly
f 1
J ad8 = 4^
315. If, on equating real and imaginary parts of any transformation of
the form
U + iV = $ (as + iy) (234),
it is found that the curve f(x, y) = Q corresponds to the constant value
V = C, then clearly the general value of V obtained from equation (234)
will be a solution of Laplace's equation subject to the condition of having
the constant value V=C over the boundary f(x, y) = 0. It will therefore
be the potential in an electrostatic field in which the curve f(x, 2/) = may
be taken to be a conductor raised to potential C.
316. From a given transformation it is obviously always possible to
deduce the corresponding electrostatic field, but on being given the con
ductors and potentials in the field, it is by no means always possible to
deduce the required transformation. We shall begin by the examination of
a few fields which are given by simple known transformations.
SPECIAL TRANSFORMATIONS.
317. Considering the transformation W = 2 n , we have
U+iV = (x+ iy) n = r n (cos nO + i sin n6\
so that V=r n sinn0. Thus any one of the surfaces r n sin n0 = constant,
may be supposed to be an equipotential, including as a special case
r n sin n6 = 0,
in which the equipotential consists of two planes cutting at an angle .
This transformation can be further discussed by assigning particular
values to n.
262 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
n = 1. This gives simply V x, a uniform field of force.
n = 2. This gives V 2xy, so that the equipotentials are rectangular
hyperbolic cylinders, including as a special case two planes intersecting
at right angles (fig. 85).
FIG. 85.
FIG. 86.
This transformation gives the field in the immediate neighbourhood of
two conducting planes meeting at right angles in any field of force. It also
gives the field between two coaxal rectangular hyperbolas.
FIG. 87.
317, 318] Conjugate Functions 263
n = . This gives x + iy ( U + iV ) 2 , so that
x=U*V\ 2/
and on eliminating U we obtain
Thus the equipotentials are confocal and coaxal parabolic cylinders, in
cluding as a special case (F= 0) a semiinfinite plane bounded by the line
of foci.
This transformation clearly gives the field in the immediate neighbour
hood of a conducting sharp straight edge in any field of force (fig. 86).
n = 1. This gives
U+ iV=  (cos 6  i sin (9),
and the equipotentials are
rF=sin0 or # 2 + 2/ 2 ^=0.
Thus the equipotentials are a series of circular cylinders, all touching
the plane y = Q along the axis x = 0, y = (fig. 87).
II. TF=log*.
318. The transformation W=logz gives
so that the equipotentials are the planes 6 = constant, a system of planes all
intersecting in the same line. As a special case, we may take 6 = and
= TT to be the conductors, and obtain the field when the two halves of a
plane are raised to different potentials. The lines of force, U= constant, are
circles (fig. 88).
Fm. 88.
If we take U to be the potential, the equipotentials are concentric
circular cylinders, and the field is seen to be simply that due to a uniform
linecharge, or uniformly electrified cylinder.
264 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vni
It may be noticed that the transformation
gives the transformation appropriate to a linecharge at z = a.
Also we notice that
TJT , z a
W = log 
6 z + a
gives a field equivalent to the superposition of the fields given by
W=\og(za) and W =  log (z + a).
This transformation is accordingly that appropriate to two equal and oppo
site linecharges along the parallel lines z = a and z = a.
This last transformation gives 7 = when y = 0, so that it gives the
transformation for a linecharge in front of a parallel infinite plane.
GENERAL METHODS.
I. Unicursal Curves.
319. Suppose that the coordinates of a point on a conductor can be
expressed as real functions of a real parameter, which varies as the point
moves over the conductor, in such a way that the whole range of variation
of the parameter just corresponds to motion over the whole conductor. In
other words, suppose that the coordinates x, y can be expressed in the form
and that all real values of p give points on the conductor, while, conversely,
all points on the conductor correspond to real values of p.
Then the transformation
z = f(W) + iF(W) ........................... (235)
will give F=0 over the conductor. For on putting F=0 in equation (235)
we obtain
*+iyf(Uy+iF(U\
so that x=f(U), y = F(U),
and by hypothesis the elimination of U will lead to the equation of the
conductor.
320. For example, consider the parabola (referred to its focus as origin),
y 2  = 4a (x + a).
We can write the coordinates of any point on this parabola in the form
x 4 a am 2 , y = 2am,
318321]
Conjugate Functions
265
and the transformation is seen to be
agreeing with that which has already been seen in 317 to give a parabola
as a possible equipotential.
321. As a second example of this method, let us consider the ellipse
The coordinates of a point on the ellipse may be expressed in the form
x a cos <f>, y = b sin <,
and the transformation is seen to be
z = a cos W + ib sin W.
FIG. 89.
We can take a = c cosh a, b = c sinh a, where c 2 = a 2  6 2 , and the trans
formation becomes
z c cos ( W + ia} = c cos { U+ i (V + a)}.
The same transformation may be expressed in the better known form
z = c cosh W.
The equipotentials are the confocal ellipses
tf+x^+x*' 1 '
266 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
while the lines of force are confocal hyperbolic cylinders. On taking V
as the potential, we get a field in which the equipotentials are confocal
hyperbolic cylinders.
II. Schwarzs Transformation.
322. Schwarz has shewn how to obtain a transformation in which one
equipotential can be any linear polygon.
At any angle of a polygon it is clear that the property that small elements
remain unchanged in shape can no longer hold. The reason is easily seen to
te that the modulus of transformation is either infinite or zero (cf. figs. 24
and 25, p. 61). Thus, at the angles of any polygon,
dW
j = or oo .
dz
The same result is evident from electrostatic considerations. At an angle of a
conductor, the surfacedensity a is either infinite or zero ( 70), while we have the
relation ( 313),
R
dW
~fa
Let us suppose that the polygon in the ^plane is to correspond to the
line V in the TTplane, and let the angular points correspond to
U=u l} U=u 2 , etc.
Then, when W=u l} W = u 2 , etc.,
must either vanish or become infinite. We must accordingly have
u^ ..................... (236),
where \, X 2 , ... are numbers which may be positive or negative, while F
denotes a function, at present unknown, of W.
Suppose that, as we move along the polygon, the values of U at the
angular points occur in the order u lt u 2 , .... Then, on passing along the
side of the polygon which joins the two angles 7=^, U=u 2 , we pass along
a range for which F=0, and u l < U<u 2 . Thus, along this side of the
polygon, W u 1} W u 2 , W u 3 , etc. are real quantities, positive or negative,
which retain the same sign along the whole of this edge. It follows that, as
we pass along this edge, the change in the value of arg
by equation (236), is equal to the change in argjP, the arguments of the
factors
undergoing no change.
321323] Conjugate Functions 267
Now arg f jij measures the inclination of the axis F=0 to the edge of
the polygon at any point, so that if the polygon is to be rectilinear, this
must remain constant as we pass along any edge. It follows that there must
be no change in arg F as we pass along any side of the polygon.
This condition can be satisfied by supposing F to be a pure numerical
constant. Taking it to be real, we have, from equation (236),
W2 )+ ......... (237).
On passing through the angular point at which W = u z , the quantities
W u lt Wu 3) etc. remain of the same sign, while the single quantity
Wu 2 changes sign. Thus arg ( W u 2 ) increases by TT, whence, by equa
/ / \
tion (237), ar gTw increases by \ 2 7r.
The axis F=0 does not turn in the TFplane on passing through the
value W=u 2 , while ar g(;rTfr) measures the inclination of the element of
\ct w j
the polygon in the ^plane to the corresponding element of the axis V in
the TFplane.
Hence, on passing through the value W=u 2 , the perimeter of the
polygon in the 2plane must turn through an angle equal to the increase in
arg TT , namely X 2 7r, the direction of turning being from Ox to Oy. Thus
X!TT, X 2 7r, must be the exterior angles of the polygon, these being positive
when the polygon is convex to the axis Ox. Or, if a l} 2 , ... are the interior
angles, reckoned positive when the polygon is concave to the axis of x, we
must have
\ 1 = ^1, etc.
7T
Thus the transformation required for a polygon having internal angles
!, 2 , ... is
7 a, cuj
a /y/Trr \ * / TI7 \ 1 /000\
 =0(W u^ n (W  u 2 )" (238),
d W
where u lt u 2 , ... are real quantities, which give the values of U at the angular
points.
323. As an illustration of the use of Schwarz's transformation, suppose
the conducting system to consist of a semiinfinite plane placed parallel to an
infinite plane.
In fig. 90, let the conductor be supposed to be a polygon ABODE, which
is described by following the dotted line in the direction of the arrows. The
points A, B, 0, E are all supposed to be at infinity, the points B and
268 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
coinciding. Let us take A to be W = oo , B or C to be W = 0, D to be
W = 1 and E to be W = + oc . The angles of the polygon are zero at (BC)
and 27T at D. Thus the transformation is
dz _ r Wl
dW~ ~W~'
giving upon integration
2=C{W\og W+D] (239),
where C, D are constants of integration which may be obtained from the
pr >   E > W = +)
w="+r" <,
lwo
A...V .... ...B
W=oo
FIG. 90.
condition that the two planes are to be, say, y = and y = h. From these
conditions we obtain C =  , D = ITT, so that the transformation is
7T
* = {Flog W + iir] (240).
On replacing z, W by z, W, the transformation assumes the simpler form
k
z
= (W + log W) (241).
7T
III. Successive Transformations.
324. If =<t>(z), TF=/(f) are any two transformations, then by elimi
nation of a relation
W=F(z) .............................. (242)
is obtained, which may be regarded as a new transformation.
We may regard the relation f = < (z) as expressing a transformation from
the ^plane into a fplane, while the second relation W=/() expresses a
further transformation from the fplane into a W plane. Thus the final
transformation (242) may be regarded as the result of two successive trans
formations.
Two uses of successive transformations are of particular importance.
325. Conductor influenced by linecharge. The transformation
gives, as we have seen ( 318) the solution when a linecharge is placed at
f = a in front of the plane represented by the real axis of Let the further
323328] Conjugate Functions 269
transformation =/(,&) transform the real axis of f into a surface S, and the
point f = a into the point s = , so that a =f(z ). Then the transformation
gives the solution when a linecharge is placed at s = s in the presence of
the surface S. In this transformation it must be remembered that U, and
not V, is the potential (cf. 318).
326. Conductors at different potentials. Let us suppose that the trans
formation =<(/) transforms a conductor into the real axis of f. The
further transformation TF=(7f Dlogf ( 318) will give the solution when
the two parts of this plane on different sides of the origin are raised to
different potentials G and C + nrD.
Thus the transformation obtained by elimination of f, namely
F = (7 + D log ((*),
will transform two parts of the same conductor into two parallel planes, and
so will give the solution of a problem in which two parts of the same con
ductor are raised to different potentials.
EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF CONJUGATE FUNCTIONS.
327. Two examples of practical importance will now be given to illus
trate the use of the methods of conjugate functions.
Example I. Parallel Plate Condenser.
328. The transformation
* = ( log fMV),
has been found to transform the two plates in fig. 90 into the positive and
negative parts of the real axis of f. The further transformation W=log f
gives the solution when these two parts of the real axis of f are at potentials
and TT respectively ( 326).
Thus the transformation obtained by the elimination of f, namely
7T
(243),
will transform the two planes of fig. 90 one infinite and one semiinfinite
into two infinite parallel planes. Thus equation (243) gives the transfor
mation suitable to the case of a semiinfinite plane at distance h from a
parallel infinite plane, the potential difference being TT.
By the principle of images it is obvious that the distribution on the
upper plate is the same as it would be if the lower plate were a semiinfinite
270 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vin
plate at distance 2h instead of an infinite plane at distance h. The equi
potentials and lines of force for either problem are shewn in fig. 91.
 U),
 V+TT).
V
FIG. 91.
Separating real and imaginary parts in equation (243),
m( *
7T
( u si
7T
Thus the equipotential V is the line y = h, the equipotential F= TT is
the line y = 0.
On the former equipotential, the relation between x and U is
r(pU_7J\ {9AA<\
\h l(> ^ / y^fjDTC/,
7T
When U= oo,# = + oo; as 7 increases, a? decreases until it reaches a
minimum value x hJTr when 7 = 0; and as 7 further increases through
positive values x again increases, reaching #=oo when 7= + 00. Thus as
U varies while F=0, the path described is the path PQR in fig. 91.
The intensity at any point is
R
dW
dz
7T
h\e w I\'
328] Conjugate Functions 271
At a point on the equipotential F=0, the surfacedensity is
4
7T
At P, 7 =oo, so that " = 4p a we approach Q, a increases and finally
becomes infinite at Q, while after passing Q and moving along QR, the upper
side of the plate, <r decreases, and ultimately vanishes to the order of e~ u .
The total charge within any range U lf U 2 is, by equation (233),
It therefore appears that the total charge on the upper part of the plate QR
is infinite.
Let us, however, consider the charges on the two sides of a strip of the
plate of width I from Q, i.e. the strip between x = h/jr and x = I + hjir. The
two values of U corresponding to the points in the upper and lower faces
at which this strip terminates, are from equation (244) the two real roots of
Of these roots we know that one, say U lt is negative and the other (U 2 ) is
positive. If I is large, we find that the negative root U^ is, to a first approxi
mation, equal to
and this is its actual value when I is very large. Thus the charge on the
lower plate within a large distance I of the edge is
and therefore the disturbance in the distribution of electricity as we approach
Q results in an increase on the charge of the lower plate equal to what would
be the charge on a strip of width h/jr in the undisturbed state.
If I is large the positive root of equation (245) is
so that the total charge on a strip of width I of the upper plate approximates,
when I is large, to
Thus although the charge on the upper plate is infinite, it vanishes in
comparison with that on the lower plate.
272 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
Example II. Send of a Lei/den Jar.
329. The method of conjugate functions enables us to approximate to
the correction required in the formula for the capacity of a Leyden Jar, on
account of the presence of the sharp bend in the plates.
Is
FIG. 92.
As a preliminary, let us find the capacity of a twodimensional condenser
formed of two conductors, each of which consists of an infinite plate, bent
into an Lshape, the two L's being fitted into one another as in fig. 92.
Let us assume the five points A, B, (CD), E, F to be f= oo, a, 0,
+ b, + oo respectively, and let us for convenience suppose the potential
difference which occurs on passing through the value f= to be TT. Then
the transformation is
 1  *
where W= log f (cf. 326).
To integrate, we put u = (+)"" *(?&)> and obtain
(246),
where (7 is a constant of integration.
To make C vanish, we must have 5 = when u
We shall accordingly take E as origin, so that (7=0.
0, i.e. at the point E.
329] Conjugate Functions 273
At B, we now have f =  a, u = oo , and therefore
z 7T.A A/  iirA.
Thus the distances between the pairs of arms are TT\ /  A and TrA
v a
respectively.
Let P be any point in EF which is at a distance from E great compared
with EB. Let the value of f at P be >, so that fp is positive and greater
than 6.
We have TF= Z7 + iF=log?, so that along the conductor FED, F=
and 7 = log.
The total charge per unit width on the strip EP is, by formula (233),
dS^^ (U P  U s ) = ~ (\ogb\ogb) ......... (247).
If P is far removed from E, the value of p is very great, and since
the value of w 2 will be nearly equal to unity at P.
From equation (246),
z =  2 A y^tan 1 ^ u + 2A log (I+u)A log (1  u*),
so that log (1  <) = 2 log (1 + u)  2 ^ tan 1 ^ u  ^ . . .(249),
in which the terms log(l u>\ 'Z/A, are large at P in comparison with the
others. Again, from equation (248), we have
(250),
in which log log (1  u 2 ) are large at P, in comparison with the term
log (an? + b). Combining equations (249) and (250),
log f = log (aw 2 + 6)  2 log (1 + w) + 2 ^/  tan 1 y^ u^~
(251),
in which the terms log ? and  are large at P in comparison with the other
terms. At P we may put u = 1 in all terms except log f and z/A, and obtain
as an approximation
log ?> = log (a + 6)  2 log 2 + 2 / y/tan 1 y/ + J.
18
274 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
The value of z p is of course x p + iy p , or .Z?P. Thus from the equation
just obtained, equation (247) may be thrown into the form
"* = ;: (log fc log 6)
If the lines of force were not disturbed by the bend, we should have
O'fe
f p
Equation (252) shews that I ads is greater than this, by an amount
J E
Let us denote the distances between the plates, namely TrA A/ and T
\r CL
by h and k respectively, so that A / =T. Expression (253) now becomes
V a K
so that the charge on the plate EP is the same as it would be in a parallel
plate condenser in which the breadth of the strip was greater than EP by
I
^
When h = k, this becomes
glog.2) or 279A.
MULTIPLEVALUED POTENTIALS.
330. There are many problems to which mathematical analysis yields
more than one solution, although it may be found that only one of these
solutions will ultimately satisfy the actual data of the problem. In such a
case it will often be of interest to examine what interpretation has to be
given to the rejected solutions.
The problem of determining the potential when the boundary conditions
are given is not of this class, for it has already been shewn ( 186 188)
that, subject to specified boundary conditions, the determination of the
potential is absolutely unique. But it may happen that in searching for the
required solution, we come upon a multiplevalued solution of Laplace's
equation. Only one value can satisfy the boundary conditions, but the
interpretation of the other values is of interest, and in this way we arrive
at the study of multiplevalued potentials.
329332]
Multiplevalued Potentials
275
Conjugate Functions on a Riemann's Surface.
331. An obvious case of a multiplevalued potential arises from the
conjugate function transformation
W=<f>(z) (254),
when <t> is not a single valued function of z. Such cases have already occurred
in 317, 320, 323, etc.
The meaning of the multiple valued potential becomes clear as soon as
we construct a Riemann's surface on which <f> (z) can be represented as a
singlevalued function of position. One point on this Riemann's surface
must now correspond to each value of W , and therefore to each point in the
TFplane. Thus we see that the transformation (254) transforms the complete
TFplane into a complete Riemann's surface. Corresponding to a given value
of z there may be many values of the potential, but these values will refer to
the different sheets of the Riemann's surface. If any region on this surface
is selected, which does not contain any branch points or lines, we can regard
this region as a real twodimensional region, and the corresponding value of
the potential, as given by equation (254), will give the solution of an electro
static problem.
332. To illustrate this by a concrete case, consider the transformation
W=z? (255),
B
a'
ft
JTplane.
^surface.
FIG. 93.
which has already been considered in 317. The Riemann's surface appro
priate for the representation of the twovalued function * may be supposed
to be a surface of two infinite sheets connected along a branch line which
extends over the positive half of the real axis of z.
To regard this surface as a deformation of the W plane, we must suppose
that a slit is cut along the line OB (fig. 93) in the Fplane, and that the
182
276 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
two edges of the slit are taken and turned so that the angle 2?r, which they
originally enclosed in the TFplane, is increased to 4Tr, after which the edges
are again joined together.
The upper sheet of the Riemann's surface so formed will now represent
the upper half of the Tfplane, while the lower sheet will represent the lower
half. Two points P lt P 2 , which represent equal and opposite values of W,
say + TFo, will (by equation (255)) be represented by points at which z has the
same value ; they are accordingly the two points on the upper and lower
sheet respectively for which z has the value W*.
A circular path pqrs surrounding in the TFplane becomes a double
circle on the ^surface, one circle being on the upper sheet and one on the
lower, and the path being continuous since it crosses from one sheet to the
other each time it meets the branchline.
A line aft in the upper half of the TFplane becomes, as we have seen, a
parabola aft on the upper sheet of the ^surface. Similarly a line a.' ft' in the
lower half of the TFplane will become a parabola a' ft' on the lower sheet of
the ^surface. The space outside the parabola aft on the upper sheet of the
^surface transforms into a space in the TFplane bounded by the line aft and
the line at infinity. Consequently the transformation under consideration
gives the solution of the electrostatic problem, in which the field is bounded
only by a conducting parabola and the region at infinity. The same is not
true of the space inside the parabola aft, for this transforms into a space in
the TFplane bounded by both the line aft and the axis AOB. It is now
clear that the transformation has no application to problems in which the
electrostatic field is the space inside a parabola.
In general it will be seen that two points, which are close to one another
on one sheet of the ^surface, but are on opposite sides of a branchline,
will transform into two points which are not adjacent to one another in the
TTplane, and which therefore correspond to different potentials. Conse
quently we cannot solve a problem by a transformation which requires a
branchline to be introduced into that part of the Riemann's surface which
represents the electrostatic field.
Images on a Riemann's Surface.
333. In the theory of electrical images, a system of imaginary charges is
placed in a region which does not form part of the actual electrostatic field.
When a twodimensional problem is solved by a conjugate function trans
formation, the electrostatic field must, as we have seen, be represented by
a region on a single sheet of the corresponding Riemann's surface, and this
region must not be broken by branchlines. The same, however, is not true
of the part of the field in which the imaginary images are placed, for this
332, 333] Multiplevalued Potentials 277
may be represented by a region on one of the other sheets of the Riemann's
surface.
To take the simplest possible illustration, suppose that in the fplane we
have a linecharge e along the line represented by the point P, in front of
f plane z surface
P +e P (upper sheet)
B O
P' e ?' (lower sheet)
FIG. 94.
the uninsulated conducting plane represented by the real axis AB. The
solution, as we know, is obtained by placing a charge e at the point P',
which is the image of P in AOB. The value of the potential (U) is given,
as in 318, by
Let us now transform this solution by means of the transformation
?=** ................................. (256).
The conducting plane AOB transforms into a semiinfinite plane OB, which
may be taken to coincide with the branchline of the Riemann's surface.
The charge e at P becomes a charge at a point P on the upper sheet of the
surface, while the image at P' becomes a charge at a point P' on the lower
sheet. Thus we can replace the semiinfinite conductor OB in the plane
by an image at a point P' on the lower sheet of a Riemann's surface, and we
obtain the field due to a linecharge and a semiinfinite conductor in an
ordinary twodimensional space.
From the transformation used, the potential is found to be given by
77 rr V^Va
U + iV = A log^ =,
V z V a
in which V is the potential, z a is the point (a, a) on the upper sheet, and
z = a is the image on the lower sheet.
In calculating a potential on a Riemann's surface, we must not assume
the potential of a linecharge e at the point (a, a) to be
C2elogE .............................. (257),
where R is the distance from the point (a, a). In fact, this potential would
obviously have an infinity both at the point (a, a) on the upper sheet, and
also at the point (a, a) on the lower sheet, and would be the potential of
two linecharges, one at the point (a, a) on each sheet.
278 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vin
The appropriate potentialfunction for a single charge can easily be
found.
As in the problem just discussed, it is clear that the potential due to the
single linecharge at (a, a) on the upper sheet is the value of U given by
U+iV=C + A
= C + A
= C+A log (Vr eos^r Va cos ~) +i ( Vr sin \/a sin ) ,
(\ 2 Z/ \ L 2/)
so that
U = C + \A log j( Vr cos  Va cos ~ ) + ( Vr sin  Vasin r
(V ^ J \ A A
= (7 + \A log {r  2 Var cos \ (6  a) + a],
and if this is to be the potential due to a linecharge e, it is clear, on
examining the value of U near the point (a, a), that the value of A must be
2e. Thus the potential function must be
C e log {r 2 Var cos ^ (6 a) + a) (258),
instead of that given by expression (257), namely,
C  e log {r 2  2ar cos (0  a) + a?} (259).
It will be noticed that both expressions are singlevalued for given values
of (r, 6), but that for a given value of z, expression (258) has two values,
corresponding to two values of 6 differing by 27T, while expression (259) has
only one value. Or, to state the same thing in other words, the expression
(259) is periodic in 6 with a period Zir, while expression (258) is periodic
with a period 4>7r.
Potential in a Riemanns Space.
334. Sommerfeld* has extended these ideas so as to provide the solution
of problems in threedimensional space.
His method rests on the determination of a multiplevalued potential
function, the function being capable of representation as a singlevalued
function of position in a " Riemann's space," this space being an imaginary
space which bears the same relation to real threedimensional space as a
Riemann's surface bears to a plane.
335. The best introduction to this method will be found in a study of
the simplest possible example, and this will be obtained by considering the
threedimensional problem analogous to the twodimensional problem already
discussed in 333.
* " Ueber verzweigte Potentiale im Kaum," Proc. Lond. Math. Soc. 28, p. 395, and 30,
p. 161.
333335] Multiplevalued Potentials 279
We suppose that we have a single pointcharge in the presence of an
uninsulated conducting semiinfinite plane bounded by a straight edge. Let
us take cylindrical coordinates r, 0, z, taking the edge of the plane to be
r = 0, the plane itself to be = 0, and the plane through the charge at right
angles to the edge of the conductor to be z 0. Let the coordinates of the
pointcharge be a, a, 0.
The Riemann's space is to be the exact analogue of the Riernann's
surface described in 332. That is to say, it is to be such that one revolu
tion round the line r = takes us from one " sheet " to the other of the
space, while two revolutions bring us back to the startingpoint. Thus, for
a function to be a singlevalued function of position in this space, it must be
a periodic function of 6 of period 4Tr.
Let us denote by f(r, 0, z, a, a, 0) a function of r, 0, and z which is to
satisfy the following conditions :
(i) it must be a solution of Laplace's equation ;
(ii) it must be a continuous and singlevalued function of position in
the Riemann's space ;
(iii) it must have one and only one infinity, this being at the point
a, a, on the first "sheet" of the space, and the function
approximating near the point to the function p , where R is
the distance from this point;
(iv) it must vanish when r = oo .
It can be shewn, by a method exactly similar to that used in 186, that
there can be only one function satisfying these conditions. Hence the func
tion /(r, 0, z, a, a, 0) can be uniquely determined, and when found it will be
the potential in the Riemann's space of a pointcharge of unit strength at the
point a, a, 0.
Consider now the function
f(r, 6, z, a, a, 0)/(r, 0, z, a, a, 0) (260),
which is of course the potential of equal and opposite pointcharges at the
point a, a, 0, and at its image in the plane 6 = 0, namely, the point
a, a, 0.
This function, by conditions (i) and (iv), satisfies Laplace's equation and
vanishes at infinity. On the first sheet of the surface, on which a varies
from to 2?r (or from 4?r to 6?r, etc.), it has only one infinity, namely, at
a, a, 0, at which it assumes the value ~.
i
From the conditions which it satisfies, the function /(r, 6, z, a, a, 0) must
clearly involve 6 and a only through 6 a, and must moreover be an even
function of 6 a. It follows that, when = 0, expression (260) vanishes.
280 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vni
Again, since the function / is periodic in 6 with a period 2?r, it follows
that, when 6 = 2?r, expression (260) may be written in. the form
f(r, 27T, z t a, a, 0) f(r,  2?r, z, a,  a, 0),
and this clearly vanishes. Thus expression (260) vanishes when 6 = and
when 6 = 2?r. That is to say, it vanishes on both sides of the semiinfinite
conducting plane.
It is now clear that expression (260) satisfies all the conditions which
have to be satisfied by the potential. The problem is accordingly reduced
to that of the determination of the function f(r, 6, z, a, a, 0).
336. Let us write
then the distance R from r, 0, z to a, a, is given by
fi? ^2 _ 2ar cos (6 a) + a? + z*
= 2ar {cos i (p  p)  cos (0 a)} + z*.
Take new functions R and/(w) given by
R' 2 = 2ar (cos i (p  p)  cos (d  u)} + z 2 ,
The function /(w) has infinities when u = a, a + 2w, a 4Tr. ..., its residue
being unity at each infinity. Also, when u a, the value of R becomes R.
Hence the integral
f(u)du (261),
where the integral is taken round any closed contour in the wplane which
surrounds the value u = a, but no other of the infinities of f(u), will have as
its value 2i7r x = . We accordingly have
The integral just found gives a form for the potential function in ordinary
space which, as we shall now see, can easily be modified so as to give the
potential function in the Riemann's space which we are now considering.
We notice first that ^, , regarded as a function of r, 0, and z, is a solution
of Laplace's equation, whatever value u may have. Hence the integral (261)
will be a solution of Laplace's equation for all values of f(u), for each term
of the integrand will satisfy the equation separately.
If we take
335337] Multiplevalued Potentials 281
we see that the infinities of f(u) occur when u = a, a + 4?r, a + 8?r, etc., and
the residue at each is unity. Hence, if we take the integral round one
infinity only, say u = a, the value of
will become identical with ^ at the point at which R' 0. Moreover,
expression (263) is, as we have seen, a solution of Laplace's equation : it
is seen on inspection to be a singlevalued function of position on the
Riemann's surface, and to be periodic in with period 4?r. Hence it is the
potentialfunction of which we are in search. Thus
du
The details of the integration can be found in Sommerfeld's paper. The
value of the integral is found to be
where r = cos J (0 a), cr = cos (p p).
337. Other systems of coordinates can be treated in the same way, and
the construction of other Riemann's spaces can be made to give the solutions
of other problems. The details of these will be found in the papers to which
reference has already been made.
REFERENCES.
On the Theory of Images and Inversion :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. xi.
THOMSON AND TAIT. Natural Philosophy. Vol. n. 510 et seq.
THOMSON, Sir W. (Lord KELVIN). Papers on Electrostatics and Magnetism.
On the Mathematical Theory of Spherical and Zonal Harmonics :
FERRERS. Spherical Harmonics. (Macmillan & Co., 1877.)
TODHUNTER. The Functions of Laplace, Lame', and Bessel. (Macmillan & Co.,
1875.)
HEINE. Theorie der Kugelfunctionen. (Berlin, Reimer, 1878.)
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. ix.
THOMSON AND TAIT. Natural Philosophy. Chap. i. Appendix B.
BYERLY. Fourier's Series and Spherical Harmonics. (Ginn & Co., Boston, 1893.)
On confocal coordinates, and ellipsoidal and spheroidal harmonics :
TODHUNTER. The Functions of Laplace, Lame, and Bessel.
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. x.
LAMB. Hydrodynamics. Chap. v.
BYERLY. Fourier's Series and Spherical Harmonics.
282 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vni
On Conjugate Functions and Conformal Kepresentation :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. xn.
LAMB. Hydrodynamics. (Camb. Univ. Press, 1895 and 1906.) Chap. iv.
J. J. THOMSON. Recent Researches in Electricity and Magnetism. (Clarendon
Press, 1893.) Chap. in.
WEBSTER. Electricity and Magnetism. Introduction, Chap. iv.
EXAMPLES.
1. An infinite conducting plane at zero potential is under the influence of a charge of
electricity at a point 0. Shew that the charge on any area of the plane is proportional to
the angle it subtends at 0.
2. A charged particle is placed in the space between two uninsulated planes which
intersect at right angles. Sketch the sections of the equipotentials made by an imaginary
plane through the charged particle, at right angles to the planes.
3. In question 2, let the particle have a charge e, and be equidistant from the planes.
Shew that the total charge on a strip, of which one edge is the line of intersection of the
planes, and of which the width is equal to the distance of the particle from this line of
intersection, is \e.
4. In question 3, the strip is insulated from the remainder of the planes, these being
still to earth, and the particle is removed. Find the potential at the point formerly
occupied by the particle, produced by raising the strip to potential V.
5. If two infinite plane uninsulated conductors meet at an angle of 60, and there is a
charge e at a point equidistant from each, and distant r from the line of intersection, find
the electrification at any point of the planes. Shew that at a point in a principal plane
through the charged point at a distance r^/3 from the line of intersection, the surface
density is
6. Two small pith balls, each of mass m, are connected by a light insulating rod.
The rod is supported by parallel threads, and hangs in a horizontal position in front of an
infinite vertical plane at potential zero. If the balls when charged with e units of
electricity are at a distance a from the plate, equal to half the length of the rod, shew
that the inclination 6 of the strings to the vertical is given by
tan0 =
7. What is the least positive charge that must be given to a spherical conductor,
insulated and influenced by an external pointcharge e at distance r from its centre, in
order that the surface density may be everywhere positive ?
8. An uninsulated conducting sphere is under the influence of an external electric
charge; find the ratio in which the induced charge is divided between the part of its
surface in direct view of the external charge and the remaining part.
9. A pointcharge e is brought near to a spherical conductor of radius a having a
charge E. Shew that the particle will be repelled by the sphere, unless its distance from
the nearest point of its surface is less than \a \J p^ approximately.
Examples 283
10. A hollow conductor has the form of a quarter of a sphere bounded by two
perpendicular diametral planes. Find the image of a charge placed at any point
inside.
11. A conducting surface consists of two infinite planes which meet at right angles,
and a quarter of a sphere of radius a fitted into the right angle. If the conductor is at zero
potential, and a pointcharge e is symmetrically placed with regard to the planes and the
spherical surface at a great distance / from the centre, shew that the charge induced on
the spherical portion is approximately 5ea 3 /rrf 3 .
12. A pointcharge is placed in front of an infinite slab of dielectric, bounded by a
plane face. The angle between a line of force in the dielectric and the normal to the face
of the slab is a ; the angle between the same two lines in the immediate neighbourhood of
the charge is /3. Prove that a, /3 are connected by the relation
27
13. An electrified particle is placed in front of an infinitely thick plate of dielectric.
Shew that the particle is urged towards the plate by a force
Kl
where d is the distance of the point from the plate.
14. Two dielectrics of inductive capacities KI and < 2 are separated by an infinite plane
face. Charges e l5 e 2 are placed at points on a line at right angles to the plane, each at a
distance a from the plane. Find the forces on the two charges, and explain why they are
unequal.
15. Two conductors of capacities c l5 c 2 in air are on the same normal to the plane
boundary between two dielectrics KJ, * 2 , a ^ great distances a, b from the boundary. They
are connected by a thin wire and charged. Prove that the charge is distributed between
them approximately in the ratio
16. A thin plane conducting lamina of any shape and size is under the influence of a
fixed electrical distribution on one side of it. If cr\ be the density of the induced charge
at a point P on the side of the lamina facing the fixed distribution, and o 2 that at the
corresponding point on the other side, prove that a\ 02=00, where OQ is the density at P
of the distribution induced on an infinite plane conductor coinciding with the lamina.
17. An infinite plate with a hemispherical boss of radius a is at zero potential under
the influence of a pointcharge e on the axis of the boss distant /from the plate. Find the
surface density at any point of the plate, and shew that the charge is attracted towards
the plate with a force
18. A conductor is formed by the outer surfaces of two equal spheres, the angle
between their radii at a point of intersection being 2?r/3. Shew that the capacity of the
conductor so formed is
5\/34
where a is the radius of either sphere.
284 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vni
19. Within a spherical hollow in a conductor connected to earth, equal pointcharges
e are placed at equal distances / from the centre, on the same diameter. Shew that each
is acted on by a force equal to
1
20. A hollow sphere of sulphur (of inductive capacity 3) whose inner radius is half its
outer is introduced into a uniform field of electric force. Prove that the intensity of the
field in the hollow will be less than that of the original field in the ratio 27 : 34.
21. A conducting spherical shell of radius a is placed, insulated and without charge,
in a uniform field of electric force of intensity F. Shew that if the sphere be cut into two
hemispheres by a plane perpendicular to the field, these hemispheres tend to separate and
require forces equal to T 9 g 2 ^ 2 to keep them together.
22. An uncharged insulated conductor formed of two equal spheres of radius a
cutting one another at right angles, is placed in a uniform field of force of intensity F,
with the line joining the centres parallel to the lines of force. Prove that the charges
induced on the two spheres are *gFa z and 
23. A conducting plane has a hemispherical boss of radius a, and at a distance / from
the centre of the boss and along its axis there is a pointcharge e. If the plane and the
boss be kept at zero potential, prove that the charge induced on the boss is
24. A conductor is bounded by the larger portions of two equal spheres of radius a
cutting at an angle JTT, and of a third sphere of radius c cutting the two former or
thogonally. Shew that the capacity of the conductor is
25. Two infinite plane uninsulated conductors meet at an angle 60, and there is a
charge e at a point equidistant from each, and distant r from the line of intersection : find
the electrification at any point of the planes. Shew that at a point in a principal plane
through the charged point at a distance r \^3 from the line of intersection, the surface
density is
471r 2 \4 7
26. If a particle charged with a quantity e of electricity be placed at the middle point
of the line joining the centres of two equal spherical conductors kept at zero potential,
shew that the charge induced on each sphere is
 2em (1  m + m?  3w 3 +4m 4 ),
neglecting higher powers of m, which is the ratio of the radius to the distance between the
centres of the spheres.
27. Two insulating conducting spheres of radii a, b, the distance c of whose centres
is large compared with a and 6, have charges E , E 2 respectively. Shew that the potential
energy is approximately
Examples 285
28. Shew that the force between two insulated spherical conductors of radius a placed
in an electric field of uniform intensity F perpendicular to their line of centres is
c being the distance between their centres.
29. Two uncharged insulated spheres, radii a, 6, are placed in a uniform field of force
so that their line of centres is parallel to the lines of force, the distance c between their
centres being great compared with a and b. Prove that the surface density at the point
at which the line of centres cuts the first sphere (a) is approximately
F( 6b 3 15a6 3 28 2 6 3 57a 3 6 3 "1
30. A conducting sphere of radius a is embedded in a dielectric (K] whose outer
boundary is a concentric sphere of radius 2a. Shew that if the system be placed in
a uniform field of force F t equal quantities of positive and negative electricity are
separated of amount
5A+7"
31. A sphere of glass of radius a is held in air with its centre at a distance c from a.
point at which there is a positive charge e. Prove that the resultant attraction is
where /3 = (A'
32. A conducting spherical shell of radius a is placed, insulated and without charge,.
in a uniform field of force of intensity F. Shew that if the sphere be cut into two
hemispheres by a plane perpendicular to the field, a force fya?F 2 is required to prevent
the hemispheres from separating.
33. A spherical shell, of radii a, b and inductive capacity K, is placed in a uniform
field of force F. Shew that the force inside the shell is uniform and equal to
_ 9KF _
9 A' 2 (K 1) 2 (6 3 /a 3 l) '
34. The surface of a conductor being one of revolution whose equation is
4 + !_l
rr' 12'
where r, r' are the distances of any point from two fixed points at distance 8 apart, find
the electric density at either vertex when the conductor has a given charge.
35. The curve
1 9a ( a\x ax 1 _ 1
16 x+a*+* xa*+* a
when rotated round the axis of x generates a single closed surface, which is made the
bounding surface of a conductor. Shew that its capacity will be a, and that the surface
density at the end of the axis will be e/3?ra 2 , where e is the total charge.
36. Two equal spheres each of radius a are in contact. Shew that the capacity of the
conductor so formed is 2a log e 2.
286 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
37. Two spheres of radii a, b are in contact, a being large compared with b. Shew
that if the conductor so formed is raised to potential F, the charges on the two spheres are
/ 7T 2 fi 2
Va(\"
38. A conducting sphere of radius a is in contact with an infinite conducting plane.
Shew that if a unit pointcharge be placed beyond the sphere and on the diameter through
the point of contact at distance c from that point, the charges induced on the plane and
sphere are
TTOL TTd , 7TO, . TTd
 cot and cot  1 .
39. Prove that if the centres of two equal uninsulated spherical conductors of radius
a be at a distance 2c apart, the charge induced on each by a unit charge at a point
midway between them is
where c=acosha.
40. Shew that the capacity of a spherical conductor of radius a, with its centre at a
distance c from an infinite conducting plane, is
00
a sinh a 2J cosech wa,
where c=acosha.
41. An insulated conducting sphere of radius a is placed midway between two
parallel infinite uninsulated planes at a great distance 2c apart. Neglecting (  ) , shew
that the capacity of the sphere is approximately
a jl+log2J.
42. Two spheres of radii r 1} r 2 , touch each other, and their capacities in this position
are c l5 c 2 . Shew that
{oo "1
/ 2 I^
where /=
43. A conducting sphere of radius a is placed in air, with its centre at a distance c
from the plane face of an infinite dielectric. Shew that its capacity is
a sinh a 5) ( jf y ) cosech na,
where a=c/a.
44. A pointcharge e is placed between two parallel uninsulated infinite conducting
planes, at distances a and b from them respectively. Shew that the potential at a point
between the planes which is at a distance z from the charge and is on the line through the
charge perpendicular to the planes is
\ r'( 2a z
) \2a + 2b
Examples 287
45. A spherical conductor of radius a is surrounded by a uniform dielectric K, which
is bounded by a sphere of radius b having its centre at a small distance y from the centre
of the conductor. Prove that if the potential of the conductor is F, and there are no
other conductors in the field, the surface density at a point where the radius makes an
angle B with the line of centres is
KVb ( 6(Kl)ya?cos0 1
Ia + b + 2 (#
46. A shell of glass of inductive capacity K, which is bounded by concentric spherical
surfaces of radii a, b (a < 6), surrounds an electrified particle with charge E which is at a
point Q at a small distance c from 0, the centre of the spheres. Shew that the potential
at a point P outside the shell at a distance r from Q is approximately
E 2Ec(b*a s )(Kl) z cos 6
where 6 is the angle which QP makes with OQ produced.
47. If the centres of the two shells of a spherical condenser be separated by a small
distance d, prove that the capacity is approximately
ab
48. A condenser is formed of two spherical conducting sheets, one of radius b
surrounding the other of radius a. The distance between the centres is c, this being so
small that (c/a) 2 may be neglected. The surface densities on the inner conductor at the
extremities of the axis of symmetry of the instrument are <TI, o 2 , and the mean surface
density over the inner conductor is v. Prove that
49. The equation of the surface of a conductor is r = a (l+P n ) where e is very small,
and the conductor is placed in a uniform field of force F parallel to the axis of harmonics.
Shew that the surface density of the induced charge at any point is greater than it would
be if the surface were perfectly spherical, by the amount
47r(2?i + l) l
50. A conductor at potential V whose surface is of the form r=a(l+cP n ) is sur
rounded by a dielectric (K] whose boundary is the surface r=b (I+r)P n ), and outside this
the dielectric is air. Shew that the potential in the air at a distance r from the origin is
KabV PI (2n + I)a n b 2n + 1 +(KI}r,b n W n + l +(n+I}a* n + l } P n
(K\}a+b_r (1+n+nK) b*" + l +(Kl) (n+l) d* n + l
where squares and higher powers of e and 77 are neglected.
51. The surface of a conductor is nearly spherical, its equation being
where e is small. Shew that if the conductor is uninsulated, the charge induced on
it by a unit charge at a distance / from the origin and of angular coordinates 0, is
approximately
288 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
52. A uniform circular wire of radius a charged with electricity of line density e
surrounds an insulated concentric spherical condenser of radius c ; prove that the
electrical density at any point of the surface of the conductor is
53. A dielectric sphere is surrounded by a thin circular wire of larger radius 6
carrying a charge E. Prove that the potential within the sphere is
rY
54. If within a conductor formed by a cone of semivertical angle cos" 1 PQ and two
spherical surfaces r=a, r=6 with centres at the vertex of the cone, a charge q on the axis
at distance / from the vertex gives potential F, and if we write
A.
the summation with respect to m extending to all positive integers, and that with respect
to n to all numbers integral or fractional for which P n (^ ) = 0, determine A mn . Effecting
the summation with respect to m, shew that when r < /,
and that when r > r',
55. A spherical shell of radius a with a little hole in it is freely electrified to potential
F. Prove that the charge on its inner surface is less than VSl&ira, where S is the area of
the hole.
56. A thin spherical conducting shell from which any portions have been removed is
freely electrified. Prove that the difference of densities inside and outside at any point is
constant.
57. Electricity is induced on an uninsulated spherical conductor of radius a, by a
uniform surface distribution, density o, over an external concentric nonconducting
spherical segment of radius c. Prove that the surface density at the point A of the
conductor at the nearer end of the axis of the segment is
c(o4a)/ AB\
a* \ ADJ '
where B is the point of the segment on its axis, and D is any point on its edge.
58. Two conducting discs of radii a, a', are fixed at right angles to the line which
joins their centres, the length of this line being r, large compared with a. If the first
have potential F and the second is uninsulated, prove that the charge on the first is
59. A spherical conductor of diameter a is kept at zero potential in the presence of a.
fine uniform wire, in the form of a circle of radius c in a tangent plane to the sphere with
Examples 289
its centre at the point of contact, which has a charge E of electricity ; prove that the
electrical density induced on the sphere at a point whose direction from the centre of the
ring makes an angle ^ with the normal to the plane is
r(a 2 + c 2 sec 2 \ls  2ac tan <ds cos 0) ~ * dtf.
60. Prove that the capacity of a hemispherical shell of radius a is
/! , 1\
a U+~)
\* T/
61. Prove that the capacity of an elliptic plate of small eccentricity e and area A is
approximately
V \n)n \ I *M + M)'
62. A circular disc of radius a is under the influence of a charge q at a point in its
plane at distance b from the centre of the disc. Shew that the density of the induced
distribution at a point on the disc is
q /W^tf
I^B? V 2 r 2 '
where r, R are the distances of the point from the centre of the disc and the charge.
63. An ellipsoidal conductor differs but little from a sphere. Its volume is equal to
that of a sphere of radius r, its axes are 2r(l+a), 2r (1 + /3), 2r(l+y). Shew that neg
lecting cubes of a, /3, y, its capacity is
64. A prolate conducting spheroid, semiaxes a, 6, has a charge E of electricity. Shew
that repulsion between the two halves into which it is divided by its diametral plane is
Determine the value of the force in the case of a sphere.
65. One face of a condenser is a circular plate of radius a : the other is a segment of
a sphere of radius R, R being so large that the plate is almost flat. Shew that the
capacity is \KR log tjto where ^, t are the thickness of dielectric at the middle and edge
of the condenser. Determine also the distribution of the charge.
66. A thin circular disc of radius a is electrified with charge E and surrounded by a
conductor with charge E^ placed so that the edge of the disc is the locus of the focus S of
the generating ellipse. Shew that the energy of the system is
B being an extremity of the polar axis of the spheroid, and C the centre.
67. If the two surfaces of a condenser are concentric and coaxial oblate spheroids of
small ellipticities and t' and polar axes 2c and 2c', prove that the capacity is
neglecting squares of the ellipticities ; and find the distribution of electricity on each
surface to the same order of approximation.
19
290 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vm
68. An accumulator is formed of two confocal prolate spheroids, and the specific
inductive capacity of the dielectric is A7/csr, where tzr is the distance of any point from the
axis. Prove that the capacity of the accumulator is
irKl/\Og
where a, b and a\ , 6 : are the semiaxes of the generating ellipses.
69. A thin spherical bowl is formed by the portion of the sphere x i +y i +z L = cz
bounded by and lying within the cone 2 + p = ^ > and is put in connection with the earth
by a fine wire. is the origin, and (7, diametrically opposite to 0, is the vertex of the
bowl ; Q is any point on the rirn, and P is any point on the great circle arc CQ. Shew
that the surface density induced at P by a charge E placed at is
EC CQ
r . . dd
where
70. Three long thin wires, equally electrified, are placed parallel to each other so that
they are cut by a plane perpendicular to them in the angular points of an equilateral
triangle of side *j3c ; shew that the polar equation of an equipotential curve drawn on the
plane is
r 6 + c 6  2r 3 c 3 cos 30 = constant,
the pole being at the centre of the triangle and the initial line passing through one of the
wires.
71. A flat piece of corrugated metal (y=asinm#) is charged with electricity. Find
the surface density at any point, and shew that it exceeds the average density approxi
mately in the ratio my : 1.
72. A long hollow cylindrical conductor is divided into two parts by a plane through
the axis, and the parts are separated by a small interval. If the two parts are kept at
potentials F x and F 2 , the potential at any point within the cylinder is
Fj + F 2 Fj F 2 _ l 2ar cos
2 TT a*r 2 '
where r is the distance from the axis, and is the angle between the plane joining the
point to the axis and the plane through the axis normal to the plane of separation.
73. Shew that the capacity per unit length of a telegraph wire of radius a at height h
above the surface of the earth, is
74. An electrified line with charge e per unit length is parallel to a circular cylinder,
of radius a and inductive capacity K, the distance of the wire from the centre of the
cylinder being c. Shew that the force on the wire per unit length is
K\
75. A cylindrical conductor of infinite length, whose crosssection is the outer
boundary of three equal orthogonal circles of radius a has a charge e per unit length.
Prove that the electric density at distance r from the axis is
e (3r 2 + a 2 ) (3r 2  a 2  \/6ar) (3r 2  a 2 + >/6ar)
Examples 291
76. If the cylinder r=a+bco$6 be freely charged, shew that in free space the
resultant force varies as
and makes with the line 0=0, an angle
"*"'
where 2 & 2 = 2fo.
77. If <j> + fy=f(x+iy), and the curves for which = constant be closed, shew that
the capacity G of a condenser with boundary surfaces < = $!, = <o is
per unit length, where [^] is the increment of ty on passing once round a 0curve.
78. Using the transformation x + iy = c cot ( 7+^F), shew that the capacity per unit
length of a condenser formed by two right circular cylinders (radii a, 6), one inside the
other, with parallel axes at a distance d apart, is
/0? + b2cP\
1/2 cosh 1 Vr )
' \ 26 )
79. A plane infinite electric grating is made of equal and equidistant parallel thin
metal plates, the distance between their successive central lines being TT, and the breadth
of each plate 2sin~M =J. Shew that when the grating is electrified to constant
potential, the potential and charge functions F, U in the surrounding space are given
by the equation
sin ( U+ iV} = K sin (x + iy\
Deduce that, when the grating is to earth and is placed in a uniform field of force of unit
intensity at right angles to its plane, the charge and potential functions of the portion of
the field which penetrates through the grating are expressed by
and expand the potential in the latter problem in a Fourier Series.
80. A cylinder whose crosssection is one branch of a rectangular hyperbola is
maintained at zero potential under the influence of a linecharge parallel to its axis
and on the concave side. Prove that the image consists of three such line charges, and
hence find the density of the induced distribution.
81. A cylindrical space is bounded by two coaxial and confocal parabolic cylinders,
whose latera recta are 4a and 46, and a uniformly electrified line which is parallel to the
generators of the cylinder intersects the axes which pass through the foci in point distant
c from them (>c>6). Shew that the potential throughout the space is
J Trr* cos  TT
) COSh r T COS
.. I *6*
Al 8, ; T
P*!^
*6* f
IT (V* sin +c* <**&*'
V *
irr cos 
JCOSh r r + COS '
( a i 6 i a^6* )
where r, 6 are polar coordinates of a section, the focus being the pole. Determine A in
terms of the electrification per unit length of the line.
192
292 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [OH. vm
82. An infinitely long elliptic cylinder of inductive capacity K, given by = a where
.2?+i/y=ccosh(f irj\ is in a uniform field P parallel to the major axis of any section.
Shew that the potential at any point inside the cylinder is
1+cotha
Px
A+COtha*
83. Two insulated uncharged circular cylinders outside each other, given by 77 = a and
rj= /3 where #+%r = ctan (H'7), are placed in a uniform field of force of potential Fx.
Shew that the potential due to the distribution on the cylinders is
, > Nm e^~ a) sinhMfl + fl'fr+fl sinhrca .
2Fc > (  ) n  rf sin fit.
V
84. Two circular cylinders outside each other, given by 17 = and 77= /3 where
x + iyc tan J ( + 1*17),
are put to earth under the influence of a linecharge E on the line #=0, y = 0. Shew that
the potential of the induced charge outside the cylinders is
(a i?)
 L cos ^+ constant,
the summation being taken for all odd positive integral values of n.
85. The crosssections of two infinitely long metallic cylinders are the curves
where b>a>c. If they are kept at potentials Vi and F 2 respectively, the intervening
space being filled with air, prove that the surface densities per unit length of the
electricity on the opposed surfaces are
, , ~ , j and 7
4rra 2 log 47r6 2 log
respectively.
86. What problems are solved by the transformation
d
a t
where a>l ?
87. What problem in Electrostatics is solved by the transformation
x+iy = cn(([> + fy\
where v/^ is taken as the potential function, <f> being the function conjugate to it ?
88. One half of a hyperbolic cylinder is given by rj= q lt where 1 171 <s, and , rj are
given in terms of the Cartesian coordinates #, y of a principal section by the trans
formation
x + iy = c cosh ( + irj).
The halfcylinder is uninsulated and under the influence of a charge of density E per unit
length placed along the line of internal foci. Prove that the surface density at any point
of the cylinder is
cosh ^ Vcosh2cos2j7!.
Examples 293
89. Verify that, if r, s be real positive constants, z = x+iy, a = pe il *,  =  + , the
C T S
field of force outside the conductors x 2 +y 2 + 2sx = 0, x 2 +y 2 2rx=Q due to a doublet at
the point z=a, outside both the circles, of strength p. and inclination a to the axis, is
given by putting
U+iV^ la* (~W cot c* (} e* cot c, (1  1
P 2 I \z aJ V ao
where s= is the inverse point to z a with regard to either of the circles.
90. A very thin indefinitely great conducting plane is bounded by a straight edge of
indefinite length, and is connected with the earth. A unit charge is placed at a point P.
Prove that the potential at any point Q due to the charge at P and the electricity induced
on the conducting plane is
where P' is the image of P in the plane, the cylindrical coordinates of. Q and P are
(r, (p, z), (/, <', z'\ the straight edge is the axis of 2, the angles 0, <' lie between and 27r,
<p = on the conductor,
4r/ J '
and those values of the inverse functions are taken which lie between TT and TT.
91. A semiinfinite conducting plane is at zero potential under the influence of an
electric charge q at a point Q outside it. Shew that the potential at any point P is
given by
J
7T
q F, . i /coshin + cosi(00i)
* _ {cosh 77  cos (0  00} Han 1 . / , f ' 4r7i ^
V2rr! L V cosh .7  cos J (0  00
where r, 6, z are the cylindrical coordinates of the point P, (r lt l5 0) of the point Q, =
is the equation of the conducting plane, and
2rri cosh 77 = r 2 + r^+^s 2 .
Hence obtain the potential at any point due to a spherical bowl at constant potential,
and shew that the capacity of the bowl is
sma)
where a is the radius of the aperture, and a is the angle subtended by this radius at the
centre of the sphere of which the bowl is a part.
92. A thin circular conducting disc is connected to earth and is under the influence
of a charge q of electricity at an external point P. The position of any point Q is denoted
by the peripolar coordinates p, 0, <, where p is the logarithm of the ratio of the distances
from Q to the two points R, S in which a plane QRS through the axis of the disc cuts its
rim, is the angle RQS, and is the angle the plane QRS makes with a fixed plane
through the axis of the disc, the coordinate having values between  TT and + TT, and
changing from + TT to  TT in passing through the disc. Prove or verify that the potential
of the charge induced on the disc at any point Q (p, 0, <) is
= sin" 1 (cos (0  ) sech a}  ^L  +  sin" 1 {  cos (0 + ^o) sech \
A 7T _J tyf 1 _2 IT
294 Methods for the Solution of Special Problems [CH. vni
where p , , < are the coordinates of P, being positive, the point P' is the optical image
of P in the disc, a is given by the equation
cos a = cosh p cosh p  sinh p sinh p cos (<  < ),
and the smallest values of the inverse functions are to be taken.
Prove that the total charge on the disc is qdo/rr.
Explain how to adapt the formula for the potential to the case in which the circular
disc is replaced by a spherical bowl with the same rim.
93. Shew that the potential at any point P of a circular bowl, electrified to potential
C is
AB OA . , (OP AB \}
+ OB Sm (OA ' AP+BP)} '
where is the centre of the bowl, and A, B are the points in which a plane through P
and the axis of the bowl cuts the circular rim.
Find the density of electricity at a point on either side of the bowl and shew that the
capacity is
(a+sina),
7T
where a is the radius of the sphere, and 2a is the angle subtended at the centre.
94. Two spheres are charged to potentials F and V l . The ratio of the distances of
any point from the two limiting points of the spheres being denoted by <P and the angle
between them by , prove that the potential at the point , rj is
where rj = a, 77 =  /3 are the equations of the spheres. Hence find the charge on either
sphere.
CHAPTER IX.
STEADY CURRENTS IN LINEAR CONDUCTORS.
PHYSICAL PRINCIPLES.
338. IF two conductors charged with electricity to different potentials
are connected by a conducting wire, we know that a flow of electricity will
take place along the wire. This flow will tend to equalise the potentials of
the two conductors, and when these potentials become equal the flow of
electricity will cease. If we had some means by which the charges on the
conductors could be replenished as quickly as they were carried away by
conduction through the wire, then the current would never cease. The
conductors would remain permanently at different potentials, and there
would be a steady flow of electricity from one to the other. Means are
known by which two conductors can be kept permanently at different poten
tials, so that a steady flow of electricity takes place through any conductor
or conductors joining them. We accordingly have to discuss the mathe
matical theory of such currents of electricity.
We shall begin by the consideration of the flow of electricity in linear
conductors, by a linear conductor being meant one which has a definite
crosssection at every point. The commonest instance of a linear conductor
is a wire.
339. DEFINITION. The strength of a current at any point in a wire or
other linear conductor, is measured by the number of units of electricity which
flow across any crosssection of the conductor per unit time.
If the units of electricity are measured in Electrostatic Units, then the
current also will be measured in Electrostatic Units. These, however, as will
be explained later, are not the units in which currents are usually measured
in practice.
Let P, Q be two crosssections of a linear conductor in which a steady
current is flowing, and let us suppose that no other conductors touch this
conductor between P and Q. Then, since the current is, by hypothesis,
steady, there must be no accumulation of electricity in the region of the
296 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
conductor between P and Q. Hence the rate of flow into the section of the
conductor across P must be exactly equal to the rate of flow out of this
section across Q. Or, the currents at P and Q must be equal. Hence we
speak of the current in a conductor, rather than of the current at a point in
a conductor. For, as we pass along a conductor, the current cannot change
except at points at which the conductor is touched by other conductors.
Ohms Law.
340. In a linear conductor in which a current is flowing, we have
electricity in motion at every point, and hence must have a continuous
variation in potential as we pass along the conductor. This is not in oppo
sition to the result previously obtained in Electrostatics, for in the previous
analysis it had to be assumed that the electricity was at rest. In the present
instance, the electricity is not at rest, being in fact kept in motion by the
difference of potential under discussion.
The analogy between potential and height of water will perhaps help. A lake in
which the water is at rest is analogous to a conductor in which electricity is in equi
librium. The theorem that the potential is constant over a conductor in which electricity
is in equilibrium, is analogous to the hydrostatic theorem that the surface of still water
must all be at the same level. A conductor through which a current of electricity is
flowing finds its analogue in a stream of running water. Here the level is not the same at
all points of the river it is the difference of level which causes the water to flow. The
water will flow more rapidly in a river in which the gradient is large than in one in
which it is small. The electrical analogy to this is expressed by Ohm's Law.
OHM'S LAW. The difference of potential between any two points of a wire
or other linear conductor in which a current is flowing, stands to the current
flowing through the conductor in a constant ratio, which is called the resistance
between the two points.
It is here assumed that there is no junction with other conductors
between these two points, so that the current through the conductor is a
definite quantity.
341. Thus if C is the current flowing between two points A, B at which
the potentials are VA, YB, we have
V A V B = CR,
where R is the resistance between the points A and B. Very delicate ex
periments have failed to detect any variation in the ratio
(fall of potential)/(current),
as the current is varied, and this justifies us in speaking of the resistance as
a definite quantity associated with the conductor. The resistance depends
naturally on the positions of the two points by which the current enters and
leaves the conductor, but when once these two points are fixed the resistance
is independent of the amount of carrent.
339342]
Physical Principles
297
In general, however, the resistance of a conductor varies with the temperature, and
for some substances, of which selenium is a notable example, it varies with the amount
of light falling on the conductor. In gases the resistance varies so much with all the
physical conditions, including the amount of current passing, that Ohm's Law can
hardly be said to have any meaning. But in gases, a current is conveyed by a process
different in many respects from that which goes on in a conductor of the usual kind.
The Voltaic Cell.
342. The simplest arrangement by which a steady flow of electricity can
be produced is that known as a Voltaic Cell. This is represented diagram 
matically in Fig. 95. A voltaic cell consists essentially of two conductors
FIG. 95.
A, B of different materials, placed in a liquid which acts chemically on at
least one of them. On establishing electrical contact between the two ends
of the conductors which are out of the liquid, it is found that a continuous
current flows round the circuit which is formed by the two conductors and
the liquid, the energy which is required to maintain the current being
derived from chemical action in the cell.
To explain the action of the cell, it will be necessary to touch on a subject
of which a full account would be out of place in the present book. As an
experimental fact it is found that two conductors of dissimilar material, when
placed in contact have different potentials when there is no flow of elec
tricity from one to the other*, although of course the potential over the
whole of either conductor must be constant. In the light of this experi
mental fact, let us consider the conditions prevailing in the voltaic cell before
the two ends a, b of the conductors are joined.
So long as the two conductors A, B and the liquid G do not form a closed
circuit, there can be no flow of electricity. Thus there is electric equilibrium,
* For a long time there has been a divergence of opinion as to whether this difference of
potential is not due to the chemical change at the surfaces of the conductors, and therefore
dependent on the presence of a layer of air or other third substance between the conductors. It
seems now to be almost certain that this is the case, but the question is not one of vital
importance as regards the mathematical theory of electric currents.
298 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
and the three conductors have definite potentials V A , V B , V c . The differ
ence of potential between the two "terminals" a, b is V A V B , but the
peculiarity of the voltaic cell is that this difference of potential is not equal
to the difference of potential between the two conductors when they are
placed in contact and are in electrical equilibrium without the presence of
the liquid C. Thus on electrically joining the points a, b in the voltaic cell
electrical equilibrium is an impossibility, and a current is established in the
circuit which will continue until the physical conditions become changed or
the supply of chemical energy is exhausted.
Electromotive Force.
343. Let A, B, G be any three conductors arranged so as to form a
closed circuit. Let V AB be the contact difference of potential between A and
B when there is electric equilibrium, and let V BC) V CA have similar meanings.
If the three substances can be placed in a closed circuit without any
current flowing, then we can have equilibrium in which the three conductors
will have potentials V A , V B , V c , such that
Vd~'B = 'AB : > VB~~'C'BC'I VC~*A = V CA .
Thus we must have
V AB + V BC + V CA = Q ........................ (264),
a result known as Voltas Law.
If, however, the three conductors form a voltaic cell, the expression on the
lefthand of the above equation does not vanish, and its value is called the
electromotive force of the cell. Denoting the electromotive force by E, we
have
We accordingly have the following definition :
DEFINITION. The Electromotive Force of a cell is the algebraic sum of the
discontinuities of potential encountered in passing in order through the series
of conductors of which the cell is composed.
Clearly an electromotive force has direction as well as magnitude. It is
usual to speak of the two conductors which pass into the liquid as the
highpotential terminal and the lowpotential terminal, or sometimes as the
positive and negative terminals. Knowing which is the positive or high
potential terminal, we shall of course know the direction of the electromotive
force.
344. If the conductors C, A of a voltaic cell ABC are separated, and
then joined by a fourth conductor D, such that there is no chemical action
between D and the conductors C or A, it will easily be seen that the sum of
the discontinuities in the new circuit is the same as in the old.
342344] Physical Principles 299
For by hypothesis CD A can form a closed circuit in which no chemical
action can occur, and therefore in which there can be electric equilibrium.
Hence we must have
V C D+V DA + V AC =Q ........................ (266).
Moreover the sum of all the discontinuities in the circuit is
= V AB +V BC  V AC , by equation (266)
= 'AS ~^~ VBC ~^~ 'CA
= E, by equation (265),
proving the result. A similar proof shews that we may introduce any
series of conductors between the two terminals of a cell, and so long as there
is no chemical action in which these new conductors are involved, the sum of
all the discontinuities in the circuit will be constant, and equal to the electro
motive force of the cell.
Let ABC... MN be any series of conductors, which includes a voltaic cell,
and let the material of N be the same as that of A. If ^V and A are joined
we obtain a closed circuit of electromotive force E, such that
VAB + V BC +...+V MN + V NA = E.
Moreover V NA = 0, since the material of N and A is the same. Thus the
relation may be rewritten as
V AS + V BC +... + V MN = E ..................... (267).
In the open series of conductors ABC ... MN, there can be no current, so
that each conductor must be at a definite uniform potential. If we denote
the potentials by V A , V B , ... V M , V N) we have
V V V
, V M VN Y MN
Hence equation (267) becomes
V A V N =E.
We now see that the electromotive force of a cell is the difference of poten
tial between the ends of the cell when the cell forms an open circuit, and the
materials of the two ends are the same.
A series of cells, joined in series so that the high potential terminal of
one is in electrical contact with the lowpotential terminal of the next, and
so on, is called a battery of cells, or an " electric battery " arranged in series.
It will be clear from what has just been proved, that the electromotive
force of such a battery of cells is equal to the sum of the electromotive forces
of the separate cells of the series.
300 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
Units.
345. On the electrostatic system, a unit current has been defined to be
a current such that an electrostatic unit of electricity crosses any selected
crosssection of a conductor in unit time. For practical purposes, a different
unit, known as the ampere, is in use. The ampere is equal very approxi
mately to 3 x 10 9 electrostatic units of current.
To form some idea of the actual magnitude of this unit, it may be stated that the
amount of current required to ring an electric bell is about half an ampere. About
the same amount is required to light a 16 c. p. 100 volt incandescent lamp.
As an electromotive force is of the same physical nature as a difference
of potential, the electrostatic unit of electromotive force is taken to be the
same as that of potential. The practical unit is about ^ of the electrostatic
unit, and is known as the volt.
It may be mentioned that the electromotive force of a single voltaic cell is generally
intermediate between one and two volts ; the electromotive force which produces a
perceptible shock in the human body is about 30 volts, while an electromotive force
of 500 volts or more is dangerous to life. Both of these latter quantities, however, vary
enormously with the condition of the body, and particularly with the state of dryness
or moisture of the skin. The electromotive force used to work an electric bell is
commonly 6 or 8 volts, while an electric light installation will generally have a voltage
of about 100 or 200 volts.
The unit of resistance, in all systems of units, is taken to be a resistance
such that unit difference of potential between its extremities produces unit
current through the conductor. We then have, by Ohm's Law,
, difference of potential at extremities
current =   (268).
resistance
In the practical system of units, the unit of resistance is called the Ohm.
From what has already been said, it follows that when two points having a
potentialdifference of one volt are connected by a resistance of one ohm, the
current flowing through this resistance will be one ampere. In this case the
difference of potential is ^^ electrostatic units, and the current is 3 x 10 9
electrostatic units, so that by relation (268), it follows that one ohm must be
equal to   electrostatic units of resistance,
y x j.u
Some idea of the amount of this unit may be gathered from the statement that
the resistance of a mile of ordinary telegraph wire is about 10 ohms. The resistance
of a good telegraph insulator may be billions of ohms.
KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS.
346. Problems occur in which the flow of electricity is not through
a single continuous series of conductors : there may be junctions of three or
more conductors at which the current of electricity is free to distribute itself
345, 346] Kirchhoff's Laws 301
between different paths, and it may be important to determine how the
electricity will pass through a network of conductors containing junctions.
The first principle to be used is that, since the currents are supposed
steady, there can be no accumulation of electricity at any point, so that the
sum of all the currents which enter any junction must be equal to the sum
of all the currents which leave it. Or, if we introduce the convention that
currents flowing into a junction are to be counted as positive, while those
leaving it are to be reckoned negative, then we may state the principle in
the form :
The algebraic sum of the currents at any junction must be zero.
Again, let the various junctions be denoted by A, B, G..., and let their
potentials be J^, V& V c ____ Let R AB ^ e the resistance of any single con
ductor connecting two junctions A and B, and let C AB be the current flowing
through it from A to B. Let us select any path through the network of
conductors, such as to start from a junction and bring us back to the starting
point, say ABC...NA. Then on applying Ohm's law to the separate con
ductors of which this path is formed, we obtain ( 341)
R
BC>
By addition we obtain 2CR = ................................. (269),
where the summation is taken over all the conductors which form the closed
circuit.
In this investigation it has been assumed that there are no discontinuities
of potential, and therefore no batteries, in the selected circuit. If dis
continuities occur, a slight modification will have to be made. We shall
treat points at which discontinuities occur as junctions, and if A is a junction
of this kind, the potentials at A on the two sides of the surface of separation
between the two conductors will be denoted by V A and V A .
Then, by Ohm's Law, we obtain for the falls of potential in the different
conductors of the circuit,
V G R
AB>
and by addition of these equations
The lefthand member is simply the sum of all the discontinuities of
potential met in passing round the circuit, each being measured with its
proper sign. It is therefore equal to the sum of the electromotive forces of
all the batteries in the circuit, these also being measured with their proper
signs.
302 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
Thus we may write 2CR = 2E .............................. (270),
where the summation in each term is taken round any closed circuit of
conductors, and this equation, together with
2(7 = ................................. (271),
in which the summation now refers to all the currents entering or leaving a
single junction, suffices to determine the current in each conductor of the
network.
Equation (271) expresses what is known as Kirchhoff's First Law, while
equation (270) expresses the Second Law.
Conductors in Series.
347. When all the conductors form a single closed circuit, the current
through each conductor is the same, say C, so that equation (270) becomes
The sum %R is spoken of as the " resistance of the circuit," so that the
current in the circuit is equal to the total electromotive force divided by the
total resistance. Conductors arranged in such a way that the whole current
passes through each of them in succession are said to be arranged "in series."
Conductors in Parallel.
348. It is possible to connect any two points A, B by a number of
conductors in such a way that the current divides itself between all these
FIQ. 96.
conductors on its journey from A to B, no part of it passing through more
than one conductor. Conductors placed in this way are said to be arranged
" in parallel."
Let us suppose that the two points A, B are connected by a number of
conductors arranged in parallel. Let R l} R^... be the resistances of the
conductors, and C 1} (7 2 ,... the currents flowing through them. Then if V A , V B
are the potential at A and B, we have, by Ohm's Law,
The total current which enters at A is (7 1 + (7 2 + ..., say C. Thus we
have
T7 V 2
I = = J" = "
R l JR 2
346350] Measurements 303
The arrangement of conductors in parallel is therefore seen to offer the
same resistance to the current as a single conductor of resistance
1
The reciprocal of the resistance of a conductor is called the " conductivity "
of the conductor. The conductivity of the system of conductors arranged in
parallel is ~ + ~ + . . . , and is therefore equal to the sum of the con
tii J&1
ductivities of the separate conductors. Also we have seen that the current
divides itself between the different conductors in the ratio of their con
ductivities.
MEASUREMENTS.
The Measurement of Current.
349. The instrument used for measuring the current passing in a circuit
at any given instant is called a galvanometer. The theory of this instrument
will be given in a later chapter (Chap. XIII.).
For measuring the total quantity of electricity passing within a given
time an instrument called a voltameter is sometimes used. The current,
in passing through the voltameter, encounters a number of discontinuities
of potential in crossing which electrical energy becomes transformed into
chemical energy. Thus a voltameter is practically a voltaic cell run back
wards. On measuring the amount of chemical energy which has been stored
in the voltameter, we obtain a measure of the total quantity of electricity
which has passed through the instrument.
The Measurement of Resistance.
350. The Resistance Box. A resistance box is a piece of apparatus
which consists essentially of a collection of coils of wire of known resistances,
arranged so that any combination of these coils can be arranged in series.
The most usual arrangement is one in which the two extremities of each
coil are brought to the upper surface of the box, and are there connected
to a thick band of copper which runs over the surface of the box. This
band of copper is continuous, except between the two terminals of each coil,
and in these places the copper is cut away in such a way that a copper plug
can be made to fit exactly into the gap, and so put the two sides of the gap
in electrical contact through the plug. The arrangement is shewn diagram
matically in fig. 97. When the plug is inserted in any gap DE, the plug
and the coil beneath the gap DE form two conductors in parallel connecting
304
Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
the points DE. Denoting the resistances of the coil and plug by E C) R p , the
resistance between D and E will be
1
 + i'
Re R P
and since R p is very small, this may be neglected. When the plug is
removed, the resistance from D to E may be taken to be the resistance of
FIG. 97.
the coil. Thus the resistance of the whole box will be the sum of the
resistances of all the coils of which the plugs have been removed.
351. The Wheatstone Bridge. This is an arrangement by which it is
possible to compare the resistances of conductors, and so determine an
unknown resistance in terms of known resistances.
The " bridge " is represented diagrammatically in fig. 98. The current
enters it at A and leaves it at D, these points being connected by the lines
ABD, A CD arranged in parallel. The line AD is composed of two con
ductors AB, BD of resistances R l9 R 2 , and the line AGD is similarly composed
of two conductors AC, CD of resistances R 3 , R.
If current is allowed to flow through this arrangement of conductors, it
will not in general happen that the points B and C will be at the same
potential, so that if B and C are connected by a new conductor, there will
usually be a current flowing through BC. The method of using the
Wheatstone bridge consists in varying the resistances of one or more of the
conductors R l} R ZJ R 3) R 4 until no current flows through the conductor BC.
When the bridge is adjusted in this way, the points B, C must be at the
same potential, say v. Let V A , V D denote the potentials at A and D, and
350352] Currents in a Network
let the current through ABD be C. Then, by Ohm's Law,
305
so that
R 2 vV B *
From a similar consideration of the flow in ACD, we obtain
R 3 V A v
so that we must have
R
.(272),
as the condition to be satisfied between the resistances when there is no
current in BC.
Clearly by adjusting the bridge in this way we can determine an unknown
resistance R l in terms of known resistances R^, R 3) R 4 . In the simplest
form of Wheatstone's bridge, the line ACD is a single uniform wire, and the
position of the point can be varied by moving a " sliding contact " along
the wire. The ratio of the resistances R 3 : R 4 is in this case simply the ratio
of the two lengths AC, CD of the wire, so that the ratio ^ : R 2 can be found
by sliding the contact C along the wire ACD until there is observed to be
no current in BC, and then reading the lengths AC and CD.
EXAMPLES OF CURRENTS IN A NETWORK.
I. Wheatstone's Bridge not in adjustment.
352. The condition that there shall be no current in the
in fig. 98 has been seen to be that given by equation (272).
B
bridge " BC
Suppose that this condition is not satisfied, and let us examine the flow
of currents which then takes place in the network of conductors. Let the
conductors AB, BD, AC, CD as before be of resistances R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and
let the currents flowing through them be denoted by x lt x 2 , x 3 , % 4 . Let the
bridge BC be of resistance R b , and let the current flowing through it from
B to C be x b .
20
306 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
From KirchhofFs Laws, we obtain the following equations:
(Law I, point B) x l x< 2 x b = Q .................. (273),
(Law I, point C) # 3 # 4 + #6 = .................. (274),
(Law II, circuit ABC) X& + x b E b  x 3 E s = Q .................. (275),
(Law II, circuit BCD) x b R b + afjt 4  x 2 R 2 = .................. (276).
These four equations enable us to determine the ratios of the five currents
#n #2, #3> #4, #& We may begin by eliminating # a and # 4 from equations
(273), (274) and (276), and obtain
X b (R b 4 R 2 4 #4) + #3^4 ~ #1#2 = 0,
and from this and equation (275),
_ _ __ _ _
R 2 R 3 R^Ri R 1 (R b + R 2 4 R*) 4 R b R 9 R 3 (R b + R 2 + R*) 4 R&K 4
............ (277).
The ratios of the other currents can be written down from symmetry.
If the total current entering at A is denoted by X, we have X x^ + # 3 .
Thus if each of the fractions of equations (277) is denoted by 6,
X = 6 {(R, 4 R 3 ) (R, 4 E.) + R b (E, + R, + R 3 + R 4 )} ...... (278),
and this gives 6, and hence the actual values of the currents, in terms of the
total current entering at A.
The fall of potential from A to D is given by
and from equations (277) this is found to reduce to
v A v D =\e,
where
(R 3 4 .ft) + R b (R 1 R S + RA + ^ A
so that X is the sum of the products of the five resistances taken three at
a time, omitting the two products of the three resistances which meet at the
points B and C. There is now a current X flowing through the network, and
having a fall of potential V A V D . Hence the equivalent resistance of the
network
(R, + R 3 ) (R, + JB 4 ) 4 R
by equation (278).
352, 353]
Currents in a Network
307
353.
II. Telegraph wire with faults.
As a more complex example of the flow of electricity in a system
of linear conductors, we may examine the case of a telegraph wire, in which
there are a number of connexions through which the current can leak to
earth. Such leaks are technically known as " faults."
F 3
Rl
Ro
'
Rnl
Rn
B
FIG. 100.
Let AB be the wire, and let F l} F 2 , ...F n _ l} F n be the points on it at
which faults occur, the resistances through these faults being R lt R Zy ...
Rn!, R n , and the resistances of the sections AF l} F^F Z , ...Fn^Fn and F n B
being r lt r a , ... r n , r n+l . Let the end B be supposed put to earth, and let the
current be supposed to be generated by a battery of which one terminal is
connected to A while the other end is to earth.
The equivalent resistance of the whole network of conductors from A to
earth can be found in a very simple way. Current arriving at F n from the
section F n _^F n passes to earth through two conductors arranged in parallel,
of which the resistances are R n and r n+1 . Hence the resistance from F n to
earth is
and the resistance from
n r n+l
ni to earth, through F
s
(279).
Current reaching F nr . 1 can, however, pass to earth by two paths, either
through the fault at F n _ lt or past F n . These paths may be regarded as
arranged in parallel, their resistances being R n i and expression (279) re
spectively. Thus the equivalent resistance from F n ^ is
1
1 1
 +
or, written as a continued fraction,
1 1
202
308 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
We can continue in this way, until finally we find as the whole resistance
from A to earth,
1 I ! 1 1
If the currents or potentials are required, it will be found best to attack
the problem in a different manner.
Let V A , TI, TJ, ... be the potentials at the points A, F^ F^..., then, by
Ohm's Law,
F_ F
the current from
F 8 through the fault = ^ .
Hence, by Kirchhoff s first law,
VV
S+1
r s r s+l 8
or V s+l r s+ r l  V s (Er 1 + ry 1 + r.+r 1 ) + Ti rr 1 = 0,
and from this and the similar system of equations, the potentials may be
found.
If all the It's are the same, and also all the rs are the same, the equation
reduces to a difference equation with constant coefficients. These conditions
might arise approximately if the line were supported by a series of similar
imperfect insulators at equal distances apart. The difference equation is in
this case seen to be
and if we put 1 + ^ = cosh a,
Zit
the solution is known to be
V 8 = Acoshsa+ sinhsa ..................... (280),
in which A and B are constants which must be determined from the
conditions at the ends of the line. For instance to express that the end B
is to earth, we have V n +i = 0, and therefore
III. Submarine cable imperfectly insulated.
354. If we pass to the limiting case of an infinite number of faults, we
have the analysis appropriate to a line from which there is leakage at every
point. The conditions now contemplated may be supposed to be realised in
a submarine cable in which, owing to the imperfection of the insulating
sheath the current leaks through to the sea at every point.
353355] Generation of Heat 309
The problem in this form can also be attacked by the methods of the
infinitesimal calculus. Let V be the potential at a distance x along the
cable, V now being regarded as a continuous function of x. Let the
resistance of the cable be supposed to be R per unit length, then the re
sistance from x to x + dx will be Rdx. The resistance of the insulation from
Si
x to x 4 dx, being inversely proportional to dx, may be supposed to be 7 .
Let C be the current in the cable at the point x, so that the leak from
dC
the cable between the points x and x 4 dx is = dx. This leak is a current
dx
a
which flows through a resistance ? with a fall of potential V. Hence by
Ohm's Law,
j
=  T dx j ,
dx \dx
dC
Also, the fall of potential along the cable from x to x 4 dx is 7 cfo, the
current is C, and the resistance is Rdx. Hence by Ohm's Law,
< 282 >
Eliminating G from equations (280) and (281), we find as the differential
equation satisfied by F,
d_ ( I dV\ _ V
dx\Rdx)~ S'
If R and 8 have the same values at all points of the cable, the solution
of this equation is
VA cosh A/ s x + B sinh ^J ~ x,
which is easily seen to be the limiting form assumed by equation (280).
GENERATION OF HEAT IN CONDUCTORS.
The Joule Effect.
355. Let P, Q be any two points in a linear conductor, let V P , V Q be
the potentials at these points, R the resistance between them, and x the
current flowing from P to Q. Then, by Ohm's Law,
V P V Q = Rx ....... . ...................... (283).
In moving a single unit of electricity from Q to P an amount oi work is
done against the electric field equal to Vp Vq. Hence when a unit of
electricity passes from P to Q, there is work done on it by the electric field
310 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
of amount V P V Q . The energy represented by the work shows itself in
a heating of the conductor.
On the electron theory, we may imagine that the electrons are driven through the
conductor by the forces of the electric field, their motion being accompanied by in
numerable collisions between the moving electrons and the atoms or molecules of
which the conductor is formed. If it were not for these collisions, the electrons would
continually gain in momentum under the action of the electric forces : the effect of
the collisions is to check this growth of momentum, so that through the agency of these
collisions all the excess momentum is transferred from the electrons to the atoms and
molecules of the conductor. The agitation of these latter is accordingly increased,
and this, according to the kinetic theory of matter, will result in a rise in the temper
ature of the conductor, the energy of this rise of temperature being the exact equivalent
of the energy yielded up by the electrons.
We are supposing that x units of electricity pass per unit time from
P to Q. Hence the work done by the electric field per unit time within the
region PQ is x(V P VQ), and this again, by equation (283) is equal to Rx 2 .
Thus in unit time, the heat generated in the section PQ of the con
ductor represents Rx 2 units of mechanical energy. Each unit of energy is
equal to , units of heat, where J is the " mechanical equivalent of heat."
J
Thus the number of heatunits developed in unit time in the conductor PQ
will be
It is important to notice that in this formula x and R are measured in
electrostatic units. If the value of the resistance and current are given in
practical units, we must transform to electrostatic units before using formula
(284).
Let the resistance of a conductor be R' ohms, and let the current flowing through it
be of amperes. Then, in electrostatic units, the values of the resistance R and the current
x are given by
R = 9x^10" and * =3x 10V '
Thus the number of heatunits produced per unit time is
Rx* _ (3x10^
J "GxlOU.,/
and on substituting for J its value 4'2 x 10 7 in c.G.s. centigrade units, this becomes
024 R'i' 2 .
Generation of Heat a minimum.
356. In general the solution of any physical problem is arrived at by the
solution of a system of equations, the number of these equations being equal
to the number of unknown quantities in the problem. The condition that
any function in which these unknown quantities enter as variables shall be a
355357] Generation of Heat 311
maximum or a minimum, is also arrived at by the solution of au equal
number of equations. If it is possible to discover a function of the unknown
quantities such that the two systems of equations become identical, i.e. if
the equations which express that the function is a maximum or a minimum
are the same as those which contain the solution of the physical problem
then we may say that the solution of the problem is contained in the single
statement that the function in question is a maximum or a minimum.
Examples of functions which serve this purpose are not hard to find. In
 189, we proved that when an electrostatic system is in equilibrium, its
potential energy is a minimum. Thus the solution of any electrostatic
problem is contained in the single statement that the function which ex
presses the potential energy is a minimum. Or, again, the solution of any
dynamical problem is contained in the statement that the "action" is a
minimum, while in thermodynamics the equilibrium state of any system
can be expressed by the condition that the "entropy" shall be a maximum.
It will now be shewn that the function which expresses the total rate of
generation of heat plays a similar role in the theory of steady electric
currents.
357. THEOREM. When a steady current flows through a network of
conductors in which no discontinuities of potential occur (and which, therefore,
contains no batteries), the currents are distributed in such a way that the rate of
generation of heat in the network is a minimum, subject only to the conditions
imposed by Kirchhoff's first law; and conversely.
To prove this, let us select any closed circuit PQR ... P in the network,
and let the currents and resistances in the sections PQ, QR,... be # 15 # 2
and R lt jR 2 > ____ Let the currents and resistances in those sections of the net
work which are not included in this closed circuit be denoted by x a , x b , ...
and R a , RI, .... Then the total rate of production of heat is
R0 8 + 2JW ........................... (285).
A different arrangement of currents, and one moreover which does not
violate Kirchhoff's first law, can be obtained in imagination by supposing all
the currents in the circuit PQR ... P increased by the same amount e. The
total rate of production of heat is now
and this exceeds the actual rate of production of heat, as given by expression
(285), by
^(2^6 + e 2 ) ........................... (286).
Now if the original distribution of currents is that which actually occurs
in nature, then
ZR^ = 0,
by Kirchhoff's second law. Thus the rate of production of heat, under the
312 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
new imaginary distribution of currents exceeds that in the actual distribu
tion by e 2 2.Ri, an essentially positive quantity.
The most general alteration which can be supposed made to the original
system of currents, consistently with Kirchhoff's first law remaining satisfied,
will consist in superposing upon this system a number of currents flowing
in closed circuits in the network. One such current is typified by the
current e, already discussed. If we have any number of such currents, the
resulting increase in the rate of heat production
= 2^(^ + 6 + e + e" + ...) 2  2JW,
where e, e', e''... are the additional currents flowing through the resistance
RI. As before this expression
(e + e' + e" +...) + 2ft (e 4 e' + e" + ...) 2
by Kirchhoff's second law. This is an essentially positive quantity, so that
any alteration in the distribution of the currents increases the rate of heat
production. In other words, the original distribution was that in which the
rate was a minimum.
To prove the converse it is sufficient to notice that if the rate of heat
production is given to be a minimum, then expression (286) must vanish as
far as the first power of e, so that we have
21^ = 0,
and of course similar equations for all other possible closed circuits. These,
however, are known to be the equations which determine the actual dis
tribution.
358. THEOREM. When a system of steady currents flows through a net
work of conductors of resistances R 1 ,R 2) ..., containing batteries of electromotive
forces E l) E 2 , ... , the currents o^, # 2 , ... are distributed in such a way that the
function
^Rx*Z$Ex ........................... (287),
is a minimum, subject to the conditions imposed by Kirchhoff's first law ; and
conversely.
As before, we can imagine the most general variation possible to consist
of the superposition of small currents e, e', e", ... flowing in closed circuits.
The increase in the function (287) produced by this variation is
= 2e. (^Rx  $E) + 2e' (...) + ...
+ 2(ef e'+...) 2 ........................... (288).
If the system of currents x, x, ... is the natural system, then the first line
357360] General Theory 313
of this expression vanishes by Kirchhoff's second law (cf. equations (270)),
and the increase in heatproduction is the essentially positive quantity
shewing that the original value of function (287) must have been a minimum.
Conversely, if the original value of function (287) was given to be a
minimum, then expression (288) must vanish as far as first powers of e, e', ...,
so that we must have
^Rx = E, etc.,
shewing that the currents x, x, ... must be the natural system of currents.
359. THEOREM. If two points A, B are connected by a network of con
ductors, a decrease in the resistance of any one of these conductors will decrease
(or, in special cases, leave unaltered) the equivalent resistance from A to B.
Let x be the current flowing from A to B, R the equivalent resistance of
the network, and V A V B the fall of potential. The generation of heat per
unit time represents the energy set free by x units moving through a
potentialdifference V A V B . Thus the rate of generation of heat is
ffcTft
or, since V A V B = Rx, the rate of generation of heat will be Rx*.
Let the resistance of any single conductor in the network be supposed
decreased from R l to R^, and let x l be the current originally flowing through
the network. If we imagine the currents to remain unaltered in spite of the
change in the resistance of this conductor, then there will be a decrease in
the rate of heatproduction equal to (R  R^) x?. The currents now flowing
are not the natural currents, but if we allow the current entering the net
work to distribute itself in the natural way, there is, by 357, a further
decrease in the rate of heatproduction. Thus a decrease in the resistance of
the single conductor has resulted in a decrease in the natural rate of heat
production.
If R, R are the equivalent resistances before and after the change, the
two rates of heatproduction are Rx z and R'x\ We have proved that
R'a? < Rx 2 , so that R' < R, proving the theorem.
GENERAL THEORY OF A NETWORK.
360. In addition to depending on the resistances of the conductors, the
flow of currents through a network depends on the order in which the con
ductors are connected together, but not on the geometrical shapes, positions
or distances of the conductors. Thus we can obtain the most general case of
flow through any network by considering a number of points 1, 2, ... n, con
nected in pairs by conductors of general resistances which may be denoted by
R 12 , jRas, .... If, in any special problem, any two points P, Q are not joined
314 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
by a conductor, we must simply suppose R PQ to be infinite. Discontinuities
of potential must not be excluded, so we shall suppose that in passing through
the conductor PQ, we pass over discontinuities of algebraic sum E PQ . This
is the same as supposing that there are batteries in the arm PQ of total
electromotive force E PQ . We shall suppose that the current flowing in PQ
from P to Q is X PQ , and shall denote the potentials at the points 1, 2, ... by
K,K, ....
The total fall of potential from P to Q is V P V Q , but of this an amount
EPQ is contributed by discontinuities, so that the aggregate fall from P to
Q which arises from the steady potential gradient in conductors will be
Hence, by Ohm's Law,
V P  VQ + E PQ = R PQ X PQ .
If we introduce a symbol K PQ to denote the conductivity p , we have
tipQ
the current given by
(289).
Suppose that currents X l ,X 2 ,... enter the system from outside at the
points 1, 2, ..., then we must have
since there is to be no accumulation of electricity at the point 1, and so on
for the points 2, 3, .... Substituting from equations (289) into the right
hand of this equation,
.) + K m E + K l3 E ls + ............... (290).
The symbol K PP has so far had no meaning assigned to it. Let us use it
to denote (K Pl 4 K P2 + K^ +...); then equation (290) may be written
in the more concise form
X 1 = (KV 1 + K,&+...) + K 1 A + K K E li + ......... (291).
There are n equations of this type, but it is easily seen that they are not
all independent. For if we add corresponding members we obtain
X, + X, + . . . + X n = XK ( + KV + . . . + K ln ) + 22 (K PQ E PQ + K qP E QP ).
The first term on the right vanishes on account of the meaning which has been
assigned to K u , etc.; while the second term vanishes because E PQ = E QP ,
while K P Q = KQP Thus the equation reduces to
X 1 + X 2 +...+Z n = 0,
which simply expresses that the total flow into the network is equal to the
total flow out of it, a condition which must be satisfied by X l} X 2> ... X n at
360] General Theory 315
the outset. Thus we arrive at the conclusion that the system of equations
(291) are not independent.
This is as it should be, for if the equations were independent, we should have
n equations from which it would be possible to determine the values of F 1} F 2 , ... in
terms of J^, JT 2 , ... ; whereas clearly from a knowledge of the currents entering the
network, we must be able to determine differences of potential only, and not absolute
values.
To the righthand side of equation (291), let us add the expression
of which the value is zero by the definition of K u . The equation becomes
#u (K  V n ) + K a (TJ  V n ) + . . . + #i,ni ( JU  V n )
= X j + ^12^12 + KisElS 4 ... + K ln E ln .
There are n equations of this type in all. Of these the first (nl) may
be regarded as a system of equations determining
V V V V V V
'i 'n> "2 MJ > "ni~ "n
That these equations are independent will be seen a posteriori from the fact
that they enable us to determine the values of the n 1 independent
quantities
V V V V V V
'I 'n> "z *m > 'ni "n
Solving these equations, we have
X ! + K 12 E 12 4 ... + ^m^m, JT
"hi *^M) ^13; > J*i,n l
** 21 J ** 22 > "~23> ) " 2, nl
"fcfl, ***n i,2j **n 1,3> ) &n i,n
The current flowing in conductor In follows at once from equation (289),
and the currents in the other conductors can be written down from sym
metry.
If we denote the determinant in the denominator of the foregoing
equation by A, and the minor of the term K PQ by A PQ , we find that the
value of V l V n can be expressed in the form
V t V n = (X l + K K E K + ...+K ln E m )^
a + ... + K w E w ) + (292).
316 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
361. Suppose first that the whole system of currents in the network is
produced by a current X entering at P and leaving at Q, there being no
batteries in the network. Then all the E's vanish, and all the X's vanish
except X P and X Q , these being given by
Xp = XQ X.
Equation (292) now becomes
so that V l V 2 = (V 1 V n )(V 2 V n )
Replacing 1, 2 by P, Q and P, Q by 1, 2, we find that if a current X
enters the network at 1 and leaves it at 2, the fall of potential from P
to Q is
V P V 9 = ~ (A 2P A 2(? A 1P + A ie ) (294),
and since A^ = A gr , it is clear that the righthand members of equations
(293) and (294) are identical.
From this we have the theorem :
The potentialfall from A to B when unit current traverses the network
from C to D, is the same as the potentialfall from C to D when unit current
traverses the network from A to B.
362. Let it now be supposed that the whole flow of current in the
network is produced by a battery of electromotive force E placed in the
conductor PQ. We now take all the X's equal to zero in equation (292)
and all the E's equal to zero except E PQ which we put equal to E, and
E QP which we put equal to E. We then have
J\^PQJ^PQ r \~ J\.QpLq P
J\. f>f)Jls ,
Hence K K = f (A Pl  A P2  A Q1 + A Q2 ) ......... (295),
and, by equation (289), the current flowing in the arm 12 is
* = KE ( A P1  A P2  Aq, + A Q2 ) ............ (296).
This expression remains unaltered if we replace 1, 2 by P, Q and P, Q by
1, 2. From this we deduce the theorem :
361364] General Theory 317
The current which flows from A to B when an electromotive force E is
introduced into the arm CD of the network, is equal to the current which flows
from C to D when the same electromotive force is introduced into the
arm AB.
Conjugate Conductors.
363. The same expression occurs as a factor in the righthand members
of each of the equations (292), (293), (294), and (295), namely,
A P1 + A Q2  A Q1  A P2 (297).
If this expression vanishes, the two conductors 12 and PQ are said to be
" conjugate."
By examining the form assumed by equations (293) to (296), when ex
pression (297) vanishes, we obtain the following theorems.
THEOREM I. If the conductors AB and CD are conjugate, a current
entering at A and leaving at B will produce no current in CD. Similarly,
a current entering at C and leaving at D will produce no current in AB.
THEOREM II. A battery introduced into the arm AB produces no current
in CD. Similarly, a battery introduced into the arm CD produces no current
in AB.
As an illustration of two conductors which are conjugate, it may be
noticed that when the Wheatstone's Bridge ( 352) is in adjustment, the
conductors AD and BC are conjugate.
Equations expressed in Symmetrical Form.
364. The determinant A is not in form a symmetric function of the
n points 1, 2, ..., n, so that equations and conditions which must necessarily
involve these n points symmetrically have not yet been expressed in sym
metrical form.
We have, for instance,
in which the points which enter unsym metrically are not only 1 and 3, but
also n. Similarly, we have
i t \> "
n i,
**n 1,5> > **
318 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
so that, on subtraction,
TT jr
"25 > ) ^2,711
A225 "23 + ^24)
A 13  A 14 =
From the relation
it follows that the sum of all the terms in the first row of the above deter
minant is equal to K 2jn , the sum of all the terms in the second row is equal
to K 3%n , and so on. Thus the equation may be replaced by
XL 2 1> "22) *^25) ) ^2,711) ^2,71 >
V V V V V
A 31) ft32> ft35> "> J^3,1ll) J^3,n
** I,li "n i,2> "7ii,5) ) "ni,ni> J^ni,n
and similarly,
A 23  A 24 = ( If i K n , K 12 , K u , . . . , K ltn .
These two determinants differ only in their first row, so that on sub
traction,
(A 13  A 14 )  (A ffl  A 24 )
K K K K
"'g n ' 'J'^_ "' K ' n ' (299),
the last transformation being effected by the use of relation (298).
The relation which has now been obtained is in a symmetrical shape. If
D is a symmetrical determinant given by
K K K K
j^ w v TT
 /1 21) ^22) 23> '> ^2,n
364]
General Theory
319
then the determinant on the righthand of equation (299) is obtained from
D by striking out the lines and columns which contain the terms J5T 13 and
KM Thus equation (299) may be written in the form
8 2 D
AIS + ^24 A 23 Z\ 14 j, ., .
Again the determinant A given by
A
^223 ^23)
^n 1,1 >
may be written in the form
.(300)
A =
dD
This is not of symmetrical form, for the point n enters unsymmetrically.
We can, however, easily shew that the value of A is symmetrical, although its
form is unsymmetrical.
By application of relation (298), we can transform equation (300) into
jr TT _ jr rr
IT W TT ~K~
"Hi ^22> ^23> 1) n 1
n 1,3> '> J *ni t n\
TT jr
"23> >  CL 2,n 1
1,2
711,711
r 1
n,n i
2,n
K
n,n
Thus A is the differential coefficient of D with respect to either jBT u or
^n,, or of course with respect to any other one of the terms in the leading
diagonal of D. Thus, if K denote any term in the leading diagonal of D,
we have
and this virtually expresses A in a symmetrical form.
320 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
We can now express in symmetrical form the relations which have been
obtained in 360 to 362, as follows :
I. ( 362). The conductors 1, 2 and P, Q will be conjugate if
= p.
dK l>P dK 2tQ
II. (Equation 293). // the conductors 1, 2 and P, Q are not conjugate,
a current X entering at P and leaving at Q produces in 1, 2 a fall of
potential given by
d JjT lt
III. (Equation 295). If the conductors 1, 2 and P, Q are not conjugate,
a battery of electromotive force E placed in the arm PQ produces in I, 2 a
fall of potential given by
and a current from 1 to 2 given by
^
dK
All these results and formulae obtain illustration in the results already
obtained for the Wheatstone's Bridge in 351 and 352.
SLOWLY VARYING CURRENTS.
365. All the analysis of the present chapter has proceeded upon the
assumption that the currents are absolutely steady, shewing no variation
with the time. Changes in the strength of electric currents are in general
accompanied by a series of phenomena, which may be spoken of as " in
duction phenomena/' of which the discussion is beyond the scope of the
present chapter. If, however, the rate of change of the strength of the
currents is very small, the importance of the induction phenomena also
becomes very small, so that if the variation of the currents is slow, the
analysis of the present chapter will give a close approximation to the truth.
This method of dealing with slowlyvarying currents will be illustrated by
two examples.
364367] Slowly varying Currents 321
I. Discharge of a Condenser through a high Resistance.
366. Let the two plates A, B of a condenser of capacity C be connected
by a conductor of high resistance R, and let the condenser be discharged by
leakage through this conductor. At any instant let the potentials of the two
plates be V A , V B , so that the charges on these plates will be C(V A V B ).
Let i be the current in the wire, measured in the direction from A to B.
Then, by Ohm's Law,
V A V B = Ri,
whence we find that the charges on plates A and B are respectively 4 CRi
and CRi. Since i units leave plate A per unit time, we must have
a differential equation of which the solution is
where i is the current at time t = 0. The condition that the strength of the
current shall only vary slowly is now seen a posteriori to be that OR shall be
large.
At time t the charge on the plate A is CRi or
t
CRi e~CR.
This may be written as
where Q Q is the charge at time t = 0. Thus both the charge and the current
are seen to fall off exponentially with the time, both having the same
modulus of decay CR.
Later (516) we shall examine the same problem but without the limita
tion that the current only varies slowly.
II. Transmission of Signals along a Cable.
367. It has already been mentioned that a cable acts as an electrostatic
condenser of considerable capacity. This fact retards the transmission of
signals, and in a cable of highcapacity, the rate of transmission may be so
slow that the analysis of the present chapter can be used without serious
error.
Let x be a coordinate which measures distances along the cable, let V, i
be the potential at x and the current in the direction of a? increasing, and let
j. 21
322 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
K and R be the capacity and resistance of the cable per unit length, these
latter quantities being supposed independent of x.
The section of the cable between points A and B at distances x and
x f dx is a condenser of capacity Kdx, and is at the same time a conductor
of resistance Rdx. The potential of the condenser is V, so that its charge is
VKdx. The fall of potential in the conductor is
so that by Ohm's Law,
dx iRdx (301).
The current enters the section AB at a rate i units per unit time, and
leaves at a rate of i ' +  dx units per unit time. Hence the charge in this
section decreases at a rate ~ dx per unit time, so that we must have
_ / YKdx) = dx . ...(302).
Eliminating i from equations (301) and (302), we obtain
(303).
368. This equation, being a partial differential equation of the second
order, must have two arbitrary functions in its complete solution. We shall
shew, however, that there is a particular solution in which V is a function of
the single variable xj\/t, and this solution will be found to give us all the
information we require.
Let us introduce the new variable u, given by u = x Jt, and let us assume
provisionally that there is a solution V of equation (303) which is a function
of u onl. For this solution we must have
t du*'
dt du dt 2 \^ 3 du '
so that equation (303) becomes
du* =
dV
^ (304).
ctu
The fact that this equation involves F and u only, shews that there is an
367369] Slowly varying Currents 323
integral of the original equation for which V is a function of u only. This
integral is easily obtained, for from equation (304),
d (. dV\
? 1 j ) = 
du\ & duj
whence d ^ =C
du
in which is a constant of integration.
Integrating this, we find that the solution for V is
in which the lower limit to the integral is a second constant of integration.
Introducing a new variable y such that y 2 = ^KRu z , and changing the con
stants of integration, we may write the solution in the form
r
*
~y dy .................. (305).
369. We must remember that this is not the general solution of equa
tion (303), but is simply one particular solution. Thus the solution cannot
be adjusted to satisfy any initial and boundary conditions we please, but will
represent only the solution corresponding to one definite set of initial and
boundary conditions. We now proceed to examine what these conditions are.
At time t = 0, the value of xj\/t is infinite except at the point x 0.
Thus except at this point, we have V=V when t = 0. At this point the
value of xj*Jt is indeterminate at the actual instant t = 0, but immediately
after this instant assumes the value zero, which it retains through all time.
Thus at x = 0, the potential has the constant value
or, say, F= V lt where C' =
At x = oo , the value of V is V= V through all time.
Thus equation (305) expresses the solution for a line of infinite length
which is initially at potential V=V , and of which the end x= oo remains at
this potential all the time, while the end x = is raised to potential K by
being suddenly connected to a batteryterminal at the instant t = 0.
The current at any instant is given by
i = ^ ~ , from equation (301),
c' i /IKR
~~ ~R 2 V ~T~
4T ................................. (306).
212
324 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
We see that the current vanishes only when t = and when t = oo .
Thus even within an infinitesimal time of making contact, there will, accord
ing to equation (306), be a current at all points along the wire. It must,
however, be remembered that equation (306) is only an approximation,
holding solely for slowly varying currents, so that we must not apply the
solution at the instant t = at which the currents, as given by equation
(306), vary with infinite rapidity. For larger values of t, however, we may
suppose the current given by equation (306).
The maximum current at any point is found, on differentiating equation
(306), to occur at the instant given by
t=*$KRa;* .............................. (307),
so that the further along the wire we go, the longer it takes for the current
to attain its maximum value. The maximum value of this current, when it
occurs, is _
* ........................ (308)>
and so is proportional to  . Thus the further we go from the end x 0, the
CO
smaller the maximum current will be.
We notice that K occurs in expression (307) but not in (308). Thus the
electrostatic capacity of a cable will not interfere with the strength of signals
sent along a cable, but will interfere with the rapidity of their transmission.
REFERENCES.
On experimental knowledge of the Electric Current :
WHETHAM. Experimental Electricity. (Camb. Univ. Press, 1905.) Chaps, v
and x.
On currents in a network of linear conductors :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. I, Part n, Chap. vi.
On the transmission of signals :
LORD KELVIN, "On the Theory of the Electric Telegraph," Proc. Roy. Soc.,
1855; Math, and Phys. Papers, n, p. 61.
EXAMPLES.
1. A length 4a of uniform wire is bent into the form of a square, and the opposite
angular points are joined with straight pieces of the same wire, which are in contact
at their intersection. A given current enters at the intersection of the diagonals and
leaves at an angular point : find the current strength in the various parts of the network,
and shew that its whole resistance is equal to that of a length
2\/2 + 1
of the wire.
Examples 325
2. A network is formed of uniform wire in the shape of a rectangle of sides 2a, 3a,
with parallel wires arranged so as to divide the internal space into six squares of sides a,
the contact at points of intersection being perfect. Shew that if a current enter the
framework by one corner and leave it by the opposite, the resistance is equivalent to that
of a length 121a/69 of the wire.
3. A fault of given earthresistance develops in a telegraph line. Prove that the
current at the receiving end, generated by an assigned battery at the signalling end, is
least when the fault is at the middle of the line.
4. The resistances of three wires BC, CA, AB, of the same uniform section and
material, are a, b, c respectively. Another wire from A of constant resistance d can make
a sliding contact with BC. If a current enter at A and leave at the point of contact
with BC, shew that the maximum resistance of the network is
(a + b + c) d
a + b + c + 4d'
and determine the least resistance.
5. A certain kind of cell has a resistance of 10 ohms and an electromotive force of
85 of a volt. Shew that the greatest current which can be produced in a wire whose
resistance is 22 '5 ohms, by a battery of five such cells arranged in a single series, of
which any element is either one cell or a set of cells in parallel, is exactly '06 of an
ampere.
6. Six points A, A', B, B', C, C' are connected to one another by copper wire whose
lengths in yards are as follows : A A' = 16, BC = B'C = 1, BC' = B'C' = 2, AB = A'B'= 6,
AC' = A'C' 8. Also B and B' are joined by wires, each a yard in length, to the terminals
of a battery whose internal resistance is equal to that of r yards of the wire, and all the
wires are of the same thickness. Shew that the current in the wire A A' is equal to that
which the battery would maintain in a simple circuit consisting of 31r + 104 yards of
the wire.
7. Two places A, B are connected by a telegraph line of which the end at A is
connected to one terminal of a battery, and the end at B to one terminal of a receiver,
the other terminals of the battery and receiver being connected to earth. At a point C
of the line a fault is developed, of which the resistance is r. If the resistances of A C, CB
be p, q respectively, shew that the current in the receiver is diminished in the ratio
r(p + q) : qr + rp+pq,
the resistances of the battery, receiver and earth circuit being neglected.
8. Two cells of electromotive forces e 1 , e% and resistances r it r% are connected in
parallel to the ends of a wire of resistance R. Shew that the current in the wire is
and find the rates at which the cells are working.
9. A network of conductors is in the form of a tetrahedron PQRS ; there is a battery
of electromotive force E in PQ, and the resistance of PQ, including the battery, is R.
If the resistances in QR, RP are each equal to r, and the resistances in PS, RS are each
equal to \r, and that in QS = f r, find the currents in each branch.
10. A, B, C, D are the four junction points of a Wheatstone's Bridge, and the
resistances c, /3, b, y in AB, BD, AC, CD respectively are such that the battery sends no
current through the galvanometer in BC. If now a new battery of electromotive force E
be introduced into the galvanometer circuit, and so raise the total resistance in that
circuit to a, find the current that will flow through the galvanometer.
326 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [CH. ix
11. A cable AB, 50 miles in length, is known to have one fault, and it is necessary to
localise it. If the end A is attached to a battery, and has its potential maintained
at 200 volts, while the other end B is insulated, it is found that the potential of B when
steady is 40 volts. Similarly when A is insulated the potential to which B must be raised
to give A a steady potential of 40 volts is 300 volts. Shew that the distance of the fault
from A is 19'05 miles.
12. A wire is interpolated in a circuit of given resistance and electromotive force.
Find the resistance of the interpolated wire in order that the rate of generation of heat
may be a maximum.
13. The resistances of the opposite sides of a Wheatstone's Bridge are a, a' and 6, b'
respectively. Shew that when the two diagonals which contain the battery and galvano
meter are interchanged,
E_E^_ (aa'}(bV}(GR)
C C'~ aa'bV
where C and C' are the currents through the galvanometer in the two cases, G and R are
the resistances of the galvanometer and battery conductors, and E the electromotive force
of the battery.
14. A current C is introduced into a network of linear conductors at A, and taken
out at B, the heat generated being HI. If the network be closed by joining A, B by a
resistance r in which an electromotive force E is inserted, the heat generated is H 2 
Prove that
2?i a.!^l
C 2 r ~* E*~
15. A number N of incandescent lamps, each of resistance r, are fed by a machine of
resistance R (including the leads). If the light emitted by any lamp is proportional to
the square of the heat produced, prove that the most economical way of arranging the
lamps is to place them in parallel arc, each arc containing n lamps, where n is the integer
nearest to
16. A battery of electromotive force E and of resistance B is connected with the two
terminals of two wires arranged in parallel. The first wire includes a voltameter which
contains discontinuities of potential such that a unit current passing through it for a
unit time does p units of work. The resistance of the first wire, including the voltameter,
is R: that of the second is r. Shew that if E is greater than p (B + r)/r, the current
through the battery is
17. A system of 30 conductors of equal resistance are connected in the same way as
the edges of a dodecahedron. Shew that the resistance of the network between a pair of
opposite corners is of the resistance of a single conductor.
18. In a network PA, PB, PC, PD, AB, BC, CD, DA, the resistances are a, 0, y, 8,
y+8, 5+ a, afjS, /3+y respectively. Shew that, if AD contains a battery of electromotive
force E, the current in BC is
where
Examples 327
19. A wire forms a regular hexagon and the angular points are joined to the centre
by wires each of which has a resistance  of the resistance of a side of the hexagon.
Shew that the resistance to a current entering at one angular point of the hexagon and
leaving it by the opposite point is
(+!)(* + 4)
times the resistance of a side of the hexagon.
20. Two long equal parallel wires AB, A'B' of length I, have their ends , B' joined
by a wire of negligible resistance, while A, A' are joined to the poles of a cell whose
resistance is equal to that of a length r of the wire. A similar cell is placed as a bridge
across the wires at a distance x from A, A'. Shew that the effect of the second cell is to
increase the current in BB' in the ratio
21. There are n points 1, 2, ... n, joined in pairs by linear conductors. On introducing
a current C at electrode 1 and taking it out at 2, the potentials of these are F l5 F 2 , ... F n .
If # 12 is the actual current in the direction 12, and #' 12 any other that merely satisfies the
conditions of introduction at 1 and abstraction at 2, shew that
2 (r 12 # 12 # 12 ') = ( F! F 2 ) (7=2 (r 12 ^ 12 2 ),
and interpret the result physically.
If x typify the actual current when the current enters at 1 and leaves at 2, and y
typify the actual current when the current enters at 3 and leaves at 4, shew that
2 (r 12 * 12 y 12 ) = (X 3 Xi)C = (Y l  F 2 ) C,
where the JTs are potentials corresponding to currents x, and the Ps are potentials
corresponding to currents y.
22. A, B, C are three stations on the same telegraph wire. An operator at A knows
that there is a fault between A and B, and observes that the current at A when he uses a
given battery is i, i' or i", according as B is insulated and C to earth, B to earth, or B
and C both insulated. Shew that the distance of the fault from A is
{ka  k'b +(b of (ka  Vbfy(k  k'\
" "
where AB=a, BC=ba, k=
23. Six conductors join four points A, B, (7, D in pairs, and have resistances
a, a, 5, /3, c, y, where a, a refer to BC, AD respectively, and so on. If this network
be used as a resistance coil, with J, B as electrodes, shew that the resistance cannot
lie outside the limits
1 1 "li , n /1 IN 1 /I I 1 ) "
H" 1
J '
. 24. Two equal straight pieces of wire A Q A n , B Q B n are each divided into n equal parts
at the points A l ... A n ^ and B l ... 5 n _ 1 respectively, the resistance of each part and
that of A n B n being R. The corresponding points of each wire from 1 to n inclusive
are joined by cross wires, and a battery is placed in AiB . Shew that, if the current
through each cross wire is the same, the resistance of the cross wire A 8 B 8 is
328 Steady Currents in Linear Conductors [OH. ix
25. If n points are joined two and two by wires of equal resistance r, and two of
them are connected to the electrodes of a battery of electromotive force E and resistance R,
shew that the current in the wire joining the two points is
2E
2r+nR'
26. Six points A, B, C, D, P, Q are joined by nine conductors AS, AP, EC, BQ, PQ,
QC, PD, DC, AD. An electromotive force is inserted in the conductor AD, and a
galvanometer in PQ. Denoting the resistance of any conductor XY by r xy , shew that
if no current passes through the galvanometer,
(r B c + r BQ +r CQ ) (TA^DF  r AP r DC ] +r BC (r BQ r DP  r AP r CQ ) = 0.
27. A network is made by joining the five points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 by conductors in every
possible way. Shew that the condition that conductors 23 and 14 are conjugate is
(^15 + #25 + 35 + ^45) (^12 ^34  ^13
where K n is conductivity of conductor rs.
28. Two endless wires are each divided into mn equal parts by the successive
terminals of mn connecting wires, the resistance of each part being R. There is an
identically similar battery in every rath connecting wire, the total resistance of each
being the same, and the resistance of each of the other mn n connecting wires is h.
Prove that the current through a connecting wire which is the rth from the nearest
battery is
$0(1 tan a) (tan 1 * a+ tan' a)/(tan a  tan a),
where C is the current through each battery, and sin 2a = h/(h+R).
29. A long line of telegraph wire AA 1 A 2 ... A n A n + i is supported by n equidistant
insulators at ^ A 2 ... A n . The end A is connected to one pole of a battery of electro
motive force E and resistance B, and the other pole of this battery is put to earth, as
also the other end A n+1 of the wire. The resistance of each portion AA, A 1 A%, ...
A n A n + i is the same, R. In wet weather there is a leakage to earth at each insulator,
whose resistance may be taken equal to r. Shew that the current strength in A p A p + i is
B cosh (2n+ 1) a + */Rr sinh (2w+2) a
where 2 sinh a = jR/r.
30. A regular polygon AiA 2 ... A n is formed of n pieces of uniform wire, each of
resistance o, and the centre is joined to each angular point by a straight piece of the
same wire. Shew that, if the point is maintained at zero potential, and the point AI
at potential F, the current that flows in the conductor A r A r + i is
27 sinh a sinh (w2r+l) a
or cosh na
where a is given by the equation
cosh2a = l+sin .
n
31. A resistance network is constructed of 2n rectangular meshes forming a truncated
cylinder of 2n faces, with two ends each in the form of a regular polygon of 2?i sides.
Each of these sides is of resistance r, and the other edges of resistance R. If the electrodes
be two opposite corners, then the resistance is
tanh 6
where sinh 2 = ^5 .
Examples 329
32. A network is formed by a system of conductors joining every pair of a set of
n points, the resistances of the conductors being all equal, and there is an electromotive
force in the conductor joining the points J. 1} A 2 . Shew that there is no current in any
conductor except those which pass through A l or A 2 , and find the current in these
conductors.
33. Each member of the series of n points AI, A 2 ... A n is united to its successor
by a wire of resistance p, and similarly for the series of n points lt B 2 ... B n . Each
pair of points corresponding in the two series, such as A r and B r , is united by a wire
of resistance R. A steady current i enters the network at AI and leaves it at B n . Shew
that the current at AI divides itself between A 1 A 2 and AiBim the ratio
sinha + sinh(n l)a + sinh(w2)a : sinh a f sinh (?i l)a sinh(n 2) a,
where cosh a = =^ .
H
34. An underground cable of length a is badly insulated so that it has faults
throughout its length indefinitely near to one another and uniformly distributed. The
conductivity of the faults is l/p r per unit length of cable, and the resistance of the
cable is p per unit length. One pole of a battery is connected to one end of a cable
and the other pole is earthed. Prove that the current at the farther end is the same
as if the cable were free from faults and of total resistance
Y
35. Two parallel conducting wires at unit distance are connected by n + l cross pieces
of the same wire, so as to form n squares. A current enters by an outer corner of the
first square, and leaves by the diagonally opposite corner of the last. Shew that, if
the resistance is that of a length %n + a n of the wire,
36. A, B are the ends of a long telegraph wire with a number of faults, and C is
an intermediate point on the wire. The resistance to a current sent from A is R when
C is earth connected, but if C is not earth connected the resistance is 8 or T according
as the end B is to earth or insulated. If R', S', T denote the resistances under similar
circumstances when a current is sent from B towards A, shew that
37. The inner plates of two condensers of capacities C, C' are joined by wires of
resistances R, R to a point P, and their outer plates by wires of negligible resistance
to a point Q. If the inner plates be also connected through a galvanometer, shew that
the needle will suffer no sudden deflection on joining P, Q to the poles of a battery,
38. An infinite cable of capacity and resistance K and R per unit length is at zero
potential. At the instant t =0 one end is suddenly connected to a battery for an
infinitesimal interval and then insulated. Shew that, except for very small values of t,
the potential at any instant at a distance x from this end of the cable, will be pro
portional to
CHAPTER X.
STEADY CURRENTS IN CONTINUOUS MEDIA.
Components of Current.
370. IN the present chapter we shall consider steady currents of elec
tricity flowing through continuous two and threedimensional conductors
instead of through systems of linear conductors.
We can find the direction of flow at any point P in a conductor by
imagining that we take a small plane of area dS and turn it about at the
point P until we find the position in which the amount of electricity crossing
it per unit time is a maximum. The normal to the plane when in this
position will give the direction of the current at P, and if the total amount
of electricity crossing this plane per unit time when in this position is CdS,
then C may be defined to be the strength of the current at P.
If I, m, n are the directioncosines of the direction of the current at P,
then the current C may be treated as the superposition of three currents
1C, mC, nC parallel to the axes. To prove this we need only notice that the
flow across an area dS of which the normal makes an angle 6 with the direc
tion of the currrent, and has directioncosines l' t m', n, must be CdS cos 0, or
CdS (IF + mm' + mi*).
The first term of this expression may be regarded as the contribution from a
current 1C parallel to the axis Ox, and so on. The quantities 1C, mC, nC
are called the components of the current at the point P.
Lines and Tubes of Flow.
371. DEFINITION. A line of flow is a line drawn in a conductor such
that at every point its tangent is in the direction of the current at the point.
DEFINITION. A tube of flow is a tubular region of infinitesimal cross
section, bounded by lines of flow.
370373] Steady Currents in continuous Media 331
It is clear that at every point on the surface of a tube of flow, the current
is tangential to the surface. Thus no current crosses the boundary of a tube
of flow, from which it follows that the aggregate current flowing across all
crosssections of a tube of flow will be the same.
The amount of this current will be called the strength of the tube.
Thus if C is the current at any point of a tube of flow, and if o> is the
crosssection of the tube at that point, then Ceo is constant throughout the
length of the tube, and is equal to the strength of the tube.
There is an obvious analogy between tubes of flow in current electricity and tubes
of force in statical electricity, the current C corresponding to the polarisation P.
In current electricity, C<o is constant and equal to the strength of the tube of flow,
while in statical electricity Pa> is constant, and equal to the strength of the tube of force
( 129).
Specific Resistance.
372. The specific resistance of a substance is defined to be the resistance
of a cube of unit edge of the substance, the current entering by a perfectly
conducting electrode which extends over the whole of one face, and leaving
by a similar electrode on the opposite face.
The specific resistances of some substances of which conductors and insulators are
frequently made, are given in the following table. The units are the centimetre and
the ohm.
Silver I'GlxK) 6 .
Copper 164 x 10 ~ 6 .
Iron (soft) 983x10 ~ 6 .
(hard) 906x106.
Mercury 96'15xlO~ 6 .
Dilute sulphuric acid (^ acid at 22 C.) 3'3.
(J acid at 22 C.) 1'6.
Glass (at 200 C.) 2'27 x 10 7 .
(at 400 C.) 735 x 10 4 .
Guttapercha, about 3 x 10 14 .
If T is the specific resistance of any substance, the resistance of a wire of
length I and crosssection s will clearly be .
Ohm's Law.
373. In a conductor in which a current is flowing, different points will,
in general, be at different potentials. Thus there will be a system of equi
potentials and of lines of force inside a conductor similar to those in an
electrostatic field. It is found, as an experimental fact, that in a homo
geneous conductor, the lines of flow coincide with the lines of force or, in
other words, the electricity at every point moves in the direction of the
forces acting on it.
332 Steady Currents in continuous Media [OH. x
In considering the motion of material particles in general it is not usually true that the
motion of the particles is in the direction of the forces acting upon them. The velocity
of a particle at the end of any small interval of time is compounded of the velocity at
the beginning of the interval together with the velocity generated during the interval.
The latter velocity is in the direction of the forces acting on the particle, but is
generally insignificant in comparison with the original velocity of the particle. In the
particular case in which the original velocity of the particle was very small, the direction
of motion at the end of a small interval will be that of the force acting on the particle.
If the particle moves in a resisting medium, it may be that the velocity of the particle
is kept permanently very small by the resistance of the medium : in this case the
direction of motion of the particle at every instant, relatively to the medium, may be
that of the forces acting on it.
On the modern view of electricity, a current of electricity is composed of electrons
which are driven through a conductor by the electric forces acting on them, and in
their motion experience frequent collisions with the molecules of the conductor. The
effect of these collisions is continually to check the velocity of the electrons, so that
their velocity is kept small just as if they were moving through a resisting medium
of the ordinary kind, and so it comes about that the velocity at all stages of the motion
is in the direction of the electric intensity.
374. Let us select any tube of force of small crosssection inside a
conductor, and let P, Q be any two points on this tube of force, at which the
potentials are V P and VQ, the former being the greater. Let these points be
so near together that throughout the range PQ the crosssection of the tube
of force may be supposed to have a constant value o>, while the specific resist
ance of the material of the conductor may be supposed to have a constant
value r.
From what has been said in 373, it follows that the tube of force under
consideration is also a tube of flow. If C denotes the current, then the current
flowing through this tube of flow in the direction from P to Q will be Co).
This current may, within the range PQ, be regarded as flowing through a
conductor of crosssection o> and of specific resistance r. The resistance of
PQ r
this conductor from P to Q is accordingly  , while the fall of potential
is V P VQ. Thus by Ohm's Law
so that ^P^ =(7T *
If ;r denotes differentiation along the tube of force, the fraction on the
left of the foregoing equation reduces, when P and Q are made to coincide,
dV
to ^ , so that the equation assumes the form
 d ^=Cr .............. (309).
373375] Equation of Continuity 333
Let I, m, n be the directioncosines of the line of flow at P, and let u, v, w
be the components of current at P, so that u = 1C, etc. Then
dV .97
5 = I 5 = ICr ur, etc.,
dx ds
and we see that equation (309) is equivalent to the three equations
18F
u = ^~
T OX
v =
187
r dy
w = ^~
T OZ
V (310).
These equations express Ohm's Law in a form appropriate to flow through
a solid conductor.
Equation of Continuity.
375. Since we are supposing the currents to be steady, the amount of
current which flows into any closed region must be exactly equal to the
amount which flows out. This can be expressed by saying that the integral
algebraic flow into any closed region must be nil.
Let any closed surface 8 be taken entirely inside a conductor. Let I, m, n
be the direction cosines of the inward normal to any element dS of this
surface, and let u, v, w be the components of current at this point. Then
the normal component of flow across the element dS is lu 4 mv + nw, and the
condition that the integral algebraic flow across the surface 8 shall be nil is
expressed by the equation
([(lu + mv + nw) dS = 0.
By Green's Theorem ( 176), this equation may be transformed into
Mdu dv dw\
***+*r*
and since this integral has to vanish, whatever the region through which it is
taken, each integrand must vanish separately. Hence at every point inside
the conductor, we must have
This is the socalled " equation of continuity," expressing that no elec
tricity is created or destroyed or allowed to accumulate during the passage of
a steady current through a conductor.
334 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
The same equation can be obtained at once on considering the current
flow across the different faces of a small rectangular parallelepiped of edges
dx t dy, dz (cf. 49).
Equation (310) of course expresses that the vector C of which the com
ponents are u, v, w, must be solenoidal. The equation of continuity can
accordingly be expressed in the form
div C = 0.
Equation satisfied by the Potential.
376. On substituting in equation (311) the values for u, v, w given by
equations (310), we obtain
d I\ 1 (1 3T\ _ ft
dy) + dz('T dz)~
The potential must accordingly be a solution of this differential equation.
The equation is the same as would be satisfied by the potential in an
uncharged dielectric in an electrostatic field, provided the inductive capacity
at every point is proportional to  . If the specific resistance of the conduc
tor is the same throughout, the differential equation to be satisfied by the
potential reduces to
V 2 V = 0.
377. We may for convenience suppose that the current enters and leaves
by perfectly conducting electrodes, and that the conductor through which the
current flows is bounded, except at the electrodes, by perfect insulators.
Then, over the surface of contact between the conductor and the electrodes,
the potential will be constant. Over the remaining boundaries of the con
ductor, the condition to be satisfied is that there shall be no flow of current,
3F
and this is expressed mathematically by the condition that = shall vanish.
Thus the problem of determining the currentflow in a conductor amounts
mathematically to determining a function V such that equation (312) is
satisfied throughout the volume of the conductor, while either = 0, or else
V has a specified value, at each point on the boundary. By the method used
in 188, it is easily shewn that the solution of this problem is unique.
It is only in a very few simple cases that an exact solution of the problem
can be obtained. There are, however, various artifices by which approxima
tions can be reached, and various ways of regarding the problem from which
it may be possible to form some ideas of the physical processes which deter
mine the nature of the flow in a conductor. Some of these will be discussed
later ( 386 394). At present we consider general characteristics of the
flow of currents through conductors.
375379] Boundary Conditions 335
CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED AT THE BOUNDARY OF TWO
CONDUCTING MEDIA.
378. The conditions to be satisfied at a boundary at which the current
flows from one conductor to another are as follows :
(i) Since there must be no accumulation of electricity at the boundary,
the normal flow across the boundary must be the same whether calculated in
the first medium or the second. In other words
1 dV
^ must be continuous,
r dn
where denotes differentiation along the normal to the boundary.
on
(ii) The tangential force must be continuous, or else the potential
would not be continuous. Thus
must be continuous,
OS
where ~ denotes differentiation along any line in the boundary.
OS
These boundary conditions are just the same as would be satisfied in an
electrostatical problem at the boundary between two dielectrics of inductive
capacities equal to the two values of  . Thus the equipotentials in this
electrostatic problem coincide with the equipotentials in the actual current
problem, and the lines of force in the electrostatic problem correspond with
the lines of flow in the current problem.
Clearly these results could be deduced at once from the differential equation (312) on
passing to the limit and making r become discontinuous on crossing a boundary.
Refraction of Lines of Flow.
379. Let any line of flow cross the boundary between two different
conducting media of specific resistances r lt r 2 , making angles 1} e 2 with the
normal at the point at which it meets the boundary in the two media
respectively. The lines of flow satisfy the same conditions as would be
satisfied by electrostatic lines of force crossing the boundary between two
dielectrics of inductive capacities , , so that we must have (cf. equa
tion (71))
COt 1 = COt 2 .
T"l T 2
Hence r x tan e : = r 2 tan e 2 ,
expressing the law of refraction of lines of flow.
336 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
380. As an example of refraction of lines of current flow, we may
consider the case of a steady uniform current in a conductor being disturbed
by the presence of a sphere of different metal inside the conductor. The
lines shewn in fig. 78 will represent the lines of flow if the specific
resistance of the sphere is less than that of the main conductor. The lines
of flow tend to crowd into the sphere, this being the better conductor in
the language of popular science, the current tends to take the path of least
resistance.
Charge on a Surface of Discontinuity.
381. If u is the normal component of current flowing across the
boundary between two different conductors, we have by Ohm's law,
_! ?EL  ??
TI dn T 2 dn '
where = denotes differentiation along the normal which is drawn in the
dn
direction in which u is measured (say from (1) to (2)), and V lt V 2 are the
potentials in the two conductors.
If there is no charge on the boundary between the two conductors we
must, from equation (70), have the relation
where K l} K 2 are the inductive capacities of the two conductors. This
condition will, however, in general be inconsistent with the condition which,
as we have just seen, is made necessary by the continuity of u. Thus there
will in general be a surface charge on the boundary between two conductors
of different materials.
The amount of this charge is given at once by equation (72), p. 125. If a
denotes the surface density at any point, we have
^(K^K^u ..................... (313).
This surface charge is very small compared with the charges which occur in statical
electricity. For instance, if we have current of 100 amperes per sq. cm. passing from one
metallic conductor to another, we take in formula (313),
u=lOO amperes =3 x 10 11 electrostatic units,
106
the last two being true as regards ordef of magnitude only. The value of 47r<r is of the
order of magnitude of KTU, or ^ x 10 ~ 6 in electrostatic units. As has been said, the value
of 47TO at the surface of a conductor charged as highly as possible in air is of the order
of 100.
380384] Generation of Heat 337
382. As an example of the distribution of a surface charge, we may
notice that the surfacedensity of the charge on the surface of the sphere
dV
considered in 380 will be proportional to either value of = , and therefore
to cos 0, where 6 is the angle between the radius through the point and the
direction of flow of the undisturbed current.
GENERATION OF HEAT.
383. Consider any small element of a tube of flow, length ds, cross
section ft). The current per unit area is, by equations (310),  = , so
1 dV
that the current flowing through the tube is  = co. The resistance of
T 08
the element of the tube under consideration is  . Hence, as in 355, the
amount of heat generated per unit time in this element is
/I dV y rds 1 flV\* ,
 5 I  or  ( 5 a) ds.
\T OS ) ft) T V OS J
Thus the heat generated per unit time per unit volume is  f^r] , and
the total generation of heat per unit time will be
+
Thus the heat generated per unit time is STT times the energy of the
whole field in the analogous electrostatic problem ( 168).
Rate of generation of heat a minimum.
384. It can be shewn that for a given current flowing through a con
ductor, the rate of heat generation is a minimum when the current distributes
itself as directed by Ohm's Law. To do this we have to compare the rate of
heat generation just obtained with the rate of heat generation when the
current distributes itself in some other way.
Let us suppose that the components of current at any point have no
longer the values
_idv __idv _idv
r dx ' r dy ' T dz
assigned to them by Ohm's Law, but that they have different values
IdV IdV IdV
~ + u, ^+^> * + w >
T ox T dy T oz
j. 22
338 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
In order that there may be no accumulation at any point under this new
distribution, the components of current must satisfy the equation of con
tinuity, so that we must have
du dv dw
,+ + = ........................... (315).
dx dy dz
By the same reasoning as in 383, we find for the rate at which heat is
generated under the new system of currents,
fff (/ 1 3V y / i W Y / i dV v) j
I II Hi ~ 3 + *) + ( ^T + v ) +( a"+ w ) \dccdydz,
J JJ (\ r dx ) V T 9y / V T dz ) }
which, on expanding, is equal to
f/Yi f/ary /ary fi^Y) j , 7
I  1 5 )+(* 1 + 5 ) r dxdydz
JJ] r \\dxj \dyj \d2j J
3V dV dV
dxdydz .............................. (316).
Ofi transforming by Green's Theorem, the second term
xyz  V(lu
The volume integral vanishes by equation (315), the integrand of the
surface integral vanishes over each electrode from the condition that the total
flow of current across the electrode is to remain unaltered, and at every point
of the insulating boundary from the condition that there is to be no flow
across this boundary. Thus the new rate of generation of heat is represented
by the first and third terms of expression (316). The first term represents
the old rate of generation of heat, the third term is an essentially positive
quantity. Thus the rate of heat generation is increased by any deviation
from the natural distribution of currents, proving the result.
385. An immediate result of this is that any increase or decrease in the
specific resistance of any part of a conductor is accompanied by an increase
or decrease of the resistance of the conductor as a whole. For on decreasing
the value of r at any point and keeping the distribution of currents
unaltered, the rate of heat production will obviously decrease. On allow
ing the currents to assume their natural distribution, the rate of heat
production will further decrease. Thus the rate of heat production with a
natural distribution of currents is lessened by any decrease of specific
resistance. But if / is the total current transmitted by the conductor, and
R the resistance of the conductor, this rate of heat production is RP.
Thus R decreases when r is decreased at any point, and obviously the
converse must be true (cf. 359).
384386] Special Problems 339
THE SOLUTION OF SPECIAL PROBLEMS.
Currentflow in an Infinite Conductor.
386. A good approximation to the conditions of electric flow can
occasionally be obtained by neglecting the restrictive influence of the
boundaries of a conductor, and regarding the problem as one of flow between
two electrodes in an infinite conductor. For simplicity, we shall consider only
the case in which the conductor is homogeneous.
The conditions to be satisfied by the potential V are as follows. We
must have V V^ over one electrode, and VV Z over the second electrode,
dV 1
while ^ must vanish at infinity to a higher order than and throughout
the conductor we must have V 2 F= ( 376). We can easily see (cf. 186,
187) that these conditions determine V uniquely.
Consider now an analogous electrostatic problem. Let the conducting
medium be replaced by air, while the electrodes remain conductors. Let
the electrodes receive equal and opposite charges of electricity until their
difference of potential is T^ V 2 . At this stage let ty denote the electro
static potential at any point in the field. Let fa, fa be the values of ty over
the two electrodes, so that fa fa = Vi TJ. Then there will be a constant
C (namely V[ fa\ such that ty + C assumes the values T^, TJ respectively
over the two electrodes. Moreover VS/r = throughout the field, so that
V 2 (ty + C) = throughout the field, and ir = at infinity except for terms
I O
in (cf. 67) so that ~ (ty + C) vanishes at infinity to a higher order
than .
r 2
Hence \/r f G satisfies the conditions which, as we have seen, must be
satisfied by the potential V in the current problem, and these are known to
suffice to determine V uniquely. It follows that the value of V must be
^ + C.
Thus the lines of flow in the current problem are identical with the lines
of force when the two electrodes are charged to different potentials in air.
The normal currentflow at any point on the surface of an electrode is
_1 d_V
r dn'
so that the total flow of current outwards from this electrode
222
340 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
If E is the charge on this electrode in the analogous electrostatic problem,
we have, by Gauss' Theorem,
so that the total flow of current is seen to be  .
r
If Pn , Pi2,p*2 are the coefficients of potential in the electrostatic problem
so that
If / is the total current, and R the equivalent resistance between the
electrodes, we have just seen that
so that
If we regard the two electrodes in air as forming a condenser, and denote
its capacity by (7, we have
so that
387. As instances of the applications of formulae (317) and (318) to
special problems, we have the following :
I. The resistance per unit length between two concentric cylinders of
radii a, b (as, for instance, the resistance between the core of a submarine
cable and the sea), is, by formula (318),
T . b
27r log a
II. The resistance per unit length between two straight parallel
cylindrical wires of radii a, 6, placed with their centres at a great distance r
apart, in an infinite conducting medium, is, by formula (317),
 ^: ( l g a  2 log r + log b)
r r 2
= TT log 7 .
STT 6 ab
386389] Special Problems 341
III. The resistance between two spherical electrodes, radii a, 6, at a
great distance r apart, in an infinite conducting medium, is, by formula (317),
47T (a b
388. If two electrodes of any shape are placed in an infinite medium at
a distance r apart, which is great compared with their linear distances, we
may take p^ in formula (317) equal, to a first approximation, to . This is
small compared with p n and p^, so that, to a first approximation, we may
replace formula (317) by
It accordingly appears that the resistance of the infinite medium may be
regarded as the sum of two resistances a resistance ^ at the crossing of
the current from the first electrode to the medium, and a resistance ^ at
the return of the current from the medium to the second electrode. Thus
we may legitimately speak of the resistance of a single junction between an
electrode and the conducting medium surrounding it.
For instance, suppose a circular plate of radius a is buried deep in the earth, and acts
as electrode to distribute a current through the earth. The value of p u for a disc of
radius a is ^, so that the resistance of the junction is 5. So also if a disc of radius a
is placed on the earth's surface, the resistance at the junction is , and clearly this
also is the resistance if the electrode is a semicircle of radius a buried vertically in the
earth with its diameter in the surface.
Flow in a Plane Sheet of Metal.
389. When the flow takes place in a sheet of metal of uniform thickness
and structure, so that the current at every point may be regarded as flowing
in a plane parallel to the surface of the sheet, the whole problem becomes
twodimensional. If x t y are rectangular coordinates, the problem reduces to
that of finding a solution of
which shall be such that either V has a given value, or else r = 0, at every
on
point of the boundary. The methods already given in Chap. vin. for obtain
ing twodimensional solutions of Laplace's equation are therefore available
for the present problem. The method of greatest value is that of Conjugate
Functions.
342 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
If the conducting medium extends to infinity, or is bounded entirely by
the two electrodes, the transformations will be identical with those already
discussed for two conductors at different potentials ( 386). If the medium
dV
has also boundaries at which ^ = 0, the procedure must be slightly different.
We must try to transform the two electrodes into lines V = constant, and the
other boundaries into lines U = constant, so that the whole of the medium
becomes transformed into the interior of a rectangle in the U, V plane.
Let U+iV=f(x + iy)
be a transformation which gives the required value for V over both electrodes,
3F
and gives ^ = over the boundary of a conductor. Then V will be the
potential at any point, the lines V= constant will be the equipotentials, and
the lines U = constant, the orthogonal trajectories of the equipotentials, will
be the lines of flow.
At any point the direction of the current is normal to the equipotential
through the point, and of amount
But ^ is equal to ^ , where = denotes differentiation in the equipotential.
dn ds ds
Thus the current flowing across any piece PQ of an equipotential
Cds
!
P
=ds = (U Q  Up),
r ds r v
If P, Q are any two points in the conductor, a path from P to Q can be
regarded as made up of a piece of an equipotential PN, and a piece of a line
of flow NQ. The flow across NQ is zero, that across PN is
This is accordingly the total flow across PQ, and since U N U Q) it may
be written as
\(U Q U. P ).
390. As an illustration, let us suppose that the conducting plate is a
polygon, two or more edges being the electrodes. We can transform this
into the real axis in the fplane by a transformation of the type
llfto^tfa,)*' 1 (319),
and this real axis has to be transformed into a rectangle formed (say) by the
389391]
lines V=V 0i F=
for this will be
Special Problems 343
0, U = C in the TFplane. The transformation
* ...(320),
where a , a p and a q , a r are the points on the real axis of f which determine
the ends of the electrodes. By elimination of f from the integrals of equa
tions (319) and (320) we obtain the transformation required.
391. The following example of this method is taken from a paper by
H. F. Moulton (Proc. Lond. Math. Soc. in. p. 104).
P Q
zplane.
FIG. 101.
TFplane.
FIG. 102.
In fig. 101, let ABCD be a rectangular plate, the piece PQ of one or more
sides being one electrode, and the piece RS of one or more other sides being
the other electrode. Let the rectangle PQRS in fig. 102 be its transforma
tion in the TFplane. In the intermediate fplane, let the points A, B, C, D
transform to % = a, b, c, d respectively, and let the points P, Q, R } S transform
to f = p, q, r, s respectively. Then the transformations are
dW
Kfp) (??);) u;)] *.
If we write
(b c)(a d) _ (q r)(p s)
(ac)(bd) K ' (pr)(qs) *
2m = V(a  c) (b  d), 2m' = V(p r)(q s),
the integrals are
.,_ a (b  d) b(a d) sri* mz (mod K)
6 d (a d) sn' 2 mz (mod K)
p(gs)q(ps)su 2 m'W(mod\) ( }
q  s (p s ) sn^'T^mod X)
T7 nff'
The sides AB, AD of the first rectangle are the periods ,   of
sn mz (mod K) ; the sides PQ, RS of the second rectangle are the periods in
TJT L iU
W , say , , , , of sn t
m m
344 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
In the TFplane, the potential difference of the two electrodes is PS, or f ,
1 L r
while the current is  PQ, or 7 . The equivalent resistance of the plate
is accordingly rL'/L, so that the quantity we are trying to determine is L'/L.
Let the coordinates of P, Q, R, S in the 2plane be z 1} z 2 , z 3 , z. In the
fplane the coordinates of these points are p, q, r, s. Hence from equations
(321), we have
_ a (b d) b (a d) sn 2 mz l (mod K)
. (6 d) (a d) sn 2 mzj (mod /c)
and similar equations for q, r, s. The ratio L'/L of which we are in search
is now given by
L' _ (q r) ( p s) _ (sn 2 mz z sn 2 mz s ) (sn 2 mz l sn 2 mz^)
L (p r)(q s) (so 2 mz l sn 2 mz s ) (sn 2 mz 2 sn 2 mz 4 ) '
the whole being to modulus K. The values of sn mz can be obtained from
Legendre's Tables.
Moulton has calculated the resistance of a square sheet with electrodes
each of length equal to onefifth of a side, in the following four cases :
(1) Electrodes at middle of two opposite sides, Resistance = 1*745.22,
(2) Electrodes at ends of two opposite sides and facing one another,
Resistance = 240&R,
(3) Electrodes at ends of two opposite sides and not facing one
another, Resistance = 2*589^,
(4) Electrodes bent equally round two opposite corners of square,
Resistance = 3'027^ 3
where R is the resistance of the square when the whole of two opposite sides
form the electrodes. A comparison of the results in cases (2) and (3) shews
how large a part of the resistance is due to the crowding in of the lines of
force near the electrode, and how small a part arises from the uncrowded
part of the path.
Limits to the Resistance of a Conductor.
392. The result obtained in 386 enables us to assign an upper and
a lower limit to the resistance of a conductor, when this resistance cannot be
calculated accurately. For if any parts of the conductor are made into
perfect conductors, the resistance of the whole will be lessened, and it may
be possible to change parts of the conductor into perfect conductors in such
a way that the resistance of the new conductor can be calculated. This
resistance will then be a lower limit to the resistance of the original con
ductor.
391394]
Special Problems
345
As an illustration, we may examine the case of a straight wire of variable
crosssection S. Let us imagine that at small distances along its length we
take crosssections of infinitely small thickness, and make these into perfect
conductors. The resistance between two such sections at distance ds apart,
w i\\ be ~ , where 8 is the crosssection of either. Thus a lower limit to
o
the resistance is supplied by the formula
?cb
393. Again, if we replace parts of the conductor by insulators, so causing
the current to flow in given channels, the resistance of the whole is increased,
and in this way we may be able to assign an upper limit to the resistance
of a conductor.
394. As an instance of a conductor to the resistance of which both
upper and lower limits can be assigned, let us consider the case of a
cylindrical conductor AB terminating in an infinite
conductor G of the same material. This example is
of practical importance in connection with mercury
resistance standards. The appropriate analysis was
first given by Lord Rayleigh, discussing a parallel
problem in the theory of sound.
Let I be the length and a the radius of the tube.
To obtain a lower limit to the resistance, we imagine
a perfectly conducting plane inserted at B. The resistance then consists of
the resistance to this new electrode at B, plus the resistance from this with
the infinite conductor G. The former resistance is 2 , the latter, by 388,
is T , so that a lower limit to the whole resistance is
.
ira 2 4,a'
which is the resistance of a length I f j of the tube.
To obtain an upper limit to the resistance, we imagine nonconducting
tubes placed inside the main tube AB, so that the current is constrained to
flow in a uniform stream parallel to the axis of the main tube until the
end B is reached. After this the current flows through the semiinfinite
conductor G as directed by Ohm's Law.
The resistance of the tube AB is, as before, ^r . To obtain the resist
TTGT
ance of the conductor (7, we must examine the corresponding electrostatic
problem. If / is the total current, the flow of current per unit area over
346 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
the circular mouth at B is 7/7ra 2 . In order that the potentials in the
electrostatic problem may be the same, we must have a uniform surface
density of electricity
/ \ T/
0 = J or
m>/yS
on the surface of the disc.
The heat generated is PR, where 72 is the resistance of the conductor C.
It is also
taken through the conductor C. Now if W is the electrostatic energy of
a disc of
we have
a disc of radius a, having a uniform surface density cr = 2 on each side,
^ * ^
o +15] + o \dxdydz,
dxJ \dyj \dzJ)
where the integral is taken through all space, or again,
where the integral is taken through the semiinfinite space on one side of
the disc, i.e. through the space C, if the disc is made to coincide with the
mouth B. On substituting for the volume integral in expression (323), we
find that
Following Maxwell, we shall find it convenient to calculate W directly
from the potential. If a disc of radius r has a uniform surface density cr
on each side, the potential at a point P on its edge will be
where the integral is taken over one side of the disc, and r is the distance
from P to the element dxdy. Taking polar coordinates, with P as origin,
the equation of the circle will be r = 26 cos 0, we may replace dxdy by
rdrdd, and obtain
/r=2bcos9 ["0=
r= J=
drd0
On increasing the radius of the disc to b + db, we bring up a charge
4i7rbcrdb from infinity to potential 8bcr, so that the work done is
394, 395] Passage of Electricity through Dielectrics 347
and integrating from b = to b = a, we find for the potential energy of the
complete disc of radius a,
Thus, from equation (324),
 B = 7v" : '
or, since cr =
Pr ' 37V
rl
Thus an upper limit to the whole resistance is
lr_ _8r_
Tra 2 . 37r 2 a'
o
which is the resistance of a length I +^ a of the tube.
O7T
Thus we may say that the resistance of the whole is that of a length
Q
I + aa of the tube, where a is intermediate between  and ^ , i.e. between
4 O7T
785 and "849. Lord Kayleigh*, by more elaborate analysis, has shewn that
the upper limit for a. must be less than "8242, and believes that the true
value of a must be pretty close to '82.
THE PASSAGE OF ELECTRICITY THROUGH DIELECTRICS.
395. Since even the best insulators are not wholly devoid of conducting
power, it is of importance to consider the flow of electricity in dielectrics.
Using the previous notation, we shall denote the potential at any point
in the dielectric by V, the specific resistance by r, and the inductive capacity
by K. We shall consider steady flow first.
If the flow is to be steady, the equation of continuity, namely
SV\ 3/1SFN 3/13FN ( ^ }>
must be satisfied. Also if there is a volume density of electrification p, the
potential must satisfy equation (62), namely
ffeir)!* < 326 >
dz\ dzj
From a comparison of equations (325) and (326), it is clear that steady
flow will not generally be consistent with having p = 0. Hence if currents
are started flowing through an uncharged dielectric, the dielectric will
acquire volume charges before the currents become steady. When the
* Theory of Sound, Vol. n. Appendix A.
348 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
currents have become steady, the value of V will be determined by
equation (325) and the boundary conditions, and the value of p is then given
by equation (326).
From equations (325) and (326), we obtain
,_ 1 f/i(^) + f S F3 I
4<7rT\dx dx^ ty ty dzdz^ '}
The condition that p shall vanish, whatever the value of F, is that Kr shall
be constant throughout the dielectric : if this condition is satisfied the value
of p necessarily vanishes at every point for all systems of steady currents.
The most important case of this condition being satisfied occurs when the
dielectric is homogeneous throughout. If Kr is not constant throughout
the dielectric, equation (327) shews that we can have p at every point
provided the surfaces F = cons, and Kr = cons, cut one another at right
angles at every point, i.e. provided Kr is constant along every line of flow.
We have already had an illustration ( 381) of the accumulation of
charge which occurs when the value of Kr varies in passing along a line
of flow.
Time of Relaxation in a Homogeneous Dielectric.
396. Let a homogeneous dielectric be charged so that the volume
density at any point is p.
If any closed surface is taken inside the dielectric, the total charge
inside this surface must be
1 1 1 p dxdydz,
while the rate at which electricity flows into the surface will, as in 375, be
(lu + mv + n w) dS,
where u, v, w are the components of current and I, m, n are the direction
cosines of the normal drawn into the surface. Since this rate of flow into
the surface must be equal to the rate at which the charge inside the surface
increases, we must have
1 1 (lu + mv + nw) dS = r Ml P dxdydz
^ t dxdydz.
SSI
The integral on the left may, by Green's Theorem, be transformed into
du dv
M
and this again is equal, by equations (310), to
8 2 F 8 2 F
395397] Passage of Electricity through Dielectrics 349
Thus we have
f/7fl /9 2 F 9 2 F9 2 F\ dp[,
III \~ 3T + ^T+^r ~?:\dxdydz = Q,
JJj [T V9# 2 dy* 9^ 2 / at)
and since this is true whatever surface is taken, each integrand must vanish
separately, and we must have, at every point of the dielectric,
e^F 3*F
dx* + df +
We have also, as in equation (326),
e^F 3*F d*V_ dp
dx* + d + a* 2 ~ T dt m
4t7Tp
df~*~!w~ "IT'
dp _ 47T
The integral of this equation is
dp
so that
Kr
where p is the value of p at time t = 0.
Thus the charge at every point in the dielectric falls off exponentially
with the time, the modulus of decay being == . The time .  , in which
xx T 4?T
all the charges in the dielectric are reduced to l/e times their original
value, is called the "time of relaxation," being analogous to the corresponding
quantity in the Dynamical Theory of Gases *.
The relaxationtime admits of experimental determination, and as r is
easily determined, this gives us a means of determining K experimentally
for conductors. In the case of good conductors, the relaxationtime is too
small to be observed with any accuracy, but the method has been employed
by Cohn and Aronsf to determine the inductive capacity of water. The
value obtained, K= 73*6, does not, however, appear to be consistent with the
molecular theory of dielectrics explained in Chap. V.
Discharge of a Condenser.
397. Let us suppose that a condenser is charged up to a certain
potential, and that a certain amount of leakage takes place through the
dielectric between the two plates. Then, as we have just seen, the dielectric
will, except in very special cases, become charged with electricity.
Now suppose that the two plates are connected by a wire, so that, in
ordinary language, the condenser is discharged. Conduction through the
wire is a very much quicker process than conduction through the dielectric,
* Cf. Maxwell, Collected Works, n. p. 681, or Jeans, Dynamical Theory of Gases, p. 294.
t Wied. Ann, xxvni. p. 454.
350 Steady Currents in continuous Media [CH. x
so that we may suppose that the plates of the condenser are reduced to the
same potential before the charges imprisoned in the dielectric have begun to
move. For simplicity, let us suppose that the plates of the condenser are
both reduced to potential zero. Then the surface of the dielectric may,
with fair accuracy, be regarded an an equipotential surface, the potential
being zero all over it. It follows that there can be no lines of force outside
this equipotential : all lines of force which originate on the charges im
prisoned in the dielectric, and which do not terminate on similar charges,
must terminate on the surface of the dielectric. Thus we shall have a
system of charges on the surface of the dielectric, these charges being equal
in magnitude but opposite in sign to those of the Green's "equivalent
stratum" corresponding to the system of charges imprisoned in the dielectric.
This system of charges on the surface of the dielectric is of the kind which
Faraday would call a "bound" charge (cf. 141).
Suppose the plates of the condenser to be again insulated. The system
of charges inside the dielectric and at its surface is not an equilibrium dis
tribution, so that currents will be set up in the dielectric, and a general
rearrangement of electricity will take place. The potentials throughout the
dielectric will change, and in particular the potentials of the condenserplates
at the surface of the dielectric will change. In other words, the charge on
these plates is no longer a "bound" charge, but becomes, at least partially, a
"free" charge. On joining the two plates by a wire, a new discharge will
take place.
This is Maxwell's explanation of the phenomenon of " residual discharge."
It is found that, some time after a condenser has been discharged and
insulated, a second and smaller discharge can be obtained on joining the
plates, after this a third, and so on, almost indefinitely. It should be
noticed that, on the explanation which has been given, no residual discharge
ought to take place if the dielectric is perfectly homogeneous. Maxwell's
theory accordingly receives confirmation from the experiments of Rowland
and Nichols* and others, who shewed that the residual discharge disappeared
when homogeneous dielectrics were employed.
REFERENCES.
Flow in Conductors :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Vol. i. Part u. Chaps, vn, vm, ix.
Flow in Dielectrics, Residual Charges, etc. :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Vol. I. Part n. Chaps, x, XII.
WINKELMANN'S Handbuch der Physik. Vol. iv. 1, pp. 157 et seq.
HOPKINSON. Original Papers (Camb. Univ. Press, 1901). Vol. n.
* Phil. Mag. [5] vol. n. p. 414 (1881).
Examples 351
EXAMPLES.
1. The ends of a rectangular conducting lamina of breadth c, length a, and uniform
thickness T, are maintained at different potentials. If f(x, y} be the specific resistance p
at a point whose distances from an end and a side are #, y, prove that the resistance of
the lamina cannot be less than
dx
or greater than
2. Two large vessels filled with mercury are connected by a capillary tube of uniform
bore. Find superior and inferior limits to the conductivity.
3. A cylindrical cable consists of a conducting core of copper surrounded by a thin
insulating sheath of material of given specific resistance. Shew that if the sectional
areas of the core and sheath are given, the resistance to lateral leakage is greatest when
the surfaces of the two materials are coaxal right circular cylinders.
4. Prove that the product of the resistance to leakage per unit length between two
practically infinitely long parallel wires insulated by a uniform dielectric and at different
potentials, and the capacity per unit length, is Kp/^Tr, where K is the inductive capacity
and p the specific resistance of the dielectric. Prove also that the time that elapses before
the potential difference sinks to a given fraction of its original value is independent of the
sectional dimensions and relative positions of the wires.
5. If the right sections of the wires in the last question are semicircles described on
opposite sides of a square as diameters, and outside the square, while the cylindrical space
whose section is the semicircles similarly described on the other two sides of the square is
filled up with a dielectric of infinite specific resistance, and all the neighbouring space is
filled up with a dielectric of resistance p, prove that the leakage per unit length in unit
time is 2 F/p, where V is the potential difference.
6. If ^ + ^=/(^+*y), and the curves for which <p = cons. be closed curves, shew that
the insulation resistance between lengths I of the surfaces <p = (p > 0=<pi, is
p (<Pi ~ <Po)
where [\^] is the increment of ^ on passing once round a <pcurve, and p is the specific
resistance of the dielectric.
7. Current enters and leaves a uniform circular disc through two circular wires of
small radius e whose central lines pass through the edge of the disc at the extremities of
a chord of length d. Shew that the total resistance of the sheet is
(2cr/ir) log (die).
8. Using the transformation
prove that the resistance of an infinite strip of uniform breadth TT between two electrodes
distant 2a apart, situated on the middle line of the strip and having equal radii 5, is
log ( TT tanh a ) .
\fl /
352 Steady Currents in continuous Media [OH. x
9. Shew that the transformation
x' + iy' = cosh TT (x + iy}la
enables us to obtain the potential due to any distribution of electrodes upon a thin
conductor in the form of the semiinfinite strip bounded by y=0, #=, and #=0.
If the margin be uninsulated, find the potential and flow due to a source at the point
x = c, y = n Shew that if the flows across the three edges are equal, then irc=a cosh" 1 2.
10. Equal and opposite electrodes are placed at the extremities of the base of an
isosceles triangular lamina, the length of one of the equal sides being a, and the vertical
2?r
angle . Shew that the lines of flow and equal potential are given by
. 2 w 1 + cn u
2 ~ 1 en u '
where
and the modulus of en u is sin 75, the origin being at the vertex.
11. A circular sheet of copper, of specific resistance <TI per unit area, is inserted in a
very large sheet of tinfoil (CT O ), and currents flow in the composite sheet, entering and
leaving at electrodes. Prove that the currentfunction in the tinfoil corresponding to an
electrode at which a current e enters the tinfoil is the coefficient of i in the imaginary
part of
"o e [~i / \ OQ OI i cz
  log (z  c) + i  log  ,
ZTT [_ oQ + oi cz  a?j '
where a is the radius of the copper sheet, z is a complex variable with its origin at the
centre of the sheet, and c is the distance of the electrode from the origin, the real axis
passing through the electrode.
Generalise the expression for any position of the electrode in the copper or in the
tinfoil, and investigate the corresponding expressions determining the lines of flow in the
copper.
12. A uniform conducting sheet has the form of the catenary of revolution
y2 + s*=c 2 cosh 2  t
Prove that the potential at any point due to an electrode at # , y > ^05 introducing a
current (7, is
(7(7, / . X Xn
constant  log I cosh 
** \ ^
CHAPTER XL
PERMANENT MAGNETISM.
PHYSICAL PHENOMENA.
398. IT is found that certain bodies, known as magnets, will attract or
repel one another, while a magnet will also exert forces on pieces of iron or
steel which are not themselves magnets, these forces being invariably attrac
tive. The most familiar fact of magnetism, namely the tendency of a
magnetic needle to point north and south, is simply a particular instance of
the first of the sets of phenomena just mentioned, it being found that the
earth itself may be regarded as a vast aggregation of magnets.
The simplest piece of apparatus used for the experimental study of
magnetism is that known as a barmagnet. This consists of a bar of steel
which shews the property of attracting to itself small pieces of steel or iron.
Usually it is found that the magnetic properties of a barmagnet reside
largely or entirely at its two ends. For instance, if the whole bar is dipped
into a collection of iron filings, it is found that the filings are attracted in
great numbers to its two ends, while there is hardly any attraction to the
middle parts, so that on lifting the bar out from the collection of filings, we
shall find that filings continue to cluster round the ends of the bar, while the
middle regions will be comparatively free.
Poles of a Magnet.
399. The two ends of a magnet or, more strictly, the two regions in
which the magnetic properties are concentrated are spoken of as the
" poles " of the magnet. If the magnet is freely suspended, it will turn so
that the line joining the two poles points approximately north and south. The
pole which places itself so as to point towards the north is called the " north
seeking pole/' while the other pole, pointing to the south, is called the " south
seeking pole."
By experimenting with two or more magnets, it is found to be a general
law that similar poles repel one another, while dissimilar poles attract one
another.
j. 23
354 Permanent Magnetism [en. xi
The earth may roughly be regarded as a single magnet of which the two
magnetic poles are at points near to the geographical north and south poles.
Since the northern magnetic pole of the earth attracts the northseeking pole
of a suspended barmagnet, it is clear that this northern magnetic pole must
be a southseeking pole ; and similarly the southern pole of the earth must
be a northseeking pole. Lord Kelvin speaks of a southseeking pole as a
" true north " pole i.e. a pole of which the magnetism is of the kind found
in the northerly regions of the earth. But for purposes of mathematical
theory it will be most convenient to distinguish the two kinds of pole by the
entirely neutral terms, positive and negative. And, as a matter of convention,
we agree to call the northseeking pole positive. Thus we have the following
pairs of terms :
Northseeking = True South = Positive,
Southseeking True North = Negative.
Law of Force between Magnetic Poles.
400. By experiments with his torsionbalance, Coulomb established that
the force between two magnetic poles varies inversely as the square of the
distance between them. It was found also to be proportional to the product
of two quantities spoken of as the " strengths " of the poles. Thus if F is the
repulsion between two poles of strengths m, m at a distance r apart, we have
(328).
It is found that c depends on the medium in which the poles are placed,
but is otherwise constant. Clearly if we agree that the strength of positive
poles is to be reckoned as positive, while that of negative poles is reckoned
negative, then c will be a positive quantity.
The Unit Magnetic Pole.
401. Just as Coulomb's electrostatic law of force supplied a convenient
way of measuring the strength of an electric charge, so the law expressed by
equation (328) provides a convenient way of measuring the strength of a
magnetic pole, and so gives a system of magnetic units. A system of units,
analogous to the electrostatic system ( 17, 18) is obtained by defining the
unit pole to be such as to make c = 1 in equation ('328). This system is
called the Magnetic (or, more generally, Electromagnetic) system of units.
We define a unit pole, in this system, to be a pole of strength such that when
placed at unit distance from a pole of equal strength the repulsion between
the two poles is one of unit force.
399403] Physical Phenomena 355
Thus the force F between two poles of strengths m, m', measured in the
Electromagnetic system of units, is given by
The physical dimensions of the magnetic unit can be discussed in just the
same way in which the physical dimensions of the electrostatic unit have
already been discussed in 18.
Moment of a LineMagnet.
402. It is found that every positive pole has associated with it a nega
tive pole of exactly equal strength, and that these two poles are always in
the same piece of matter.
Thus not only are positive and negative magnetism necessarily brought
into existence together and in equal quantities, as is the case with positive
and negative electricity, but, further, it is impossible to separate the positive
and negative magnetism after they have been brought into existence, and in
this respect magnetism is unlike electricity.
It follows that it is impossible to have a body " charged with magnetism "
in the way in which we can have a body charged with electricity. A
magnetised body may possess any number of poles, and at each pole there is,
in a sense, a charge of magnetism; but the total charge of magnetism in the
body will always be zero.
Hence it follows that the simplest and most fundamental piece of matter
we can imagine which is of interest for the theory of magnetism, is not a
small body carrying a charge of magnetism, but a small body carrying (so
to speak) two equal and opposite charges at a certain distance apart.
This leads us to introduce the conception of a linemagnet. A line
magnet is an ideal barmagnet of which the width is infinitesimal, the
length finite, and the poles at the two extreme ends. Thus geometrically
the ideal linemagnet is a line, while its poles are points.
The strengths of the two poles of a linemagnet are necessarily equal and
opposite. The product of the numerical strength of either pole and the dis
tance between the poles is called the " moment " of the linemagnet.
Magnetic Particle.
403. If we imagine the distance between the two poles of a linemagnet
to shrink until it is infinitesimal, the magnet becomes what is spoken of as a
magnetic particle. If + m are the strengths of its ^>oles and ds is the dis
tance between the two poles, the moment of the magnetic particle is mds.
232
356 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
It is easily shewn that, as regards all phenomena occurring at a finite
distance away, two magnetic particles have the same effect if their moments
are equal ; their length and the strengths of their poles separately are of no
importance. To see this we need only consider the case of two magnetic
particles, each having poles + m, and length ds, and therefore moment mds.
Clearly these will produce the same effect at finite distances whether they
are placed end to end or side by side. In the latter case, we have a magnet
of length ds, poles + 2m, while in the former case the two contiguous poles,
being of opposite sign, neutralise one another, and the arrangement is in
effect a magnet of length 2ds and poles m. Thus in each case the moment
is the same, namely 2m ds, while the strengths of the poles and their distances
apart are different.
If we place a large number n of similar magnetic particles end to end, all
the poles will neutralise one another except those at the extreme ends, so
that the arrangement produces the same effect as a linemagnet of length
nds. By taking n = = , where I is a finite length, we see that the effect
of a linemagnet of length I can be produced exactly by n magnetic particles
of length ds.
The two arrangements will be indistinguishable by their magnetic effects
at all external points. There is, however, a way by which it would be easy
to distinguish them. If the arrangement were simply two poles + m, at the
ends of a wire of length I, then on cutting the wire into two pieces, we should
have one pole remaining in each piece. If, however, the arrangement were
+ 4 4  + +  + +  ,... + t + J H + + 
FIG. 104.
that of a series of magnetic particles, we should be able to divide the series
between two particles, and should in this way obtain two complete magnets.
The pair of poles on the two sides of the point of division which have so far
been neutralising one another now figure as independent poles.
As a matter of experiment, it is not only found to be possible to produce
two complete magnets by cutting a single magnet between its poles, but it is
found that two new magnets are produced, no matter at what point the cut
ting takes place. The inference is not only that a natural magnet must be
supposed to consist of magnetic particles, but also that these particles are so
small that when the magnet is cut in two, there is no possibility of cutting a
403405] Physical Phenomena 357
magnetic particle in two, so that one pole is left on each side of the division.
In other words, we must suppose the magnetic particles either to be identical
with the molecules of which the matter is composed or else to be even
smaller than these molecules. At the same time, it will not be necessary
to limit the magnetic particle of mathematical analysis by assigning this
definite meaning to it : any collection of molecules, so small that the whole
space occupied by it may be regarded as infinitesimal, will be spoken of as a
magnetic particle.
404. Axis of a magnetic particle. The axis of a magnetic particle is
defined to be the direction of a line drawn from the negative to the positive
pole of the particle.
It will be clear, from what has already been said, that the effect of a
magnetic particle at all external points is known when we know its position,
axis and moment.
Intensity of Magnetisation.
405. In considering a barmagnet, which must be supposed to have
breadth as well as length, we have to consider the magnetic particles as
being stacked side by side as well as placed end to end. For clearness, let
us suppose that the magnet is a rectangular parallelepiped, its length being
parallel to the axis of x, while its height and breadth are parallel to the two
other axes. The poles of this barmagnet may be supposed to consist of a
uniform distribution of infinitesimal magnetic poles over each of the two
faces parallel to the plane of yz, let us say a distribution of poles of aggregate
strength I per unit area at the positive pole, and / per unit area at the
negative pole, so that if A is the area of each of these faces, the poles of the
magnet are of strengths I A.
As a first step, we may regard the magnet as made up of an infinite
number of linemagnets placed side by side, each linemagnet being a
rectangular prism parallel to the length of the magnet, and of very small
crosssection. Thus a prism of crosssection dydz may be regarded as a line
magnet having poles I dydz. This again may be regarded as made up of a
number of magnetic particles. As a type, let us consider a particle of length
dx, so that the volume of the magnet occupied by this particle is dxdydz.
The poles of this particle are of strength + I dydz, so that the moment of the
particle is
I dxdydz.
If we take any small cluster of these particles, occupying a small volume
dv, the sum of their moments is clearly Idv, and these produce the same
magnetic effects at external points as a single particle of moment
Idv.
358 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
The quantity I is called the " intensity of magnetisation " of the magnet.
This magnetisation has direction as well as magnitude. In the present
instance the direction is that of the axis of x.
406. In general, we define the intensity and direction of magnetisation
as follows :
The intensity of magnetisation at any point of a magnetised body is defined
to be the ratio of the magnetic moment of any small particle at this point to
the volume of the particle.
The direction of magnetisation at any point of a magnetised body is defined
to be the direction of the magnetic axis of a small particle of magnetic matter
at the point.
Instead of specifying the magnetisation of a body in terms of its poles, it
is both more convenient from the mathematical point of view, and more in
accordance with truth from the physical point of view, to specify the intensity
at every point in magnitude and direction. Thus the barmagnet which has
been under consideration would be specified by the statement that its in
tensity of magnetisation at every point is / parallel to the axis of x. A body
such that the intensity is the same at every point, both in magnitude and
direction, is said to be uniformly magnetised.
THE MAGNETIC FIELD OF FORCE.
407. The field of force produced by a collection of magnets is in many
respects similar to an electrostatic field of force, so that the various concep
tions which were found of use in electrostatic theory will again be employed.
The first of these conceptions was that of electric intensity at a point. In
electrostatic theory, the intensity at any point was defined to be the force
per unit charge which would act on a small charged particle placed at the
point. It was necessary to suppose the charge to be of infinitesimal amount,
in order that the charges on the conductors in the field might not be dis
turbed by induction.
There is, as we shall see later, a phenomenon of magnetic induction,
which is in many respects similar to that of electrostatic induction, so that in
defining magnetic intensity we have again to introduce a condition to ex
clude effects of induction.
Also, to avoid confusion between the magnetic intensity and the intensity
of magnetisation defined in 406, it will be convenient to speak of magnetic
force at a point, rather than of magnetic intensity. We accordingly have the
following definition, analogous to that given in 30.
405408] Magnetic Field of Force 359
The magnetic force at any point is given, in magnitude and direction, by
the force per unit strength of pole, which would act on a magnetic pole situated
at this point, the strength of the pole being supposed so small that the magnetism
of the field is not affected by its presence.
408. The other quantities and conceptions follow in order, as in Chapter II.
Thus we have the following definitions :
A line of force is a curve in the magnetic field, such that the tangent at
every point is in the direction of the magnetic force at that point (cf. 31).
The potential at any point in the field is the work per unit strength of pole
which has to be done on a magnetic pole to bring it to that point from infinity,
the strength of the pole being supposed so small that tJie magnetism of the field
is not affected by its presence (cf. 33).
Let n denote the magnetic potential and a, j3, 7 the components of
magnetic force at any point x, y, z, then we have from this definition (cf.
equation (6)),
X '* (330),
and the relations (cf. equations (9)),
an an an

A surface in ike magnetic field such that at every point on it the potential
has the same value, is called an Equipotential Surface (cf. 35).
From this definition, as in 35, follows the theorem :
Equipotential Surfaces cut lines of force at right angles.
The law of force being the same as in electrostatics, we have as the value
of the potential (cf. equation (10)),
n = 2 (332),
where m is the strength of any typical pole, and r is the distance from it to
the point at which the potential is being evaluated.
As in 42, we have Gauss' Theorem :
...(333),
3n
where the integration is over any closed surface, and 2m is the sum of the
strengths of all the poles inside this surface. If the surface is drawn so as
not to cut through any magnetised matter, 2m will be the aggregate strength
of the poles of complete magnetic particles, and therefore equal to zero.
Thus for a surface, drawn in this way
?dS = 0.. ...(334).
360 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
If the position of the surface S is determined by geometrical conditions
if, for instance, it is the boundary of a small rectangular element dxdydz
then we cannot suppose it to contain only complete magnetic particles, and
equation (334) will not in general be true.
If there is no magnetic matter present in a certain region, equation (334)
is true for any surface in this region, and on applying it to the surface of the
small rectangular element dxdydz, we obtain, as in 50,
(33o),
the differential equation satisfied by the magnetic potential at every point of
a region in which there is no magnetic matter present.
Tubes of Force.
409. A tubular surface bounded by lines of force is, as in electrostatics,
called a tube of force. Let o^, o) 2 be the areas of any two normal crosssections
of a thin tube of force, and let H lt H z be the values of the intensities at
these points. By applying Gauss' Theorem to the closed surface formed by
these two crosssections and the portion of the tube which lies between
them, we obtain, as in 56,
provided there is no magnetic matter inside this closed surface.
Thus in free space the product Hco remains constant. The value of this
product is called the strength of the tube.
In electrostatics, it was found convenient to define a unit tube to be one which ended
on a unit charge, so that the product of intensity and crosssection was not equal to unity
but to 47T.
Potential of a Magnetic Particle.
410. Let a magnetic particle consist of a pole of strength m^ at 0, and
a pole of strength +m l at P, the distance OP being
infinitesimal.
The potential at any point Q will be
n Q =^^ (336).
If we put OQ = r, and denote the angle POQ by 6,  mi ' mi
this becomes Fia. 105.
n m^OQOP) mi OP cos fjLCOsd /Qfm
^~ PQ.OQ PQ.OQ ~^~
where //, = r^ . OP, the moment of the particle.
408412]
Magnetic Field of Force
361
The analysis here given and the result reached are exactly similar to
those already given for an electric doublet in 64. The same result can also
be put in a different form.
Let us put OP ds, and let = denote differentiation in the direction of
85
OP, the axis of the particle. Then equation (336) admits of expression in
the form
(338).
Let I, ra, n be the directioncosines of the axis of the particle, then formula
(338) can also be written
where, in differentiation, x, y, z are supposed to be the coordinates of the
particle, and not of the point Q.
411. Resolution of a magnetic particle. Equation (339) shews that the
potential of the single particle we have been considering is the same as the
potential of three separate particles, of strengths jj,l, fim and /j,n, and axes in
the directions Ox, Oy, Oz respectively. Thus a magnetic particle may be
resolved into components, and this resolution follows the usual vector law.
The same result can be seen geometrically.
Let us start from and move a distance Ids parallel to the axis of x, then
a distance mds parallel to the axis of y, and then
a distance nds parallel to the axis of z. This
series of movements brings us from to P, a
distance ds in the direction I, ra, n. Let the
path be OqrP in fig. 106. The magnetic particle
under consideration has poles m l at and f m^
at P. Without altering the field we can super
pose two equal and opposite poles + ra x at q, and
also two equal and opposite poles + m l at r.
The six poles now in the field can be taken
in three pairs so as to constitute three doublets
of strengths m^Oq, m^.qr and rn^rP respec
tively along Oq, qr and rP. These, however, are
doublets of strength pi, pm and pn parallel to the coordinate axes.
FIG. 106.
Potential of a Magnetised Body.
412. Let / be the intensity of magnetisation at any point of a mag
netised body, and let I, m, n be the directioncosines of the direction of
magnetisation at this point.
362 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
The matter occupying any element of volume dxdydz at this point will
be a magnetic particle of which the moment is Idxdydz and the axis is in
direction I, m, n. By formula (339), the potential of this particle at any
external point is
~ , i i o /I '"^(  If dxdydz,
dx\rj dy\rJ dz\r)}
so that, by integration, we obtain as the potential of the whole body at any
external point Q,
On = 1 1 1/ a  ( ]4m^  ( } +n^ I }[ dxdydz (340),
JJj ( ox\rj oy\rj oz\rj)
in which r is the distance from Q to the element dxdydz, and the integration
extends over the whole of the magnetised body.
If we introduce quantities A, B, C denned by
(341),
then equation (340) can be put in the form
^49^
^. j \*s . i i r \AJWJ \AJ t/ \AJXS \ J T *j I
dy\rj dz\rJ)
The quantities A, B, C are called the components of magnetisation at the
point x, y, z. Equation (342) shews that the potential of the original magnet,
of magnetisation /, is the same as the potential of three superposed magnets,
of intensities A, B, C parallel to the three axes. This is also obvious from
the fact that the particle of strength I dxdydz, which occupies the element of
volume dxdydz, may be resolved into three particles parallel to the axes, of
which the strengths will be A dxdydz, Bdxdydz and C dxdydz, if A, B, C are
given by equations (341).
Potential of a uniformly Magnetised Body.
413. If the magnetisation of any body is uniform, the values of A, B, G
are the same at all points of the body.
Let the coordinates of the point Q in equation (342) be x', y , z', so that
= [(* *') 2 + (y  yj + (* *?]*
Then, clearly,
a /i\ a /i\
5f )=o/  , etc.
dx \rj ox \rj
412414] Magnetic Field of Force 363
Replacing differentiation with respect to x, y, z by differentiation with
respect to x, y ', z in this way, we find that equation (342) assumes the form
fln=
ft J) 2
the quantities A, B, C and the operators ~ , , = , , ^ , being taken outside the
sign of integration, since they are not affected by changes in x, y, z.
If V denote the potential of a uniform distribution of electricity of volume
density unity throughout the region occupied by the magnet, we have
........................ (344),
so that equation (343) becomes
O A 9 ^ ftdVQ ridVq
^ l( * A  B ~~ ~
or UQ:
where X, Y, Z are the components of electric intensity at Q produced by
this distribution.
Or again if , denotes differentiation with respect to the coordinates of Q
vS
in a direction parallel to that of the magnetisation of the body, namely that
of directioncosines Z, m, n, equation (345) becomes
ds'
414. Yet another expression for the potential of a uniformly magnetised
body is obtained on transforming equation (342) by Green's Theorem. If
V, m', ri are the directioncosines of the outwarddrawn normal to the magnet
at any element dS of its surface, the equation obtained after transformation is
Q = f[(Al' + Em + Cri) * dS.
By equations (341),
Al' + Em' +Cn'=I (IP + mm' + nri)
= / cos0,
where 6 is the angle between the direction of magnetisation and the outward
normal to the element dS of surface. The equation now becomes
' Ic ^dS (347),
T
shewing that the potential at any external point is the same as that of a
surface distribution of magnetic poles of density / cos per unit area, spread
over the surface of the magnet.
364 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
This distribution is of course simply the " Green's Equivalent Stratum "
( 204) which is necessary to produce the observed external field.
The barmagnet already considered in 405, provides an obvious illustra
tion of these results.
415. Uniformly magnetised sphere. A second and interesting example
of a uniformly magnetised body is a sphere, magnetised with uniform
intensity /. This acquires its interest from the fact that the earth may, to
a very rough approximation, be regarded as a uniformly magnetised sphere.
If we follow the method of 413, we obtain for the value of VQ> defined
by equation (344),
where a is the radius of the sphere. If we suppose the magnetisation to be
in the direction of the axis of x, we have
COS0
Thus the potential at any external point is the same as that of a magnetic
particle of moment ?ra 3 / at the centre of the sphere.
To treat the problem by the method of 414, we have to calculate the
potential of a surface density I cos 6 spread over the surface of the sphere.
Regarding cos as the first zonal harmonic P x (cos 0), the result follows at
once from 257.
Poisson's imaginary Magnetic Matter.
416. If the magnetisation of the body is not uniform, the value of HQ
given in equation (342) cannot be transformed into a surface integral, so
that the potential of the magnet cannot be represented as being due to a
surface charge of magnetic matter. If we apply Green's Theorem to the
integral which occurs in equation (342), we obtain
where I, m, n are the directioncosines of the outwarddrawn normal to the
element dS of surface.
414418] Magnetic Field of Force 365
Thus Q,Q**jjfda;dydz+ ffdS (348),
where p, cr are given by
dB dC
0 = lA+mB + nC (350).
Thus the potential of the magnet at any external point Q is the same as
if there were a distribution of magnetic charges throughout the interior, of
volume density p given by equation (349), together with a distribution over
the surface, of surfacedensity cr given by equation (350).
Potential of a Magnetic Shell.
417. A magnetised body which is so thin that its thickness at every point
may be treated as infinitesimal, is called a " magnetic shell." Throughout
the small thickness of a shell we shall suppose the magnetisation to remain
constant in magnitude and direction, so that to specify the magnetisation of
a shell we require to know the thickness of the shell and the intensity and
direction of the magnetisation at every point.
Shells in which the magnetisation is in the direction of the normal to the
surface of the shell are spoken of as " normallymagnetised shells." These
form the only class of magnetic shells of any importance, so that we shall deal
only with normallymagnetised shells, and it will be unnecessary to repeat in
every case the statement that normal magnetisation is intended.
If / is the intensity of magnetisation at any point inside a shell of this
kind, and if r is its thickness at this point, the product IT is spoken of as the
"strength" of the shell at this point. Any element dS of the shell will
behave as a magnetic particle of moment IrdS, so that the strength of a
shell is the magnetic moment per unit area, just as the intensity of magneti
sation of a body is the magnetic moment per unit volume.
Any element dS of a shell of strength <f> behaves like a magnetic particle of
strength < dS of which the axis is normal to dS.
The magnetisation of a magnetic shell may often be conveniently pictured
as being due to the presence of layers of positive and negative poles on its
two faces. Clearly if <f> is the strength and r the thickness of a shell at
any point, the surface density of these poles must be taken to be  .
418. To obtain the potential of a shell at an external point, we regard
any element dS of the shell as a magnetic particle of moment $dS and axis
in the direction of the normal to the shell at this point, it being agreed that
this normal must be drawn in the direction of magnetisation of the shell.
366 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
The potential of the element dS of the shell at a point Q distant r from dS
is then
so that the potential of the whole shell at Q is given by
where 6 is the angle between the normal at dS and the line joining dS to P.
Clearly dS cos 6 is the projection of the element dS on a plane perpen
dicular to the line joining dS to P, so that   is the solid angle sub
tended by dS at Q. Denoting this by day, we have the potential in the form
lot (351).
419. Uniform shell. If the shell is of uniform strength, <f> may be taken
outside the sign of integration in equation (351), so that we obtain
.^n (352),
where H is the total solid angle subtended by the shell at Q.
POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A MAGNET IN A FIELD OF FORCE.
420. The potential energy of a magnet in an external field of force is
equal to the work done in bringing up the magnet from infinity, the field of
force being supposed to remain unaltered during the process.
Consider first the potential energy of a single particle, consisting of a pole
of strength m^ at arid a pole of strength + m l at P. Let
the potential of the field of force at be fl o and at P be flp.
Then the amounts of work done on the two poles in bringing
up this particle from infinity are respectively m^o and
miflp, so that the potential energy of the particle when in FlG *
the position OP
= m l . OP ^ , in the notation already used,
an = /^an an air
ds \ dx dy dz,
The potential energy of any magnetised body can be found by integration
of expression (353), the body being regarded as an aggregation of magnetic
particles.
418421] Potential Energy 367
421. Equation (353) assumes a special form if the magnetic field is due
solely to the presence of a second magnetic particle. Let this be of moment
ft, its axis having direction cosines I', ra', ri, and its centre having coordinates
x', y', z . Then we have as the value of H, from 410,
, 3 /1\ , /,, 3 ,3 , 3\ /1\
n = uf  = p. '(l f + m ^ ; + ri ^, }( .
8s \r) \ dx dy dz J \rj
Substituting these values for 1 in the formulae just obtained, we have as
the mutual potential energy of the two magnets,
dsds'
id 3 3 3W 7 , 3 ,3 , 3 N /1\
= LULL l^ + m~+n~][l = , + m 5> + 57 ] {  1 .
V 3# 3y 3sy V dx dy dz J \rj
This is symmetrical with respect to the two magnets, as of course it ought to be it is
immaterial whether we bring the first magnet into the field of the second, or the second
into the field of the first.
If we now put
1 1
we obtain on differentiation,
3/l\_ x x _ x ~~
M W ~ {(x  X J + (y yj + (, /)f ~ ~*
so that
3 2 /IN _ 1. _ 3 (x  xJ
r j ^3 y,5 '
l\ 3(xx')(yy f )
r) r 5
Hence we obtain as the value of W,
W =  (ll f + mm' 4 nn 1 }
r 3
Let us now denote the angle between the axes of the two magnets by e,
and the angles between the line joining the two magnets and the axes of the
first and second magnets respectively by and #'. Then
cos e = IV + mm' + nn',
cos 6 = [I (x x'} + m(y y'} + n(z z')},
cos & =  [l f (x  x') + m'(y y') + ri(z z')},
so that W can be expressed in the form
/
W = (cose 3 cos cos 6') (354).
368 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
If we take the line drawn from the first magnet to the second as pole in
spherical polar coordinates, and denote the azimuths of the axes of the two
magnets by T/T, *//, then the polar coordinates of the directions of the axes of
the two magnets will be 0, fy and ', ty' respectively, and we shall have
cos e = cos cos 0' + sin sin & cos (ty x/r').
On substituting this value for cos e in equation (354), we obtain
/
W = ~ {sin sin 0' cos (\Ir il/) 2 cos cos 6'} (355).
r 3 l
422. Knowing the mutual potential energy W, we can derive a know
ledge of all the mechanical forces by differentiation. For instance the
repulsion between the two magnets, i.e. the force tending to increase r, is
_d_W
^ {sin sin 0' cos (ty A^') 2 cos cos 0'}.
Thus, whatever the position of the magnets, the force between them
varies as the inverse fourth power of the distance.
If the magnets are parallel to one another, 0' and ^ = vjr', so that the
repulsion
(sin 2  2 cos 2 0).
C* ?
the force is an attractive force ~ . When = ^ , so that the magnets are
Thus when = 0, i.e. when the magnets lie along the line joining them,
its ar<
at right angles to the line joining them, the force is a repulsive force ~ .
In passing from the one position to the other the force changes from one of
attraction to one of repulsion when sin 2 2 cos 2 = 0, i.e. when = tan" 1 \/2.
The couples can be found in the same way. If % is any angle, the couple
dW
tending to increase the angle % is = , or
~ i*" ir ' sin e sin & cos W  ^') ~ 2 cos cos &}>
so that all the couples vary inversely as the cube of the distance.
For instance, taking % to be the same as ^r, we find that the couple tend
ing to rotate the first magnet about the line joining it to the second, in the
direction of ir increasing
9 W IJLuf ./!./!//, , ,x
=  = ^ sin 6 sin sin (^  ^'),
so that this couple vanishes if either of the magnets is along the line joining
them, or if they are in the same plane, results which are obvious enough
geometrically.
421424] Potential Energy 369
Potential Energy of a Shell in a Field of Force.
423. Consider a shell of which the strength at any point is $, placed
in a field of potential O. The element dS of the shell is a magnetic particle
of strength $ dS, so that its potential energy in the field of force will, by
formula (353), be
where denotes differentiation along the normal to the shell. Thus the
dn
potential energy of the whole shell will be
d8:i ........................... (356).
If the shell is of uniform strength, this may be replaced by
dS ........................... (357).
Since the normal component of force at a point just outside the shell
and on its positive force is ~ , it is clear that 1 1 ^ dS is equal to minus
the surface integral of normal force taken over the positive face of the shell,
and this again is equal to minus the number of unit tubes of force which
emerge from the shell on its positive face. Denoting this number of unit
tubes by n, equation (357) may be expressed in the form
TF = c/m .............................. (358).
Here it must be noticed that we are concerned only with the original
field before the shell is supposed placed in position. Or, in other terms, the
number n is the number of tubes which would cross the space occupied by
the shell, if the shell were annihilated. Since the tubes are counted on the
positive face of the shell, we see that n may be regarded as the number of
unit tubes of the external field which cross the shell in the direction of its
magnetisation.
424. Consider a field consisting only of two shells, each of unit strength.
Let Wj be the number of tubes from shell 1 which cross the area occupied
by 2, and let n 2 be the number of tubes from shell 2 which cross the area
occupied by 1. The potential energy of the field may be regarded as being
either the energy of shell 1 in the field set up by 2, or as the energy of
shell 2 in the field set up by 1. Regarded in the first manner, the energy
of the field is found to be  n 2 ; regarded in the second manner, the energy
is found to be n^. Hence we see that n l = n 2 . This result, which is of
great importance, will be obtained again later ( 446) by a purely geometrical
method.
j. 24
T , , , / 7 an an am
I dxdydz (I ^ + m = + n = ,
V dx dy dzj
370 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
Potential Energy of any Magnetised Body in a Magnetic Field of Force.
425. Let / be the intensity of magnetisation and I, m, n the direction
cosines of the direction of magnetisation at any point #, y, z of a magnetised
body, and let n be the potential, at this point, of an external field of magnetic
force. The element dxdydz of the magnetised body is a magnetic particle
of strength Idxdydz, of which the axis is in the direction I, m, n. Thus its
potential energy in the field of force is, by formula (353),
an an a
=
dy
and by integration the potential of the whole magnet is
an an an
FORCE INSIDE A MAGNETISED BODY.
426. So far the magnetic force has been defined and discussed only in
regions not occupied by magnetised matter: it is now necessary to consider
the more difficult question of the measurement of force at points inside a
magnetised body.
At the outset we are confronted with a difficulty of the same kind as that
encountered in discussing the measurement of electric force inside a dielec
tric, on the molecular hypothesis explained in 143. We found that the
molecules of a dielectric could be regarded as each possessing two equal
and opposite charges of electricity on two opposite faces. If we replace
" electricity " by " magnetism " the state is very similar to what we believe
to be the state of the ultimate magnetic particles. In the electric problem
a difficulty arose from the fact that the electric force inside matter varied
rapidly as we passed from one molecule to another, because the intensity of
the field set up by the charges on the molecules nearest to any point was
comparable with the whole field. A similar difficulty arises in the magnetic
problem, but will be handled in a way slightly different from that previously
adopted. There are two reasons for this difference of treatment in the first
place, we are not willing to identify the ultimate magnetic particles with
the molecules of the matter, and in the second place, we are not willing to
assume that the magnetism of an ultimate particle may be localised in the
form of charges on the two opposite faces. We shall follow a method which
rests on no assumptions as to the connection between molecular structure
and magnetic properties, beyond the wellestablished fact that on cutting
a magnet new magnetic poles appear on the surfaces created by cutting.
425428] Force inside a Magnetised Body 371
427. One way of measuring the force at a point Q inside a magnet will
be to imagine a cavity scooped out of the magnetic matter so as to enclose
the point Q, and then to imagine the force measured on a pole of unit
strength placed at Q. This method of measurement will only determine a
definite force at Q if it can be shewn that the force is independent of the
position, shape and size of the cavity, and this, as will be obvious from what
follows, is not generally the case.
428. Let us suppose that, in order to form a cavity in which to place
the imaginary unit pole, we remove a small cylinder of magnetic matter, the
axis of this cylinder being in the direction of magnetisation at the point.
Let this cylinder be of length I and crosssection S, and let the intensity of
magnetisation at the point be /. Let the size of the cylinder be supposed to
be very great in comparison with the scale of molecular structure, although
very small in comparison with the scale of variation in the magnetisation
of the body.
In steel or iron there are roughly 10 23 molecules to the cubic centimetre, so that a
length of 1 millimetre may be regarded as large when measured by the molecular scale,
although in most magnets the magnetisation may be treated as constant within a length
of a millimetre.
At a point near the centre of this cavity we are at a distance from the
nearest magnetic particles, which is, by hypothesis, great compared with
molecular dimensions. Hence, by 416, we may regard the potential at
points near the centre of the cavity as being that due to the following
distributions of imaginary magnetic matter:
I. A distribution of surface density lA + mB + nC, spread over the
surface of every magnet.
II. A distribution of volumedensity
_ dB dC
spread throughout the whole space which is occupied by magnetic matter
after the cavity has been scooped out.
III. A distribution of surfacedensity lA+mB + nC, spread over the
walls of the cavity.
From the way in which the cavity has been chosen, it follows that
I A + mB + nC vanishes over the sidewalls, and is equal to + / on the
two ends.
The force acting on an imaginary unit pole placed at or near the
centre of the cavity may be regarded as the force arising from these
three distributions.
242
372 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
429. The force from distribution III can be made to vanish by taking
the length of the cavity to be very great in comparison with the linear
dimensions of its ends. For the ends, of the cavity may then be treated as
points, and the force exerted by either end upon a unit pole placed at the
centre of the cavity will be
57
and this will vanish if S is small compared with Z 2 . The resultant force will
therefore arise solely from distributions I and II.
The force arising from distribution II may be regarded as the force
arising from a distribution of volumedensity
94 dB 8(7
v dy dz
spread throughout the whole of the magnetised matter, regardless of the
existence of the cavity, together with a distribution of volumedensity
dx dy dz,
spread through the space occupied by the cavity. The force from this
latter distribution vanishes in the limit when the size of the cavity is
infinitesimal, so that the force from distribution II may be regarded as
that from a volumedensity
spread through all the original magnetised matter.
We have now arrived at a force which is independent of the shape, size
and position of the cavity, provided only that these satisfy the conditions
which have already been laid down. This force we define to be the magnetic
force, at the point under discussion, inside the magnetised body.
430. In the notation of 416, the force which has just been defined is
due to a distribution of surfacedensity <r, and a distribution of volume
density p throughout the whole magnetised matter. The potential of these
distributions is
ff
dS + dxdydz,
or HQ if we regard this as defined by equation (348). Thus, with this
meaning assigned to f! Qt the components of force at a point Q inside a
magnetic body will be
dx ' dy ' dz
429433] Force inside a Magnetised Body
373
FIG. 108.
At the same time it must be remembered that H Q has not been shewn to
be the true value of the potential except when the point Q is outside the
magnetic matter. The true potential inside magnetised matter will vary
rapidly as we pass from one magnetic particle to another.
431. Let us next suppose that the length I of the cylindrical cavity is
very small compared with the linear dimensions of an
end. The force, as before, is that due to the distributions
I, II and III of 428. The force from distribution III 
however, will no longer vanish, for this distribution con
sists of distributions + / over the ends of the cavity,
and the force from these is not now negligible. From
analogy with the distribution of electricity on a parallel plate condenser, it
is clear that the force arising from distribution III is a force 4?r/ in the
direction of magnetisation. The forces from distributions I and II are
easily seen to be the same as in the former case. Thus the force on a unit
pole placed at a point Q inside a cavity of the kind we are now considering
is the resultant of
(i) the magnetic force at Q, as defined in 429,
(ii) a force 47r/ in the direction of the intensity of magnetisation at Q.
The resultant of these forces is called the magnetic induction at Q.
432. The magnetic force will be denoted by H, and its components
by a, & 7.
The induction will be denoted by B and its components by a, b, c.
We have seen that the force B is the resultant of a force H and a force
47r/. The components of this latter force are 4TrJ., 4?rj5, 47r(7. Hence we
have the equations
a = a + 4?rJ. "j
6=/3 + 47rJ9 I (359).
c = y + 4>7rC )
433. Let us next consider the force on a unit pole inside a cylindrical
cavity when the cavity is discshaped, as in 431, but its
axis is not in the direction of magnetisation. The force can,
as in 428, be regarded as arising from three distributions.
Distributions I and II are the same as before, but
distribution III will now consist of charges both on the
ends and on the side walls of the cylinder. By making the
length of the cylinder small in comparison with the linear
dimensions of its crosssection, the force from the distri
bution on the sidewalls can be made to vanish. And if 6 is the angle
between the axis of the cavity and the direction of magnetisation, the
Fm. 109.
374 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
distribution on the ends is one of density + / cos 6. Thus the force arising
from distribution III is a force 47r/cos0 in the direction of the axis of
the cavity.
Thus the force on a pole placed inside this cavity may be regarded as
compounded of the force H (arising from distributions I and II), and a force
47r/ cos 6 in the direction of magnetisation, arising from distribution III.
Let e be the angle between the direction of the force H and the axis of
the cavity, then the component force in the direction of the axis of the cavity
= H cos e + 4TrJ cos 6.
If I, m, n are the direction cosines of this last direction,
H cos e = lot + mf} + ny,
47r/ cos 6 = 4?r (I A + mB + nC),
so that, by equations (359),
H cos e + 47T/ cos 6 = la + mb + nc.
Thus the component of the force in the direction of the axis of the cavity
is the same as the component, in the same direction, of the magnetic in
duction, namely la + mb + nc.
434. We are now in a position to understand the importance of the
vector which has been called the induction. This arises entirely from the
property of the induction which is expressed in the following theorem :
THEOREM. The surfaceintegral of the normal component of induction,
taken over any surface whatever, vanishes,
or in other words (cf. 177),
The induction is a solenoidal vector throughout the whole of the magnetic
field.
To prove this let us take any closed surface S in the field, this surface
FIG. 110.
cutting any number of magnetised bodies. Along these parts of the surface
which are inside magnetic bodies, let us remove a layer of matter, so that the
surface no longer actually passes through any magnetic matter.
433436] Force inside a Magnetised Body 375
Then by Gauss' Theorem ( 409),
Q .............................. (360),
where N is the component of force in the direction of the outward normal to
S y acting on a unit pole placed at any point of the surface S. This force,
however, is exactly identical with that considered in 433, and its normal
component has been seen to be identical with the normal component of the
induction. Thus N, in equation (360), will be the normal component of
induction, so that this equation proves the theorem.
Analytically, the theorem may be stated in the form
Q ..................... (361),
and this by Green's Theorem ( 179), is identical with
^ + ^ + 8 = (362).
435. DEFINITION. By a line of induction is meant a curve in the
magnetic field such that the tangent at every point is in the direction of
the magnetic induction at that point.
DEFINITION. A tube of induction is a tubular surface of small cross
section, which is bounded entirely by lines of induction.
By a proof exactly similar to that of 409, it can be shewn that the
product of the induction and crosssection of a tube retains a constant value
along the tube. This constant value is called the strength of the tube.
In free space the lines and tubes of induction become identical with the
lines and tubes of force, and the foregoing definition of the strength of a tube of
induction is such as to make the strengths of the tubes also become identical.
436. At any point of a surface let B be the induction, and let e be the
angle between the direction of the induction and the normal to the surface.
The aggregate crosssection of all the tubes which pass through an element
dS of this surface is dS cos 6, so that the aggregate strength of all these tubes
is BcosedS. Since B cose = N, where N is the normal induction, this may
be written in the form NdS. Thus the aggregate strength of the tubes of
induction which cross any area is equal to
NdS.
This, we may say, is the number of unittubes of induction which cross
this area.
376 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
The theorem that (JNdS = 0,
where the integration extends over a closed surface, may now be stated in
the form that the number of tubes which enter any closed surface is equal to
the number which leave it. This is true no matter where the surface is
situated, so that we see that tubes of induction can have no beginning
or ending.
437. Let us take any closed circuit s in space, and let n be the number
of tubes of induction which pass through this circuit in a specified direction.
Then n will also be the number of tubes which cut any area whatever
which is bounded by the circuit s. If $ is any such area, this number is
known to be llNclS, where the integration is taken over the area S, so that
SI
The number n, however, depends only on the position of the curve s by
which the area S is bounded, so that it must be possible to express n in a
form which depends only on the position of the curve s, and not on the area S.
In other words, it must be possible to replace I iNdS by an expression which
depends only on the boundary of the area s. This we are enabled to do by a
theorem due to Stokes.
STOKES' THEOREM.
438. THEOREM. If X, Y, Z are continuous functions of position in space,
then
[( v dx j v dy ( gdz
ds
O <7 >\ ~\7\ ,'\ TT ^\ ^. ,3 ~\T 3 V\ \
oA \\ iv*" \\ ( iL/7^ /'^fi^^
where the line integral is taken round any closed curve in space, and the sur
face integral is taken over any area (or shell) bounded by the contour.
Here I, m, n are the directioncosines of the normal to the surface. A
rule is needed to fix the direction in which the normal is to be drawn. The
following is perhaps the simplest. Imagine the shell turned about in space
so that the tangent plane at any point P is parallel to the plane of ocy, and
so that the direction in which the line integral is taken round the contour is
the same as that of turning from the axis of x to the axis of y. Then
the normal at P must be supposed drawn in the direction of the positive
axis of z.
436439] Stokes' Theorem 377
439. To prove the theorem, let us select any two points A, B on the
contour, and let us introduce a quantity / defined by
r f" 8 / Y ^ x v^y 17 dz
} A \ ds ds ds
the path from A to B being the same as that followed in the integral of
equation (363). Let us also introduce a quantity J equal to the same
integral taken from A to B, but along the opposite edge of the shell. Then
the whole integral on the left of equation (363) is equal to / J.
FIG. 111.
It will be possible to connect A and B by a series of nonintersecting
lines drawn in the shell in such a way as to divide the whole shell into
narrow strips. Let us denote these lines by the letters a, b, ... n, the lines
being taken in order across the shell, starting with the line nearest to that
along which we integrate in calculating /. Let us denote the value of
ds ds
taken along the line a by 7 a .
Then the lefthand member of equation (363)
Let us consider the value of any term of this series, say I a /&.
Let us take each point on the line a and cause it to undergo a slight
displacement, so that the coordinates of any point so, y, z are changed to
x + Sx, y + 8y, z 4 Sz. If &c, By, Bz are continuous functions of x, y, z the
result will be to displace the line a into some adjacent position, and by a
suitable choice of the values of &x, By, Sz this displaced position of line a can
be made to coincide with line b. If this is done, it is clear that the value of
378 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
/ a , after replacing x, y, z by x + 8x, y + fry, 4 &z, will be / fe . Hence if we
denote this new value of I a by I a + /, we shall have
so that I a I b = 
and the value of this quantity can be obtained by the ordinary rules of the
calculus of variations.
We have
8
rB fJrf, rS J rS A
I X3?<fof SX~ds + X~(Bx)ds
} A ds J A ds J A ds^
dX, dX , \ dx , [ v *l s [*dX ,
&y+ &z \jds +\XSx\  j Sxds,
dy dz ) ds \_ \ A } A ds
and since &c vanishes both at A and B, the term X8x may be omitted,
and the whole expression put equal to
Xs dX s dX.\dx fdXdx^dXdy dXdz\ , ) ,
5 oo! f 5 By + ^ Sir ) 3 [ 5 j + 5 / 4 5 :r) &&> cfe.
^ 9y ^ J ds \dx ds dy ds dz dsj j
or again, on simplifying, to
(*fiX (* dx dy\ dX f' dz dx\] ,
\~ (By j %xf }^ (Sxr far H ds.
JA(dy\ ds ds) dz \ ds ds] }
This may be written in the form
jf*? (Bydx  Bxdy)  d ~ (Bxdz  Szdx)l ............ (364).
FIG. 112.
Now in fig. 112, let P, Q, P f be the points x,y,z\ x + dx, y + dy, z + dz\
and x + Sx, y + %, z + z. Let dS denote the area of the parallelogram
PQQ'P', and let I, m, n be the directioncosines of the normal to its plane.
Then the projection of the parallelogram on the plane of xy will be of area
439441] Stokes' Theorem 379
ndS, while the coordinates of three of its angular points will be x, y; x + dx,
y + dy\ and x + &x, y f By. Using the usual formula for the area, we obtain
ndS = (By dx Sx dy),
and using this relation in expression (364), we obtain
the integral denoting summation over all those elements of area of the shell
which lie between lines a and b. By summation of three equations of the
type of (365), we obtain
JL j \AJ\J W I f^ i VVO
4 ds } A ds
'?*.<M\ m dS ( 
,dz dx) \dx dy.
where the integration has the same meaning as before. If we add a system
of equations of this type, one for each strip, the lefthand, as already seen,
becomes I J, which is equal to the lefthand member of equation (363),
while the righthand member of the new equation is also the righthand
member of equation (363). This proves the theorem.
440. Stokes' Theorem enables us to transform any line integral taken
round a closed circuit into a surface integral taken over any area by which
the circuit can be filled up. The converse operation of changing a surface
integral into a line integral may or may not be possible.
441. THEOREM. It will be possible to transform the surface integral
\(lu + mv + nw) dS , (366)
into a line integral taken round the contour of the area S if, and only if,
? + ? + !? = () (367),
at every point of the area S.
It is easy to see that this condition is a necessary one. Let S' denote any
area having the same boundary as S, and being adjacent to it, but not
coinciding with it. Then if / is the line integral into which the surface
integral can be transformed, we must have
(368),
jj
and also
(369).
380 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
On equating these two values for / we obtain an equation which may be
expressed in the form
w)dS = (370),
.(371),
where the integration is over a closed surface bounded by 8 and 8', and
I, m, n are the directioncosines of the outward normal to the surface at any
point. From equation (370), the necessity of condition (367) follows at once.
Condition (367) is most easily proved to be sufficient by exhibiting an
actual solution of the problem when this condition is satisfied. We have to
shew that, subject to condition (367) being satisfied, there are functions
X } Y, Z such that
dZ dY
o * u
oy dz
dx dz__
o o ^
dz dx
 = u
dx dy
for if this is so, the required line integral is I (IX + mY + nZ) ds.
By inspection a solution of equations (371) is seen to be
X=fvdz, Y=iudz, Z = (372),
for it is obvious that the first two equations are satisfied, and on substituting
in the third, we obtain
dY dX (( du dv\, fdw,
5 ^~ = ~~ o 5~ }dz = r^r dz = w,
dx dy J\ dx dyj J dz
shewing that the proposed solution satisfies all the conditions.
442. The absence of symmetry from solution (372) suggests that this
solution is not the most general solution. The most general solution can,
however, be easily found. If we assume it to be
j
udz+Y', Z = Z' ......... (373),
then we find, on substitution in equations (371), that we must have
aZ'_8F_' d_X^_^dZ^ dY' = dX'
dy dz ' dz dx ' dx dy
and if we introduce a new variable % defined by % = X'dx, we find at once
that
dx } dv' dz '
441444] VectorPotential 381
so that the most general solution of equations (371) is
(375).
,
dy dz
Substituting these values, the line integral is found to be
and the condition that this shall be equal to the surface integral is that
J ~ds
or that x shall be single valued.
Thus if % is any singled valued function, equations (375) represent a solu
tion, and the most general solution, of equations (371).
VECTOR POTENTIAL.
443. The discussion as to the transformation from surface to line inte
grals arose in connection with the integral I INdS or \\(la + mb + nc) dS, in
which a, b, c are the components of magnetic induction. Since the condition
is satisfied throughout all space, it must always be possible to transform the
surface integral into a line integral by a relation of the form
f g+G ^ + H d )ds (376).
The vector of which the components are F, G, His known as the magnetic
vectorpotential.
We shall calculate the values of the components of vectorpotential in a
few simple cases.
Magnetic Particle.
444. Let us first suppose that the field is produced by a single magnetic
particle at the point x', y', z in free space, parallel to the axis of z. Then,
by equation (338), H = p^, fJ, so that at any point x, y, z,
811 _ 8 2 /1\ 3 2 l
~dx~~ ~
and similarly
382 Permanent Magnetism
The equations to be solved are
[CH. xi
_
dy dz
dF dH
dz dx ^dydz\rr
dx dy dz 2 \r) '
and the simplest solution, similar to that given by equations (372), is
F= (},
G
8/1
= LL
dx W '
The components of vectorpotential for a magnet parallel to the axes of
x or y can be written down from symmetry. In terms of the coordinates
x, y f , z' of the magnetic particle, this solution may be expressed as
d /I
#=0.
445. Let us superpose the fields of a magnetic particle of strength I/JL
parallel to the axis of x, one of strength m^ parallel to the axis of y, and
one of strength n/j> parallel to the axis of z. Then we obtain the vector
potential at x, y, z due to a magnetic particle of strength //, and axis (I, m,n)
at x, y', z in the forms
'dz dy) r
F = 
m =, n^ f
dz oy
( d 7 d \ l
G =  fjbi n= I ^ 
\ ox dz] r
>(*4'i"
8
^,
dx
)
i *V
1 d^'jr
(377).
8 8\1
^ , m ^ , 
8?/ 80; / r)
The number of lines of induction which cross the circuit from a magnetic
particle is accordingly
ds
~T~ ** ~T~
ds ds
which may be written in the form
dx dy
ds' ds'
I,
m,
dz
ds
n
ds,
dx\rj' dy\rj' dz\r.
the integral being taken round the circuit in the direction determined by the
rule given on p. 376.
444446] VectorPotential 383
Uniform Magnetic Shell.
446. Next let us suppose that the lines of force proceed from a uniform
magnetic shell, supposed for simplicity to be of unit strength. Let I', m, n'
be the directioncosines of the normal to any element dS' of this shell.
Then the element dS' will be a magnetic particle of moment dS' and of
directioncosines I', ra', n'. The element accordingly contributes to F a term
which, by equations (377), is seen to be
m 57 n' z
02 C v
where x ', y', 2' are the coordinates of the element dS f . Thus the whole value
of^is
This surface integral satisfies the condition of 441, so that it must be
possible to transform it into a line integral of the form
The equations giving f, g, h are
_8__a/; _a/
8^ 8y'" 8
Clearly a solution is
/=!, 0=0,
so that on substitution the value of JF 7 is
,.
r ds
Similarly
Thus the number of tubes of induction crossing the circuit s from
magnetic shell of unit strength bounded by the circuit s', is given by
ds ds ds
f/7(
or
f\/dx dx r dy dy' dz dz'\ 1 , , ,
=U J  7 +// 7 +^ T ,  dsds .
}] \ds ds ds ds ds ds J r
384 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
If e is the angle between the two elements ds, ds', the direction of these
elements being taken to be that in which the integration takes place, then
dx dx dy dy dz dz'
T~ T> + j JTT + j T~> = cos 6 >
ds ds ds ds ds ds
[[COS 6 , , ,
so that n = 1 1  dsds .
JJ r
From the rule as to directions given on p. 376, it will be clear that if the
integration is taken in the same direction round both circuits, then the
direction in which the n lines cross the circuit will be that of the direction
of magnetisation of the shell.
Clearly n is symmetrical as regards the two circuits s and ', so that we
have the important result :
The number of tubes of induction crossing the circuit s from a shell of unit
strength bounded by the circuit s' is equal to the number of tubes of induction
crossing the circuit s' from a shell of unit strength bounded by the circuit s.
Here we have arrived at a purely geometrical proof of the theorem
already obtained from dynamical principles in 424.
ENERGY OF A MAGNETIC FIELD.
447. Let a, b } c, ... n be a system of magnetised bodies, the magnetisation
of each being permanent, and let us suppose that the total magnetic field
arises solely from these bodies. Let us suppose that the potential H at any
point is regarded as the sum of the potentials due to the separate magnets.
Denoting these by fi , fl&, .*. fl n , we shall have
f} = n a + n 6 + ...+n n .
Let us denote the potential energy of magnet a, when placed in the field
of force of potential II by H (a) ; if placed in the field of force arising from
magnet b alone, by fl&(a), etc.
Let us imagine that we construct the magnetic field by bringing up the
magnets a, b, c, ... n in this order, from infinity to their final positions.
We do no work in bringing magnet a into position, for there are no
forces against which work can be done. After the operation of placing a in
position, the potential of the field is H a . The operation of bringing magnet
a from infinity has of course been simply that of moving a field of force of
potential fl a from infinity, where this same field of force had previously
existed.
On bringing up magnet b, the work done is that of placing magnet b in
a field of force of potential O a . The work done is accordingly fl a (6).
The work done in bringing up magnet c is that of placing magnet c in a
field of force of potential fl a + fl&. It is therefore H a (c) + H& (c).
446448] Energy of a Magnetic Field 385
Continuing this process we find that the total work done, W, is given by
a (d) + H 6 (d) + n c (d) + etc.
If, however, the magnets had been brought up in the reverse order, we
should have had
w= n 6 (a) + n c (a) + n d (> + ... + n n (a)
+ etc.
so that by addition of these two values for W, we have
n & (a) + n c (a) + fl d ( tt ) + ... + n n (a)
+ etc.
The first line is equal to H (a) except for the absence of the term H a (a),
and so on for the other lines. Thus we have
a)  SH a (a) .......... .............. (378).
The quantity H a (a), the potential energy of the magnet a in its own
field of force, is purely a constant of the magnet a, being entirely independent
of the properties or positions of the other magnets 6, c, d, Thus in
equation (378), we may regard the term 2H a (a) as a constant, and may
replace the equation by
W =iSfl (a) + constant ..................... (379).
448. If we take the magnets a, b, c, ... n to be the ultimate magnetic
particles, the values of n a (a), n & (b), ... etc. all vanish, and their sum also
vanishes. Thus equation (379) assumes the form
F=2n(a) (380),
where the standard configuration from which W is measured is one in which
the ultimate particles are scattered at infinity. The value of O (a) for a
single particle is (cf. 420),
an an an
' h m ~ \n
ox .dy dz
j. 25
386 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
On replacing //, by Idxdydz, we find for the energy of a system of
magnetised bodies
the integration being taken throughout all magnetised matter.
449. An alternative proof can be given of equations (380) and (381),
following the method of 106, in which we obtained the energy of a system
of electric charges.
Out of the magnetic materials scattered at infinity, it will be possible to
construct n systems, each exactly similar as regards arrangement in space to
the final system, but of only onenth the strength of the final system. If n
is made very great, it is easily seen that the work done in constructing a
single system vanishes to the order of , so that in the limit when n is very
great, the work done in constructing the series of n systems is infinitesimal.
Thus the energy of the final system may be regarded as the work done in
superposing this series of n systems.
Let us suppose so many of the component systems to have been super
posed, that the system in position is K times its final strength, where K
is a positive quantity less than unity. The potential of the field at any
point will be /cH. On bringing up a new system let us suppose that K is
increased to K, + die, so that the strength of the new system is d/c times that
of the final system. In bringing up the new system, we place a magnet of
die times the strength of a in a field of force of potential /cO, and so on with
the other magnets. Thus the work done is
die . /cH (a) + dfc . /cl (b) + . . . ,
and on integration of the work performed, we obtain
a)
agreeing with equation (380), and leading as before to equation (381).
450. If the magnetic matter consists solely of normally magnetised
shells, we may replace equation (381) by
where ds denotes thickness and dS an element of area of a shell. Replacing
Ids by <f), so that <f> is the strength of a shell, we have
dn
448451] Energy of a Magnetic Field 387
For uniform shells, </> may be taken outside the sign of integration, and
the equation becomes
W ~2 dS =
(cf. 423), where n is the number of lines of induction which cross the shell,
This calculation measures the energy from a standard configuration in
which the magnetic materials are all scattered at infinity. To calculate
the energy measured from a standard configuration in which the shells have
already been constructed and are scattered at infinity as complete shells, we
use equation (378), namely
W = 1 2
from which we obtain
)O' P)O
where ^ denotes the values ^ at the surface of any shell if the shell itself
dn dn
is supposed annihilated.
If all the shells are uniform, this may again be written
(382),
=n ........................... ,
where n' is the number of tubes of force from the remaining shells, which
cross the shell of strength <. An example of this has already occurred in
424.
ENERGY IN THE MEDIUM.
451. We have seen that the energy of a magnetic field is given by
(cf. equation (381)),
the integration being taken over all magnetic matter. As a preliminary to
transforming this into an integral taken through all space, we shall prove
that
Q .................. (384),
the integration being through all space.
The integral on the left can be written as
Man .an an\,
a dv +b ty +c te) dxd y dz >
and this by Green's Theorem, may be transformed into
( + i + S) ****** // n ^ +mb+ MC > ds >
252
388 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
the latter integral being taken over a sphere at infinity. Now at infinity H
is of the order of (cf. 67), while la + mb f nc vanishes, and dS is of
the order of r 2 , so that the surface integral vanishes on passing to the limit
r = oc . Also the volume integral vanishes since
da db dc _ A
8~ T ~  P o~~ ^>
x oy oz
and hence the theorem is proved.
Replacing a, 6, c by their values, as given by equations (359), we find that
equation (384) becomes
(I [(
(a 2 + /3 2 + 7 2 ) dxdydz + 4?r (4a + 5/3 + Oy) dxdyde = . . .(385).
Both integrals are taken through all space, but since A = B = C =
except in magnetic matter, we can regard the latter integral as being taken
only over the space occupied by magnetic matter. This integral is therefore
equal, by equation (383), to 2TF, so that equation (385) becomes
f7 2 ) dxdydz (386),
the integral being taken through all space.
This expression is exactly analogous to that which has been obtained for
the energy of an electrostatic svstem, namely,
TF = ~ ff((X* + F 2 + Z*) dxdydz.
And, as in the case of an electrostatic system, equation (386) may be
interpreted as meaning that the energy may be regarded as spread through
the medium at a rate  (a 2 + ft 2 f 7 2 ) per unit volume.
O7T
TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM.
452. The magnetism of the earth is very irregularly distributed and is
constantly changing. The simplest and roughest approximation of all to the
state of the earth's magnetism is obtained by regarding it as a bar magnet,
possessing two poles near to its surface, the position of these in 1906 being
as follows :
North Pole 70 30' N., 97 40' W.
South Pole 73 39' S., 146 15' E.
Another approximation, which is better in many ways although still
very rough, is obtained by regarding the earth as a uniformly magnetised
sphere.
451454] Terrestrial Magnetism 389
With the help of a compassneedle, it will be possible to find the
direction of the lines of force of the earth's field at any point. It will
also be possible to measure the intensity of this field, by comparing it with
known magnetic fields, or by measuring the force with which it acts on
a magnet of known strength.
453. At any point on the earth, let us suppose that the angle between
the line of magnetic force and the horizontal is 0, this being reckoned posi
tive if the line of force points down into the earth, and let the horizontal
projection of the line of force make an angle 8 with the geographical
meridian through the point, this being reckoned positive if this line points
west of north. The angle is called the dip at the point, the angle 8 is
called the declination.
Let H be the horizontal component of force, then the total force may be
regarded as made up of three components :
X H cos S, towards the north,
F = H sin Sj towards the west,
Z=Ht&u&, vertically downwards.
If H is the potential due to the earth's field at a point of latitude I, longi
tude X, and at distance r from the centre, we have (cf. equations (331)),
ian i an an
Analysis of Potential of Earth's field.
454. Since fl is the potential of a magnetic system, the value of fl in
regions in which there is no magnetisation must (by 408) be a solution of
Laplace's equation, and must therefore (by 233) be capable of expansion in
the form
(So' + S 1 'r + ^V+...) (388),
in which S l} $ 2 , ... $</, $/, S a ' t ... are surface harmonics, of degrees indicated
by the subscripts.
At the earth's surface, the first term is the part of the potential which
arises from magnetism inside the earth, while the second term arises from
magnetism outside.
The surface harmonic 8 n can, as in 275, be expanded in the form
in=n
S n = S Py (sin I) (A n>m cos m\ + B n>m sin raX),
390 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
so that n can be put in the form
m (sin. 1}
71=00 m=n
1= 2 2
4 r n Pjf (sin 1) (A' n j n cos mX 4 B' ntm sin wiX) [ .
Hence from equations (387) we obtain the values of X, T, Z at any point
in terms of the longitude and latitude of the point and the constants such
as jfLn^m, t>n,m.) A n,m> & n,m*
By observing the values of X, Y, Z at a great number of points, we
obtain a system of equations between the constants A n , m etc., and on
solving these we obtain the actual values of the constants, and therefore
a knowledge of the potential as expressed by equation (388).
If the magnetic field arose entirely from magnetism inside the earth,
we should of course expect to find $/ = S 2 '= . . . = 0, while if the magnetic
field arose from magnetism entirely outside the earth, we should find
S 1 = > Sf 2 =...=0.
455. The results actually obtained are of extreme interest. The mag
netic field of the earth, as we have said, is constantly changing. In addition
to a slow, irregular, and socalled " secular " change, it is found that there
are periodic changes of which the periods are, in general, recognisable as
the periods of astronomical phenomena. For instance there is a daily
period, a yearly period, a period equal to the lunar month, a period of
about 26 J days (the period of rotation of the inner core of the sun *),
a period of about 11 years (the period of sunspot variations), a period of
19 years (the period of the motion of the lunar nodes), and so on. Thus
the potential can be divided up into a number of periodic parts and a
residual constant, or slowly and irregularly changing, part. All the periodic
parts are extremely small in comparison with the latter. It is found, on
analysing the potentials of these different parts of the field that the constant
field arises from magnetisation inside the earth, while the daily variation
arises mainly from magnetisation outside the earth. The former result
might have been anticipated, but the latter could not have been predicted
with any confidence. For the variation might have represented nothing
more than a change in the permanent magnetism of the earth due to the
cooling and heating of the earth's mass, or to the tides in the solid matter of
the earth produced by the sun's attraction.
This daily variation is not such as could be explained by the magnetism
of the sun itself; Chreef has found that it cannot be explained by the
* The outer surface of the sun is not rigid, and rotates at different rates in different latitudes.
Thus it is impossible to discover the actual rate of rotation of the inner core except by such
indirect methods as that of observing periods of magnetic variation.
t Roy. Soc. Phil. Trans., 202, p. 335.
454457] Terrestrial Magnetism 391
cooling and heating either of the earth's mass, or of the atmosphere as
suggested by Faraday. Schuster*, who has analysed the dailyvarying
terms in the potential, and Balfour Stewart have suggested that the cause
of this variation is to be found in the field produced by electricity induced
in the upper strata of the atmosphere, as they move across the earth's
magnetic field, a suggestion which has received a large amount of experi
mental confirmation f. In addition to this field produced by external
sources, Schuster finds that there is a smaller field, roughly proportional
to the former, having its source inside the earth. This he attributes to
the magnetic action of electric currents induced in the earth by the
atmospheric currents already mentioned.
456. The nonperiodic part of the earth's field, since it is found to arise
entirely from magnetism inside the earth, has a potential of the form
& 81 n =* m ^ n (P(sin /) , x ]
n = 4 + ;J+ = 2 ^ J w ^_^ (A n>m cosm\ + B n>m smm\)\,
nl rn = ( T )
in which the values of the coefficients may be obtained in the manner
already explained.
This method of analysing the earth's field is due to Gauss, who calculated
the coefficients, with such accuracy as was then possible, for the year 1830.
The most complete analysis of the field which now exists has been calcu
lated by Neumayer for the year 1885, using observations of the field at
1800 points on the earth's surface.
The first few coefficients obtained by Neumayer are as follows :
^,= 0057,
2)1 = 0130, 2)2 =0126,
A ='0244 1 = *0396, A 3>2 = '0279, 4,,, = 0033,
3} ! = 0074, 3) 2 =  0004, ,, , =  0055,
= '0306, 2 ='
 '0344
4 , 2 =0071, 4)S = 0051, 4)4 =0010.
457. The simplest approximation is of course obtained by ignoring all
harmonics beyond the first. This gives as the magnetic potential
fl =  JA.o % (sin I) + % l (sin I) (A lfl cos X + B lfl sin X)l
=  j'3157 sin I + cos / ('0248 cos X  '0603 sin X)i .
* Eoy. Soc. Phil. Trans., 1889, p. 467.
t See, for instance, a paper by van Bemmelen, Konink. Akad. Wetenschappen (Amsterdam),
Versl. 12, p. 313, in which it is shewn that the field of daily variation may be regarded roughly
as revolving around the pole of the Aurora Borealis (80'5N., 80 W.).
392 Permanent Magnetism [OH. xi
The expression in brackets is necessarily a biaxial harmonic of order unity
(cf. 276) ; it is easily found to be equal to *3224 cos 7 where 7 is the
angular distance of the point (I, X) from the point
lat. 7820'N, long. 6717'W (389).
The potential is now
n = . 3224^,
r 2
which is the potential of a uniformly magnetised sphere, having as direction
of magnetisation the radius through the point ( 415). Or again, it is the
potential of a single magnetic particle at the centre of the earth, pointing
in this same direction. It is naturally impossible to distinguish between
these two possibilities by a survey of the field outside the earth. Green's
theorem has already shewn that we cannot locate the sources of a field
inside a closed surface by a study of the field outside the surface.
REFERENCES.
On the general theory of permanent magnetism :
J. J. THOMSON, Elements of Electricity and Magnetism, Chap. vi.
Encyc. Brit., 9th ed. Art. Magnetism.
MAXWELL, Elect, and Mag., Vol. n, Part in, Chaps, i in.
On Terrestrial Magnetism :
J. J. THOMSON, Elements of Electricity and Magnetism, Chap. vii.
WINKELMANN, Handbuch der Physik (2te Auflage), 5, (1), pp. 471515.
EXAMPLES.
1. Two small magnets float horizontally on the surface of water, one along the
direction of the straight line joining their centres, and the other at right angles to it.
Prove that the action of each magnet on the other reduces to a single force at right
angles to the straight line joining the centres, and meeting that line at onethird of its
length from the longitudinal magnet.
2. A small magnet ACB, free to turn about its centre C, is acted on by a small fixed
magnet PQ. Prove that in equilibrium the axis ACB lies in the plane PQC, and that
tan# = tan#', where 6, 6' are the angles which the two magnets make with the line
joining them.
3. Three small magnets having their centres at the angular points of an equilateral
triangle ABC, and being free to move about their centres, can rest in equilibrium with
the magnet at A parallel to BC, and those at B and C respectively at right angles to AB
and AC. Prove that the magnetic moments are in the ratios
3 : 4 : 4.
457] Examples 393
4. The axis of a small magnet makes an angle <f> with the normal to a plane. Prove
that the line from the magnet to the point in the plane where the number of lines of
force crossing it per unit area is a maximum makes an angle 6 with the axis of the
magnet, such that
2 tan 6 = 3 tan 2 (00).
5. Two small magnets lie in the same plane, and make angles 0, 6' with the line
joining their centres. Shew that the line of action of the resultant force between them
divides the line of centres in the ratio
tan0' + 2tan0 : tan0 + 2tan0'.
6. Two small magnets have their centres at distance r apart, make angles 6, 6' with
the line joining them, and an angle e with each other. Shew that the force on the first
magnet in its own direction is
 (5 cos 2 6 cos 6' cos 6' 2 cos e cos 0).
Shew that the couple about the line joining them which the magnets exert on one
another, is
mm' , .
j a sin e,
where d is the shortest distance between their axes produced.
7. Two magnetic needles of moments M, M' are soldered together so that their
directions include an angle a. Shew that when they are suspended so as to swing freely
in a uniform horizontal magnetic field, their directions will make angles 0, B' with the
lines of force, given by
sin 6 sin0' sin a
8. Prove that if there are two magnetic molecules, of moments M and JT, with their
centres fixed at A and B, where AB = r, and one of the molecules swings freely, while the
other is acted on by a given couple, so that when the system, is in equilibrium this
molecule makes an angle 6 with AB, then the moment of the couple is
f MM' sin 20/r 3 (3 cos 2 + 1)*,
where there is no external field.
9. Two small equal magnets have their centres fixed, and can turn about them in a
magnetic field of uniform intensity If, whose direction is perpendicular to the line r
joining the centres. Shew that the position in which the magnets both point in the
direction of the lines of force of the uniform field is stable only if
10. Two magnetic particles of equal moment are fixed with their axes parallel to the
axis of 2, and in the same direction, and with their centres at the points a, 0, 0. Shew
that if another magnetic molecule is free to turn about its centre, which is fixed at the
point (0, y, z\ its axis will rest in the plane #=0, and will make with the axis of z the
angle
tan ~ 1 2g 2 a 2 y 2 '
Examine which of the two positions of equilibrium is stable.
394 Permanent Magnetism [CH. xi
11. Prove that there are four positions in which a given bar magnet may be placed
so as to destroy the earth's control of a compassneedle, so that the needle can point
indifferently in all directions. If the bar is short compared with its distance from the
needle, shew that one pair of these positions are about l times more distant than the
other pair.
12. Three small magnets, each of magnetic moment /i, are fixed at the angular points
of an equilateral triangle ABC, so that their north poles lie in the directions AC, AB, BC
respectively. Another small magnet, moment //, is placed at the centre of the triangle,
and is free to move about its centre. Prove that the period of a small oscillation is the
same as that of a pendulum of length /6 3 ^/V351/u/i', where b is the length of a side of the
triangle, and / the moment of inertia of the movable magnet about its centre.
13. Three magnetic particles of equal moments are placed at the corners of an
equilateral triangle, and can turn about those points so as to point in any direction in
the plane of the triangle. Prove that there are four and only four positions of equilibrium
such that the angles, measured in the same sense of rotation, between the axes of the
magnets and the bisectors of the corresponding angles of the triangle are equal. Also
prove that the two symmetrical positions are unstable.
14. Four small equal magnets are placed at the corners of a square, and oscillate
under the actions they exert on each other. Prove that the times of vibration of the
principal oscillations are
2<r J MW I*
27T
27T
H
where m is the magnetic moment, and J/F the moment of inertia, of a magnet, and d is a
side of the square.
15. A system of magnets lies entirely in one plane and it is found that when the
axis of a small needle travels round a contour in the plane that contains no magnetic
poles, the needle turns completely round. Prove that the contour contains at least one
equilibrium point.
16. Prove that the potential of a body uniformly magnetised with intensity 7 is, at
any external point, the same as that due to a complex magnetic shell coinciding with the
surface of the body and of strength Ix, where x is a coordinate measured parallel to the
direction of magnetisation.
17. A sphere of hard steel is magnetised uniformly in a constant direction and a
magnetic particle is held at an external point with the axis of the particle parallel to the
direction of magnetisation of the sphere. Find the couples acting on the sphere and on
the particle.
18. A spherical magnetic shell of radius a is normally magnetised so that its strength
at any point is S it where S t is a spherical surface harmonic of positive order i. Shew
that the potential at a distance r from the centre is
Examples 395
19. If a small spherical cavity be made within a magnetised body, prove that the
components of magnetic force within the cavity are
20. If the earth were a uniformly magnetised sphere, shew that the tangent of the
dip at any point would be equal to twice the tangent of the magnetic latitude.
21. Prove that if the horizontal component, in the direction of the meridian, of the
earth's magnetic force were known all over its surface, all the other elements of its
magnetic force might be theoretically deduced.
22. From the principle that the line integral of the magnetic force round any circuit
ordinarily vanishes, shew that the two horizontal components of the magnetic force at
any station may be deduced approximately from the known values for three other stations
which lie around it. Shew that these six known elements are not independent, but must
satisfy one equation of condition.
23. If the earth were a sphere, and its magnetism due to two small straight bar
magnets of the same strength situated at the poles, with their axes in the same direction
along the earth's axis, prove that the dip d in latitude X would be given by
24. Assuming that the earth is a sphere of radius a, and that the magnetic potential
Q is represented by
shew that Q, is completely determined by observations of horizontal intensity, declination
and dip at four stations, and of dip at four more.
25. Assuming that in the expansion of the earth's magnetic potential the fifth and
higher harmonics may be neglected, shew that observations of the resultant magnetic
force at eight points are sufficient to determine the potential everywhere.
26. Assuming that the earth's magnetism is entirely due to internal causes, and that
in latitude X the northerly component of the horizontal force is A cos X + B cos 3 X, prove
that in this latitude, the vertical component reckoned downwards, is
CHAPTER XII.
INDUCED MAGNETISM.
PHYSICAL PHENOMENA.
458. REFERENCE has already been made to the wellknown fact that a
magnet will attract small pieces of iron or steel which are not themselves
magnets. Here we have a phenomenon which at first sight does not seem
to be explained by the law of the attractions and repulsions of magnetic
poles. It is found, however, that the phenomenon is due to a magnetic
" induction " of a kind almost exactly similar to the electrostatic induction
already discussed. It can be shewn that a piece of iron or steel, placed in
the presence of a magnet, will itself become magnetised. Temporarily, this
piece of iron or steel will be possessed of magnetic poles of its own, and the
system of attractions and repulsions between these and the poles of the
original permanent magnet will account for the forces which are observed to
act on the metal.
It has, however, been seen that pairs of corresponding positive and
negative poles cannot be separated by more than molecular distances, so
that we are led to suppose that each particle of the body in which magnetism
is induced must become magnetised, the adjacent poles neutralising one
another as in a permanent magnet.
Taking this view, it will be seen that the attraction of a magnet for an
unmagnetised body is analogous to the attraction of an electrified body for a
piece of dielectric ( 197), rather than to its attraction for an uncharged
conductor. The attraction of a charged body for a fragment of a dielectric
has been seen to depend upon a molecular phenomenon taking place in the
dielectric. Each molecule becomes itself electrified on its opposite faces,
with charges of opposite sign, these charges being equal and opposite so that
the total charge on any molecule is nil. In the same way, when magnetism
is induced in any substance, each molecule of the substance must be supposed
to become a magnetic particle, the total charge of magnetism on each particle
being nil. It follows that the attraction of a magnet for a nonmagnetic
body is merely the aggregate of the attractive forces acting on the different
individual particles of the body.
459. Confirmation of this view is found in the fact that the intensity of
the attraction exerted by a magnet on a nonmagnetised body depends on
458460] Physical Phenomena 397
the material of the latter. The significance of this fact will, perhaps, best
be realised by comparing it with the corresponding fact of electrostatics.
When an uncharged conductor is attracted by a charged body, the pheno
mena in the former body which lead to this attraction are massphenomena :
currents of electricity flow through the mass of the body until its surface
becomes an equipotential. Thus the attraction depends solely upon the
shape of the body, and not upon its structure. On the other hand, the
phenomena which lead to the attraction of a fragment of dielectric are, as we
have seen, molecular phenomena. They are conditioned by the shape and
arrangement of the molecules, with the result that the total force depends on
the nature of the dielectric material.
All magnetic phenomena occurring in material bodies must be molecular,
as a consequence of the fact that corresponding positive and negative poles
cannot be separated by more than molecular distances. Hence we should
naturally expect to find, as we do find, that all magnetic phenomena in
material bodies, and in particular the attraction of unmagnetised matter by
a magnet, would depend on the nature of the matter. There would be a
real difficulty if the attraction were found to depend only on the shape of
the bodies.
460. The amount of the action due to magnetic induction varies
enormously more with the nature of the matter than is the case with the
corresponding electric action. Among common substances, the phenomenon
of magnetic induction is not at all wellmarked, except in iron and steel.
These substances shew the phenomenon to a degree which appears very
surprising when compared with the corresponding electrostatic phenomenon.
After these substances, the next best for shewing the phenomena of induction
are nickel and cobalt, although these are very inferior to iron and steel. It
is worth noticing that the atomic weights of iron, nickel and cobalt, are very
close together*, and that the three elements hold corresponding positions in
the table of elements arranged according to the periodic law.
It has recently been found that certain rare metals shew magnetic
induction to an extent comparable with iron, and that alloys can be formed
to shew great powers of induction although the elements of which these
alloys are formed are almost entirely nonmagnetic f.
It appears probable that all substances possess some power of magnetic
induction, although this is generally extremely feeble in comparison with
that of the substances already mentioned. In some substances, the effect is
of the opposite sign from that in iron, so that a fragment of such matter is
repelled from a magnetic pole. Substances in which the effect is of the
. Iron = 555, nickel = 583, cobalt = 58'56.
t For an account of the composition and properties of Heusler's alloys, see a paper by
J. C. McLennan, Phys. Review, Vol. 24, p. 449.
398 Induced Magnetism [CH. xn
same kind as in iron are called paramagnetic, while substances in which the
effect is of the opposite kind are called diamagnetic.
The phenomenon of magnetic induction is much more marked in para
magnetic, than in diamagnetic, substances. The most diamagnetic substance
known is bismuth, and its coefficient of susceptibility ( 461, below) is only
about of that of the most paramagnetic samples of iron.
Coefficients of Susceptibility and Permeability.
461. When a body which possesses no permanent magnetism of its own
is placed in a magnetic field, each element of its volume will, for the time it
remains under the influence of the magnetic field, be a magnetic particle.
If the body is noncrystalline, the direction of the induced magnetisation at
any point will be that of the magnetic force at the point. Thus if H denote
the magnetic force at any point, we can suppose that the induced magnetism,
of an intensity /, has its direction the same as that of H.
Thus if a, /3, 7 are the components of magnetic force, and A, B, C the
components of induced magnetisation, we shall have equations of the form
A = KOL
(390),
the quantity K being the same in each equation because the directions of /
and H are the same.
The quantity K is called the magnetic susceptibility.
If the body has no permanent magnetisation, the whole components of
magnetisation are the quantities A, J5, G given by equations (390), and the
components of induction are given (cf. equations (359)) by
a = a + 4>7rA = a (1 i
6 = ft + 47r = (1 +
c = 7 + 4TrC = 7 (1 + 47T*).
If we put ^ = 1 + 4?: .............................. (391),
we have a = //, 1
& = /* 1 ....... ....................... (392),
c = w }
and IJL is called the magnetic permeability.
462. The quantities tc and p are by no means constant for a given
substance. Their value depends largely upon the physical conditions,
particularly the temperature, of the substance, upon the strength of the
magnetic field in which the substance is placed, and upon the previous
magnetic experiences of the substance in question.
460463]
Physical Phenomena
399
We pass to the consideration of the way in which the magnetic coefficients
vary with some of these circumstances. As K and p are connected by a
simple relation (equation (391)), it will be sufficient to discuss the variations
of one of these quantities only, and the quantity /x will be the most con
venient for this purpose. Moreover, as the phenomenon of induced magnet
isation is almost insignificant in all substances except iron and steel, it will
be sufficient to consider the magnetic phenomena of these substances only.
463. Dependence of fi on H. The way in which the value of //, depends
on H is, in its main features, the same for all kinds of iron. For small forces,
p is a constant, for larger forces /j, increases, finally it reaches a maximum,
and after this decreases in such a way that ultimately ^H approximates to a
constant value. This is represented graphically in a typical case in fig. 113,
which represents the results obtained by Ewing from experiments on a piece
of iron wire.
^ 15000
= 10000
/i=3000
= 2000
H =
20
The abscissae represent values of H, the ordinate of the thick curve {the
value of pH, and the ordinate of the thin curve the value of /*. The corre
sponding numerical values are as follows :
H
M.H
/*
H
us
/*
032
40
120
517
12680
2450
084
170
200
620
13640
2200
137
420
310
794
14510
1830
214
1170
550
979
14980
1530
267
3710
1390
1157
15230
1320
324
7300
2250
1506
15570
1030
389
9970
2560
1976
15780
800
450
11640
2590
2170
15870
730
100
l. XII
464. /iV/o////v//r.sv; timi / / i/st.eresis. It is found tha.t after the magnetising
force i removed from a sample of iron, I, lie iron s!,ill retains home of its
h in. Here We ha.Ve :i. phenomenon similar In the electrostatic
phenomenon of residual eliar^' a.lrea.dy descri hed in ,'J!)7.
IV. I I I i taken from ;i. paper hy 1'rof. Kwin^ ( Tkil. Trait*. /!</. Nor.
Tin. ahseissae represent values of //, ;md ordin;i!,cs v;ilucs of
//, t,h indu<:t ion. Th< magnetic fi<ld w;is increased from // o i<> // = iJ2,
;ind ;is // Increased UK v.ilm of />' in<n; l; s<d in I, IK in.uincr shewn l>y Un;
curve O/' of i.ln ;M:IJ'I. On ;i;.';:iin diininisliin^ // from // = 22 to 11 = 0, the
<.M;IJ>I for />' w;is found to he tlutt ^iven liy I, lie curve I*! 1 !. f riius during tliis
)r;ition tliic WJLS al\v;i) : :, mon magnetisation th.ui ,it the corresponding
of I, he nri'.MM.d oMr;i.l.ion, ;ind lin:dly when the inducing field was
entirely rni(, V e<l, tlnn w;is ni;i^nefis;ition left, of intensity i'e})iesenf(!(l by
O/'J. The field w;is tlnn further <eere;ised from // to // = 20, and
tliin inei' mi from 11 = 20 to Jl  'I'l. The changes in />' are shewn
in tin iM.i.h.
Ki<. Ml.
465. hrfx'inlciicc of ft on lent /x'rof n re. As has aJrea.dy heen sa,id, the
\'a.lu of //, deicnds to a ;I.IM extent <>n the teniier;i! u re of the metal. As
the temperature is menased the vaJue of //, eontinually inerea.ses, slowly a!
first hut afterwards more i a pidl y, u ntd a, tempera,ture known a.s ihe'fem
pera.ture ..f ive;dese,.ice ' is reached. This femperafuie ha,s value: ra.n^in^
I'rom liOO I,, 700 for steel and from 700 !o ,SOO f,,r iron. This temperature
takes ils na.me from the cireumstanee ,h ;i t a piece of metal cooling ihroindi
this lemperatiire will sink to a dull ^low helore rrarliin^ it, a,nd will then
become brighter again <>n passing tlmm^li it.
After passing the temperature of I ee;de: eelire, the \allle of //. falls with
Die rapidity, and at a temperature only a. few decrees ahove this (em
pera.tuie iron appeal's to >e almost, completely non magnetic.
4644(37] Mathematical Theory 401
MATHEMATICAL THEORY.
466. If ft is the magnetic potential, supposed to be denned at points
inside magnetic matter by equation (348), we have, as in equations (341)
(cf. 430), a=  g etc., so that
an
a = Tx>
an
The quantities a, ft, c, as we have seen ( 434), satisfy
GCL GO v/C s\ /c\f\c\\
.f. 1 = (393)
at every point, and
.(394),
where the integration is taken over any closed surface. In terms of the
potential, equation (393) becomes
a / an\ a / an\ a / an\ Q ,
^~l/ A "5~M"^~(A t 3~)+5~' (t JL ~5~ = ^ V* y& )>
ox \ oxj oy\ oy J oz \ oz /
while equation (394) becomes
f(a^dS = 0.. ...(396).
J j on
If fji is constant throughout any volume, equation (395) becomes
Thus inside a mass of homogeneous non magnetised matter, the magnetic
potential satisfies Laplace's Equation.
467. At a surface at which the value of /it changes abruptly we may
take a closed surface formed of two areas fitting closely about an element dS
of the boundary, these two areas being on opposite sides of the boundary.
On applying equation (396), we obtain
where fr, ^ are the permeabilities on the two sides, and , ^ denote
(jV\ QV<i
differentiations with respect to normals to the surface drawn into the two
media respectively.
26
402 Induced Magnetism [CH. xn
Equations (397) and (395) (or (396)), combined with the condition that
fl must be continuous, suffices to determine H uniquely. The equations
satisfied by ft, the magnetic potential, are exactly the same as those which
would be satisfied by V, the electrostatic potential, if /z were the Inductive
Capacity of a dielectric. Thus the law of refraction of lines of magnetic
induction is exactly identical with the law of refraction of line of electric
force investigated in 138, and figures (43) and (78) may equally well be
taken to represent lines of magnetic induction passing from one medium to
a second medium of different permeability.
468. At any external point Q, the magnetic potential of the magnetisation
induced in a body in which //, and K have constant values is, by equation (342),
j
rjj
n a /i\ , an 9 /i\ an a ,/i\)
^^+ ir ^+^ zlftdsdyd* ...(398).
da dx \rj dy dy \rj dz dz \rj)
Transforming by Green's Theorem,
(399) >
shewing that the potential is the same if there were a layer of magnetic
matter of surface density K ^ spread over the surface of the body. This
(JYl
is Poisson's expression for the potential due to induced magnetism.
We can also transform equation (398) into
.(400),
dn \r
shewing that the potential at any external point Q of the induced magnetism
is the same as if there were a magnetic shell of strength /cl coinciding
with the surface of the body.
Body in which permanent and induced magnetism coexist.
469. If a permanent magnet has a permeability different from unity, we
shall have a magnetisation arising partly from permanent and partly from
induced magnetism. If K is the susceptibility and / the intensity of the
467470] Energy of a Magnetic Field 403
permanent magnetisation at any point, the components of the total magnet
isation at any point will be
A = II . + KCL "I
B = Im + Kj3 I (401),
C=In
and the components of induction are
a = a + 4Tr J. =
b = 4>7rlm + n0 (402).
c = 47T/W f yu/y '
For such a substance, it is clear that equations (395) and (396) will not
in general be satisfied.
ENERGY OF A MAGNETIC FIELD.
470. To obtain the energy of a magnetic field in which both permanent
and induced magnetism may be present, we return to the general equation
obtained in 451,
Q .................. (403).
On substituting for a, 6, c from equations (402), this becomes
47T Iff I (la + m/3 + nj) dxdydz + 1TL (a 2 + /3 2 + 7 2 ) dxdydz = (404).
Whether or not induced magnetism is present, it is proved in 448, that the
energy of the field is
where the integral is taken through all space. This is equal to ^ times the
first term in equation (404). Thus
a? + p + ^)dxdydz ............... (405).
This could have been foreseen from analogy with the formula
W= jjJK(X*+ T 2 + ^ 2 ) dxdydz,
which gives the energy of an electrostatic field.
From formula (405) we see that the energy of a magnetic field may be
supposed spread throughout the medium, at a rate ^ per unit volume.
262
404 Induced Magnetism [CH. xn
MECHANICAL FORCES IN THE FIELD.
471. The mechanical forces acting on a piece of matter in a magnetic
field can be regarded as the superposition of two systems first, the forces acting
on the matter in virtue of its permanent magnetism (if any), and, secondly,
the forces acting on the matter in virtue of its induced magnetism (if any).
The problem of finding expressions for the mechanical forces in a magnetic
field is mathematically identical with that of finding the forces in an electro
static field. This is the problem of which the solution has already been
given in 196. The result of the analysis there given may at once be
applied to the magnetic problem.
In equation (117), p. 172, we found the value of E, the ^component of
the mechanical force per unit volume, in the form
To translate this result to the magnetic problem, we must regard p as
specifying the density of magnetic poles, R must be replaced by H, the
magnetic intensity, and K by p, the magnetic permeability. Also the
electrostatic potential V must be replaced by the magnetic potential H. We
then have, as the value of E in a magnetic field,
30 H z du, 8 {H*
Clearly the first term in the value of H is that arising from the per
manent magnetism of the body, while the second and third terms arise from
the induced magnetism. The first term can be transformed in the manner
already explained in the last chapter. It is with the remaining terms that
we are at present concerned. These will represent the forces when no per
manent magnetism is present. Denoting the components of this force by
E', H', Z' t we have
, H* dp 8
472. This general formula assumes a special form in a case which is of
great importance, namely when the magnetic medium is a fluid.
All liquid magnetic media in which the susceptibility is at all marked
consist of solutions of salts of iron, and the magnetic properties of the liquid
arise from the presence of the salts in solution. According to Quincke, the
solution having the greatest susceptibility is a solution of chloride of iron in
methyl alcohol, and for this the value of //, 1 is about T oW* In such a
liquid, the field arising from the induced magnetism will be small compared
* Cf. G. T. Walker, "Aberration" (Cambridge Univ. Press, 1900), p. 76.
471474] Mechanical Forces 405
with that arising from the original field, so that the magnetisation of any
single particle of the salt in the solution may be regarded as produced
entirely by the original field. Hence we have conditions similar to those
which obtain electrostatically in a gas. The induced field may be regarded
simply as the aggregate of the fields arising from the different particles of
the magnetic medium, and is therefore jointly proportional to the density of
these particles and to the strength of the inducing field. The latter fact
shews that, for a given density of the medium, /A ought to be independent of
H, a result to which we shall return later. The former fact shews that, as
the density r changes, //, 1 ought to be proportional to r a result analogous
to the result that K 1 is proportional to the density in a gas. It has been
found experimentally by Quincke * that /z 1 is approximately proportional
tO T.
In gases we have conditions precisely similar to those which obtain when
a gas is placed in an electrostatic field. Hence //, 1 must, for a gas, be
proportional to r, for exactly the same reason for which K 1 is proportional
to T. This result also has been verified by Quincke (.
Thus we may say that for fluid media, whether liquid or gaseous, //, 1
is, in general, proportional to T, where T is the density of the magnetic liquid,
in the case of a liquid in solution, or of the gas itself, in the case of a gas.
473. If we assume the relation
pl = cr .............................. (408),
where c is a constant, we find that expression (407) may be put in the
simpler form
shewing that the whole mechanical force is the same as would be set up by a
hydrostatic pressure at every point of the medium of amount ^ H z .
OTT
If H varies from point to point of the field, the effect of this pressure will
clearly be to urge the medium to congregate in the more intense parts of the
field. This has been observed by MatteucciJ for a medium consisting of
drops of chloride of iron dissolved in alcohol placed in a medium of olive oil.
The drops of solution were observed to move towards the strongest parts of
the field.
Magnetostriction.
474. If a liquid is placed in a magnetic field, it yields under the
influence of the mechanical forces acting upon it, so that we have a
* Wied. Ann. 24, p. 347.
t Wied. Ann. 34, p. 401.
J Comptes Rendus, 36, p. 917.
406 Induced Magnetism [CH. xn
phenomenon of magnetostriction, analogous to the phenomenon of electro
striction already explained ( 203). Clearly the liquid will expand until the
pressure is decreased by an amount ^ H 2 at each point, the new pressure
and the mechanical forces resulting from the magnetic field now producing
equilibrium in the fluid. By measuring the expansion of a liquid placed in
a magnetic field Quincke has been able to verify the agreement between
theory and experiment.
MOLECULAR THEORIES.
Poisson's Molecular Theory of Induced Magnetism.
475. In Chapter V it was found possible to account for all the electro
static properties of a dielectric by supposing it to consist of a number of
perfectly conducting molecules. Poisson attempted to apply a similar
explanation to the phenomenon of magnetic induction.
Poisson's theory can, however, be disproved at once, by a consideration of
the numerical values obtained for the permeability //,. This quantity is
analogous to the quantity K of Chapter v, so that its value may be estimated
in terms of the molecular structure of the magnetic matter. The fact with
respect to which Poisson's theory breaks down is the existence of substances
(namely, different kinds of soft iron) for which the value of JJL is very large.
To understand the significance of the existence of such substances, let us
consider the field produced when a uniform infinite slab of such a substance
is placed in a uniform field of magnetic force, so that the face of the slab is
at right angles to the lines of force. If the value of /JL is very large, the fall
of potential in crossing the slab is very small. Throughout the supposed
perfectlyconducting magnetic molecules the potential would, on Poisson's
theory, be constant, so that the fall of potential could occur only in the
interstices between the molecules. In these interstices (cf. fig. 46), the fall of
potential per unit length would be comparable with that outside the slab.
Hence a very large value of /z could be accounted for only by supposing the
molecules to be packed together so closely as to leave hardly any interstices.
Samples of iron can be obtained for which p is as large as 4000 ; it is known,
from other evidence, that the molecules of iron are not so close together that
such a value of p could be accounted for in the manner proposed by Poisson.
It is worth noticing, too, that Poisson's theory does not seem able, without
modification, to give any reasonable account of the phenomena of saturation,
hysteresis, etc.
Weber s Molecular Theory of Induced Magnetism.
476. A theory put forward by Weber shews much more ability than
the theory of Poisson to explain the facts of induced magnetism.
474477] Molecular Theories 407
Weber supposes that, even in a substance which shews no magnetisation,
every molecule is a permanent magnet, but that the effects of these different
magnets counteract one another, owing to their axes being scattered at
random in all directions. When the matter is placed in a magnetic field
each molecule tends, under the influence of the field, to set itself so that
its axis is along the lines of force, just as a compassneedle tends to set
itself along the lines of force of the earth's magnetic field. The axes of the
molecules no longer point in all directions indifferently, so that the magnetic
fields of the different molecules no longer destroy one another, and the body
as a whole shews magnetisation. This, on Weber's theory, is the magnetisa
tion induced by the external field of force.
Weber supposes that each molecule, in its normal state, is in a position
of equilibrium under the influence of the forces from all the neighbouring
molecules, and that when it is moved out of this position by the action of
an external magnetic field, the forces from the other molecules tend to
restore it to its old position. It is, therefore, clear that so long as the
external field is small, the angle through which each axis is turned by the
action of the field, will be exactly proportional to the intensity of the field,
so that the magnetisation induced in the body will be just proportional to
the strength of the inducing field. In other words, for small values of H,
p must be independent of If.
There is, however, a natural limit imposed upon the intensity of the
induced magnetisation. Under the influence of a very intense field all the
molecules will set themselves so that their axes are along the lines of force.
The magnetisation induced in the body is now of a quite definite intensity,
and no increase of the inducing field can increase the intensity of the
induced magnetisation beyond this limit. Thus Weber's theory accounts
quite satisfactorily for the phenomenon of saturation, a phenomenon which
Poisson's theory was unable to explain.
477. In connection with this aspect of Weber's theory, some experi
ments of Beetz are of great importance. A narrow line was scratched in
a coat of varnish covering a silver wire. The wire was placed in a solution
of a salt of iron, arranged so that iron could be deposited electrolytically
on the wire at the points at which the varnish had been scratched away.
The effect was of course to deposit a long thin filament of iron along the
scratch. If, however, the experiment was performed in a magnetic field
whose lines of force were in the direction of the scratch, it was found not
only that the filament of iron deposited on the wire was magnetised, but
that its magnetisation was very intense. Moreover, on causing a powerful
magnetising force to act in the same direction as the original field, it was
found that the increase in the intensity of the induced magnetisation was
408 Induced Magnetism [CH. xn
very small, shewing that the magnetisation had previously been nearly at
the point of saturation.
Now if, as Weber supposed, the molecules of iron were already magnets
before being deposited on the silver wire, then any magnetic force sufficient
to arrange them in order on the wire ought to have produced a filament in
a state of magnetic saturation, while if, as Poisson supposed, the magnetism
in the molecules was merely induced by the external magnetic field, then
the magnetisation of the filament ought to have been proportional to the
original field, and ought to have disappeared when the field was destroyed.
Thus, as between these two hypotheses, the experiments decide conclusively
for the former.
478. Weber's theory is illustrated by the following analysis.
Consider a molecule which, in the normal state of the matter, has
its axis in the direction OP, and let
the field of force from the neigh
bouring molecules be a field of in
tensity D, the direction of the lines
of force being of course parallel to
OP. Now let an external field of
intensity H be applied, its direction
being a direction OA making an
angle a with OP. The total field
acting on the molecule is now com
pounded of D along OP and //
along OA. FIG. 115.
In fig. 115, let SO, OP represent H and D in magnitude and direction,
then SP will represent the resultant field, so that the new direction of the
axis of the molecule will be SP. Suppose that there are n molecules per
unit volume, each of moment m. Originally, when the axes of the molecules
were scattered indifferently in all directions, the number for which the
angle a had a value between a and a. + da. was ^n sin ada. These molecules
now have their axes pointing in the direction SP, and therefore making an
angle PSA (= 6, say) with the direction of the external magnetic field.
The aggregate moment of all these molecules resolved in the direction of OA
is accordingly
\mn sin a cos 0da,
and on integration the aggregate moment of all the molecules per unit
volume, which is the same as the intensity of the induced magnetisation /,
is given by
r<t=ir
I \mn sin a cos 6 da. (409).
J a =
Molecular Theories
409
477479]
If E is the value of SP, measured on the same scale on which SO and OP
represent H and D respectively, then
2RH
so that, on changing the variable from a to R, we must have the relation,
obtained by differentiation of the above equation,
RdR = HD sin ada.
We also have
cos =
so that equation (409) becomes
I=mnf" ^ D ~ dR.
In fig. 115 the limits of integration for R are R=D + H and R D H.
If, however, H>D, then the point 8 falls outside the circle APE and the
limits for R are R = D + H and R = HD.
On integrating, we find as the values of /,
when X < D, I = $mn^,
X > D,
X oo ,
I = mn 1 1
I mn.
~H
FIG. 116.
In fig. 116, the abscissae represent values of H, the ordinates of the
thick curve the values of /, and the ordinates of the dotted curve the
values of B or pH, drawn on one tenth of the vertical scale of the graph
for /.
479. It will be seen that Weber's theory fails to account for the
increase in the value of /t before I reaches its maximum, and also that
410 Induced Magnetism [OH. xn
it gives no account of the phenomenon of retentiveness. Maxwell has
shewn how the theory may be modified so as to take account of these
two phenomena. He supposes that, so long as the forces acting on the
molecules are small, the molecules experience small deflexions as imagined
by Weber, but that as soon as these deflexions exceed a certain amount,
the molecules are wrenched away entirely from their original positions of
equilibrium, and take up positions relative to some new position of equi
librium. It might be, for instance, that
originally the molecule had two possible
positions of equilibrium, OP and OQ in
fig. 117. Suppose the molecule to be in
position OP and to be acted upon by a
gradually increasing force in some direc o
tion OA. At first the molecule will turn FlG  117 
from the position OP towards OA. But it may be that, as soon as the
molecule passes some position OR, it suddenly swings round and takes
up a position in which it must be regarded as being deflected from the
position of equilibrium OQ and not from OP. Let its new position
be OS, then the deflexion produced is the angle SOP instead of the
angle ROP which would be given by Weber's theory. In this way
Maxwell suggested it might be possible to account for the induced mag
netisation increasing more rapidly than the inducing force, i.e. for p,
increasing with H.
If the magnetising force is now removed, the molecule in the position
OS will not return to its original position OP, but to the position OQ. It
will therefore still have a deflexion QOP, called by Maxwell its " permanent
set," and this will account for the " retentiveness " of the substance.
No molecular theory of this kind can, however, be regarded as at all
complete. We shall return to the discussion of molecular theories of mag
netism in the next chapter.
REFERENCES.
Physical Principles and Experimental Knowledge of Magnetic Induction :
WINKELMANN. Handbuch der Physik, ii te auflage, Vol. v (1).
On the Mathematical Theory of Induced Magnetism :
J. J. THOMSON. Elements of Electricity and Magnetism, Chap. vm.
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, part in, Chaps, iv and v.
On Molecular Theories of Magnetism :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, part in, 430 and Chap. vi.
479] Examples 411
EXAMPLES.
1. A small magnet is placed at the centre of a spherical shell of radii a and b.
Determine the magnetic force at any point outside the shell.
2. A system of permanent magnets is such that the distribution in all planes parallel
to a certain plane is the same. Prove that if a right circular solid cylinder be placed in
the field with its axis perpendicular to these planes, the strength of the field at any point
inside the cylinder is thereby altered in a constant ratio.
3. A magnetic particle of moment m lies at a distance a in front of an infinite block
of soft iron bounded by a plane face, to which the axis of the particle is perpendicular.
Find the force acting on the magnet, and shew that the potential energy of the system is
4. The whole of the space on the negative side of the yz plane is filled with soft iron,
and a magnetic particle of moment m at the point (a, 0, 0) points in the direction
(cos a, 0, sin a). Prove that the magnetic potential at the point #, y, z inside the iron is
2m z sin a  (a  x] cos a
5. A small magnet of moment M is held in the presence of a very large fixed mass of
soft iron of permeability p. with a very large plane face : the magnet is at a distance a
from the plane face and makes an angle B with the shortest distance from it to the plane.
Shew that a certain force, and a couple
(p  1) M 2 sin e cos 6/8 (p + 1 ) a 3 ,
are required to keep the magnet in position.
6. A small sphere of radius b is placed near a circuit which, when carrying unit
current, would produce a field of strength H at the point where the centre of the sphere is
placed. Shew that if < is the coefficient of magnetic induction for the sphere, the presence
of the sphere increases the selfinduction of the wire by, approximately,
(3 + 47TK) 2
7. If the magnetic field within a body of permeability p. be uniform, shew that any
spherical portion can be removed and the cavity filled up with a concentric spherical
nucleus of permeability p>i and a concentric shell of permeability /n 2 without affecting the
external field, provided p. lies between ^ and p. 2 , and the ratio of the volume of the nucleus
to that of the shell is properly chosen. Prove also that the field inside the nucleus is
uniform, and that its intensity is greater or less than that outside according as p. is greater
or less than m .
8. A sphere of radius a has at any point (#, y, z) components of permanent magneti
sation (P#, Qy, 0), the origin of coordinates being at its centre. It is surrounded by a
spherical shell of uniform permeability /x, the bounding radii being a and b. Determine
the vector potential at an outside point.
9. A sphere of soft iron of radius a is placed in a field of uniform magnetic force
parallel to the axis of z. Shew that the lines of force external to the sphere lie on surfaces
of revolution, the equation of which is of the form
r being the distance from the centre of the sphere.
412 Induced Magnetism [OH. xn
10. A sphere of soft iron of permeability p. is introduced into a field of force in which
the potential is a homogeneous polynomial of degree n in x, y, z. Shew that the potential
inside the sphere is reduced to
of its original value.
11. If a shell of radii a, b is introduced in place of the sphere in the last question,
shew that the force inside the cavity is altered in the ratio
2n + l
12. An infinitely long hollow iron cylinder of permeability /z, the crosssection being
concentric circles of radii a, b, is placed in a uniform field of magnetic force the direction
of which is perpendicular to the generators of the cylinder. Shew that the number of
lines of induction through the space occupied by the cylinder is changed by inserting the
cylinder in the field, in the ratio
13. A cylinder of iron of permeability p has for crosssection the curve
r =a(l+e cos 20),
where e 2 may be neglected. Find the distribution of potential when the cylinder is placed
in a field of force of which the potential before the introduction of the cylinder was
14. An infinite elliptic cylinder of soft iron is placed in a uniform field of potential
(Xx+ Yy\ the equation of the cylinder being 2 + p = l. Shew that the potential of
the induced magnetism at any internal point is
15. A solid elliptic cylinder whose equation is =a given by
#f?# = c cosh ( + 177)
is placed in a field of magnetic force whose potential is A(x*y 2 }. Shew that in the
space external to the cylinder the potential of the induced magnetism is
 \A c 2 cosech 2 (a + /3) sin 4a e 2 (a ~ ^ " * > cos 217,
where coth 2/3 is the permeability.
16. A solid ellipsoid of soft iron, semiaxes a, 6, c and permeability /*, is placed in a
uniform field of force X parallel to the axis of x, which is the major axis. Verify that the
internal and external potentials of the induced magnetisation are
where A 1
and X is the parameter of the confocal through the point considered.
Examples 413
17. A unit magnetic pole is placed on the axis of z at a distance / from the centre of
a sphere of soft iron of radius a. Shew that the potential of the induced magnetism at
any external point is
71
where z t w are the cylindrical coordinates of the point. Find also the potential at an
internal point.
18. A magnetic pole of strength m is placed in front of an iron plate of permeability
H and thickness c. If this pole be the origin of rectangular coordinates #, y t and if x be
perpendicular and y parallel to the plate, shew that the potential behind the plate is
given by
e xt Jo(yt)dt
where
p =
CHAPTER XIII.
THE MAGNETIC FIELD PRODUCED BY ELECTRIC CURRENTS.
Experimental Basis.
480. So far the subjects of electricity and magnetism have been developed
as entirely separate groups of physical phenomena. Although the mathe
matical treatment in the two cases has been on parallel lines, we have not
had occasion to deal with any physical links connecting the two series of
phenomena.
The first definite link of the kind was discovered by Oersted in 1820.
Oersted's discovery was the fact that a current of electricity produced a
magnetic field in its neighbourhood.
The nature of this field can be investigated in a simple manner. We
first double back on itself a wire in which
a current is flowing. It is found that no
magnetic field is produced.
Next we open the end into a small
plane loop PQRS. It is found that at dis
tances from the loop which are great com
pared with its linear dimensions, such a
loop exercises the same magnetic forces as
a magnetic particle of which the axis is
perpendicular to the plane PQRS, and the
moment is jointly proportional to the strength of the current and to the area
PQRS. The single current flowing in the circuit OPQRST is obviously
equivalent to two currents of equal strength, the one flowing in the circuit
OPST obtained by joining the points P and 8, and the other flowing in the
closed circuit PQRSP. The former current is shewn, by the preliminary
experiment, to have no magnetic effects, so that the whole magnetic field
may be ascribed to the small closed circuit PQRS.
(2)
FIG. 118.
Fm. 119.
480482] The Magnetic Field producedty Electric Currents 415
481. Instead of regarding this field as due to a particle of moment jointly
proportional to the area PQRS and to the currentstrength, we may regard
it as due to a small magnetic shell, coinciding with the area PQRS, and of
strength simply proportional to the current flowing in PQRS.
482. Next, let us consider the current flowing in a closed circuit of any
shape we please, and not necessarily in
one plane. Let us cover in the closed
circuit by an area of any kind having the
circuit for its boundary, and let us cut
up this area into infinitely small meshes
by two systems of lines. A current of
strength i flowing round the boundary
circuit, is exactly equivalent to a current
of strength i flowing round each mesh in
the same direction as the current in the
boundary. For, if we imagine this latter
system of currents in existence, any line
such as AB in the interior will have two currents flowing through it, one
from each of the two meshes which it separates, and these currents will
be equal but in opposite directions. Thus all the currents in the lines
which have been introduced in the interior of the circuit annihilate one
another as regards total effect, while the currents in those parts of the
meshes which coincide with the original circuit just combine to repro
duce the original current flowing in this circuit.
Thus the original circuit is equivalent, as regards magnetic effect, to a
system of currents, one in each mesh. By taking the meshes sufficiently
small, we may regard each mesh as plane, so that the magnetic effect of a
current circulating in it is known : the magnetic effect of the current in a
single mesh is that of a magnetic shell of strength proportional to the current
and coinciding in position with the mesh. Thus, by addition, we find that
the whole system of currents produces the same magnetic effects as a single
magnetic shell coinciding with the surface of which the original current
circuit is the boundary, and of strength proportional to the current. This
shell, then, produces the same magnetic effect as the original single current.
The magnetic shell is spoken of as the " equivalent magnetic shell."
Thus we have obtained the following result :
"A current flowing in any closed circuit produces the same magnetic field
as a certain magnetic shell, known as the 'equivalent magnetic shell! This
shell may be taken to be any shell having the circuit for its boundary, its
strength being uniform and proportional to that of the current"
416 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xin
483. Law of Signs. If an observer is imagined to stand on that side of
the "equivalent magnetic shell" which contains the negative poles, the
current flows round him in the same direction as that in which the sun
moves round an observer standing on the earth's surface in the northern
hemisphere.
We can also state the law by saying that to drive an ordinary right
handed screw (e.g. a corkscrew) in the direction
of magnetisation of the shell, the screw would
c
have to be turned in the direction of the
current.
Current
The law of signs expresses a fact of nature, not a f f , f +
mathematical convention. At the same time, it must be
noticed that the law does not express that nature shews
any preference in this respect for righthanded over left
_ , "" , . . , Direction of Magnetisation
handed screws. Two conventions have already been made . equivalent shell
in deciding which are to be called the positive directions FIG 12Q ,
of current and of magnetisation, and if either of these
conventions had been different, the word " righthanded " in the law of signs would have
had to be replaced by " lefthanded."
Electromagnetic Unit of Current.
484. If i is the strength of the current flowing in a circuit, and <j) the
strength of the equivalent magnetic shell, then
</> = ki,
where & is a constant, which is positive if the law of signs just stated has
been obeyed in determining the signs of < and i.
In the system of units known as Electromagnetic, we take k=\, and
define a unit current as one such that the equivalent magnetic shell is of
unit strength. The strength of a current, in these units, is therefore
measured by its magnetic effects. Obviously the strength measured in this
way will be entirely different from the strength measured by the number of
electrostatic units of electricity which pass a given point. This latter method
of measurement is the electrostatic method. A full discussion of systems of
units will be given later ( 582); at present it may be stated that a current
which is of unit strength when measured electromagnetically in C.G.S. units is
of strength 3 x 10 10 (very approximately) when measured electrostatically. The
practical unit of current, the ampere, is, as already stated, equal to 3 x 10 9
electrostatic units of current, so that the electromagnetic unit of current is
equal to 10 amperes.
483485] Work done in threading a Circuit 417
WORK DONE IN THREADING A CIRCUIT.
485. In fig. 121 let the thick line represent a circuit in which a current
is flowing,and let the thin line through
the point P represent the outline of ,x'' "^v^
any equivalent magnetic shell, P /'
being any point in the shell. Let us
imagine that we thread the circuit by {
any closed path beginning and ending I
at P, this path being represented by
the dotted line in the figure. At every
point of this path except P, we have a ^.. ''
full knowledge of the magnetic forces. FIG. 121.
It will be convenient to regard the shell as having a definite, although
infinitesimal, thickness at P. Let 7+, 71 denote the points in
which the path intersects the positive and negative faces of the
shell. Then we may say that the forces are known at all points of
the path, except over the small range 7+71.
The original current can, however, be represented by any
number of equivalent magnetic shells, for any shell is capable of
representing the current, provided only it has as boundary the
circuit in which the current is flowing. FIG. 122.
Let any other equivalent shell cut the path in the points Q+Q. From
our knowledge of the forces exerted by this shell, we can determine the
forces exerted by the current at all points of the path except those within
the range Q+Q In particular we can determine the forces over the range
7+71, and it is at once obvious that on passing to the limit and making the
range 7+71 infinitesimal, the forces at the points P+, 71, and at all points on the
infinitesimal range 7+71 must be equal. Obviously the forces are also finite.
The work done on a unit pole in taking it round the complete circuit
from 71 back to 71, is accordingly the same as that done in taking it from 71
round the path to 7+. This can be calculated by supposing the forces to be
exerted by the first equivalent shell, for the path is entirely outside this
shell. If the potential due to the shell is flp+ at 7+ and is Hp_ at 71, the
work done is Hp + Hp_.
Now H, the potential of the shell at any point, is, as we know ( 419),
equal to iw, where &> is the solid angle subtended by the shell and i is the
current, measured in .electromagnetic units. The change in the solid angle
as we pass from 71 to 7+ is, as a matter of geometry, equal to 4Tr. Thus
Hp +  Hp_ = 4?' (410).
The work done in taking a unit pole round the path described is accord
ingly 4<7ri.
j. 27
418 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
MAGNETIC POTENTIAL OF A FIELD DUE TO CURRENTS.
486. Let us fix upon a definite equivalent shell to represent a current of
strength i. Let us bring a unit pole from in
finity to any point A, by a path which cuts
the equivalent shell in points P, Q, ...Z. For
simplicity, let us at first suppose that at each
of these points the path passes from the
positive to the negative side of the shell, and
let the points on the two sides of the shell be
denoted, as before, by P + , P.; Q + , Q_; and
so on.
Then, if H denotes the magnetic potential due to the equivalent shell,
the work done in bringing the unit pole from infinity to P + will be fl p+ . In
the limit P+ and P. are coincident, so that the work in taking the unit pole
on from P + to P_ is infinitesimal. In taking it from P_ to Q + work is done of
amount O Q+ O P _, from Q + to Q_, the work is infinitesimal, and so on, until
ultimately we arrive at A. Thus the total work done in bringing the unit
pole to A is
n p+ + (0 Q+  n p j + (n* +  n Q _) + . . . + (n A  n z _),
or, rearranging, is
&A + (flp +  HP.) + (<V  n Q _) + ....
Now each of the terms ft p H P , n e+ H Q , etc. is equal by equation
(410) to 4nri, so that if n is the number of these terms, the whole expression
is equal to
Replacing 1 A by io, where o> is the solid angle subtended by the shell at
A, we find for the potential at A due to the electric current
(CD + 4<7rn)i .............................. (4H)
If the path cuts the equivalent shell n times in the direction from + to ,
and ra times in the opposite direction, the quantity n must be replaced by
n m.
Expression (411) shews that the potential at a point is not a single valued
function of the coordinates of the point. The forces, which are obtained by
differentiation of this potential, are, however, singlevalued.
Current in infinite straight wire.
487. As an illustration of the results obtained, let us consider the
magnetic field produced by a current flowing in a straight wire which is of
such great length that it may be regarded as infinite, the return current
being entirely at infinity.
486488]
Magnetic Potential of Field
419
Let us take the line itself for axis of z. Any semiinfinite plane termi
nated by this line may be regarded as an equivalent magnetic shell. Let us
fix on any plane and take it as the plane of xz.
Consider any point P such that OP, the shortest distance fromP to
the axis of z t makes an angle with Ox. The cone
through P which is subtended by the semiinfinite
plane Ox, is bounded by two planes one a plane
through P and the axis of z ; the other a plane through ^ /$\
P parallel to the plane zOx. These contain an angle
TT 0, so that the solid angle subtended by the plane
zOx at P is 2 (TT 6). Giving this value to co in
formula (411), we obtain as the magnetic potential at P p IG
r)Q
Since ^ = it is clear that there is no radial magnetic force, and the
force at any point in the direction of increasing
This result is otherwise obvious. If the work done in taking a unit pole
round a circle of circumference 2?rr is to be 4Tn, the tangential force at
4. V 2 *
every point must be .
488. This result admits of a simple experimental confirmation.
Let PQR be a disc suspended in such a way that the only motion of
which it is capable is one of pure rotation about a
long straight wire in which a current is flowing.
On this disc let us suppose that an imaginary unit
pole is placed at a distance r from the wire. There
will be a couple tending to turn the disc, the
2i
moment of this couple being x r or 2i. Similarly
if we place a unit negative pole on the disc there is
a couple 2i.
On placing a magnetised body on the disc, there
will be a system of couples consisting of one of
moment 2z for every positive pole and one of moment FlG 12 5
2i for every negative pole. Since the total charge
in any magnet is nil, it appears that the resultant couple must vanish, so
that the disc will shew no tendency to rotate. This can easily be verified.
272
420 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
Circular Current.
489. Let us find the potential due to a current of strength i flowing in a
circle of radius a. The equivalent magnetic shell may be supposed to be a
hemisphere of radius a bounded by this circle.
The potential at any point on the axis of the circle can readily be found.
For at a point on the axis distant r from the centre
of the circle, the solid angle o> subtended by the
circle is given by
ft> = 27r(lcosa)=27r(l ..= V
so that the potential at this point is
/ r \
n  2wt ( i  == = } .
v a 2 + r 8 '
This expression can be expanded in powers of r
by the binomial theorem. We obtain the following
expansions :
if r < a,
FIG. 126.
n
if r > a,
...(412),
la 2
2r 2
2.4... 2n
.(413).
From this it is possible to deduce the potential at any point in space.
Let us take spherical polar coordinates, taking the centre of the circle as
origin, and the axis of the circle as the initial line = 0. Inside the sphere
r = a, the potential is a solution of V 2 H = which is symmetrical about the
axis 6=0, and remains finite at the origin. It is therefore capable of
expansion in the form
Along the axis we have = 0, so that this assumed value of H becomes
and the coefficients may be determined by comparison with equation (412).
Thus we obtain for the potentials,
} a 2 a 3
489491] Magnetic Potential of Field 421
when r < a, and
i P, (cos 0)  P 3 (cos 0)  ...
when r > a.
r s
At points so near to the origin that may be neglected, the potential is
(l  cos 0V
V a /'
= 29rt l  cos
*rf(lg,
where z = rcosO, and the magnetic force is a uniform force ^ =^
dz a
parallel to the axis.
Solenoids.
490. A cylinder, wound uniformly with wire through which a current
can be sent, is called a ' solenoid.'
Consider first a circular cylinder of radius a and
height h, having a wire coiled round it at the uniform
rate of n turns per unit length, the wire carrying a
current i. Let z be a coordinate measuring the
distance of any crosssection from the base of the
solenoid. Then the small layer between z and z + dz,
being of thickness dz, will contain ndz turns of wire.
The currents flowing in all these turns may be re FlG> 127 '
garded as a single current mdz flowing in a circle, this circle being of radius
a and at distance z from the base of the solenoid. The magnetic potential
of this current may be written down from the formula of the last section, and
the potential of the whole solenoid follows by integration.
491. Endless Solenoid. In the limiting case in which the solenoid is of
infinite length (or in which the ends are so far away that the solenoid may
be treated as though it were of infinite length), the field can be determined
in a simpler manner.
Consider first the field outside the solenoid. In taking a unit pole round
any path outside the solenoid which completely surrounds the solenoid, the
work done is, by 485, 4nri. The current flowing per unit length of the
solenoid is ni. In general we are concerned with cases in which this is finite
n being very large and i being very small. The quantity 4>7ri may accordingly
be neglected, and we can suppose that the work done in taking unit pole
round the solenoid is zero.
422 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
It follows that the force outside the solenoid can have no component at
right angles to planes through the axis, and clearly, by a similar argument,
the same must be true inside the solenoid. Hence the lines of induction
must lie entirely in the planes through the axis of the
solenoid. From symmetry, there is no reason why
the lines of induction at any point should converge
towards, rather than diverge from, the axis, or vice
versa. Hence the lines of induction will be parallel
to the axis, and the force at every point will be entirely
parallel to the axis.
Let the lines PQR, P'Q'R in fig. 128 be radii
meeting the axis, the lines PP', QQ', RR' being
parallel to the axis and each of length e. Let the FIG. 128.
magnetic forces along these lines be F lf F 2 and F 3
respectively.
In taking unit pole round the closed path PP'Q'QP the work done is
F l e%e,
and since this must vanish, we must have F = F 2 . Hence the force at all
points outside the solenoid must be the same ; it must be the same as the
force at infinity and must consequently vanish. Thus there is no force at all
outside the solenoid.
In taking unit pole round the closed path PP'R'RP, the work done is
F 3 e, and this must be equal to 47rm'e, so that we must have F 3 = 4nrni. Thus
the force at any point inside the solenoid is a force 4>7rni parallel to the axis.
Thus the field of force arising from an infinite solenoid consists of a
uniform field of strength ^irni inside the solenoid, there being no field at all
outside. The construction of a solenoid accordingly supplies a simple way of
obtaining a uniform magnetic field of any required strength.
GALVANOMETERS.
492. A galvanometer is an instrument for measuring the strength of
an electric current, the method of measurement usually being to observe the
strength of the magnetic field produced by the current by noting its action
on a small movable magnet.
There are naturally various classes and types of galvanometers designed
to fulfil various special purposes.
The Tangent Galvanometer.
493. In the tangent galvanometer the current flows in a vertical
circular coil, at the centre of which a small magnetic needle is pivoted
so as to be free to turn in a horizontal plane.
491493] Galvanometers 423
Before use, the instrument is placed so that the plane of the coil contains
the lines of magnetic force of the earth's field. The needle accordingly rests
in the plane of the coil. When the current is allowed to flow in the coil
a new field is originated, the lines of force being at right angles to the
plane of the coil, and the needle will now place itself so as to be in equi
librium under the field produced by the superposition of the two fields the
earth's field and the field produced by the current.
As the needle can only move in a horizontal plane, we need consider
only the horizontal components of the two fields. Let H, as usual, denote
the horizontal component of the earth's field. Let i be the current flowing
in the coil, measured in electromagnetic units, let a be the radius and let n
be the number of turns of wire. Near the centre of the coil the field
produced by the current is, by 489, a uniform field at right angles to
the plane of the coil, of intensity  . The total
CL
horizontal field is therefore compounded of a field of
strength H in the plane of the coil, and a field of
strength   at right angles to it.
FIG. 129.
The resultant will make an angle 6 with the plane
of the coil, where
/27mA
' (416),
lirin
and the needle will set itself along the lines of force of the field. Thus the
needle will, when in equilibrium, make an angle with the plane of the
coil, where 6 is given by equation (416). If we observe 6 we can determine
i from equation (416). We have
(417),
where G is a constant, known as the galvanometer constant, its value
T . 2?m
being  .
The instrument is called the tangentgalvanometer from the circum
stance that the current is proportional to the tangent of the angle 6.
The tangentgalvanometer has the advantage that all currents, no matter
how small or how great, can be measured without altering the adjustment
of the instrument. A disadvantage is that the readings are not very sensi
tive when the currents to be measured are large only a very small change
in the reading is produced by a considerable change in the current. Let
424 The Magnetic Fidd produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
the current be increased by an amount di, and let the corresponding change
in 6 be d6, then from equation (417),
iG\ GH
7/1
so that if i is large, yr is small. Thus, although the instrument may be
cw
used for the measurement of large currents, the measurements cannot be
effected with much accuracy.
A second defect of the instrument is caused by the circumstance that
the field produced by the current is not absolutely uniform near the centre
of the coil. If a is the radius of the coil, and 6 the distance of either pole
of the magnet from its centre, the poles will be in a part of the field in
which the intensity differs from that at the centre of the coil by terms of
53
the order of . For instance, if the magnet is one inch long, while the
coil has a diameter of 10 inches, the intensity of the field will be different
from that assumed, by terms of the order of (j 1 ^) 3 , so that the reading will be
subject to an error of about one part in a thousand.
By replacing the single coil of the tangent galvanometer by two or more
parallel coils, it is possible to make the field, in the region in which the
magnet moves, as uniform as we please. It is therefore possible, although
at the expense of great complication, to make a tangent galvanometer which
shall read to any required degree of accuracy.
The Sine Galvanometer.
494. The sine galvanometer differs from the tangent galvanometer in
having its coil adjusted so that it can be turned about a vertical axis.
Before the current is sent through the coil, the instrument is turned until
the needle is at rest in the plane of the coil. The coil is then in the direc
tion of the earth's field at the point.
As soon as a current is sent through the coil, the needle is deflected, as
in the tangent galvanometer. The coil is now slowly turned in the direction
in which the needle has moved, until it overtakes the needle, and as soon
as the needle is again at rest in the plane of the coil, a reading is taken,
giving the angle through which the coil has been turned. Let be this
angle, then the earth's field may be resolved into components, H cos 6 in
the plane of the coil arid H sin 6 at right angles to this plane. Since the
needle rests in the plane of the coil, the latter component must be just
neutralised by the field set up by the current, this being, as we have seen,
entirely at right angles to the plane of the coil. We accordingly have
493495] Galvanometers 425
so that we must have
; = ^sin<9 (418),
Or
where G, the galvanometer constant, has the same meaning as before.
This instrument has the disadvantage that it cannot be used to measure
TT
currents greater than ~ . It is, however, sensitive over the whole range
through which it can be used : if dO is the increase in caused by a change
di in i, we have
dO ^r sec ddi,
12
so that the greater the current the more sensitive the instrument.
The great advantage of this form of galvanometer, however, is that when
the reading is taken the magnet is always in the same position relative
to the field set up by the current in the coil. Thus the deviations from
uniformity of intensity at the centre of the field do not produce any error
in the readings obtained : they result only in the galvanometer constant
having a value different from that which it has so far been supposed to
have. But when once the right value has been assigned to the constant G,
equation (418) will be true absolutely, no matter how large the movable
needle may be in comparison with the coil.
Other galvanometers.
495. There are various other types of galvanometers in use to serve
various purposes other than the exact measurement of a current. For full
descriptions of these the reader may be referred to books treating the
theory of electricity and magnetism from the more experimental side.
The following may be briefly mentioned here :
I. The D'Arsonval Galvanometer. This instrument is typical of a class
of galvanometer in which there is no moving needle, the moving part being
the coil itself, which is free to turn in a strong magnetic field. The coil
is suspended by a torsion fibre between the poles of a powerful horseshoe
magnet. When a current is sent through the coil, the coil itself produces
the same field as a magnetic shell, and so tends to set itself across the
lines of force of the permanent magnet, this motion being resisted by no
forces except the torsion of the fibre.
II. The Mirror Galvanometer. This is a galvanometer originally designed
by Lord Kelvin for the measurement of the small currents used in the trans
mission of signals by submarine cables. The design is, in its main outlines,
identical with that of the tangent galvanometer, but, to make the instrument
as sensitive as possible, the coil is made of a great number of turns of fine
426 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [OH. xm
wire, wound as closely as possible round the space in which the needle
moves, and the needle is suspended as delicately as possible by a fine
torsionthread. To make the instrument still more sensitive, permanent
magnets can be arranged so as to neutralize part of the intensity of the
earth's field. The instrument is read by observing the motion of a ray of
light reflected from a small mirror which moves with the needle : it is from
this that the instrument takes its name.
III. The Ballistic Galvanometer. This instrument does not measure
the current passing at a given instant, but the total flow of electricity
which passes during an infinitesimal interval. If the needle is at rest in
the plane of the coil, a current sent through the coil will establish a
magnetic field tending to turn the needle out of this plane. So long as
the needle is approximately in the plane of the coil, the couple acting on
the needle will be proportional to the current in the coil : let it be denoted
by ci, where i is the current.
Then if co is the angular velocity of the needle at any instant, we shall
have an equation of the form
j.dco
mk* = = ci,
at
where mk* is the moment of inertia of the needle. Integrating through the
small interval of time during which the current may be supposed to flow,
we obtain
m& 2 H = c I idt.
Here O is the angular velocity with which the needle starts into
motion, and I idt is the total current which passes through the coil.
Thus the total flow I idt can be obtained by measuring H, and this
again can be obtained by observing the angle through which the needle
swings before coming to rest at the end of its oscillation.
MECHANICAL FORCES IN THE FIELD.
Intensity due to any closed circuit.
496. It has been seen, in 423, that the mutual potential energy of
a magnetic particle of moment unity at any point x', y r , z', and a shell
of strength < is equal to minus </> times the number of tubes of induction
of the field set up by the particle that are enclosed by the shell, and this
again is equal, by 445, to
495, 496] Mechanical Forces 427
where (equations (377))
.(420).
Here x, y, z are the cartesian coordinates of any point on the circuit,
r the distance from this point to the particle, and Z, m, n the direction
cosines of the axis of the particle. If n is the potential of the shell at
x ', y', z, a second expression for the mutual potential of the shell and the
magnetic particle is, by formula (353),
f, an an an
I* ^ r + m^t + n
V dx dy
This expression is accordingly equal to expression (419).
The component of force at x', y, z' in the direction (I, m, n) produced by
the shell under consideration is
/ 7 an , an an\
[I $, + m =; ; + n x,
V dx dy dz J
and this, by what has just been said, is equal to
ds ds
On substituting for F, G, H from equations (420), etc., this becomes
. /T 7 ra /i\a* a /i\ay] , f 1 f n ,
0 Ho" ~U^ U^^ + m^...V+7i^...M^5.
^L la^/ Vr/ 85 dz \rj clz] ( j ( jj
This expression will also give the force at x', y , z' in direction I, m, n from
a current </> flowing in a circuit coinciding with the boundary of the shell.
On examining the rules of signs given in 438 and 483, it will be found that
the direction of this current must be the same as that in which the inte
gration round the circuit is taken, provided that righthanded axes are in use,
but must be the opposite direction if we are using lefthanded axes.
We accordingly see that the force from a current of strength i can be
regarded as made up of a contribution of amount
.r, fa n\dz a ma*/) f i f n
* IM5T I 51 Vl).a r+^l ^r + n vr
L [dy \rjds dz \rjds) ( j ( JJ
per unit length from each element of the circuit. This again can be written
in the form
IX + mY + nZ,
i { y v dz z z d
=  T ^   ^
r 2 I r ds r ds
^
where X = 
428 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [OH. xm
Thus the force from the element ds may be taken to be a force
having components Xds, Yds, Zds, and this again is a force of magnitude
ss * n , where 6 is the angle between ds and r, the direction of the force
being at right angles to the plane containing ds and r. This is Ampere's
expression for the force from an element of electric current.
Mechanical action upon a circuit.
497. Since action and reaction are equal and opposite, a unit pole at P
must exert upon the whole circuit a force of which the component in the
direction I, m, n will be
ds\ ds ds
where F, G, H are given by equations (420), etc.
The force exerted on the circuit by any magnetic system can be obtained
by addition of such expressions, the magnetic system being regarded as an
aggregate of simple poles. If fl 1 = ^ ) ^ s the potential of the magnetic
system, the force exerted on the circuit in direction I, ra, n is found to be
where F' = f m r n ^~
dz dy
d l ~ .(423).
dy i
The force given by expression (422) can be regarded as made up of a
force
V ds ds
per unit length. Thus the components of mechanical force acting on the
circuit per unit length, which are the coefficients of I, m, n in this last ex
pression, will be
^ . /an dz an a?/\
& M ^~~ ^ ~^~ ^r > e tc.
Vdy ds oz csj
Let IT be the magnetic intensity at the point, and let l lt m l , n be its
directioncosines. Let Z 2 , m 2 , n z be the directioncosines ~ * * 5~ < of c?s.
cs ds ds
Then
496^498] Mechanical Forces 429
Squaring and adding, the force per unit length is seen to be a force of
amount iHsin 6 per unit length in a direction perpendicular to the directions
of i and H, 6 being the angle between these two directions.
498. If the force on the circuit is to be capable of explanation in terms
of action at a distance, it is clear that this force must be the resultant of
forces between the element ds and the different magnetic poles.
If the magnetic system is a single pole of unit strength, the force becomes
one of amount i sin 0/r 2 per unit length, in a direction perpendicular to that
containing the pole and the element of the circuit, this being the reaction
corresponding to the action already found in 496.
This system of forces is not the only one which can explain the observed
forces, for there are other ways of distributing the resultant force given by
expression (421) over the different elements of the circuit. The most general
way of distributing the forces is to assign to the element ds a force
dx n dy w dz d<f>
j + tr j^ + " j j~
ds ds ds ds
where </> is any single valued function of position, so that l^ds = Q. In
J ds
order that this may represent a force in direction I, m, n it must be of the
form
IE, + raH + nZ.
The first three terms are already each of this form, so that the term ^
OS
must also be of this form. In order further that the force may be inde
pendent of changes of axes, < must be of the form
+n
)^,
dzJ T
dy
where ty does not depend on the particular axes which are in use. Thus
can only depend on the direction of ds and the distance r.
The components of force are now seen to be
The first terms compound to give the force already found, which is per
pendicular to r and ds. The last terms give the force arising from a potential
~ . Since ty can depend only on r and ds, this latter force must necessarily
430 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [OH. xm
be in the plane determined by the two lines r and ds, so that the whole force
must have a component out of the plane of r and ds. It is almost incon
ceivable that such a force could be the result of pure action at a distance, so
that we are led to attribute the forces acting on a circuit conveying a current
to action through the medium.
Action between two circuits.
499. Before leaving this question, however, mention must be made of
various attempts to resolve the forces between two circuits into forces between
pairs of elements.
If the currents, say of strength i, i', are replaced by their equivalent shells,
the mutual potential energy of these shells is, by 423, 446,
where e is the angle between the two elements ds, ds and r is their distance
apart. The forces tending to move the circuits in any specified way may be
obtained by differentiation.
It is obvious that these forces can be accounted for if we suppose the
elements dsds' to act on one another with forces of which the mutual poten
tial energy is
^^ / cos e 7 7 ,
dsds .
This, however, is not the most general way of decomposing the resultant
force. Obviously we shall get the same form for W if we assume for the
mutual potential energy of the two elements
">j j > /cose d 2 d> \
n'dsds  + 'Hr/)
V r dsds/
where <f> is any single valued function of position of the elements ds, ds.
Clearly < must have the physical dimensions of a length. Following Helm
holtz, let us take <j> /cr, where K is a constant, as yet undetermined. We
have
3 2 , x A 9 d 3w,, d , 9 , d\
5~o~/ ( r ) = (I* + m 5 + n 5 U V / + m zr> + n *, ) r 
dsds x \ dx dy dzj\ dx dy dz J
VT dr X x'
Now 
sothat
,
cxox r r 3
8 = (xx')(y'y)
dxdy' r 3
498, 499] Mechanical Forces 431
9V cos 6 cos 6' cos e
Hence 5^7 =  ,
dsds r
where 0, 0' are the angles between r and ds, ds' respectively, and e as before
is the angle between ds, ds, so that
cos e = cos 6 cos 0' + sin 6 sin & cos (<f> <'),
where </>, </>' are the azimuths of ds, ds.
From this last equation, we have
8 2 r sin 6 sin & cos (</> <')
r
and the mutual potential energy w of the two elements now assumes the form
.., , , , /cose 8 2 r \
w = 11 dsds \ K . ^ . .
\ ^ \j j rt ' / '
 {cos 6 cos 0' + (1 /c) sin sin 0' cos (< <')).
From this value of w the system of forces can be found in the usual way.
The forces acting on the element ds will consist of
(a) a repulsion along the line joining ds and ds',
(b) a couple ^ tending to increase 9,
(c) a couple ^r tending to increase </>.
If we take K = 1 we obtain a system of forces originally suggested by
Ampere. We have
ii' dsds' n ,
w =  cos cos 6 ,
r
so that the forces are
77 // *? Ct *?
(a) a repulsion   cos 6 cos 6' along the line joining ds and ds',
/ 7 j i
(b) a couple  sin 6 cos & tending to increase 6,
and couple (c) vanishes.
If we take K = f , we obtain a system of forces derivable from the energy
function
7?
w = =  {sin sin 6' cos (< <') 2 cos cos 0'},
which is the same as the energyfunction of two magnetic particles of strengths
ids and i'ds', multiplied by Jr 8 . Thus force (a) is Jr 2 times the correspond
ing forces for the magnetic particles, while couples (b) and (c) are Jr 2 times
the corresponding couples.
432 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
500. There are of course innumerable other possible systems of forces,
but none of these seem at all plausible, so that we are almost compelled to
give up all attempts at explaining the action between the circuits by theories
of action at a distance. We accordingly attempt to construct a theory on
the hypothesis that the forces result from the transmission of stresses by the
medium. This in turn compels us to assume that the energy of the system
of currents resides in the medium.
ENERGY OF A SYSTEM OF CIRCUITS CARRYING CURRENTS.
501. The energy of a magnetic field, as we have seen ( 470), is
.................. (424).
If the energy resides in the medium, this expression may be regarded as
the energy of the field, no matter how this field is produced. If the field is
produced wholly by currents, expression (424) may be regarded as the energy
of the system of currents. As we shall now see, it can be transformed in a
simple way, so as to express the energy of the field in terms of the currents
by which the field is produced.
The integral through all space, as given by expression (424), may be
regarded as the sum of the integrals taken over all the tubes of induction by
which space is filled. The lines of induction, as we have seen, will be closed
curves, so that the tubes are closed tubular spaces.
If ds is an element of length, and dS the cross section at any point, of a
tube of unit strength, we may replace dxdydz by dSds, and instead of inte
grating with respect to dS we may sum over all tubes. Thus expression (424)
becomes
where the summation is over all unit tubes of induction. If H* = a 2 f j& f 7 2 ,
we have, by the definition of a unit tube, fj,HdS= 1, so that
and the integral becomes
Now IHds is the work performed on a unit pole in taking it once round
the tube of induction, and this we know, is equal to ^ir'Z'i, where 2'i is the
sum of all the currents threaded by the tube, taken each with its proper
sign. Thus the energy becomes
500502] Energy of Field 433
This indicates that for every time that a unit tube threads a current i,
a contribution \i is added to the energy. Thus the whole energy is
where the summation is over all the currents in the field, and N is the
number of unit tubes which thread the current i.
502. We have seen that a shell of strength (f> is equivalent, as regards
the field produced at all external points, to a current i, if $ = i. The energy
of a system of currents has however been found to be
^iiV ................................. (425),
whereas the energy of a system of shells was found ( 450) to be
.............................. (426).
The difference of sign can readily be accounted for. Let us consider a
single shell of strength <, and let dS be an element of area, and dn an element
of length inside the shell measured normally to the shell. At any point just
outside the shell, let the three components of magnetic force be a, ft, 7, the
first being a component normal to the shell, and the others being components
in directions which lie in the shell. On passing to the inside of the shell, the
normal induction is discontinuous owing to the permanent magnetism which
must be supposed to reside on the surface of the shell. Thus inside the shell,
we may suppose the components of force to be $+, ft, 7, where ^ is the
f*
permeability of the matter of which the shell is composed, and S is the
force originating from the permanent magnetism of the shell.
The contribution to the energy of the field which is made by the space
inside the shell is
 U US+) + p + <f\dxdydz,
87rJJJ r (V f*J }
where the integral is taken throughout the interior of the shell; or
This can be regarded as the sum of three integrals,
(427).

(iii) fjfSadndS
28
434 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [OH. xm
On reducing the thickness of the shell indefinitely, S becomes infinite, for
at any point of the shell,
(Sdn =  (difference of potential between the two forces of shell)
so that S becomes infinite when the thickness vanishes.
Thus on passing to the limit, the first integral
becomes infinite. This quantity is, however, a constant, for it represents the
energy required to separate the shell into infinitesimal poles scattered at
infinity.
The second integral vanishes on passing to the limit, and so need not be
further considered.
The third integral can be simplified. We have
i //(/
**
)dS.
Now I S dn = 4>7T(f), while II adS is the integral of normal induction
over the shell, and may therefore be replaced by N, the number of unit tubes
of induction from the external field, which pass through the shell. Thus the
third integral is seen to be equal to
In calculating expression (424) when the energy is that of a system of
currents, the contribution from the space occupied by the equivalent mag
netic shells is infinitesimal. Thus all the terms which we have discussed
represent differences between the energies of shells and of circuits.
Terms such as the first integrals of scheme (427) represent merely that the
energies are measured from different standard positions. In the case of the
shells, we suppose the shells to have a permanent existence, and merely to
be brought into position. The currents, on the other hand, have to be
created, as well as placed in position. Beyond this difference, there is an
outstanding difference of amount $N for each circuit, and this exactly
accounts for the difference between expressions (425) and (426).
503. Let us suppose that we have a system of circuits, which we shall
denote by the numbers 1, 2, .... Let us suppose that when a unit current
flows through 1, all the other circuits being devoid of currents, a magnetic
502505] Energy of Field 435
field is produced such that the numbers of tubes of induction which cross
circuits 1, 2, 3 ... are
jffUl 7/ 12 , 7/ 13 , ....
Similarly, when a unit current flows through 2, let the numbers of tubes
of induction be
The theorem of 446 shews at once that
L n = L* = jf ^ dads', etc (428).
If currents i lt i 2 , ... flow through the circuits simultaneously, and if the
numbers of tubes of induction which cut the circuits are N 1} N 2 , N 3 , ..., we
have
A'Iz ;' + Z 1 7 + z'7+' etc} (429) '
The energy of the system of currents is
= i A^'i 2 + Aaiii + rf + .................. (430).
504. The energy required to start the single current i in circuit 1 will
be \Ln&. We can obtain the value of L n from equation (428) by making
the two circuits ds and ds coincide. It is easily found that L n is infinite.
505. This can be seen in another way. The energy of the current is
Near to the wire, at a small distance r from it, the force is , so that
r
a 2 + /3 2 4 7 2 = 4i 2 /r\ Thus the energy within a thin ring formed of coaxal
cylinders of radii r lt r 2 , bent so as to follow the wire conveying the current
will be
where the integration with respect to r is from ^ to r 2 , that with respect
to 6 is from to 2?r, and that with respect to s is along the wire. Integrat
ing we find energy
per unit length, and on taking r t = 0, we see that this energy is infinite.
In practice, the circuits which convey currents are not of infinitesimal
crosssection, and so may not be treated geometrically as lines in calculating
L u . The current will distribute itself throughout the crosssection of the
wire, and the energy is readily seen to be finite so long as the crosssection
of the wire is finite.
282
436 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
REFERENCES.
On the general theory of the magnetic field produced by currents :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, Part iv, Chaps. I, n and xiv.
J. J. THOMSON. Elements of the Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Magne
tism, Chap. x.
WINKELMANN. Handbuch der Physik (2te Auflage), Vol. i, p. 411.
HELMHOLTZ. Wissenschaftliche Abhandlungen, Band i.
On galvanometers :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, Part iv, Chaps, xv and xvi.
EXAMPLES.
1. A current i flows in a very long straight wire. Find the forces and couples it
exerts upon a small magnet.
Shew that if the centre of the small magnet is fixed at a distance c from the wire, it
has two free small oscillations about its position of equilibrium, of equal period
where Mk 2 is the moment of inertia, and p the magnetic moment, of the magnet.
2. Two parallel straight infinite wires convey equal currents of strength i in opposite
directions, their distance apart being 2. A magnetic particle of strength ju, and moment
of inertia mk 2 is free to turn about a pivot at its centre, distant c from each of the wires.
Shew that the time of a small oscillation is that of a pendulum of length I given by
3. Two equal magnetic poles are observed to repel each other with a force of 40 dynes
when at a decimetre apart. A current is then sent through 100 metres of thin wire
wound into a circular ring eight decimetres in diameter and the force on one of the poles
placed at the centre is 25 dynes. Find the strength of the current in amperes.
4. Regarding the earth as a uniformly and rigidly magnetised sphere of radius a,
and denoting the intensity of the magnetic field on the equator by H, shew that a wire
surrounding the earth along the parallel of south latitude X, and carrying a current i
from west to east, would experience a resultant force towards the south pole of the
heavens of amount
5. Shew that at any point along a line of force, the vector potential due to a current
in a circle is inversely proportional to the distance between the centre of the circle and
the foot of the perpendicular from the point on to the plane of the circle. Hence trace
the lines of constant vector potential.
6. A current i flows in a circuit in the shape of an ellipse of area A and length I.
Shew that the force at the centre is irilA.
Examples 437
7. A current i flows round a circle of radius a, and a current i' flows in a very long
straight wire in the same plane. Shew that the mutual attraction is 47m'' (sec a 1), where
a is the angle subtended by the circle at the nearest point of the straight wire.
8. If, in the last question, the circle is placed perpendicular to the straight wire with
its centre at distance c from it, shew that there is a couple tending to set the two wires in
the same plane, of moment 2im'a 2 /e or 27m 'c, according as c> or < a.
9. A long straight current intersects at right angles a diameter of a circular current,
arid the plane of the circle makes an acute angle a with the plane through this diameter
and the straight current. Shew that the coefficient of mutual induction is
47T {c sec a (c 2 sec 2 a  a 2 )^} or 4?rc tan (7 5
according as the straight current passes within or without the circle, a being the radius of
the circle, and c the distance of the straight current from its centre.
10. Prove that the coefficient of mutual induction between a pair of infinitely long
straight wires and a circular one of radius a in the same plane and with its centre at a
distance b(>a) from each of the straight wires, is
11. A circuit contains a straight wire of length 2 conveying a current. A second
straight wire, infinite in both directions, makes an angle a with the first, and their
common perpendicular is of length c and meets the first wire in its middle point. Prove
that the additional electromagnetic forces on the first straight wire, due to the presence
of a current in the second wire, is a wrench of pitch
_ / . , a sin a\ I . , . a sin a
2 a sin a c tan ~ J  / sin 2a tan ~ * .
V c )l c
12. Two circular wires of radii a, b have a common centre, and are free to turn on an
insulating axis which is a diameter of both. Shew that when the wires carry currents
i, i\ a couple of magnitude
is required to hold them with their planes at right angles, it being assumed that b/a is so
small that its fifth power may be neglected.
13. Two circular circuits are in planes at right angles to the line joining their centres.
Shew that the coefficient of induction
where a, c are the longest and shortest lines which can be drawn from one circuit to the
other. Find the force between the circuits.
14. Two currents i, i' flow round two squares each of side a, placed with their edges
parallel .to one another and at right angles to the distance c between their centres. Shew
that they attract with a force
2 + C 2 "w
438 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xm
15. A current i flows in a rectangular circuit whose sides are of lengths 2a, 26, and
the circuit is free to rotate about an axis through its centre parallel to the sides of length
2. Another current i' flows in a long straight wire parallel to the axis and at a distance
d from it. Prove that the couple required to keep the plane of the rectangle inclined at
an angle to the plane through its centre and the straight current is
16. Two circular wires lie with their planes parallel on the same sphere, and carry
opposite currents inversely proportional to the areas of the circuits. A small magnet has
its centre fixed at the centre of the sphere, and moves freely about it. Shew that it will
be in equilibrium when its axis either is at right angles to the planes of the circuits, or
makes an angle tan ~ x ^ with them.
17. An infinitely long straight wire conveys a current and lies in front of and parallel
to an infinite block of soft iron bounded by a plane face. Find the magnetic potential at
all points, and the force which tends to displace the wire.
18. A small sphere of radius b is placed in the neighbourhood of a circuit, which
when carrying a current of unit strength would produce magnetic force // at the point
where the centre of the sphere is placed. Shew that, if * is the coefficient of induced
magnetization for the sphere, the presence of the sphere increases the coefficient of self
induction of the wire by an amount approximately equal to
(3J47TK) 2
19. A circular wire of radius a is concentric with a spherical shell of soft iron of radii
b and c. If a steady unit current flow round the wire, shew that the presence of the iron
increases the number of lines of induction through the wire by
approximately, where a is small compared with b and c.
20. A right circular cylindrical cavity is made in an infinite mass of iron of perme
ability p.. In this cavity a wire runs parallel to the axis of the cylinder carrying a steady
current of strength /. Prove that the wire is attracted towards the nearest part of the
surface of the cavity with a force per unit length equal to
where d is the distance of the wire from its electrostatic image in the cylinder.
21. A steady current C flows along one wire and back along another one, inside a
long cylindrical tube of soft iron of permeability /*, whose internal and external radii are
i and 2 , the wires being parallel to the axis of the cylinder and at equal distance a on
opposite sides of it. Shew that the magnetic potential outside the tube will be
V=~sm6\ sin 30 +  sin 50 + ...,
Hence shew that a tube of soft iron, of 150 cm. radius and 5 cm. thickness, for which the
effective value of p is 1200 C.G.S., will reduce the magnetic field at a distance, due to the
current, to less than onetwentieth of its natural strength.
Examples 439
22. A wire is wound in a spiral of angle a on the surface of an insulating cylinder of
radius a, so that it makes n complete turns on the cylinder. . A current i flows through
the wire. Prove that the resultant magnetic force at the centre of the cylinder is
along the axis.
23. A current of strength i flows along an infinitely long straight wire, and returns in
a parallel wire. These wires are insulated and touch along generators the surface of an
infinite uniform circular cylinder of material whose coefficient of induction is k. Prove, that
the cylinder becomes magnetised as a lamellar magnet whose strength is 2irt/(l+2ir)'
24. A fine wire covered with insulating material is wound in the form of a circular
disc, the ends being at the centre and the circumference. A current is sent through the
wire such that I is the quantity of electricity that flows per unit time across unit length
of any radius of the disc. Shew that the magnetic force at any point on the axis of the
disc is
27T/ (cosh " 1 (sec a)  sin a},
where a is the angle subtended at the point by any radius of the disc.
25. Coils of wire in the form of circles of latitude are wound upon a sphere and
produce a magnetic potential Ar n P n at internal points when a current is sent through
them. Find the mode of winding and the potential at external points.
26. A tangent galvanometer is to have five turns of copper wire, and is to be made so
that the tangent of the angle of deflection is to be equal to the number of amperes flowing
in the coil. If the earth's horizontal force is '18 dynes, shew that the radius of the coil
must be about 17*45 cms.
27. A given current sent through a tangent galvanometer deflects the magnet through
an angle 6. The plane of the coil is slowly rotated round the vertical axis through the
centre of the magnet. Prove that if ^>^TT, the magnet will describe complete revolu
tions, but if 6 < Jir, the magnet will oscillate through an angle sin " 1 (tan 0) on each side of
the meridian.
28. Prove that, if a slight error is made in reading the angle of deflection of a tangent
galvanometer, the percentage error in the deduced value of the current is a minimum if the
angle of deflection is TT.
29. The circumference of a sine galvanometer is 1 metre : the earth's horizontal
magnetic force is '18 c.G.s. units. Shew that the greatest current which can be measured
by the galvanometer is 4*56 amperes approximately.
30. The poles of a battery (of electromotive force 2*9 volts and internal resistance
4 ohms) are joined to those of a tangent galvanometer whose coil has 20 turns of wire and
is of mean radius 10 cms. : shew that the deflection of the galvanometer is approximately
45. The horizontal intensity of the earth's magnetic force is 18 and the resistance of
the galvanometer is 16 ohms.
31. A tangent galvanometer is incorrectly fixed, so that equal and opposite currents
give angular readings a and /3 measured in the same sense. Shew that the plane of the
coil, supposed vertical, makes an angle e with its proper position such that
2 tan e=tan a + tan /3.
440 The Magnetic Field produced by Electric Currents [CH. xin
32. If there be an error a in the determination of the magnetic meridian, find the
true strength of a current which is i as ascertained by means of a sine galvanometer.
33. In a tangent galvanometer, the sensibility is measured by the ratio of the incre
ment of deflection to the increment of current, estimated per unit current. Shew that
the galvanometer will be most sensitive when the deflection is j , and that in measuring
the current given by a generator whose electromotive force is E, and internal resistance
ft, the galvanometer will be most sensitive if there be placed across the terminals a shunt
of resistance
ffftr
where r is the resistance of the galvanometer, and H is the constant of the instrument.
What is the meaning of the result if the denominator vanishes or is negative ?
34. A tangent galvanometer consists of two equal circles of radius 3 cms. placed on a
common axis 8 cms. apart. A steady current sent in opposite directions through the two
circles deflects a small needle placed on the axis midway between the two circles through
an angle a. Shew that if the earth's horizontal magnetic force be H in c. G. s. units, then
the strength of the current in C.G.S. units will be 125,0" tan a/36?r.
35. A galvanometer coil of n turns is in the form of an anchorring described by the
revolution of a circle of radius b about an axis in its plane distant a from its centre.
Shew that the constant of the galvanometer
= ^ /^cn 2 u dn 2 u du (k = b/d)
= (8w/3 2 a) [(1 +F) E (1  F) K].
CHAPTER XIV.
INDUCTION OF CURRENTS IN LINEAR CIRCUITS.
PHYSICAL PRINCIPLES.
506. IT has been seen that, on moving a magnetic pole about in the
presence of electric currents, there is a certain amount of work done on the
pole by the forces of the field. If the conservation of energy is to be true of
a field of this kind, the work done on the magnetic pole must be represented
by the disappearance of an equal amount of energy in some other part of the
field. If all the currents in the field remain steady, there is only one store
of energy from which this amount of work can be drawn, namely the energy
of the batteries which maintain the currents, so that these batteries must,
during the motion of the magnetic poles, give up more than sufficient energy
to maintain the currents, the excess amount of energy representing work per
formed on the poles. Or again, if the batteries supply energy at a uniform
rate, part of this energy must be used in performing work on the moving
poles, so that the currents maintained in the circuits will be less than they
would be if the moving poles were at rest.
Let us suppose that we have an imaginary arrangement by which addi
tional electromotive forces can be inserted into, or removed from, each circuit
as required, and let us suppose that this arrangement is manipulated so as to
keep each current constant.
Consider first the case of a single movable pole of strength m and a single
circuit in which the current is maintained at a uniform strength i. If o> is
the solid angle subtended by the circuit at the position of the pole at any
instant, the potential energy of the pole in the field of the current is mio), so
that in an infinitesimal interval dt of the motion of the pole, the work per
formed on the pole by the forces of the field is mi 77 dt. The current which
has flowed in this time is idt, so that the extra work done by the additional
batteries is the same as that of an additional electromotive force m ,
dt
442 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
Thus the motion of the pole must have set up an additional electromotive
force in the circuit of amount m y , to counteract which the additional
at
electromotive forces are needed. The electromotive force m = which
at
appears to be set up by the motion of the magnets is called the electromotive
force due to induction.
The number of tubes of induction which start from the pole of strength m
is 47rm, and of these a number mw pa,ss through the circuit. Thus if n is the
number of tubes of induction which pass through the circuit at any instant,
the electromotive force may be expressed in the form y .
So also if we have any number of magnetic poles, or any magnetic system
of any kind, we find, by addition of effects such as that just considered, that
dN
there will be an electromotive force 7 arising from the motion of the
at
whole system, where N is the total number of tubes of induction which cut
the circuit.
It will be noticed that the argument we have given supplies no reason for taking ^V to
be the number of tubes of induction rather than tubes of force. But if the number of
tubes crossing the circuit is to depend only on the boundary of the circuit we must take
tubes of induction and not tubes of force, for the induction is a soleuoidal vector while
the force, in general, is not.
dN
507. The electromotive force of induction 7 has been supposed to
at
be measured in the same direction as the current, and on comparing this
with the law of signs previously given in 483, we obtain the relation
between the directions of the electromotive force round the circuit, and of the
lines of induction across the circuit. The magnitude and direction of the
electromotive force are given in the two following laws :
NEUMANN'S LAW. Whenever the number of tubes of magnetic induction
which are enclosed by a circuit is changing, there is an electromotive force act
ing round the circuit, in addition to the electromotive force of any batteries
which may be in the circuit, the amount of this additional electromotive force
being equal to the rate of diminution of the number of tubes of induction
enclosed by the circuit.
LENZ'S LAW. The positive direction of the electromotive force (""yrj ana
the direction in which a tube of force must pass through the circuit in order to
be counted as positive, are related in the same way as the forward motion and
rotation of a righthanded screw.
506511] Physical Principles 443
If there is no battery in the circuit, the total electromotive force will be
7 , and the current originated by this electromotive force is spoken of as
CLu
an " induced " current.
508. In order that the phenomena of induced currents may be consistent
with the conservation of energy, it must obviously be a matter of indifference
whether we cause the magnetic lines of induction to move across the
circuit, or cause the circuit to move across the lines of induction. Thus
Neumann's law must apply equally to a circuit at rest and a circuit in
motion. So also if the circuit is flexible, and is twisted about so as to change
the number of lines of induction which pass through it, there will be an in
duced current of which the amount will be given by Neumann's Law.
509. For instance if a metal ring is spun about a diameter, the number
of lines of induction from the earth's field which pass through it will change
continuously, so that currents will flow in it. Furthermore, energy will be
consumed by these currents so that work must be expended to keep the ring
in rotation. Again the wheels and axles of two cars in motion on the same
line of rails, together with the rails themselves, may be regarded as forming
a closed circuit of continually changing dimensions in the earth's magnetic
field. Thus there will be currents flowing in the circuit, and there will be
electromagnetic forces tending to retard or accelerate the motions of the cars.
510. If, as we have been led to believe, electromagnetic phenomena are
the effect of the action of the medium itself, and not of action at a distance,
it is clear that the induced current must depend on the motion of the lines of
force, and cannot depend on the manner in which these lines of force are pro
duced. Thus induction must occur just the same whether the magnetic field
originates in actual magnets or in electric currents in other parts of the field.
This consequence of the hypothesis that the action is propagated through the
medium is confirmed by experiment indeed in Faraday's original investiga
tions on induction, the field was produced by a second current.
511. Let us suppose that we have two circuits 1, 2, of which 1 contains
a battery and a key by which the circuit
can be closed and broken, while circuit 2
remains permanently closed, and contains a
galvanometer but no battery. On closing
the circuit 1, a current flows through circuit
1, setting up a magnetic field. Some of the
tubes of induction of this field pass through
circuit 2, so that the number of these tubes
changes as the current establishes itself in
circuit 1, and the galvanometer in 2 will
accordingly shew a current. When the current in 1 has reached its steady
444 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
value, as given by Ohm's Law, the number of tubes through circuit 2 will no
longer vary with the time, so that there will be no electromotive force in
circuit 2, and the galvanometer will shew no current. If we break the
circuit 1, there is again a change in the number of tubes of induction passing
through the second circuit, so that the galvanometer will again shew a
momentary current.
GENERAL EQUATIONS OF INDUCTION IN LINEAR CIRCUITS.
512. Let us suppose that we have any number of circuits 1, 2,
Let their resistances be R 1} R 2 ,..., let them contain batteries of electro
motive forces E lt E 2) ..., and let the currents flowing in them at any instant
be i 1} i,, ....
The numbers of tubes of induction N ly A 7 2 , ... which cross these circuits
are given by (cf. equations (429)),
N! = L n ii + L lz i a + L 13 i 3 + . . . , etc.
In circuit 1 there is an electromotive force E l due to the batteries, and an
dN
electromotive force r 1 due to induction. Thus the total electromotive
dt
force at any instant is E 1 ~ , and this, by Ohm's Law, must be equal to
(tt
R^. Thus we have the equation
Similarly for the second circuit,
d
E*i (Lvi l + L. a i9 + L & i 9 +...) = R 3 is (432),
and so on for the other circuits.
Equations (431), (432), ... may be regarded as differential equations
from which we can derive the currents i\, i z , ... in terms of the time and the
initial conditions. We shall consider various special cases of this problem.
INDUCTION IN A SINGLE CIRCUIT.
513. If there is only a single circuit, of resistance R and selfinduction L,
equation (431) becomes
E(Li 1 ) = Ri 1 (433).
511513] Single Circuit 445
Let us use this equation first to find the effect of closing a circuit pre
viously broken. Suppose that before the time = the circuit has been
open, but that at this instant it is suddenly closed with a key, so that the
current is free to flow under the action of the electromotive force E.
The first step will be to determine the conditions immediately after the
circuit is closed. Since ^(Li } ) is, by equation (433), a finite quantity, it
follows that Li^ must increase or decrease continuously, so that immediately
after closing the circuit the value of Li^ must be zero.
To find the way in which ^ increases, we have now to solve equation (433),
in which E, L arid R are all constants, subject to the initial condition that
ij = when t = 0. Writing the equation .in the form
we see that the general solution is
where C is a constant, and in order that i\ may vanish when = 0, we must
have C = E, so that the solution is
.(434).
The graph of ^ as a function of t is shewn in fig. 131. It will be seen
that the current rises gradually to its final
value E/R given by Ohm's Law, this rise
being rapid if L is small, but slow if L is
great. Thus we may say that the increase in
the current is retarded by its selfinduction.
We can see why this should be. The energy
of the current ^ is ^Lif, and this is large when
L is large. This energy represents work per FlG 131
formed by the electric forces: when the current
is ij, the rate at which these forces perform work is Ei lt a quantity which
does not depend on L. Thus when L is large, a great time is required for
the electric forces to establish the great amount of energy Lif.
A simple analogy may make the effect of this selfinduction clearer. Let the flow of
the current be represented by the turning of a millwheel, the action of the electric forces
being represented by the falling of the water by which the millwheel is turned. A large
value of L means large energy for a finite current, and must therefore be represented by
supposing the millwheel to have a large moment of inertia. Clearly a wheel with a small
moment of inertia will increase its speed up to its maximum speed with great rapidity,
while for a wheel with a large moment of inertia the speed will only increase slowly.
446 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
A Iterna ting Curren t.
514. Let us next suppose that the electromotive force in the circuit is
not produced by batteries, but by moving the circuit, or part of the circuit,
in a magnetic field. If N is the number of tubes of induction of the exter
nal magnetic field which are enclosed by the circuit at any instant, the
equation is
j t (Li l + N) = Ri l ........................ (435).
The simplest case arises when N is a simplyharmonic function of the
time, proportional let us say to cospt. We can simplify the problem by sup
posing that N is of the form C (cospt + isiupt). The real part of N will
give rise to a real value of i lt and the imaginary part of N to an imaginary
value of v Thus if we take N = Ce ipt we shall obtain a value for i\ of which
the real part will be the true value required for i lf
Assuming N = (7 (cos pt + isinpt) = Ce ipt , the equation becomes
and clearly the solution will be proportional to e ipt . Thus the differential
operator y will act only on a factor e ipt , and will accordingly be equivalent to
diii
multiplication by ip. We may accordingly write the equation as
a single algebraic equation of which the solution is
. _ipCe ipt
Let the modulus and argument of this expression be denoted by p and %,
so that the value of the whole expression is p (cos ^ 4 i sin ^). The value of
p, the modulus, is equal ( 311) to the product of the moduli of the factors, so
that
pC
p vjF + zy'
while the argument %, being equal ( 311) to the sum of the arguments of
the factors, is given by
The solution required for ^ is the real term p cos %, so that
Ij = p COS X
.!(&
Jt
514516] Alternating Current 447
The electromotive force produced by the change in the number of tubes
of the external field is
dN d . ~ n .
j = T.(Gcos2)t) = pCsinpt.
ctt ctt
Thus, if selfinduction were neglected, the current, as given by Ohm's
Law, would be
pC .
*jl sin pt,
and this of course would agree with that which would be given by equation
(436) if L were zero.
The modifications produced by the existence of selfinduction are repre
sented by the presence of L in expression (436), and are two in number. In
the first place the phase of the current lags behind that of the impressed
electromotive force by tan" 1  , and in the second place the apparent resist
ance is increased from R to V R* f L*p* .
515. The conditions assumed in this problem are sufficiently close to
those which occur in the working of a dynamo to illustrate this working. A
coil which forms part of a complete circuit is caused to rotate rapidly in a
magnetic field in such a way as to cut a varying number of lines of induction.
*D
The quantity ^ may be supposed to represent the number of alterna
tions per second i.e. the number of revolutions of the engine by which the
dynamo is driven. We see that the current sent through the circuit will be
an " alternating " current of frequency equal to that of the engine. In the
example given, the rate at which heat is generated is (p cos ^) 2 R, and the
average rate, averaged over a large number of alternations, is ^p*R or
This, then, would be the rate at which the engine driving the dynamo
would have to perform work.
Discharge of a Condenser.
516. A further example of the effect of induction in a single circuit which
is of extreme interest is supplied by the phenomenon of the discharge of a
condenser.
Let us suppose that the charges on the two plates at any instant are Q
and Q, the plates being connected by a wire of resistance R and of self
induction L. If G is the capacity of the condenser, the difference of potential
448 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
of the two plates will be ~, and this will now play the same part as the
electromotive force of a battery. The equation is accordingly
g r,(Li) = Ri (437).
The quantities Q and i are not independent, for i measures the rate of
flow of electricity to or from either plate, and therefore the rate of diminution
of Q. We accordingly have i = ~^ , and on substituting this expression for
i, equation (437) becomes
The solution is known to be
Q = Ae^ + Be*** ........................ (438),
where A, B are arbitrary constants, and X 1? X 2 are the roots of
La; 2  Rx + ^ = ........................... (439).
o
If the circuit is completed at time t = 0, the charge on each plate being
initially Q , we must have, at time 2 = 0,
and these conditions determine the constants A and B. The equations
giving these quantities are
If the roots of equation (439) are real, it is clear, since both their sum
and their product are positive, that they must themselves be positive quanti
ties. Thus the value of Q given by equation (438) will gradually sink from
Qo to zero. The current at any instant is
 d  = A^e>
dt
and this starts by being zero, rises to a maximum and then falls again to
zero. The current is always in the same direction, so that Q is always of the
same sign.
It is, however, possible for equation (439) to have imaginary roots. This
will be the case if
7W 4
H ^y
is negative. Denoting R* ~^ , when negative, by 2 , the roots will be
7? _i_ '
Jt "T IfC
Al ' A2 = ~2T~'
516, 517] Discharge of a Condenser
so that the solution (438) becomes
449
ixt
ict
= e 2L D cos f TTF e
where D, e are new constants. In this case the discharge is oscillatory. The
charge Q changes sign at intervals  , so that the charges surge backwards
/c
and forwards from one plate to the other. The presence of the exponential
_m
e 2L shews that each charge is less than the preceding one, so that the
charges ultimately die away. The graphs for Q and i in the two cases of
4fL
(i) R 2 > ~ (discharge continuous),
(ii) _R 2 < j^ (discharge oscillatory),
(j
are given in figs. 132 and 133.
FIG. 132.
(i) discharge continuous.
Q
FIG. 133.
(ii) discharge oscillatory.
The existence of the oscillatory discharge is of interest, as the possibility
of a discharge of this type was predicted on purely theoretical grounds by
Lord Kelvin in 1853. Four years later the actual oscillations were observed
by Feddersen.
517. It is of value to compare the physical processes in the two kinds of
discharge.
j.
29
450 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
Let us consider first the continuous discharge of which the graphs are
shewn in fig. 132. The first part of the discharge is similar to the flow
already considered in 513. At first we can imagine that the condenser is
exactly equivalent to a battery of electromotive force E = ^ , and the act of
discharging is equivalent to completing a circuit containing this battery.
After a time the difference between the two cases comes into effect. The
battery would maintain a constant electromotive force, so that the current
would reach a constant final value ^ , whereas the condenser does not supply
a constant electromotive force. As the discharge occurs, the potential differ
ence between the plates of the condenser diminishes, and so the electromotive
force, and consequently the current, also diminish. Thus the graph for i in
fig. 132, can be regarded as shewing a gradual increase towards the value
Tji i r\\
^ ( where E ^ j in the earlier stages, combined with a gradual falling off of
the current, consequent on the diminution of E, in the latter stages.
For the oscillatory discharge to occur, the value of L must be greater than
for the continuous discharge. The energy of a current of given amount is
accordingly greater, while the rate at which this is dissipated by the genera
tion of heat, namely Ri*, remains unaltered by the greater value of L. Thus
for sufficiently great values of L the current may persist even after the con
denser is fully discharged, a continuation of the current meaning that the
condenser again becomes charged, but with electricity of different signs from
the original* charges. In this way we get the oscillatory discharge.
INDUCTION IN A PAIR OF CIRCUITS.
518. If L, M, N are the coefficients of induction (L u , L 1Z , L&) of a pair of
circuits of resistances R, 8, in which batteries of electromotiveforces E 1} E 2
are placed, the general equations become
(440),
(441).
Sudden Completing of Circuit.
519. Let us consider the conditions which must hold when one of the
circuits is suddenly completed, the process occupying the infinitesimal inter
val from t to t = r. Let the changes which occur in ^ and i. 2 during this
interval be denoted by Ai x and At' 2 . Equations (440) and (441) shew that
517520] Pair of Circuits 451
during the interval from = to t = r the values of j (Li^ + Mi 2 ) and of
T (Mi^ + Ni 2 ) are finite, so that when r is infinitesimal, the changes in
(it
Li^ + Mi 2 and Mi 4 Ni 2 must vanish. Thus we must have
ZA^ + 3/A?' 2 = 0,
Except in the special case in which LN M~ = (a case of importance,
which will be considered later), these equations can be satisfied only by
Ai\ = Ai 2 = 0. Thus the currents remain unaltered by suddenly making a
circuit, and the change in the currents is gradual and not instantaneous.
520. Suppose, for instance, that before the instant = circuit 2 is
closed but contains no battery, while circuit 1, containing a battery, is broken.
Let circuit 1 be closed at the instant t 0, then the initial conditions are
that at time t = 0, i\ = i 2 = 0. The equations to be solved are
d ^' " d ' ~ .(442),
M i,
The solution is known to be
where A, A', B, B' are constants, and X, X 7 are the roots of
(R  L\)(S  N\)  M*\* = 0,
or of RS(RN+SL)\ + (LNM*)\* = ............ (444).
The energy of the currents, namely
being positive for all values of ^ and i z , it follows that LNM* is necessarily
positive. Since RS and RN + SL are also necessarily positive, we see that all
the coefficients in equation (442) are positive, so that the roots X, X' are both
positive.
When =0, we must have
(h\= Q = A + A' + 1 = ..................... (445),
= ........................ (446),
and in order that equation (443) may be satisfied at every instant, we must
have
 N\) Ee~ Kt + (S N\') E'e~^ = 0,
292
452 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
for all values of t, and for this to be satisfied the coefficients of e~ Kt and e~ k>t
must vanish separately. Thus we must have
(8  N\) B = MAX ........................ (447),
(SN\')B' = MA'\' ........................ (443),
and if these relations are satisfied, and X, X' are the roots of equation (444),
then equation (442) will be satisfied identically. From equations (445),
(446), (447) and (448), we obtain
B 5' A\ A'\ r E,
M " ~W ~ S  N\ ~ 8^N\' ~ MS (X 1  X' ] ) '
and the solution is found to be
_ (SN\')E t (SN^E,
* 1 ~ 1 ' 1 + '>> ( 
ME, .,. ME,
e~ xt ^
RS (X 1  X' 1 ) R8 (X' 1  X 1 )
rr
We notice that the current in 1 rises to its steady value ^, the rise being
similar in nature to that when only a single circuit is concerned ( 513). The
rise is quick if X and X 7 are large i.e. if the coefficients of induction are
small, and conversely. The current in 2 is initially zero, rises to a maximum
and then sinks again to zero. The changes in this current are quick or slow
according as those of current 1 are quick or slow.
Sudden Breaking of Circuit.
521. The breaking of a circuit may be represented mathematically by
supposing the resistance to become infinite. Thus if circuit 1 is broken, the
process occurring in the interval from t = to t = T, the value of R will
become infinite during this interval, while the value of ^ becomes zero. The
changes in ^ and i 2 are still determined by equations (440) arid (441), but we
can no longer treat .R as a constant, and we cannot assert that in the interval
from to T the value of Ri is always finite.
It follows, however, from equation (441) that ^ (Mi^ Ni 2 ) remains finite
throughout the short interval, so that we have, with the same notation as
before,
Suppose for instance that before the circuit 1 was broken we had a steady
p
current ^ in circuit 1, and no current in circuit 2. We shall then have
that
520522] Pair of Circuits 453
and therefore immediately after the break, the initial current in circuit 2 is
. MEi
l *~NR'
This current simply decays under the influence of the resistance of the
circuit. Putting E 2 = and i, = in equation (441) we obtain
*
Ji = ~~ffi 1 *'
and the solution which gives i 2 = ^r~ initially is

2 ~ NR
The changes in the current i, during the infinitesimal interval r are of
interest. These are governed by equation (440), the value of R not being
constant.
The value of E, is finite, and may accordingly be neglected in comparison
with the other terms of equation (440), which are very great during, the
interval of transition. Thus the equation becomes, approximately,
(449).
The value of ^ (Mi, f Ni 2 ) is, as we have already seen, finite, so that we
M
may subtract ^ times this quantity from the lefthand member of equation
(449) and the equation remains true. By doing this we eliminate i 2 , and
obtain
M z \di,
The solution which gives to i, the initial value (^) is
giving the way in which the current falls to zero. We notice that if
LN if 2 is very small, the current falls off at once, while if LN M 2 is large,
the current will persist for a longer time. In the former case the breaking
of the circuit is accompanied only by a very slight spark, in the latter case
by a stronger spark.
One Circuit containing a Periodic Electromotive Force.
522. Let us suppose next that the circuits contain no batteries, but that
circuit 1 is acted upon by a periodic electromotive force, say E cospt, such as
might arise if this circuit contained a dynamo.
454 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
As in 514, it is simplest to assume an electromotive force Ee ipt : the
solution actually required will be obtained by ultimately rejecting the
imaginary terms in the solution obtained.
The equations to be solved are now
~(Li l }Mi. 2 ) = Ri l (450),
(Mi 1 + Ni,) = Si a (451).
As before both ^ and i 2) as given by these equations, will involve the
d
dt
time only through a factor e ipt , so that we may replace j by ip, and the
equations become
Rii + Lip\ + Mipi z =
Si. 2 + Mipi 1 4 Nipi 2 = 0,
from which we obtain
8 + Nip Mip (R
The current ^ in the primary is given, from these equations, by
Lip
T .
S + Nip
M *p* (S  Nip)
R' + L'ip'
R
The case of no secondary circuit being present is obtained at once by
putting 8 = oo , and the solution for ^ is seen to be the same as if no
secondary circuit were present, except that R', L' are replaced by R and L.
Thus the current in the primary circuit is affected by the presence of the
secondary in just the same way as if its resistance were increased from
R to R', and its coefficient of selfinduction decreased from L' to L.
The amplitudes of the two currents are j i\ and i 2 \ , so that the ratio of
the amplitude of the current in the secondary to that in the primary is
M ip
S + Nip
_ M P_ (452)
"
522525] Pair of Circuits 455
The difference of phase of the two currents
= arg i 2  arg i,
= arg (iz/ij
( Nip \
523. The analysis is of practical importance in connection with the
theory of transformers. In such applications, the current usually is of very
high frequency, so that p is large, and we find that approximately the ratio
of the amplitudes (cf. expression (452)) is ^, while the difference of phase
(cf. expression (453)) is TT. These limiting results, for the case of p infinite,
can be obtained at a glance from equation (451). The righthand member,
Si 2 , is finite, so that ^ (Mi^ + Ni^) is finite in spite of the infinitely rapid
variations in ^ and i 2 separately. In other words, we must have approxi
mately M^ + Ni 2 constant, and clearly the value of this constant must be
zero, giving at once the two results just obtained.
524. Whatever the value ofp, the result expressed in equation (452) can be
deduced at once from the principle of energy. The current in the primary
is the same as it would be if the secondary circuit were removed and R, L
changed to R, L'. Thus the rate at which the generator performs work is
R'ii, or averaged over a great number of periods (since ^ is a simplyharmonic
function of the time) is %R  % 2 . Of this an amount ^R \ ^  2 is consumed in
the primary, so that the rate at which work is performed in the secondary is
$ (R  R)
or
SM*p*
This rate of performing work is also known to be i$i' 2  2 , and on
equating these two expressions we obtain at once the result expressed
by equation (452).
Case in which LN M* is small.
525. The energy of currents i lt i z in the two circuits is
KLiS+ZMi^ + Nif) ........................ (454),
and since this must always be positive, it follows that LN M z rriust neces
sarily be positive. The results obtained in the special case in which LN M*
is so small as to be negligible in comparison with the other quantities in
volved are of special interest, so that we shall now examine what special
features are introduced into the problems when LN M* is very small.
456 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
Expression (454) can be transformed into
so that when LN M* is neglected the energy becomes
(Lii + Mi^f,
and this vanishes for the special case in which the currents are in the ratio
^ = = . This enables us to find the geometrical meaning of the relation
^2 L
LN M 2 = 0. For since the energy of the currents, as in 501, is
we see that this energy can only vanish if the magnetic force vanishes at
every point. This requires that the equivalent magnetic shells must coincide
and be of strengths which are equal and opposite. Thus the two circuits
must coincide geometrically. The number of turns of wire in the circuits
may of course be different : if we have r turns in the primary and s in the
secondary, we must have
JL_M_r
M~~ N~ s y
and when the currents are such as to give a field of zero energy, each fraction
is equal to ~ .
*i
526. Let us next examine the modifications introduced into the analysis
by the neglect of LN M* in problems in which the value of this quantity is
small. We have the general equations ( 518),
Eij^ + Mi^Rii ..................... (455),
E 2 j t (Mi l + Ni 2 ) = Si 2 ..................... (456).
If we multiply equation (455) by M and equation (456) by L and sub
tract, we obtain
ME.LE^EMi.SLi, ..................... (457),
an equation which contains no differentials.
527. "To illustrate, let us consider the sudden making of one circuit,
discussed in the general case in 519. The general equations there obtained,
namely
2 = 0,
525528] Pair of Circuits 457
now become identical. We no longer can deduce the relations A^ = Ar' 2 = 0,
but have only the single initial conditions
But by supposing equations (455) and (456) replaced by equations (455)
and (458) we have only one differential coefficient and therefore only one
constant of integration in the solution, and this can be determined from
the one initial condition expressed by equation (458).
528. Let us, for instance, consider the definite problem discussed (for the
general case) in 520. Circuit 2 contains no battery so that E. 2 = 0, and at
time t = circuit 1 is suddenly closed, so that the electromotive force E l
comes into play in the first circuit. The initial currents are given by
(from equation (458)), ............ Z^ + l/V^O .............................. (459),
(from equation (457)), ......... ME, = RMi, SLi ........................ (460),
i, i, ME, ME,
so that
M~~  L RM* + SL* ~ L(RN+ SL)
Thus finite currents come into existence at once, but the system of
currents is one of zero energy, since equation (459) is satisfied. To find the
subsequent changes, we multiply equation (455) by ~ and equation (456) by
~ (putting E Z = Q), and find on addition
LE, (L N\ d ,
of which the solution, subject to the initial condition Li, + Mi 2 = 0, is
TF / BS
Li, + Mi, = ^ (1 
This and equation (460) determine the currents at any time.
These results can of course be deduced also by examining the limiting
form assumed by the solution of 520, when LN  M* vanishes.
The problem of the breaking of a circuit, discussed in 521, can be
examined in a similar way in the special case in which LN M 2 = 0.
REFERENCES.
J. J. THOMSON. Elements of the Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Magnetism,
Chap. XL
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Part iv, Chap. in.
458 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
EXAMPLES.
1. A coil is rotated with constant angular velocity co about an axis in its plane in a
uniform field of force perpendicular to the axis of rotation. Find the current in the coil
at any time, and shew that it is greatest when the plane of the coil makes an angle
tan~M^] with the lines of magnetic force.
2. The resistance and selfinduction of a coil are R and Z, and its ends A and B are
connected with the electrodes of a condenser of capacity C by wires of negligible resistance.
There is a current Icospt in a circuit connecting A and B, and the charge of the con
denser is in the same phase as this current. Shew that the charge at any time is
^COSJP, and that C(R?+p 2 L' 2 ) = L. Obtain also the current in the coil.
3. The ends B, D of a wire (R, L] are connected with the plates of condenser of
capacity C. The wire rotates about ED which is vertical with angular velocity to, the
area between the wire and ED being A. If H is the horizontal component of the earth's
magnetism, shew that the average rate at which work must be done to maintain the
rotation is
+ (l  (7Zc) 2 ].
4. A closed solenoid consists of a large number JV of circular coils of wire, each of
radius a, wound uniformly upon a circular cylinder of height 2/i. At the centre of the
cylinder is a small magnet whose axis coincides with that of the cylinder, and whose
moment is a periodic quantity psinpt. Shew that a current flows in the solenoid whose
intensity is approximately
where R, L are the resistance and selfinduction of the solenoid, and t&ua
5. A circular coil of n turns, of radius a and resistance R, spins with angular velocity
o> round a vertical diameter in the earth's horizontal magnetic field H : shew that the
average electromagnetic damping couple which resists its motion is ^ZT 2 ^ 2 7r 2 a 4 o)/2. Given
/7=0'17, n = 50, R = l ohm, a = 10cm., and that the coil makes 20 turns per second,
express the couple in dynecentimetres, and the mean square of the current in amperes.
6. A condenser, capacity (7, is discharged through a circuit, resistance R, induction Z,
containing a periodic electromotive force Esin nt. Shew that the "forced" current in the
circuit is
E sin (nt  6} ^ + (nL  J] * ,
where tan B = (ri'CL  l)/nCR.
1. Two circuits, resistances R l and R 2 , coefficients of induction L, M, N lie near each
other, and an electromotive force E is switched into one of them. Shew that the total
quantity of electricity that traverses the other is
Examples 459
8. A current is induced in a coil B by a current / smpt in a coil A. Shew that the
mean force tending to increase any coordinate of position 0, is
t PjPLM 'bM
where L, M, N are the coefficients of induction of the coils, and R is the resistance of B.
9. A plane circuit, area S, rotates with uniform velocity o> about the axis of z, which
lies in its plane at a distance h from the centre of gravity of the area. A magnetic
molecule of strength p, is fixed in the axis of x at a great distance a from the origin,
pointing in the direction Ox. Prove that the current at time t is approximately
where 77, e are determinate constants.
10. Two points A, B are joined by a wire of resistance R without selfinduction ;
B is joined to a third point C by two wires each of resistance R, of which one is without
selfinduction, and the other has a coefficient of induction L. If the ends A, C are kept
at a potential difference JScospt, prove that the difference of potentials at B and C will
be E' cos (pt  y), where
pLR
11. A condenser, capacity (7, charge Q, is discharged through a circuit of resistance
7?, there being another circuit of resistance S in the field. If LN=M*, shew that there
will be initial currents  JYQ/C(RN+SL) and MQIC(RN+SL\ and find the currents at
any time.
12. Two insulated wires A, of the same resistance have the same coefficient of
selfinduction L, while that of mutual induction is slightly less than L. The ends of B
are connected by a wire of small resistance, and those of A by a battery of small resistance,
and at the end of a time t a current i is passing through A. Prove that except when t is
very small,
*(*+*)
approximately, where IQ is the permanent current in A, and i' is the current in each after
a time t, when the ends of both are connected in multiple arc by the battery.
13. The ends of a coil forming a long straight uniform solenoid of m turns per unit
length are connected with a short solenoidal coil of n turns and crosssection J, situated
inside the solenoid, so that the whole forms a single complete circuit. The latter coil can
rotate freely about an axis at right angles to the length of the solenoid. Shew that in free
motion without any external field, the current i arid the angle 6 between the crosssections
of the coils are determined by the equations
Ri= r.(Lii+L&+&irmnAico8 0),
d 2 d
1 r2 + 4:7rmnAi 2 sin 0=0,
where 7 1} 7 2 , are the coefficients of selfinduction of the two coils, / is the moment of
inertia of the rotating coil, R is the resistance of the whole circuit, and the effect of the
ends of the long solenoid is neglected.
460 Induction of Currents in Linear Circuits [CH. xiv
14. Two electrified conductors whose coefficients of electrostatic capacity are y l5 y 2 > r
are connected through a coil of resistance R and large inductance L. Verify that the
frequency of the electric oscillations thus established is
J_ /2r + y 1+y . 2 I _
r* L I
15. An electric circuit contains an impressed electromotive force which alternates
in an arbitrary manner and also an inductance. Is it possible, by connecting the
extremities of the inductance to the poles of a condenser to arrange so that the current
in the circuit shall always be in step with the electromotive force and proportional to it ?
16. Two coils (resistances R, S ; coefficients of induction Z, M, N) are arranged in
parallel in such positions that when a steady current is divided between the two, the
resultant magnetic force vanishes at a certain suspended galvanometer needle. Prove
that if the currents are suddenly started by completing a circuit including the coils, then
the initial magnetic force on the needle will not in general vanish, but that there will be
a " throw " of the needle, equal to that which would be produced by the steady (final)
current in the first wire flowing through that wire for a time interval
ML MN
R S '
17. A condenser of capacity C is discharged through two circuits, one of resistance R
and selfinduction Z, and the other of resistance R' and containing a condenser of capacity
C r . Prove that if Q is the charge on the condenser at any time,
.L^dfqiRRB^dQ Q
c + C' +RR )W> + (c + C' + ^)dt + CC' = 
18. A condenser of capacity C is connected by leads of resistance r, so as to be in
parallel with a coil of selfinduction Z, the resistance, of the coil and its leads being R. If
this arrangement forms part of a circuit in which there is an electromotive force of period
, shew that it can be replaced by a wire without selfinduction if
and that the resistance of this equivalent wire must be (Rr + L/C}/(R+r).
19. Two coils, of which the coefficients of self and mutualinduction are Zi, Z 2 , J/",
and the resistances R 1 , R 2 carry steady currents C\, 2 produced by constant electro
motive forces inserted in them. Shew how to calculate the total extra currents produced
in the coils by inserting a given resistance in one of them, and thus also increasing its
coefficients of induction by given amounts.
In the primary coil, supposed open, there is an electromotive force which would
produce a steady current (7, and in the secondary coil there is no electromotive force.
Prove that the current induced in the secondary by closing the primary is the same, as
regards its effects on a galvanometer and an electrodynamometer, and also with regard to
the heat produced by it, as a steady current of magnitude
i
lasting for a time
while the current induced in the secondary by suddenly breaking the primary circuit may
be represented in the same respects by a steady current of magnitude CM/2L 2 lasting for
a time 2Z 2 /7? 2 .
Examples 461
20. Two conductors ABD, ACD are arranged in multiple arc. Their resistances are
/?, S and their coefficients of self and mutualinduction are L, N, and M. Prove that
when placed in series with leads conveying a current of frequency p, the two circuits
produce the same effect as a single circuit whose coefficient of selfinduction is
(L + N
and whose resistance is
21. A condenser of capacity C containing a charge Q is discharged round a circuit in
the neighbourhood of a second circuit. The resistances of the circuits are R, S, and their
coefficients of induction are L, J/, ^Y.
Obtain equations to determine the currents at any moment.
If x is the current in the primary, and the disturbance be over in a time less than r,
.shew that
and that
T I x' l dt vari<
Jo
Examine how x' 2 dt varies with S.
CHAPTER XV.
INDUCTION OF CURRENTS IN CONTINUOUS MEDIA.
GENERAL EQUATIONS.
528. WE have seen that when the number of tubes of induction, N,
which crosses any circuit, is changing, there is an electromotive force r
acting round the circuit. Thus a change in the magnetic field brings into
play certain electric forces which would otherwise be absent.
We have now abandoned the conception of action at a distance, so that
we must suppose that the electric force at any point depends solely on the
changes in the magnetic field at that point. Thus at a point at which the
magnetic field is changing, we see that there must be electric forces set up
by the changes in the magnetic field, and the amount of these forces must be
the same whether the point happens to coincide with an element of a closed
conducting circuit or not.
Let ds be an element of any closed circuit drawn in the field, either in a
conducting medium or not, and let X, Y, Z denote the components of electric
intensity at this point. Then the work done by the electric forces on a unit
electric charge in taking it round this circuit is
ds ^ ds (for" (4<
^jV
and this, by the principle just explained, must be equal to 7 where N is
dt
the number of tubes of induction which cross this circuit.
529. We have (cf. 437),
rr
(462),
so that on equating expression (461) to y , we have
ctt
dx d I dz\ , da db dc
528530] Induction in Continuous Media 463
The lefthand member is equal, by Stokes' Theorem ( 438) to
fff./az 8F\ fdX dZ\ /dY dX\) ,
MM + m + ft ^ r &>
JJ [ VB^ 82 y VSz OSBJ \ox oy )}
the integration being over the same area as that on the right hand of equa
tion (463).
Hence we have
[[(jidZ dY da\ fdX dZ db\ /dY dX dc\) ,
J IF" ~ a^ + ~dt) + m Vbz ~~ fa + dt) + U ( ~fa ~ "3" + dt)\
This equation is true for every surface, so that not only must each inte
grand vanish, but it must vanish for all possible values of I, m, n. Hence each
coefficient of I, m, n must vanish separately. We must accordingly have
_da_dZ_SY_
(it c}ii r) z
db dX dZ /AG\
i = ^ ^ (46o),
dc 8F dX
530. The relation between the electric forces and the changes in the
magnetic field can be expressed also in a different manner. The surface
integral of equation (462) can, by 443, be replaced by a line integral round
the boundary, and we* have
where F, G, H are the components of the vectorpotential ( 443) given by
dff dGr
tt = ^ ^r, etc (467),
oy dz
dN
so that on equating expression (461) to y we obtain
at
+ ^^M F +^^+^ + ^;r^ = ..(468).
dt J ds \ dt J ds \ dt J ds)
This equation is true when the integral is taken round any closed circuit.
Let us denote the same integral, taken from any fixed point to a point
P by  M>\ so that
( P \( X+ ^\f + f Y+ dGYj [+ ^ + dHY^ ds =
J o \\ dt J ds \ dt J. ds \ dt J ds)
We have not specified the path which is to be chosen in going from to
P, but this is unnecessary because it follows from equation (468) that ^ will
464 Induction of Currents in Continuous Media [CH. xv
have the same value whatever path is chosen. Thus ^ as defined by equa
tion (469) is a singlevalued function of the coordinates of P. Let us now
move from P a distance dx parallel to the axis of x. The increase in the left
hand member of equation (4G9) is
dF
while that in the righthand member is
&& ,
^ doc.
dx
These two expressions must be equal, hence we must have
* ........................... <>
v dG 3^ /m
while similarly 1=  =  ^ ..... ...................... (471),
dt dy
~ ,, ~ (472).
dt dz
The function M* has, so far, had no physical meaning assigned to it.
Equations (464), (465), (466) shew that the electric force (Z, F, Z) can be
regarded as compounded of two forces :
/ dF dG dH\ . .
(i) a force 3 , j , = arising from the changes in the mag
\ dt af ^*y : dt dt j
netic field;
(ii) a force of components f ^ , ^ , ^ J which is present when
there are no magnetic changes occurring.
We now see that the second force is the force arising from the ordinary
electrostatic field. Thus ty differs by a constant only from the electrostatic
potential. W T e shall now suppose the point of equation (463) to be a point
at infinity. Then ^ = at infinity, so that we may now identify M/ 1 with the
electrostatic potential.
531. If we differentiate equation (472) with respect to y, and (471) with
respect to z, and subtract, we obtain
___ = ___
cy "bz dt \ dy
da
~dt'
by equation (467), bringing us back to the system of equations (464) (466).
530533] General Equations 465
532. If the medium is a conducting medium, the presence of the electric
forces sets up currents, and the components u, v, w of the current at any
point are, as in 374, connected with the currents by the equations
X = TU, Y = TV, Z = TW,
these equations being the expression of Ohm's Law, where r is the specific
resistance of the conductor at the point.
On substituting these values for X, Y, Z in equations (464) (466), we
obtain a system of equations connecting the currents in the conductor
with the changes in the magnetic field.
533. There is, however, a further system of equations expressing rela
tions between the currents and the magnetic field. We have seen ( 480)
that a current sets up a magnetic field of known intensity, and since the
whole magnetic field must arise either from currents or from permanent
magnets, this fact gives rise to a second system of equations.
In a field arising solely from permanent magnetism, we can take a unit
pole round any closed path in the field, and the total work done will be nil.
Hence on taking a unit pole round a closed circuit in the most general
magnetic field, the work done will be the same as if there were no perma
nent magnetism, and the whole field were due to the currents present. The
amount of this work, as we have seen, is 47rSi, where ^i is the sum of all the
currents which flow through the circuit round which the pole is taken. If
u, v, w are the components of current at any point, we have
1 1
mv f nw) dS,
the integration being over any area which has the closed path as boundary.
Hence our experimental fact leads to the equation
Transforming the line integral into a surface integral by Stokes' Theorem
( 438), we obtain the equation in the form
7/87 8/3 \ /8 87 \ fdp da \) ,
l( ^ ~ 4)7TU + m ^ 4:7TV H" n I 5 o ^ 7rw; ( ^ = 0.
\9y dz J \dz dx I \dx dy J)
As with the integral of 529, each integrand must vanish for all values
of I, m, n, so that we must have
87 8/9 /^ihrkx
^^ (473),
dy dz
da. 87
^ 5* (474),
8z cte
P^ (475).
dx dy
J. 30
466 Induction of Currents in Continuous Media [OH. xv
534. If we differentiate these three equations with respect to x, y, z
respectively and add, we obtain
3u + Sv to
dx dy dz
of which the meaning (cf. 375, equation (311)) is that no electricity is
destroyed or created or allowed to accumulate in the conductor.
The interpretation of this result is not that it is a physical impossibility for electricity
to accumulate in a conductor, but that the assumptions upon which we are working are
not sufficiently general to cover cases in which there is such an accumulation of electricity.
It is easy to see directly how this has come about. The supposition underlying our
equations is that the work done in taking a unit pole round a circuit is equal to 4?r times
the total current flow through the circuit. It is only when equation (476) is satisfied by
the current components that the expression ' total flow through a circuit ' has a definite
significance : the current flow across every area bounded by the circuit must be the same.
We shall see later how the equations must be modified to cover the case of an electric
flow in which the condition is not satisfied. For the present we proceed upon the sup
position that the condition is satisfied.
Currents in homogeneous media.
535. Let us now suppose that we are considering the currents in a
homogeneous nonmagnetised medium. We write
a = /JLOL, etc., X = ru, etc.,
in which /* and r are constant. The systems of equations of 529 and 534
now become
da w dv
Differentiating equation (478) with respect to the time, we obtain
du d
$(&u.&u.&u\ d_fdu dv dw
T + + + +
in virtue of equation (476).
Similar equations are satisfied by the other currentcomponents, so that
we have the system of differential equations
534537] Rapidly alternating currents 467
.(479).
If we eliminate the currentcomponents from the system of equations
(477) and (478), we obtain
and similar equations are satisfied by b and c.
536. The equation which has been found to be satisfied by u, v, w,
a, ft and 7 is the wellknown equation of conduction of heat. Thus
we see that the currents induced in a mass of metal, as well as the com
ponents of the magnetic field associated with these currents, will diffuse
through the metal in the same way as heat diffuses through a uniform
conductor.
Rapidly alternating currents.
537. The equations assume a form of special interest when the currents
are alternating currents of high frequency. We may assume each component
of current to be proportional to e ipt (cf. 514), and may then replace the
operator  by the multiplier ip. The equations now assume the form
(481),
T
and if p is so large that it may be treated as infinite, these equations assume
the simple form
u v = w 0,
a = b = c = 0.
Thus for currents of infinite frequency, there is neither current nor
magnetic field in the interior. The currents are confined to the surface,
and the only part of the conductor which comes into play at all is a thin
skin on the surface.
Equations (481) enable us to form an estimate of the thickness of this
skin when the frequency of the currents is very great without being actually
infinite.
At a point on the surface of the conductor, let us take rectangular
axes so that the direction of the current is that of Ox while the normal to
the surface is Oz. If the thickness of the skin is very small, we need not
302
468 Induction of Currents in Continuous Media [CH. xv
consider any region except that in the immediate neighbourhood of the
origin, so that the problem is practically identical with that of current
flowing parallel to Ox in an infinite slab of metal having the plane Oxy
for a boundary.
Equation (481) reduces in this case to
and if we put = K 2 , the solution is
u = Ae
The value of K is found to be
J **!!*
^ r
so that u = Ae
and the condition that the current is to be confined to a thin skin may now
be expressed by the condition that u when ^ = oo , and is accordingly
.5 = 0. The multiplier A is independent of z t but will of course involve
the time through the factor e ipt \ let us put A = u e ipt , and we then have
the solution
Rejecting the imaginary part, we are left with the real solution
/2*w
*
cos ( pt
/ZTT
A/ 
from which we see that, as we pass inwards from the surface of the con
ductor, the phase of the current changes at a uniform rate, while its amplitude
decreases exponentially.
We can best form an idea of the rate of decrease of the amplitude by considering a
concrete case. For copper we may take (in c.G. s. electromagnetic units) /Lt = l, r = 1600.
Thus for a current which alternates 1000 times per second, we have
p = 27T x 1000, y = 5 approximately.
It follows that at a depth of 1 cm. the current will be only e~ 6 or 0067 times its value
at the surface. Thus the current is practically confined to a skin of thickness 1 cm.
rz<x>
The total current per unit width of the surface at time t is I udz, of
J 2 =
which the value is found to be
u cos [pt
537, 538] Plane Currentsheets 469
Thus, if we denote the amplitude of the aggregate current by U, the
value of u will be U */ 
The heat generated per unit time in a strip of unit width and unit
length is
r I I u"dtdz
Thus the resistance of the conductor is the same as would be the
resistance for steady currents of a skin of depth 1 ' '
The results we have obtained will suffice to explain why it is that the conductors used
to convey rapidly alternating currents are made hollow, as also why it is that lightning
conductors are made of strips, rather than cylinders, of metal.
PLANE CURRENTSHEETS.
538. We next examine the phenomenon of the induction of currents
in a plane sheet of metal.
Let the plane of the currentsheet be taken to be z = 0. Let us intro
duce a currentfunction <I>, which is to be defined for every point in the
sheet by the statement that the total strength of all the currents which
flow between the point and the boundary is <l>. Then the currents in the
sheet are known when the value of 4> is known at every point of the sheet.
If we assume that no electricity is introduced into, or removed from the
currentsheet, or allowed to accumulate at any point of it, then clearly <3> will
be a singlevalued function of position on the sheet.
The equation of the currentlines will be <3> = constant, and the line
4> = will be the boundary of the currentsheet. Between the lines <S> and
<E> 4 d<& we have a current of strength d& flowing in a closed circuit. The
magnetic field produced by this current is the same as that produced by
a magnetic shell of strength d<& coinciding with that part of the current
sheet which is enclosed by this circuit, so that the magnetic effect of the
whole system of currents in the sheet is that of a shell coinciding with
the sheet and of variable strength <J>. This again may be replaced by a
distribution of magnetic poles of surface density 3>/e on the positive side of
the sheet, together with a distribution of surface density O/e on the
negative side of the sheet, where e is the thickness of the sheet.
470 Induction of Currents in Continuous Media [CH. xv
Let P denote the potential at any point of a distribution of poles of
strength <J>, so that
(482),
where dx'dy' is any element of the sheet. The magnetic potential at any
point outside the currentsheet of the field produced by the currents is then
H = ~ .............................. (483).
02
If o is the resistance of a unit square of the sheet at any point, and
u, v the components of current, we have, by Ohm's Law,
X = (TU, Y=(7V.
The components u, v are readily found to be given by
d d<&
u = ^ , v = = ,
dy dx
so that we have the equations
v 83> v 83>
z *9j: *= ff fc ..................... < 484)
true at every point of the sheet.
Hence, by equation (466),
dc dY dX /8 2 <I>
dt=^w = ~ (7 (^ + w) ............... ( } 
The total magnetic field consists of the part of potential O due to the
currents and a part of potential (say) O', due to the magnetic system by which
the currents are induced. Thus the total magnetic potential is H + 1', and
at a point just outside the currentsheet (taking fju 1),
dc_d d
dt~d:td~z ( ^ + Ll)>
and equation (485) becomes
The function P (equation (482)) is the potential of a distribution of poles
of surface density 4> on the sheet. Hence at a point just outside the sheet
and on its positive face, ^ = 2?r^>.
dz
Hence, since P satisfies Laplace's equation outside the sheet, we have
(just outside the positive face of the sheet),
8 2 <E = 1 /8 3 P 8 3 P
df ~ 2?r \d?fa + dy*d
1 8 3 P
2?r 8^ 3
J^
27T
538, 539] Plane Currentsheets 471
by equation (483), so that equation (486) becomes
and similarly, at the negative face of the sheet, we have the equation
d 9 , <
(488).
Finite Currentsheets.
539. Suppose that in an infinitesimal interval any pole of strength m
moves from P to Q. This movement may be represented by the creation
of a pole of strength m at P and of one of strength + m at Q. Thus
the most general motion of the inducing field may be replaced by the crea
tion of a series of poles. The simplest problem arises when the inducing
field is produced by the sudden creation of a single pole, and the solution
of the most general problem can be obtained from the solution of this simple
problem by addition.
From equations (487) and (488) it is clear that 7^(0 + 1') remains
Ctt 02
finite on both surfaces of the sheet during the sudden creation of a new
o
pole, so that (ft + H') remains unaltered in value over the whole surface
of the sheet. Let the increment in (fl + ft') at any point in space be
denoted by A, then A is a potential of which the poles are known in the
space outside the sheet, and of which the value is known to be zero over
the surface of the sheet. The methods of Chapter vill. are accordingly
available for the determination of A : the required value of A is the
electrostatic potential when the currentsheet is put to earth in the
OQ>
presence of the point charges which would give a potential ^ if the sheet
oz
were absent.
Physically, the fact that = (O + 1') remains unaltered over the whole
oz
surface of the sheet means that the field of force just outside the sheet
remains unaltered, and hence that currents are instantaneously induced in
the sheet such that the lines of force at the surfaces of the sheet remain
unaltered.
The induced currents can be found for any shape of currentsheet for
which the corresponding electrostatic problem can be solved*, but in general
the results are too complicated to be of physical interest.
* See a paper by the author, "Finite Current sheets," Proc. Lond. Math. Soc. Vol. xxxi.
p. 151.
17:? Induction of Current* in Continuous Media [on. xv
Infinite /Yr/w Currentsheet.
540. Lot the currentsheet bo of infinite extent, and occupy the whole
of the plane of .rj. and lot the moving magnetic system bo in the region
in which : is negative. Then throughout the region lor which t is positive
the potential 1} i I!' has no poles, and henee tin 1 potential
has no poles. Moreover this potential is a solution of Laplace's equation,
and vanishes over the boundary of the region, namely at infinity and o\ er
the plane : = (c\\ equation (1S7 N )V Hence it vanishes throughout the
whole region ^cf. ^ lSo\ so that i^jnation (4S7) must be true at every point.
in the region for whieh : is ]>ositive. We may accordingly integrate with
respeet to j and obtain the expiation in the form
no arbitrary fnnetion of ./. // beini; added beeause (lie etpiation must be
satisfied at infinity.
The motion of the system of magnets on the negative side of the sheet
may be replaced, as in .">:>}). by the instantaneous creation of a number of
poles. At the creation of a single pole currents are set up in the sheet such
that i}fi remains unaltered (cf. equation (4S!^ on the positive side of
the sheet. Thus these currents form a magnetic screen and shield the space
on the positive side of the sheet from the effects of the magnetic changes on
the negative side.
To examine the way in which these currents decay under the influence
of resistance and selfinduction, we put <}' = in equation (4SD). and find
that 1} must be a solution of the equation
</n a an
</r ~:27ra7'
The general solution of this equation is
and this corresponds to the initial value
n =/(*, //.
Thus the decay of the currents can be traced by taking the field of
potential H at time t = and moving it parallel to the axis of z with a
velocity ~,
REFERENCES.
J. J. THOMSON. . \f t!,c Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Magnetism,
xi.
MAXWKI.L. Electricity a rum, Part iv. Chap. xil.
E.camplm 473
EXAMPLEa
1. Prove that the currents induced in A solid with an infinite plane face, owing to
magnetic changes near the face, circulate parallel to it, and may be regarded as due to
the diffusion into the solid of currentsheets induced at each instant on the surface so as
to screen off the magnetic changes from the interior.
Shew that for periodic changes, the current penetrates to a depth proportional to the
square root of the period. Give a solution for the case in which the strength of a fixed
inducing magnet varies as cospt.
2. A magnetic system is moving towards an infinite plane conducting sheet with
velocity w. Shew that the magnetic potential on the other side of the sheet is the same
as it would be if the sheet were away, and the strengths of all the elements of the magnetic
system were changed in the ratio R/(R+w\ where 2*R is the specific resistance of the
sheet per unit area. Shew that the result is unaltered if the system is moving away from
the sheet, and examine the case of ir= /?.
If the system is a magnetic particle of mass Jf and moment m, with its axis perpen
dicular to the sheet, prove that if the particle has been projected at right angles to the
sheet, then when it is at a distance z from the sheet, its velocity I is given by
K= C
3. A small magnet horizontally magnetised is moving with a velocity w parallel to a
thin horizontal plate of metal Shew that the retarding force on the magnet due to the
currents induced in the plate is
where m is the moment of the magnet, c its distance above the plate, 2irff the resistance
of a sq. cm. of the plate, and Q*=u*{R*.
4. A slowly alternating current /cos/?/ is traversing a small circular coil whose
magnetic moment for a unit current is M. A thin spherical shell, of radius a and specific
resistance <r, has its centre on the axis of the coil at a distance / from the centre of the
coil. Shew that the currents in the shell form circles round the axis of the coil, and that
the strength of the current in any circle whose radius subtends an angle cos" 1 /* at the
centre is
where (2+l).r
4*pd
5. An infinite iron plate is bounded by the parallel planes #=A, x= h ; wire is
wound uniformly round the plate, the layers of wire being parallel to the axis of y. If an
alternating current is sent through the wire producing outside the plate a magnetic force
ffo cos pt parallel to 2, prove that H y the magnetic force in the plate at a distance x from
the centre, will be given by
*
= sinh m (h + 3?) sin TO (h  x)  sinh TO (h  JT) sin m (h +x)
cosh m (A + x) cos m (A  x) +cosh m (h  JT) cos TO (A +ar) '
where wi*=2ir/ip/<r.
Discuss the special cases of (i) mh small, (ii) mh large,
CHAPTER XVI.
DYNAMICAL THEORY OF CURRENTS.
GENERAL THEORY OF DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS.
541. WE have so far developed the theory of electromagnetism by
starting from a number of simple data which are furnished or confirmed by
experiment, and examining the mathematical and physical consequences
which can be deduced from these data.
There are always two directions in which it is possible for a theoretical
science to proceed. It is possible to start from the simple experimental data
and from these to deduce the theory of more complex phenomena. And it
may also be possible to start from the experimental data and to analyse these
into something still more simple and fundamental. We may, in fact, either
advance from simple phenomena to complex, or we may pass backwards from
simple phenomena to phenomena which are still simpler, in the sense of
being more fundamental.
As an example of a theoretical science of which the development is almost
entirely of the second kind may be mentioned the Dynamical Theory of
Gases. The theory starts with certain simple experimental data, such as
the existence of pressure in a gas, and the relation of this pressure to the
temperature and density of a gas. And the theory is developed by shewing
that these phenomena may be regarded as consequences of still more funda
mental phenomena, namely the motion of the molecules of the gas.
In our development of electromagnetic theory there has so far been but
little progress in this second direction. It is true that we have seen that the
phenomena from which we started such as the attractions and repulsions
of electric charges, or the induction of electric currents may be interpreted
as the consequences of other and more fundamental phenomena taking place
in the ether by which the material systems are surrounded. We have even
obtained formulae for the stresses and the energy in the ether. But it has
not been possible to proceed any further and to explain the existence of these
stresses and energy in terms of the ultimate mechanism of the ether.
541543] Dynamical Theory of Currents 475
The reason why we have been brought to a halt in the development of
electromagnetic theory will become clear as soon as we contrast this theory
with the theory of gases. The ultimate mechanism with which the theory of
gases is concerned is that of molecules in motion, and we know (or at least
can provisionally assume that we know) the ultimate laws by which this
motion is governed. On the other hand the ultimate mechanism with which
electromagnetic theory is concerned is that of action in the ether, and we are
in utter ignorance of the ultimate laws which govern action in the ether.
We do not know how the ether behaves, and so can make no progress towards
explaining electromagnetic phenomena in terms of the behaviour of the ether.
542. There is a branch of dynamics which attempts to explain the
relation between the motions of certain known parts of a mechanism, even
when the nature of the remaining parts is completely unknown. We turn to
this branch of dynamics for assistance in the present problem. The whole
mechanism before us consists of a system of charged conductors, magnets,
currents, etc., and of the ether by which all these are connected. Of this
mechanism one part (the motion of the material bodies) is known to us, while
the remainder (the flow of electric currents, the transmission of action by the
ether, etc.) is unknown to us, except indirectly by its effect on the first part
of the mechanism.
543. An analogy, first suggested by Professor Clerk Maxwell, will ex
plain the way in which we are now attacking the problem.
Imagine that we have a complicated machine in a closed room, the only
connection between this machine and the exterior of the room being by
means of a number of ropes which hang through holes in the floor into the
room beneath. A man who cannot get into the room which contains the
machine will have no opportunity of actually inspecting the mechanism, but
he can manipulate it to a certain extent by pulling the different ropes. If,
on pulling one rope he finds that others are set into motion, he will under
stand that the ropes must be connected by some kind of mechanism above,
although he may be unable to discover the exact nature of this mechanism.
In this analogy, the concealed mechanism is supposed to represent those parts of the
universe which do not directly affect our senses e.g. the ether while the ropes represent
those parts of which we can observe the motion e.g. material bodies. In nature, there
are certain acts which we can perform (analogous to the pulling of certain ropes), and these
are invariably followed by certain consequences (analogous to the motion of other ropes),
but the ultimate mechanism by which the cause produces the effect is unknown. For
instance we can close an electric circuit by pressing a key, and the needle of a distant
galvanometer may be set into motion. We infer that there must be some mechanism
connecting the two, but the nature of this mechanism is almost completely unknown.
Suppose now that an observer may handle the ropes, but may not pene
trate into the room above to examine the mechanism to which they are
476 Dynamical Theory of Currents [OH. xvi
attached. He will know that whatever this mechanism may be, certain laws
must govern the manipulation of the ropes, provided that the mechanism is
itself subject to the ordinary laws of mechanics.
To take the simplest illustration, suppose that there are two ropes only, A and B, and
that when rope A is pulled down a distance of one inch, it is found that rope B rises
through two inches. The mechanism connecting A and B may be a lever or an arrange
ment of pulleys or of clockwork, or something different from any of these. But whatever
it is, provided that it is subject to the laws of dynamics, the experimenter will know,
from the mechanical principle of " virtual work," that the downward motion of rope A
can be restrained on applying to B a force equal to half of that applied to A.
544. The branch of dynamics of which we are now going to make use
enables us to predict what relation there ought to be between the motions of
the accessible parts of the mechanism. If these predictions are borne out by
experiment, then there will be a presumption that the concealed mechanism
is subject to the laws of dynamics. If the predictions are not confirmed by
experiment, we shall know that the concealed mechanism is not governed by
the laws of dynamics.
Hamilton s Principle.
545. Suppose, first, that we have a dynamical system composed of dis
crete particles, each of which moves in accordance with Newton's Laws of
Motion. Let any typical particle of mass m x have at any instant t coordi
nates #!, y lt ZL and components of velocity z/ 1} v lt w lt and let it be acted on by
forces of which the resultant has components X lt Y 1} Z : . Then, since the
motion of the particle is assumed to be governed by Newton's Laws, we have
m i7fc = Xi .............................. (490),
Let us compare this motion with a slightly different motion, in which
Newton's Laws are not obeyed. At the instant t let the coordinates of this
same particle be ^fS^, y l + Sy lt z l + Zi and let its components of velocity
be MJ + SMJ, v l + Svj, w 1 \8w l . Let us multiply equations (490), (491) and
(492) by &PJ, &/!, Bzj_ respectively, and add. We obtain
Now ?*s
543546] Hamilton's Principle 477
If we sum equation (493) for all the particles of the system, replacing the
terms on the left by their values as just obtained, we arrive at the equation
^ 2 m^ (M! &P! + Vj, %i + w 1 &Zi) 2 m l (u Bu^ + v 1 Sv^ + w l S w x )
= 2 (X^x, + Y^ + ZJzJ (494).
Let T denote the kinetic energy of the actual motion, and T\ ST that of
the slightly varied motion, then
so that ST=^m l (u^ Si^ + v^ ^ + w l Sw^,
and this is the value of the second term in equation (494).
If W and W + 8 W are the potential energies of the two configurations
(assuming the forces to form a conservative system), we have
TT = 2
and 8W=  2 (X 1 Bx 1 +Y l By 1 + Z^\
so that the value of the righthand member of equation (494) is SW.
We may now rewrite equation (494) in the form
8 (T W ) = j t Swi! (u^cc, + v^y, + wjzj.
This equation is true at every instant of the motion. Let us integrate it
throughout the whole of the motion, say from t = to t = r. We obtain
8 (\T W)dt= IZm^u^ + v^ + w^zJ ] (495).
Jo [_ Jt=o
The displaced motion has been supposed to be any motion which
differs only slightly from the actual motion. Let us now limit it by the
restriction that the configurations at the beginning and end of the motion
are to coincide with those of the actual motion, so that the displaced motion
is now to be one in which the system starts from the same configuration as in
the actual motion at time t = 0, and, after passing through a series of con
figurations slightly different from those of the actual motion, finally ends in
the same configuration at time t = r as that of the actual motion. Mathe
matically this new restriction is expressed by saying that at times t = and
t r we must have $x=Sy = 8z = for each particle. Equation (495) now
becomes
.(496).
546. Speaking of the two parts of the mechanism under discussion
as the " accessible " and " concealed " parts, let us suppose that the kinetic
and potential energies T and W depend only on the configuration of the
478 Dynamical Theory of Currents [CH. xvi
accessible parts of the mechanism. Then throughout any imaginary motion
of the accessible parts of the system we shall have a knowledge of T and W
at every instant, and hence shall be able to calculate the value of
T W)dt ....(497).
o
We can imagine an infinite number of motions which bring the system
from one configuration A at time t = to a second configuration B at time t = r,
and we can calculate the value of the integral for each. Equation (496) shews
that those motions for which the value of the integral is stationary would be
the motions actually possible for the system. Having found which these
motions were, we should have a knowledge of the changes in the accessible
parts of the system, although the concealed parts remained unknown to us,
both as regards their nature and their motion.
547. Equation (496) has been proved to be true only for a system con
sisting of discrete material particles. At the same time the equation itself
contains, in its form, no reference to the existence of discrete particles. It
is at least possible that the equation may be the expression of a general
dynamical principle which is true for all systems, whether they consist of
discrete particles or not. We cannot of course know whether or not this
is so. W T hat we have to do in the present chapter is to examine whether
the phenomena of electric currents are in accordance with this equation.
We shall find that they are, but we shall of course have no right to deduce
from this fact that the ultimate mechanism of electric currents is to be found
in the motion of discrete particles. Before setting to work on this problem,
however, we shall express equation (496) in a different form.
Lagranges Equations.
548. Let 15 2 , ... 6 n be a set of quantities associated with a mechanical
system such that when their value is known, the configuration of the system
is fully determined. Then 0,, 2 , ... 6 n are known as the generalised coordi
nates of the system.
The velocity of any moving particle of the system will depend on the values
of ^ , ~^~ , etc. Let us denote these quantities by 6 lt 2 , etc. Let x be a
Cartesian coordinate of any moving particle. Then by hypothesis x is a
function of B lt # 2 > ., say
so that by differentiation,
546548] Lagrange's Equations 479
Thus each component of velocity of each moving particle will be a linear
function of lf 2 , ..., from which it follows that the kinetic energy of motion
of the system must be a quadratic function of lf 2 , ..., the coefficients in this
function being of course functions of lt 2> ....
Let us denote T W by L, so that L is a function of lt 2) ...0 n ,
and of l} 2) ... n , say
L (j)(0 l) 2 , ... n , 0i, &2, 0n)
If L\L is the value of L in the displaced configuration l
... O n + S0 n , we have
_ .
/= X ... ^
(7C/! 017^ (7 17!
so that equation (496), which may be put in the form
f$ = 0,
Jo
now assumes the form
We have
fr / a/. ra ar, . \
Wfa**?^ 1 *)* 1 * (498) 
The last term vanishes since, by hypothesis, #, vanishes at the beginning
and end of the motion, and equation (498) now assumes the form
rJ9 rf^l
Jo i (d0 1 dt\d0J)
Let us denote the integrand, namely
90,
by /, so "that the equation becomes
The varied motion is entirely at our disposal, except that it must be
continuous and must be such that the configurations in the varied motion
480 Dynamical Theory of Currents [OH. xvi
coincide with those in the actual motion at the instants t = and t r.
Thus the values of 80! , 80 2 , ... at every instant may be any we please which
are permitted by the mechanism of the system, except that they must be
continuous functions of t and must vanish when t = and when t = r. Whatever
series of values we assign to 80 l} &0 2 , ..., we have seen that the equation
Idt =
o
is true. Hence the value of / must vanish at every instant, and we must
have
(499).
, dt\d0
549. At this stage there are two alternatives to be considered. It may
be that whatever values are assigned to &0 l} 80 2 , ... 80 n , the new configura
tion 0! + &6 l , 2 + $2> @n + 80 n , will be a possible configuration that is to
say, will be one in which the system can be placed without violating the
constraints imposed by the mechanism of the system. In this case equation
(499) must be true for all values of 8^, e># 2 , 80 n , so that each term must
vanish separately, and we have the system of equations
" ............ (5M) 
There are n equations between the n variables 1} 6^ ... 6 n and the time.
Hence these equations enable us to trace the changes in l} 2 , ... 6 n and to
express their values as functions of the time and of the initial values of
550. Next, suppose that certain constraints are imposed on the values of
OH Z , @n by the mechanism of the system. Let these be m in number,
and let them be such that the small increments BB lt 863, ... 80 n are connected
by equations of the form
0^ + o 2 80 a +...+a B S0 n = .......... ........ (501),
M#i + M# 2 + ... + &80 W = ................... (502),
etc.
Then equation (499) must be true for all values of 80 lf 80 2 , ... which are
such as also to satisfy equations (501), (502), etc. Let us multiply equations
(501), (502), ... by X, p, ... and add to equation (499).
We obtain an equation of the form
..H = ............ (503).
at Wj/ j
Let us assign arbitrary values to 80 m+l , S0 m+2 , ... 80 n , and then assign to
the m quantities B0 lt S0 2 , ... 80 m the values given by the m equations (501),
548551] Lagmnges Equations 481
(502), etc. In this way we obtain a system of values for B0 l} &0 2 , ... &0 n
which is permitted by the constraints of the system.
The m multipliers X, //., ... are at our disposal: let these be supposed to be
chosen so that the m equations
...... (504),
ou s dt
are satisfied. Then equation (503) reduces to
(gUxa, + /B 6. + ...J8*.= ............ (505),
dt \d0 8 '
and since arbitrary values have been assigned to B0 m+lt ... S0 n , it follows that
each coefficient in this equation must vanish separately. Combining the
system of equations so obtained with equations (504), we obtain the complete
system of equations
...... (506).
dv s
Lagranges Equations for Nonconservative Forces.
551. If the system of forces is not a conservative system, we cannot
replace the expression
in 545 by 8W where W is the potential energy. We may, however, still
denote this expression for brevity by }8 W], no interpretation being assigned
to this symbol, and equation (496) will assume the form
(BT{8W})dt = (507).
By the transformation used in 548, we may replace I BTdt by
Jo
Now {STF} is, by definition, the work done in moving the system from
the configuration l ,0 2) ... 6 n to the configuration 6 l + S# 1} 2 + &0 2 , . . . O n + 80 n .
It is therefore a linear function of 8^, 8# 2 , &&n, and we may write
where lt 2 , . .. n are functions of lt 2 , ... O n .
We now have equation (507) in the form
31
482 Dynamical Theory of Currents [OH. xvi
As before each integrand must vanish. We have therefore at every instant
w, <ft
If the coordinates 61, Z , ... n are a ^ capable of independent variation,
this leads at once to the system of equations
_ (,_i f 2 f ...n) ........... (508),
fcw 30.
while if the variations in 1} 2 are connected by the constraints implied
in equations (501), (502), ... we obtain, as before, the system of equations
= 1,2, ...)... (609).
The quantities lt 2 , ... are called the "generalised forces" correspond
ing to the coordinates 1} 2 , ....
Lagranges Equations for Impulsive Forces.
552. Let us now suppose that the system is acted on by a series of
impulsive forces, these lasting through the infinitesimal interval from t =
to t = T. If we multiply equation (508) by dt and integrate throughout this
interval, we obtain
ari*= T r^T.
 dt =
The interval r is to be considered as infinitesimal, and ^^ is finite.
ou s
Thus the second term may be neglected and the equation becomes
dT f T
change in  = I S s dt ..................... (510).
dO s J o
r
We call I s dt the generalised impulse corresponding to the generalised
./o
force 8 , and then, from the analogy between equation (510) and the equation
change in momentum = impulse,
7\ r r
we call  the generalised momentum corresponding to the generalised
dd s
coordinate 6 8 .
APPLICATION TO ELECTROMAGNETIC PHENOMENA.
553. We have already obtained expressions for the energy of an electro
static system, a system of magnets, of currents, etc., and in every case this
energy can be expressed in terms of coordinates associated with " accessible "
parts of the mechanism. We can also find the work done in any small change
in the system, so that we can obtain the values of the quantities denoted in
551555] Kinetic and Potential Energy 483
the last section by lt <8) 2 , All that remains to be done before we can
apply Lagrange's equations provisionally (cf. 547) to the interpretation of
electromagnetic phenomena is to determine whether the different kinds of
energy are to be regarded as kinetic energy or potential energy.
Kinetic and Potential Energy.
554. At first sight it might be thought obvious that the energy of
electric charges at rest and of magnets at rest ought to be treated as
potential energy, wbile that of electric charges or magnets in motion ought
to be treated as kinetic. On this view the energy of a steady electric
current, being the energy of a series of charges in motion, ought to be
regarded as kinetic energy. We have also seen that this energy is to be
regarded as being spread throughout the medium surrounding the circuit in
which the current flows, and not as concentrated in the circuit itself. Thus
we must regard the medium as possessing kinetic energy at every point, the
t/"2
amount of this energy being, as we have seen, ~ per unit volume.
But we have also been led to suppose that the medium is in just the
same condition whether the magnetic force is produced by steady currents or
by magnetic shells at rest. Thus, on the simple view which we are now
considering, we are driven to treat the energy of magnets at rest as kinetic
a result which is inconsistent with the simple conceptions from which we
started. Having arrived at this contradictory result, there is no justification
left for treating electrostatic energy, any more than magnetostatic energy,
as potential rather than kinetic.
555. Abandoning this simple but unsatisfactory hypothesis, let us turn
our attention in the first place to the definite discussion of the nature of the
energy of a steady electric current.
Let us suppose that we have two currents i, i f flowing in small circuits at
a distance r apart. As a matter of experiment we know that these circuits
exert mechanical forces upon one another as if they were magnetic shells of
strengths i, i'. Let us suppose that a force R is required to keep them apart,
so that initially the circuits attracted one another with a force R, but are
now in equilibrium under the action of their mutual attraction and this force
R acting in the direction of r increasing.
If M is the quantity 1 1 dsds', we know that the value of R is
. ., dM
R=^^ fr (oil),
this value being found directly from the experimental fact that the circuits
attract like their equivalent magnetic shells (cf. 499).
312
484 Dynamical Theory of Currents [CH. xvi
The energy of the two currents is known to be
E = (Li* + 2 Jfu v + JW S ) ..................... (512).
Let us suppose, for the sake of generality, that this consists of kinetic
energy T and potential energy W. Then, assuming for the moment that the
mechanism of these currents is dynamical, in the sense that Lagrange's
equations may be applied, we shall have a dynamical system of energy
T+W, and one of the coordinates may be taken to be r, the distance apart
of the circuits.
The Lagrangian equation corresponding to the coordinate r is found to
be (cf. equation (508)),
ddT\ d(TW)
and since we know that, in the equilibrium configuration,
d fdT\ ..,dM
T* (^ } = > R =  n * >
dt\drj dr
we obtain on substitution in equation (513),
W)_ ..,dM
~ l
From equation (512) we see that the righthand member is the value of
dE d(T+W) 3W
 , or or  ? . Hence our equation shews that = = 0, from which we
dr dr dr
deduce that W= 0. In other words, assuming that a system of steady
currents forms a dynamical system, the energy of this system must be
wholly kinetic.
This result compels us also to accept that the energy of a system of
magnets at rest must also be wholly kinetic. We shall discuss this result
later. For the present we confine our attention to the case of electric
phenomena only. We have found that if the mechanism of these pheno
mena is dynamical (the hypothesis upon which we are going to work), then
the energy of electric currents must be kinetic.
Induction of Currents.
556. Let us consider a number of currents flowing in closed circuits.
Let the strengths of the currents be i l} i 2 , ... and let the number of tubes of
induction which cross these circuits at any instant be N lt N 2 ,..., so that if
the magnetic field arises entirely from the currents, we have (cf. 503)
.(514).
etc.,
555, 556] Induction of Currents 485
The energy of the currents is wholly kinetic so that we may take
(515),
.) .................. (516),
as before ( 503).
In the general dynamical problem, it will be remembered that T was a
quadratic function of the velocities. Thus i lt i 2 , ... must now be treated as
velocities and we must take as coordinates quantities x lt # 2 , , defined by
Clearly x measures the quantity of electricity which has flowed past any
point in circuit 1 since a given instant, and so on. Thus in terms of the
coordinates x lt x 2 , ... we have
T=i(Ai*i 2 + 2A a A 1 A a +...) ..................... (517).
There is no potential energy in the present system, but the system is
acted on by external forces, namely the electromotive forces in the batteries
and the reaction between the currents and the material of the circuits which
shews itself in the resistance of the circuits. We have therefore to evaluate
the generalised forces lt 2 , ....
Consider a small change in the system in which x^ is increased by 8^, so
that the current ^ flows for a time dt given by ^dt^Sxi. The work per
formed by the battery is E^x^ the work performed by the reaction with the
matter of the circuit being equal and opposite to the heat generated in the
circuit, is R^dt. Thus if X l is the generalised force corresponding to the
coordinate x lt we have
X^Xi = EI$XI R^i^dt,
so that Xi = E l R^ .
The Lagrangian equation corresponding to the coordinate x l is
a fdT\ dT _
a*UJ~8^ 1J
o
or ^ (L^ + L l2 i 2 + ...) = E 1  JB^,
or again E l ^= R^ .
The equations corresponding to the coordinates x. 2) x 3 , ... are
Thus the Lagrangian equations are found to be exactly identical with the
equations of currentinduction already obtained, shewing not only that the
phenomenon of induction is consistent with the hypothesis that the whole
mechanism is a dynamical system, but also that this phenomenon follows as
486 Dynamical Theory of Currents [CH. xvi
a direct consequence of this hypothesis. In this system the accessible parts
of the mechanism are the currents flowing in the wires ; the inaccessible
parts consist of the ether which transmits the action from one circuit to
another.
Electrokinetic Momentum.
557. The generalised momentum corresponding to the coordinate x^ is
Thus the generalised momenta corresponding to the currents in the
different circuits are N l} N 2) ..., the numbers of tubes of induction which
cross the circuits. The quantity N! is accordingly sometimes called the
electrokinetic momentum of circuit 1, and so on.
Discharge of a Condenser.
558. As a further illustration of the dynamical theory, let us consider
the discharge of a condenser. Let Q be the charge on the positive plate
at any instant, and let this be taken as a Lagrarigian coordinate. The
current i is given by i ^ = Q. In the notation already employed
( 516) we have
and Lagrange's equation is
r (  j ^Q + ^77 = fit,
W +R 'dt + c ==0>
which is the equation already obtained in 516, and leads to the solution
already found.
Oscillations in a network of conductors.
559. The equations governing the currents flowing in any network of
conductors when induction is taken into account can be obtained from the
general dynamical theory.
Let us suppose that the currents in the different conductors are
hi Hi "in, and let the corresponding coordinates be # lf # 2 , ...x n , these
ri r/ y*
being given by i 1 = ~ ) etc. If any conductor, say 1, terminates on a
condenser plate, let x^ denote the actual charge on the plate, and let the
556560] Oscillations in a Network 487
dx
current be measured towards the plate, so that the relations ^ = ^ , etc.
will still hold. Let conductor 1 contain an electromotive force E l and be
of resistance R^.
The quantities as lj # 2 > ... may be taken as Lagrangian coordinates, but
they are not, in general, independent coordinates. If any number of the
conductors, say 2, 3, ... s meet in a point, the condition for no accumulation
of electricity at the point is, by Kirchhoff's first law,
from which we find that variations in # 2 , ac s , ... are connected by the
relations
&C 2 &E 3 ... &C g =0.
Let us suppose that there are m junctions. The corresponding con
straints on the values of &EJ, &r a , ... can be expressed by m equations of
the form
!&! f Oa&tfa + + G&W&CM = j
> .................. (518),
M<fei + M# 2 + ... 4 &n&** = )
etc., in which each of the coefficients Oj, a 2 , ... a n , 61, ... has for its value
either 0, +1 or 1.
The kinetic energy T will be a quadratic function of d! lt 2 > etc., while
the potential energy W (arising from the charges, if any, on the condensers)
will be a quadratic function of oc l , a? 2 , .... The dynamical equations are now
n in number, these being of the form (cf. equations (509)),
These equations, together with the m equations obtained by applying
Kirchhoff's first law to the different junctions, form a system of m + n equa
tions, from which we can eliminate the m multipliers X, /, ..., and then
determine the n variables x lt # 2 , ... x n .
560. As an example of the use of these equations, let us imagine that
a current / arrives at A and divides into two parts i l} i 2 , which flow along
arms AGE, ADB and reunite at B. Neglecting induction between these
arms and the leads to A and B, we may suppose that the part of the kinetic
energy which involves i\ and i" 2 is
488 Dynamical Theory of Currents [CH. xvi
There are no batteries and no condenser in the arms in which the
currents ^ and i, flow. The currents are, however, connected by the
relation
ii + is^I .............................. (520),
so that the corresponding coordinates x^ and x. 2 are connected by
The dynamical equations are now found to be (cf. equation (519)),
~(Z^ 1
If we subtract and replace i. 2 by /  ^ from equation (520), we eliminate
X and obtain
(L + N2M)^ t +(MN)^ = SI(RS)i L ...... (521).
If / is given as a function of the time, this equation enables us to deter
mine i lt and thence i 2 .
ose tha
ut 2=i
S(MN)ip
t .
For instance, suppose that the current / is an alternating current of
frequency p. If we put 2=i e ipt , the solution of equation (521) is
R (M L)ip
while similarly
(L + N ^ m)ip + ( R +S)
When p = 0, the solution of course reduces to that for steady currents.
As p increases, we notice that the three currents i lt i 2 and I become, in
general, in different phases, and that their amplitudes assume values
which depend on the coefficients of induction as well as on the resistances.
Finally, for very great values of p, the values of ^ and ^' 2 are given by
N M~~ LM~ L+N2M '
shewing that the currents are now in the same phase and are divided in a
ratio which depends only on their coefficients of induction. For instance,
if the arms ACB, ADE are arranged so as to have very little mutual
induction (M very small), the current will distribute itself between the
two arms in the inverse ratio of the coefficients of selfinduction.
It is possible to arrange for values for Z, M and N such that the two
currents i\ and i 2 shall be of opposite sign. In such a case the current in one
at least of the branches is greater than that in the main circuit. Let us, for
instance, suppose that the branches consist of two coils having r and s turns
560, 561] Rapidly alternating currents 489
respectively, and arranged so as to have very little magnetic leakage, so
that LNM 2 is negligible (cf. 525). We then have approximately
L_M_N
r' 2 rs s' 2 '
and equations (524) become
r s r
so that the currents will flow in opposite directions, and either may be greater
than the current in the main circuit. By making s nearly equal to r and
keeping the magnetic leakage as small as possible, we can make both
currents large compared with the original current. But when s = r exactly,
we notice from equations (524) that the original current simply divides itself
equally between the two branches.
Rapidly alternating currents.
561. This last problem illustrates an important point in the general
theory of rapidly alternating currents. In the general equations (519),
d T\ dT
let us suppose that the whole system is oscillating with frequency p, which
is so great that it may be treated as infinite. We may assume that every
variable is proportional to e ipt , and may accordingly replace ^ by the multi
plier ip. The equations now become
(520) '
and all the terms on the left hand may be neglected in comparison with the
first, which contains the factor ip. The terms on the right cannot legitimately
be neglected because X, //,, ... are entirely undetermined, and may be of the
same large order of magnitude as the terms retained. If we replace X, /JL, ...
by ip\' t ip/j,', ..., the equations become
7\T
. + X'a s + fib 8 + . . . = 0, etc.
in which X', //, ... are now undetermined multipliers. These, however, are
exactly the equations which express that T is a maximum or a minimum
for values of x 1} x 2 , ... which are consistent with the relations (cf. 559)
necessary to satisfy Kirchhoff's first law. Since T can be made as large as
we please, the solution must clearly make T a minimum.
Thus we have seen that
As the frequency of a system of alternating currents becomes very
490 Dynamical Theory of Currents [CH. xvi
great, the currents tend to distribute themselves in such a way as to make
the kinetic energy of the currents a minimum subject only to the relations
imposed by Kirchhoff's first law.
This result may be compared with that previously obtained ( 357) for
steady currents. We see that while the distribution of steady currents is
determined entirely by the resistance of the conductors, that of rapidly
alternating currents is, in the limit in which the frequency is infinite,
determined entirely by the coefficients of induction.
562. As a consequence it follows that, in a continuous medium of any
kind, the distribution of rapidly alternating currents will depend only on the
geometrical relations of the medium, and not on its conducting properties.
In point of fact, we have already seen that the current tends to flow entirely
in the surface of the conductor ( 537). We now obtain the further result
that it will, in the limit, distribute itself in the same way over the surface
of this conductor, no matter in what way the specific resistance varies from
point to point of the surface.
MECHANICAL FORCE ACTING ON A CIRCUIT.
563. Let 6 be any geometrical coordinate, and let be the generalised
force tending to increase the coordinate 6, so that to keep the system of
circuits at rest we must suppose it acted on by an external force . Then
Lagrange's equation for the coordinate 6 is
and therefore, since the system is in equilibrium, we must have
If the energy of the system were wholly potential and of amount W, the
force would be given by
Thus the mechanical forces acting are just the same as they would be if
the system had potential energy of amount T.
564. Let us suppose that any geometrical displacement takes place, this
resulting in increases 80 lt S# 2 , ... in the geometrical coordinates O l} # 2 , ..., and
let the currents in the circuits remain unaltered, additional energy being
supplied by the batteries when needed.
The increase in the kinetic energy of the system of currents is
561566] Magnetic Energy 491
while the work done by the electrical forces during displacement is
which, by equation (521), is also equal to
These two quantities would be equal and opposite if the system were a
conservative dynamical system acted on by no external forces. In point of
fact they are seen to be equal but of the same sign. The inference is that
the batteries supply during the motion an amount of energy equal to twice
the increase in the energy of the system. Of this supply of energy half
appears as an increase in the energy of the system, while the other half is
used in the performance of mechanical work.
This result should be compared with that obtained in 120.
565. As an example of the use of formula (521), let us examine the
force acting on an element of a circuit. Let the
components of the mechanical force acting on any
element ds of a circuit carrying a current i be de
noted by X, Y, Z.
To find the value of X, we have to consider a
displacement in which the element ds is displaced a
distance dx parallel to itself, the remainder of the
circuit being left unmoved. Let the component of magnetic induction
perpendicular to the plane containing ds and dx be denoted by N, then if
T denotes the kinetic energy of the whole system, the increase in T caused
by displacement will be equal to i times the increase in the number of
tubes of induction enclosed by the circuit, and therefore
dT = iNdsdx.
Thus, using equation (521),
and there are similar equations giving the values of the components T and Z.
If B is the total induction and if B cos e is the component at right angles
to ds, then the resultant force acting on ds is seen to be a force of amount
iB cos e ds, acting at right angles to the plane containing B and ds, and in
such a direction as to increase the kinetic energy of the system. This is a
generalisation of the result already obtained in 497.
MAGNETIC ENERGY.
566. We have seen that the energy of the field of force set up by a
system of electric currents must be supposed to be kinetic energy. We
know also that this field is identical with that set up by a certain system of
492 Dynamical Theory of Currents [OH. xvi
magnets at rest. These two facts can be reconciled only by supposing that
the energy of a system of magnets at rest is kinetic energy a suggestion
originally due to Ampere.
Weber's theory of magnetism ( 476) has already led us to regard any
magnetic body as a collection of permanently magnetised particles. Ampere
imagined the magnetism of each particle to arise from an electric current
which flowed permanently round a nonresisting circuit in the interior of the
magnet. The phenomena of magnetism, on this hypothesis, become in all
respects identical with those of electric currents, and in particular the energy
of a magnetic body must be interpreted as the kinetic energy of systems of
electric currents circulating in the individual molecules. For instance two
magnetic poles of opposite sign attract because two systems of currents
flowing in opposite directions attract.
We have seen that the mechanical forces in a system of energy E are
P) Tf r\ T?
^Q , etc., if the energy is potential, but are + ^ , etc., if the energy is
kinetic. It might therefore be thought that the acceptance of the hypothesis
that all magnetic energy is kinetic would compel us to suppose all mechan
ical forces in the magnetic system to be the exact opposites of what we have
previously supposed them to be. This, however, is not so, because accepting
this hypothesis compels us also to suppose the energy to be exactly opposite
in amount to what we previously supposed it to be. Instead of supposing
?> V
that we have potential energy E and forces ^ , etc., we now suppose that
7\ ( T?\
we have kinetic energy E and forces + ~^r^ etc., so that the amounts of
the forces are unaltered.
To understand how it is that the amount of the magnetic energy must be
supposed to change sign as soon as we suppose it to originate from a series
of molecular currents, we need only refer back to 502.
567. The molecular currents by which we are now supposing magnetism
to be originated must be supposed to be acted on by no resistance and by no
batteries, but if the assemblage of currents is to constitute a true dynamical
system we must suppose them capable of being acted upon by induction
whenever the number of tubes of force or induction which crosses them is
changed. In the general dynamical equation
d fiT\ _<M = E __ pj.
dt\dx) da
we may put E and R each equal to zero, and =  is already known to vanish.
Thus the equation expresses that ^ remains unaltered.
566568] Examples 493
We now see that the strengths of the molecular currents will be changed
by induction in such a way that the electrokinetic momentum of each remains
unaltered. If the molecule is placed in a magnetic field whose lines of force
run in the same direction as those from the molecule, then the effect of induc
tion is to decrease the strength of the molecule until the aggregate number
of tubes of force which cross it is equal to the number originally crossing it.
This effect of induction is of the opposite kind from that required to explain
the phenomenon of induced magnetism in iron and other paramagnetic sub
stances. It has, however, been suggested by Weber that it may account for
the phenomenon of diamagnetism.
568. Modern views as to the structure of matter compel us to abandon
Ampere's conception of molecular currents, but this conception can be
replaced by another which is equally capable of accounting for magnetic
phenomena. On the modern view all electric currents are explained as the
motion of streams of electrons. The flow of Ampere's molecular current may
accordingly be replaced by the motion of rings of electrons. The rotation
of one or more rings of electrons would give rise to a magnetic field exactly
similar to that which would be produced by the flow of a current of electricity
in a circuit of no resistance.
It is on these lines that it appears probable that an explanation of
magnetic phenomena will be found in the future. No complete explanation
has so far been obtained, for the simple and sufficient reason that the arrange
ment and behaviour of the electrons in the molecule or atom is still unknown.
REFERENCES.
On the general dynamical theory of currents :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, Part iv, Chaps, vi and vn.
On rapidly alternating currents :
J. J. THOMSON. Recent Researches in Electricity and Magnetism, Chap. vi.
On Ampere's theory of magnetism :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, Part iv, Chap. xxn.
EXAMPLES.
1. Two wires are arranged in parallel, their resistances being R and S, and their
coefficients of induction being L, M, N. Shew that for an alternating current of frequency
p the pair of wires act like a single conductor of resistance R and selfinduction L, given by
B
RS (R+ S) +p* {R (N M) Z +S (L  M ) 2 }
L
494 D\; & ~CH. xvi
2. A conductor of considerable cap*. rged through a wire of 
Dories of points alo: _   equal
conductors each of capa attached. Find an eq . :he periods
wire, and shew th ^sistance of the wire may lx
the equation may be written
2 ta: : wfc
3. A Wbeataton . \rrangem onipare the coefficient of m
induction Jf of :i L of a third coil. One
coils of the pair is placed in the batter
ranometer, an :n AD. The bridge is fir 
for steady curr Distances of AB, BC, CD, DA being then R^ R*, R^, R: the re
sistance of the shunt is alter
make and break of the battery circuit, and the  en R.
Prove
LR1
4. each containi:. .  ime natural freq::
when ..ce, are I: the mutual ind
betw^ r :uits is small, there will be in each : fundamental per:
oscillation given by
_ _
~ ~*~_ ^T~L.i
where f selfinduction, and Jf the coeffi
: mutual induction, of the cir
5. Let a network be formed of conductors A. B, ... arranged in any order. Prove
when a periodic electromotive force Fcospt is placed in A the current in B is the same in
amplitude and phase as the current is in A when an electromotive for  is placed
CHAPTER XVII.
DISPLACEMENT CCBREXTS.
GENERAL EQUATIONS.
569. OUE development of the theory of electromagnetism has been based
upon the experimental fact that the work done in taking a unit magnetic
pole round any closed path in the field is equal to 4rv times the aggregate
current enclosed by this path. But it has already been seen ( 534) that this
development of the theory is not sufficiently general to take account of
phenomena in which the flow of current is not steady: "the aggregate current
enclosed by a path" is an expression which has a definite meaning only when
the flow of current is steady. Before proceeding to a more general theory,
which is to cover all possible cases of current flow, it is necessary to deter
mine in what way the experimental basis is to be generalised, in order to
provide material for the construction of a more complete theory.
The answer to this question has been provided by Maxwell According
to Maxwell's displacement theory ( 171), the motion of electric charges is
accompanied by a i displacement " of the surrounding medium. The matin
produced by this displacement will be spoken of as a " displacementcurrent,''
and we have seen that the total flow which is obtained by compounding the
displacementcurrent with the current produced by the motion of electric
charges (which will be called the amdwctitmcmi i gal), will be such that the
total flow into any closed surface is, under all circumstances, zero. Thus if
are any two surfaces bounded by the same closed
path s, the total flow of current across S^ is the same as ^___ ^i__^^
the total flow, in the same direction, across &, so that ^ ^ > *
either may be taken to be the flow through the circuit
t, Maxwefffl theory proceeds on the supposition that
in any flow of current, the work done in taking a unit magnetic pole round *
lal to the total flow of current, including the displacementcurrent,
through s. The justification for this supposition is obtained as soon as it is
seen how it brings about a complete agreement between electromagnetic
theory and innumerable facts of observation.
570. Let us first put the hypothesis of the existence of displacement
currents into mathematical language. Let , r, tr be the components of the
496 Displacement Currents [CH. xvn
current at any point which is produced by the motion of electric charges, and
let this be measured in electromagnetic units. Let /, g, h be the compo
nents of displacement (or polarisation) at this point, this being supposed
measured in electrostatic units. Let any closed surface be taken, and let
/, m, n be the directioncosines of the outward normal to any element dS of
the surface. Then if E is the total charge of electricity enclosed by this
surface, we have, by Gauss' Theorem,
E ..................... (522).
Let us suppose that there are C electrostatic units of charge in one
electromagnetic unit. Then the total charge of electricity enclosed by the
p
surface, measured in electromagnetic units, is ^ , and the rate at which this
quantity increases is measured by the total inward flow of electricity across
the surface S, these currents of electricity being measured also in electro
magnetic units. Thus we have
(523).
7 P
Substituting for = its value, as found by differentiation of equation
dt
(522), we obtain
Now u, v, iv are the components of the conduction current, while
1 df 1 do 1 dh , T i
n j* > r>j+> n 777 are tne com P onen ts of the displacement current, both
dt O dt ttt
currents being measured in electromagnetic units. Thus
Idf Idg Idh
are the components of Maxwell's " total current " and equation (524) expresses
that the total current is a solenoidal vector (cf. 177) the fundamental fact
upon which Maxwell's theory is based.
571. The hypothesis upon which the theory proceeds is, as we have
already said, that the work done in taking a magnetic pole round any closed
circuit is equal to 4?r times the total flow of current through the circuit,
this current being measured in electromagnetic units. As in 533, this is
expressed by the equation
dx dy dz
OLT + p/ + r y T 
ds ^ ds ' ds
570573] Isotropic Conductor 497
in which the lineintegral is taken round the closed path, and the surface
integral is taken over any area bounded by this closed path. We proceed as
in 533, and find that equation (525) is equivalent to the system of equa
tions
Idh\_ dft_d
C dt) dx dy '
These are the equations which must replace equations (473) (475) in
the most general case of currentflow.
572. In addition we have the system of equations already obtained in
529, namely
da dZ 87
etc
dt dy dz '
in which all the quantities are expressed in electromagnetic units. If the
electric forces X, Y, Z are expressed in electrostatic units, we must replace
the right hand of this equation by
'dZ dY'
and the system of equations becomes
It^fS (529) '
1 db = SX _ <)Z_
C at dz dx
_ldc_dY _dX
Cdt'dx dy"
The set of six equations, (526) to (531), form the most general system of
equations of the electromagnetic field. In these equations u, v, w, a, b, c,
a, ft, 7 are expressed in electromagnetic units, while /, g, h, X, 7, Z are
expressed in electrostatic units.
EQUATIONS FOR AN ISOTROPIC CONDUCTOR.
573. In an isotropic medium we may put (cf. 128)
4?r df _ K dX
~c di~"c~di' e
The values of u, v, w are also given in terms of X, 7, Z by Ohm's Law. The
electric forces, measured in electromagnetic units (the components of force
J. 32
498 Displacement Currents [OH. xvn
acting on an electromagnetic unit of charge), will be CX, CY, CZ, so that we
have the relations
etc ............................... (532),
and equation (526) becomes
' ~ 7 , * f\ r
\ r C dt/ dy dz
Thus the present system of equations differs from that previously obtained,
in which the displacementcurrent was neglected, by the presence of the term
K dX
^ =. To form an estimate of the relative importance of this term, let us
examine the case of an alternating current in which the time factor is e ipt .
We may as usual replace  by ip t and equation (533) becomes
V r C r dy dz'
Thus neglecting the displacementcurrent amounts to neglecting the
ratio Kipr/4t7rC 2 . Clearly the neglect of this ratio produces the greatest
error in problems in which" r is large (conductors of high resistance) and in
which p is large (rapidly changing fields). On substituting numerical values
it will be found that in problems of conduction through metals, the neglect
of the factor Kiprl^irC* produces a quite inappreciable error unless p is com
parable with 10 15 i.e. unless we are dealing with oscillating fields of which
the frequency is comparable with that of lightwaves. Thus the effect of
the displacementcurrent in metals has been inappreciable in the problems
so far discussed, so that the neglect of this effect may be regarded as
justifiable. The matter stands differently as regards the problems to be
discussed in the next chapter, in which the oscillations of the field are
identical with those of lightwaves.
EQUATIONS FOR AN ISOTROPIC DIELECTRIC.
574. The equations assume special importance when the medium is
isotropic and nonconducting. There can be no conductioncurrent, so that
we put u = v = w = 0. We also put
4>7rf= KX, etc., a = /tot, etc.
The equations now become
^<OT = 87 _8/3\ ^ da _dZ dY\
C dt ~ dy fc\ " G ~di = lfy~ ~fo
KdY da dy\ p, d8 dX dZ
KdZ_ = d@_fa\ _*y_^_?*
G dt dx dyl ~C~dt~lte~l)y
573575] Isotropic Dielectric 499
Of these two systems of equations the former may be regarded as giving
the magnetic field in terms of the changes in the electric field, while the
latter gives the electric field in terms of the changes in the magnetic field.
We notice that, except for a difference of sign, the two systems of equations
are exactly symmetrical. Thus in an isotropic nonconducting medium
magnetic and electric phenomena play exactly similar parts.
The two systems of equations may be regarded as expressing two facts for
which we have confirmation, although indirect, from experiment. System (A)
expresses, as we have seen, that the lineintegral of magnetic force round a
circuit is equal to the rate of change (measured with proper sign) of the
surface integral of the polarisation, this rate of change being equal to 4n
times the total current through the circuit, while similarly system (B) ex
presses that the lineintegral of electric force round a circuit is equal to the
rate of change of the surface integral of the magnetic induction. These two
facts, however, are not independent of one another : the latter can be shewn
to follow from the former if we assume the whole mechanism of the system
to be dynamical in its nature. This might be suspected from what has
already been seen in 556, but we shall verify it before proceeding further.
575. Assuming the whole field to form a dynamical system, the kinetic
and potential energies are given by
W = Jt jjJK (X* + F 2 + Z*} dxdydz.
The quantities a, /3, 7 must fundamentally be of the nature of velocities :
let us denote them by , 77, , so that f , 77, f are positional coordinates, and we
have
giving the kinetic energy as a quadratic function of the velocities. The
motion can be obtained from the principle of least action, expressed by the
equation
 W)dt=Q.
We cannot, however, obtain the equations of motion until we know the
relation between the coordinates f, 77, f which enter in the kinetic energy,
and the coordinates X, Y, Z which enter in the potential energy. We shall
find that if we suppose this relation to be that expressed by equations (A),
then equations (B) will be obtained as the equations of motion.
322
500
Displacement Currents
[OH. xvn
576. Assuming that the magnetic coordinates f, ?;, f are connected with
the electric coordinates X, F, Z by equations (A), we have
= _ = _
C dt ~dy dz ~ dt\dy dz
so that on integration we obtain
except for a series of constants which may be avoided by assigning suitable
values to f, rj and f. Using equations (534), we have the potential energy
expressed as a function of f , 77 and f, and the kinetic energy expressed as a
function of j, 17 and , and may now proceed to find the equations of motion
by the principle of least action.
We have

so that
dxdydz
1 1 1 (S + 6877 + c) dxdydz,
As in 545, we suppose the values of Sf, 877, 8f all to vanish at the
instants = and = r, so that the first term on the right hand disappears.
We have also
C [[f^vft^ d&A irfi*% d ^\ rfiZv 9Sf\] ,
"fcjjrw^S^ F (w"^
on substituting the values of jOJT, etc., from equations (534). The volume
integral may be transformed by Green's Theorem, and we obtain
c
Collecting terms, we find that
fb dX dZ\z (c dY
+ (n + 3  o ^ + 7^ + o 
\C dz dxj \G dx
5
dy J J
..}dS.
576, 577] Isotropic Dielectric 501
Since the variations Sf , By, Sf are independent and may have any values
at all points in the field, their coefficients must vanish separately, and we
must have
a dZ 8F A
r< + ;s  ^ = 0, etc.
G dy dz
These are the equations which the principle of least action gives as the
equations of motion, and we see at once that they are simply the equations
of system (JB).
Homogeneous medium.
577. Let us next consider the solution of the systems of equations (A)
and (B) (of page 498) when p and K are constants throughout the medium,
and the medium contains no electric charges. From the first equation of
system (A), we have
G 2 dP ~dy \G dt dz \Cdt
and on substituting the values of ^ ~ and ^  from the last two equa
te at (j dt
tions of system (B), this equation becomes
dz fa
___ 3Z\
7/ 3^ 2 dx\dy dz ) '
Since the medium is supposed to be uncharged, we have
02V"
so that the last term may be replaced by + ^y , and the equation becomes
O 2 dt*
By exactly similar analysis we can obtain the differential equation satis
fied by F, Z, a, 0, and 7, and in each case this differential equation is found
to be identical with that satisfied by X. Thus the three components of
electric force and the three components of magnetic force all satisfy exactly
the same differential equation, namely
**>
where a stands for Cf'SSjL This equation, for reasons which will be seen
from its solution, is known as the " equation of wavepropagation."
502 Displacement Currents [CH. xvn
SOLUTIONS OF ^ = a 2 V 2 u.
Solution for spherical waves.
578. The general solution of the equation of wavepropagation is best
approached by considering the special form assumed when the solution u
is spherically symmetrical. If u is a function of r only, where r is the
distance from any point, we have
d 2 u a? d ( du\
 = a 2 V 2 u = T I r 2 = } ,
dt 2 r 2 dr \ dr)
which may be transformed into
jH=^? (535)>
and the solution is
where f and <> are arbitrary functions.
The form of solution shews that the value of u at any instant over a
sphere of any radius r depends upon its values at a time t previous over
two spheres of radii r at and r + at. In other words, the influence of any
value of u is propagated backwards and forwards with velocity a. For
instance, if at time t = the value of u is zero except over the surface of
a sphere of radius r } then at time t the value of u is zero everywhere except
over the surfaces of the two spheres of radii r at ; we have therefore two
spherical waves, converging and diverging with the same velocity a.
General solution (Liouville).
579. The general solution of the equation can be obtained in the
following manner, originally due to Liouville.
Expressed in spherical polars, r, 6 and <, the equation to be solved is
! d?u
Let us multiply by sin 6d6d$ and integrate this equation over the surface
of a sphere of radius r surrounding the origin. If we put
the equation becomes
i d*\ i d f a axx
a 2 dP~v*dr \ T dr)'
the remaining terms vanishing on integration. The solution of this equation
(cf. equation (536)) is
r .................. (538).
578, 579] Equation of Wavepropagation 503
For small values of r this assumes the form
X = \ [{/(at) + fc (a*)}  r {/' (at)  V (at)} + {/" (at) + 3>" (erf)} + . . .]
......... (539).
In order that X may be finite at the origin through all time, we must
have
f(at) + < (at) =
at every instant, so that the function <I> must be identical with /. On
putting r = 0, equation (539) becomes
and from equation (537), putting r = 0, we have
so that 4nr(tiV =2/ / (a) ........................ (540).
Equation (538) may now be written as
rX =f(at  r) f(at + r).
On differentiating this equation with respect to r and t respectively,
j(r\)=:f'(atr)f'(at+r),
HtW f'(atr)f(at + r),
and on addition we have
.
This equation is true for all values of r and t : putting t = 0, we have
as an equation which is true for all values of r. Giving to r the special
value r = at, the equation becomes
The left hand is, by equation (520), equal to 4<7r(u) r=0 . If we use u, u to
denote the mean values of u and u averaged over a sphere of radius at at
any instant, the equation becomes
(u) r=0 = ^ (tu t=0 ) + ^ =0 ..................... (541).
Thus the value of u at any point (which we select to be the origin) at
any instant t depends only on the values of u and u at time t = over a
sphere of radius at surrounding this point. The solution is of the same
nature as that obtained in 578, but is no longer limited to spherical waves.
504 Displacement Currents [OH. xvn
General solution (Kirchhoff).
580. A still more general form of solution has been given by Kirchhoff.
Let <E> and ^ be any two independent solutions of the original equation, so
that
dt* ~
By Green's Theorem (equation (101))
_ I! ( ^  ^
by equations (542). The volume integrations extend through the interior
of any space bounded by the closed surfaces S lt 8 2 , ..., and the normals to
8 lt $ 2 , are drawn, as usual, into the space. If we integrate the equation
just obtained throughout the interval of time from t = t' to t = + t", we
obtain
(543).
So far ^ has denoted any solution of the differential equation. Let us
now take it to be  F (r + at), this being a solution (cf. equation (536)) what
ever function is denoted by F, and let F (x) be a function of x such that it
and all its differential coefficients vanish for all values of x except x = 0, while
/:
Such a function, for instance, is F(x)=* Lt j\ ^ .
c=0 * (* + c )
We can choose if so that, for all values of r considered, the value of
r  at' is negative. The value of r + at" is positive if t" is positive. Thus
F (r + at) and all its differential coefficients vanish at the instants t = t" and
t = t', so that the righthand member of equation (543) vanishes, and the
equation becomes
Let us now suppose the surfaces over which this integral is taken to be
two in number. First, a sphere of infinitesimal radius r , surrounding the
origin, which will be denoted by S lt and second, a surface, as yet unspecified,
580] Equation of Wavepropagation 505
which will be denoted by S. Let us first calculate the value of the contribu
tion to equation (544) from the first surface. We have, on this first surface,
dn dr r 2 r
so that when r is made to vanish in the limit, we have
rr/^8^_^a
and therefore
47T
since the integrand vanishes except when t = 0.
Thus equation (544) becomes
_ r
(545).
T
Integrating by parts, we have, as the value of the first term under the
time integral,
't" ^ 9,,
t r r dn
t=t" rt" j fl r dQ
T f r _j_ at\ I
t=t' J t' ar d n dt
The first term vanishes at both limits, and equation (545) now becomes
3V=o = T^ M dS I F(r + at)\  j <l> ^ f  ] +  ~[ dt.
t=o 4?r JJ J f (ar dn dt dn \rj r dn)
We can now integrate with respect to the time, for F (r + at) exists only
at the instant t = . Thus the equation becomes
a
M*f  3>(i)+i r dS,
giving the value of $> at the time t = in terms of the values of 4> and <t>
taken at previous instants over any surface surrounding the point. The
506 Displacement Currents [OH. xvn
solution reduces to that of Liouville on taking the surface S to be a sphere,
a a
As with the former solutions, the result obtained clearly indicates propa
gation in all directions with uniform velocity a.
PROPAGATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES.
581. It is now clear that the system of equations
d 2 X ~
etc. obtained in 577 indicate that, in a homogeneous isotropic dielectric, all
electromagnetic effects ought to be propagated with the uniform velocity
C
This enables us to apply a severe test to the truth of the theory of
displacementcurrents. The value of C can of course be determined experi
mentally, and the velocity of propagation of electromagnetic waves can also
be determined. In air, in which K = fj, = l, these two quantities ought, if
the hypothesis of displacementcurrents is sound, to be identical.
For the value of C, the ratio of the two units, the following experimental
results are collected by Abraham *, as likely to be most accurate :
Himstead 30057 x 10 10
Rosa 30000 x 10 10
Abraham 2'9913xl0 10
Pellat 30092 x 10 10
J.J.Thomson 2*9960 X 10 10 Hurmuzescu 3'OOlOxlO 10
Perot and Fabry 2'9973 x 10 10 .
The mean of these quantities is
C = 30001 xlO 10 .
For the velocity of propagation of electromagnetic waves in air, the
following experimental values are collected by Blondlot and Guttonf.
Blondlot 3022 xlO 10 , 2'964xl0 10 , 2*980 x 10 10
Trowbridge and Duane 3003 x 10 10
MacLean 2991 IxlO 10
Saunders 2982 xlO 10 , 2997 x 10 10 .
The mean of these quantities is 2'991 x 10 10 .
Thus the two quantities agree to within a difference which is easily within
the limits of experimental error.
Both these quantities are equal, or very nearly equal, to the velocity
of light, and this led Maxwell to suggest that the phenomena of light
propagation were, in effect, identical with the propagation of electric waves.
* Eapports presentes au Congres de Physique, Paris, 1900. Vol. n, p. 267.
t I.e. p. 283.
580582] Units 507
Out of this suggestion, amply borne out by the results of further experi
ments, has grown the Electromagnetic Theory of Light, of which a short
account will be given in the next chapter. From an examination of different
experimental results, Cornu* gives as the most probable value of the velocity
of light in free ether
30013 '0027 x 10 10 cms. per second.
Dividing by 1 '000294, the refractive index for light passing from a vacuum
to air, we find as the velocity of light in air,
3'0004 + 0027 x 10 10 cms. per second.
This quantity, again, is identical, except for a difference which is well
within the limits of experimental error, with the quantities already obtained.
Thus we may say that the ratio of units C is identical with the velocity
of propagation of electromagnetic waves, and this again is identical with the
velocity of light.
UNITS.
582. We can at this stage sum up all that has been said about the
different systems of electrical units.
There are three different systems of units to be considered, of which two
are theoretical systems, the electrostatic and the electromagnetic, while the
third is the practical system. We shall begin by discussing the two
theoretical systems and their relation to one another.
In the Electrostatic System the fundamental unit is the unit of electric
charge, this being defined as a charge such that two such charges at unit
distance apart in air exert unit force upon one another. There will, of
course, be different systems of electrostatic units corresponding to different
units of length, mass and time, but the only system which need be considered
is that in which these units are taken to be the centimetre, gramme and
second respectively.
In the Electromagnetic System the fundamental unit is the unit mag
netic pole, this being defined to be such that two such poles at unit distance
apart in air exert unit force upon one another. Again the only system
which need be considered is that in which the units of length, mass and
time are the centimetre, gramme and second.
From the unit of electric charge can be derived other units e.g. of
electric force, of electric potential, of electric current, etc., in which to
measure quantities which occur in electric phenomena. These units will
of course also be electrostatic units, being derived from the fundamental
electrostatic unit.
* i.e. p. 246.
508 Displacement Currents [OH. xvn
So also from the unit magnetic pole can be derived other units e.g. of
magnetic force, of magnetic potential, of strength of a magnetic shell, etc.
in which to measure quantities which occur in magnetic phenomena. These
units will belong to the electromagnetic system.
If electric phenomena were entirely dissociated from magnetic phenomena,
the two entirely different sets of units would be necessary, and there could be
no connection between them. But the discovery of the connection between
electric currents and magnetic forces enables us at once to form a connection
between the two sets of units. It enables us to measure electric quantities
e.g. the strength of a current in electromagnetic units, and conversely we
can measure magnetic quantities in electrostatic units.
We find, for instance, that a magnetic shell of unit strength (in electro
magnetic measure) produces the same field as a current of certain strength.
We accordingly take the strength of this current to be unity in electro
magnetic measure, and so obtain an electromagnetic unit of electric current.
We find, as a matter of experiment, that this unit is not the same as the
electrostatic unit of current, and therefore denote its measure in electro
static units of current by (7. This is the same as taking the electromagnetic
unit of charge to be C times the electrostatic unit, for current is measured
in either system of units as a charge of electricity per unit time.
In the same way we can proceed to connect the other units in the two
systems. For instance, the electromagnetic unit of electric intensity will be
the intensity in a field in which an electromagnetic unit of charge experiences
a force of one dyne. An electrostatic unit of charge in the same field
would of course experience a force of ^ dynes, so that the electrostatic
measure of the intensity in this field would be ^. Thus the electro
magnetic unit of intensity is ~ times the electrostatic.
The following table of the ratios of the units can be constructed in
this way :
Ratios of Units.
Charge of Electricity. One electromag. unit = G electrostat. units.
Electromotive Force. = l/C
Electric Intensity. = l/C
Potential. =1/0
Capacity. = C*
Current. =C
Resistance of a conductor. = l/C 2
Strength of magnetic pole. = I/O
Magnetic Intensity. = C
582585] Electromagnetic Mass 509
583. The value of C, as we have said, is equal to about 3 x 10 10 in
c. G. s. units. If units other than the centimetre, gramme and second are
taken, the value of C will be different. Since we have seen that C represents
a velocity, it is easy to obtain its value in any system of units.
For instance a velocity 3xl0 10 in c.G. s. units = 6*71 xlO 8 miles per hour, so that if
miles and hours are taken as units the value of C will be 6'71 X 10 8 .
584. The practical system of units is derived from the electromagnetic
system, each practical unit differing only from the corresponding electro
magnetic unit by a certain power of ten, the power being selected so as to
make the unit of convenient size. The actual measures of the practical units
are as follows :
Practical Units.
Measure in
Measure in electrostatic units
Quantity Name of Unit electromag. units (Taking C = 3 x 10 10 )
Charge of Electricity Coulomb lO" 1 3 x 10 9
Electromotive Force }
Electric Intensity I Volt 10 8 ^
Potential
Capacity Farad 10~ 9 9 x 10 n
Microfarad 10~ 15 9 x 10 5
Current Ampere 1Q 1 3 x 10 9
Resistance Ohm 1C 9
9 x 10 11
ELECTROMAGNETIC MASS.
585. According to Maxwell's hypothesis of displacementcurrents, which
as we have seen is justified by experiment, the motion of any charge of
electricity is accompanied by "displacementcurrents" in the ether surround
ing the charge. There is consequently a certain amount of electromagnetic
energy in the ether surrounding the moving charge : it has been found that
this energy must be regarded as kinetic.
When a charged body, previously at rest, is set in motion, an electro
magnetic disturbance is created in the immediate vicinity of the charges, and
this disturbance, as we have seen, will spread through the ether with a
velocity C, equal to that of light, or about 3 x 10 10 cms. per second. If the
charged body moves with a velocity which is small in comparison with the
velocity of light, we may, to an approximation, treat the velocity of light as
infinite, and this is equivalent to supposing that the whole field adjusts itself
instantaneously to the motion of the charged body. In such a case we shall
have a displacementcurrent at every point in the ether, of which the in
tensity will be proportional to the velocity of the charged body, and will
depend in addition on the amount and distribution of the charge on the body.
510 Displacement Currents [OH. xvn
Let the charged body be supposed to be of mass m and to move with a
velocity v which is small compared with C, the velocity of light. The kinetic
energy of the motion of the mass is ^mv*. In addition to this, there is the
energy, which we have seen must be treated as kinetic, of the displacement
currents in the ether. Since the current at any point is proportional to v,
the total energy of the whole system of currents will be proportional to v 2 ,
say J Mv*, where M depends on the amount and distribution of the charge.
The total kinetic energy of the moving system is now seen to be
An analogy from hydrodynamics will illustrate the result at which we have arrived.
Suppose we have a balloon of mass m moving in air with a velocity v and displacing a
mass m' of air. If the velocity v is small compared with the velocity of propagation of
waves in air, the motion of the balloon will set up currents in the air surrounding it, such
that the velocity of these currents will be proportional to v at every point. The whole
kinetic energy of the motion will accordingly be
the term \m& being contributed by the motion of the matter of the balloon itself, and the
term \ Mv 2 , by the aircurrents outside the balloon. The value of M is comparable with m',
the mass of air displaced for instance if the balloon is spherical, the value of M is known
to be \vri (cf. Lamb, Hydrodynamics, 91).
586. Remembering that the whole motion of a system can be determined
from a knowledge of its energy alone, we see that the charged body we have
considered will move (so long as its velocity is small compared with that of
light), as though it were an uncharged body of mass m + M. . Thus there is
an apparent increase of mass produced by the charge on the body.
A numerical calculation will shew that even the most intense charge which
can be placed on a body by laboratory methods will result only in a quite
inappreciable apparent increase in mass. The case stands differently when
we consider the permanent charge of the electron. We have no accurate
knowledge of the size of the electron, but it can be shewn that if this is com
parable with 10~ 13 cms., then the apparent increase in the mass of the electron
is comparable with the total mass. The smaller the electron is that is to
say, the more concentrated its charge is the greater is the proportion of its
apparent mass which must be attributed to its electrification. As we review
in imagination the different possible sizes of electrons, we must at last come to
electrons so small that the whole of their apparent mass arises solely from
their electrification. The kinetic energy of such an electron in motion will
consist entirely of the electromagnetic energy of displacementcurrents set up
by the motion of the electric charge associated with the electron.
Since it is conceivable, and even probable, that all matter is composed of
electrons, we see that the hypothesis that all kinetic energy is electro
585587] Electromagnetic Mass 511
magnetic, has in it nothing which is impossible or improbable. This
hypothesis is one which can be directly tested by experiment, so that we
pass at once to a discussion of the experimental evidence bearing on this
question.
587. In our argument so far, we have considered the motion of a
charged body only when the velocity of motion is insignificant in comparison
with the velocity of light. The theory of the motion of charges moving
with a velocity comparable with that of light is beyond the scope of the
present book. From this theory, however, it appears, as might be expected,
that the kinetic energy of the displacementcurrents set up by an electron
moving with a velocity v comparable with that of light ((7), is not simply
proportional to v 2 , but is a more or less complicated function of v and of v/C.
The exact form of this function cannot be determined: it depends upon the
hypotheses which are made as to the distribution of charge on the electron
and the behaviour of the electron when in rapid motion.
Different hypotheses have been put forward by Bucherer, Lorentz, Einstein,
and Abraham, and the different hypotheses give rise to different formulae for
the kinetic energy of the motion. But on no hypothesis will this kinetic
energy be exactly proportional to v 2 except when v is small compared with G.
In the motion of the cathode particles we have electrons moving with
velocities comparable with that of light. It is possible to determine experi
mentally the momentum of these particles, and hence their energy, in terms
of their velocities. It is found that for velocities comparable with that of
light, the energy of motion is not proportional to v*.
Now if we had an exact knowledge of the structure and behaviour of the
electron, we ought to find that the energy of motion could be treated as the
sum of two parts, a part J mv 2 representing the energy of motion of the mass
(if any), and a part, not proportional to v 2 , representing the energy of the dis
placementcurrents. By comparing the theoretically calculated values of the
energy with those observed, it would be possible to ascertain the value (if
any) of the quantity m, the material part of the electron.
In point of fact none of the hypotheses which have so far been pub for
ward are found to account in a perfectly satisfactory way for the observed
values of the energy. But two hypotheses, namely those of Bucherer and
Abraham, account for these values to within a very small error. If we ignore
this error, and examine what value has to be assigned to m, to get the best
agreement, we find that this value has to be very small, if not actually zero.
It is therefore probable that if the true hypothesis as to the structure of the
electron was known, it would lead to a value of m which would be absolutely
zero. We should find that the whole energy of motion arose from the dis
placementcurrents in the ether. But at present, until the true hypothesis
is found, this must be regarded only as conjecture.
512 Displacement Currents [CH. xvn
588. To sum up, we may say that experiment makes it certain that a
large part of the mass of the electron is electromagnetic in its origin, and
makes it probable that the whole mass is of this nature. If so, it is natural
to suppose further that the mass of the carriers of positive electricity must
also be electromagnetic. Thus we may conjecture, with a good deal of
probability, that all mass is of electromagnetic nature, so that all kinetic
energy of material bodies can be explained as the electromagnetic energy
of displacementcurrents in the ether.
REFERENCES.
On displacementcurrents :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism. Part iv, Chap. ix.
J. J. THOMSON. Elem. Theory of Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. xm.
WEBSTER. Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. xni.
On Units:
WHETHAM. Experimental Electricity. Chap. vin.
J. J. THOMSON. Elem. Theory of Electricity and Magnetism. Chap. xn.
On Electromagnetic Mass:
J. J. THOMSON. Electricity and Matter. Chap, n, or The Corpuscular Theory
of Matter (1907). Chap. n.
W. KAUFFMANN. Sitzungsber. d. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 45. p. 949.
M. PLANCK. Phys. Zeitschrift, 1. p. 753.
CHAPTER XVIII.
THE ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY OF LIGHT.
VELOCITY OF LIGHT IN DIFFERENT MEDIA.
589. IT has been seen that, on the electromagnetic theory of light, the
propagation of waves of light in vacuo ought to take place with a velocity
equal, within limits of experimental error, to the actual observed velocity
of light. A further test can be applied to the theory by examining whether
the observed and calculated velocities are in agreement in media other than
the free ether.
According to the electromagnetic theory, if V is the velocity in any
medium, and J the velocity in free ether, we ought to have the relation
where K Q) /z refer to free ether.
For free ether and all media which will be considered, we may take //, = !.
Also if n is the refractive index for a plane wave of light passing from free
ether to any medium, we have from optical theory the relation
y = n >
so that, according to the electromagnetic theory, the refractive index of any
medium ought to be connected with its inductive capacity by the relation
I K
N K\~
One difficulty appears at once. According to this equation there ought
to be a single definite refractive index for each medium, whereas the pheno
menon of dispersion shews that the refractive index of any medium varies with
the wavelength of the light. It is easy to trace this difficulty to its source.
The phenomenon of dispersion is supposed to arise from the periodic motion of
charged electrons associated with the molecules of the medium, whereas the
theoretical value which has been obtained for the velocity of light has been
deduced on the supposition that the medium is uncharged at every point
( 577). It is only when the light is of infinite wavelength that the effect
of the motion of the electrons disappears. Thus according to the electro
j. 33
514
The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [OH. xvm
IK
magnetic theory the value of \ ^ ought to be identical with the refractive
index for light of infinite wavelength. Unfortunately it is not possible to
measure the refractive index with accuracy except for visible light.
IK
VK
590. In the following table, the values of \/ ^ are mean values taken
V J\.Q
from the table already given on p. 132 of the inductive capacities of gases.
The values of n refer to sodium light.
Gas
IK
Mean * / JT
V A
n (observed)
Authority
Mean n
Hydrogen
T000132
10001387
1000132
1
2
1 000135
Air
1 '000294
1 '0002927
1 000293
1
2
1 000293
Carbon Monoxide
1000346
1 '0003350
1
1 000335
Carbon Dioxide
1 000482
1 000449
1 000451
3
2
1000450
Nitrous Oxide . . .
1 000541
10005151
1 000503
1
3
1 000509
Ethylene
1 000692
1 000720
1 000678
1
2
1 000699
Authorities : 1. Mascart. 2. G. W. Walker (Phil. Trans. A. 201, p. 435).
3. Preston (Theory of Light, p. 137).
From this it will be seen that for these substances there is quite good
agreement between theory and experiment, in spite of the failure of the
theory to take all the facts into account. In the case of vapours the agree
ment is much less good, and for many solids and liquids there is no agreement
at all. For instance, the observed inductive capacity of water is 73'6 (see
p. 349), while the value of n is 1*33.
J
WAVES OF LIGHT IN NONCONDUCTING MEDIA.
Solution of Differential Equation for Plane Waves.
591. The equation of wave propagation
d 2 u _ 2
~di?~
has, as a particular solution,
(547),
provided / 2 + ra 2 + n 2 =l. This value of u is a complex quantity of which
the real and imaginary parts separately must be solutions of the original
equation. Thus we have the two solutions
u = A cos K (Ix + my + nz at) .................. (548),
u A sin K (Ix + my 4 nz at).
589592]
Nonconducting Media
515
Either of these solutions represents the propagation of a plane wave.
The directioncosines of the direction of propagation are I, m, n, and the
velocity of propagation is a. Usually it will be found simplest to take the
value of u given by equation (547) as the solution of the equation and reject
imaginary terms after the analysis is completed. This procedure will of
course give the same result as would be obtained by taking equation (548)
as solution of the differential equation.
Propagation of a Plane Wave.
592. Let us now consider in detail the propagation of a plane wave of
light, the direction of propagation being taken, for simplicity, to be the axis
of as. The values of X, Y, Z, a, ft, y must all be solutions of the differential
equation, each being of the form
u = Ae iK(x ~ at} (549).
The six values of X, Y, Z, a, ft, 7 are not independent, being connected
by the six equations of 574, namely
KdX
C dt
KdY_
G dt
KdZ
G dt
dy dz
dx
dy
> (A),
//, da
dz
dY
C~dt~
dy
" dz
fj,dft _
dX
dZ
G~di~
dz
dx
fjudy
dY
dX
G~dt =
dx
From the form of solution (equation (549)), it is clear that all the differ
ential operators may be replaced by multipliers. We may put
d d
1=1=0
dy dz
The equations now become
Ka v
Y =
c
Ka
Z=
(A'),
Since X = 0, a = 0, it appears that both the electric and magnetic forces
are, at every instant, at right angles to the axis of x, i.e. to the direction of
propagation. From the last two equations of system (A') we obtain
ftY+ryZ=0,
shewing that the electric force and the magnetic force are also at right angles
to one another.
332
516 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [OH. xviu
On comparing the results obtained from the electromagnetic theory of
light, with those obtained from physical optics, it is found that the wave of
light which we have been examining is a planepolarised ray whose plane of
polarisation is the plane containing the magnetic force and the direction of
propagation. Thus the magnetic force is in the plane of polarisation, while
the electric force is at right angles to this plane.
Conditions at a Boundary between two different media.
593. Let us now consider what happens when a wave meets a boundary
between two different dielectric media 1, 2. Let the suffix 1 refer to quanti
ties evaluated in the first medium, and the suffix 2 to quantities evaluated in
the second medium. For simplicity let us suppose the boundary to coincide
with the plane of yz.
At the boundary, the conditions to be satisfied are ( 137, 467):
(1) the tangential components of electric force must be continuous,
(2) the normal components of electric polarisation must be continuous,
(3) the tangential components of magnetic force must be continuous,
(4) the normal components of magnetic induction must be continuous.
Analytically, these conditions are expressed by the equations
K.X^K.X,, Y,= F 2 , Z, = Z 2 (550),
/>t 1 a 1 = ^ 2 a 2 , & = &, 71 = 72 (551).
It will be at once seen that these six equations are not independent : if
the last two of equations (550) are satisfied, then the first of equations (551)
is necessarily satisfied also as a consequence of the relation
_pda == dZ_dY
C dt~ dy dz
being satisfied in each medium, while similarly, if the last two of equations
(551) are satisfied, then the first of equations (550) is necessarily satisfied.
Thus there are only four independent conditions to be satisfied at the
boundary, and each of these must be satisfied for all values of y, z and t.
Refraction of a Wave polarised in plane of incidence.
594. Let us now imagine a wave of light to be propagated through
medium (1), and to meet the boundary, this wave being supposed polarised in
the plane of incidence. Let the boundary, as before, be the plane of yz, and
let the plane of incidence be supposed to be the plane of xy. Since the
wave is supposed to be polarised in the plane of incidence, the magnetic
592594]
Nonconducting Media
517
force must be in the plane of xy, and the electric force must be parallel to
the axis of z. Hence for this wave, we
may take x
ZZ'e*** n *' , ^
ft _ ft' QIK^X cos Oi+y sin e }  V l t)
R = Q'(>iKi(xcosO } +ys\nOi F, *) _
7 = 0,
and it is found that the six equations
(A), (B) of p. 515, are satisfied if we have
' ff Z'
(i)
sin 6 l cos d l
fr
K,
...(552).
FIG. 137.
The angle O l is seen to be the " angle of incidence " of the wave, namely,
the angle between its direction of propagation and the normal (Ox) to the
boundary.
Let us suppose that in the second medium, there is a refracted wave,
given by
X=F=0,
% Z" e iK * (x cos * + v sin *~ F 2 t} ,
ft = a" gi^ (xcosO^+y sin 2  V 2 t)
Q Q" e iK 2 (x cos 02 +y sin 6 2  F 2 ) ^
7 = 0,
where, in order that the equations of propagation may be satisfied, we must
have
a" " Z"
sn
cos
fa
V E
.(553).
It will be found on substitution in the boundary equations (550) and
(551) that the presence of an incident and refracted wave is not sufficient
to enable these equations to be satisfied. The equations can, however, all
be satisfied if we suppose that in the first medium, in addition to the incident
wave, there is a reflected wave given by
a _. ft'" e ix 3 (x cos 6 3 + y sin 3  VJ)
ft ft'" e iK 3 (x cos e 3 +y sin 3  F^
7 = 0,
518 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [CH. xvm
where, in order that the equations of propagation may be satisfied, we must
have
sin 3 cos
s / fo
VZ,
(554).
The boundary conditions must be satisfied for all values of y and t. Since
y and t enter only through exponentials in the different waves, this requires
that we have
KJ sin #j = tf 2 sin 2 = tt 3 sin 3 ..................... (555),
*iK =& =*K ........................... (556).
From (556) we must have K^ = /c s , and hence from (555), sm# 1
Since lt and O s must not be identical, we must have 0, = TT 6%. Thus
The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection.
We further have, from equations (555) and (556),
sin d
where n is the index of refraction on passing from medium 1 to medium 2,
so that the sine of the angle of incidence is equal to n times the sine of the
angle of refraction.
Thus the geometrical laws of reflection and refraction can be deduced at
once from the electromagnetic theory. These laws can, however, be deduced
from practically any undulatory theory of light. A more severe test of a
theory is its ability to predict rightly the relative intensities of the incident,
reflected and refracted waves.
595. The first boundary condition to be satisfied is the continuity, at
the boundary, of the ^components of electric force. Thus we must have
Z' + Z'" = Z" .............................. (558).
Similarly, the magnetic boundary conditions lead to the relations
) = /*>",
On substituting from equations (552), (553) and (554), these become
respectively,
2 Z'' ............ (559),
A / l cos 0, (Z'  Z'") = A /^ cos 2 Z" ............ (560).
/*! V /^ 2
From equation (557), equation (559) is at once seen to be identical with
equation (558), so that all the boundary conditions are satisfied if
594596] Nonconducting Media 519
For all media in which light can be propagated, we may take p = 1, so
that
cos 0. 2 sin #! cos 2 tan 6 l
IK,
~V 7T
___________ _ ............ (563).
L cos 6 1 sin # 2 cos 0^ tan 2
Thus the ratio of the amplitude of the reflected to the incident ray is
Z'" _ 1 u tan #2 tan 6 l sin (0 2 #1)
~ 1 + u ~ tan 2 + tan 0, sin (ft + 0,)" '
This prediction of the theory is in good agreement with experiment.
Zt"
This being so, the predicted ratio of ^ is necessarily in agreement with
^
experiment, since both in theory and experiment the energy of the incident
wave must be equal to the sum of the energies of the reflected and refracted
waves.
Total Reflection.
596. We have seen (equation (557)) that the angle 2 is given by
sin 2 =  sin O l ,
n
where n is the index of refraction for light passing from medium 1 to
medium 2. If n is less than unity, the value of  sin O l may be either
greater or less than unity according as ^ > or < sin" 1 n. In the former
case sin 2 is greater than unity, so that the value of # 2 is imaginary.
This circumstance does not affect the value of the foregoing analysis in a
case in which 6 > sin" 1 n, but the geometrical interpretation no longer holds.
Let us denote  sin 0j by p, and Vj 2 I by q. Then in the analysis we
n
may replace sin # 2 by p, and cos # 2 by iq, both p and q being real quantities.
The exponential which occurs in the refracted wave is now
iK 2 (x cos 9 2 +y sin 2 V^t)
Thus the refracted wave is propagated parallel to the axis of y, i.e.
normal to the boundary, and its magnitude decreases proportionally to the
factor e~ K * qx . At a small distance from the boundary the refracted wave
becomes imperceptible.
Algebraically, the values of Z' t Z" and Z'" are still given by equations (5b'l),
but we now have
u / K ^ cos ^ = j / K ^
v ft 2 ATi cos #! V jjb z K l
l cos #j '
so that u is an imaginary quantity, say u = iv, and, from equations (561),
Z^_ ^ \u = liv
Z' ~~
520 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [OH. xvm
1 iv
Since v is real, we have
1 + iv
= 1, so that we may take
where % = arg ~ =  2 tan 1 *.
In the reflected wave, we now have
y _ ym i*\ (  x cos 0, +y sin 0j  F!
_ y iit l (xcosOi+ysin0 1 Vi
 JLJ 6
Comparing with the incident wave, in which
17 r?' fceiteeostfi+yrin^FiO
Z = zj e ,
we see that reflection is now accompanied by a change of phase  2/e tan 1 t;,
but the amplitude of the wave remains unaltered, as obviously it must from
the principle of energy.
Refraction of a Wave polarised perpendicular to plane of incidence.
597. The analysis which has been already given can easily be modified
so as to apply to the case in which the polarisation of the incident wave is
perpendicular to the plane of incidence. All that is necessary is to inter
change corresponding electric and magnetic quantities : we then have an
incident wave in which the magnetic force is perpendicular to the plane of
incidence, and this is what is required.
Clearly all the geometrical laws which have already been obtained will
remain true without modification, and the analyses of 591 (total reflection)
will also hold without modification.
Formula (563), giving the amplitude of the reflected ray, will, however,
require alteration. We still have
but the value of u, instead of being given by equation (563), must now be
supposed to be given by
^ K, cos 2 #2
u T^ ~ rz~ >
K 2 /xj cos 2 ^
this equation being obtained by the interchange of electric and magnetic
terms in equation (562). Taking yu 2 = /^ = 1, we obtain
*i cos 2 sin 6 2 cos $2 si n 2$ 2
T 2 cos ^ sin 9 l cos ^ sin 2^ x '
whence, from equation (565), ^ ^ 2 ~ (566),
^ tan (#2 f ^)
giving the ratio of the amplitudes of the incident and reflected waves. This
result also agrees well with experiment.
596600] Metallic Media 521
598. We notice that if 1 + a =90, then Z'" = 0. Thus there is a
certain angle of incidence such that no light is reflected. Beyond this
angle Z'" is negative, so that the reflected light will shew an abrupt
change of phase of 180. This angle of incidence is known as the polarising
angle, because if a beam of nonpolarised light is incident at this angle,
the reflected beam will consist entirely of light polarised in the plane of
incidence, and will accordingly be planepolarised light.
It has been found by Jamin that formula (566) is not quite accurate
at and near to the polarising angle. It appears from experiment that a
certain small amount of light is reflected at all angles, and that instead of
a sudden change of phase of 180 occurring at this angle there is a gradual
change, beginning at a certain distance on one side of the polarising angle
and not reaching 180 until a certain distance on the other side. Lord
Rayleigh has shewn that this discrepancy between theory and experiment
can often be attributed largely to the presence of thin films of grease and
other impurities on the reflecting surface. Drude has shewn that the
outstanding discrepancy can be accounted for by supposing the phenomena
of reflection and refraction to occur, not actually at the surface between
the two media, but throughout a small transition layer of which the thick
ness must be supposed finite, although small compared with the wavelength
of the light.
WAVES IN METALLIC MEDIA.
599. In a metallic medium of specific resistance r, equations (A), namely
KdX_dy 8/3
C~dt"~dy~dz '
etc., must be replaced (cf. 573) by
G K d\ dy 8/3
(568) '
etc.
For a plane wave of light we can suppose the time to enter through
the complex imaginary e ipt and replace  by ip. Thus on the lefthand
of equation (567) we have ^ X, while on the lefthand of equation (568)
we have I  + T^) X. It accordingly appears that the conducting power
of the medium can be allowed for by replacing K by K 4 .
IjOT
600. In a nonconducting medium the differential equation
^^ = V X
522 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [CH. xvni
satisfied by each of the six quantities X, Y, Z, a, ft, 7, reduces for a wave of
frequency p to
1 *^u + V*u = 0.. ...(569).
L> "
For a conducting medium, replacing K by K \ : , we find that the
1J}T
differential equation becomes
(^^) + Vu0 ..................... (570).
For a plane wave propagated in a direction which, for simplicity, we shall
suppose to be that of the axis of x, the solution will be
where (a + W= __ ..................... (572).
Kestoring the timefactor e ipt , the solution (571) becomes
the negative sign in the ambiguity being taken so as to give propagation
parallel to the positive axis of x. Clearly this solution represents the propa
gation of waves having velocity p//3 and wavelength X given by /3 = 27r/X,
the amplitude of these waves falling off with a modulus of decay a per unit
length. From equation (572) we obtain, on equating imaginary parts,
so that, in terms of the wavelength X and frequency p, the modulus of decay
is given by
= # ................................. (573).
We see at once that for a good conductor a is large. Thus good
conductors are necessarily bad transmitters of light, so that transparent
substances (e.g. glass) are necessarily good insulators. The converse of thia
statement is not true opaque substances are not necessarily good conduc
tors, for other agencies, which have not been taken into account in the
present analysis, may interfere with the transmission of light.
601. Let us form an estimate of the magnitude of a by substituting
approximate numerical values in equation (573). For a wave of yellow light
in silver or copper we may take in c.G.s. units (remembering that r as given
on p. 331 is measured in practical units),
j = 3xl0 15 , ^=1, X = 6xlO 5 ,
T = 16 x 10~ 6 ohms = 16 x 10 3 (electromag.),
from which we obtain a = 11 x 10 8 .
600602] Metallic Media 523
Thus in x centimetres the decay in the amplitude is represented by a
factor e~ ax or e~ rixlofix , shewing that in a good conductor a wave of light
would be practically extinguished before traversing more than a small
fraction of a wavelength. This prediction of the theory is not borne out
by experiment (see below, 605).
Metallic Reflexion.
602. Let us suppose, as in fig. 137, that we have a wave of light inci
dent at an angle 6 l upon the boundary between two media, and let us suppose
medium 2 to be a conducting medium of inductive capacity K 2 '. Then (cf.
599) all the analysis which has been given in 590 593 will still hold if
we take K 2 to be a complex quantity given by
(574).
Since K 2 is complex, it follows at once that V 2 is complex, being given by
C' 2
V 2 
2 17" '
^2/^2
and hence that the angle # 2 is complex, being given (cf. equation (557)) by
(575).
22
The value of u is now given, from equation (562), by
2 _ K 2 yuj cos 2 2
~ JL K COS 2
( 5 76)
(cf. equation (575)) for light polarised in the plane of incidence. For light
polarised perpendicular to the plane of incidence, the value of u is found,
as before, by interchanging electric and magnetic symbols.
If we put u = a + i@, we have, as before (equation (565)),
If we put this fraction in the form pe 1 *, then the reflected wave is
given by
_ 7'J*i(a; cos fli
so that there is a change of phase K^ at reflection, and the amplitude is
changed in the ratio 1 : p. The electric force in the refracted wave is
accompanied by a system of currents, and these dissipate energy, so that
the amplitude of the reflected wave must be less than that of the incident
wave.
524 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [OH. xvm
We have ^"l+a + ^g'
so that P 2 = n v /Q2 = ^~~n v j52 (577),
shewing that p < 1, as it ought to be. Also
% = tan" 1 tan" 1 = tan" 1 ^ ^ .
603. Experimental determinations of the values of p and % have been
obtained, but only for light incident normally. For this reason we shall
only work out the analysis for the case of = 0. and we accordingly replace
equation (576) by the simpler equation
It is now a matter of indifference whether the light is polarised in or
at right angles to the plane of incidence ; indeed, it is easily verified that
the same values for p and ^ are obtained in either case.
Taking, for simplicity, the analysis appropriate to light polarised in the
plane of incidence, we have
, K, X'MF , .
it? j^ = jr~ + ~ W ........................ (578)
K^ K! tprJTi
from equation (574).
Since u  a + ift t this gives at once
2 /3* = ' .............................. (579),
604. Let us consider first the results as applied to light of great wave
length. In the limit when p is very small, a/3 is seen to be large in
comparison with a 2 /3 2 . Thus a becomes nearly equal to @, and the
numerical value of either is given by the approximate equations
<>
When a and ft are equal and large, equation (577) becomes
 ...(582).
a
Now if R denote the reflecting power of a metal, then the intensity of
reflected light corresponding to an intensity of 100 in the incident beam, is
100 B. Thus
100  R = 100 p 2
100200 J ..................... (583),
602605]
Metallic Media
525
by equations (581) and (582). For light of sufficiently long wavelength, this
relation ought to give the value of the optical quantity 100  R in terms of
the wavelength and the electrical constants of the metals.
An extremely important series of experiments have been conducted by
Hagen and Rubens* to test the truth of the formula for light of great wave
length. The following table will illustrate the results obtained! :
100 R
for X = 12,u,
Metal
observed
calculated
Silver
115
T3
Copper
1*6
14
Gold
21
1*6
Platinum
Nickel
Steel
35
41
49
35
36
4.7
Bismuth
Patent Nickel P
M
Constantin
Rosse's alloy ...
Brande's and Schiinemann's alloy
178
57
70
60
71
91
115
54
62
7'4
73
86
In the calculated values, the value of K is assumed to be unity, and an
error is of course introduced from the fact that the wavelength dealt with,
\ = 12/j,, although large is still finite. The authors say: "Excepting the
values given for bismuth, the agreement is good, particularly when we con
sider that the numbers calculated from formula [583] are absolute values and
do not contain any arbitrary coefficient." A series of experiments with light
of the still longer wavelength A.= 25'5/A shewed an even better agreement
between theory and observation.
605. When we pass to experiments with light in which the waveleugth
cannot be treated as large, the values given by theory for the various optical
quantities are not in good agreement with those observed experimentally.
Drude has conducted a series of determinations of the optical constants of
metals, which shews very clearly the discrepancy between experiment and
the theory which we have given. The requisite modification of the theory
is also due to Drude. Our theory has treated the metallic medium as
uncharged, and so has taken no account of the presence of moving electrons
inside the conductor. As soon as the motion of these electrons is taken
into account, theory arid experiment are reconciled, not only with respect to
this discrepancy, but with respect also to that mentioned in 601. In the
following sections ( 606 609) we shall give a brief statement of the
* Annalen der Physik, 11, p. 873 ; Phil. Mag. 7, p. 157.
t Phil. Mag. 7, p. 168.
526 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [OH. xvin
requisite extension of the theory. The reader who wishes to study the
matter more fully is referred to treatises on Physical Optics*.
606. Our analysis has so far treated a current in a conductor as con
tinuous in space. In point of fact we believe the current to be made up of
the separate currents produced by the motion of discrete electrons. The
motion of each electron will have associated with it a system of " displace
ment" currents, and if the velocity of each electron is supposed small
compared with the velocity of light, then the whole system of currents will
be determined as soon as the velocities of the individual electrons are known
(cf. 585).
Taking the displacementcurrents into account, the whole system may be
supposed made up of a system of closed currents i 1} i z , .... The electro
kinetic energy is, as usual, of the form
T=t(L u i l *+2l l9 i l i t +...) (584).
Let u lt v lt Wi\ u 2 , v a , w 2 ; etc., be the components of velocity of the
different electrons. Then each of the currents i l} i. 2) ... will be a linear
function ofu lt v lt w ly u 2 , v 2 , w 2 ,..., and the value of T given by equation (584)
will be a quadratic function of these quantities. Thus we must have
T=^(a n u 1 2 + b u v l 2 +c ll w l 2 + ... + 2a M tt 1 w a +...) (585),
where the coefficients a u , 6 U , a 12) ... depend on the structure and positions of
the electrons.
In a metallic conductor we believe the moving electrons to be at distances
apart which are great compared with their linear dimensions. Let us con
sider the extreme case in which the distances apart are infinite in comparison
with the linear dimensions of the electrons. In this case we may consider
that each electron is attended by its own system of displacementcurrents,
and that there is no interaction between the systems associated with the
different electrons. Thus equation (585) assumes the limiting form
T=i?ii(tt 1 +t; 1 + w 1 a + M a a +...) (586),
since the coefficients of each of the terms u? t v^, wf, u, . . . , must clearly
be all the same from symmetry. Clearly also the coefficient m, on the
hypothesis of electromagnetic mass ( 588), must be the mass of the electron.
As the linear dimensions of the electron are imagined to decrease, the
intensity of the field at and near the surface of the electron will increase, so
that the quantity m will increase. If we consider the changes in the expres
sion on the righthand of equation (585) as the dimensions of the electrons
are imagined to decrease, while their distances apart remain unaltered, we
see that the coefficients a u , b n , ... will increase, while the coefficients a 12 , ...
* For instance Drude's Optik, or Schuster's Theory of Optics.
605608] Metallic Media 527
remain approximately unaltered. Finally, the values of a u , 6 n , ... become
so great that the equation assumes the limiting form (586). Thus the
supposition that the current may be treated as uniformly distributed through
the conductor the supposition on which our analysis has so far proceeded
has led us to undervalue the electrokinetic energy of the current by an
amount
2wi O 2 + y 2 + w~) ........................... (587),
where m is the mass of an electron, and the summation extends over all the
electrons which carry the current.
607. We have to consider next how to modify our equations so as to
take account of this additional term in the kinetic energy.
Let us suppose that in a unit volume of the conductor the current is
carried by N electrons, each of mass m and carrying a charge e. For
simplicity, suppose that the electrons all move with an equal velocity u
parallel to Osc. The current i is then parallel to Ox and is given by
i = Neu ................................. (588).
Let X be the aggregate electromotive force in the conductor given by
our former equations. Then the electrons in unit volume are acted on by a
force XNe. On our former theory, this force is just balanced by a force
arising from the resistance of the conductor. This force must accordingly be
of amount riNe, for on balancing these two forces we obtain
XNe riNe = Q ........ . ..................... (589),
which is .equivalent to Ohm's Law. By D'Alembert's principle, the extra
term
which we are now supposing to exist in the electrokinetic energy of the
electrons, can be allowed for by replacing equation (589) by
XNe  riNe  ~ (Nmu) = 0,
and this again, by equation (588), is equivalent to
. m di
/rm\
(090) '
Thus the required correction consists in replacing r by
m d
608. Returning to the analysis of 599, in which we were considering
the propagation of a plane wave of frequency p, we see that if K' is the true
value of the inductive capacity, we may suppose the equations of wave
528 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [CH. xvm
propagation in a dielectric to apply, provided we now replace K' by a
quantity K given by (cf. equation (574))
m
or, separating real and imaginary parts,
Using this value for K instead of that previously used ( 602), it is found
that the experiments referred to in 605 can be made to agree well with
theory by giving a suitable value to ^. The quantities m and e are
already known, but N is not. Thus these experiments give us the value of
N. Schuster* finds that N is comparable with the number of molecules per
unit volume in the metal.
On substituting numerical values, it is found that for visible light the
(wi \ 2
~\Tz P] * n ^ e Denominator in equation (591) is large in comparison
with the term p 2 r 2 , instead of being negligible, as our former analysis
assumed it to be. There is now no difficulty in understanding why the
former analysis led to erroneous results. We see that for waves having the
frequency of lightwaves, the resistance of the conductor, regarded as an
agency checking the free tiow of currents, is insignificant in comparison with
the inertia of the electrons.
609. A further phenomenon has to be taken into account before the
theory gives a completely satisfactory account of metallic reflexion. We
have already considered the motion of the free electrons in the metal, which
carry the current : it is necessary also to consider the motion of the electrons
inside the molecules, which perform oscillations under the influence of the
waves of light. This part of the subject is beyond the scope of the present
work : the reader who studies the matter will find that this phenomenon is
capable of removing the difficulties which remain in the way of a satisfactory
electromagnetic explanation of metallic reflexion.
CRYSTALLINE DIELECTRIC MEDIA.
610. In all media in which light can be propagated, the magnetic per
meability //, may be supposed equal to unity. Let us consider the propagation
of light, on the electromagnetic theory, in a crystalline medium in which the
ratio of the polarisation to the electric force is different in different directions.
* Phil. Mag. 7, p. 151.
608610] Crystalline Media 529
By equation (92), the electric energy W per unit volume in such a medium
is given by
n ...... .
If we transform axes, and take as new axes of reference the principal axes
of the quadric
K u a? + 2K u xy+ ...... = 1 ..................... (592),
then the energy per unit volume becomes
W = ~ (K,X* + K, F 2 + K,Z>\
oTT
where K lt K 2 , K 3 are the coefficients which occur in the equation of the
quadric (592) when referred to its principal axes. The components of polari
sation are now given by (cf. equations (89)),
47r/ = K, X, 47r<7 = ^ 2 F, Mi = K S Z.
The equations of propagation (putting p 1) now become
= _ = ____
C dt ~~dy dz C dt dy 'dz
K*dY_fa__ty\ ld^_d^_dZ
~G ~dt " dz dx f ' C~dt~dz dx
K 1 dZ = d/3_da\ 1^I = ^Z_^
G dt ~ dx dy) C dt ~ dx dy
If we differentiate the first system of equations with respect to the time,
and substitute the values of yr , yr , ~ from the second system as before,
dt at at
we obtain

l a \ X ^ + ^ + ^ , etc.
dt' dx\dx dy dzj
On assuming a solution in which X, F, Z are proportional to
e u(lx+my+nzVt)
these equations become
K,X = Xl(lX + mFf nZ) = 0, etc.
On eliminating X, Y and Z from these three equations, we obtain
8 *
4
O 2
If we put j= = vf, etc., and simplify this becomes
This equation gives the velocity of propagation Fin terms of the direction
cosines I, m, n of the normal to the wavefront. The equation is identical
j, 34
530 The Electromagnetic Theory of Light [CH. xvm
with that found by Fresnel to represent the results of experiment. It can be
shewn that the corresponding wavesurface is the wellknown Fresnel wave
surface, and all the geometrical phenomena of the propagation of light in a
crystalline medium follow directly. For the development of this part of the
theory, the reader is referred to books on physical optics.
Assuming that a, j3, 7 as well as X, Y, Z are proportional to the exponen
tial (593), the original system of equations become
^ X = my nft, etc (594),
o
~~a. = mZnY, etc (595).
If we multiply the three equations of system (594) by I, m, n respectively
and add, we obtain
while a similar treatment of equations (592) gives
lcL + m@+ny = Q (597).
From equation (596) we see that the electric polarisation is in the wave
front. From equation (597), the magnetic force also is in the wavefront.
From this point onwards the development of the subject is the same on
the electromagnetic as on any other theory of light.
MECHANICAL ACTION.
Energy in Lightwaves.
611. For a wave of light propagated along the axis of Ox, and having
the electric force parallel to Oy, we have (cf. 592) the solution
X=Z=0; Y=Y cos K (xat),
a. = y9 = 0; 7 = y cos K (x at),
and this satisfies all the electromagnetic equations, provided the ratio of 70 to
F is given by
7o Ka C /K
The energy per unit volume at the point x is seen to be
~(KY* + rf) = (KY* + f J , y( ?) C os* f c(a ; at) ...... (599).
From equation (598) we see that the electric energy is equal to the mag
netic at every point of the wave. The average energy per unit volume,
obtained by averaging expression (599) with respect either to x or to t,
_
8?r STT
610612] Mechanical Action 531
As Maxwell has pointed out*, these formulae enable us to determine the
magnitude of the electric and magnetic forces involved in the propagation of
light. According to the determination of Langley, the mean energy of sun
light, after allowing for partial absorption by the earth's atmosphere, is
43 x 10~ 5 ergs per unit volume. This gives as the maximum value of the
electric intensity,
Y Q = '33 c.G.s. electrostatic units
= 9'9 volts per centimetre,
and, as the maximum value of the magnetic force,
<y = 033 C.G.s. electromagnetic units,
which is about onesixth of the horizontal component of the earth's field in
England.
The Pressure of Radiation.
612. In virtue of the existence of the electric intensity Y, there is in free
KY*
ether ( 165) a pressure ^ at right angles to the lines of electric force.
Thus there is a pressure per unit area over each wavepoint. Similarly
the magnetic field results ( 471) in a pressure of amount ^ per unit area.
Thus the total pressure per unit area
 cos 2 K(X at).
8?r STT
This is exactly equal to the energy per unit volume as given by expression
(599). Thus we see that over every wavefront there ought, on the electro
magnetic theory, to be a pressure of amount per unit area equal to the energy
of the wave per unit volume at that point. The existence of this pressure
has been demonstrated experimentally by Lebedewf and by Nichols and HullJ,
and their results agree quantitatively with those predicted by Maxwell's
Theory.
* Maxwell, Electricity and Magnetism (Third Edition), 793.
t Annalen der Physik, 6, pp. 433458.
J Amer. Phys. Soc. Bull. 2, pp. 2527, and Phys. Rev. 13, pp. 307320.
REFERENCES.
On the Electromagnetic Theory of Light, and Physical Optics :
MAXWELL. Electricity and Magnetism, Vol. n, Part iv, Chap. xx.
SCHUSTER. Theory of Optics (Arnold, London, 1904).
DRUDE. Theory of Optics (translation by Mann and Millikan) (Longmans,
Green and Co., 1902).
WOOD. Physical Optics (Macmillan, 1905).
INDEX.
The numbers refer to the pages.
Action at a distance, 138, 430, 432
,, mechanical, in propagation of light, 530
,, see also mechanical force
,, principle of least, 477, 499
Alternating currents, induction of, 446, 453,
488
,, ,, induction of in con
tinuous media, 467
Amber, electrification of, 1
Ampere, theory of magnetism, 3, 492, 493
Angle of conductor, lines of force near, 61
Anisotropic dielectrics, 133, 1